Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 888

MVT21GB

Chapter
BEFORE YOU START
1 USING VT STUDIO
Chapter
SCREENS &

Design Tool for Touch Panel Displays 2 WINDOWS


Chapter

VT STUDIO Ver. 7 3 FILES & PRINTING

Chapter

VT3 Series 4 EDIT

Chapter

5 DISPLAY

Reference Manual Chapter


BEFORE YOU START
6 SETTING PARTS
Chapter
SETTING GRAPHICS &
• Descriptions of VT3 series programming 7 TEXT
Chapter
SETTING SWITCHES &
8 LAMPS
Chapter
SETTING
9 BASIC PARTS
Chapter
SETTING METERS &
10 IMAGES
Chapter

11 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Chapter

12 RESOURCE

Chapter
COMMUNICATION
13 BETWEEN PC & VT3
Chapter
SYSTEM MEMORY
14 AREA
Chapter

15 PLC DATA FOLDER

Chapter

16 WORKSHEET

Chapter
ETHERNET
17 CONNECTION
Chapter

18 LADDER MONITOR

Error Message Lists


List of Shortcut Key Commands
About Unusable Characters
Preface
This manual describes the functions, settings configurations and precautions for VT STUDIO.
Read carefully before use to fully utilize the features of Touch Panel Display VT3 Series* and performance of VT
STUDIO. Keep handy for future reference.
The Touch Panel Display VT3 Series User Manual consists of this Manual and the following manuals intended for use
together.
* To use Touch Panel Display VT5 Series, refer to VT5 Series Reference Manual.
Name Description
Describes the operation of VT STUDIO and the screen rendering methods used by
VT5 Series Reference Manual
the program when VT5 Series Touchscreen Display is used.
This manual. Describes the operation of VT STUDIO and the screen rendering
VT3 Series Hardware Manual
methods used by the program when VT3 Series Touchscreen Display is used.
This manual describes how to install and configure hardware for the VT5 Series
VT5 Series Hardware Manual
Touchscreen Display.
This manual describes how to install and configure hardware for the VT3 Series
VT3 Series Hardware Manual
Touchscreen Display.
This manual describes how to connect and configure the VT5 Series/VT3 Series
VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series
Touchscreen Display and the DATA STORAGE TERMINAL DT SERIES with PLCs
PLC Connection Manual
manufactured by other vendors.
VT Transfer Tool User's Manual This manual describes how to install, operate and set up VT Transfer Tool.
* All of the above manuals are available on the VT STUDIO DVD.
Symbols
This Manual uses the following symbols to alert you to important information. Be sure to read these.

DANGER Failure to observe this item causes a risk that consequently results in death or serious injury.

WARNING Failure to observe the items mentioned may result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION Failure to observe the items mentioned may result in medium or minor injury.

NOTICE Failure to observe this item may cause damage to the product itself as well to other property.

Important Notes on operations that are always performed

Point Cautions on operations that are often performed incorrectly.

Here are listed items further enriching the understanding of the main text, and the information useful to
Reference
know.

Page or manual providing related information

Request
(1) No part of this instruction may be reprinted or reproduced without the prior written permission of KEYENCE CORPORATION.
(2) The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
(3) In case any doubt, error or miss is found in this manual, please call the telephone number recorded on the back
of this manual.
(4) Note that KEYENCE CORPORATION shall not be liable for any influence resulting from operation of the VT
series regardless of item (3) above.
(5) We shall replace any missing or incorrectly collated pages.

• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation of the United States.


• Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
• AutoCAD and DXF are registered trademarks of USA-based Autodesk Inc.
• Other company names, product names, and model names used in this manual are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
• UNLHA32. DLL are public domain software made by Micco.
Safety Precautions
General Precautions
• At startup and during operation, be sure to monitor the functions and performanceof the VT3 series.
• We recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any damage in the event that a problem
occurs.
• Do not modify the VT3 series or use it in any way other than described in thespecifications. The functions and
performance of products used or modified in thisway cannot be assured.
• When the VT3 series is used in combination with other instruments, functions and performance may be degraded,
depending on operating conditions and the surrounding environment.
• Do not subject instruments including peripheral devices to sudden changes in temperature. Doing so might cause
condensation which may cause the instrument or device to malfunction.
• Mount the VT3 as far away as possible from power lines or high-voltage lines. Noise from power lines and high-
voltage lines may cause the VT3 to malfunction.

Do not use the touch panel (touch switches), cross-key pads or push-button switches on the
switch unit to make switches that may affect human life or lead to product damage. Also,
WARNING design a system that is adaptable to touch panel (touch switches), cross-key pad or push-
button switches on the switch unit malfunction.

• Do not touch the touch panel or touch switches with a sharp-pointed object such as a pen
or screwdriver. Doing so might scratch the touch panel or touch switches or cause them to
malfunction.
• Do not subject the touch panel (touch switches), cross-key pad or push-button switches on
the switch unit to shock or impact, or touch them with more than necessary force.
NOTICE Doing so might damage them.
• Never wipe the display with paint thinner or organic solvents. Doing so might damage the
display. When wiping the display, use a soft cloth moistened with watered down neutral
detergent.
• Do not copy copyrighted fonts and image data onto this unit for use as this infringes on the
copyright.

About CE Marking and UL Approval


For details on precautions for CE marking, and for UL Approval, refer to the "VT3 Series Hardware Manual".

1509EManual (VT3 Series) -


- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference 1
Software License Agreement
NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS
"AGREEMENT") CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY PORTION OF THE [VT STUDIO] (THIS
"SOFTWARE"), YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITONS OF
THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ANY TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT
USE THIS SOFTWARE.

1. Definition
1.1 "use" or "using" means to access, install, download, copy, or otherwise benefit from using the
functionality of This Software.
1.2 "This Software" means the software and all associated documentation provided by KEYENCE.

2. Grant of License.
Conditioned upon compliance with all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, KEYENCE
grants you a nonexclusive and nontransferable license to install this Software on all computers used
in a single business address (factory, division, office) in order to use the KEYENCE product. You will
require user registration to use the software. Without registration, only one license is available for
one computer. You may make one copy of this Software for backup or archive purposes only.

3. Restrictions.
3.1 Other than installation of updates or new functions provided by KEYENCE, you may not modify
or add any functions to This Software.
3.2 You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble This Software.
3.3 You may not create derivative works based on This Software.
3.4 Other than expressly stated by KEYENCE, you may not resell, retransfer, rent or otherwise
redistribute this Software to any third parties.

4. Intellectual Property Rights.


Except as expressly stated herein, KEYENCE reserves all right, title and interest in this Software,
and all associated copyrights, trademarks, and other intellectual property rights therein.

5. Disclaimer.
Keyence is licensing this Software to you "AS IS" and without any warranty of any kind.
In no event will KEYENCE or its suppliers be liable to you for any damages, claims, costs or any lost
profits caused by using this Software.

6. Termination.
6.1 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically if you destroy this Software and
the copy of this Software in your possession or voluntarily return this Software to us.
6.2 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically without any notice from
KEYENCE if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Promptly
upon termination, you shall cease all use of this Software and destroy all copies, full or partial,
of this Software in your possession or control.
6.3 You will compensate KEYENCE for costs or any lost profits caused by your violation or breach
of any term of this Agreement.

7. Governing Law.
7.1 This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws of
Japan without regards to the principles of conflicts of law.
7.2 If any part of This Agreement is found void and unenforceable, it will not affect the validity of the
balance of This Agreement, which shall remain valid and enforceable according to its terms and
conditions.

2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


How This Manual Is Organized
Chapter 1
BEFORE YOU START
This chapter describes the precautions before using VT STUDIO.
USING VT STUDIO

Chapter 2 SCREENS & WINDOWS


This chapter describes the configuration of the Edit screen and other screens, and
restrictions when making screens. 1
Chapter 3 FILES & PRINTING This chapter describes how to make new data files, and read, save and print files.
2
Chapter 4 3
This chapter describes operations such as moving, scaling, deleting, copying and
EDIT
rotating drawn graphics, text and parts.

Chapter 5 4
This chapter describes how to display the catalog and grid, and the functions of the
DISPLAY
various tool bars that are displayed in windows.

Chapter 6
BEFORE YOU START This chapter describes how to set the color and line type in the graphic or part setting
SETTING PARTS windows, and other information you should know before you start setting other parts. 5
Chapter 7
SETTING GRAPHICS &
TEXT
This chapter describes how to set graphics and text.
6
Chapter 8
SETTING SWITCHES &
7
This chapter describes how to set switches and lamps.
LAMPS

Chapter 9
This chapter describes how to set numerical value displays, text displays, and other
SETTING BASIC PARTS
basic parts.
8
Chapter 10
SETTING METERS &
This chapter describes how to set meters and images.
IMAGES
9
Chapter 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS This chapter describes screen callups, loading DXF files, and other functions.

10
Chapter 12
This chapter describes some methods of creating new screens and using the list of
RESOURCE
screen callups, etc.
11
Chapter 13
COMMUNICATION This chapter describes the settings of the target VT3 models and PLC and the
BETWEEN PC & VT3 communication between PC and VT3.
12
Chapter 14
SYSTEM MEMORY This chapter describes the system memory area and how to manipulate the system
AREA memory area by the PLC.

13
Chapter 15
This section describes PLC data folder functions and how to operate the PLC Data
PLC DATA FOLDER
Folder Editing Tool.

14
Chapter 16
This chapter describes how worksheets operate, how to set worksheets, and
WORKSHEET
worksheet functions.

Chapter 17
ETHERNET This section briefly describes the Ethernet connection and how to set up the Ethernet 15
CONNECTION connection.

Chapter 18 LADDER MONITOR This section describes ladder monitor and the setting method.
16
Appendices APPENDICES These appendices list error messages and shortcut code tables. 17
18
A

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3


Contents
Preface
Safety Precautions ...........................................................................................................................1
Software License Agreement ..........................................................................................................2
How This Manual Is Organized........................................................................................................3
Contents ............................................................................................................................................4
Conventions Used In This Manual ................................................................................................15
Terminology .................................................................................................................................... 15
Symbols .......................................................................................................................................... 15

Chapter 1 BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


1-1 How to Draw and Edit with VT STUDIO........................................................................1-2
Models types that can use VT STUDIO to draw and edit ..............................................................1-2
Notes on drawing or editing VT5 files ............................................................................................1-2
Notes about drawing and editing with VT2-speicific files ................................................................1-2
1-2 About Compatibility .......................................................................................................1-3
VT1/VT2/VTS Files ........................................................................................................................1-3
Compatibility among Different Versions ..........................................................................................1-7
1-3 About the Shift JIS and UNICODE Versions ................................................................1-8
About the Shift JIS and UNICODE Versions...................................................................................1-8
1-4 Operating Environment .................................................................................................1-9
Operating Environment for VT-H7J (Japanese Version) and VT-H6G (Global version) .................1-9
1-5 Installation of VT STUDIO ...........................................................................................1-10
Preparion for installation ...............................................................................................................1-10
Precautions for Installation............................................................................................................1-10
How to Install ................................................................................................................................ 1-11
1-6 Installation of USB Driver............................................................................................1-15
Precautions When Using USB ......................................................................................................1-15
Install USB Driver in Windows 10/8/7/Vista ..................................................................................1-15
Install USB driver in Windows XP .................................................................................................1-15

Chapter 2 SCREENS & WINDOWS


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens ................................................................2-2
Edit Window ....................................................................................................................................2-2
Screen Configuration ......................................................................................................................2-5
2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens ...........................................................................2-14
Restrictions in the Number of Pages and Number of Screens .....................................................2-14
Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................2-14

Chapter 3 FILES & PRINTING


3-1 File Manager ...................................................................................................................3-2
New(N)............................................................................................................................................3-2
Open ...............................................................................................................................................3-4
Loading VT2 Files ...........................................................................................................................3-5
Loading VT1 Files ...........................................................................................................................3-6
Close...............................................................................................................................................3-7
Save................................................................................................................................................3-8
Save as/Compress and Save .........................................................................................................3-8
Import..............................................................................................................................................3-9
Read from Memory Card ..............................................................................................................3-14

4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


Write to Memory Card...................................................................................................................3-15
Verify with Memory Card...............................................................................................................3-17
Comparing VTS Files....................................................................................................................3-18
Operating Log File Loading...........................................................................................................3-19
Ladder Monitor Data Verification...................................................................................................3-20
File Log .........................................................................................................................................3-22
Exit ................................................................................................................................................3-22
3-2 Print...............................................................................................................................3-23
Print Settings.................................................................................................................................3-23
Print Preview.................................................................................................................................3-31
Print ..............................................................................................................................................3-31
Output Screen Data BMP File.......................................................................................................3-31

Chapter 4 EDIT
4-1 Editing Graphics ............................................................................................................4-2
Operation Basics.............................................................................................................................4-2
Move ...............................................................................................................................................4-2
Scaling Graphics.............................................................................................................................4-3
4-2 Edit Functions ................................................................................................................4-6
Selecting Objects (graphics) ...........................................................................................................4-6
Selecting Individual Objects............................................................................................................4-6
Selecting Object Groups .................................................................................................................4-6
Continuously Selecting Objects ......................................................................................................4-7
Canceling Selection ........................................................................................................................4-7
Object Selection Frame and Selection Handles .............................................................................4-7
Select one from many .....................................................................................................................4-8
Select one from the Cascaded Components ..................................................................................4-8
Undo ...............................................................................................................................................4-9
Redo ...............................................................................................................................................4-9
Cut ..................................................................................................................................................4-9
Copy ...............................................................................................................................................4-9
Paste.............................................................................................................................................4-10
Delete ...........................................................................................................................................4-10
Select all .......................................................................................................................................4-10
Search .......................................................................................................................................... 4-11
Multiple copy .................................................................................................................................4-12
Grouping .......................................................................................................................................4-14
Order.............................................................................................................................................4-15
Rotate/Flip.....................................................................................................................................4-16
Place/Align ....................................................................................................................................4-16
Screen attribute settings ...............................................................................................................4-18
Parts Attribute Settings .................................................................................................................4-19
Register part attribute as default settings .....................................................................................4-19
Changing the Switch Area ............................................................................................................4-20
Edit Callup Screen ........................................................................................................................4-20
Change Key Entry Order...............................................................................................................4-21
Option Settings .............................................................................................................................4-22
Edit Apex ......................................................................................................................................4-30

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5


Chapter 5 DISPLAY
5-1 About Various Display Functions.................................................................................5-2
Part Catalog ....................................................................................................................................5-2
Screen catalog ................................................................................................................................5-5
Tool bar ...........................................................................................................................................5-8
Status bar......................................................................................................................................5-14
Workspace ....................................................................................................................................5-15
Switch grid/Grid.............................................................................................................................5-22
Set grid .........................................................................................................................................5-22
Guide line......................................................................................................................................5-23
Switch Area...................................................................................................................................5-23
Scale Display ................................................................................................................................5-24
Scroll Edit Window ........................................................................................................................5-24
Select and Edit Screen .................................................................................................................5-24
Overlap Other Screen ...................................................................................................................5-26
Active Edit .....................................................................................................................................5-26
Label .............................................................................................................................................5-26
Device No. ....................................................................................................................................5-27
Memo ............................................................................................................................................5-27
Device ON/OFF Display................................................................................................................5-27
View Mode ....................................................................................................................................5-28

Chapter 6 BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types .............................................................................6-2
Color Selection and BLK.................................................................................................................6-2
Line Type Selection.........................................................................................................................6-4
Line Attribute Settings.....................................................................................................................6-5
Plane Attribute Settings ..................................................................................................................6-6
6-2 About Touch Switches ..................................................................................................6-7
About Touch Switches.....................................................................................................................6-7
6-3 Key Entry Parts ............................................................................................................6-10
Key Entry Part Modes ...................................................................................................................6-10
Key Entry Part Modes When the Screen is Displayed.................................................................. 6-11
Switching the Key Entry Part Mode by Touch Switches................................................................6-12
Key Entry Order ............................................................................................................................6-15
Selecting Key Entry Parts by Switches .........................................................................................6-16
Switching the Key Entry Part Mode by PLC Devices....................................................................6-17
6-4 About Fonts ..................................................................................................................6-23
Fonts Available on the VT3 ...........................................................................................................6-23
6-5 About Text Codes ........................................................................................................6-24
Text Codes Available on the VT3..................................................................................................6-24
About UNICODE ...........................................................................................................................6-24
6-6 About Devices ..............................................................................................................6-25
Target (reference) Devices............................................................................................................6-25
Overview of VT Internal Devices and VT Link Devices.................................................................6-27
Structure of VT Internal Devices and VT Link Devices .................................................................6-28
VT Internal Device ........................................................................................................................6-29
Link Device ...................................................................................................................................6-36
6-7 Setting of Devices........................................................................................................6-37
Items Selectable in the Device Setting Field.................................................................................6-37

6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


Setting Methods ............................................................................................................................6-38
6-8 Indirect Reference........................................................................................................6-43
About Indirect References ............................................................................................................6-43
Indirect Reference Setting Examples............................................................................................6-46
Cautions for Indirect References ..................................................................................................6-48
6-9 Calculation....................................................................................................................6-49
Type of Calculation .......................................................................................................................6-49
Setting Calculation ........................................................................................................................6-51
Calculation Precision and Data Format Conversion Rules ...........................................................6-56
Cautions in Calculations ...............................................................................................................6-60
Calculation Setting Example .........................................................................................................6-61

Chapter 7 SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT


7-1 Setting Graphics ............................................................................................................7-2
Types of Graphics and Drawing Graphics ......................................................................................7-2
Setting Graphics .............................................................................................................................7-3
7-2 Image Setting .................................................................................................................7-5
Image Setting..................................................................................................................................7-5
7-3 Setting Decorative Frames............................................................................................7-6
Setting Decorative Frames .............................................................................................................7-6
7-4 Setting Outline Text .......................................................................................................7-7
Setting Outline Text.........................................................................................................................7-7
Outline Text Logo Settings ..............................................................................................................7-8
7-5 Setting Bitmap Text .....................................................................................................7-10
Setting Bitmap Text .......................................................................................................................7-10
7-6 Setting Memos ............................................................................................................. 7-11
Setting Memos .............................................................................................................................. 7-11
7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls..........................................................................................7-12
Graphic Attribute Control Restrictions...........................................................................................7-12
Setting Graphic Attribute Controls ................................................................................................7-12

Chapter 8 SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


8-1 Setting Styles and Nameplates.....................................................................................8-2
Setting Nameplates.........................................................................................................................8-2
Setting Style ....................................................................................................................................8-5
Setting the Style and Nameplate of N State Lamps ........................................................................8-7
8-2 Setting Switches ............................................................................................................8-9
Setting Switches .............................................................................................................................8-9
Adding Switch Functions...............................................................................................................8-33
Setting Extended Functions ..........................................................................................................8-35
8-3 Setting Lamp Switch....................................................................................................8-36
Setting Lamp Switches .................................................................................................................8-36
Adding Switch Functions...............................................................................................................8-37
Setting Extended Functions ..........................................................................................................8-37
8-4 Setting Lamps ..............................................................................................................8-38
Setting Lamps ...............................................................................................................................8-38
8-5 Setting of N State Lamp..............................................................................................8-39
Setting of N state lamp.................................................................................................................8-39
8-6 Setting N State Parts....................................................................................................8-41
Setting N State Parts.....................................................................................................................8-41

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 7


8-7 Setting of Cross-key (only for VT3-V7R)....................................................................8-45
Setting of cross-key ......................................................................................................................8-45
8-8 Function Switch Settings (Only for Handy Series) ...................................................8-46
Function switch settings................................................................................................................8-46

Chapter 9 SETTING BASIC PARTS


9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays ................................................................................9-2
Setting Numerical Value Displays ...................................................................................................9-2
Internal Annotation of Float (real numbers) ..................................................................................9-16
9-2 Setting Text Displays ...................................................................................................9-17
Setting Text Displays.....................................................................................................................9-17
About Text String Data ..................................................................................................................9-27
About Specifying Text Color by Device .........................................................................................9-28
Kanji Conversion Mode.................................................................................................................9-29
9-3 Setting Message Displays...........................................................................................9-36
Outline of Message Displays ........................................................................................................9-36
Setting message displays .............................................................................................................9-36
Editing the Content of Messages ..................................................................................................9-45
Message Display Examples..........................................................................................................9-51
9-4 Setting Alarm Displays................................................................................................9-54
Overview of Alarm Display............................................................................................................9-54
Normal Alarm, Extended Alarm ....................................................................................................9-57
Setting Alarm Displays..................................................................................................................9-60
Alarm System Settings..................................................................................................................9-82
Examples of How to Use Alarm Displays......................................................................................9-92
Printing Alarm Logs.......................................................................................................................9-98
9-5 Setting Video Displays ................................................................................................9-99
Setting Video Displays ..................................................................................................................9-99
9-6 Setting Animation Display ........................................................................................9-102
Setting of Animation Display .......................................................................................................9-102
9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices ....................................................................... 9-111
Placing Function Control by Devices .......................................................................................... 9-111
9-8 Setting BMP File Switching.......................................................................................9-140
Setting BMP File Switching.........................................................................................................9-140
9-9 VNC Display Settings ................................................................................................9-144
VNC Display Settings..................................................................................................................9-144
VNC server settings ....................................................................................................................9-145

Chapter 10 SETTING METERS & IMAGES


10-1 Setting Meters ..............................................................................................................10-2
Setting Meters...............................................................................................................................10-2
About Scale Layout.....................................................................................................................10-21
10-2 Setting Statistical images .........................................................................................10-22
Setting Statistical images ............................................................................................................10-22
10-3 Setting Trend images.................................................................................................10-28
Overview .....................................................................................................................................10-28
About Trend image Settings .......................................................................................................10-29
Normal Trends/Extended Trends ................................................................................................10-29
Setting Trend images..................................................................................................................10-32
Trend image Precautions ............................................................................................................10-56

8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


Trend image (real time) System Settings....................................................................................10-57
10-4 XY image Settings......................................................................................................10-62
Overview .....................................................................................................................................10-62
About settings of XY images......................................................................................................10-64
Normal Trends/Extended Trends ................................................................................................10-64
XY image settings .......................................................................................................................10-64
XY image Precautions ................................................................................................................10-84
System Settings of XY image (real-time) ....................................................................................10-84

Chapter 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS


11-1 Call Up Screen.............................................................................................................. 11-2
Call Up Screen.............................................................................................................................. 11-2
Placing Screen Callups................................................................................................................. 11-4
11-2 Load DXF file ................................................................................................................ 11-5
Load DXF File ............................................................................................................................... 11-5
About Conversion Rules ............................................................................................................... 11-6
11-3 Ruled Line Creation ..................................................................................................... 11-7
Ruled Line Creation ...................................................................................................................... 11-7
11-4 Table.............................................................................................................................. 11-8
Make a Table................................................................................................................................. 11-8
Register a Part in a Cell .............................................................................................................. 11-11
Copy/Paste a Cell ....................................................................................................................... 11-12
Notes .......................................................................................................................................... 11-12
11-5 Form Printing ............................................................................................................. 11-13
Form Printing .............................................................................................................................. 11-13
11-6 Changing Display Text Strings ................................................................................. 11-18
Outline of Changing Display Text Strings.................................................................................... 11-18
How to Set Change Display Text Strings .................................................................................... 11-19
Setting Display Text Strings ........................................................................................................ 11-20
How to Change Display Text Strings........................................................................................... 11-29
About Operations during Changing Display Text Strings ............................................................ 11-31
11-7 Active Edit .................................................................................................................. 11-32
Active Edit ................................................................................................................................... 11-32
11-8 Multiple Program Startups ........................................................................................ 11-35
11-9 Batch Edition of the Part Attributes ......................................................................... 11-36
Batch Edition of the Part Attributes ............................................................................................. 11-36
The batch edition of the switch function units ............................................................................. 11-37
11-10 Device Comments......................................................................................................11-38
Overview of Device Comment .................................................................................................... 11-38
Loading Device Comments......................................................................................................... 11-38
Precautions about Loading device comments ............................................................................ 11-41
List of Device Comments ............................................................................................................ 11-41
11-11 Operation Log ............................................................................................................11-44
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 11-44
Using the operation records........................................................................................................ 11-45
Set the Operation Log................................................................................................................. 11-46
Capture the operation Log .......................................................................................................... 11-46
List of the Operation Log............................................................................................................. 11-47
Display List of Operation Log and the Edit Window.................................................................... 11-48
The Relation Between the Contents of the Operation Log and Memory Capacity ..................... 11-49
The contents recorded in the operation records ......................................................................... 11-51

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9


Chapter 12 RESOURCE
12-1 New Screen...................................................................................................................12-2
New Screen ..................................................................................................................................12-2
12-2 VT Model Setting..........................................................................................................12-9
VT Model Setting ..........................................................................................................................12-9
12-3 PLC Model Settings ................................................................................................... 12-11
PLC Model Settings .................................................................................................................... 12-11
12-4 VT System Parameters ..............................................................................................12-12
About Setting of VT System........................................................................................................12-12
VT System ..................................................................................................................................12-12
Communication Condition...........................................................................................................12-15
System Memory Area .................................................................................................................12-16
Password ....................................................................................................................................12-17
Parts............................................................................................................................................12-21
Changing display character strings.............................................................................................12-22
Operation Log .............................................................................................................................12-22
KL ...............................................................................................................................................12-23
Barcode ......................................................................................................................................12-24
Memory Card ..............................................................................................................................12-25
Printer .........................................................................................................................................12-26
Video...........................................................................................................................................12-27
VNC Server.................................................................................................................................12-28
PLC time synchronization ...........................................................................................................12-29
VT Timer .....................................................................................................................................12-30
Other ...........................................................................................................................................12-31
12-5 Windows Font ............................................................................................................12-34
Windows Font Setting .................................................................................................................12-34
12-6 Device Transfer ..........................................................................................................12-38
Overview of Device Transfer.......................................................................................................12-38
Settings of device transfer ..........................................................................................................12-38
Restrictions/Notices for Device Transfer.....................................................................................12-40
12-7 Global Function Control............................................................................................12-43
Overview of Global Function Control ..........................................................................................12-43
Global Function Control Settings ................................................................................................12-43
Restrictions/Notices for Global Function Control ........................................................................12-44
12-8 Cross-reference .........................................................................................................12-45
Displaying Cross-references.......................................................................................................12-45
12-9 Data Check .................................................................................................................12-46
All Data Check ............................................................................................................................12-46
Current Page Check ...................................................................................................................12-48
Global function control check......................................................................................................12-50
Version Check.............................................................................................................................12-51
12-10 Batch-change Device.................................................................................................12-52
Batch-change Device..................................................................................................................12-52
12-11 Screen Configuration Management .........................................................................12-53
Page Configuration Management ...............................................................................................12-53
Operations in Page Configuration Management.........................................................................12-53
12-12 List of Screen call ......................................................................................................12-58
List of Screen call........................................................................................................................12-58
12-13 Ladder Monitor Data ..................................................................................................12-59

10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


List of call screens ......................................................................................................................12-59
12-14 Global Function Switch (Only for Handy Series) ....................................................12-62
Global function switch settings....................................................................................................12-62

Chapter 13 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3


13-1 Preparations for Communication Between PC & VT3 ..............................................13-2
Communication Between PC (VT STUDIO) and VT3...................................................................13-2
Preparations for Communication Between PC (VT STUDIO) and VT3 .......................................13-2
Precautions on Communication Between PC (VT STUDIO) and VT3..........................................13-3
13-2 Communications Settings...........................................................................................13-4
Communications Settings .............................................................................................................13-4
List of Connection Destinations ....................................................................................................13-5
Connection Test ............................................................................................................................13-9
13-3 PC->VT Send Data......................................................................................................13-12
PC->VT Send Data .....................................................................................................................13-12
13-4 PC -> VT Send Screen Data Differences ..................................................................13-19
PC -> VT Send Screen Data Differences....................................................................................13-19
13-5 VT -> PC Receive Data...............................................................................................13-21
VT -> PC Receive Data ..............................................................................................................13-21
13-6 PC <--> VT Verify Data ..............................................................................................13-27
PC<-->VT Verify Data .................................................................................................................13-27
13-7 Simulator ....................................................................................................................13-30
Preparing the Simulator ..............................................................................................................13-30
Starting Up Simulator ..................................................................................................................13-31
Simulator Menu...........................................................................................................................13-31
How to Operate Simulator...........................................................................................................13-32
13-8 Remote COM Port Tool..............................................................................................13-37
Startup of the COM Port Tool ......................................................................................................13-37

Chapter 14 SYSTEM MEMORY AREA


14-1 About System Memory Area .......................................................................................14-2
System Memory Area ...................................................................................................................14-2
Setting System Memory Area .......................................................................................................14-3
14-2 VT Mode ........................................................................................................................14-4
VT Mode List.................................................................................................................................14-4
Details of VT Mode ......................................................................................................................14-5
14-3 MT Compatible Mode ................................................................................................. 14-11
MT Compatible Mode List ........................................................................................................... 14-11
Details of MT Compatible Mode..................................................................................................14-12
14-4 PLC-Based Page Switching ......................................................................................14-17
How to Switch Pages in the VT Mode.........................................................................................14-17
14-5 Turning Windows ON/OFF by PLCs .........................................................................14-21
How to Turn Windows ON/OFF in the VT Mode .........................................................................14-21
14-6 Displaying Interrupt Windows by PLCs...................................................................14-24
Outline of Interrupt Windows.......................................................................................................14-24
How to Display Interrupt Windows in the VT Mode.....................................................................14-25

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11


Chapter 15 PLC DATA FOLDER
15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)...........................................................................15-2
Structure of PLC Data Folders ......................................................................................................15-2
Flow Up to Execution of PLC Data Folders ..................................................................................15-4
About PLC Data Folder Data ........................................................................................................15-5
Size of PLC Data Folder Data.......................................................................................................15-8
PLC Data Folder Precautions ..................................................................................................... 15-11
About Compatibility with VT1 Data .............................................................................................15-12
About the data compatibility between VT2 and VT3 ...................................................................15-12
Editing PLC Data Folder Data.....................................................................................................15-13
PLC Data Folder Editing Tool......................................................................................................15-14
PLC Data Folder Editing Tool Menu............................................................................................15-15
How to Operate PLC Data Folder Editing Tool ...........................................................................15-17
Send/Receive of PLC Data Folder Data .....................................................................................15-21
15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder ....................................................................................15-22
Executed under the RUN mode of the VT3 Series .....................................................................15-22
Executed Under the System Mode of the VT3 Series ................................................................15-39

Chapter 16 WORKSHEET
16-1 About Worksheets .......................................................................................................16-2
Worksheets OverDisplay ..............................................................................................................16-2
About Worksheet Settings ............................................................................................................16-3
Worksheet Restrictions .................................................................................................................16-4
16-2 Setting Worksheets .....................................................................................................16-6
Starting Up the Worksheet Editing Tool ........................................................................................16-6
Worksheet Editing Tool Menu .......................................................................................................16-7
How to Set Cells ...........................................................................................................................16-8
About Calculation Precision on Worksheets and Data Format Conversion Rules......................16-26
About the Data Check.................................................................................................................16-28
Displaying List of Used Devices..................................................................................................16-30
Handy Functions Provided by the Worksheet Editing Tool .........................................................16-32
Importing Worksheets .................................................................................................................16-34
16-3 Worksheet System Settings......................................................................................16-36
Worksheet System Settings........................................................................................................16-36
16-4 Precautions when Handling Worksheets.................................................................16-39
Behavior When an Error Occurs during Worksheet Execution ...................................................16-39
Other ...........................................................................................................................................16-40
16-5 Worksheet Function ..................................................................................................16-41
List of Functions..........................................................................................................................16-41
ABS.............................................................................................................................................16-42
AVERAGE...................................................................................................................................16-44
CHOOSE ....................................................................................................................................16-46
COUNT .......................................................................................................................................16-52
COUNTIF ....................................................................................................................................16-54
IF.................................................................................................................................................16-57
LARGE........................................................................................................................................16-66
LARGEPOS ................................................................................................................................16-68
MATCH .......................................................................................................................................16-70
MAX ............................................................................................................................................16-75
MIN .............................................................................................................................................16-77

12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


SMALL ........................................................................................................................................16-79
SMALLPOS.................................................................................................................................16-81
SUM ............................................................................................................................................16-83
SUMIF.........................................................................................................................................16-85
16-6 Application Example of Worksheets ........................................................................16-88
Example 1: display in parallel the superintendents and production capacity according to the
production sequence................................................................................................................16-88
Application example 2: display the bar graph. ............................................................................16-90
Application example 3: set relay as ON at PM5:00(17:00)of every Friday..................................16-91
Application example 4: output from KL according to the value of barcode. ................................16-93

Chapter 17 ETHERNET CONNECTION


17-1 About Ethernet Connection ........................................................................................17-2
Overview .......................................................................................................................................17-2
17-2 How to Setup Ethernet ...............................................................................................17-3
PLC Model Settings ......................................................................................................................17-3
PLC Communication Setup...........................................................................................................17-3
17-3 Set Up an Ethernet Connection Using the Edit Screen............................................17-5
Describe how to set up an Ethernet connection. .........................................................................17-5
To set up the devices for the Ethernet connection. .......................................................................17-5
Run Ethernet PLC Data Folders ...................................................................................................17-6

Chapter 18 LADDER MONITOR


18-1 Ladder Monitor.............................................................................................................18-2
Overview of Ladder Monitor..........................................................................................................18-2
Procedures before Starting Ladder Monitor ..................................................................................18-4

APPENDICES
1 Error Message Lists...................................................................................................... A-2
When starting UP/Shutting Down VT STUDIO and Opening/Closing Files .................................. A-2
Multiple Program Startups ............................................................................................................ A-3
When changing target VT ............................................................................................................. A-3
When Changing Target PLC ......................................................................................................... A-4
During Communications with VT and When Performing the Data Check ..................................... A-4
When Sending the System Program ............................................................................................. A-6
When Editing Screens .................................................................................................................. A-7
Active Edit ..................................................................................................................................... A-8
When Setting Options ................................................................................................................... A-8
When Loading DXF Format Files .................................................................................................. A-8
Operation Log ............................................................................................................................... A-9
System Setting .............................................................................................................................. A-9
When Connecting Over Ethernet ................................................................................................ A-10
Changing Display Text Strings .................................................................................................... A-10
Workspace .................................................................................................................................. A-10
Page Configuration Management ............................................................................................... A-11
Part Catalog ................................................................................................................................ A-11
During Printing or Printing of RTF Files ...................................................................................... A-12
Device Comments ....................................................................................................................... A-12
In the Simulator ........................................................................................................................... A-12
PLC Data Folder Editing Tool Related ........................................................................................ A-13

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13


Worksheet Related ..................................................................................................................... A-16
Help ............................................................................................................................................ A-17
2 List of Shortcut Key Commands ............................................................................... A-18
3 About Unusable Characters....................................................................................... A-20
Unusable character in file name saved in memory card ............................................................. A-20
4 Adding and Modifying Options ................................................................................. A-23
Changing/Adding of VT2 BUILDER Ver.3->VT STUDIO Ver.1 .................................................. A-23
Changing/Adding of VT STUDIO (Ver.1->Ver.2) ........................................................................ A-27
Change/Add VT STUDIO (Ver.2 -> Ver.3) .................................................................................. A-30
Change/Add VT STUDIO (Ver.3 -> Ver.4) .................................................................................. A-32
Change/Add VT STUDIO (Ver.4 -> Ver.5) ................................................................................. A-32
5 Index............................................................................................................................. A-34

14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


Conventions Used In This Manual
The following shows how pages are configured, and the symbols and terminology used in this manual.

Terminology
This Manual uses the following terminology excluding some instances.
Term Description
Programmable controllers made by various manufacturers that are connected to VT3 series
PLC touch panel display.
PC Stands for personal computer.
VT5 VT5 series touch panel display.
VT3 VT3 series touch panel display.
VT STUDIO Design tool VT-H7J (Japanese version)/VT-H7G (Global version) for the VT5/VT3 series.
VT2 VT2 series touch panel display.
VT2 BUILDER Design tool VT2-H1E (VT2-H1) for the VT2 series.
VT1 Touch Panel Display VT series.
VT BUILDER Design tool VT-H7W for the VT series.
This software is used for displaying data sending/receiving information and record data receiving
VT Transfer Tool on the screen of VT3 series touch panel display.

Symbols
This Manual uses the following symbols to show menus and buttons.
Symbol Description
These are menu items. Menu items can be selected from the menu bar.
These are window names or items names.
""
These are buttons containing text that are used for executing operations or canceling in
windows, for example.
Ctrl These are keys on the PC's keyboard.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15


16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
1 1

BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


BEFORE YOU START
USING VT STUDIO
This chapter describes the precautions before using VT STUDIO.

1-1 How to Draw and Edit with VT STUDIO ••••••••••••••• 1-2


1-2 About Compatibility •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-3
1-3 About the Shift JIS and UNICODE Versions•••••••••• 1-8
1-4 Operating Environment ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-9
1-5 Installation of VT STUDIO•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-10
1-6 Installation of USB Driver••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 1-15

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 1-1


1-1 How to Draw and Edit with VT STUDIO

Models types that can use VT STUDIO to draw and edit


1 VT STUDIO can be used to draw and edit on all VT5 Series/VT3 Series/VT2 Series models.
Data created by VT STUDIO can be transferred to the machines.
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO

Point The system to start differs based on the VT model (VT5 Series/VT3 Series/VT2 Series) used
with VT STUDIO Ver. 6.
The system to start for each Series is as follows:
• VT5 Series : VT STUDIO (for VT5 Series)
• VT2/VT3 Series : VT STUDIO (for VT3 Series)

Notes on drawing or editing VT5 files

This manual describes the functions available to draw and edit on the VT3 Series Touchscreen Display, as well as
how to configure them and notes about the functions.
If you are using VT5 Series Touchscreen Display, please refer to "VT5 Series Reference Manual".

Notes about drawing and editing with VT2-speicific files

• When using VT STUDIO to create and edit VT2-specific files, the available functional options at the components
are the same as those provided by VT2 BUILDER Ver.3. The functions of the newly added or modified components
on VT3 cannot be used. Editing actions such as retrieving and activities editing, however, can still be performed.
For more information about adding and modifying functions, please refer to “Adding and Modifying Options”.
• To edit the VT2 files created by VT2 BUILDER with VT STUDIO, please execute “Reading VT2 Files”.
• VT2-specific data created by VT STUDIO cannot be opened with VT2 BUILDER.
• To transmit the VT2-speicific data created by VT STUDIO to VT2, you need to upgrade the system program to Ver.4.

 How to use this manual when VT2 models are used


This manual mainly deals with the VT3 series.
In the case of VT2 models being used, you can generally get relevant information from this manual simply by
replacing “VT3” with “VT2”.
The available options for specific components and functions, however, are the same as those provided by VT2
BUILDER Ver.3.
In addition, for important information about the use of VT2 models, please see specific VT2 manuals. See the PDF
files in the folder, the destination folder of VT STUDIO Manual(\Manual\VT2).

1-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


1-2 About Compatibility

VT1/VT2/VTS Files
VT1 and VT2 files that are read into VT STUDIO are converted into VTS files. 1
For more information, please see "3-1 File Manager".

BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


 VT1 File
After being read into VT STUDIO, the VT1 files are changed into VTS files (VT3-specific).
Data transmission to the VT2 series can also be performed by changing the VTS files (VT3-specific) into the VTS files
(VT2-specific).
VT STUDIO cannot create VT1-specific files.

Ο Read

VT1 files
X Write

VT STUDIO
VTS files (VT3-specific)

VT3->VT2 conversion

VTS files (VT2-specific)

Ο Transmit Ο Transmit

VT3 Series VT2 Series


(system program Ver.4)

 Notes about VT3 -> VT2 conversion


To change VT3 series into VT2 series, use Menu -> Resources(R) -> VT Model settings (V) to select your desired VT
series.
• When VT3 series where MultiTalk is selected are changed into VT2 series, the PLC_B soft device should also be
set up.
• In some cases, the PLC communications settings on the VT system settings may be initialized.
• Settings of the components added on VT3 are initialized. (for example, the Windows fonts setting will be changed
to bitmap fonts).
• Represented colors are reduced to 4096 colors.
• In case the target PLC is not supported by VT2 series, a failure may occur to the changing.
• In case the number of images used by VT3 series are higher that those used by VT2 series, a failure may occur to
the changing.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 1-3


1-2 About Compatibility

 VT2 File
After being read into VT STUDIO, VT2 files are changed into the VTS files (VT2-specific).
1 Data transmission to the VT3 series can also be performed by changing the VTS files (VT2-specific) into the VTS files
(VT3-specific).
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO

VT STUDIO cannot create the VT1-specific files.

Ο Read

VT2 File
X Write

VT STUDIO
VTS files (VT2-specific)

VT2->VT3 conversion

VTS files (VT3-specific)

Ο Transmit Ο Transmit

VT2 Series VT3 Series


(system program Ver.4)

 Notes about VT2 -> VT3 conversion


To change VT2 series into VT3 series, use Menu -> Resources(R) -> VT Model settings(V) to select your desired VT
series.
• In some cases, the PLC communications settings on the VT system settings may be initialized.
• Where bitmap images are used, the represented colors may increase. (this, however, only applies to the case
where the original image files are already available in the PC).

 VTS File
When using VT STUDIO to create new files, first decide they are for VT3 series or VT2 series, then create VTS files.
Special attention should be paid to halfway change from VT3 to VT2 or vise versa.
"Notes about VT3 -> VT2 conversion", page 1-3
"Notes about VT2 -> VT3 conversion", page 1-4

VTS files
VTS files (VT3-specific)
(VT3-specific) VTS files
VTS files (VT2-specific)
(VT2-specific)
VT STUDIO
VT STUDIO
VT3->VT2 conversion
conversion VT2->VT3
VT2->VT3
VT3->VT2
conversion
conversion
VTS files
VTS files (VT2-specific)
(VT2-specific) VTS files
VTS files (VT3-specific)
(VT3-specific)

 Transmit
 Transmit  Transmit
 Transmit  Transmit
 Transmit  Transmit
 Transmit

VT3 Series
VT3 Series VT2 Series
VT2 Series VT2 Series
VT2 Series VT3 Series
VT3 Series
(system program
(system program Ver.4)
Ver.4) (system program
(system program Ver.4)
Ver.4)

1-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


1-2 About Compatibility

 Memory card-specific VT files


The memory card-specific VT1 files of VT1 (*.DAT, *.DT3, *.DT5) cannot be directly read by VT STUDIO. Please first
open them with VTBUILDER and save the same as VT1 files, then open them with VT STUDIO. 1

BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


X
X Read
Read
Memory card-specific
Memory card-specific VT1
VT1 files
files
(*.DAT,*.DT3,*.DT5)
(*.DAT,*.DT3,*.DT5)
X Write
X Write

VT STUDIO
VT STUDIO

The memory card-specific VT2 files of VT2 (*.md1,2,3) cannot be directly read by VT STUDIO.
To rewrite with VT STUDIO, they need to changed to memory card-specific VT2 files (*.md4).

Read
Memory card-specific VT2 files
(*.md1,2,3)
X Write

VT STUDIO
Transmit
Read Write

Transmit Memory card-specific VT2 files


(*.md4)

VT2 Series X Transmit X Transmit


(System program Ver.4)

VT3 Series VT2 Series


(System program Ver.1 to 3)

Memory card-specific VT3 files can only be used by VT3.

Memory card-specific VT3 files

VT STUDIO
Transmit X Transmit

VT3 Series VT2 Series

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 1-5


1-2 About Compatibility

 Other

1  To process data with VT2 BUILDER

 VT->PC data receive *1


BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO

Ο PC->VT data transmit


VT2 Series
(System program Ver.4)

X Read
VT2 BUILDER

X Write
Memory card-specific VT2 files
(*.md4)

*1 The data transmitted by VT STUDIO cannot be received by VT2 BUILDER.


The data transmitted by VT2 BUILDER can be received by VT2 BUILDER.

 Data receive/transmit by VT STUDIO and VT2 series


Cannot send data to VT2 on which System program Ver.1 to 3 is run. To use VT STUDIO to receive/send data, you
need upgrade the system program to Ver.4.

Ο VT->PC data receive

X PC->VT data transmit


VT2 Series
(System program Ver1 to 3) VT STUDIO

Ο VT->PC data transmit


Ο PC->VT
data transmit

VT2 Series
(System program Ver.4)

 Data receive/transmit by VT STUDIO and VT1 series


Cannot send to/receive from the VT1 series.

X VT->PC data receive

X PC->VT data transmit


VT1 Series
(System program Ver.1 to 5) VT STUDIO

1-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


1-2 About Compatibility

Compatibility among Different Versions


The extension names of VTS files are as follows.
1
Extension name

BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


VT STUDIO Memory card-specific VT files
VTS File
VT3-specific VT2-specific
Ver.1 vs1 vu1 ms1 md4
Ver.2 vs2 vu2 ms2 md4
Ver.3 vs3 vu3 ms3 md4
Ver.4 or later vs4 vu4 ms4 md4

Ο Open VTS files

X Open VTS files


VT STUDIO Ver.1/Ver.2/Ver.3 VT STUDIO Ver.4 or later
(*.vs1, *.vu1, *.vs2, *.vu2, *.vs3, *.vu3) (*.vs4, *.vu4)
• All VTS files (*.vs* and *.vu*) can be opened in VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions. However, only VTS files
(*.vs4, *.vu4, *.vs3, *.vu3, *.vs2, and *.vu2) can be saved.
• VTS files (*.vs4 and *.vu4) created in VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions cannot be opened in Vers. 1, 2 or 3.
To open in VT STUDIO Ver. 2 or Ver. 3, save the file as (*.vs2, *.vu2, *.vs3, or *.vu3).

Point The following data created in VT STUDIO Ver.2, Ver.3 or Ver.4 or later versions cannot be
opened in Ver. 1.
• Data sent from PC to VT
• The image data written into the memory card

x VT->PC data receive О PC->VT data transimt


VT3 Series/
VT2 Series
VT STUDIO Ver.1 VT STUDIO Ver.4 or later, Ver.3, Ver.2
(*.vs1, *.vu1) (*.vs4, *.vu4, *.vs3, *.vu3, *.vs2, *.vu2)

x Read from Memory Card Ο Written into Memory


Card
Memory Card
(VTEDT*.ms4, ms3, ms2)
VT STUDIO Ver.1 VT STUDIO Ver.4 or later,
(Autoload.ms4, ms3, ms2)
Ver.3, Ver.2
(VTEDT*.md4)

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 1-7


1-3 About the Shift JIS and UNICODE Versions

About the Shift JIS and UNICODE Versions


1 Shift-JIS version and UNICODE version are available for VT STUDIO Ver.3 or lower.
VT STUDIO Ver.4 or higher is the UNICODE version.
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO

OS VT STUDIO version to be installed


Windows98SE/Me Shift JIS version
Windows 10/8/7/Vista/XP (SP3 or later) UNICODE version

 Data compatibility for Shift JIS version and UNICODE version


• The VTS files created with the UNICODE version contain Chinese and Korean characters etc. Messy codes may occur
when they are opened with the Shift JIS version.
• VT STUDIO can also read the English VT2 files created by VT2 BUILDER. In the case of the Shift JIS version,
however, Messy codes may occur to the Chinese and Korean, for example, characters.

1-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


1-4 Operating Environment
This section describes the environments required for operating VT STUDIO as follows.
Make sure that the system that you are using meets the following conditions and that you have all of the required
equipments.
1
Operating Environment for VT-H7J (Japanese Version) and VT-H7G (Global version)

BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


Item Operating Environment
Supported OS* Windows 10/8 (including 8.1)/7/Vista (SP2 or later)/XP (SP3 or later)
VT-H7J (Japanese version): 3 GB or more
Free space on hard disk
VT-H7G (Global version): 7 GB or more
1024 x 768 dots or higher
Display
High color (16-bit) or higher
DVD drive Required for installation
Interface USB port, RS-232C port, Ethernet port
* Windows Vista/XP OSs are compatible with 32-bit version only.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 1-9


1-5 Installation of VT STUDIO
This section describes how to install VT STUDIO to your PC's hard disk.

1 Preparion for installation


BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO

Check the following before installing VT2 BUILDER.

Point We recommend to backup DVD master disk in case it is damaged.

Free space on hard disk


VT STUDIO can only be installed on a hard disk. The following amount of free space on the hard disk is required for
installation.
• VT-H7J (Japanese version): 3 GB or more
• VT-H7G (Global version): 7 GB or more
Windows environment and installation destination
VT STUDIO operates on Windows.
VT STUDIO also executed on Windows.
Make sure that Windows has been installed into your PC and can operate normally.

Precautions for Installation

 User Privileges
To use VT STUDIO, It is necessary to get the following rights.
For Windows other than XP: "Standard User" or above
For Windows XP: "Power User" or above

 Installation Destination Folders


The following folders excluding those specified as installation destination can also be created by VT STUDIO.

 Auto backup files


For Windows other than XP: C:\Users\<User's name>\Documents\KEYENCE\VTS4E*
For Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\<User's name>\Documents\KEYENCE\VTS4E*
* For VT-H7G (Global version), this differs according to the display language setting. The folder for each language is
as follows.
Japanese: "\VTS4", English: "\VTS4E", Chinese: "\VTS4C"

 Part catalog (user-defined)/Screen examples/UserStyle files


For Windows other than XP: C:\Users\All Users\Documents\KEYENCE\VTS4E*
For Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\KEYENCE\VTS4E*
* For VT-H7G (Global version), this differs according to the display language setting. The folder for each language is
as follows.
Japanese: "\VTS4", English: "\VTS4E", Chinese: "\VTS4C"

 Precautions for Uninstallation


When uninstalling VT STUDIO, a dialog box for selecting whether or not to delete the files (*.dll) used by VT STUDIO
is displayed sometimes.
Mark the "Don't display this message again" checkbox and click the "Yes" button. Windows operation will not be
affected even if these files are deleted.

1-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


1-5 Installation of VT STUDIO

How to Install
The following describes how to install into PC by taking the configuration of the following drives as examples. 1
If the driver letters in your current PC differ from the following, specify the drive to install the software according to the

BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


actual PC configuration.
C drive: Hard disk drive
E drive: DVD drive

1 Turn the PC ON, and start Windows.


Exit any application that is already started up.

Point Only the user with "Administrator" right can log in.

2 Insert "VT STUDIO system disk (disk1)" into the DVD on the PC.
The installation program is started with the autorun function on PC.
Otherwise, select the "Run" in the Start menu and enter "e:\Startup.exe" in the "Run" dialog box, then click "OK".

Items Description
VT STUDIO Ver.7G Install VT STUDIO Ver.7G
Remote COM Port Tool
Install Remote COM Port Tool Ver.5G and Remote Ethernet Too l G *1.
Ver.5G

*1 The Remote Ethernet Tool supports VT5 Series only.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 1-11


1-5 Installation of VT STUDIO

Installing VT STUDIO

1  Installation of VT STUDIO
1
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO

Click "Install" to start installation.


To cancel installation, click the "Cancel" button.

Reference When installing VT-H7G (Global version), you will be asked to select the language in which to install
VT STUDIO.
Select a language (Japanese, English or Chinese (simplified)) and click "OK".

2 After reading the contents of License Agreement, select "Agree Terms of License Agreement(A)" and click "Next(N)>"

3 Check installation destination, and click "Next(N)>".


VT STUDIO will be installed in the following location if the installation destination is not changed.
VT-H7J (Japanese version) : "C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\VTS7J"
VT-H7G (Global version) : "C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\VTS7G"
To change the installation destination, click "Change (C)" and specify a location.

4 When asked whether to install the Clip Art Illustration into the hard disk, click "Yes" if necessary.
Click "No(N)", and go to step 5.
In addition, even if the Clip Art Illustration is not installed, you can still use it by directly referring to DVD.

1-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


1-5 Installation of VT STUDIO

5 Check the settings, and click "Next(N)>".


To change the settings, click "Back(B)".

1
6 Visualize the copying status of files.

BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


7 Visualize the copying status of files of Clip Art Illustration.

8 Click "Finish" after finish message is displayed.

So far, the installation of VT STUDIO is finished.


The following screen will be displayed when "Remote COM Port Tool" is selected via "Standard" or "Custom" of
installation program.

Click the [OK] button to continue installing the remote communication port.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 1-13


1-5 Installation of VT STUDIO

Install Remote COM Port Tool

1 The Remote COM Port Tools (Remote COM Port Tool and Remote Ethernet Tool) will be installed if you selected
"Remote communication port tools" in the installation program.
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO

1 Click "Next(N)>" to start installation.


To cancel installation, click the "Cancel" button.

2 Check the installation destination, and click "Next(N)>".


The Remote COM Port Tool will be installed in the following location if the installation destination is not changed.
VT-H7J (Japanese version) : "C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\RCP5"
VT-H7G (Global version) : "C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\RCP5G"
To change the installation destination, click "Change (C)" and specify a location.

3 The copy status of Remote COM Port Tool files is displayed in a graph.

4 Click "Finish" after finish message is displayed.


Remote COM Port Tool is now successfully installed.

1-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


1-6 Installation of USB Driver
The environments required for operating VT STUDIO are as follows.
Make sure that the used system meets the following conditions and that you have all of the required equipments.

1
Precautions When Using USB

BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


• Instead of the USB hub, USB driver can be directly connected to the USB port on PC. In some cases,
communication may be interrupted due to noise or other unfavorable communication conditions. Re-plug the USB
cable when communication is interrupted.
• For unfavorable communication conditions such as too strong noise, be sure to roll the cable around a ferrite.
• Installation is unnecessary when VT2 series USB driver is already installed.

Install USB Driver in Windows 10/8/7/Vista


During VT3 connection, the USB driver is installed automatically.

Install USB driver in Windows XP


Connect VT3 to a PC installed with Windows XP. The USB driver for VT3 must be installed only when VT3 is
connected for the first time. For the conditions afterwards, it is unnecessary to install USB driver due to automatic
recognization.

Point Be sure to install VT STUDIO before installing USB driver.

1 Start up Windows XP, and log in as an Administrator, computer administrator or a user having rights for
changing system settings.

2 Connect the USB port on VT3 to the USB port on PC with a USB cable.
"New hardware found" is displayed, and the “Add Hardware Wizard“ is displayed.

When using Windows XP Service Pack3, select "No, don't connect this time" radio button, and click "Next(N)>"
button.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 1-15


1-6 Installation of USB Driver

3 Select "Install from a list or specific location "radio button and click "Next(N)>" button.

1
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO

4 Select the "Search for the best driver in these locations", and check the "Include the following location:"
checkbox. Next, enter "C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\VTS7G\VT3\USB" and click "Next(N)>" button.

Point "C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\VTS7G" in this step is the directory where VT STUDIO was
installed. Rewrite this directory according to the operating environment.

5 Click "Continue (C)" button.

1-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


1-6 Installation of USB Driver

Installation is started.

BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO


6 Click "Finish" button.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 1-17


1-6 Installation of USB Driver

MEMO

1
BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO

1-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2 2

SCREENS & WINDOWS


SCREENS & WINDOWS
This chapter describes the configuration of the Edit window and screens, and
restrictions when making screens.

2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens ••••••••••• 2-2


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens •••••••••••••••••• 2-14

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-1


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Edit Window
The following describes the VT STUDIO Edit window.

2 Title bar Menu bar Edit window Tool bar


SCREENS & WINDOWS

Tool bar

Workspace
(Screen/system setting/
device comment list )

Tool bar

Status bar Search result list/text string list/ Catalog window


operating log list Property window

Item Description
Displays the name of the currently open file and type (page No., global window No., printer form
Title bar
No., base/window) of screen.
Menu bar Displays the menu.
Tool bar Displays available tools. Faintly displayed tools are currently unavailable functions.
Displays the screen currently being edited. Parts, device No. display and label display can also
be placed outside of this display frame (green area). Fully exposed parts (excluding memo and
Edit window
Animation display) are not sent to VT3 and memory card as display data . (not displayed in
VT3, nor saved into memory card).
To display the part catalog/screen catalog file selected. This can be configured in the Edit
Catalog window window by dragging and dropping (press and hold the left key of the mouse and move the
cursor to the desired position, then release the left key).
Displays the key state and a description of the function.
Status bar
When an object is selected, its type, position, size and label are also displayed.
The following operations are possible on the
"Screen" tab:
• Viewing the configuration of screens made
for each page
• Making new screens
Workspace
• New form screen
The following operations are possible on the
"System Settings" tab:
• VT system settings • Trend graph system settings
• Editing alarm system settings and alarm details • Editing messages
• Registered character of Windows font • Setting of device sending
• Editing PLC Data Folder Data • Worksheet System Settings
The property window is displayed when a part is selected, and is used for setting graphic
Property window
attributes and for setting the nameplate and style of switches/lamps.
Search result list The list shows the search results.
Text string list The list shows the text strings used in parts.
Device comment list The list shows the read-in device comment.
Operating log list The list shows the read-in operating log.

2-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Customizing edit window


Display the position of tool bar, workspace, catalog and search result list, etc, by dragging and dropping. Try placing
the tool bar at various positions to find which position is easiest to use.
Item Configurable position
Menu bar
Tool bar
• On screens as a window
• Top, bottom, left and right of edit screen 2
Workspace

SCREENS & WINDOWS


Part catalog
Screen catalog
Property window
• On screens as a window
• Top, bottom, left and right of edit screen
Search result list • Top, bottom, left and right of edit screen
Text string list
Device comment list
Operating log list

Reference The displayed tool bar icon can be selected.

Docking navigator
If dragging the windows of workspace, catalog and search result lists during self-defining of edit screen,the docking
navigator for designating the configuration site will be displayed.
If dragging and dropping on the docking navigator, the window is combined with the designated position.
Type of docking navigator Description

Displayed at top, bottom, left and right of edit screen.


If dragging on these tabs, it is combined with top, bottom, left and right of edit screen.

Displayed at the location of cursor.


For example, when the cursor is on workspace,
If dragging on the tabs of top, bottom, left and right, itís combined with top, bottom, left and
right of workspace.
If dragging on the central tab, it is combined with workspace, and displayed as label.
Dragging and dropping the label during separation.

Autohide
The workspace, catalog and search result lists are only displayed where necessary.
Click the toggle icon shown on top right corner when combined with workspace, catalog and search result lists on top,
bottom, left and right of edit screen.
Icon Description

Workspace, catalog and search result lists maintain original state.

Workspace, catalog and search result lists are shown as labels on top, bottom, left and
right of edit screen. Just move the mouse onto the label, or click the label for display.

Point Attribute window can not be hided automatically.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-3


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Origin, X-axis and Y-axis in Edit window


The origin, X-axis and Y-axis of the Edit window is shown as follows. The top left corner of the display frame (in the
default setting, the black area by default) is the origin (0,0).

Horizontal (regular) screen


2 Origin X-axis direction
SCREENS & WINDOWS

Horizontal (regular) VT3 display area


Y-axis direction

screen display frame

POWER indicator

Vertical screen

Origin X-axis direction


Y-axis direction

Vertical screen VT3 display area


display frame

POWER indicator

Coordinate range of display frame in X- and Y-axes


Type X-axis Coordinate Range Y-axis Coordinate Range
Horizontal screen 0 to 1023 0 to 767
VT3-X15
Vertical screen 0 to 767 0 to 1023
Horizontal screen 0 to 799 0 to 599
VT3-S12/S10
Vertical screen 0 to 599 0 to 799
VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/ Horizontal screen 0 to 639 0 to 479
V6H(G) Vertical screen 0 to 479 0 to 639
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/ Horizontal screen 0 to 319 0 to 239
Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/
Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A Vertical screen 0 to 239 0 to 319

VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/ Horizontal screen 0 to 319 0 to 127


W4G (A) Vertical screen 0 to 127 0 to 319

Point • The POWER lamp of VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/V7R is on the top right of the landscape screen
(normal).
• There is no POWER indicator for VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A).
• For VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A), the power terminals on back are downward.

2-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Screen Configuration
Screens made using VT STUDIO are managed by page No.
Each page comprises the base screen and window screen (local window), each of which is saved separately. There
is also a window screen (global window) that does not belong to a page, and that is separate from the base screen
and the window screen.
2
There is also a printer form screen that is exclusively for printing forms that is not displayed on VT3 in addition to the

SCREENS & WINDOWS


regular screens (base/window).

Configuration of pages (base, window)


Page Nos. can be set within the range 0 to 8999. However, note that the maximum number of pages that can be
created is 1024, and 9000 pages' worth of data cannot actually be created. However, note that the maximum number
of pages that can be created is 1024, and 9000 pages' worth of data cannot actually be created.
Each page comprises four screens: a base and local windows (window 1, window 2, window 3). There is also a
global window that does not belong to the page and can be displayed on any page.

Page 0 Page 1 Page 8999

Base Base Base


Window 1 Window 1 Window 1
Window 2 Window 2 Window 2
Window 3 Window 3 Window 3

Display is possible on any page.


Global window

G000
G001

G999

Numeric keypads, keyboards, etc., can be used in common on multiple pages by placing them in the global window.

Base screen and window screens


A "base screen" is the screen that is always displayed when that page is switched to.
A "window screen" is the screen that is displayed overlapping the base screen. Window screens are used for
displaying numeric keypads or keyboard entry screens overlapping the base screen.

Base screen Window screen Base screen + window screen

Target @0000_1 Target @0000_1

1234 1234

9876 9876

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-5


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Local windows and global windows


Local windows (windows 1 to 3) are windows that can be displayed only on certain pages. Where as global windows
do not belong to a specific page, and can be displayed on any page.
Up to eight global windows (global windows ID 0 to 7) can be displayed on a single page.

2 Note, however, that eight screens sometimes cannot be displayed simultaneously depending on the size of the
screen data and other restrictions.
Screens in global windows can be swapped.
SCREENS & WINDOWS

Though global window numbers can be set within the range G000 to G999, the number of screens that can actually
be made fluctuates depending on the relationship between the size of each screen data and VT3 memory capacity.
"Number of screens that can be made", page 2-8
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"

[Example] To change the display of global window ID0 currently displayed from global window No.G000 to
G010.

Global window ID0 (global window No.G000) is currently displayed.



Global window is displayed by a switch.
(Set so that ID is the same 0, and global window No. specification is different.)

The screen content of the already displayed global window is switched.
(global window No.G000 changes to No.G010)

Switch: Global window display ON


Global window ID0
Global window No.G010

Global window ID0 Global window ID0


Global window No.G000 Global window No.G010
Displayed Displayed

Point • When many parts (switches/lamps, basic parts, graphs/meters, etc.) that read devices on
the PLC are placed on a global window, updating (display refreshing) of these parts slows
down. When making a screen in which many parts are placed, use base and local
windows.
• When unit monitor and device monitor are displayed in global window, the followings are
used through special operation of main screen:
• Software monitor: Global window ID6;
• Device monitor: ID7; Global window ID7
VT3 Series Hardware Manual "Chapter 5 System Mode"

2-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Printer form screen


A "Printer Form Screen" is a screen exclusively for printing forms, and is not displayed on the VT3. Draw the details
to be printed in advance in the same way as for a regular screen (base/window). When the print start trigger bit turns
ON, the printer form screen is printed.
"11-5 Form Printing"
2
Printer form screen

SCREENS & WINDOWS


P00 P01 P15

Printer form screens can be set within the range from page No.P00 to P15.
However, note that the number of screens that can actually be made
fluctuates depending on the relationship between the size of each screen
data and VT3 memory capacity.
"Screen data", page 2-16

Point Form screen can not be created by VT3-W4T(A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A).

Screen ID
A "screen ID" is an individual name that is set to the base screen, window screen, and printer form screen.
When a new screen is made, the following defaults are automatically assigned to the screen:
Base/local windows
Base: B
@0000_B Window 1㧦1
Window 2㧦2
Window 3㧦3
Page No.

Global window

@G000_W
Global window No.

Printer form screen

@Pn00_P
Page No.

[Example] Automatically assigned screen ID


Base screen of page 0 -> @0000_B
Window 2 screen of page 5 -> @0005_2
Global window screen having global window No.G000 -> @G000_W
Printer form screen of page No.P15 -> @Pn15_P
Screen IDs can be changed as desired. Change the screen ID by one of the following methods:
• By selecting “Edit(E)” -> “Screen attribute settings(M)” from Menu in that order
• By selecting the screen whose screen ID you want to change on the “Screen” tab in the workspace, and either
select “Screen attribute settings” from menu that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button, or click the button
to open the “Screen attribute settings” window
• By double-clicking the screen to change at the “Screen” tab in the workspace
"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18
"Workspace", page 5-15
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-7
2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Number of screens that can be made

Max. Number of Screens


Screen Page (window) Setting Range
that can be Created*
Base 0 to 8999 1024
2 Local window
Global window
Windows 1 to 3 on each base
G000 to G999
1024x3=3072
1000
Total 1024
screens
Printer form screen*2 P00 to P15 16
SCREENS & WINDOWS

*1 The maximum number of screens that can be created is 1024 (bases + local windows + global windows + printer
form screens). (For example, if 1024 base screens are created, window screens and printer form screens cannot
be created.). However, the number of screens that can be created varies depending on the size of each screen
data and VT3 memory capacity.
"Screen data", page 2-16
*2 Form screen can not be created by VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A).

Reference Number of screens that could be made on VT1


Max. Number of Screens
Base, Window Page (window) Setting Range
that can be Created*
Base 0 to 8999 256
Window (window 1, 2, 3) Windows 1 to 3 on each base 256x3=768

* The maximum number of screens that could be made on VT1 was 1024 (bases + windows (1 to 3)).
However, that the number of screens that could be made fluctuated depending on the size of each
screen data and VT1 memory capacity.

Screen size
The screen size is fixed to the VT3 screen size, and cannot be changed.
The size of windows (local and global) can be changed within the allowable range of the VT3 screen size.
Grid size of switch can be changed as follows.
VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8/V7/V7R/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A: 16 x 16 dot
VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A): 8 x 8 dot
The size of printer forms is determined by the printer model setting.
"11-5 Form Printing"

Window (local, global) size change ranges

Title bar Minimum Maximum


None 32 (W) x 32 (H) dots
VT3 screen size in both V and H
Size of title bar: standard 32 (W) x 48 (H) dots
ON directions
Size of title bar: big 64 (W) x 64 (H) dots

Minimum window (local, global) sizes

W/out title bar W/ title bar (standard) W/ title bar (large)

@0000_1

64 dots
Title bar 48 dots Title bar
32 dots

32 dots 32 dots 64 dots

Window frame display space of 1 dot in width is required around the window.
In the case of 3D frame displays, a display space of 3 dots in width is required.

2-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Resizing window screens and moving screen positions


Window screens can be resized.

SCREENS & WINDOWS


Move the cursor to the side of the window frame. A thick pink frame is displayed.
Click the cursor when it changes to the hand cursor. When the cursor turns into arrow during moving the
cursor on the frame, change the size or position of
window screen by dragging.

: Resizes screens in the vertical direction. The cursor changes to this when you move it to roughly the center
of the thick pink frame.
: Resizes screens in the horizontal direction. The cursor changes to this when you move it to roughly the
center of the thick pink frame.
: Resizes screens in the vertical and horizontal directions. The cursor changes to this when you move it to
roughly the corner of the thick pink frame.
: Changes the position of the window screen. The cursor changes to this when you move it on the window
frame.

Switching base screens (switching pages)

Method Base
Touch switch • Switch
• System Memory Area
PLC ladder program • Function control by devices
• global function control
Alarm message option settings • Alarm display

"8-2 Setting Switches"


"Chapter 14 SYSTEM MEMORY AREA"
"14-4 PLC-Based Page Switching"
"Alarm System Settings", page 9-82

Reference Page switching is possible even while the following functions are executing
• Saving recorded data to Memory Card (alarm logs, trend graph data)
• Saving to operating log memory card
• Saving worksheet data to memory card
• PLC data folders (transferring comments)
• BMP file switching
• Form printing

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-9


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Point Operation sometimes differs depending on the conditions when page switching is executed
by the following methods.
Switch Check : When page is switched by touch switch
PLC : When page is switched by PLC through functional control and Global function

2 Touch switch / PLC


control of system memory area or devices
: When page is switched by touch switch or PLC

• When there are parts with On switch (the cross-key specifying switch, display switch, key
SCREENS & WINDOWS

entry parts and switch functions are not released) (including OFF delay of switch
expansion function)
Touch switch / PLC : Page switching is held and automatically performed after completion of
operation.
• When there is a switch (momentary reset) (at a slow communications speed) for which OFF
has not been executed
Touch switch / PLC : Page switching is held and automatically performed after completion of
operation.
• When multiple functions (ticket printing, hard copy, alarm log printing, and video
capturing) are requested at the same time and the requirements are not processed yet,
printing or video capturing is performed.
Switch Check : Page switching is impossible before startup of printing or writing to
memory card (display “SW switching page inhibited”).
PLC : Page switching is held and automatically performed before startup of
printing or writing to memory card. While page switching is pending,
operations by touch switches are not possible.

Example 1 When a video capture request arrives during form printing


Switch Check : Page switching is impossible before writing to memory card by video capture
(display “SW switching page inhibited”).
PLC : Page switching is held and automatically performed before writing to memory
card by video capture.

Example 2 When a hard copy request arrives during a hard copy


Switch Check : Pages cannot be switched until printing of the 2nd hard copy is started ("Cannot
change page" is displayed).
PLC : Page switching is made pending until printing of the 2nd hard copy is started, after
which page switching is automatically executed.

Window (local, global) screens and title bar


Window screens can be provided with a title bar.
Setting the title bar
"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18

Move Screen ID Move to front Close

@0000_1

Window screen

Three operations become possible when a title bar is provided.

2-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Moving windows
Press the touch switch for "Move", then touch the screen at the position that needs to be moved.

@0000_1

@0000_1 @0000_1 2

SCREENS & WINDOWS


The title bar blinks when the While the title bar is flashing, touch The window moves to the move
"Move" touch switch is touched. the screen at the position that needs destination.
to be moved.

Swapping the overlapping order of windows


The overlapping order of windows can be swapped by touching the "move to front" touch switch.

@0000_1 @0000_1

Touch the "Move to front" The window moves to the front.


touch switch.

Point Either local window or global window can be switched.

Reference On the VT1, only the overlapping order of windows 1 and 2 could be swapped. Window 3 was fixed to
be displayed at the front at all times.

Closing windows
The "Close" button can be set so as not to be displayed in the screen attribute settings.
Setting the "Close" button
"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18

@0000_1

Touch the "Close" touch switch. The window closes.

Point The "Close" button is not displayed in interrupt windows.


Interrupt Window
"Displaying the window 3 interrupt window", page 2-12

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-11


2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Displaying the window 3 interrupt window


Interrupt windows can be displayed only in window 3.
"Interrupt window display" is a function for displaying the window 3 screen having the page No. specified to the VT3
by the PLC ladder program.
Even if the window 3 screen for a currently displayed page No. is already displayed, the window 3 screen for the
2 specified page No. is displayed on the VT3.
"14-6 Displaying Interrupt Windows by PLCs"
SCREENS & WINDOWS

Reference On the VT1, when the window 3 screen for the currently displayed page No. was displayed, display was
canceled, and the VT1 was forcibly interrupted with the window 3 screen for the specified page No.
Display of window 3 displayed as the interrupt window can be turned OFF only from the
Point
system memory area.
Display cannot be turned OFF from switches or function controls by devices.

Window screen display ON/OFF

Method Local window Global window Interrupt Window


Display ON Enable Enable
Touch switch Disable
Display OFF • Switch • Switch
Display ON Enable
Enable
PLC Ladder program
• System Memory Area • Function control by devices Enable
Display OFF • Function control by devices • Global function control • System Memory Area
• Global function control
Touch numerical value
Display ON Enable Enable Disable
display/text display
Disable Disable
Initial display during page (The screen currently (The screen currently
Enable
switching Display ON displayed on the previous displayed on the previous
(screen attribute settings)
page can be displayed also page can be displayed also
after page switching.) after page switching.)
Display contents Disable Enable Enable
switching of window screen - (Screen content of windows 1 to 3 is fixed.) (Global window is changed.) (Change insertion windowNo.)
Alarm message option settings Display ON Enable Enable Disable

Reference The following functions enable ON/OFF of window display even during execution.
• Saving recorded data to Memory Card (alarm logs, trend graph data)
• Saving to operating log memory card
• Saving worksheet data to memory card
• PLC data folders (transferring comments)
• BMP file switching
• Form printing
Operation sometimes differs depending on the conditions when window display ON/OFF is
Point
executed by the following methods:
Touch Switch : When a window display is turned ON/OFF by a touch switch
PLC : When the window displays ON/OFF from PLC through functional control and
Global function control of system memory area or devices;
Touch switch/PLC : The window displays ON/OFF by touch switch or PLC

• When there are parts with On switch (the cross-key specifying switch, display switch, key
entry parts and switch functions are not released) (including OFF delay of switch
expansion function)
Touch switc / PLC : Window ON/OFF display is held and automatically performed after
completion of operation.
• When there is a switch (momentary reset) (at a slow communications speed) for which OFF
has not been executed
Touch switch/PLC : Window ON/OFF display is held and automatically performed after
completion of operation.
• When simultaneous execution of multiple functions (form printing, hard copy, printing of
alarm logs, video capture) is requested, and there is a print execution (hard copy, printing
of alarm log) or video capture during unprocessed requests
Touch Switch : Window displays cannot be turned ON/OFF until printing is started or
writing to Memory Card is started ("Cannot change window" is
displayed).
PLC : Window display ON/OFF is made pending until printing is started or
writing to Memory Card is started, after which window display ON/OFF is
automatically executed. While window display ON/OFF is pending,
operations by touch switches are not possible.
2-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
2-1 Configuration of Edit Window and Screens

Example 1 When a video capture request arrives during form printing


Touch Switch : Window ON/OFF display is impossible before writing to memory card by video
capture (display “SW switching window disabled”).
PLC : Window ON/OFF display is held and automatically performed before writing to
memory card by video capture.

Example 2 When a hard copy request arrives during a hard copy 2


Touch Switch : Window display ON/OFF is not possible until printing of the 2nd hard copy is

SCREENS & WINDOWS


started ("Window switching by switches is disabled" is displayed).
PLC : Window display ON/OFF is made pending until printing of the 2nd hard copy is
started, after which window display ON/OFF is automatically executed.

Number of windows that can be displayed in a single page

Local Window Global Window Interrupt Window Total (max.)


3 8 1 12

Point • Global windows sometimes cannot be displayed due to restrictions in the number of
devices, screen data size, number of key entry parts, overlapping data, and other factors.
To display multiple global windows simultaneously, thoroughly check operation on an
actual working unit.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"
Global window Nofity error
"Other", page 12-31
• When opening “insert window display” during global window display process, the
followings are shown if exceeding the number of devices, screen data capacity, number of
key-entry parts and repetitive data capacity.
• The display of all currently displayed global windows turns OFF, and display of the
interrupt window turns ON.
• The states of local windows (windows 1 to 3) do not change.
• The notify bit device for notifying global window errors turns ON.

Window screen overlapping rules


When the "Initial display" checkbox is not marked in the window settings of the screen attribute settings, screens are
displayed overlapping the base in the order that display was turned ON.
When the "Initial display" checkbox is marked in the window settings of the screen attribute settings, the local
windows are displayed overlapping the base in order Window 1, Window 2, and Window 3 immediately after page
switching.
The global window and interrupt window are displayed overlapping the base in the order that display turned ON.

Reference On the VT1, if display of window 3 was turned ON when the "Initial display" checkbox was not marked
in the window settings of the screen attribute settings, window 3 was displayed fixed at the front at all
times, and window 1 and window 2 were displayed overlapping the base in the order that display was
turned ON.
If the "Initial display" checkbox was marked in the window settings of the screen attribute settings,
window 1, window 2 and window 3 were displayed overlapping the base in that order immediately
after page switching.

Screen Management
Screens that you have made are saved to a single file categorized by base screen, local window screen, global
window screen, and printer form screen.
Used when it is possible to copy to the screen created on other pages, or import into the screen of other VTS/VT2 files.
Screens that you have made can also be copied to or deleted from workspace.
"Workspace", page 5-15

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-13


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Point For the restrictions when creating VT2 series screen, refer to “VT2 Series Reference
Manual”.

2 Restrictions in the Number of Pages and Number of Screens


The number of pages and number of screens restrictions are as follows:
SCREENS & WINDOWS

Page setting range : Page 0 to 8999


Global window No. setting range : G000 to G999
Printer form setting range : P00 to P15
Maximum number of pages : 1024
Maximum number of screens : 1024
(sum of base, local window, global window and form screen)

Point The maximum number of pages that can be created is 1024, and 9000 pages' worth of data
cannot actually be made. The number of screens that can be created sometime is lower than
1024, depending upon data capacity and VT3 memory capacity of different screens.
VT3 memory capacity
"Screen data", page 2-16

Restrictions

Single-page restrictions
The following table shows the restrictions that apply to devices and control objects that can be set in individual pages.
For details of each item, refer to the descriptions that follow.
Item Total of Base + Local Window Total of Global Window, Interrupt Window
Reference data Max. 2048 devices Max. 1024 devices
PLC devices Max.1536 (including system device) Max. 768 devices
Number of control
Max. 1024 devices Max. 512 devices
objects
Key entry parts Max. 256 devices Max. 256 devices
Overlapping data Max. 48 Kbytes Max. 48 Kbytes
Screen data Max. 128 Kbytes Max. 64 Kbytes

Point • Repetitive data capacity contains repetitive data capacity for position control (graphics
attribute control and Animation display).
• System devices indicate the devices set in “System Setting of VT Series”, “System Setting
of Trend Graph”, “System Setting of Alarming”, “System Setting of Worksheet”, “Form
Screen (Trigger Bit Device for Printing)”, “Global Function Control” and “Device Transfer”.
However, the “Number of Devices” excludes the trend sampling device of expansion trend
and alarming detection device of expansion alarm.

2-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Printer form restrictions


The following table shows the restrictions that apply to devices and control objects that can be set in individual pages.
For details of each item, refer to the descriptions that follow.
Item Restrictions in Single Printer Form Page
Reference data
PLC device
Max. 1024 devices
Max. 768 devices
2
Number of control objects Max. 512 devices

SCREENS & WINDOWS


Screen data Max. 64 Kbytes

Single-screen restrictions
Item Max. number
Overlapping objects 192
Indirect reference devices 64

Restrictions on global function control/global function switch


Item Total
Data volume referenced Up to 384
Number of PLC devices Up to 384
Number of control objects Up to 64
Screen data volume Max 16KB

Number of control objects


The following objects are counted as control objects when they are placed on a screen.
Objects Number of control objects
Screen data header 4
Printer form data header 0
Graphic attribute controls (blink, display, plane attribute, line
(number of controls +1)
attribute, text attribute, position control)
When there is 1 switch function 1 image
Switch, lamp switch
When there are multiple switch functions (number of switch functions +1)
Lamp, N state lamp
Switch extended function
Numerical display, Text display, Message display, Alarm display,
Video display, 1
Animation display
Meter (bar, pie and fan), statistical chart (bar, pie)
Functional control via device; BMP file replacement; XYgraph
When there is no scale (outer) 1
Trend Graph
When there is a scale (outer) 2
N state parts (numerical value display, text display) (number of parts +1)
N state parts (switches/lamps) (total of (1) to (5))*1
Function switch (8+(7))*3
Cross-key (4+(6))*2

*1 The following calculation is performed on multiple switches/lamps (switches, lamp switches, lamps) that are
set to N state parts.
(1) 1
(2) Number of lamp parts x 1
(3) Number of parts (switches, lamp switches) with switch extended functions x 1
(4) Number of parts (switches, lamp switches) having one switch function x 1
(5) For switches and lamp switches having two or more switch functions, total of (number of switch functions +
1) objects for each part
*2 (6) Sum of switch functions set at top, bottom, left and right
*3 (7) Total number of switch functions setup in 8 function switches.
The number of control object can be confirmed through “Resource(R)”-> “Data check(D)”-> “Current page(P)”.
"12-9 Data Check"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-15


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Key Entry Parts


The following basic parts and meters/graphs become key entry parts when the "Key entry" checkbox on the “Key
entry” tab of the basic parts and meters/graphs settings is marked.

Numerical display, Text display, Message display, Alarm display, Trend graph, XYgraph

2
SCREENS & WINDOWS

The number of key entry objects can be confirmed by “Resources(R)” -> “Data check(D)” -> “Current page(P)”.
"12-9 Data Check"

Overlapping data
When objects are placed overlapping on the screen, data for identifying and drawing overlapping of objects is generated.
The size of overlapping data can be confirmed by “Resources(R)” -> “Data check(D)” -> “Current page(P)” or “All
data(A)”.
"12-9 Data Check"

Screen data
The size of VT3 screen data varies according to whether or not addon memory (OP42253) is mounted.
Model Without Addon Memory With Addon Memory (16 Mbytes)
VT3-X15 28 Mbytes 44 Mbytes
VT3-S12/S10/V10 12 Mbytes 28 Mbytes
VT3-V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) 12 Mbytes -*1
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/
Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A 4 Mbytes -*1

VT-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) 3 Mbytes -*1


*1 VT3-V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A)
cannot increase memory(OP-42253).
The size of screen data can be confirmed by “Resources(R)” -> “Data check(D)” -> “Current page(P)” or “All data(A)”.
"12-9 Data Check"
• Single-page and single-screen restrictions are checked when the following operations are
Point
performed:
(1) When "Communications" -> "PC -> VT Send data(S)" -> "All data(A)" or "Screen
data(S)" are selected in that order, and the data is sent to the VT3
(2) When "File(F)" -> "Memory Card(M)" -> "Write to Memory Card(W)" is selected in that
order, and data is written to the Memory Card or file
(3) When "Resources(R)" -> "Data check(D)" -> "Current page(P)" or "All data(A)" are
selected in that order, and the data check is performed
If an error occurs in the data check, a corresponding error message is displayed.
"1 Error Message Lists", page A-2
Screens can be made even if restrictions are exceeded if an operation other than the above
is performed.
• The size of screen data decreases as worksheet setting data is saved as part of the screen
data.
"16-1 About Worksheets"
2-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Number of devices, number of lookup data


Devices (numerical values, PLC devices, indirect references, calculations, cells) are counted as shown in the
following table when they are set.
Objects Number of Devices *1 Reference data

Screen (base window)


Basic
When notify bit device in Notify screen switching is ON
0
+1
0
+1
2
When write default word in Notify screen switching is ON +Write words +1

SCREENS & WINDOWS


Screen (printer form) 0 0
Basic 1 2
When Switch mode is Reverse bit +2 0
Lamp switch When Switch mode is Set Momentary 0 0
When Switch mode is other than the above +1 0
When Blink by bit is ON +1 +1
Basic 1 1
Lamp
When Blink by bit is ON +1 +1
When Switch mode is set Momentaryt 0 1
Set bit When Switch mode is Reverse bit 2 1
When Switch mode is other than the above 1 1
Page When Page switching bit set is OFF 0 0
switching When Page switching bit set is ON 1 1
When Switch mode is set data When Data length is 1 word 1
2
When Data length is 2 words *2 2
Set word
When Switch mode is other When Data length is 1 word 2
than the above 3
When Data length is 2 words *2 4
When Data length is 1 word 2
Set digits 2
Switch When Data length is 2 words *2 4

When ASCII/shift JIS is set *3 Number of text


Set text string bytes /2+1
string 1
When UNICODE is set *3 Number of
characters+1*5
Extended Basic 0 0
command
communicati When setting up command *11 *12
on
Other than
the above 0 0

Switch When Interlock is OFF 0 0


extension When Interlock is ON 1 1
When Specify mode is Word device 1 1
N state lamp
When Specify mode is Bit device Number of states 1
When Specify mode is Word device 1 1
N state parts *4
When Specify mode is Bit device Number of states 1
Basic 0 0
Function switch
When switch at top, bottom, left and right is set. +(*8) +(*9)
Basic 0 0
Cross-key
When switch at top, bottom, left and right is set. +(*8) +(*9)
Basic 0 0
Blink control +1 +1
Display control +1 +1
Line attribute control +1 +1
Graphic attribute
Plane attribute control +1 +1
controls
Text attribute control +1 +1
Position control (XY-axis) +2 +2
Position control (X-axis/Y-axis) +1 +1
Position control (specify point) +1 +1

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-17


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Reference
Objects Number of Devices *1 data
When Data length is 1 word 1
Basic 3
When Data length is 2 words *2 2
When Data length is 1 word +2
2
When input range is set at non-
numerical. 0
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
With key input, but without setting When Data length is 1 word +1
change notification +1
When Data length is 2 words *2
SCREENS & WINDOWS

+2
Numerical When Data length is 1 word
value With key input
When Notify changes to settings is ON 0 +1
display When Data length is 2 words *2
When Data length is 1 word +2
When Display range is ON 2
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When Data length is 1 word +2
When Alarm range is ON +2
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When Enable changes to settings is ON +1 +1
When Notify changes to settings is ON 0 +1
When ASCII/shift JIS is set Number of text string bytes/2+1
Basic 1
When UNICODE is set Number of characters+1 *5
When Key entry/Barcode When ASCII/shift JIS is set +(Number of text string bytes/2+1)
entry is ON and Notify +1
changes to settings is OFF When UNICODE is set +(Character data+1)*5
Text When Key entry/Barcode When ASCII/shift JIS is set
display entry is ON and Notify 0 +1
changes to settings is ON When UNICODE is set
When Enable changes to settings is ON +1 +1
When Notify changes to settings is ON 0 +1
When Specify text color by device is ON +1 +1
Basic 0 1
Message When Specify block No. is External +1 0
display When Notify cursor position is ON +1 +1
When Specify text color by device is ON +1 +1
Alarm When Notify cursor position is OFF 0 0
display When Notify cursor position is ON 1 1
Video Internally 0
Channel 1
display Externally 1
Specify No. 1 1
Updating cycle is
designated internally 0 1
Frame updating Cycle Updating cycle is
Specify designated externally 1 1
Frame exit notification 0 +1
Specify No. +1 +1
Animation Point Internally 0 +1
display specification Cycle
Externally +1 +1
Specify
Position
control Move exit notification 0 +1
X-axis direction +1 +1
Position Y-axis +1 +1
XY-direction +2 +2
Display Display control is effective +1 +1
control Allowable operation is effective +1 +1
When Data length is 1 word 1
Basic 3
When Data length is 2 words *2 2
When Input range is setting other than a When Data length is 1 word +2
numerical value 0
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
Meters When Data length is 1 word +2
(bar graph/ When Display range is ON +2
pie chart/ When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
fan) When Data length is 1 word +2
When Alarm range is ON +2
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When Data length is 1 word +1
When Ideal line is ON +1
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2
When Scale is ON 0 +2

2-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Objects Number of Devices *1 Reference data


Basic Number of devisions 1
Statistical graphs
When Scale is ON 0 +2
(bar graph/pie chart)
When Scale makings is ON 0 +2
Basic
When Input range is
setting other than a
When Data length is 1 word
0
+2
2+Number of graphs

0
2
numerical value When Data length is 2 words *2 +4

SCREENS & WINDOWS


When Display range is When Data length is 1 word +2
+2
ON When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When Data length is 1 word +2
When Alarm range is ON +2
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When Data length is 1 word +1
When Ideal line is ON +1
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2
When Display control is ON +Number of graphs +Number of graphs
When Store old data date/time is ON +12 +1
Real time When Store new data date/time is ON +12 +1
settings
Cursor position ON +1
When Store cursor data is Date/time information ON +11
ON +1
When Data length is 1 word Number of graphs
When Data length is 2 words *2 Number of graphs x 2
When Scale of item axis is ON 0 +1
When Scale of numerical axis is ON 0 +1
When Data length is 1 word +2
Scale Input range +4
(outer) When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
effective When alarm When Data length is 1 word +2
range is ON +2
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When input range is set When Data length is 1 word +1
at non-numerical. +1
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2
Trend
Graph When Data length is 1 word Number of graphs x
number of display data
Basic 2+Number of graphs
When Data length is 2 words *2 Number of graphs x number of
display data x 2
When input range is set When Data length is 1 word +2
at non-numerical 0
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When Display range is When Data length is 1 word +2
+2
ON When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
Data length +2
When Alarm range is ON +2
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When Data length is 1 word +1
When Ideal line is ON +1
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2
When Display control is ON +Number of graphs +Number of graphs
Batch
sampling Cursor position ON +1
When Store cursor data is
When Data length is 1 word Number of graphs +1
ON
When Data length is 2 words *2 Number of graphs x 2
When Sampling trigger is Bit device +1 +1
When Trigger reset is ON +1 +1
When Scale of item axis is ON 0 +1
When Scale of numerical axis is ON 0 +1
Scale When Data length is 1 word +2
(outer) Input range +4
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
effecti
ve When alarm When Data length is 1 word +2
range is ON +2
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
When input range is set When Data length is 1 word +1
at non-numerical. +1
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-19


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Objects Number of Devices *1 Reference data


When Data length is 2 word Number of graphs x number
Basic 2+Number of graphs
(Fixed) of display data
When input range is set at
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4 0
non-numerical

2 When Display range is ON


When Alarm range is ON
When Data length is 2 words *2
When Data length is 2 words *2
+4
+4
+2
+2
When Ideal line is ON When Data length is 2 words *2 +2 +1
SCREENS & WINDOWS

When Display control is ON +Number of graphs +Number of graphs


Trend Worksheet Cursor position ON +1 +1
When Store cursor data is
Graph Related When Data length is 2 word
ON Number of graphs x 2
(Fixed)
When Scale of item axis is ON 0 +1
When Scale of numerical axis is ON 0 +1
Scale Input range When Data length is 2 words *2 +4 +4
(outer)
effective When alarm range
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4 +2
is ON
When input range is set at
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2 +1
non-numerical
Basic 0 4+Number of graphs x 2
When Input range X- When Data length is 1 word +2
is setting other axis 0
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
than a numerical
value Y- When Data length is 1 word +2
axis 0
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
X- When Data length is 1 word +2
+2
When Display axis When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
range is ON Y- When Data length is 1 word +2
+2
axis When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
X- When Data length is 1 word +2
+2
When Alarm range axis When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
is ON Y- When Data length is 1 word +2
+2
XY Real time axis When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
Graphs settings X- When Data length is 1 word +1
axis +1
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2
With initial point
Y- When Data length is 1 word +1
axis +1
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2
When Display control is ON +Number of graphs +Number of graphs
When Store old data date/time is ON +12 +1
When Store new data date/time is ON +12 +1
X-axis 0 +1
With inner scale
Y-axis 0 +1
X-axis 0 +2
With outer scale
Y-axis 0 +2
When Data length is 1 word Number of data x 2+2 +2
With ideal curve
When Data length is 2 words *2 Number of data x 4+2 +3

2-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Objects Number of Devices *1 Reference data

When Data length is 1 word Number of graphs x


X- number of display data x 2
axis Number of graphs x
When Data length is 2 words *2
number of display data x 4
Basic

Y-
When Data length is 1 word Number of graphs x
number of display data x 2
4+Number of graphs x 2
2
axis Number of graphs x
When Data length is 2 words *2

SCREENS & WINDOWS


number of display data x 4
X- When Data length is 1 word +2
When Input range is axis 0
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
setting other than a
numerical value Y- When Data length is 1 word +2
axis 0
When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
X- When Data length is 1 word +2
+2
When Display range is axis When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
ON Y- When Data length is 1 word +2
+2
axis When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
X- When Data length is 1 word +2
axis +2
When Alarm range is When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
Batch
sampling ON Y- When Data length is 1 word +2
+2
axis When Data length is 2 words *2 +4
X- When Data length is 1 word +1
axis +1
When Data length is 2 words *2 +2
With initial point
Y- When Data length is 1 word +1
axis +1
+2

When Display control is ON +Number of


+Number of graphs
graphs
When Sampling trigger is Bit device +2 +1
When Store old data date/time is ON +12 +1
XY
Graphs When Store new data date/time is ON +12 +1
X-axis 0 +1
With inner scale
Y-axis 0 +1
X-axis 0 +2
With outer scale
Y-axis 0 +2

When Data length is 1 word Number of


+3
With ideal curve dataÅ~2+2
When Data length is 2 words *2
Number of data4+2 +3
X- When Data length is 2 word Number of graphs x number
axis (fixed) of display data x 2
Basic 4+Number of graphs x 2
Y- When Data length is 2 word Number of graphs x number
axis (fixed) of display data x 2
When input range is X-axis +4 0
set at non-numerical Y-axis +4 0
When Display range is X-axis +4 +2
ON Y-axis +4 +2
When Alarm range is X-axis +4 +2
ON Y-axis +4 +2
Worksheet
Related X-axis +2 +1
With initial point
Y-axis +2 +1
When Display control is ON +Number of graphs +Number of graphs
When Store old data date/time is ON +12 +1
When Store new data date/time is ON +12 +1
X-axis 0 +1
With inner scale
Y-axis 0 +1
X-axis 0 +2
With outer scale
Y-axis 0 +2
With ideal curve When Data length is 2 words *2 Number of data x 4+2 +3

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-21


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Number of Devices Reference


Objects
*1 data
Basic 2 3
When Specify file No. is External +1 0

2 Execute PLC
When Record specify method is Specify No.
(internal) 0 +1
When Record specify method is Specify No.
data folder +1 +1
(external)
SCREENS & WINDOWS

When Specify comment is ON +16*6 +1


When Notify end is ON 0 +1
When Notify error is ON 0 +1
PLC Data Basic 17 3
Folder
Comment When Specify file No. is External +1 0
transfer
Video Basic 1 2
capture, When Trigger reset is ON +1 +1
Save data to
memory When Specify file No. is External +1 0
Function control by devices

card, Save When Notify end is ON 0 +1


worksheet to
memory
card,Save
operating When Notify error is ON 0 +1
log to
memory card
Transfer 1 Basic 3 3
word When Trigger reset is ON +1 +1
Local Basic 1 1
Window When Specify coordinates is ON +2 +2
display When Trigger reset is ON +1 +1
Basic 1 2
Global When Specify window No. is External +1 0
window
display When Specify coordinates is ON +2 +2
When Trigger reset is ON +1 +1
Basic 1 1
Extended When Trigger reset is ON +1 +1
command
When Notify end is ON 0 +1
communicati
on When Notify error is ON 0 +1
When setting up command *11 *12

When Trigger reset is OFF 1 1


Other than
When Trigger reset is ON 2 2
the above
When Notify end is ON *7 0 +1
Internally 0
File No. specify mode 1
Externally 1
BMP file switching
Internally 0 +1
Method of specifying channel*10
Externally +1 +1
VNC display 0 0
Trend graph When Data
+1 x number of
Arithmetic operations Function

(real-time, length is 1
batch word graphs
sampling), +1 x number of
Per single variable (A to E)
XY- When Data graphs
diagram(real- length is 2 +2 x number of
time, batch words *2 graphs
sampling)
When Data
length is 1 +1
Other than word
Per single variable (A to E) +1
the above When Data
length is 2 +2
words *2

2-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

*1 The relationship between device settings (numerical values, PLC devices, indirect references, cells) and the
values for the number of devices in this table is as follows:
(1) When value is set : 0(not number of device for that worksheet, but calculated by 0).)
(2) When a PLC device is set : Number of devices value in this table
(3) When an indirect reference is set: Number of devices value in this table + 1
(4) When a calculation is set : Calculation depends on the number of variables (A to E) used in the
calculation formula. Calculation is performed by the number of devices
2

SCREENS & WINDOWS


in "Calculation" in this table.
Note, however, that when a numerical value (constant) is set to a
variable (A to E), calculation is performed not by the number of devices
in "Calculation" in this table but by 0.
(5) When a cell is set : Number of devices value in this table (Pay attention to notes *2, *5 and
*6 below.)
*2 The number of devices is (value of number of device in that worksheet)/2, if the device of Target is a 32-byte device
or cell.
*3 The end NUL code is not included in the number of text string bytes and number of characters.
*4 Perform calculation and add individually for multiple parts that are swapped by N state parts.
*5 The number of devices to which a cell is set is calculated as follows:
Number of characters+1 => Number of characters/2+1
+ (Number of characters+1)=> +(Number of characters/2+1)
*6 When a cell is selected for a comment-specify device, 17 is added to the number of devices.
*7 Exit notification occurs only when alarm history, trend graph control data, printing and operatinglog are
cleared.
*8 Total number of devices used in the switch function setup
*9 Total reference data used in the switch function setup
*10 When file folder is specified as VTCPT only under VT3 mode.
*11 Depending on the settings of send data/receive data devices of each command.
Each value +0
Each PLC device +0
Each indirect reference +1
Hower, 1 is added incrementally when successive numbers are assigned to PLC devices or indirect reference.
*12 The sum of send data volume and receive data volume of each command.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-23


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Indirect reference devices


The table below lists the number of indirect reference devices that are consumed when "Indirect reference" is
selected in the device setting for each part.
In the case of N state parts, the number of indirect reference devices currently set for all of the states of the N state
part is calculated and totaled individually.

2 If switching function “switch”, lamp switch and cross-key are additionally added, the total number of devices for
indirect reference set in various switches is calculated separately.
Number of
SCREENS & WINDOWS

Objects Function Number of Devices Detailed Setting


Devices Used
Switch bit device 0
Lamp switch Lamp bit device 1
Blink bit device 1
Lamp bit device 1
Lamp
Blink bit device 1
Set bit Switch bit device 0
Set data 0
Set word Target word device
Other than set data 1
Switch Set digits Target word device 1
Set text string Target word device 0
Extended command Send data 0
communication Receive data 0
Other than position control Reference bit device 1
Graphic attribute Position control (specify X-axis relative coordinate specified device 1
controls directly) Y-axis relative coordinate specified device 1
Position control (specify point) Reference word device 1
Reference word device 1
Numerical value Input range/upper and lower limit*1 2
display Display range/upper-lower limit *1 2
Alarm range/upper and lower limit*1 2
Reference word device 1
Text display Specify text color by device
Target word device 1
Specify text color by device
Message display 1
Target word device
Frame updating: specify No. Frame No. 1
Position control (specify point)
Point No. 1
Animation display Point updating: specify No.
Position control (specify X-axis relative coordinate specified device 1
directly) Y-axis relative coordinate specified device 1
Function control by Extended command Send data 0
device communication Receive data 0
Reference word device 1
Input range/upper and lower limit*1 2
Bar graph meter, Pie
chart meter, Fan Display range/upper-lower limit *1 2
meter
Alarm range/upper and lower limit*1 2
Ideal line 1
Statistical bar graph/
Reference word device 1
pie chart graph
Scale (outer) OFF 2
Input range/upper-lower limit
Scale (outer) ON 4
Scale (outer) OFF 2
Trend Graph Display range/upper-lower limit
(Real-time/batch Scale (outer) ON 4
sampling/worksheet Scale (outer) OFF 2
sharing) Alarm range/upper-lower limit
Scale (outer) ON 4
Ideal line 1
Hidden value 1

2-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Number of
Objects Function Number of Devices Detailed Setting
Devices Used
Input range(X-axis)/upper and lower limit*1 2
Input range(Y-axis)/upper and lower limit*1 2
Display range(X-axis)/upper and lower limit*1 2
XYgraphs
(Real-time/batch
sampling/worksheet
sharing)
Display range (Y-axis)/upper and lower limit*1
Alarm range(X-axis)/upper and lower limit*1
2
2 2
Alarm range(Y-axis)/ upper and lower limit*1 2

SCREENS & WINDOWS


Initial point (X-axis) 1
Initial point (Y-axis) 1

*1 When only upper or lower limit is set, the consumed number of devices is (value of number of consumed devices
in that worksheet)/2.

Restriction of images number


The maximum number of images that can be handled on VT STUDIO is limited to 10000 or 20000.
It is possible to switch the count limit setting via the menu "Resources(R)" -> "VT system settings(S)" -> "Others(O)".
"Other", page 12-31
The number of images is counted as follows.

Point • The number of images indicates the number of image data items in the VT3 files. Images
having the same image data content are counted as one image as a duplicity check is
performed.
• When text string replacement display function is used, the accumulated number of images
is equal to the number of ID for the profile file and nameplate (switch, lamp,Nstate
lamp,Nstate components).

Parts Number of Images


Decorative frames, images, outline text 1 per part
1 per part + number of plate states
Switches, lamp switches, lamps Example: In case of plate ON=OFF for a lamp,
1+1=2 images
1 per part + number of states + number of plate states
N state lamp
Example: When a plate is set to states 0 and 1
N state components (type of parts: switch Elamp)
for N state lamp 3 states, 3+2=5 images
Available Without alarm +2
image frame With alarm +4
Without alarm +20
With alarm +60
Numerical value Without alarm +1
Image font With prefix
display With alarm +3
Without alarm +1
With postfix
With alarm +3
Without alarm +20
Minimum font
With alarm +60
Text display Available image frame +2
Animation display Number of frames
Available Without alarm +1
image frame With alarm +3
Bar graph meter Available image frame +3
Pie chart meter
Fan meter ON image +1
Image instrument OFF image +1
With alarm +2
Rectangular/circular
Available image frame +1
Statistical graphs
Message Available image frame +1
Alarm Available image frame +1
Trend Graph Available image frame +1
XY graphs Available image frame +1

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 2-25


2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens

Parts Number of Images


VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) Max. +2*1
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/
Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/ Max.+2*1
Gradation Q5M(W)A

2
VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) Max.+6*1
VT3-S12/S10 Max.+9*1
VT3-X15 Max.+16*1
SCREENS & WINDOWS

VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) Max.+2*1
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/
Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/ Max.+2*1
Wallpaper Amplified Q5M(W)A
display VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) Max.+6*1
VT3-S12/S10 Max.+9*1
VT3-X15 Max.+16*1
Image
VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) Max.+2*1
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/
Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/ Max.+2*1
Centralized Q5M(W)A
display
VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) Max.+6*1
VT3-S12/S10 Max.+9*1
VT3-X15 Max.+16*1
VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) Max.+2*1
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/
Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/ Max.+2*1
Parallel Q5M(W)A
Wallpaper Image
display
VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) Max.+6*1
VT3-S12/S10 Max.+9*1
VT3-X15 Max.+16*1
Other parts 0 images

The number of images can be confirmed by "Resources(R)" -> "Data check(D)" -> "All data(A)".
"12-9 Data Check"
*1 The number of available images may vary depending upon the contents and size of images.

2-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3
3

FILES & PRINTING


FILES & PRINTING
This chapter describes how to make new data files, and read, save and print
files.

3-1 File Manager •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-2


3-2 Print••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 3-23

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-1


3-1 File Manager

New(N)
File(F) -> New(N) Ctrl + N

Important VT STUDIO you cannot be make screens for the VT1 series. To make screens for the VT1
series, use VT BUILDER.

3 Makes new files and edit new screens.


VT STUDIO is started up, a window titled "VT STUDIO" is displayed.
FILES & PRINTING

Follow the procedure below to display a new screen.

1 Either select "File" -> "New" from Menu in that order, or click the button .
Before you create a new file, the "VT model settings" window for setting the hardware is displayed.

Point New files must be saved after they are edited.

VT/PLC model settings

Setup the hardware in which the data that is created is to be applied. The "VT model settings" window is always
displayed when VT STUDIO is started up, and "New" is selected to create a new file.
VT model of screen to be created is set in that window.

The startup screen of VT BUILDER is displayed when selecting VT1 series.

For the details of setting, see "12-2 VT Model Setting".


After completion of settings, click “PLC model settings” button to set PLC.

3-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

FILES & PRINTING


For the details of setting, see see "12-3 PLC Model Settings".

VT/PLC model settings can also be changed while files are being edited.
Select according to the sequence of "Resource(R)"-> "VT model settings(V)", "Resource(R)"->"PLC model settings(P)".

Reference Number of dots in the display panel for each VT3 model

Number of Dots of Compatibility of Screen Data


VT3 Model
Displayed Panel among VT3 Models *1
VT3-X15 1024(W) x 768(H) -
VT3-S12/S10 800(W) x 600(H) VT3-S12/S10 compatible
VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) 640(W) x 480(H) VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G) compatible*2
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/ VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5T(W)A
Q5T(W)A 320(W) x 240(H) compatible*3
VT3-Q5M -
VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) 320(W) x 128(H) VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A) compatible
*1 For example, screen data you have made with the "Target VT" set to VT3-S12 can be used on
the VT3-S10 by changing the "Target VT" setting to VT3-S10.
Note, however, that when the "Target PLC" has been changed, devices and other information
must be set again.
*2 VT3-V7R/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) doesn't support MultiTalk function.
Nor support network connection.
Nor support barcode and KL link, etc.
*3 Function switches and operation switches that can only be used in VT3 handy Series cannot
be used in non VT3 handy Series.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-3


3-1 File Manager

Open
File(F) Open(O) Ctrl + O

Reads the file to be edited when editing an already created file.

1
3 Either select "File" -> "Open" from Menu in that order, or click the button
The "Open Files" window is displayed.
.
FILES & PRINTING

2 Select the folder (directory) containing the file to be read and the file name.

Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to be opened.
File name(N) Select the name of the file to be opened.
Files of type(T)*1 Select the type of file. Please select "VTS file(*.vs*.*.vu*)".
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
*1 VTS file names are as follows:
VT STUDIO Version File Name
Ver.1 *.vs1/*.vu1
Ver.2 *.vs2/*.vu2
Ver.3 *.vs3/*.vu3
Ver. 4 or later *.vs4/*.vu4

All VTS files (for VT2/VT3 Series) can be read in VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions. However, files may only
be saved as VTS files in Ver. 4/Ver. 3/Ver. 2 formats.

3 Click "Open(O)" button.


The selected file opens.

Point • To open VT files (*.vtd, *.vt2, *.vt3, *.vt4, *.vz4, *.vt5, *.vz5) created in VT1 (VT BUILDER),
open by "Load VT1 files".
• When opening VT2 files (*.vd1, 2, 2u, 3, 3u, *.vx1, 2, 2u, 3, 3u) created by VT2(VT2BUILDER),
click "read VT2 files".

Reference Click "move" button to move the folder in the pull-down menu.
Previous folderPrevious used folder
Current folder or fileFile in current open folder
Screen sample folderFolder for storing screen sample
Default FolderDefault Folder
Last used folderLast used folder

 Auto-backup files
The file name is "! auto-backup file 0.vs4" for individual startup; the backup file name created previously is "! auto-
backup file 0.vs4", and those created subsequently are "! auto-backup file 1.vs4" for multiple startup.

3-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

If VT STUDIO ends in error, the message "VT STUDIO did not end successfully at last file edit. Load backup file?" will
be displayed the next time that VT2 BUILDER is started up. Click the "Yes" button to read auto-backup files.
When the updating time of auto-backup file is set, select sequentially the menu "Edit(E)" -> "Item Setting(I)",
and then set in "file" tab of "item setting" window.
"Option Settings", page 4-22

Loading VT2 Files


File -> Load VT2 files
3

FILES & PRINTING


When VT2 files(*.vd1,2,2u,3,3u,*.vx1,2,2u,3,3u) already created in VT2(VT2 BUILDER) are edited by VT STUDIO,
the files to be edited are read.

1 Select "File" -> "Load VT2 files" from Menu in that order.
Confirmation message is displayed.

“Read VT2 file” window is displayed after clicking "OK" button.

2 Select the folder (directory) containing the file to be read and the file name.

Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to be opened.
File name(N) Select the name of the file to be opened.
File of type(T) Select the type of file. Please select "VT2 file (*.vd*.*.vd*u.*.vx*.*.vx*u)".
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.

3 Click the "Open" button.


The selected file opens.

 Restrictions when reading VT2 files


VT2 files are converted to VTS files when they are read on VT STUDIO. VT model is not changed.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-5


3-1 File Manager

Loading VT1 Files


File -> Load VT1 files

Loads the file to be edited when editing VT1 files (*.vtd, *.vt2, *.vt3, *.vt4, *.vz4, *.vt5, *.vz5) created in VT BUILDER
on VT STUDIO.

3 1 Select "File" -> "Load VT1 files" from Menu in that order.
Confirmation message is displayed.
FILES & PRINTING

2 Click the "OK" button.


"Read VT1file" window appears.

3 Select the folder (directory) containing the file to be read and the file name.

Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to open.
File Name(N) Select the name of the file to open.
File of type(T) Select the type of file. Please select "VT1 file(*.vu*.*.vz*)"
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.

4 Click the "Open" button.


The selected file opens.

 Restrictions when reading VT1 files


VT1 files read by VTSTUDIO are converted into VTS files.

 Conversion of model No.


Model before Conversion (VT1 file) Model after Conversion (VTS file)
VT-10T VT3-V10
VT-10S VT3-V10
VT-7S VT3-V7
VT-5S VT3-Q5S
VT-5M VT3-Q5M
VT-10T+16M VT3-V10+16M
VT-10S+16M/VT-7S+16M VT3-V10+16M
VT-7SR VT3-V7R

3-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

 About compatibility
Item Description
Multiple switches
Multiple lamp
These are divided into individual parts at conversion.
switches
Multiple lamps
Numerical value
These are divided into individual parts at conversion.
tables

Parts
Alarm display
When "Line mode" is set to 2-lines display and "Number of display lines" is set to odd-
number in the alarm display in the VT1 file, the "Number of display lines" in the VTS file
becomes even-number and is reduced by one line. For example, if the number of
3
display lines is set to five lines in the VT1 file, the number of display lines becomes four

FILES & PRINTING


lines when the VT1 file is read and converted to a VTS file.
Ellipses/arcs/fans Ellipses, arcs and fans larger than 1023 dots are converted to 1023 dots.
Numbers having three lower digits are expanded to four digits before they are
Label converted. Note, however, that when the label is "xxx_***", numbers are not converted
to four digits. (xxx: alphabet character for each part)
Messages are copied to the block No.0 and 1 of the message display. Messages are
Block No.0/1 messages
also copied to alarm ID0 and ID1 messages.

Point Parts placed outside of the display frame (green area) are sometimes moved, when imported
to VT2 BUILDER.

Close
File -> Close

Quits editing of screens, and closes the file.


If the file has not been saved since the last change, a confirmation window for checking whether or not to save the file
currently being created is displayed.
• To save the file, click the "Yes" button.
• To not save the file, click the "No" button.
• To cancel the close operation, click the "Cancel" button.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-7


3-1 File Manager

Save
File(F) -> Save(S) Ctrl + S

Saves the screen that has been edited under the same file name as the current file name.
To leave the data before the changes were made, select "Save as" or "Compress and save" described below.

3 Point • When "Save" is selected, data before changes are reflected will be lost.
• The name of newly created file is "Unititled.vs4" by default.
• "Save as" is automatically selected as the save option for newly made files even if "Save"
FILES & PRINTING

is executed.
• "Save as" will be displayed when saving files in VT STUDIO Ver.3 or lower format. Execute
"Save as" and "Compress and save" when saving in "**.vs3/*.vu3/.vs2/*.vu2" format.

Save as/Compress and Save


File -> Save as
-> Compress and save

Saves files under a name different from the current file name. To do this, select "File" -> "Save as" or "Compress and
save" from Menu in that order.
Newly created screens are always saved by "Save as". Enter the file name at "File name" in the "Save as" window.

Item Description
Save in(I)*1 Select the drive and folder to save the file.
File name(N) Enter the file name. The extension name becomes vs4 or vu4.
Select VTS (*.vu4/*.vs3/*.vs2) / VTS compressed files (*.vu4/*.vu3/*.vu2).
Files of type(T) Files saved in "*.vs3/*.vu3, *.vs2/*.vu2" format can be opened by VT STUDIO Ver.3, Ver.2. VTS
file will be saved after compression when VTS compressed file (*.vu4/*.vu3/*.vu2) is selected.
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
*1 The directory to save the file can be set at "VTS file save folder" on the "File" tab in the "Option settings"
window that is displayed by "Edit" -> "Option settings".

Reference • Clicking the button and "Save".


• For details on option settings, see
"Option Settings", page 4-22

Point • If added functions are in use in VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions, files cannot be saved in
*.vs3/*.vu3/*.vs2/*.vu2 formats.
"12-9 Data Check", Page 12-46
"A-4 Adding and Modifying Options", Page A-23
• The file in "*.vs3/*.vu3/*.vs2/*.vu2" format will be exported when saved in "*.vs3/*.vu3/*.vs2/
*.vu2" format.

3-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

Import
File -> Import(I)

Import screens and system settings from other VT3/VT2 file.


If only screens are imported, the "Page configuration management" window can also be used. For details, see
"Screen Import" in page 12-52.

Reference For the VT2 model, only screen import is possible.


3
(The menu is changed to "Import screen(I)" and the "Page configuration management" screen

FILES & PRINTING


displayed).

1 Select File(F) -> Import(I) from the menu, or click the button.
The "Open import file" window is displayed.

2 Select the folder containing the VT file and file name to be imported.

Item Description
File position(I) Select the driver disk and folder where the file to be opened is located.
File name(N) Select the file name to be opened.
File type(T)*1 Select the file category. Please select "VTS file(*.vs*,*.vu*)".
Move(M) Click [Move] button, move to existing folders, and recent folders.
*1 VTS file name is shown below.
VT STUDIO Version File name
Ver.1 *.vs1/*.vu1
Ver.2 *.vs2/*.vu2
Ver.3 *.vs3/*.vu3
Ver.4 or later *.vs4/*.vu4

All VTS files can be read in VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions. However, files may only be saved as VTS files
in Ver. 4/Ver. 3/Ver. 2 formats.

3 Click the "Open(O)" button.


The "Import" window is displayed.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-9


3-1 File Manager

4 Set up PLC model (Step1).

3
FILES & PRINTING

Item Description
Import result To display PLC model information of import source file.
Select the PLC model for the edited file. Execute "PLC_A" -> "PLC_B" or "PLC_B" -> "PLC_A".
Import source
If MultiTalk is selected, only importing "PLC_A" or "PLC_B" is OK.
This is displayed when station No. is set up in PLC model settings and a station No. can be
selected.

Details settings

Check this option to save VT file being edited before it is imported. Click the "..." button to
Create backup file
change the folder in which files are saved.

5 Click the "Next(N)" button.


The "Step2: Import source settings" window is displayed.

3-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

6 Make necessary settings in the "Step2: Import source settings" screen.

3
(1) (2)

FILES & PRINTING


Item Description
To check the item to be imported.
"Screen" "VT system settings" "Global function switch" "Device comments", "Trend graph",
"Alarm", "Message", "Windows fonts", "Device transfer", "Global function control" "PLC data
(1) Import item
folder", "Worksheet".
Only items contained in the import source file can be displayed. Select an item to display its
advanced settings.
(2) Details settings Set up the import source for each item.
Check this option to save VT file being edited before it is imported. Click the "..." button to
Create backup file
change the folder in which files are saved.

Screen

(1) (2)

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-11


3-1 File Manager

Item Description
To display screens list of import source. Select a page. To select multiple screens, press Shift
and hold the "Shift" key and click the mouse.
(1) Import result Click the button or double click to open the Preview screen.
Click the button to switch between listing display and thumbnail display.
To display screens list of import destination. Select a screen.
To select multiple screens, press Shift and hold the "Shift" key and click the mouse.
Use the "All(L)" option in the right-click menu to select all pages.
3 (2) Import source Click the button to switch between listing display and thumbnail display. Select "All
screens" to display all the pages (Page 0 to 8999).
To change import location, use the "Move(M)" option in the right-click menu or drag and drop to
FILES & PRINTING

other page.
Add selected page to the import destination. Import location is set up in "Import destination
setting" window.

Unused pages in import destination can be searched.


Alternatively, you can select the import source, and right-click the mouse and select "Add to
import source(A)".
Recover the selected page from import destination to import source.
Alternatively, you can select the import source, right-click and select "Delete from import
source(D)".

 VT system settings

To be used for import source screen, and only importable items can be checked.

 Other settings
Check import sources and specify the import destination.
When importing, any used ID or setting No. in the current screen data will be skipped automatically. Import
destination can be manually changed.

3-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

5 Click the "Next(N)" button.


The "Step3: Device settings" window is displayed.

Point In case existing VT system settings or other are imported in the edited screen data, the
overwrite confirmation window will be displayed.

6 Make settings in the "Step3: Device settings" window.


Import destination devices in red color indicate they are already used by the screen data being edited.
The device settings automatically transformed due to KV STUDIO integration will be displayed in bold.
3

FILES & PRINTING


Item Description
Click [Separate Display] button to display the setup of input device separately. Switch separate
Back display
display/batch display, the manually set import device setup will be restored to initial value.
Insert target device Set import target device.
Display device cross reference in the import target. The usage of device in current edit menu
Cross reference
may be confirmed.
Check this option to save VT file being edited before it is imported. Click the "..." button to
Create backup file
change the folder in which files are saved.

7 Click the "Import execution" button.


Once import is completed, the import result is displayed in the "Search result list" window.

 Restrictions on import function


• 1. The number of characters to be imported should not be higher than the max number of characters allowed for
screen files.
However, in case the number of Window fonts is over 64, the excess part can be converted into bitmap fonts
before they are imported.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens", Page 2-14
• The settings of memory capacity will be changed automatically when importing alarm or trend graph.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-13


3-1 File Manager

Read from Memory Card


File -> Memory Card -> Read from Memory Card

Reads VT files for the Memory Card currently saved to Memory Card.

1
3 Select "File" -> "Memory Card" -> "Read from Memory Card" from Menu in that order.
The "Read from Memory Card" window is displayed.
FILES & PRINTING

2 Select the drive containing the VT file for the Memory Card to be read and the file name.

Item Description
Look in(I) Select the Memory Card drive containing the VT file used for the Memory Card.
File name(N) Select the name of the file to be opened.
Files of type(T) *1 Select "VT file (*.ms*.*.md*) for memory card" from files of type.
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.

*1 The file names of VT files for memory card are shown below.
Software Version VT Model File Name
Ver.1 VT2 VTEDT*.md1 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 BUILDER Ver.2 VT2 VTEDT*.md2 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
Ver.3 VT2 VTEDT*.md3 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT STUDIO Ver.1
VT3 VTEDT*.ms1 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
Ver.2
VT3 VTEDT*.ms2 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT STUDIO Ver.3
VT3 VTEDT*.ms3 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
Ver.4 or later
VT3 VTEDT*.ms4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)

3 Click the "Open" button.


The selected VT file for the Memory Card is read.

Point • VT2 files (VTEDT*.md4) for memory cards written using VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions
cannot be read by VT STUDIO Ver. 3/Ver. 2/Ver.1.
• VT files (*.DAT, *.DT3, *.DT5) for Memory Card created on VT1 cannot be read directly on VT
STUDIO. Open the VT file in VT BUILDER, save it as a VT file (*.vtd, *.vt2, *.vt3, *.vt4, *.vz4,
*.vt5, *.vz5), and then open it in VT STUDIO.

3-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

Write to Memory Card


File -> Memory Card -> Write to Memory Card

Writes VT files for Memory Card to the Memory Card.

1 Select "File" -> "Memory Card" -> "Write to Memory Card" from Menu in that order.
The "Write to Memory Card" window is displayed. 3

FILES & PRINTING


2 Select the drive (folder) containing the Memory Card and the file No.

Item Description
Saved as screen data that can After being selected, they are saved into the memory card as screen data that can be
be loaded*1 automatically loaded.
Select the Memory Card drive at the write destination.
Folder*2 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the folder can be set in the "Select Folder"
window.
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
File No. Set the file No. (0 to 9) of the VT file for the Memory Card.
File name Displays the name of the VT file for the Memory Card to be written.
Copy system program When this checkbox is marked, the system program is also written to Memory Card.
*1 For the details of automatic loading, see "Autoload", page 3-16.
*2 The folder to save the file can be set at "VT file for memory card save folder" on the "File" tab in the "Option
Settings" window that is displayed by "Edit" -> "Option settings".

3 Click the "OK" button.


Writes VT files for Memory Card to the Memory Card.
VT Line type File Name
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for File No.0 to 9)
VT3 VTEDT*.ms4 (* stands for File No.0 to 9)

Point • When writing into the memory card, the path to the driver of memory card must be
designated since VT files for memory card shall be read from the path of memory card.
• VT files (*.DAT, *.DT3, *.DT5) for VT1 Memory Cards cannot be written by VT STUDIO.
• The system program of VT2 cannot use VT2 of Ver.1 to 3 to read VT2 files (VTEDT*.md4) for
memory card that are created by VT STUDIO. Send the system program to rewrite the VT2
system program to Ver.3. Also, VT2 files (VTEDT*.md1, VTEDT*.md2) for VT2 BUILDER
Ver.1 or Ver.2 Memory Cards cannot be written in VT2 BUILDER Ver.4. Meanwhile, VT2 files
(VTEDT* . md1,2,3) for memory card of VT2 BUILDER Ver.1 to 3 cannot be created in VT
STUDIO.
• VT3 files (VTEDT*.ms4) for memory cards written using VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions
cannot be read by a VT3 deploying system program Ver. 3/Ver. 2/Ver.1. Execute system
program transmission and overwrite the VT3 system program with Ver. 4. Also note that
VT3 files (VTEDT*.ms3/ms2/ms1) for VT STUDIO Ver. 3/Ver. 2/Ver. 1 memory cards cannot
be written in VT STUDIO Ver. 4 or later versions.
• Up to ten VT files for Memory Cards can be written to the Memory Card. The number of
files that can be written to Memory Card changes according to the size of the screen data.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-15


3-1 File Manager

Reference • "Option Settings", page 4-22


• Sending the system program from the Memory Card
VT3 Series Hardware Manual "5-11 Memory Card"
• Sending system program from VT STUDIO
"13-3 PC->VT Send Data"
• Autoload
VT3 Series Hardware Manual, "5-11Memory Card"

3
 Autoload
FILES & PRINTING

If Autoload is used when VT3 host computer is switched on, it's possible to automatically read the screen data and
system program already saved in Autoload file folders in the memory card.

Point • The files in Autoload file folders will be overlapped whenever the screen data for Autoload
is written into the memory card.
• If the memory card that has saved Autoload files is always inserted onto VT3 host
computer, Autoload will be executed whenever switching-on.
• Autoload isn't executed in the case of conflict between screen data for autoload and the
type of VT3.

• Please don't switch off VT3 during the system program is sent. Otherwise, it will damage
the VT3 system and prevent normal operation of the VT3.
• When screen data is read from Memory Card, the screen data that was saved on VT3 will be
lost. At the same time, the historic alarm data, trend graph data(real-time) , XY-graph
NOTICE data(real-time) and operating log will be lost. Save data on VT STUDIO or Memory Card as
required.
• If the system program is sent, the saved screen data, historic alarm data, trend graph
data(real-time), XY-graph data(real-time), PLC file folder data, operating log and setting
data in system mode will be deleted.

3-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

Verify with Memory Card


File -> Memory Card -> Verify with Memory Card

Verifies the screen data currently being edited with the VT file for the Memory Card saved on Memory Card.

1 Select "File" -> "Memory Card" -> "Verify with Memory Card" from Menu in that order.
"The "Verify with Memory Card" window is displayed. 3
2 Select the drive containing the VT file for the Memory Card to be verified and the file name.

FILES & PRINTING


Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive of the Memory Card containing the VT file for the Memory Card to be verified.
File Name(N) Select the name of the file to verify.
Files of type(T) *1 Select "VT file (*.ms*.*.md*) for memory card" from the type of files.
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
*1 The file names of VT files for memory card are shown below.
Software Version VT models File Name
Ver.1 VT2 VTEDT*.md1 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 BUILDER Ver.2 VT2 VTEDT*.md2 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
Ver.3 VT2 VTEDT*.md3 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT STUDIO Ver.1
VT3 VTEDT*.ms1 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
Ver.2
VT3 VTEDT*.ms2 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT STUDIO Ver.3
VT3 VTEDT*.ms3 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
VT2 VTEDT*.md4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)
Ver.4 or later
VT3 VTEDT*.ms4 (* stands for file No.0 to 9)

3 Click the "Open" button.


The screen data is verified with the selected VT file for the Memory Card.

4 Display the compared results.


The verified results for each data item are displayed.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-17


3-1 File Manager

Point • In the case of conflict of printing trigger bit device of form screen, VT system settings may
differ from each other, so does the screen data.
• In the case of conflict of worksheet, the worksheet may differ from screen data.

Comparing VTS Files

3 File -> Compare with VTS file

Compares the screen data currently being edited with the currently saved VTS file.
FILES & PRINTING

1 Select "File" -> "Compare with VTS file" from Menu in that order.
The "Compare with VTS file" window is displayed.

2 Select the files (file folder) and file names of VTS files to be compared.

Item Description
Look in(I) Selects the drive and folder to which the VTS file to be compared is saved.
File Name(N) Selects the name of the VTS file to be compared.
File of type(T) Select the type of file. Please select "VTS file(*.vs*,*.vu*)"
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.

3 Click the "Open" button.


The screen data is verified with the selected VTS file.

4 Display the compared results.


The verified results for each data item are displayed.

Point • In the case of conflict of printing trigger bit device of form screen, VT system settings may
differ from each other, so does the screen data.
• In the case of conflict of worksheet, the worksheet may differ from screen data.

3-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

Operating Log File Loading


File(F) -> Read operating log(L)

Read operating logs and VT3 files for memory card saved with VT3 series.
The operating logs can be checked by VT STUDIO.

Reference • Save operating log into memory card in VT3 system mode
VT3 Series Hardware Manual, "5-11 Memory Card"
3
• Save operating log into memory card

FILES & PRINTING


"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"

1 Select menu "File(F)" -> "Read operating log(L)" in that order.

2 Select the files to be read.

Item Description
*2 "Open file" window is displayed after clicking this button. Select the operating
Operating log File selection
logs to be read.
VT3 files for
After selection, read VT3 files for memory card together with the operating logs.
VT3 files for memory card
memory card*1 "Read from memory card" window is displayed after clicking this button.
Select
The selected VT3 file for the Memory Card is read.

*1 Under VT3 system mode (memory card - log data), the screen data and operating log are saved into
memory card at the same time. When selecting the operating log in the memory card, VT3 files for
memory card (VTOPL0.ms4) will be automatically selected.
*2 Up to 10 files can be read simultaneously. If several files have been read, the operating logs will be
properly incorporated and displayed. If new operating log is to be read, the operating log already read will
be cleared.

3 Click the "OK" button.


Operating log list appears.

Reference • "11-11 Operation Log"


• "List of the Operation Log", page 11-47

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-19


3-1 File Manager

Ladder Monitor Data Verification

■ Internal ROM and ladder project

1 Select [File(F)]→[Ladder monitor data verification(J)]→[Internal ROM and ladder project(L)] from the menu in
order.

3 2 Select the ladder project verifying with internal memory (ROM) and click "OK" button.
<When object PLC is KV-5500/5000/3000 series and KV Nano Series>
FILES & PRINTING

Item Description
KV STUDIO currently being started To verify with the project of currently started KV STUDIO.
KV STUDIO Project To specify and verify the project of KV STUDIO.

<When object PLC is Q series (Q mode)/QnU series CPU direct link>

"Select ladder project" window appears.

3 "Verification result" window appears.

3-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-1 File Manager

■ Memory card and ladder project/memory card

1 Select [File(F)]→[Ladder monitor data verification(J)]→[Memory card and ladder project/memory card(M)] from
the menu in order.

2 Select the ladder monitor data in verification source and the data in verification destination, and click "OK"
button
<When object PLC is KV-5500/5000/3000 and KV Nano Series>
3

FILES & PRINTING


<When object PLC is Q series (Q mode)/QnU series CPU direct link>

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-21


3-1 File Manager

Item Description
Select a drive To specify drive and select ladder monitor data when checked.
Verification Drive To select the memory card drive.
source (Ladder To display the drive and folder of memory card. The folder is "drive
monitor data) Folder name":\VTLDR.(e.g. the folder is D:\VTLDR when drive of memory
card is D.)
KV STUDIO currently being started To select the project of currently started KV STUDIO.
Verification
3 target (Ladder
project/Ladder
KV STUDIO Project
Ladder project
To select the project of KV STUDIO.
To select ladder project.
monitor data)
Ladder monitor data To select ladder monitor data.
FILES & PRINTING

3 "Verification result" window appears.

File Log
File -> File log

The last four edited files are memorized and displayed as a file log. When the log of the file to be edited is selected
from the "File" menu, the file is opened and can be edited,

Exit
File -> Exit

Saves the screen currently being edited and exits VT STUDIO.


The confirmation window for checking whether or not to save the screen currently made screen is displayed.

• To save the file, click the "Yes" button.


• To not save the file, click the "No" button.
• To cancel the close operation, click the "Cancel" button.

The file that you made is saved, and VT STUDIO is exited.

3-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-2 Print

Print Settings
File -> Print settings

Set the print items in advance to print screens after they have been made.

1
3
Select "File" -> "Print settings" from Menu in that order.
The "Print settings" window is displayed.

FILES & PRINTING


2 Set the print items in the "Print settings" window, and click the "OK" button.
This enables the print settings.

Common

Item Description
Select and check the item to be printed from "Cover", "VT system settings", "Global function
Print items switch", "Trend graph", "Alarm", "Message", "Windows fonts", "Device transfer", "Global function
control", "Worksheet (settings)", "Page configuration" and "Screen".
Print start page No. Set the starting page number to be printed at the lower part of paper.
Select either to directly output to the printer and print, or save the print image as a rich text
Output to
format file (RTF file).
Print preview Displays a preview of the selected print target.
Printer settings Sets the printer to be used.
Print Executes printing.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-23


3-2 Print

 When the output destination is set to RTF


If you print with the output destination set to RTF file, the "Select output destination folder" window is displayed.
Set the drive and directory (folder) to save the rich text file (RTF) to.

3
FILES & PRINTING

The name of the file to be saved is as follows:


[path] / [file]_[number].rtf
[path] : Directory name specified by the directory name
[file] : VTS file name with an extension name of vs4/vu4/vs3/vu3/vs2/vu2 is not included.
[number] : Continuous number (1, 2, 3 ...)*
* Rich Text(RTF) files are divided and saved to avoid oversize.

Cover setting

The following describes an instance of when to print a cover.

3-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-2 Print

Item Description
Date When this checkbox is marked, the date is printed on the cover.
Font name Sets the font name for the date.
Date Font size Sets the font size (8 to 36) for the font.
Text string Sets the text string for the date.
Current date Today's date is set to the text string when the "Current date" button is clicked.
Title When this checkbox is marked, the titleis printed on the cover.

Title
Font name
Font size
Sets the font name for the title.
Sets the font size (8 to 72) for the title.
3
Text string Sets the text string for the title.

FILES & PRINTING


Author When this checkbox is marked, the author is printed on the cover.
Font name Sets the font name for the author.
Author
Font size Sets the font size (8 to 72) for the author.
Text string Sets the text string for the author.
Memo When this checkbox is marked, the memo is printed on the cover.
Font name Sets the font name for the memo.
Memo
Font size Sets the font size (8 to 36) for the memo.
Text string Sets the text string for the memo.

VT system settings

No special setting items are provided for printing VT system settings.


The following settings can be printed by VT system settings:
• Target VT • Parts setting • Printer
• Terget PLC • Changing display text strings • Video
• VT system • Operating log setting • VNC Server
• Communication Setup • KL Setup • PLC time synchronization
• System Memory Area • Barcode • VT timer
• Password • Memory Card • Other

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-25


3-2 Print

Global Function Switch

Print is possible only when the VT3 handy Series are used.
No settings are required when global function switch is printed.

Trend Graph

3 The following describes an instance of when to print a trend graph.


FILES & PRINTING

Item Description
Trend graph list Select the ID (0 to 3) of the trend graph to print.
Select all All IDs in the trend graph list are selected when the "Select all" button is clicked.

Alarm

The following describes an instance of when to print alarm settings.

Item Description
Alarm list Select the ID (0 to 3) of the alarm to print.
Select all All IDs in the alarm list are selected when the "Select all" button is clicked.
Print items Select the target item to print.

3-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-2 Print

Message

The following describes an instance of when to print message settings.

FILES & PRINTING


Item Description
Message list Select the block No. to print.
Select all All block Nos. in the message list are selected when the "Select all" button is clicked.

Windows font

No special setting items are required when printing the settings of Windows font.
Print the comment and number of characters of registered words in Windows font.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-27


3-2 Print

Device transfer

The settings for device sending to be printed are described.

3
FILES & PRINTING

Item Description
Device sending list Select device sending No. to be printed.
Select all Click "select all" button, and select all No. in the list.

Global Function Control

No special setting items are required when printing the global function control.
Print the settings of global function control in "Global function control".
"12-7 Global Function Control"

3-28 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-2 Print

Worksheet (settings)

No special setting items are provided for printing worksheets (settings).


With worksheet (settings), worksheet system settings are printed.
"16-3 Worksheet System Settings"

Reference Worksheet settings can be printed by the worksheet editing tool.

3
"16-2 Setting Worksheets"

FILES & PRINTING


Page Configuration

The following describes an instance of when to print a page configuration.

Item Description
Print items Select the target item to print.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-29


3-2 Print

Screen

The following describes an instance of when to print a screen.

3
FILES & PRINTING

Item Description
Screen list Select the screen to print.
Select all All screens in the screen list are selected when the "Select all" button is clicked.
Print target screen Select the screen to print from base/window/printer form.
Print items Select the target item to print.
Label *1 When this checkbox is marked, labels are printed.
Device No. *1 When this checkbox is marked, device Nos. are printed.
Memo *2 When this checkbox is marked, memos are printed.
Reverse black-and white When this checkbox is marked, black-and-white is reversed and printed when
tones printing "Screen" in black-and-white.
Print window over base When this checkbox is marked, windows 1, 2 and 3 are printed overlapping the
base screen. Global windows are not overlapped.
Print
When this checkbox is marked, the outside of the display frame (green area) is
screen
Print entire edit screen also printed when printing "Screen".
settings Outside of the display frame is printed white.
Reflect screen size When this checkbox is marked, the printed result reflects the screen size.
State No. Switches the display state No.

Switches the display text string ID (0 to 7).


Display text string ID *3
Execute printing in the case of ON/OFF state of lamp switch, lamp bit device of
Preview display
lamp and reference bit device for graphics attribute control.
*1 "Label", page 5-26
"Device No.", page 5-27
• Font size of labels and device Nos.
"Option Settings", page 4-22
*2 "7-6 Setting Memos"
*3 "11-6 Changing Display Text Strings"

3-30 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


3-2 Print

Print Preview
File -> Print preview

Displays a preview of the print items set at "Print settings".


Item Description
Print Executes printing.
Page No.
Next page
Specifies the page to display.
Changes the page No. to display to the next page.
3

FILES & PRINTING


Previous page Changes the page No. to display to the previous page.
Enlarge display Enlarges the display.
Reduce display Displays an entire single page on screen.
Exit Exits print preview.

Point The print preview screen is not displayed if no print items are selected at "Print settings".
The print items set at "Print settings" is automatically executed.

Print
File -> Print Ctrl + p

Prints the print items set at "Print settings".

Point • Before you execute printing, check whether or not the printer settings are correct. If these
settings are not correct, click the "Printer settings" in the "Print settings" window and
correct the settings.
• Printing is not executed if a print item is not selected at "Print settings". The print items
set at "Print settings" is automatically executed.

Output Screen Data BMP File


File -> Output screen data to BMP file

Display images of screens are saved as Windows bitmap (BMP) files or JPEG files.
This feature is useful for pasting and editing saved files in Microsoft Word, and making job instruction sheets or User's
Manuals.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 3-31


3-2 Print

Item Description
Enter the drive and directory (folder) name for saving the display image file of
Output destination folder
the screen.
File format Select the format to save the file in.
Screen list Select the screen for outputting to file.
Select all All screens in the screen list are selected when the "Select all" button is clicked.
Select the screen to be output to file from base, windows 1, 2 and 3, global
Target screen
3 Label *1
window, and printer form.
When this checkbox is marked, the label is displayed on the screen image.
*1 When this checkbox is marked, the device No. is displayed on the screen
Device No.
FILES & PRINTING

image.
Memo *2 When this checkbox is marked, the memo is displayed on the screen image.
When this checkbox is marked, the outside of the display frame (green area) is
Display entire edit
Display also printed when output-ting "Screen" to file. Outside of the display frame is
screen
printed white.
contents of
Reverse black- If file output is selected under black-and-white mode, the files are output after
screen andwhite tones black-and-white is reversed.
images State No. Switches the display state No.

Switches the display text string ID (0 to 7).


Display text string ID *3
Execute file output in the case of ON/OFF state of lamp switch, lamp bit device
Preview display
of lamp and reference bit device for graphics attribute control.
Backlight color *4 Specify backlight color when outputting files.
*1 "Active Edit", page 5-26
"Device No.", page 5-27
• Font size of labels and device Nos.
"Option Settings", page 4-22
*2 "7-6 Setting Memos"
*3 "11-6 Changing Display Text Strings"
*4 Only VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A) /W4G (A) can be set.

The name of the file to be saved is as follows:


[path] / [file]_[page]_[window].bmp(jpg)
[path] : Directory name specified by the file output directory name
[file] : VTS file name with an extension name excluding vs4/vu4/vs3/vu3/vs2/vu2.
[page] : Page No., global window No., printer form page No.
[window] : Currently selected window
Base:B, Window 1:1, Window 2:2, Window 3:3
Full-size window: W, printer form: P
Example) Select base only B
Select windows 12
Select base and all windows 1, 2, 3 B123
Select global window W
Select printer form P

3-32 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4
4
EDIT

EDIT
This chapter describes operations such as moving, scaling, deleting, copying
and rotating drawn graphics, text and parts.

4-1 Editing Graphics....................................................... 4-2


4-2 Edit Functions .......................................................... 4-6

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-1


4-1 Editing Graphics

Operation Basics
Basic operation is as follows:

1 Click the button on the tool bar.

2 Select the object.


The selection frame is displayed around the selected object.
"Object Selection Frame and Selection Handles", page 4-7

3 Align the mouse cursor with the item on the icon menu, and click.

4 To move or scale the graphic, drag instead of clicking.

4 Execute the operation, and cancel the selection.


EDIT

Move
In addition to graphics, switches/lamps and basic parts, meters/graphs, device Nos. displayed for these, and labels
can also be moved. The following describes how each of these objects is moved.

1 Align the mouse cursor with the object.


A cross-hair cursor is displayed under the mouse cursor.

2 Drag the selected object to the move destination. Cross-hair curs

Reference • In the case of text, paint graphics, switches/lamps, basic parts, and meters/ graphs, align the mouse
over the object and drag. In the case of straight lines or line graphics, align the mouse over the line
and drag.
• When objects are selected, the objects are moved in 1 dot increments if click cursor key
.
• When objects are selected, the types, position, size and labels of selected objects will be displayed
in the status bar. Therefore, adjust slightly when aligning and sizing.
• If the setting of “as per grid” is temporarily cancelled when moving parts, the setting of “as per grid”
will be contrary to current setting after pressing key .
That’s to say, if selecting “as per grid”, the settings will be cancelled temporarily after pressing key
; if not selecting “as per grid”, the settings will be effective temporarily after pressing key .

Moving switches
Switch areas move interlocked with objects when an object to which a touch switch such as lamp switch or switch is
moved.
To move only switch areas, select the lamp switch or switch, and select "Edit" -> "Change switch area" from Menu to
change the switch area.
"Changing the Switch Area", page 4-20

When the object has been moved


The switch area moves interlocked with the object.

Switch

Drag

Switch

4-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-1 Editing Graphics

Changing the switch area


Change (move or scale) only the switch area.

Switch Switch

Drag

4
Reference • The grouped objects, selected groups and continuously selected objects can be moved in a single

EDIT
operation.
• The display of device Nos. and labels also move at the same time when moving objects such as
switches, lamps and basic parts.

Scaling Graphics
In addition to graphics, switches/lamps, basic parts, and meters/graphs can also be scaled (enlarged or reduced).
The following describes how each of these objects is scaled.

1 Click the objects to keep them in selected state.


The selection frame is displayed around the object.

2 Align the mouse cursor with the selection handles in the direction to scale the graphic, and drag.

Selection frame Handle

Drag mouse cursor

Mouse cursor

Reference • Numerical value displays, text displays, message displays, alarm displays, and bitmap text can be
scaled up to 8X in both the horizontal and vertical directions in integer multiples.
• Numerical value displays containing 1-byte can be reduced to 1/4X in the vertical direction.
• When stroke fonts are set to numerical value displays, text displays, message displays, and alarm
displays, stroke fonts can be scaled from 2X or higher in 1dot increments.
• When objects are selected while pressing key, if clicking cursor key , the scaling
of objects can be executed based on upper left corner of objects.
• The aspect ratio of objects is held if the object is scaled with the key held down.
• If dynamic edit shall be closed during scaling, select "View(V)" -> "Dynamic edit(Q)" buttons from the
menu, or click button in that order.
•When "Enable smoothing resize function", appearance of the following components will not be
influenced, even if they are zoomed in or out.
· Switch · Indicator switch · Indicator
· Numerical value display component · Text display component · Info display component
· Alarm display component · Bar-shaped image meter · Round image meter
· Fan-shaped image meter

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-3


4-1 Editing Graphics

Scaling switches
Switch areas are scaled interlocked with objects when an object to which a touch switch such as a lamp switch or
switch is scaled.
To scale only switch areas, select the lamp switch or switch, and select "Edit" -> "Change switch area" from Menu to
change the switch area.
"Changing the Switch Area", page 4-20

When the object has been scaled


The switch area is scaled interlocked with the object.

4
Switch
Switch
EDIT

Drag

Changing the switch area


Change (scale or move) only the switch area.

Switch Switch

Drag

Reference • Grouped objects can be scaled in a single operation.


• When grouped objects contain a numerical value display, text display, message display or alarm
display, these can be scaled only in integer multiples. However, if stroke font, image font and
Window font are set, they are automatically adjusted to the size similar to the scaling ratio.

Scaling outline fonts


When a text string has been enlarged in the horizontal direction
The font size is determined according to the size that is dragged in the vertical direction.
Kerning is automatically sized in the horizontal direction so that it matches the dragged size.

Outline
Drag
Outline
When a text string has been enlarged in the vertical direction
The font size is determined according to the size dragged in the horizontal direction.
Outline text is automatically placed at the center of the size dragged in the vertical direction.

Outline

Outline
Drag

Reference • Outline text cannot be scaled when "Auto-size" is not set.


• Outline text can also be scaled when objects are grouped.
• If the upper limit of 512 of font size is exceeded, then it will be enlarged according to font size of 512
(72 in the case of model VT2).
4-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
4-1 Editing Graphics

Scaling when multiple objects are selected

1 Set the required multiple objects by group selection or continuous selection.


The selection frame is displayed around the object.
"Selecting Object Groups", page 4-6
"Continuously Selecting Objects", page 4-7

2 Align the mouse cursor with the selection handles in the direction to scale the graphic, and drag.

Drag mouse cursor


4

EDIT
Reference • When multiple objects are selected, if the selected objects contain a numerical display, text display,
message display, alarm display and bitmap text, they can be scaled only in integral multiples. If
stroke font, image font and Windows font (excluding bitmap font) are set, theyíre automatically
adjusted to the size similar to the scaling ratio.
• When multiple objects are selected, if the selected objects contain parts set with outline font or
Windows font, theyíre enlarged to font size128 (72 for VT2) if the font size exceeds the upper limit128.
• When objects are selected while pressing key, if clicking cursor key , the
scaling of objects can be executed based on upper left corner of objects.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-5


4-2 Edit Functions

Selecting Objects (graphics)


To shift from drawing to editing, click the button on the tool bar. Once clicked, the button is held in the clicked
state. So, this button needs not be clicked again to continue editing.

Draw Click Edit Click

4 Selecting Individual Objects


EDIT

The following describes how to select individual objects.

Text or paint graphics


Click after aligning the mouse cursor with upper part of texts or images.

Straight lines or line graphics


Align the mouse cursor over the line and click.

Selecting Object Groups


The following describes how to select groups of objects.

ABCDEFG ABCDEFG
Drag from start
point to end point.

You can select all objects within a specific area by dragging across the desired objects in such a way that they are all
enclosed. The selection frame is displayed around all objects in the dragged area.

Point Group selection is not possible when the cursor is dragged over a paint graphic (drawn
graphic whose "Plane attribute" checkbox is marked) or an image. In this case, only paint
graphics or images are moved.
If groups are selected when drawing graphics or the objects prior to the pictures, drag by
pressing key .

Drag without pressing key. Drag with key held down.

The group is selected, and the


selection frame is displayed on all
This moves paint graphics
objects within the dragged area.
or images.

4-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Continuously Selecting Objects


Continuously select each object one at a time.

Select the objects in the same way as individual objects.

Click

Align the cursor with the next object to select, and click while holding
down the on the PC's keyboard.
4

EDIT
Click with
held down.

Multiple objects are selected in this way.

Canceling Selection
Cancel selections as follows when multiple objects are selected:

Canceling all selections


• Click the mouse at a location where there are no objects.
• Select another object.
• Draw a new object.

Canceling only some selections


• Align the mouse cursor with the object whose selection is to be canceled, and click while pressing the key .

Object Selection Frame and Selection Handles


A frame indicating the selected state is displayed when an object is selected. This frame is called the "object selection
frame," and the "" marks on the frame line are called "Selection handles."

Object selection frame

Selection handle
a b a

c c Scale in horizontal direction.

a b a
Scale in horizontal and vertical
directions. To scale at the
Scale in vertical direction. same scaling ratio, drag with
the key held down.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-7


4-2 Edit Functions

Select one from many


+ + +

Select one object at a time in order from multiple selected objects. This feature is handy when you want to select one
object from among multiple overlapping objects. You can also select one object at a time from all objects by using
this feature together with "Select all".

Reference When "Select one of multiple parts" is performed, judge which objects are selected from the status bar
display.
4
1 Select the multiple graphics.
EDIT

The selection frame is displayed around each of the selected objects.


All objects can be selected by using "Select all(L)".

2 By clicking the button


Of the selected objects, the type, position, size and label of the object on the background plane is displayed on the
status bar.

3 By clicking the button


• The information of the selected objects is displayed in order on the status bar.
• When the target object you want to select is displayed, the selection frame and handles are displayed around that
graphic to indicate that it is selected.

All Square Circle Triangle


selected selected selected selected

4 Change the attributes and position of the selected object.

5 If there is another selected object, click the button.


To cancel a selection, click the mouse anywhere there is no object.

Select one from the Cascaded Components


Ctrl + Shift + Click
To select sequentially from the front for several cascaded objects. It is convenient for selecting one among several
cascaded objects.

Reference When "Select one from the cascaded components" is executed, the object in selected status can be
determined from display of the status bar.

1 Press " Ctrl + Shift " and click mouse at the same time.
For the cascaded objects that have been selected, the type, position, size and label of the foremost object will be
displayed on the status bar.

2 Press " Ctrl + Shift " and click mouse at the same time.
• The information of the selected objects is displayed on the status bar in turn.

4-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

• When the object you want to select is displayed, the selection frame and selection mark are displayed around that
graphic to indicate that it is selected.

Triangle selected Circle selected Square selected

Ctrl Ctrl
+ +
Shift Shift

+ +

4
Click Click

EDIT
Ctrl + Shift + Click

3 Change the attributes and settings of the selected objects.


To cancel a selection, click the mouse anywhere no object exists.

Undo
Edit(E) -> Undo(U) +

Cancels the previous operation and restores the previous state.

Redo
Edit(E) -> Redo(R) +

Redoes operations that were undone by "Undo(U)".

Cut
Edit(E) -> Cut(T) +

Cuts the object on the screen.

Reference Cut objects can be placed on screen by the "Paste" operation.

Copy
Edit(E) -> Copy(C) +

Copies the selected object. Copied objects can be placed on screen by the "Paste" operation described below.

Reference • When multiple objects are selected by grouping or continuous selection, the selected multiple
objects can be copied in a single operation.
• Copying of only device Nos. and labels is not possible.
• Select position to be pasted through mouse cursor when pasting to the same pages with copy
source.
• The part will be pasted to the same coordinate with that of copy source part when pasted to different
page with that of copy source.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-9


4-2 Edit Functions

Paste
Edit(E) -> Paste(P) +

Pastes copied objects onto the screen.

Reference • Copied multiple objects can be pasted together in a single operation.


• Copying-and-pasting can be performed in a single operation by dragging with the ckey held down.
• Pasting position can be selected with mouse after pasting when pasting to the samepage as the
configured page of components of copy source.

4 • Compoments are pasted to the same coordinates as the configured coordinates of components of
copy source when pasting to the page different from the copy source.
EDIT

Delete
Edit(E) -> Delete(D)

Deletes the selected object.

Reference • When multiple objects are selected by grouping or continuous selection, the selected multiple
objects can be deleted in a single operation.
• If you have deleted an object by mistake, you can restore the deleted object to its original state by
selecting "Edit" -> "Undo" ( + key) immediately after the “Delete” operation.

Select all
Edit(E) -> Select all(L) +

All objects on screen can be selected in a single operation.

4-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Search
Edit(E) -> Search(X) +

Search parts from screen data that match the specified conditions.

1 Select "Edit(E)" -> "Search(X)" from Menu in that order.


The "Find" window is displayed.
Open menu with right mouse button, it’s also display after selecting “Search(H)”.

2 Select the Search key. 4

EDIT
Item Description
Not specify To search from all parts and settings in the search range.
Specify the bit device to be searched. When the number of devices is set to 2 or above, the
specified leading device will be taken as the start of the search range and the specified number
Bit device of devices will be searched.
When this option is checked, only the leading device will be searched for parts and settings
referring multiple devices.
To specify the word device to be searched. When the number of devices is set to 2 or above, the
specified leading device will be taken as the start of the search range and the specified number
Word device of devices will be searched.
When this option is checked, only the leading device will be searched for parts and settings
referring multiple devices.
Unsetting device Only unsetting devices will be searched.
To specify the device comments or character strings contained in the device comments to be
Device comments
searched.
To specify the worksheet cell or ID to be searched. Cells that are referred by parts, settings, and
cell, but are not set up can also be searched.
Worksheet
When this option is checked, only the leading cell will be searched for parts and settings
referring multiple cells.
Character string To specify the character strings contained in the parts and settings to be searched.

Reference In case the part, to which PLC device is set up, is selected, the Search key will be used as the PLC
device of this part in the Search windwo being displayed.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-11


4-2 Edit Functions

3 Select search range.

Item Description
Check this option in case of searching screen and select the pages, windows, or parts (category
Screen
4 System setting
and function) to be searched.
Check this option in case of searching system settings and select the system settings to be
searched.
EDIT

Reference In case the part, to which PLC device is set up, is selected, the Search key will be used as the PLC
device of this part in the Search windwo being displayed.

4 Click “Search” button.


The search results are shown in the search results list.
"System setting", page 5-17

Multiple copy
Edit(E) -> Multiple edit(W) + +

Copies multiple selected objects taking the top left of the copy source objects as the reference point.

1 Make multiple objects copied in selected state.


The selection frames are displayed around the selected objects.

2 Select "Edit(E)" -> "Multiple copy(W)" from Menu in that order.


The "Mulitple copy" window is displayed.
Multiple copy is also possible by opening Menu by clicking the right mouse button and selecting "Multiple copy(W)".

4-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Item Description
Number of X-axis Set the number of copies to be made in the X-axis (horizontal) direction.
copies *1 Y-axis Set the number of copies to be made in the Y-axis (vertical) direction.
Select how multiple copied objects are to be placed.
Clearance/interval Clearance:Specify by the clearance between objects.
Interval: Specify by the interval between objects.
Interval *1 Set the clearance or interval in the X-axis (horizontal) direction as
X-axis
a number of dots.
Set the clearance or interval in the Y-axis (vertical) direction as a
Y-axis
number of dots.
When this checkbox is marked, the target (reference) device set
Increment decrement of device No.
to switches/lamps or basic parts is automatically incremented
during multiple copy.
4
X-axis priority In the case of increment\decrement of device No, X-direction priority.

EDIT
Direction
Increment Y-axis priority In the case of increment\decrement of device No, Y-direction priority.
decrement Auto The device No. is automatically incremented.
of device No. Increment
Specify Increment\decrement of device No. according to specified number.
number/
decrement Number
If “increment number” is “specified”, increment number(1 to
number increments/
65535)\decrement number(-65535 to-1) is set.
decrement

*1 Multiple copy cannot be set in the case of a number of copies or interval that will result in the multiple copied
objects protruding from the edit window. In this case, the following error message will be displayed.

*2 When a cell is set for the target (reference) device, the device will be incremented regardless of the direction
and number of increments settings.

3 Click the "OK" button.


The multiple copied objects appear on the screen.

Point • When multiple objects are selected by grouping or continuous selection, multiple copy of
the selected multiple objects is performed in a single operation.
• Multiple copy is not possible by a number of copies or interval that will result in the
multiple copied objects protruding from the edit window.
• "Number of selected objects x number of copies in X-axis x number of copies in the Y-axis"
can be set as the number of multiple copies as long as it is within 256 copies.
• Multiple copying of only device Nos. and labels is not possible.

Reference Example of PLC device incrementing (N: device No.)


• X direction=5, Y direction=2, X direction priority, automatic
N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4
N+5 N+6 N+7 N+8 N+9

• X direction=5, Y direction=2, X direction priority, specified (number of increments=10)


N N+10 N+20 N+30 N+40
N+50 N+60 N+70 N+80 N+90

Example of cell incrementing


• X direction=4, Y direction=3

C2 D2 E2 F2
C3 D3 E3 F3
C4 D4 E4 F4

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-13


4-2 Edit Functions

Grouping

Group

Edit(E) -> Group(G) ->Group(G) +

Groups all selected multiple objects as a single object.

4 Point • Grouped multiple objects can be moved, deleted, copied, and cut in a single operation as
they are handled as a single object.
EDIT

• Graphic attribute controls cannot be set again after a graphic to which graphic attribute
control has been set is grouped with other graphics.

Ungroup

Edit(E) -> Group(G) -> Ungroup +

Restores a grouped object to multiple objects.

Point Graphics to which graphic attribute control has been set after grouping cannot be ungrouped
unless all graphic attribute controls have been disabled.

Regroup

Edit(E) -> Group(G) -> Regroup(R) + +

Regroups multiple objects ungrouped by "Ungroup(U)".

Point • Grouped multiple objects can be moved, deleted, copied, 1and cut in a single operation as
they are handled as a single object.
• Graphic attribute controls cannot be set again after a graphic to which graphic attribute
control has been set is grouped with other graphics.

4-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Order

Move to front

Edit(E) -> Order(O) -> Move to front(T) + +

Moves the selected object to the front of existing objects.


"Move to front" is an editing operation for moving the object at the back to the front when the object that should be at
the front is hidden behind an object that was drawn later.
4
Move to back

EDIT
Edit(E) -> Order(O) -> Move to the back(K) + +

Moves the selected object to the back of existing objects.


"Move to back" is an editing operation for moving the object at the front to the back of previously drawn objects.

Move forward

Edit(E) -> Order(O) -> Move to front(F) +

Moves selected objects forward.

Move backward

Edit(E) -> Order(O) -> Move to the back(B) +

Moves selected objects backward.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-15


4-2 Edit Functions

Rotate/Flip

Rotate

Edit(E) -> Rotate/Flip(F) -> Rotate(R)

Rotates the selected graphic by 90° in the clockwise direction. Rotate in a clockwise direction.
Lines, continuous lines, rectangles, polygons, circles and ellipses, arcs, fans and bitmap texts can be rotated.

4 Point • Switch/indicator, basic component, meter/graph, memo, image, decoration frame and
screen call etc. can not be rotated.
EDIT

• Selected multiple objects cannot be rotated. Rotate as an object after combination.


• Grouped objects cannot be rotated if the object group contains an object that cannot be
rotated.

Flip horizontal/Flip vertical

Edit(E) -> Rotate/Flip(F) -> Flip horizontal(H)


Edit(E) -> Rotate/Flip(F) -> Flip vertical (V)

Rotates selected graphics horizontally or vertically.


Lines, continuous lines, rectangles, polygons, circles and ellipses, arcs, and fans can be flipped.

Point The following functions cannot be reversed even if they are reversed "right and left" or "up
and down" .
• Angle and direction of nameplate
• Grouped components selected together with other components
• Grouped components (A) further grouped together with other components

Place/Align
Edit(E) -> Place/Align(N) +

Multiple selected objects can be aligned to the left/right/top/bottom or center, or arranged at even intervals.

Reference The icons on “Place/align” window can also be selected from control/edit tool bar.

4-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Item Button Description

Aligns the top edge of all selected objects with the


Align Top top edge of the circumscribing rectangle of the
currently selected objects.

Align upper and lower centerlines of all selected


Align
objects with upper and lower centerlines of
Place/align in vertical direction

Middle
circumscribing rectangle of multiple selected objects.

EDIT
Arranges all selected objects so that the spacing
Align along the center line in the horizontal direction of
Vertically each object is uniform with respect to the currently
selected objects.

Align the lower edge of all selected objects with the


Align
lower edge of circumscribing rectangle of multiple
Bottom
selected objects.

Placing and alignment is not performed in the


None -
vertical direction.

Align the left edge of all selected objects with the left
Align left edge of circumscribing rectangle of multiple selected
objects.

Align the left and right centerlines of all selected with


Align
Place/align in horizontal direction

left and right centerlines of circumscribing rectangle


Center
of multiple selected objects.

Align Place all selected objects such that the left and right
Horizontally centerlines of various objects are equally spaced.

Align the right edge of all selected objects with the


Align right right edge of circumscribing rectangle of multiple
selected objects.

None Placing and alignment is not performed in the horizontal direction. -

Reference Apply guideline to facilitate the operations of placing\alignment.


"Guide line", page 5-23

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-17


4-2 Edit Functions

Screen attribute settings


Edit(E) -> Screen attribute setting(M) +

Sets the attributes of base screens, window screens and form screens.

1 The "Screen attribute settings" window is displayed so that you can set the screen attributes.
Display the "Screen attribute settings" window by one of the following methods:
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Screen attribute settings(M)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button

4 • By selecting the screen to edit on the "Screen" tab in the workspace, opening Menu by clicking the right mouse
button, and selecting "Screen attribute settings(A)"
• By double-clicking the screen to edit at the "Screen" tab in the workspace
EDIT

For details on setting items on each of the setting tabs


"12-1 New Screen"

4-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Parts Attribute Settings


Edit(E) -> Parts attribute settings(S)

Changes the settings of switches/lamps, basic parts and meters/graphs, and drawn graphics to which graphic
attribute controls have been set.

1 Select the switch/lamp, basic part, or meters/graphs whose settings you want to change.

2 Either select "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order, or click the button .
The setting window for the respective object is displayed. The window that is displayed varies according to the object
that is selected. Display the setting window of various objects using either of the following methods. 4
• Double click the objects.

EDIT
• By opening the menu by clicking the right mouse button, and selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)"
• Double click the lines of the object parts in the search results list.

For details on setting items


"Chapter 8 SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS"
"Chapter 9 SETTING BASIC PARTS"
"Chapter 10 SETTING METERS & IMAGES"
"7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls"

Reference "11-9 Batch Edition of the Part Attributes"

Register part attribute as default settings


Edit(E) -> Register part attribute as default settings(Q)

Any part in the screen can be easily registered as the default value of part creation.

1 Select the parts to be registered as default value (graph, switch, lamp switch, lamp, outline text, bitmap text,
and numeric value display).

2 Select Edit(E) -> Register part attribute as default settings(Q) from the menu.
Alternatively, you can select "Register part attribute as default settings(Q)" from right-click menu.

Point A part containing the following settings cannot be registered as default settings.
• Graphs for which Graph Attribute Control is set up
• Switches/lamp switches/lamps in free style
• Outline text using a Logo
• Numeric value display using free style in the image

Reference "Parts attribute", page 4-24

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-19


4-2 Edit Functions

Changing the Switch Area


Edit(E) -> Change switch area(A)

Changes the switch area (area that functions as the switch) of lamps switches, switches, key entry parts and other
parts.
Normally, switch areas are automatically set matched to the size of the object. The following describes the procedure
for manually changing the switch area.

1 Select the object whose switch area is to be changed.

4 2 Select "Edit(E)" -> "Change switch area(A)" from the menu, and click button.
The switch area can also be changed by opening Menu by clicking the right mouse button and selecting "Change
EDIT

switch area(A)".

3 Drag from the start point to the end point of the switch area.
The switch area is changed.

Point • Switch areas cannot be changed when multiple objects are selected or grouped.
• If moving objects after altering the switch area, the switch area is automatically changed
into moving object position of objects.

Reference About the switch area


"Switch Area", page 5-23

Edit Callup Screen


Edit(A) -> Edit callup screen(Y)

You can edit the source callup screen placed on the screen currently being edited.

1 Select the screen callup to be edited.


The selection frame is displayed around the selected screen callup.

2 Either select "Edit(E)"  "Edit callup screen(Y)" from Menu in that order, or open Menu by clicking the right
mouse button and select "Edit callup screen(Y)".
The screen of the calling party is in edit state.

4-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Change Key Entry Order


Edit(E) -> Change key entry order(K)

Alter the key entry order of parts with key entry settings (numerical display, text display, message display, alarm
display, trend graph, XY-image).

Point • To distinguish parts, be sure to set individual labels to parts before you start to change the
key entry order.
• When "Alter key entry order" window is displayed, the parts even with labels set as hidden
will also be displayed.
4
1 Select "Edit(E)" -> "Change key entry order(K)" from Menu in that order.

EDIT
The "Change key entry order" window is displayed.

2 Select the label whose key entry order is to be changed, and click the " "/ " " buttons to change the key
entry order.

3 Click the "OK" button.


The key entry order is changed.

Example of how to change the key entry order

After selecting "N_00 2", Click the "OK" button.


click twice " " button.

Key entry order Key entry order

0 1

1 2

2 0

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-21


4-2 Edit Functions

Option Settings
Edit(E) -> Option settings(I)

Once option settings are set, the settings are stored held in memory even if VT STUDIO is quit.

File

Sets the default folder for saving the VTS file in advance.
4
EDIT

Item Description
VTS file save folder Sets the default folder for saving VTS files to.
VTS file for memory card
File Sets the default folder for saving VT files for Memory Card to.
save folder
User part catalog folder Save user-defined part catalogue file and set up the default of folder.
Save auto backup file into the following folders after checked.
For Windows other than XP: "C:\Users\ (User’s name)\My Documents\
KEYENCE\VTS4E"
Auto back up For Windows XP : "C:\Documents and Settings\ (User’s name)\My
Documents\KEYENCE\VTS4E"
File name is "! Auto backup file 0.vs4"*1.
Sets the timing (1 to 120 minutes) that the auto-backup file is updated.
*1 When multiple programs are started up, the last backup file to be created becomes "AutoBackup1.vs3".

4-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

DISPLAY

Set in advance the coefficient of font size of nameplate, the font size of label\device No., initial settings of memo and
display/hide of Num key for automatic adjustment.

EDIT
Item Description
Sets the font size coefficient (in range 10 to 200%, in 5% increments) when
Nameplate font size coefficient during
the nameplate font size is set to Autosize. The larger the coefficient that is
auto-sizing
set, the larger the font size becomes, and the larger the text becomes.
Font size of label Sets the font size (6 to 72) for displaying the label.
Display of label/
device No. Font size of device
Sets the font size (6 to 72) for displaying the device No.
No.
Font name Sets the font name of the text string to draw.
Font size Sets the font size (6 to 72) of the text string to draw.
Memo initial
Text color*1 Selects the text color of memos.
settings
Background color *1 Selects the background color of memos.
Frame color *1 Selects the frame color of memos.
Display numeric keypad *2 Sets display/hide of numeric keypads.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*2 For details on numeric keypads, refer to the description on the following page.

Numerical value entry keys


The numeric keypad is a window that is displayed when a menu requiring entry of a numerical value is executed. If a
number to be entered in decimal or Hex is clicked, that numerical value is displayed in the entry field.

If the selection of "Display Num key" is cancelled, the window of "Num key" will not be displayed
when executing the menu of entry value. Enter the numerical value on the keyboard of your personal
computer.

Numerical values can be entered within the range 0 to 9 in the case of decimal values and within the range 0 to F in
the case of Hex values.

Item Description
- Enters the minus sign.
. Enters the decimal point.
BS Deletes the numerical value to the left of the cursor.
CLR Deletes all entered numerical values.
Close Closes the "Num Key" window.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-23


4-2 Edit Functions

Parts attribute

Default line type, plane color, and text color when drawing graphics and text can be set in advance.

Graphics
Set the default graphic attributes for lines, continuous lines, rectangles, polygons, circles/ellipses, arcs, and fans.

4
EDIT

Item Description
Line attribute When this checkbox is marked, line type, line color and arrow can be set.
Line type*2 Selects the line type.
Line
attribute *1 Line color*2 Select the line color.
Select from "None/Start point/End point/ Both ends" for the arrow setting.
Arrows
This setting is enabled only for straight lines and continuous lines.
Plane When this checkbox is marked, the inside of the graphic is filled and the graphic is turned into a paint graphic.
Plane attribute This can be set only for rectangles, polygons, circles/ellipses, and fans.
attribute
Plane color*2 Select the color of the plane.
When this checkbox is marked, the four corners of the rectangle are rounded. This can be set
Chamfer
Chamfer only when drawing rectangles.
Radius Set the corner radius at this item.
Start angle
Arc/Fan *3 Sets the start/end angle within the range 0 to 359 deg. This can be set only for arcs and fans.
End angle
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK*2
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 When this checkbox is marked, an outer frame line is attached when drawing rectangles, polygons, circles/
ellipses, arcs, and fans.
*2 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"
*3 Start/end angle
"7-1 Setting Graphics"

Style
Sets the default style of switches and lamps.

4-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Item Description
Style Selects the switch theme/style (/type).
Switch Color Selects the switch color.
Part size To set up the size of switch part.
Style Sets the lamp switch theme/style (/type).
Lamp switch Color Sets the lamp switch color.
Part size To set up the size of lamp switch part.
Style Sets the lamp theme/style (/type).
Lamp Color Sets the lamp color.
Part size To set up the size of lamp part.
Device ON display Displays the state when the lamp bit device of the lamp switch and lamp is ON. 4

EDIT
Nameplate
Sets the default nameplate setting items.

Item Description
OFF nameplate/ON To select OFF/ON for the nameplate to be set up for default value. Switch and N state lamp use
nameplate OFF nameplate settings as the default value.
Font name Set the font name of the text string in the nameplate.
Font size Set the font size of the text string in the nameplate.
Kerning Set the spacing between characters.
Position Set the placement position of the nameplate.
Set the spacing between the nameplate and lamp switch when "Position" is set to Top, Bottom,
Interval
Right or Light.
Auto-size Automatically adjusts the font size and kerning.
Text color*1 Selects the text color.
Bold font Sets the text to bold.
Text Decoration

Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Engrave Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Italic Sets the text to italic.
Underline Underlines text.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
Shadow color*1
The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all
BLK*1
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Align left Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the left.
Alignment

Align center Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the center.


Align right Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the right.
Even spacing Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the longest line, and evens out the character spacing.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

Reference "8-1 Setting Styles and Nameplates"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-25


4-2 Edit Functions

Outline text
Sets the default outline text setting items.

4
EDIT

Item Description
Font name Sets the font name of the text string to draw.
Rotate Select rotation angle for words from rotating towards right 0º/90º.
Direction Select the text direction from "Horizontal/Vertical".
Font size Set the font size of the text string to be drawn.
Kerning Set the spacing between characters.
Auto-size To adjust font size/character spacing automatically based on the part size settings.
Text color*1 Selects the text color.
Bold font Sets the text to bold.
Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Text Decoration

Engrave Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Italic Sets the text to italic.
Underline Underlines text.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
Shadow color*1
The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all
BLK*1
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Align left Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the left.
Alignment

Align center Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the center.


Align right Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the right.
Even spacing Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the longest line, and evens out the character spacing.
Part size To set up the size of outline text.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

Reference "Scaling outline fonts", page 4-4


"7-4 Setting Outline Text"

4-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Bitmap text
Sets the default bitmap text setting items.

EDIT
Item Description
Text color Selects the text color.
Bold font Sets the text to bold.
Text Decoration

Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Engrave Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
Shadow color*1
decoration. The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at
BLK*1
all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Size (V) Set the size of text strings in the vertical direction to multiples of 1/2X or within the range 1X to 8X.
Size (H) Set the size of text strings in the horizontal direction to multiples within the range 1X to 8X.
Rotate Rotates text strings clockwise by (0, 90, 180 or 270) deg.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

Reference "7-5 Setting Bitmap Text"

Numerical display
To set up the default of setting items in numerical display.

Item Description
Style Select the style to be used for display from "Basic/image frame".
Frame²
Color Select the color system of image frame.
Background
Cursor color Set the cursor color when image frame is used.
Select the fonts to be used for display from "bitmap font/stroke font/image font/Windows
Font *1
font/Extremely small font".
Text
Style This item is displayed when image font is selected. Select the style of image font.
Color Selects the color.
Part size To set up the size of numeric value display part.

*1 "6-4 About Fonts"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-27


4-2 Edit Functions

Device comments/Workspace

4
EDIT

Item Description
Display device comment When setting device after selection, device comment is displayed
beside device No. nearby deviceNo.*1
Specify device So device can be selected
In case of checked, device comment is displayed in the drop-
from device comment in the
down list during device setting.*2
drop-down list
Set up parts from the When setting device after selection by dragging and dropping in
device comment with Make selected items flicker the device comment list, the items selected in the setting window
the drag&drop operation will blink.*3
When generating multiple devices by dragging and dropping in
the device comment list, select the priority of directions for parts
Direction alignment in “X-direction/Y-direction”. In addition, after multiple
Generate parts from devices are generated, set whether or not generate after returning
to the next line/column, or the number.
the device comment
Clearance of parts Set the spacing of parts.
with the drag&drop
Parts size Set the size of switch, lamp and lamp switch.
operation
Part size settings on When this option is checked, the default value set for all parts will
priority have the priority for creation.
>>Part attributes To display "Part attributes" tab.
*1 Device comment displayed beside device No.

*2 Device comment displayed in pull-down list.

*3 The selected items blink in the device/nameplate setting window.

Reference For the details of device comment list, see "List of Device Comments", page 11-41 refer to
“Device comment list”

4-28 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4-2 Edit Functions

Other

Sets the default wheel mouse settings in advance.

EDIT
Item Description
Close part catalog after When this checkbox is marked, the "Part Catalog" window is
placing part. closed after the parts are placed.
Automatically select part When selecting parts after selection from the parts icons in
catalog when configuring menu bar or tool bar, the displayed types will vary from the
Part Catalog parts. selected parts.
Set the style change function
Model replacement function can be used after selection.
to Eabled*1
Change the character When this option is checked, the character attributes of
attribute of nameplate nameplate will subject to style change.
After import screen catalog, select whether to display the
Screen catalog Display the import result
import result on "Search Result List" window.
When this checkbox is marked, select the resize reference
Outline text/ Bitmap
Resize reference point point from "Center/ Top left point/Center of left edge" for when
text
the outline text or bitmap text strings are changed.
Enable change to the device
When this checkbox is marked, the device No. can be
No. using the intelligent
Intelligent mouse changed by the intelligent mouse.
mouse.
settings
Scroll edit screen on VT When this checkbox is marked, the edit window can be
STUDIO. scrolled on VT STUDIO.
If selected, the components can be zoomed in/zoomed out
Enable "Smoothing resize" function enabled
without changing the appearance when the components
(VT3 series only)
resizing.

For the details of mode replacement function, see "Part Catalog", page 5-2 refer to “type”

Point Sometimes the intelligent mouse cannot be used depending on the mouse driver and version
of OS. Please cancel the selection in the case of abnormal operation.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 4-29


4-2 Edit Functions

Edit Apex
Edit apex

Edits apices of lines, continuous straight lines or polygons.

1 Click the button on the tool bar.


This operation is not required if the button is already clicked and selected.

2 Select the continuous straight line or polygon.

4 The selection frame is displayed around the selected continuous line or polygon.
EDIT

* The apices of multiple graphics cannot be edited at the same time.

3 Click the button on the tool bar. Apices can also be edited by opening Menu by clicking the right mouse
button and selecting "Edit apex".
Handles are displayed at the apices of the selected continuous straight line or polygon.

* The apices of multiple graphics cannot be edited at the same time.

4 Align the cursor with the handles of the apices to be edited and drag.

Drag

5 Either click the button on the tool bar, or cancel selection of the graphic to quit editing of apices.

4-30 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5
DISPLAY 5

DISPLAY
This chapter describes how to display the catalog and grid, and the functions
of the various tool bars that are displayed in windows.

5-1 About Various Display Functions•••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-2

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-1


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Part Catalog
View(V) -> Part Catalog(C) F7

Frequently used parts, such as switch lamp, numerical value display and numerical key, and commonly used images
such as basic graphics, arrow, symbol and balloon, etc, are registered to the Part catalog of VT STUDIO.

Display/hiding the "Part Catalog" window

1 Either select "View(V)" -> "Part Catalog(C)" from the menu, or click the button.
This switch displays/hides of the "Part Catalog" window.

5
DISPLAY

Item Description
Catalog Selection of catalog
Selects the Part catalog file. Set the Part catalog file name after clicking the Part
File selection catalog replacement button.
Color system Selects the color.
New Part catalog Creates a new Part catalog file.
Rename Part catalog Renames the Part catalog file.
Name Sets (changes) the name of the currently selected part.
Delete Deletes the currently selected part.
Close Part catalog after
If the button is pressed and held, close "Part catalog" window after placing parts.
placing part. *1
Automatic selection of catalog If the button is pressed and held, the Part catalogs displayed may vary with the
when placing parts.*1 selected parts when selected from the parts icons of menu bar or tool bar.
Effective/ineffective switching
If the button is pressed and held, the style change function is effective.
of style change function.*1
This is used to decide whether
nameplate character The character attribute of nameplate will be changed if this button is pressed during the
attributes are changed at the style change.
time of style change. *1
Select the display size for the part from magnification/display all/ suitable for window
Zoom
width.
Individual ON/OFF The lamp bit device of lamp and lamp switch as well as reference bit device for
graphics attribute control in ON/OFF state are displayed individually according to the
display of device preview display settings.
The lamp bit device of lamp and lamp switch as well as reference bit device for
Device ON display
graphics attribute control ON state are displayed.
The lamp bit device of lamp and lamp switch as well as reference bit device for
Device OFF display
graphics attribute control OFF state are displayed.
State No. Switches the display state No. of N state lamps.
Display text string ID witches and displays the display text string ID (0 to 7) for parts, etc.

*1 "Option Settings", page 4-22

5-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Point All settings are saved when switches/lamps, basic part, meters/graphs, etc. are registered as
parts to the Part catalog. Note, however, that devices must be reset when parts have been
placed on files to which a target PLC different from the target PLC at registration is set.

Reference The graphics catalogs in VT STUDIO and VT BUILDER (basic image, arrow, symbol and balloon) are
incorporated into the part catalogs.

Placing parts from the "Part Catalog" window


Parts installed on VTSTUDIO are categorized by type and registered to the Part catalog.
The parts displayed in Part catalog windows can be displayed according to actual size placed on the edit
window(multiplying factor of 100%).
Parts can be easily placed on the Edit window merely by dragging-and-dropping the desired part from the "Part
Catalog" window.
5

DISPLAY
Dragging

Registering parts to the "Part Catalog" window


Parts can be easily registered to the Part catalog merely by dragging-and-dropping them on the "Part Catalog"
window from the Edit window. If original parts that you made or frequently used parts are registered to the Part
catalog file, they can be placed on the Edit window merely by dragging-and-dropping them from the "Part Catalog"
window.

Dragging

Point If it is impossible to register to system Part catalog files, please recreate the Part catalog files
and register the parts to them.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-3


5-1 About Various Display Functions

 User-defined
User-defined file logged in advance is opened first when logging part in Part catalogue window.

5
Item Description
New catalog file To new a Part catalog file in the user-defined folder.
Download Use Internet Explorer to open the home page for Part catalog download.
DISPLAY

Select folder To select the folder for saving Part catalog file.

Style change function


If type replacement function is used, the type of parts placed on edit screen can be changed in batch to the same type
of parts registered to the Part catalog.

1 Make the parts to which the types shall be changed in a selected state in edit screen.

2 Click the parts in Part catalog window.


The types of parts in Part catalog window will be copied to the types of parts selected in edit screen.

Notices to style change function


• The object parts of type replacement function are shown below.
• switch • lamp • lamp switch
• decorative frame • numerical display • text display
• message display • alarm display • trend graph
• XY graph • statistic chart • meter
• outline text • bitmap text

• If the parts selected in edit window and Part catalog window have the same category, the type will be change.
• If multiple parts are selected in edit window, only the parts of the same category with those selected in Part catalog
window will be changed in batch.
• If grouped parts or worksheet parts are selected, the types of grouped parts and parts in the worksheet will be
changed in batch.
• For the parts selected in Part catalog window, the types can be changed only when a single part is registered to the
Part catalog. However, the types cannot be changed when grouped or multiple parts are incorporated and
registered to Part catalog.
• In type replacement function, the setting items related to appearance, such as color and images, will be copied.
However, some items cannot be copied depending upon the parts. Please check the settings after type
replacement function is used.
• The size of parts cannot be copied.The parts with changed types will be reset based on original size of parts.
However, when the settings of Windows font are copied, the size of fonts will also be copied, so the size of parts
may vary with the size of fonts.

5-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Screen catalog
View(V) -> Screen catalog(F)

Special screens for various equipment connected, as well as menus, bit monitors, word monitors, alarm log, and
tread graphs used frequently are registered in the screen catalog of VT STUDIO.

Display/hide the "Screen catalog" window.

1 Select “View(V)” -> “Screen catalog(F)” from the menu, and click the button.
To display/hide the "Screen catalog" window.

DISPLAY
Item Description
Category Select the category of screen catalog.

Download Use Internet Explorer to open the home page for screen catalog download.

To select a screen catalog file.


Select file
Select topics. This is enabled only when multiple categories exist in the same
Topics
screen catalog.
Description To display the description of each screen catalog.
Once this option is checked, the resolution will be changed according on the
Resize screen based on resolution
"VT model settings" at the time of screen catalog import.
Once this option is checked, a backup file will be created before screen
Create backup file
catalog is imported. Click the "..." button to set up the folder for file saving.
Preview is possible in the "View mode" window. Alternatively, you can double
Preview
click the thumbnail display to switch to the Preview screen.
To use screen catalog, open the ladder diagram enclosed. This is displayed
Open ladder diagram
only when an enclosed ladder diagram exists.
To display the PDF file including details description and usage of screen
Help
catalog.
Import Execute import.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-5


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Preview
Preview is possible in the "View mode" window.
Double click the "Screen list" button to display screens list. Switch to the "Screen catalog preview" window.
For more information, refer to "View Mode", page 5-28.

5
DISPLAY

Import screen catalog

1 Select an screen catalog to be imported and click the ìImportî button.


Alternatively, you can import by dragging and dropping the screen catalog to the edit screen.

Reference • In case no screen file is opened, please set up VT model and PLC model before import.
• When MultiTalk settings exist in the screen or PLCs whose station No. is setup are contained, the
"PLC model settings" window will be displayed. Please select an import destination.

If auto replacement of device is available for screen catalog due to integration with KV STUDIO, the "Import - KV
STUDIO integration" window will be displayed.

2 Select an item to be integrated and click the "Execute" button.

5-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Item Description
Current KV STUDIO Integrate with the current KV STUDIO.
KV STUDIO project Specify one project in KV STUDIO and then integrate the same.

Unit configurations in VT STUDIO. To use unit configurations saved in the screen file of VT STUDIO.
Not to integrate with KV STUDIO Import without integration.
Device comments Check this option to read the device comments.
Read the buffer memory
Check this option to read the buffer comments of expansion unit. Only for
comments of expansion
KV STUDIO Ver.5.5 or higher.
Read unit.
settings Read the comments of Check this option to read the comments of internal device (MW/MB) and
internal device/link device link device (LNW/LNB) on VT.

Unit configurations
Read unit configurations when KV STUDIO Ver.6 or higher is used for
integrating with "Current KV STUDIO" and "KV STUDIO project". 5
In case any item is overwritten, the following window is displayed.

DISPLAY
3 Confirm the overwrites, and click the "OK" button if no problem.

To confirm the details, please click the "Confirm details" button.

4 If the following window is displayed, click the "Read" button.

In case of details setting, or in case a message in red color is displayed due to, for example, duplicated devices,
please click the "Detailed settings" button.
For more information about advanced settings, See "Import", page 3-9.

5 After import is completed, window will be displayed, select whether to display the import result.

Select "Yes", then "search result list" window will display the import result.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-7


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Tool bar
View(V) -> Tool bar(T)

This switches display/hide of the tool bar.


Commonly used menu functions are summarized into the tool bar.
The displayed tool bar can be placed on the screen as a window by
dragging-and-dropping, or as a part of edit window by embedding into
upper, lower, left and right of edit window.
Display/hide of each tool bar can be selected by selecting "View(V)" ->
"Tool bar(T)".

5 The tool bar is displayed by marking the checkbox of the tool bar to be
displayed.
DISPLAY

Standard

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> Standard(N)

Each of the functions of the File menu can be operated by buttons.

Item Description
New Creates a new file.
Open Opens existing files.
Save Saves edited files.
Import Import screens and system settings from the existing screen data.
Cut Cuts the selected object.
Copy Copies the selected object.
Paste Re-places the copied object on screen.
Undo The previous operation is undone.
Redo Redoes the operation undone by the "Undo" button.
Print Prints the screen of the currently edited file or lists.
Add or Remove
Select the buttons to be displayed.
buttons

5-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Screen

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> Screen(S)

Specification of page No., global window No. and printer form page No. to edit, and specification of base/window
screens can be performed by button operation. New pages can also be made by button operation.

Item Description
New screen Creates a new base screen, window screen or printer form screen.

5
Screen attribute Sets the attributes (e.g. background color) of the base screen, window screen or printer form
settings screen.

Calls up a specified existing page No. global window No., or printer form screen page No.
Page No., Page comment

DISPLAY
Next page Calls up an existing next page.
Previous page Calls up an existing previous page.
Acfive Edit
Switch active edit Eabled/disabled.
Eabled /disabled
Previous screen Return to the previous screen. This operation can be performed for 20 times.
Edit base Sets the base (screen) ready for editing.
Edit window 1 Sets window 1 (screen) ready for editing.
Edit window 2 Sets window 2 (screen) ready for editing.
Edit window 3 Sets window 3 (screen) ready for editing.
Page configuration
Displays the "Page configuration management" window.
management
Add or remove
Select the buttons to be displayed
buttons

Switch/Lamp

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> Switches/Lamps(L)

Placing of lamp switches, lamps and switches can be operated by buttons.

Item Description
Switch Place switches.
Lamp switch Place lamp switches.
Lamp Place lamps.
N state lamp Place N state lamps.
N state parts Place N start parts.
Cross-key Place cross-key(only VT3-V7R)
Function switch Configure function switch. (Only for the VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G))
Add or remove
Select the buttons to be displayed
buttons

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-9


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Parts

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> Parts(P)

Press the buttons to configure the basic parts (numerical display, text display, message display and alarm display),
bar graph meter, trend graph/meter.

Item Description
Numerical value display Places numerical value displays.

5
Text display Places text displays.
Message display Places message displays.
Basic part

Alarm display Places alarm displays.


DISPLAY

Video display Places video displays.


Animation display Place animation display
Function control by devices Places function control by devices.
BMP file switching Places BMP file switches.
VNC display Configure VNC display.
Bar graph meter Places bar graph meters.
Pie chart meter Places pie chart meters.
Fan meter Places fan meters.
Meta/Graphs

Statistical bar graph


Places statistical bar graph meters.
meter
Statistical pie chart
Places statistical pie chart meter
meter
Trend Graph Places trend graphs.
XY graphs Place XY graph
Add or remove buttons Select the buttons to be displayed

Graphics

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> Graphics(F)

Screen drawing functions can be operated by buttons.

Item Description
Line Draws straight lines.
Continuous lines Draws continuous straight lines.
Rectangles Draws rectangles and paint rectangles.
Polygons Draws polygons and paint polygons.
Graphics

Circles/Ellipses Draws circles/ellipses and paint circles/ellipses.


Arc Draws arcs.
Fan Draws fans and paint fans.
Image Pastes Windows bitmap format or JPEG format image files to the screen.
Decorative frames Places decorative frames.
Outline text Draws text using Windows outline fonts.
Text

Bitmap text Write with embedded fonts.


Memo Places memos.
Load DXF file Loads DXF files saved in AutoCAD as drawn graphics.
Ruled line Create ruled lines.
Table Create table.
Call up screen Calls up specified screens for use in other screens.
Add or remove buttons Select the buttons to be displayed

5-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Control/Edit

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> Control/Edit(C)

Setting of part attributes, swapping the order (front/back) of selected objects, and alignment of multiple selected
objects can be operated by buttons.

Item Description
Select one of
Select one object at a time in order from multiple selected objects.
mulfiple parts
Select parts
Parts Attribute
Selects objects. 5
Changes the settings of switches/lamps, basic parts and meters/graphs.
Settings

DISPLAY
Graphic attribute
Sets the graphic attribute controls to drawn graphics, outline text, bitmap text, and images.
controls
Change switch area Changes the switch area.
Rotate Rotates selected drawn graphics clockwise in 90 deg. increments.
Flip horizontal Flips selected object(s) horizontally.
Flip vertical Flips selected object(s) vertically.
Edit Apex Edits the apices of selected straight lines, continuous straight lines and polygons.
Move to front Moves the selected object to the front.
Move to back Moves the selected object to the back.
Move to front Moves the selected object forwards.
Move backward Moves the selected object backwards.
Group Groups multiple objects into a single object.
Ungroup Ungroups a grouped object to the original multiple objects.
Place/Align Aligns multiple selected objects.
Add or remove
Select the buttons to be displayed
buttons

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-11


5-1 About Various Display Functions

View

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> View(V)

Changing of the screen display can be operated by buttons.

Item Description

5 Enlarge display
Reduce display
Enlarges the display of the edit window.
Reduces the display of the edit window.
Display
Select display magnification for edit window.
DISPLAY

magnification
Set grid Sets the grid display spacing and color.
Individual display The lamp bit device of lamp and lamp switch as well as reference bit device for graphics attribute
ON/OFF control in ON/OFF state are displayed individually according to the preview display settings.
All devices display Displays the state when lamp bit devices for lamps and lamp switches, and reference bit
ON devices in graphic attribute control are ON in the edit window.
All devices display Displays the state when lamp bit devices for lamps and lamp switches, and reference bit
OFF devices in graphic attribute control are OFF in the edit window.
State No. Switches and displays the state No. of N state lamps and N state parts in the edit window.

Switches and displays the display text string ID (0 to 7) for parts, etc. in the edit window.
Display text string ID
Displays the screen (base, window 1, 2 and 3), interrupt window, and global window on the
Overlap other screen
same page as the screen currently being edited overlapped.
View Mode Displays the "View mode" window.
Screen "Screen" window is displayed in workspace.
System setting "System setting" window is displayed in workspace.
Seach result list Display seach result list
Text string list Display text string list
Device comment list Display device comment list
Operating log list Display operating log list
Part catalog Displays the Part Catalog window.
Screen catalog Display the "Screen catalog" window.
Add or remove
Select the buttons to be displayed.
buttons

5-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Position/Size

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> Position/size(O)

You can change the position or size of currently selected objects.

Start X coordinate Start Y coordinate End X coordinate End Y coordinate X-axis size Y-axis size

Item Description
Displays the start x coordinates of the object. If you change the coordinates by entering a
Start X coordinate
numeric value, the object moves in the X direction.

Start Y coordinate
Displays the start y coordinates of the object. If you change the coordinates by entering a
numeric value, the object moves in the Y direction. 5
Displays the end x coordinates of the object. If you change the coordinates by entering a

DISPLAY
End X coordinate numeric value, the object moves in the X direction, and the object is resized in the X direction.
The start coordinates do not move.
Displays the end y coordinates of the object. If you change the coordinates by entering a
End Y coordinate numeric value, the object moves in the Y direction, and the object is resized in the Y direction.
The start coordinates do not move.
Displays the X direction size of the object. If you change the coordinates by entering a numeric value, the
X-axis size
object moves in the X direction, and the object is resized in the X direction. The start coordinates do not move.
Displays the Y direction size of the object. If you change the coordinates by entering a numeric value, the object
Y-axis size
moves in the Y direction, and the object is resized in the Y direction. The start coordinates do not move.

(0,0)
(Start X coordinate, start Y coordinate)

Y-axis size

X-axis size
(End X coordinate, end Y coordinate)

Communications

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> Communication(C)

Set the sending/receiving of data or communication.

Item Description
Send all data Sends edited screen data and PLC data folder data to the VT3.
Different-send screen
Send the changed screen data to VT3.
data
Receive all data Receives screen data or PLC data folder data saved to the VT3 on the PC.
Compare all data Verifies the data on the VT3 with the data currently being edited on the PC.
All Data Check Perform data check for all data.
Communications settings Perform setting related to communication
Serial port Enable communication via VT3 with serial interface.
USB Enable communication via VT3 with USB interface.
ETHERNET Enable communication via VT3 with Ethernet.
Remote COM port tool Start Remote COM port tool.
Display/hide buttons Select the buttons to be displayed
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-13
5-1 About Various Display Functions

Guideline

View(V) -> Tool bar(T) -> Guideline

Display/hide guideline and display position for the guideline can be selected.

Items Description
Display/hide Switch to display/hide for guideline.
Left Align display guideline on the left of configurated objects.
Right Align display guideline on the right of configurated objects.

5 Top
Bottem
Align display guideline at the top of configurated objects.
Align display guideline at the bottem of configurated objects.
Center width Align display guideline at the center of object width.
DISPLAY

Center height Align display guideline at the center of the configured object height.

Status bar
View(V) -> Status bar(B)

This switches display/hide of the status bar.


The status bar displays the following details:
• Explanation of currently selected functions, key state
• Information (type, position, size, label) of the currently selected object
• Name of selected VT models (number of colors also displayed for VT3-Q5M/W4M*/W4G*)
• Name of PLC manufacturers and models (MultiTalk displayed if MultiTalk function is used)
• On-screen cursor coordinates

Point • Double click the VT model to display the "VT model settings" window.
• Double click the PLC vendor and model to display the "PLC model settings" window.

5-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Workspace
This switch displays/hides of the work space.
The workspace contains the following contents.
• Screen • System settings • Find result list
• Text string list • Device comment • Operating log

Screen

View(V) -> Workspace(W) -> Picture(P)

This panel allows you to view the configuration of screens made on each page, and to perform copy, delete and other
editing operations on the screens you have made.
5

DISPLAY
Item Description
New screen Opens the "New screen" window to make a new screen.
Screen attribute
Opens the "Screen attribute settings" window to change the attributes of the specified screen.
settings
Copy Copies the specified screen.
Paste Pastes the copied screen to the specified base screen, window screen, or form screen.
Deletes the screens on the specified pages, and moves the deleted screens to Trash. Screens
Delete
you have deleted are moved to Trash.
When "Open Import File" is opened, the file containing the screen to import is selected, the
"Page configuration management" window is displayed. The screen list is divided into two
Import screen *1
parts, upper and lower, and the list of screens in the import file are displayed in the lower screen
list. Copy the screen ID from the screen list of import files, and paste it to the upper screen list.
Switch display Switches between the list display and image display.
Page configuration
Displays the "Page configuration management" window.
management
Switch display Changes the type of screen, page No. (global window No.), comments, etc.
Link copy Makes a link for the copied screen. This item cannot be used on form screens.
Clear trash Completely deletes screens in Trash.
*1 "Importing screens", page 12-55. To import system settings, select File(F) -> Import(I) from the menu.
Right click menu, and add the following operations.
Item Description
Unfold all Unfold the selected items.
Fold all Fold the selected items.

The same operations can be performed from Menu that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button.

Point • The window screen cannot be copied and pasted to base screen, nor base screen be copied and
pasted to window screen. (Pasting between local windows and global windows is possible.)
• Copying and pasting between the Printer form screen and regular screens(base screen, window
screens) is not possible. (Copying and pasting between printer form screens is possible.)

Reference • Deletion in 1 page units


If you click "Page No." with the right mouse button, and select “Delete” from the menu that is
displayed, you can delete all screens (base/windows 1, 2, 3) on the selected page.
• The following components can be generated when dragging and dropping screen in workspace to drawing window.
• Base screen : components with page switching function and screen calling function set
• Window 1/2/3 : components with local window display set
• Global window : components with global window display set
• Form screen : components with the print start trigger bit device of form screen set
• When pressing the F2 key on the page No., the "Page comment setting" window will appear.
"12-11 Screen Configuration Management", Page 12-53

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-15


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Page No.

Screen ID

• Display of "Screen attribute settings" window


5 You can display the "Screen attribute settings" window by double-clicking "Screen ID".
• Switch pages with cursor key
After the screen window is activated, if you click the up/down cursor key (/), the screen will be
DISPLAY

switched and displayed corresponding to position of the cursor. In addition, edit window can be
activated by pressing "Enter" when cursors are aligned.
• Move "Screen ID" by dragging and dropping
"Screen ID" can be moved to any position by dragging and dropping in workplace.

Change page
 Individual change of screen ID/global window No.
Select "Change page(G)" from the right-click menu of screen ID (the global window No.) to display the "Change
page" window.
• The page No. of screen will be changed when the page is changed via screen ID.
• The global window No. and local window can not be changed when page is changed via screen ID of global
window.
• Only the page No.of form screen will be changed when page is changed via screen ID of form screen.

 Batch change page No.


Select "Change page(G)" from right-click menu of page No. to display the "Move and duplicate page" window.
• When page is changed, all page No.s of the screens (Base, Window 1/2/3) on that page will be changed.

5-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

• After page is changed, for the components (Page Switch (page No. specifying), Local window display, global
window display) referring page to be changed , a window for confirming whether the change is followed will be
displayed. If you select "Yes", then the above settings will also be changed along with the page change operation.

Trash
Screens you have deleted are moved to Trash. Screens in Trash can be re-used by copy-and-paste. The screens in Trash
can be completely deleted by clicking "Clear trash" in the menu that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button. 5
Up to ten of the latest deleted screens remain in Trash.

DISPLAY
System setting

View(V) -> Workspace(W) -> System setting(S)

Set up the "VT system settings", "Global function switch (only for VT3-
V6H(G)/Q5H(G))", "Device comments", "Trend graph", "Alarm",
"Message", "Windows fonts", "Device transfer", "Global function control",
"PLC data folder", "Worksheet ", and "Ladder monitor".

For the details, refer to the following chapters.


"Chapter 9 SETTING BASIC PARTS"
"Chapter 10 SETTING METERS & IMAGES"
"Chapter 12 RESOURCE"
"Chapter 15 PLC DATA FOLDER"
"Chapter 16 WORKSHEET"

Seach result list

View(V) -> Workspace(W) -> Seach result list(L)

The seach result list can also be displayed using the following methods.
• Select "Edit(E)"->"Find(X)" from the menu.
• Open the menu with right mouse button, and select "Seach(H)".
• Open the menu with right mouse button, and select "Seach result list(I)".

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-17


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Item Description
To select the list page. The import result is displayed upon the completion of a screen
Page(P)
catalog or normal import.
Target range Selects the window to be displayed as a list.
Window(W)
Import result To display import result upon complete of screen catalog or normal import
Display system settings Check this option to display system settings.
Seach(S)*1 Display "Seach" window after clicking.
After clicking, display the setting window of selected parts in the list. When selecting the
Change settings(T) parts of multiple types, *3 parts attribute settings can be edited in batch.
When selecting screen attribute, display "screen attribute setting" window.
Display “Device batch change” window after clicking. The devices selected in the list can
Batch change devices(D)*4 be changed in batch.
Screen/system settings*2 Display the page number.
Screen ID Display screen ID.
5 Coordinate*2
Description*2
Display the coordinate of configuration.
Display the types of parts.
DISPLAY

Device Display devices set on parts.


Setting details Display contents set on parts.

*1 "Search", page 4-11


*2 Sequencing is allowed.
*3 "11-9 Batch Edition of the Part Attributes"
*4 Set devices changed in “Device batch change” and click “OK” button.

Seach result list and operations in edit window


• After selecting parts from edit window, the corresponding part columns in search result list are shown in bold fonts.
• After deleting parts from edit window, the search result list is also deleted.
• After selecting parts from search result list, the edit window is switched, and the parts are turned into selected
status.
• After deleting ( key) parts from search result list, the edit window is also deleted.
• In search result list, continuous lines can be selected by pressing and clicking key.
• In search result list, discontinuous lines can be selected by pressing and clicking key.
• In the search result list, all search results may be selected by pressing + A , or [Select ALL (L)] on the right-
click menu.
• In search result list, press +  or  to jump to the following item
• The "Display/hide column(U)" in the right-click menu can be used to display/hide the "Screen ID" and
"Coordinates" columns.
• The "Unfold all indexes/fold all indexes" in the right-click menu can be use to display/hide details in a batch
fashion.

5-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Text string list

View(V) -> Workspace(W) -> Text string list(M)

Extract text string data from screen data to display in the list. You’re allowed to edit text string on the displayed "Text
string list" window. The screen can be edited in edit window under the list window.

5
Item Description

DISPLAY
Page(P) Select the page displaying text string.After that, display after filtering.
Window(W) Select the window displaying text string. After that, display after filtering.
Parts(S)*1 Select the parts showing text string. After that, display after filtering.
Copy Copy the selected cell and text string.
Paste Paste the copied cell and text string.
Search Display "Search/replace in the text string list" window.
Import Display “import to text string list” window, and select the files of text string list to be imported.
Export Display “export to text string list” window, and export the displayed text string list to the files.
Display text string list. If selecting parts on the list, the edit window will be switched to the page or window
Text string list
placed with selected parts, and the parts are selected.The text strings can also be changed on the list.
Multiple ON(N)*3 To set the "Multiple" check for selected part to ON in a batch form.
Multiple OFF(O)*3 To set the "Multiple" check for selected part to OFF in a batch form.

*1 The selectable parts are bitmap text, outline text, nameplate (switch, lamp, lamp switch, N state parts, N state
lamp), alarming parts (state display character strings, item names) and screen attributes (screen ID).
*2 The text files of CSV format or UNICODE can be imported/exported.
Export the text strings of all parts in the screen data.
*3 Multiple ON/OFF is available only in the right-click menu of character string list.

Reference If double-clicking the text strings on the text string list, the cursor blinks, and the text strings can be
edited. The changed contents on the list will be reflected into parts on edit screen. In addition, the
changed parts on edit screen will also be reflected into the contents on list.

 "Search/replace text string list" window


Through the "Find/replace the text string list" window, text strings can be searched and replaced with “Search/replace
text string list“ window.

"Search" "replace"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-19


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Items Description
Input the text string to be searched or the text string before replacing. Even for character strings
Search text string(T)
that contain line feed, line feed will also be included in the search.
Input the text string after replacing. After replacement, if the character string needs to contain
Replace text string(W)
line feed, Alt + Enter may be used for line feed of the replaced character string.
Rearch direction(D) Select the seach/replace direction.
Replace all(A) Batch replace the text strings as objects.
Individually replacement for the text strings as objects. When you don't want to replace it, click
Replace(R)
"Search next", and the cursor will move to the next text string.
Search next(N) Search as the specified direction of "Search direction".
Close(C) Close the "Search/replace text string list" window.

Reference In the "Text string list" window, after you click " Ctrl + F " or " Ctrl + H " with any item selected, the
selected text string will be listed in the "Search text strings", and the "Search/replace in the text string
5 list" will be displayed.
DISPLAY

Example of formats of text string list


The text string list can be imported/exported to CSV files(*.csv) or text files(*.txt). The format of CSV files is as
follows.

Import CSV files Export CSV files

If the exported files are imported again, please edit only the text strings set in the parts.

5-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Device comment list

View(V) -> Workspace(W) -> Device comment list(D)

The following functions can be realized by reading into VT STUDIO the device
comment used in ladder diagram program:
• Look up device comment during device setting.
• Find in device comment.
• Look up device comment from find result list.
• Set parts (nameplate and device settings) from device comment list.
• Generate parts (switch, lamp, lamp switch, numerical display, text
display, outline fonts) from device comment list.
• The unit enables filter display.
(For KV-7000 Series or KV-5500/5000/3000 Series PLC models
5
incorporating KV STUDIO Ver. 6.0 or later unit architecture data.)

DISPLAY
* KV-7000 Series supports KV STUDIO Ver. 8 and later versions.

For device comment details, see


"11-10 Device Comments"

Operating log list

View(V) -> Workspace(W) -> Operating log list(G)

The operating log files to be saved into memory card as CSV files or UNICODE text files are read into VT STUDIO, which
are used to find screen data and check the log.

About details of operating log, see


"11-11 Operation Log"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-21


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Switch grid/Grid

Switch Grid

View (V) -> Switch grid (S)

This switches display/hide of the switch grid.


Switch areas of objects having touch switches such as lamp
switches and switches are placed at all times to snap to the
switch grid.

5 Point • The spacing among switch grids is set


as 16 dots in longitudinal and horizontal
direction and can't be changed.
DISPLAY

• When "VT model setting" is VT3-V6H,


VT3-Q5H, VT3-W4T*, VT3-W4M*/M4G*,
the switch grids will not be displayed. Switch Grid Grid

Grid

View(V) -> Grid(G)

This switches display/hide of the grid.


The grid is used a reference point for aiding you when making screens.

Set grid
View(V) -> Set grid(R)

Sets the grid that is used as the reference point for aiding you in making screens in the edit window.

Item Description
Set the horizontal and vertical grid spacing in the edit window as a number of dots. Set the spacing
Grid spacing in the vertical direction as the Y coordinate, and the spacing in the horizontal direction as the X
coordinate. The setting range is 1 or more in both and X and Y directions. The default is "X=4, Y=4".
Grid color *1 Select the grid color.
Set the grid spacing to the same size (X=2 and Y=2 for VT3-W4 series, otherwise X=16 and Y=16)
Switch grid size
as the switch grid.
When this checkbox is marked, drawing and movement of objects is aligned with the grid in the edit window.
Snap to grid When snap to grid is set to ON, graphics are drawn aligned to the grid. In the default setting, this checkbox
is marked.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

Point When grid spacing is set to "X=1, Y=1", the created screen cannot be checked.

Reference If the setting of “as per grid” is temporarily cancelled when moving parts and zooming, the setting of
“as per grid” will be contrary to current setting after pressing key .
That’s to say, if selecting “as per grid”, the settings will be cancelled temporarily after pressing keya; if
not selecting “as per grid”, the settings will be effective temporarily after pressing key .

5-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Guide line
View(V)->Guide line(I) ->Display/Hide(S)
->Left(L)
->Right(R)
->Upper(T)
->Lower(B)
->Center of width (W)
->Center of height(H)

Display the guide line to facilitate placing/arrangement of parts.


Select the position of displaying/hiding guide line and displaying guide line.

5
Guide line

DISPLAY
Point When "as per grid" and guide line in the grid settings are selected, the reference line is at
priority.

Switch Area
View(V) -> Switch area(A)

Switches display/hide of switch areas having touch switches such as lamp switches and switches.
The switch area represents the effective area as touch switch.
"6-2 About Touch Switches"

Switch area

Moving switch areas


Switches are always set to snap to the switch grid.
When objects are moved, switch areas snap to the switch grid interlocked with movement of objects.
Switch areas cannot be moved by themselves. Set the switch area again when the switch area is changed.
"Changing the Switch Area", page 4-20

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-23


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Scale Display

+ numerical key (zoom in)


View(V) -> Zoom display(M) F5 (Display all)
+ numerical key (zoom out)

Zooms (zoom in/zoom out) the display screen. Zoom out the display when viewing an overview of the entire display screen
or when the object is moved over the entire display area, and zoom in the display when the graphic is to be drawn in detail.

Zooming by menu:
Select "View(V)" -> "Zoom display(M)" from the menu, and select the zooming
ratio.
8 types of magnification are available: 50%, 75%, 100%, 150%, 200%, 300%,
5 400%, display all.
Resize according to edit window size when set to display all.
DISPLAY

Zooming by tool bar: Enlarge display button Reduce display button


Clicking the button increases the zooming ratio by one
step, and clicking the button decreases the zooming ratio
by one step.

Reference • Objects are enlarged referenced to the center of the object if the displayed is enlarged with the object selected.
• zooming is also impossible by key + mouse roller

Scroll Edit Window


Move cursor after right clicking edit window
Cursor will become hand-shaped when right clicking edit window.
Edit window can be scrolled by dragging.

Point It is impossible to scroll edit window when executing the following functions.
• When dragging component and window
• When changing component size by dragging
• When selecting the created component from the menu bar or the tool bar and determining
its size
• When changing switch area
• When coping/pasting a component within the same page No. and determining the pasting
destination
• When apexes are determined for a polygon component
• When selecting cells of a form for a form creation component
• When using the auto-fill function for a form creation component

Select and Edit Screen


Display(V)->Select Edit Screen(E) -> Base(B) +
-> Window1(1) +
-> Window 2(2) +
-> Window3(3) +

5-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Edit base

A "base" is the screen that is always displayed when the page is switched.
Select the base as follows when placing graphics or text on bases for editing.

1 Either select "View(V)" -> "Select edit screen(E)" -> "Base(B)" from the menu, or click the button.
The button is pressed, and the base can be edited.

Point The button will remain pressed if the page you are making contains only the base.
Clicking this button again will not change this state.

For details on editing graphics and text you have made, refer to the respective descriptions below.

Edit windows 1, 2 and 3 5

DISPLAY
A "window" is the screen that is displayed overlapping the base.
To edit windows 1, 2 or 3, select windows 1, 2 or 3 as follows.

1 Select "view(V)"->"Select edit screen(E)"


-> “Window1(1)/Window2(2)/Window3(3)", or click
/ / button from the the menu.
• The "New screen" window is displayed.
• When windows 1 to 3 have been created, “New screen”
window isn’t displayed.
• When existing windows 1 to 3 are hidden, change them
into display status by clicking / / button.

2 Set the screen ID and background color of the window to be created.


"12-1 New Screen"

3 The selected window is displayed and can be edited.

For details on editing graphics and text you have made, refer to the respective descriptions below.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-25


5-1 About Various Display Functions

Overlap Other Screen


View(V) -> Overlap other screen(P)

Displays the screen currently being edited overlapping other screens.


You can edit screens while viewing how the base screen and window screens overlap each other.

Select the screen to overlap from the screens (base, windows 1,


2 or 3) on the same page, interrupt window, and global windows.

5
DISPLAY

Point The screen to overlap will be displayed on the background plane. Please confirm on VT3 if
displayed images differ from actual display.

Reference •When "Overlap other screen" is selected during execution of "Overlap other screen", "Overlap other screen" will be
released.
•When "Overlap other screen" is selected with " Shift " key pressed during execution of "Overlap other screen", the
"Overlap other screen" window will be displayed.

Active Edit
View(V) -> Active edit(Q) +

Switch effective/ineffective Active edit

Reference "11-7 Active Edit"

Label
View(V) -> Label(L) F8

Switches display/hide of labels that are attached to drawn graphics to which switches/lamps, basic parts, meters/
graphs, and graphic attribute controls are set in the edit window.
Labels are used for displaying or printing a list of drawn graphics to which switches/lamps, basic parts, meters/
graphs, and graphic attribute controls are set.
Label default settings

Item Default Item Default


Switch T_**** Animation display Anm_****
Lamp switch Ls_**** Function control by devices Df_****
Lamp Lp_**** BMP file switching Im_****
N state lamp NsL_**** VNC display Vn_****
N state parts NsP_**** Bar graph meter Bm_****
cross-key Ck_**** Pie chart meter Cm_****
Graphic attribute controls L_**** Fan meter Sm_****
Numerical value display N_**** Statistical bar graph meter Bs_****
Text display S_**** Statistical pie chart meter Cs_****
Message display Mb_**** Trend Graph Tg_****
Alarm display Ab_**** XY graph Xg_****
Video display Vid_****
**** stands for the created number. A number starting from 0000 is appended.
5-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
5-1 About Various Display Functions

Entering labels
Labels can be changed as desired from the default settings. Enter labels as follows:

Entering labels in each setting screen:


In various setting screens of switch•lamp, basic parts, meter•graph and screen
attribute control, enter full-width characters within 16 characters or half-width
English digits within 32 characters.

Entering labels in the "Label settings" window:


If double-clicking label in the edit window, the “îlabel settingî” window will be
displayed.
Enter the label and click the "OK" button.

Reference Font size of label


5
"Option Settings", page 4-22

DISPLAY
Device No.
View(V) -> Device No. (D)

Displays/hides device Nos. set to drawn graphics to which switches/lamps, basic parts, meters/graphs, and graphic
attribute controls placed in the edit window have been set.
Also, the "Parts settings" window is displayed by double-clicking the device No. displayed in the edit window. In this
window, the type of target (reference) device and device No. can be set.

Reference Font size of device No.


"Option Settings", page 4-22
Å@

Memo
View(V) -> Memo(O)

Displays/hides memos placed in the edit window.


Memos are used to taken and paste notes you want to remember while you are making screens.

Reference "7-6 Setting Memos"

Device ON/OFF Display


View(V) ->Device ON/OFF display(Q) ->Display ON/OFF
View(V) ->Device display ON/OFF(Q) ->Individual device ON/OFF display(I);
View(V) ->Device display ON/OFF(Q) ->Device display ON(N)
View(V) ->Device display ON/OFF(Q) ->Device display OFF(F)

Individual device display ON/OFF


The lamp bit device of lamp and lamp switch as well as reference bit device for graphics attribute control in ON/OFF
state are displayed individually according to the preview display settings.

Reference • The lamp and lamp switch will be displayed according to ON/OFF settings on ìnameplateî labels of “attribute”
window.
• Screen attribute control is displayed according to preview display settings on “Screen attribute control”
window.

Device display ON/Device display OFF


Displays the state when lamp bit devices for lamps and lamp switches, and reference bit devices in graphic attribute
control are ON/OFF in the edit window.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-27


5-1 About Various Display Functions

View Mode
View(V) -> View mode(V)

Displays the screen in the View mode. The View mode is used for confirming the display image of the edited screen
on the VT3 and the output image in printing of the printer form.

5
DISPLAY

Item Description
Save the displayed menu as lattice (BMP) file or JPEG file.
Initial value of the file name is as follows.
Basic menu/local window: <File Name> <Page No (.4 bit)>.bmp (JPG)
Save image on the Example: VT3 menu 0000.bmp
Global window : <File Name> <Global window No (.G+3 bit)>.bmp (JPG)
menu Example: VT3 menu G000.bmp
Form menu : <File Name> <Page No (.P+2 bit)>.bmp (JPG)
Example: VT3 menu_P00.bmp
Ctrl + S may also be used to execute the same operation.
Page No. Calls up a specific existing page No.
Next page Calls up an existing next page.
Previous page Calls up an existing previous page.
Zoom in display Enlarges the display screen to a higher display ratio.
Zoom out display Reduces the display screen to a lower display ratio.
Switch ON display Displays the state in which a switch and lamp switch touch switch is touched.
Individual ON/ The lamp bit device of lamp and lamp switch as well as reference bit device for graphics
attribute control in ON/OFF state are displayed individually according to the preview display
OFF settings.
Displays the state when lamp bit devices for lamps and lamp switches, and reference bit
Device ON display
devices in graphic attribute control are ON in the edit window.
Displays the state when lamp bit devices for lamps and lamp switches, and reference bit
Device OFF display
devices in graphic attribute control are OFF in the edit window.
Handy display*1 To switch the display of handy series.
Backlight color
Switch to display backlight color.
switch *2
State No. Display after switching the status number of Nstate lamp and Nstate parts.

witches and displays the display text string ID (0 to 7) for parts, etc.
Display text string ID
Window 1 Switches display/hide of window 1.
Window 2 Switches display/hide of window 2.
Window 3 Switches display/hide of window 3.
Global window Switches display/hide of the global window.
5-28 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
5-1 About Various Display Functions

Item Description
Displays the "Global window to display" window when the "Settings" button is clicked. Set the
Settings
global window to be displayed.
Exit View mode Closes the "View mode" window.

*1 This can be displayed only when VT model is setup to "VT3-V6H"/ "VT3-Q5H".

Item Description
Profile display disable To display the profile of VT3 handhold series.
Profile display enable Not to display the profile of VT3 handhold series.
Back display To display the back view of VT3 handhold series.
Handy display settings To setup the status of hardware switch and LED.

*2 VT model setting can only be displayed for "VT3-W4M/G*".

Handy display settings 5


To display/hide key switch and enable switch as well as operation lamp ON/OFF.

DISPLAY
Button switch options include Red, Yellow, Grey, and None.

Settings in the "Global window to display" window


Set the global window to be displayed cascading with other screens in the View mode in the "Global window to
display" window.
Mark the checkbox for the global window ID (0 to 7) to be displayed cascading, and set the global window No.

Reference If form screen is displayed in View mode when thermal printer is used, the screen is displayed in black
and white colors as in the same case of actual output.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 5-29


5-1 About Various Display Functions

MEMO

5
DISPLAY

5-30 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6
BEFORE YOU START
SETTING PARTS 6

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


This chapter describes how to set up colors and line types in the graphic and
part windows as well as things you need to know when setting up other
components.

6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types •••••••••••••••••••• 6-2


6-2 About Touch Switches •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-7
6-3 Key Entry Parts ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-10
6-4 About Fonts ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-23
6-5 About Text Codes •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-24
6-6 About Devices •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-25
6-7 Setting of Devices•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-37
6-8 Indirect Reference ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-43
6-9 Calculation •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6-49

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-1


6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types

Color Selection and BLK


Selection of graphic or text display color, and setting as to whether or not these are to made to blink are items that
must be set when setting graphics and parts.
The following describes color selection and BLK (blink).

Color selection

To set a color, click color selection buttons such as "Line color", "Plane color", "Frame color", "Background color", and
"Text color" ( ) in the part setting window.

Color palette
This is used when setting color models other than the VT3-Q5M/W4M(A)/W4G(A) as the target VT. You can choose

6 your desired colors from total 78 colors in the palette. In addition, you can also adjust colors with RGB (4096 colors).

Example of color palette


BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

16-level Palette
Used to set VT3-Q5M (32 levels) in the target VT.

Black-and-white palette
Used to set VT3-Q5M (black and white) in the target VT.

[Line Color][Frame Color][Character Color]

[Plane Color][Background Color] Advanced outline text

6-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types

Advanced settings
When the "Advanced" button is clicked, the color palette closes, and the "Line attribute settings" or "Plane attribute
settings" window is displayed.
In the advanced settings, you can make decorative settings such as patterns.
"Line Attribute Settings", page 6-5
"Plane Attribute Settings", page 6-6

BLK

The "Blink settings" window is displayed by clicking the "BLK" button ( ).


Select the blinking speed.

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Item Description
Standard
Fixed at 0.4 cycle (VT1 compatible)
(BLK)
Blink speed
Speed 1 (BL1)
Can be set within range 0.1 to 2.5 second in 0.1 increments. *1
Speed 2 (BL2)
*1 Changing the blink speed 1 and 2 settings
"VT System", page 12-12

Point For VT3-Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A), the "Blink


Settings" window is not displayed. The blinking speed becomes "Standard".
Color and Line
Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-3


6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types

Line Type Selection


VT STUDIO is provided with setting items for selecting the line type, to select which line types are to be used when
displaying graphics or parts.
Clicking the line type selection button ( ) in the part setting window, for example, displays a list of line
types.
Select the desired line type from the displayed list of line types.
Note that the line types that can be set vary according to the selected graphic or part.

Example of line type selection

Setting Item Line Width (Dot Space)


Light solid 1 dot wide
Heavy solid 2 dot wide

6 Light dotted
Heavy dot
1 dot wide
2 dot wide
Light dash 1 dot wide
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Heavy dash 2 dot wide


Light chain 1 dot wide
Heavy chain 2 dot wide
Light 2 dot 1 dot wide
Heavy 2 dot 2 dot wide
Heavy (4X) 4 dot wide
Heavy (8X) 8 dot wide
"Advanced..." -

Advanced settings
The "Line attribute settings" window is displayed by clicking the "Advanced" button.
In the advanced settings, you can make decorative settings such as patterns and graduations.
"Line Attribute Settings", page 6-5

6-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types

Line Attribute Settings


The "Line attribute settings" window is displayed by clicking the "Advanced" button when selecting a line color or
type.

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Color and Line
Type

Touch Switches

Item Description Key Entry Parts


Solid Line One-dot Chain
Fonts
Dash Line Two-dot Chain
Solid/Dotted line Dotted Line Text Codes
Light chain
Solid/Dotted Solid Device
Select from 1, 2, 4 and 8 dots.
line line
Line Setting of
width Other
Devices
than Select from 1 and 2 dots.
solid Indirect reference
Line color *1 Select the line color.
Calculation
Pattern type Select from 16 pattern types.
Line width Select from 1, 2, 4 and 8 dots.
Pattern
Line Color 1/Line
Select the line color.
Color 2*1
Line width Select from 1, 2, 4 and 8 dots.
Gradation *2 Line Color 1/Line
Select the line color.
Color 2 *1
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK*1
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Preview Displays a preview of the lines you have set.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*2 Can be set in the window where line types for the "Chart" tab of the Direction Chart and XY Chart are selected.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-5


6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types

Plane Attribute Settings


The "Plane attribute settings" window is displayed by clicking the "Advanced" button when selecting the color of a
graphic (plane color) or a part (background color).

6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Item Description
Plane color Plane Color*1 Select the color of the plane.
Pattern type Select from 16 pattern types.
Pattern Plane Color 1/Plane
Select the color of the plane.
Color 2 *1
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK*1
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Preview Displays a preview of the plane or background you have set.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

6-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-2 About Touch Switches

About Touch Switches


Touch switches are placed if switches, lamp switches, and key entry parts (when "Select by switch" is set) are placed
in the edit window.
Multiple touch switches can be placed in a single screen, and simultaneous touching of up to two switches can be
recognized. Recognition of simultaneous touching of up to two switches can also be disabled in settings.
2-Touch Switch
"VT System", page 12-12

Point For VT3-X15/V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A), 2 touch switches cannot be pressed


simultaneously.

Reference Key entry parts comprise the following:


• Numeric value display • Alarm Display
• Text Display • Direction Chart
• Message Display • XY Chart
"6-3 Key Entry Parts"
6
• Please use safe touch switches. Otherwise, fatal danger and equipment damage may

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


happen. Also, design a system that is adaptable to touch switches malfunction.
• Do not touch the touch switches (touch panel) with a sharp-pointed object such as a pen or
screwdriver. Doing so might scratch the touch switch (touch panel) or cause them to
NOTICE
malfunction.
• Do not subject the touch panel (touch switches), cross-key pad or push-button switches on
the switch unit to shock or impact, or touch them with more than necessary force. Doing
so might damage them.

Point Only visible touch switches are valid as switches of base screens when window screens are
displayed.

@0000_1

Switch A is enabled as it is visible. Switch B, Color and Line


however, is disabled as it is hidden behind Type
A the window screen.
Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes
Base screen Window screen
Device

Setting of
Number of touch switches Devices

The following table shows the maximum number of touch switches that can be placed in a single screen. Indirect reference

Calculation
Model No. H x V = Max. Number of Touch Switches Number of Display Panel Dots
VT3-X15 64 x 48 = 3072 1024x768 dots
VT3-S12/S10 50 x 38 = 1900 800x600 dots
VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R 40 x 30 = 1200 640x480 dots
VT3-V6H(G) 80 x 60 = 4800 640x480 dots
VT3-Q5H(G) 40 x 30 = 1200 320x240 dots
VT3-Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/
20 x 15 = 300 320x240 dots
Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A
VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) 40 x 16 = 640 320x128 dots

Point The above number of touch switches sometimes cannot be placed in a single screen due to screen
restrictions.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-7


6-2 About Touch Switches

 Size of touch switches


The grid size of touch switch varies with the models.

Mode The grid size of touch switch The configuration of touch switch

16 dots
16 dots
VT3-X15/
S12/S10/
V10/V8/V7/
16 dots 16 dots 16 dots 16 dots
Q5T(W)/
Q5S(W)/ 16 dots
Q5M(W)/
Q5T(W)A/
Q5M(W)A
Touch switches can be set to any size of integer Take the grid size (16 x 16 dots) in the above
multiples taking the above touch switch as the base diagram as reference to configurate components.
6 size.

2 dots
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

8 dots
VT3-
V6H(G)/
Q5H(G)/ 8 dots
8 dots
W4T(A)/
W4M(A)/ 2 dots
W4G(A) 8 dots
The size of a touch switch in the above figure is the Take the smaller grid
min. size, and size can be changed in vertical and size (2 x 2 dots) than that in the above diagram (8 x 8
horizontal direction in 2-point unit. dots) as reference to configurate components.

Point It is necessary to set switch area manually in "Switch zone change" when the grid size of
switch/indicator switch in VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/W4 series is set to 16 points or less.
"Changing the Switch Area", page 4-20

 When the number of display area dots is 800 x 600 dots

800 dots = 16 dots x 50 touch switches


16 x 16 dots

600 dots = 16 dots x 37 touch switches


+ 8 dots

Though half of the touch switch protrudes outside of the switch area on its lower side of the screen, the switch area is
valid. Therefore, for a model with a display area of 800 x 600 points, up to
50 (vertical) x 38 (horizontal)=1900
touch switches can be configured on one screen.
"Number of touch switches", page 6-7

6-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-2 About Touch Switches

Switch Area
The area where a touch switch is set on screen is called the "switch area".
To display a switch area, select "View(V)" -> "Switch area(A)" from the menu.
When a touch switch is placed overlapping another switch in a single screen (base, local window, global window) as
shown in the following figures, the switch in the foreground functions.

Switch 2 Switch 1

Switch 2

Switch 1

Switch 2 functions in this area.


Switch 1 functions in this area.
Switch 2 functions in this area.
Switch 1 functions in this area.
6

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


The switch area is automatically adjusted to match the size of the object, and is also automatically enlarged or
reduced when objects are scaled. When objects are scaled, touch switches are also automatically scaled.
To manually set an automatically set switch area to a desired size, either select "Edit(E)" -> "Change switch area(A)"
in that order, or click the button .
"Switch Area", page 5-23
"Changing the Switch Area", page 4-20

Point If a switch area is changed when a prompt, alarm, or direction chart is displayed, "Use
Scrollbar Directly" and "Select a Prompt Line Directly" etc. cannot be used. Do not change
the switch area for these parts.

Color and Line


Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-9


6-3 Key Entry Parts
This section describes how to switch key operation modes when "Key entry" is specified in the basic part and meters/
graphs settings, and how to set key entries by PLC devices.

Key Entry Part Modes


When the "Key entry" setting of basic parts and meters/graphs is set to enabled, text or numerical values can be
entered on the keyboard or the numeric keypad, or displays can be scrolled using the scroll buttons. These parts are
called "key entry parts".

The following basic parts and meters/graphs can be set as key entry parts:
• Numeric value display • Alarm Display
• Text Display • Direction Chart
• Message Display • XY Chart

Key entry modes


6 Three modes are provided for key entry parts. (The following table shows an example for a numerical value display.)
Mode Screen Display Description
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Display mode 1234 Operations are not possible.

Active mode *2 Blinking


1234 Operations are possible.

Entry mode *1 777 Blink Operation in progress

*1 Prompt display, alarm display, direction chart, and XY chart don't have Entry Mode.
*2 With Numeric value display and Text Display, Active Mode can be switched to Display Mode and Entry Mode.

Point Only one key entry part can be set to the Active mode or Entry mode in one screen.
The frame blinks in the Active mode even if the frame color is set to transparent.
The background color becomes the preset color in the Entry mode even if the background
color is set to transparent.

Reference The frame in the Active mode and the cursor blinking speed in the Entry mode can be changed.
System blinking speed
"VT System", page 12-12

Switching modes
There are two ways of switching key entry parts from the Display mode to the Active mode: either by using VT3 touch
switches, or by storing numerical values for key entry order to devices on the currently connected PLC.

Reference "Key Entry Part Modes When the Screen is Displayed", page 6-11
"Switching the Key Entry Part Mode by PLC Devices", page 6-17

6-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-3 Key Entry Parts

Key Entry Part Modes When the Screen is Displayed


The "Key entry parts (initially active)" function can be set to the base and window (local and global) screens.

Reference With the VT1, the "Key entry parts (initially active)" function could be set only to base screens.

Base screen
(1) When the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox in the "Screen attribute settings" window is not marked, all
key entry parts are in the Display mode.
(2) When the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox in the "Screen attribute settings" window is marked, the key
entry parts having the smallest key entry order after the page is switched and displayed are in the Active mode.
(3) When the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox is marked for both the base and local windows, and "Initial
display" is set to the local window, the key entry parts having the smallest key entry order on the local window are
in the Active mode.
(4) When page switching occurs, the Active mode or Entry mode is canceled. 6

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Color and Line

Reference • "Initial display" can be set only on the local window. Type

• "Screen attribute settings" window Touch Switches


"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18
Key Entry Parts

Window (local, global) screens Fonts

(1) When a window for which the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox is marked in the "Screen attribute Text Codes

settings" window is displayed, the key entry parts having the smallest key entry order on that window are in the Device
Active mode, and the Active mode for key entry parts on the base screen is canceled.
Setting of
(2) When multiple windows to which the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox is marked in the "Screen attribute Devices
settings" window are displayed simultaneously, the key entry parts having the smallest key entry order on the
Indirect reference
frontmost screen are in the Active mode.
(3) When a window for which the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox is not marked in the "Screen attribute Calculation

settings" window is displayed, the active state before the window is displayed is held.
(4) When the overlapping order of windows is swapped, active states will not change.
(5) Even if a window is moved, the Active mode or Entry mode setting of key entry parts on windows is held.
(6) Even if other windows are turned ON/OFF, the Active mode or Entry mode setting of key entry parts on windows is
held (excluding (1) above).
(7) When a window in which an Active mode or Entry mode key entry part is placed is turned OFF, the Active mode or
Entry mode is canceled.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-11


6-3 Key Entry Parts

Switching the Key Entry Part Mode by Touch Switches


Touching a VT3 touch switch switches the mode as follows to enable key entry.

Switching to the Active mode from the Display mode


Pressing the "Move entry destination" key entry switch
If a "Move entry destination(+1)" key entry switch is touched, the key entry part having the smallest key entry order is
set to the Active mode.
If a "Move entry destination(-1)" key entry switch is touched, the key entry part having the largest key entry order is
set to the Active mode.
Valid for Numeric value display, Text Display, Prompt Display, Alarm Display, Direction Chart, and XY Chart.

"Move entry destination (-1)" key entry switch


Touching "Move entry

6 "Move entry destination (+1)" key entry switch


destination (+1)" sets the key
entry order = 0 message display
to the Active mode.
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Key entry order = 0 Frame blinks


Machine A Machine A
(Display mode) (Active mode)
Machine B Machine B
Key entry order = 1 12345 (Display mode) 12345
CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER
(Display mode)
Text display END (Display mode) Text display END
Key entry order = 2
(Display mode)

Reference • Key entry switch


"8-2 Setting Switches"
• Key entry order
"Key Entry Order", page 6-15

Pressing key entry parts with "Select by switch" set to ON


If a key entry part for which the "Select by switch" checkbox is marked is touched, that key entry part is set to the
Active mode.
Valid for Numeric value display, Text Display, Prompt Display, Alarm Display, Direction Chart, and XY Chart.

"Select by switch" ON (Display mode) Frame blinks (Active mode)

777 777

CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER

END END

Touch "Select by switch" The Active mode is set.


ON key entry parts.

To switch to a key entry part in the Active mode when there are multiple key entry parts on the screen, use "Move
entry destination" key entry switches or selection of key entry parts by switches.

Reference "Key Entry Order", page 6-15


"Selecting Key Entry Parts by Switches", page 6-16

6-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-3 Key Entry Parts

Switching to the Entry mode from the Active mode


Touching a key entry switch such as a numeric keypad or keyboard switches the Active mode to the Entry mode.
This is enabled only for numerical value displays and text displays.

Frame blinks (Active mode) Cursor blinks (Entry mode)

777 7

CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER


END END

The Entry mode is set by


touching a key entry switch
on the numeric keypad.
6

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Switching to the Active mode from the Entry mode (applying entries)
Touching an "Enter" key entry switch switches the Entry mode to the Active mode.
This is enabled only for numerical value displays and text displays.

Cursor blinks (Entry mode) Frame blinks (Active mode)

1234 1234

CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER


END END

Color and Line


Touching "Enter" sets the
Type
Active mode.
Touch Switches

Reference • To return to Display Mode, pressing “OK” to leave the frame empty. Key Entry Parts
Numeric value display Parts
Fonts
"Parts", page 12-21
• Do not change to the Display mode with the "Enter" key pressed. Text Codes

Text display parts Device


"Parts", page 12-21
Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-13


6-3 Key Entry Parts

Switching to the Active mode from the Entry mode, or to the Display mode from
the Active mode (canceling entry)
Touching the "Cancel" key entry switch cancels entry or operation, and switches the Entry mode to the Active mode,
or switches the Active mode to the Display mode.
Valid for Numeric value display, Text Display, Prompt Display, Alarm Display, Direction Chart, and XY Chart.
Message Display, Alarm Display, Direction Chart, and XY Chart don't have Entry Mode.

Frame blinks (Active mode) (Display mode)

1234 1234

CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER


END END

6 Touching "Cancel" sets the


Display mode.
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

The Active mode switches to the Display mode when a key entry part for which "Select by switch" set to ON is in the
Active mode and that key entry part is touched.

"Select by switch" ON (Active mode) Frame does not blink (Display mode)

Frame blinks 777 777

CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER

END END

Touch "Select by switch" The Display mode is set.


ON key entry parts.

Point When the following is set on alarm displays, message displays, and trend graph parts,
attention must be paid when changing the Active mode to the Display mode. For details, refer
to the settings for each respective part.
Alarm displays : Select message line directly, and operate scroll bar directly
"9-4 Setting Alarm Displays"
Message displays : Select message line directly, and operate scroll bar directly
"9-3 Setting Message Displays"
Trend graphs : Operate scroll bar directly
"10-3 Setting Trend images"

6-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-3 Key Entry Parts

Key Entry Order


If a "Move entry destination" key entry switch is touched when multiple key entry switches are placed on screen, key
entry parts are switched to the Active mode (key entry enabled state) in the key entry order.
Set the key entry order at "Key entry order" in the respective setting window.

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


"Move entry destination (-1)"
key entry switch
Key entry order = 0
Machine A "Move entry destination (+1)"
(Display mode) Machine B key entry switch
Key entry order = 1 12345 CANCEL ENTER

Frame blinks (Active mode) END

Text display Color and Line


Key entry order = 2 Type
(Display mode)
Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes
Touching "Move entry destination
(Display mode) (+1)" sets the key entry order = 2 text Device
Machine A
Machine B display to the Active mode. Setting of
Devices
(Display mode) 12345 CANCEL ENTER
END
Indirect reference
Frame blinks Text display
(Active mode) Calculation

Point • Valid for Numeric value display, Text Display, Message Display, Alarm Display, Direction
Chart, and XY Chart. If there are multiple objects having the same key entry order on
screen, the key entry order of these objects is not guaranteed. To correct the key entry
order, change by selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Change key entry order(K)".
"Change Key Entry Order", page 4-21
• The number of key entry parts that can be placed in a single page is restricted. If key entry
objects are placed on screens exceeding this limit, an error will occur when the data check
is performed. If an error occurs, reduce the number of key entry parts.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"
"12-9 Data Check"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-15


6-3 Key Entry Parts

Selecting Key Entry Parts by Switches


Select key entry parts by setting up the “Select by Switch” option. If multiple key entry parts are placed on screen,
key entry switches can be switched to the Active mode (key entry enabled state) by touching that key entry switch.

6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Key entry order = 0


"select by switch" ON Machine A
(Display mode) Machine B
Key entry order = 1 12345 CANCEL ENTER
END
(Display mode) 6GZVFKURNC[
Key entry order = 2
Frame blinks (Active mode)

Frame blinks Touching "select by switch" ON


Machine A
(Active mode) message displays sets the Active mode.
Machine B
(Display mode) 12 345 CANCEL ENTER
END

(Display mode) 6GZVFKURNC[

In the above figure, the message display in the Display mode (entry disabled state) is immediately switched to the
Active mode regardless of the key entry order by touching it directly as the "Select by switch" checkbox is marked.
Text display in the Active mode is switched to the Display mode.

6-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-3 Key Entry Parts

Switching the Key Entry Part Mode by PLC Devices


Stores the key entry order (numerical value) to the device of the PLC currently connected to the VT3, and switches
the mode of the key entry parts.

Setting the key entry destination specification

1 Either select "Resources(R)" -> "VT system settings(S)" -> "Other(O)" from the menu, or select "Other" from
"VT system settings" on the "System Settings" tab on the workspace.

2 Mark the "Specify key entry destination" checkbox, and set the target word device.

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


The following explanation is for an example when the target word device of the key entry destination specification is
set to the PLC's data memory DM0000 (in the case of the KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700, data memory DM00000, or
Color and Line
in the case of the A500, data register D000000).
Type

Touch Switches

Reference "Other", page 12-31 Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-17


6-3 Key Entry Parts

Content of target word device in the key entry destination specification


When the "Specify key entry destination" checkbox is marked, two words (fixed) are occupied starting from the target
word device.

Device No. Description Bit Remarks


0 to 7 Specify key entry order (0 to 255: decimal)
Specify window
0 :Base
1 :Window 1
2 :Window 2
3 :Window 3
4 :Interrupt Window
5 :Global window ID0
8 to 11
6 :Global window ID1
Specify 7 :Global window ID2
Leading No. +0
(write from PLC to VT) 8 :Global window ID3
9 :Global window ID4
10 :Global window ID5

6 12 to 14
11 :Global window ID6
12 :Global window ID7
Reserved (unusable)
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Key entry enabled/disabled *1


15 0: Enabled 1:Disabled (switch all the key input parts to
Display Mode with OFF -> ON)
Notify key entry order of key entry parts in Active or Entry
0 to 7
mode (0 to 255: decimal)
Notify window in which key entry parts in Active or Entry
mode exist
0 :Base
1 :Window 1
2 :Window 2
3 :Window 3
4 :Interrupt Window
Notify 8 to 11 5 :Global window ID0
Leading No. 1 6 :Global window ID1
(write from VT to PLC) *2
7 :Global window ID2
8 :Global window ID3
9 :Global window ID4
10 :Global window ID5
11 :Global window ID6
12 :Global window ID7
12 to 14 Reserved (unusable)
Notify presence of key entry parts in Active or Entry mode
15
0: Yes 1: No
*1 When this bit turns ON, all key entry parts are switched to the Display mode when the bit state changes from
OFF to ON. he states of the other bits 0 to 14 are ignored.
All key entry parts that have been switched to the Active mode by using touch switches on the VT3 or key entry parts
that are in the process of being entered in the Entry mode are switched to the Display mode.
*2 You can use either a specified (PLC -> VT reading) area to switch to a key entry part in Active Mode, or use a
VT3 touch switch to switch to the key entry order of a key entry part in Active Mode (Entry Mode) and the
Reading Notice (VT -> PLC reading) area.
You can learn which key entry parts are currently in the Active mode (Entry mode).
Bit 15 (MSB) turns ON when all key entry parts are in the Display mode, and all of the other bits 0 to 14 turn
OFF (0).

Reference Base, Window


"Screen Configuration", page 2-5

6-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-3 Key Entry Parts

Point • Reserved area can not be used.


• If key entry parts specified at the specified area (write from PLC to VT) cannot be set to the
Active mode in the following states, all key entry parts are switched to the Display mode,
and bit 15 (MSB) of the notified area (write from VT to PLC) is turned ON:
• There are no key entry parts specified at "Specify key entry order" (bits 0 to 7).
• The window specified at "Specify window" (bits 8 to 11) is not displayed.
• Changes to settings for the specified key entry part are not enabled.
• When the "Specify key entry destination" checkbox is marked, the setting of "Key entry
parts (initially active)" set at "Base settings" in the "Screen attribute settings" window is
ignored, and the state specified at the specified area (write from PLC to VT) is entered.
"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18
• Valid for Numeric value display, Text Display, Message Display, Alarm Display, Direction
Chart, and XY Chart. If there are multiple objects having the same key entry order on
screen, which key entry parts are switched to the Active mode is not guaranteed when they
are specified at the specified area (write from PLC to VT). To correct the key entry order,
change by selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Change key entry order(K)".
"Change Key Entry Order", page 4-21

6
Creating PLC ladder programs

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Manipulate the bits (0 to 7) of "Specify key entry order" and the bits (8 to 11) of "Specify window" in the device
specified (write from PLC to VT) in the PLC's ladder program.
Manipulate the key entry enable/disable bit (15) of key to switch key entry parts from the Active mode (Entry mode) to
the Display mode.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Key entry enable/disable Color and Line


Bit change from OFF to Type
Specify key entry order
ON changes all key entry
0 to 255 decimal numerical values Touch Switches
parts to the Display mode. Specify window
are stored.
0: Base Key Entry Parts

1: Window 1 Fonts
2: Window 2
Text Codes
3: Window 3
4: Interrupt window Device

5: Global window ID0 Setting of


6: Global window ID1 Devices

7: Global window ID2 Indirect reference


8: Global window ID3
Calculation
9: Global window ID4
10: Global window ID5
11: Global window ID6
12: Global window ID7

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-19


6-3 Key Entry Parts

[Example] To switch a key entry part having key entry order "100" currently placed on the base screen to the
Active mode (Decimal numerical value "100" is expressed as "64(H)" in Hexadecimal.)

Ladder program on KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700,


Visual KV-10 to 40, KZ-10 to 80,300,350
**** $0064 DM0000
㧨LDA㧪 㧨STA㧪

$ stands for selection of hexadecimal constant.

Ladder program on A500


****
MOV H0064 D0‫ޓ‬

H stands for selection of hexadecimal constant.

6 Ladder program on SYSMAC-C series made by OMRON


****
‫ޓ‬MOV‫ޓ‬
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

# 0064
DM0000

* * * * is the condition relay for switching to the Active mode.

[Example] To switch a key entry part having key entry order "10" currently placed on window 3 to the Active
mode (Decimal numerical value "10" is expressed as "A(H)" in Hexadecimal.)

Ladder program on KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700,


Visual KV-10 to 40, KZ-10 to 80,300,350
**** $030A DM0000
㧨LDA㧪 㧨STA㧪

$ stands for selection of hexadecimal constant.

Ladder program on A500


****
MOV H030A D0‫ޓ‬

H stands for selection of hexadecimal constant.

Ladder program on SYSMAC-C series made by OMRON


****
‫ޓ‬MOV‫ޓ‬
# 030A
DM0000

"* * * *" is the condition relay for switching to the Active mode.

6-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-3 Key Entry Parts

[Example] To switch all key entry parts to the Display mode

Ladder program on KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700,


Visual KV-10 to 40, KZ-10 to 80,300,350
**** $8000 DM0000
㧨LDA㧪 㧨STA㧪

$ stands for selection of hexadecimal constant.

Ladder program on A500


****
MOV H8000 D0‫ޓ‬

H stands for selection of hexadecimal constant.

Ladder program on SYSMAC-C series made by OMRON

6
****
‫ޓ‬MOV‫ޓ‬
#8000
DM0000

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


"* * * *" is the condition relay for switching to the Display mode.

Conflict in mode switching between switching by PLC devices and by touch


switches
When a touch switch is touched to switch a mode, the state of the key entry part, that has been switched by the touch
switch, is written to the specified (write from PLC to VT) device. After the specified state is switched to, the state is
written to the notified device (write from VT to PLC).

[Example] To switch to the Active mode by touching a key entry part to which "Select by switch" is set

No Active mode key entry parts Active mode Color and Line
Type

Touch Switches

Numerical display Key Entry Parts


777 777
Key entry order: 1 Fonts
CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER
"select by switch" ON
END END
Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices
Write
Indirect reference
Specify (PLCψVT) 8000(H) 0001(H) 0001(H)
Calculation
A
Write

Notify (VTψPLC) 8000(H) 8000(H) 0001(H)

A When the numerical value is written to the specified (write from PLC to VT) device from the PLC after
in the figure above, mode switching by PLC device is given priority, and the mode written on the PLC is
switched to immediately after the Active mode is switched to by selection by switches. For this reason,
mode switching by touch switches will no longer be possible if numerical values are continuously
written to the specified (write from PLC to VT) device when mode switching is performed on the PLC
device.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-21


6-3 Key Entry Parts

No Active mode key entry parts Active mode Reset to Display mode

777 777 777

CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER


END END END

Write Read
Specify 8000(H)
8000(H) 0001(H) 8000(H)
(PLC->VT)

6 Notify
Write Write

8000(H) 8000(H) 0001(H) 8000(H)


(VT->PLC)
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

8000 Hex is written (continued) on PLC.

To prevent mode switching by touch switches from being disabled when switching the mode by PLC devices, write
the numerical values to the specified (write from PLC to VT) device when the write conditions are satisfied.

[Example] To switch a key entry part having key entry order "10" currently placed on the base screen to the
Active mode (Decimal numerical value "10" is expressed as "A(H)" in Hexadecimal.)

Ladder program on KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700,


Visual KV-10 to 40, KZ-10 to 80,300,350
**** $000A DM0000
χLDA㧪 χSTA㧪

$ stands for selection of hexadecimal constant.

Ladder program on A500


****
MOVP H000A D0‫ޓ‬

H stands for selection of hexadecimal constant.

Ladder program on SYSMAC-C series made by OMRON


****
‫ޓ‬㧬MOV‫ޓ‬
# 000A
DM0000

"* * * *" is the condition relay for switching to the Active mode.

6-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-4 About Fonts

Fonts Available on the VT3


VT1 provides Outline Fonts and Bitmap Fonts.
In addition to the above two fonts, VT2 also provides Stroke Fonts.
In addition to the above three fonts, VT3 also provides Windows Fonts.

Outline fonts
• Can be used for outline texts and switch, lamp labels.
• Outline fonts can be displayed sharp-looking even if they are enlarged.
• Stroke fonts can be displayed sharp-looking even if they are enlarged.

Bitmap fonts
• Bitmap font can be used in bitmap text and key entry parts (numerical value displays, text displays, message

6
displays, alarm displays, and scales on meters/ graphs)
• Bitmap fonts can be set only in integer multiples of 16 dots.
• When bitmap fonts are enlarged, edges appear rougher or more jagged.

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


• Bitmap fonts can be displayed in many languages representing out 30,000 characters (UNICODE supported).

Stroke fonts
• Stroke fonts can be used in key entry parts (numerical value displays, text displays, message displays, alarm
displays).
• Stroke fonts can be set in 1-dot increments within the range 24 to 96 dots.
• Stroke fonts can be displayed sharp-looking even if they are enlarged.
• About 8,000 characters as defined in ASCII/Shift JIS Classes 1 and 2 can be displayed.

Windows Fonts
• Stroke fonts can be used in key entry parts (numerical value displays, text displays, message displays, alarm
displays). To display a text, its font should be registered. If an unregistered font is used, a bitmap font is displayed. Color and Line
• The display picture ID can be used in the title bar. Type

• Scales of meters and graphs can be used. Touch Switches


• Stroke fonts can be set in 1-dot increments within the range 8 to 512 dots.
Key Entry Parts
• Stroke fonts can be displayed sharp-looking even if they are enlarged.
Fonts
• Only equally-sized fonts can be used. (for example: use MS Gothic, and not MSP Gothic)
• Cannot use the vertical writing fonts (fonts with @). Text Codes

• Max 64 fonts are available. A font with a different name or font size will be treated as a different font. A font with a Device
different color and style will not be treated as a different font.
Setting of
Devices
Image Fonts
Indirect reference

• Can be used by numeric display parts. Calculation


• Can use digital images (bitmap and JPEG files) to display values.

Reference Stroke fonts are provided by the Chinese JIS Code Table (JIS First-level Code Table and JIS Second-
level Code Table)
Kanji JIS Code Tables can be browsed by selecting "Help" and "Text code table(SJIS)" from Menu.

Point • Compared with bitmap fonts, stroke fonts may appear different in places.
• Text is not displayed as a stroke font when making screens.
• Stroke fonts cannot be used by VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-23


6-5 About Text Codes

Text Codes Available on the VT3


VT3 can use the following 3 codes.
• ASCII code
• Shift JIS code
• UNICODE

Reference • Respective text code tables can be browsed by selecting from Menu in the following order:
"Help(H)" -> "Text code table(SJIS)"
"Help(H)" -> "Text code table(UNICODE)"
• VT1 can use ASCII and Shift JIS code.
• When VT3 is used within China, it is necessary to transfer corresponding GB2312 fonts to the VT3
unit.
"System Program", page 13-17

6 About UNICODE
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

UNICODE is a new character code made to unify the major character codes throughout the world into one.
Alphabet characters, symbols, Japanese, Chinese, Korean, and other languages can be used. Note that some text
codes are not available.
You can choose a supporting UNICODE in the steps "Help (H)" -> "Text Code Table (UNICODE)". Check these text
codes before use.

Reference With UNICODE, Kanji characters used in Japan, China, Taiwan, and Korea are unified. "Unified" here
means that the same code is assigned to Kanji characters whose shape is judged to be the same.
For this reason, the shape sometimes differs in Japanese fonts and with fonts from other countries.
For example, with the character "gu", the South-East corner in the enclosure at the top is inverted
horizontally in the character that is in current use in China.
To use UNICODE, please first display it on the screen for confirmation.

Point All UNICODE text is expressed in two bytes. (Even 1-byte UNICODE text is expressed using two
bytes.)

6-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-6 About Devices
A "device" is an element used by PLC internal relays or programs such as timers, counters or data memory. On the
VT3, this range of elements is extended to include numerical values, indirect references, calculation, and worksheet
cells. All these are called "devices". Devices are set to display basic parts such as switches/lamps and numerical
value displays, and meters and graphs.
This section describes the devices that are set on VT STUDIO.

Target (reference) Devices


This item describes target (reference) devices that are set on switches/lamps, basic parts, and meters/graphs.
When setting switches/lamps, basic parts and meters/graphs, set so that the display on the VT3 changes when the
state of the PLC device or VT3 internal device changes. These kinds of devices are called "target (reference)
devices". There are two types of target (reference) devices, target (reference) bit devices and target (reference) word
devices.

Types of target (reference) devices

Item Target Bit Device Target word device


6

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


I/O relay
Data memory
Internal auxiliary relay
Data register
Hold relay
PLC device *1 Counter/timer setting values
Link relay
Counter/timer current values
Counter/timer contacts
Relay *2 etc.
Data memory *3 etc.
VT internal device VT internal bit device (MB) VT internal word device (MW)
Link Device VT link bit device (LNB) VT link word device (LNW)
Other Numerical value, indirect reference, calculation, worksheet cell
*1 The PLC device varies according to the manufacturer and model of PLC used.
*2 When relays (I/O relays, internal auxiliary relays, etc.) are used as target (reference) word devices, 16 relays
for each channel are handled collectively as a single word device.
*3 "About word device bit specification", page 6-26

Display of PLC Devices Color and Line


Type
Displayed contents of a PLC device in a part setup window vary depending on whether the MultiTalk function is used.
Touch Switches

Normal Key Entry Parts

Fonts
Series-connected with PLC V: TPLC1: N-connection (Ethernet, thermoregulator, etc.)
Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

<Device Type> <Device No.> <Station No.>


Indirect reference

When MultiTalk is used Calculation

Series-connected with PLC V: TPLC1: N-connection (Ethernet, thermoregulator, etc.)

<Device Type> <Device No.>_ <PLC_A/B> <Device Type> <Device No.>_ <Station No.>_ <PLC_A/B㧪

Reference The displays of an internal device and Link device don’t include <Station No.>and <PLC_A/B>.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-25


6-6 About Devices

Target (reference) device settings


Target (reference) devices are set in the setting window for switches/lamps, basic parts, and meters/graphs, or in the
"Device settings" window.

6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

"6-7 Setting of Devices"

About word device bit specification


Word devices can sometimes be selected for the target (reference) bit device in the setting window for switches/
lamps and graphic attribute controls or in the "Device settings" window.
For example, the device No. is displayed as follows when DM is selected:
(1)DM0000000 : The PLC to be connected is the PLC corresponding to the word device bit specification.
(2)DM0000-00 : The PLC to be connected is the PLC not corresponding to the word device bit specification.

Uppermost bit Lowermost bit


DM0000000 15 0
‫ ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ‬Lower two digits 00 to 15 DM00000
DM0000-00

For example, when DM0000-01 is set to the lamp bit device of a lamp, the lamp lights (in the case of an A contact)
when the state of bit 1 of DM0000 becomes 1 (ON).

6-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-6 About Devices

Cautions when the device No. is specified in the format in (2) and word device bit specification is used
When DM0000-07 is turned ON by a touch switch

Serial communications

C1 001 003 005 007 009 IN


000 002 004 006 008
0ch
EYENCE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0 1 2 3 4 5
KV-16AR
5ch
500 501 502 504

PLC
24V-OUT-OV C3 C4 503 505 OUT

VT3 Series

PLC DM0000
The value of DM0000 is read from the PLC in word units.
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
VT3 DM0000

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
If DM0000-15 or

6
DM0000-14 turns ON 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

on the PLC during


this period.
The bit of DM0000-07

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


is turned ON by the
touch switch.
PLC DM0000

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

VT3 DM0000

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PLC DM0000

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 The value of DM0000 is written to the PLC


0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
in word units.

The device is overwritten, so


DM0000-15 and DM0000-14
are turned OFF. Color and Line
Type

In the case of a PLC on which device Nos. are displayed in the format in (2), the VT3 reads up to 16 bits of data Touch Switches
collectively in a single operation from the PLC, changes the bits specified in the word device, and writes the 16 bits
Key Entry Parts
collectively to the PLC as the data format is not supported in the word device bit specification. For this reason, even if
Fonts
there is a change in the value of the word device the previous state is sometimes returned to.Pay attention to this fact
when using the VT3. Text Codes

Device

Overview of VT Internal Devices and VT Link Devices Setting of


Devices

Two devices are provided for VT3 internal memory, VT internal devices and VT link devices. The following table Indirect reference

summarizes an outline of these devices.


Calculation

VT3 Internal Memory Description


VT internal special Used for displaying system memory area in VTcommand ASCII/Binary mode
VT internal device and Date/Time (year/month/day, time).
device A device that you can freely assign functions to This device is used for VT-
Internal Free Device
command ASCII/Binary mode or for temporarily storing data to.
Link Device Used for communication with external equipment (KL and bar code readers). .

Reference • VT link devices have been newly added from VT2. In VT3, functions of devices are extended to bar
code readers.
• VT3-KL communications using VT link devices
VT3 Series Hardware Manual "Chapter 7 KL Link"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-27


6-6 About Devices

Structure of VT Internal Devices and VT Link Devices


VT internal devices and VT link devices are each appended with a device name as follows when used as bit devices
or as word devices.

Item When Used as a Bit Device When used as a word device


VT internal device MB MW
Link Device LNB LNW

VT internal bit devices and VT internal word devices share common memory. Likewise, VT link bit devices and VT
link word devices also share common memory.
With VT internal devices and VT link devices, a 5-digit device No. is set to bit devices, and a 4-digit device No. is set
to word devices.

The following shows the relationship between bit devices and word devices in VT internal devices and VT link
6 devices.

[Example] Relationship between MW001C and MB001C0 to MB001CF


BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Uppermost bit Lowermost bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MW001C

MBO01C0
MBO01C1
MBO01C2
MBO01C3
MBO01C4
MBO01C5
MBO01C6
MBO01C7
MBO01C8
MBO01C9
MBO01CA
MBO01CB
MBO01CC
MBO01CD
MBO01CE
MBO01CF

6-28 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-6 About Devices

VT Internal Device

List of VT internal devices


Item Device No. Description
General serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas (MT
MW0000 to MW000F
compatible mode)
MW0010 Date/Time "year"
MW0011 Date/Time "month"
MW0012 Date/Time "day"
MW0013 Date/Time "day of week (number)"
MW0014 to MW0015 Date/Time "day of week (Kanji character)" Shift JIS code
MW0016 to MW0017 Date/Time "day of week (English character)" ASCII code
MW0018 Date/Time "hours"
MW0019 Date/Time "minutes"
MW001A Date/Time "seconds"
MW001B
MW001C
Displayed page No.
Display status
6
MW001D Display error state

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


MW001E Display control
MW001F Reserved
MW0020 to MW0023 VT timer (timer ID0 to 3) current count value
MW0024 to MW0031 Reserved
MW0032 Number of send packets
MW0033 Reserved
MW0034 Number of receive packets
VT internal special MW0035 Reserved
MW0000 to
device MW0036 Number of DATA BUILDER connection ports
MW00FF
(256 words) MW0037 Number of FTP connection ports
MW0038 to MW003E Reserved
MW003F VT No.
General serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas
MW0040 to MW005F
(VT compatible mode) Color and Line
MW0060 to MW006F Reserved Type

MW0070 to MW007B Numerical value display saved data (UNICODE) Touch Switches
MW007C to MW007D The lower limit of value display *5
Key Entry Parts
MW007E to MW007F The upper limit of value display *5
MW0080 to MW00BF Text display saved data (UNICODE) Fonts

MW00C0 to MW00C1 VT2 Multi-link (master only)


Text Codes
MW00C2 to MW00CF Reserved
MW00D0 PLC _A station No. (0 to 15) connection status Device

MW00D1 PLC _A station No. (0 to 15) connection setup Setting of


MW00D2 PLC _A station No. (16 to 31) connection status Devices

MW00D3 PLC _A station No. (16 to 31) connection setup Indirect reference
MW00D4 to MW00D7 Reserved
Calculation
MW00D8 PLC _B station No. (0 to 15) connection status
MW00D9 PLC _B station No. (0 to 15) connection setup
MW00DA PLC _B station No. (16 to 31) connection status
MW00DB PLC _B station No. (16 to 31) connection setup
MW00DC to MW00FF Reserved
Internal Free Device
MW0100 to MW0FFF Free
(3840 words)

Point • VT internal devices cannot be manipulated (read/written) directly from a PLC. Internal
devices, however, can be read-out/read-in in the device transmission and PLC data folders.
"12-6 Device Transfer"
"Chapter 15 PLC DATA FOLDER"
• All VT internal devices are cleared (reset to zero) when the VT3 is turned OFF or screen data is sent to the
VT3.
"13-3 PC->VT Send Data"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-29


6-6 About Devices

Reference On the VT1, "VT internal free device 512 words + VT internal special device 256 words" were
available.
On the VT3, however, "VT internal free device 3840 words + VT internal special device 256 words"
are available.

VT internal special devices (word devices)

R/W
Device No. Description Data Format Range
Attribute
General serial /Ethernet-specific system
MW0000 to MW000F - - -
storage areas (MT compatible mode)*1
MW0010 Date/Time "year" Unsigned decimal Lower two digits: 0 to 99 R/W
MW0011 Date/Time "month" Unsigned decimal 1 to 12 R/W
MW0012 Date/Time "day" Unsigned decimal 1 to 31 R/W
MW0013 Date/Time "day of week (number)" Unsigned decimal 0 to 6 R/W
MW0014 to MW0015 Date/Time "day of week (Kanji character)" Shift JIS code Sun to Sat R

6
MW0016 to MW0017 Date/Time "day of week (English character)" ASCII code Sun to Sat R
MW0018 Date/Time "hours" Unsigned decimal 0 to 23 R/W
MW0019 Date/Time "minutes" Unsigned decimal 0 to 59 R/W
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

MW001A Date/Time "seconds" Unsigned decimal 0 to 59 R/W


MW001B Displayed page No. Unsigned decimal 0 to 8999 R
MW001C Display state (MB001C0 to MB001CF) *2 Bit Devices - R
MW001D Display error state (MB001D0 to MB001DF)*2 Bit Devices - R
MW001E Display control (MB001E0 to MB001EF) *2 Bit Devices - R
MW001F Reserved - - R
MW0020 to MW0023 VT timer (timer ID0 to 3) current count value*3 Unsigned decimal 0 to 65535 R
MW0024 to MW0031 Reserved - - -
MW0032 Number of send packets Unsigned decimal - R
MW0033 Reserved - - -
MW0034 Number of receive packets Unsigned decimal - R
MW0035 Reserved - - -
Number of DATA BUILDER connection
MW0036 Unsigned decimal - R
ports
MW0037 Number of FTP connection ports Unsigned decimal - R
MW0038 to MW003E Reserved - - -
MW003F VT No. Unsigned decimal 0 to 15 R
General serial/Ethernet-specific system
MW0040 to MW005F - - -
storage areas (VT compatible mode) *1
MW0060 to MW006F Reserved - - -
MW0070 to MW007B Numerical value display save data *4 UNICODE - R
MW007C to MW007D The lower limit of value display *5 - - -
MW007E to MW007F The upper limit of value display *5
MW0080 to WM00BF Text display save data *4 UNICODE - R
MW00C0 to MW00C1 VT2 Multi-link (master only) *2 Bit Devices - R
MW00C2 to MW00CF Reserved - - -
PLC _A Station No. (0 to 15) connection
MW00D0*2 Bit Devices - R
status
PLC _A Station No. (0 to 15) connection
MW00D1*2 Bit Devices - R/W
setup
PLC _A Station No. (16 to 31) connection
MW00D2*2 Bit Devices - R
status
PLC _A Station No. (16 to 31) connection
MW00D3*2 Bit Devices - R/W
setup
MW00D4 to MW00D7 Reserved - - -
PLC _B Station No. (0 to 15) connection
MW00D8*2 Bit Devices - R
status
PLC _B Station No. (0 to 15) connection
MW00D9*2 Bit Devices - R/W
setup
PLC _B Station No. (16 to 31) connection
MW00DA*2 Bit Devices - R
status
PLC _B Station No. (16 to 31) connection
MW00DB*2 Bit Devices - R/W
setup
MW00DC to MW00FF Reserved - - -
6-30 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
6-6 About Devices

*1 General serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas (MT compatible mode): in VT1, the system storage
area for general serial communications.
General serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas (VT mode) : the newly added mode in VT2.
To use VT-command ASCII/Binary mode, select either of these modes in "System memory area" in the VT system
settings, and set the system memory area.
General serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas (VT mode): the initial number is always MW0040.
Details about the General serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas
Chapter 23 General Serial/Ethernet Communication, VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC Connections
Manual.

Point • When using the general serial/Ethernet communications, do not use internal special
devices other than the general serial/Ethernet-specific system storage areas,
internal timer, numerical value display memory, and text display memory.
• Reserved zone cannot be used.

Reference "Chapter 14 SYSTEM MEMORY AREA"

*2 For details, read the following. In addition, you can also refer to additional PLC connection setups • connection
6
status in the VT main unit system.

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


"12-4 VT System Parameters"
*3 The current value of the timer set at "VT timer" in the VT system settings is stored here.
*4 The value of active state numerical value displays and text displays are stored to memory when a switch (key
entry "copy") is touched.
*5 Save the upper/lower limit of the input range of the value display component in memory active status. In
inactive status, the value display component will be saved as 0.

About R/W attributes


VT internal word devices whose attribute is set to "R/W" can both read and write from and to numerical value displays
or text displays.
VT internal word devices whose attribute is set to "R" are capable of reading only.

Color and Line


Display state (MW001C) Read only Type

Touch Switches
Device No. Description 1 (ON) 0(OFF)
Key Entry Parts
MB001C0 Printing Printer unusable Printer usable
MB001C1 Reserved - - Fonts

MB001C2 Backlight OFF state Backlight OFF Backlight ON Text Codes


MB001C3 Video play/pause screen Pause screen Video image
Device
Memory Card is being
MB001C4 Memory Card is being accessed. Memory Card is not being accessed.
accessed. Setting of
MB001C5 Page switching setting state Switch on PLC Switch by touch switch Devices

MB001C6 Page switching mode Bit page switching Switch by page switching (leading No. +8)
Indirect reference
Memory Card is inserted in Memory Either the Memory Card is not inserted
MB001C7 Memory Card usable state Card slot, and Memory Card slot cover in the Memory Card slot, or the Calculation
is closed. Memory Card slot cover is open.
MB001C8 Window 1 display state Window 1 display Window 1 hide
MB001C9 Window 2 display state Window 2 display Window 2 hide
MB001CA Window 3 display state Window 3 display Window 3 hide
MB001CB Window 1 display specified state Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
MB001CC Window 2 display specified state Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
MB001CD Window 3 display specified state Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
MB001CE Reserved - -
MB001CF Interrupt window display state Display interrupt window Hide interrupt window

Point Reserved zone cannot be used.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-31


6-6 About Devices

Display error state (MW001D) Read only

Device No. Description 1(ON) 0(OFF)


MB001D0 System memory error VT3 internal system memory error No abnormality
MB001D1 Reserved - -
MB001D2 Memory Card access error Memory Card access error occurred No abnormality
MB001D3 to
Reserved - -
MB001D7
One of following communications
MB001D8 Communications error No abnormality
errors occurring:
MB001D9 Overrun error Overrun error No abnormality
MB001DA Framing error Framing error No abnormality
MB001DB Parity error Parity Error No abnormality
PLC communications state
MB001DC Communications error on PLC No abnormality
error
MB001DD Time-out error Time-out error No abnormality
MB001DE Checksum error Checksum error No abnormality

6 MB001DF Reserved - -

Point Reserved zone cannot be used.


BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Display control (MW001E) Read only

Device No. Description 1(ON) 0(OFF)


MB001E0 Execute printing Printing is executed by bit state changing to ON from OFF.
MB001E1 Reserved - -
MB001E2 Backlight OFF Backlight OFF Backlight ON
Clock Adjustment
(year/month/day/day of week) changed by bit state changing to ON from
MB001E3 (year/moth/dat • weekdays)
OFF
adjustment
Clock Adjustment
MB001E4 (hours/minutes) changed by bit state changing to ON from OFF
(hour/minute) adjustment
MB001E5 Page switching setting Switch on PLC Switch by touch switch
Switch by page switching (leading
MB001E6 Page switching mode Bit page switching
No. +8)
MB001E7 Clear communications error Communications error bit cleared by bit state changing to ON from OFF
MB001E8 Window 1 display ON Window 1 display ON Window 1 display OFF
MB001E9 Window 2 display ON Window 2 display ON Window 2 display OFF
MB001EA Window 3 display ON Window 3 display ON Window 3 display OFF
MB001EB Window 1 display setting Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
MB001EC Window 2 display setting Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
MB001ED Window 3 display setting Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
MB001EE Reserved - -
Execution of interrupt
MB001EF Display interrupt window Hide interrupt window
window display

VT2 Multi-link Connection state: master only (MW00C0) Read only

Device No. Description 1(ON) 0(OFF)


MB00C00 VT No. 0 connection state Always ON -
MB00C01 VT No. 1 connection state Connected to master Not connected to master
MB00C02 VT No. 2 connection state Connected to master Not connected to master
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
MB00C0E VT No. 14 connection state Connected to master Not connected to master
MB00C0F VT No. 15 connection state Connected to master Not connected to master
Chapter 20 VT2 MultiLink, VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC Connections Manual.

6-32 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-6 About Devices

VT2 MultiLink Communication errors: only for the master (MW00C1) Read only.

Device No. Description 1(ON) 0(OFF)


MB00C10 VT No.0 communications error - OFF at all times
MB00C11 VT No.1 communications error Communications error with master No abnormality
MB00C12 VT No. 2 communications error Communications error with master No abnormality
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
MB00C1E VT No. 14 communications error Communications error with master No abnormality
MB00C1F VT No. 15 communications error Communications error with master No abnormality
Chapter 20 VT2 MultiLink, VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC Connections Manual.

PLC_A Station No. (0 to 15) Connection Status (MW00D0) Read Only

Device No. Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)

MB00D00
PLC_A Station No. 0 PLC
connection status
Station No. 0 PLC is linked with
VT3
Station No. 0 PLC is not linked
with VT3 6
PLC_A Station No. 1 PLC Station No. 1 PLC is linked with Station No. 1 PLC is not linked
MB00D01

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_A Station No. 2 PLC Station No. 2 PLC is linked with Station No. 2 PLC is not linked
MB00D02
connection status VT3 with VT3
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
PLC_A Station No. 14 PLC Station No. 14 PLC is linked with Station No. 14 PLC is not linked
MB00D0E
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_A Station No. 15 PLC Station No. 15 PLC is linked with Station No. 15 PLC is not linked
MB00D0F
connection status VT3 with VT3

PLC_A Station No. (0 to 15) Connection Setup (MW00D1) Read/Write

Device No. Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)


PLC_A Station No. 0 PLC Connect Station No. 0 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 0 PLC with Color and Line
MB00D10
connection setup VT3 VT3 Type
PLC_A Station No. 1 PLC Connect Station No. 1 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 1 PLC with
MB00D11 Touch Switches
connection setup VT3 VT3
PLC_A Station No. 2 PLC Connect Station No. 2 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 2 PLC with Key Entry Parts
MB00D12
connection setup VT3 VT3
Fonts
• • • •
• • • •
Text Codes
• • • •
PLC_A Station No. 14 PLC Connect Station No. 14 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 14 PLC Device
MB00D1E
connection setup VT3 with VT3
PLC_A Station No. 15 PLC Connect Station No. 15 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 15 PLC Setting of
MB00D1F Devices
connection setup VT3 with VT3
Indirect reference

PLC_A Station No. (16 to 31) Connection Status (MW00D2) Read Only Calculation

Device No. Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)


PLC_A Station No. 16 PLC Station No. 16 PLC is linked with Station No. 16 PLC is not linked
MB00D20
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_A Station No. 17 PLC Station No. 17 PLC is linked with Station No. 17 PLC is not linked
MB00D21
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_A Station No. 18 PLC Station No. 18 PLC is linked with Station No. 18 PLC is not linked
MB00D22
connection status VT3 with VT3
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
PLC_A Station No. 30 PLC Station No. 30 PLC is linked with Station No. 30 PLC is not linked
MB00D2E
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_A Station No. 31 PLC Station No. 31 PLC is linked with Station No. 31 PLC is not linked
MB00D2F
connection status VT3 with VT3

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-33


6-6 About Devices

PLC_A Station No. (16 to 31) Connection Setup (MW00D3) Read/Write

Device No. Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)


PLC_A Station No. 16 PLC Connect Station No. 16 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 16 PLC
MB00D30
connection setup VT3 with VT3
PLC_A Station No. 17 PLC Connect Station No. 17 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 17 PLC
MB00D31
connection setup VT3 with VT3
PLC_A Station No. 18 PLC Connect Station No. 18 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 18 PLC
MB00D32
connection setup VT3 with VT3
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
PLC_A Station No. 30 PLC Connect Station No. 30 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 30 PLC
MB00D3E
connection setup VT3 with VT3
PLC_A Station No. 31 PLC Connect Station No. 31 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 31 PLC
MB00D3F
connection setup VT3 with VT3

6 PLC_B Station No. (0 to 15) Connection Status (MW00D8) Read Only

Device No. Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)


BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

PLC_B Station No. 0 PLC Station No. 0 PLC is linked with Station No. 0 PLC is not linked
MB00D80
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 1 PLC Station No. 1 PLC is linked with Station No. 1 PLC is not linked
MB00D81
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 2 PLC Station No. 2 PLC is linked with Station No. 2 PLC is not linked
MB00D82
connection status VT3 with VT3
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
PLC_B Station No. 14 PLC Station No. 14 PLC is linked with Station No. 14 PLC is not linked
MB00D8E
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 15 PLC Station No. 15 PLC is linked with Station No. 15 PLC is not linked
MB00D8F
connection status VT3 with VT3

PLC_B Station No. (0 to 15) Connection Setup (MW00D9) Read/Write

Device No. Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)


PLC_B Station No. 0 PLC Connect Station No. 0 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 0 PLC with
MB00D90
connection setup VT3 VT3
PLC_B Station No. 1 PLC Connect Station No. 1 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 1 PLC with
MB00D91
connection setup VT3 VT3
PLC_B Station No. 2 PLC Connect Station No. 2 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 2 PLC with
MB00D92
connection setup VT3 VT3
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
PLC_B Station No. 14 PLC Connect Station No. 14 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 14 PLC
MB00D9E
connection setup VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 15 PLC Connect Station No. 15 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 15 PLC
MB00D9F
connection setup VT3 with VT3

6-34 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-6 About Devices

PLC_B Station No. (16 to 31) Connection Status (MW00DA) Read Only

Device No. Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)


PLC_B Station No. 16 PLC Station No. 16 PLC is linked with Station No. 16 PLC is not linked
MB00DA0
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 17 PLC Station No. 17 PLC is linked with Station No. 17 PLC is not linked
MB00DA1
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 18 PLC Station No. 18 PLC is linked with Station No. 18 PLC is not linked
MB00DA2
connection status VT3 with VT3
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
PLC_B Station No. 30 PLC Station No. 30 PLC is linked with Station No. 30 PLC is not linked
MB00DAE
connection status VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 31 PLC Station No. 31 PLC is linked with Station No. 31 PLC is not linked
MB00DAF
connection status VT3 with VT3

PLC_B Station No. (16 to 31) Connection Setup (MW00DB) Read/Write 6


Device No. Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


PLC_B Station No. 16 PLC Connect Station No. 16 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 16 PLC
MB00DB0
connection setup VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 17 PLC Connect Station No. 17 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 17 PLC
MB00DB1
connection setup VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 18 PLC Connect Station No. 18 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 18 PLC
MB00DB2
connection setup VT3 with VT3
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
PLC_B Station No. 30 PLC Connect Station No. 30 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 30 PLC
MB00DBE
connection setup VT3 with VT3
PLC_B Station No. 31 PLC Connect Station No. 31 PLC with Disconnect Station No. 31 PLC
MB00DBF
connection setup VT3 with VT3

Color and Line


Type
Internal Free Device
Touch Switches
For the VT internal devices, the devices whose functions can be freely determined are called "VT internal free
Key Entry Parts
devices". VT internal free devices can be used for temporarily storing data.
Fonts

There are two types of VT internal free devices, VT internal bit devices and VT internal word devices. Text Codes

The internal bit devices are the devices that are assigned to MB. The internal word devices are the devices that are Device
assigned to MW.
Setting of
Devices
VT internal bit devices and VT internal word devices share common memory.
Indirect reference
A 5-digit device No. is set to VT internal bit devices, and a 4-digit device No. is set to VT internal word devices.
Calculation

VT internal free device area


Item VT internal free device area
Used as VT internal bit device MB01000 to MB0FFFF
Used as VT internal word device MW0100 to MW0FFF

Reference • "Link Device", page 6-36


• Holding of internal free device values even if the VT3 is turned OFF
"VT System", page 12-12

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-35


6-6 About Devices

Link Device
VT link devices are for communicating with external equipment. 4352 words LNW0000 to LNW10FF are provided for
VT link devices.

List of link devices

Device No. Description R/W Attribute


Communications R or R/W
LNW0000 to LNW007F data monitor area (Depending on KL
(128 words) setups)
Connection
LNW0080 to LNW008F R
information
0(LNB00900) Broken line error (for KLLink) R
1(LNB00901) Send lamp R

6 LNW0090 2(LNB00902)
3 to F
Receive lamp R

(LNB00903 to Reserved -
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

LNB0090F)
LNW0000 to
LNW10FF LNW0091 to LNW00BF Reserved Reserved -
Bar code data
LNW00C0 reading length R
(byte)
Bar code reading
0(LNB00C10) R/W
end notice bit
LNW00C1 1 to F For bar codes
(LNB00C11 to Reserved -
LNB00C1F)
Bar code data
LNW00C2 to LNW10C1 storage area R
(4096 characters)
LNW10C2 to LNW10FF Reserved Reserved -

Reference • In VT3, link devices are extended to LNW10FF. (in VT2, they are extended to LNW00FF)
• VT3-KL communications using VT link devices
VT3 Series Hardware Manual "Chapter 7 KL Link"

Point • VT link devices cannot be manipulated (read/written) directly from a PLC. Internal devices,
however, can be read-out/read-in in the device transmission and PLC data folders.
"12-6 Device Transfer"
"Chapter 15 PLC DATA FOLDER"
• When the VT3 power is turned off or screen data is transmitted to VT3, link devices are
cleared out (0).
"13-3 PC->VT Send Data"
• Reserved zone cannot be used.

About R and R/W attributes


The following operations are possible on VT link devices having the "R" or "R/W" attribute:
R : Read
R/W : Read/Write

Use VT link devices having the "R" attribute only for reading.

6-36 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-7 Setting of Devices
Normally, the PLC devices (data storages, input/output relays, auxiliary relays, timers, counters, etc.) to be connected
should be set up from the device setup line in the setup window of a part (switches, lamps, basic components,
meters, and graphs, etc.).
This has been extended so that numerous data can be set to the device setting field.

Items Selectable in the Device Setting Field


Example of part setting window (numerical value display)

PLC devices

6
Indirect reference

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Calculation

Worksheet cell

Numerical constant

PLC devices
Color and Line
Type

Touch Switches

Indirect reference Key Entry Parts


Calculation
Fonts
Worksheet cell
Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-37


6-7 Setting of Devices

A typical MultiTalk setup window (numerical display)

6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Item Description
Num: Numerical constant Select this item to set constants.
Select this item to set devices (data memory, I/O relay, auxiliary relay, timer, counter,
PLC: PLC device
etc.) for the PLC to connect and VT3 internal device/link devices.
Indirect: Indirect reference Select this item to set indirect references.
Calc: Calcuration Select this item to set calculations.
Cell: Worksheet cell Select this item to set worksheet cells.
For details on each item, refer to the explanations on the following pages.

Point The items ("Numerical constant/PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell") that can be


selected in device settings vary according to the part. For details, refer to the settings for the
respective part.

Setting Methods

1 Select the desired items to set from the device setting field.
The items selected in the device setting field are displayed.

[Example] Numerical value display

Normal When MultiTalk is used

6-38 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-7 Setting of Devices

2 When "Num: Numerical constant" is selected, enter the numerical value (constant).
When "PLC device", "Ind: Indirect reference", "Calc: Calculation", or "Cell: Worksheet cell" is selected, click the
"Browse" button or calculation formula to the side of the device setting field.
The "Device settings" window is displayed.

Normal When MultiTalk is used

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


"Device settings" window

This item describes the "Device settings" window.

PLC device
This item describes an instance where the data type is PLC device.

Example of word device


Normal When MultiTalk is used

Color and Line


Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-39


6-7 Setting of Devices

Example of bit device


Normal When MultiTalk is used

6 Data type
Item
Displays "PLC device".
Description

PLC When MultiTalk is used, select PLC “A/B”.


BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

PLC No. Set Station No. for Ethernet and thermoregulator (1:N) connection.
PLC device Sets the type of target PLC device and device No..
Data length Select the data length from "1 word/2 words".
Data Format Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/BCD/Hex/Float".
Mode Select the mode from "A contact/B contact".
Number of data Set the number of devices as an ascending number from 1 to be used.
Device explanation Displays an explanation, for example, of the input range of devices to be set.
Internal device help For internal devices of VT, see the PDF file.

Point When MlultiTalk is used, internal devices and link devices are only displayed in PLC A.

The items that are displayed vary according to the parts that are set.

[Example] Text display


Normal When MultiTalk is used

Item Description
PLC When MultiTalk is used, select PLC "A/B".
PLC No. Set Station No. for Ethernet and thermoregulator (1:N) connection.
PLC device Set the target word device.
UNICODE strings When this checkbox is marked, the text string is handled as a UNICODE text string.
When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper byte and lower byte of the text string
Swap upper/lower bytes
to be stored is swapped.

6-40 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-7 Setting of Devices

Indirect reference
This item describes an instance where the data type is indirect reference.
Normal When MultiTalk is used

An "Indirect reference" is a method of adding the content (value) of an index device to the device No. of a base
device to specify the device No. targeted for processing.
6

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Details of indirect references
"6-8 Indirect Reference"

Calculation
This item describes an instance where the data type is calculation.
Normal When MultiTalk is used

Color and Line


Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes
Set the calculation formula using variables and operators. The result of the calculation formula is reflected in the
Device
preset part.
Fro details of calculation, see Setting of
Devices
"6-9 Calculation"
Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-41


6-7 Setting of Devices

Cell (worksheet cell)


This item describes an instance where the data type is cell.

6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

The value of the worksheet cell is reflected in the part.


For details of worksheets, see
"Chapter 16 WORKSHEET"

6-42 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-8 Indirect Reference

About Indirect References


An "indirect reference" is a method of adding the content (value) of an index device to the device No. of a base device
to specify the device No. targeted for processing.

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


For example, when the base device is DM1000 and the value of the index device (DM0000) is 50, the value of
DM1050 is referenced as follows:

DM1000 + <DM0000> → DM1050


1000 + 50 = 1050

The value of the reference DM1050.


For how to open the "Device settings" window (indirect reference), see
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

Color and Line


Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-43


6-8 Indirect Reference

Setting indirect references


This section describes how to set indirect references.
The setting items of base devices varies according to the part to be set. The following describes common setting
items. For details on other setting items, refer to the page related to settings for the respective part.

Example of "Device settings" window (indirect reference)

6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Item Description
Data type Displays "Indirect reference".
PLC When MultiTalk is used, select PLC "A/B".
Station No. Set Station No. for Ethernet and thermoregulator (1 : N) connection.
Base device Base device Sets the type of target PLC device and device No..
Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Data Format
BCD/Hex/Float".
PLC When MultiTalk is used, select PLC "A/B".
Station No. Set Station No. for Ethernet and thermoregulator (1 : N) connection.
Index device
Index device Sets the type of target PLC device and device No..
Data Format Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/BCD".
Displays an explanation, for example, of the input range of devices
Device explanation
to be set.

6-44 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-8 Indirect Reference

Action of Indirect Reference Index


Base devices and the reference device that are based on data length and index devices are as follows.
(same as VT2’s action)

Base device
Value of index device Reference device
Device Number of words
1 0 DM00000
1 1 DM00001
1 2 DM00002
DM00000
2 0 DM00001/DM00000
2 1 DM00003/DM00002
2 2 DM00005/DM00004

As we can see from the above table, the address is offset based on the number of the base device.

To offset the address only based on the value of the index device and not based on the number of words of the base
device, select "Resource(R)" -> "VT Main Unit Setup (S)" -> "Parts (B)" from the menu.
6

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


An indirect reference index performs detection regardless of the data length.

Color and Line


Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices
Base device
Value of index device Reference device Indirect reference
Device Number of words
1 0 DM00000 Calculation

1 1 DM00001
1 2 DM00002
DM00000
2 0 DM00001/DM00000
2 1 DM00002/DM00001
2 2 DM00003/DM00002

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-45


6-8 Indirect Reference

Indirect Reference Setting Examples


The following shows an example of how to set an indirect reference.

Example on a numerical value display

The values of 100 data memories from DM00000 to DM00099 are displayed sequentially five memories at a time on
five numerical value displays.

Display example

Device No. DM Value

6
DM00000 10000
DM00001 10002
DM00002 10004
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

DM00003 10006
DM00004 10008
DM00005 10010
10000 DM00006 10012
10002
DM00095 10190
10004
DM00096 10192
10006
DM00097 10194
10008 DM00098 10196
DM00099 10198

10000 to 10008 :Numerical value display (called numerical value displays (1) to (5) in order from the top)
:Switch (word set: data addition)
:Switch (word set: data subtraction)

DM00000 10000 DM00005 10010 DM00095 10190


DM00001 10002 DM00006 10012 DM00096 10192
DM00002 10004 DM00007 10014 DM00097 10194
DM00003 10006 DM00008 10016 DM00098 10196
DM00004 10008 DM00009 10018 DM00099 10198

Touching the / switch increments/decrements the device No. five Nos. at a time and displays the numerical value.

In the above example, the values of the index device are added/subtracted five values at a time each time a word set
function switch is touched to change the device (reference word device in the numerical value display) that is
referenced.

6-46 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-8 Indirect Reference

Numerical value display/switch setting example


Numerical value display (1)

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Item Base device Index device
Numerical value display (1) DM00000
Numerical value display (2) DM00001
Numerical value display (3) DM00002 DM01000
Numerical value display (4) DM00003
Numerical value display (5) DM00004

Switch (word set): 


Sets the target word device of the switch (word set) to the same as the index device.

Color and Line


Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-47


6-8 Indirect Reference

Cautions for Indirect References


Function of indirect references when the value of an index device changes

1234 Serial communications

Base device : DM0


Index device : DM100

6 Value of index device


DM100
Numerical value displayRead
DM5
Read
5 1234 1234
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

DM5

10 DM5

1234
DM10
DM10
Read 5678
DM10 5678

• When using indirect references, do not set the value of an index device that will exceeds the allowable device
range (device range stored internally on the PLC).
• If indirect referencing fails, the previously referenced value is displayed, and the message "Reference Device
Address Error" is displayed in the error display at the bottom left of the screen.
• If indirect referencing fails for the first time, the value of the base device is displayed, and the message "Reference
Device Address Error" is displayed at the bottom left of the screen.
• If the value of an index device for a part to which an indirect reference has been set is changed, and writing is
performed to the reference device in the time up till when that changed is recognized by the VT3 (time is required
for the VT3 to recognize changed values in index devices as communications is performed serially between the
VT3 and the PLC), writing cannot be performed to the correct reference destination. (In other words, changes in
the index device values are not reflected.)
For example,
Switch (1): Switch to which word set function "indirect reference" is set
Switch (2): Switch to which word set function (changes value of index device of switch (1)) is set
The change on switch (2) is not reflected even if switch (1) is touched immediately after switch (2) is touched.
• Up to 64 indirect reference devices may be located per screen.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"

6-48 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-9 Calculation

Type of Calculation
Calculations are categorized into the following three types:
• For regular screens: Single-number/read calculations
• For regular screens: Multiple-number/read calculations
• For regular screens: Single-number/read calculations
For details on calculations, refer to the following description.

About "Read calculations" and "Write calculations"

Read calculations
These are used in reference device settings, for example, for parts or graphic attribute controls.
The result of having performed a calculation on the value of a PLC device is used as the value of reference devices in parts
and graphic attribute controls, for example. 6
Read calculation setting example

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Numerical value display
The result of the calculation is displayed on the numerical value display.

Graphic attribute controls


Drawn graphics are controlled by the result of calculation.
Color and Line
Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Direction Chart, XY Chart Setting of


The result of the calculation is displayed on graphs. Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-49


6-9 Calculation

Write calculations
Write calculations are used only on "Write word device" settings in numerical value display.
The result of performing a calculation on a numerical value entered on a numeric keypad on a numerical keypad is
written to a PLC device.

Numerical value display


Calculations are processed on values entered on numeric keypads, and the result of the calculation is written to a
write word device.

6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Single-number calculation/Multiple-number calculation

There are two types of read calculations, single- and multiple-number, depending on the number of data items.
Only single-number calculations apply to write calculations.
When the device setting of each part is either a single word or a single bit, the calculation is a single-number calculation,
and when the device setting is a multiplenumber word, the calculation is a multiple-number calculation.

Single-number calculations
Used in the operations of the parts (not including Direction Chart, XY Chart) and graphical attribute controls.
For example, in a numerical value display

The result of A x B is
Value of PLC device: A Calculation: A x B
displayed on the VT3.

There is only one device targeted for the calculation.

Multiple-number calculations
Only used in the operations of direction charts and XY charts.
In trend graphs (real time)

The result of calculation (1) x A + B


is displayed on the VT3.
Value (1) of trend sample device
The result of calculation (2) x A + B
Value (2) of trend sample device is displayed on the VT3.
Calculation:
XxA+B

Value (8) of trend sample device The result of calculation (8) x A + B


is displayed on the VT3.
Multiple devices ((1) to (8) is taken as X) are targetedfor calculation.

6-50 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-9 Calculation

Setting Calculation
This section describes how to set calculations.
How to open the "Device settings" window (calculation)
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Item Description
Data type Displays "Calculation" in the case of a calculation.
Result Displays whether or not the result of the "Expression" is bit or word.
Sets the calculation formula using "variable" and operator from the key pads.
The calculation formula can also be selected from the standard formula list by pressing the button .
Expression
You can also select from a saved log of the latest four formulas that you have set. (Only formula
different from the standard list are saved to this log.)
Conversion Converts the variables (A to E, X) set at "Expression" to a device name or numerical value, and then
expression displays the conversion result.
Sets the variables (A to E) to be used in the calculation formula. Select "Word data/bit data", and set
Variables*1
the device in the "Device settings" window.
Key pads *1 Select the variable or operator to be used at "Expression".
*1 For details, see the following description.
Color and Line
Type
About variables in calculations
Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts


Calculation Number of Variables Symbol
Single-number/read calculation 5 A to E Fonts

Multiple-number/read calculation 4(+1) A to D (X)


Text Codes
Single-number/write calculation 4(+1) A to D (X)
Device
X : (multiple number/read calculation) the direction sample devices of a direction chart / XY chart, the reference
Setting of
word devices of the ideal curves in a XY chart.
Devices

Indirect reference
Value entered by numeric keypad in (single-number/write calculation) numerical value display
Calculation

Point The same variables (A to E, X) can be used twice or more in calculation.


However, note that the maximum number of variables that can be set is five.
For example, AxA + B + C + D (five variables) can be set, whereas AxA + B + C + D + E (six
variables) cannot.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-51


6-9 Calculation

Operator

6
Classifications Functions *1 Symbol
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Start of priority change (


Parentheses
End of priority change )
Addition +
Subtraction -
Four arithmetic operations Multiplication *
Division /
Remainder %
Bit AND AND
Bit operation Bit OR OR
Bit XOR XOR
Logical inversion !
Logic operation Conditional logical OR |
Conditional logical AND &
Left side > Right side >
Left side >= Right side >=
Left side = Right side =
Compare
Left side < Right side <
Left side <= Right side <=
Left side <> Right side *2 <>
*1 high ()
 !
Priority order * / % AND OR XOR
+ -

> >= = < <= <>
low &|
With operators of the same priority, calculation is executed from the left side of the formula.
*2 The same applies to A< >B and ! (A=B).

6-52 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-9 Calculation

Examples using logical operators


Expression Result
!1 0(OFF)
!A
!0 1(ON)
!(A>B) !(100>99) 0(OFF)
0|0 0(OFF)
A|B 0|1 1(ON)
1|1 1(ON)
(A>B)|(C< >D) (100>99)|(200< >100) 1(ON)
0&0 0(OFF)
A&B 0&1 0(OFF)
1&1 1(ON)
(A>B)&(C< >D) (100>99)&(200< >100) 1(ON)

Examples using bit operators


Expression Result
A AND B
A OR B
1234H AND F0F0H
1234H OR F0F0H
1030H
F2F4H
6
A XOR B 1234H XOR F0F0H E2C4H

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Examples using numerical value relative operators
Expression Result
100>99 1(ON)
A>B 100>100 0(OFF)
100>101 0(OFF)
100>=99 1(ON)
A>=B 100>=100 1(ON)
100>=101 0(OFF)
100=99 0(OFF)
A=B 100=100 1(ON)
100=101 0(OFF)
100<99 0(OFF)
A<B 100<100 0(OFF) Color and Line
100<101 1(ON) Type
100<=99 0(OFF)
A<=B 100<=100 1(ON) Touch Switches
100<=101 1(ON)
Key Entry Parts
100<>99 1(ON)
A<>B 100<>100 0(OFF) Fonts
100<>101 1(ON)
Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-53


6-9 Calculation

How to set calculations


This section describes how to set calculations.

1 Set "Expression" using variables and operators on the "Key pads".


"Conversion expression" is displayed.

2 Set each of the variables (A to E) used in "Expression".


Click the field for setting "Bit/Word" and press the button to select from "Bit/Word".
Next, click the field for setting the device, and press the button . The "Device settings" window is displayed.

When Bit is selected


Select from "Bit value/PLC device/Cell" for the data type.

6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

Select from bit value "ON/OFF". Set the PLC device.


(ON:1 OFF:0)

Set the worksheet ID and cell position.

6-54 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-9 Calculation

When Word is selected


Select from "Numerical values/PLC device/Cell" for the data type.

Set the numerical value. Set the PLC device.


6

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Set the worksheet ID and cell position.

3 Click the "OK" button.


Color and Line
Type

This completes setting of calculations.


Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-55


6-9 Calculation

Calculation Precision and Data Format Conversion Rules


When calculations are used, the calculation precision when calculations are processed internally on the VT3 is
determined from the data format of the variables used in calculation formulas. To correctly display the results of
calculations performed in accordance with this calculation precision on parts to which calculations are set, the data
format of the part must be matched to the calculation formula.

Types of calculation precision


The calculation precision (data format) when calculations are processed internally on the VT3 is automatically
selected from the following three types to match the data format of the variables set to the calculation formula:
(1) 2-word unsigned decimal
(2) 2-word signed decimal
(3) Float

6 • If the variable in the calculation formula contains even one float (real numbers), the precision becomes Float.
• If the variable in the calculation formula does not contain a float (real numbers), but contains even one item of
signed data, the precision becomes 2-word signed decimal.
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

• Otherwise, the precision becomes 2-word unsigned decimal.

There are other rules in addition to the above for handling bits in calculations.

Range of numerical values that can be handled by calculation precision


Calculation Precision Range
2-word unsigned decimal 0 to 4294967295
2-word signed decimal -2147483648 to 2147483647
Float real number -3.40282347x1038 to 3.40282347x1038
Boolean 0,1

Calculation precision that can be used in operators


Operator Calculation Precision
2-word unsigned 2-word signed
Type Symbol Float
decimal decimal
Arithmetic
+, -, *, /   
operations
Remainder %   X*1
Sign inversion - X*1  
Bit operator AND, OR, XOR  *2 X*1
Compare operator >, >=, =, <=, <, <>   
Logical
!, &, | - - -
operator
*1 This results in a calculation error. Set the calculation formula again.
*2 Pay attention to bit calculations when the variable is a negative value.

Point A calculation formula conversion error will occur if calculation formulas are described in a
data format that is not supported.

6-56 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-9 Calculation

Data format conversion rules


The following describes conversion rules for data format.

Data format (1) (data format set for each variable in calculation formula, data format of parts to which
calculations are set)
• 1-word unsigned decimal
• 1-word signed decimal
• 1-word BCD
• 2-word unsigned decimal
• 2-word signed decimal
• 2-word BCD
• Float real number

[Example] Example of data format set to each variable in calculations

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Color and Line
[Example] Example of data format of parts to which calculations are set Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

Data format (2) (calculation precision when calculations are processed internally on VT3)
• 2-word unsigned decimal
• 2-word signed decimal
• Float

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-57


6-9 Calculation

Conversion rules
Either of the following rules is applied during data conversion.
(1) Data format (1) Data format (2)
(data format set to each variable in calculations) ->(calculation precision when calculations are processed
internally on VT3)

(2) Data format (1) Data format (2)


(calculation precision when calculations are processed internally on VT3)  (data format of write word devices)

Conversion rule (1) when referencing data (variables) of data format different from calculation
precision
How to handle values of variables in calculation processing
Calculation Precision
Data Format of Variable 2-word unsigned 2-word signed
Float

6 1-word unsigned decimal


decimal
Use as it is
decimal
Use as it is Decimal -> Float real number
1-word signed decimal - Use as it is Decimal -> Float real number
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

BCD -> Decimal BCD -> Decimal


1-word BCD BCD  Decimal conversion -> Float
conversion conversion
2-word unsigned decimal Use as it is Use as it is *1 Decimal -> Float real number
2-word signed decimal - Use as it is Decimal -> Float real number
BCD -> Decimal BCD -> Decimal BCD -> Decimal conversion -> Float
2-word BCD
conversion conversion real number
Float real number - - Use as it is

*1 A calculation error occurs when post-conversion values exceed the allowable data range of the data format.

Point Pay attention to the effective digits when the calculation precision is a Float.

Conversion rule (2) when the calculation precision differs from the data format of the write word
device
How the result of calculation is handled on write word devices
Calculation Precision
written to a word device 2-word unsigned
2-word signed decimal
Data Format decimal Float

After float -> binary conversion,


1-word unsigned decimal Discard uppermost word Discard uppermost word
Discard uppermost word *1
After float -> binary conversion,
1-word signed decimal Discard uppermost word Discard uppermost word
Discard uppermost word *1
After binary -> BCD After binary -> BCD
Float -> Decimal conversion ->
conversion, conversion,
1-word BCD After float binary conversion, discard
Discard uppermost word Discard uppermost word
*2 *2.3 uppermost word *1,2,3

2-word unsigned decimal Use as it is Use as it is *1 Float -> Decimal conversion *1


2-word signed decimal Use as it is *1 Use as it is Float -> Decimal conversion *1
Decimal -> BCD Decimal -> BCD conversion Float -> Decimal conversion ->
2-word BCD
conversion *2 *2.3 BCD conversion *1,2,3
Float real number Decimal -> Float Decimal -> Float Use as it is

*1 A calculation error occurs when post-conversion values exceed the allowable data range of the data format.
*2 Incrementing of digits is ignored when 9999 (99999999 when manipulating two words) is exceeded.
*3 A calculation error occurs when the result of calculation is a minus number.

6-58 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-9 Calculation

The result is as follows depending on the preset calculation precision and data format of write word devices.

Example 1 When the calculation precision is 2-word unsigned decimal, and the setting of the data format of the
write word device in the numerical value display is 1-word unsigned decimal
Calculation result 100000 (decimal) = 186A0 (Hex)
-> Write result 34464 (decimal) = 86A0 (Hex)

Example 2 When the calculation precision is 2-word signed decimal, and the setting of the data format of the
write word device in the numerical value display is 1-word unsigned decimal
Calculation result -40000 (decimal) = FFFF63C0 (Hex)
-> Write result 25536 (decimal) = 63C0 (Hex)

Example 3 When the calculation precision is Float, and the setting of the data format of the write word device in
the numerical value display is 1-word unsigned decimal
Calculation result 10.254
-> Write result 10
6
When the data format of the write word device is converted to from the calculation precision,

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Point
"omission of digits" or "rounding" of numerical values occurs.
When the calculation precision is Float, and the data format of the write word device is 2-word
decimal, the 2-word decimal data format has more effective digits than Float data format. This
means that there will be fewer effective digits when the result is displayed on a numerical
value display (2-word signed decimal) after Float is calculated in unit conversion, for
example, by calculation.
For these reasons, pay attention to calculation precision and data format conversion rules
when using calculations.

Reference The result is as follows depending on the preset calculation precision and data format of reference
word devices.

Example 1 When the calculation precision is 2-word signed decimal, and the setting of the data Color and Line
format of the reference word device in the numerical value display is 1-word unsigned Type

decimal Touch Switches


Calculation result: Minus number -> Reference result: Calculation error
Key Entry Parts

Example 2 When the calculation precision is Float, and the setting of the data format of the Fonts

reference word device in the numerical value display is 1-word unsigned decimal Text Codes

Calculation result: 1.23 x 10 20 -> Reference result: Calculation error Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-59


6-9 Calculation

Cautions in Calculations

Cautions Relating to Calculation of Remainder


Dividend / divisor = Quotient
Dividend % divisor = Remainder
Based upon the above, the result of calculation becomes as follows:
A calculation result where the sign of the dividend and the remainder match is returned.

10 / 3 = 3 10 % 3 = 1
-10 / 3 = -3 -10 % 3 = -1
10 / (-3) = -3 10 % (-3) = 1
-10 / (-3) = 3 -10 % (-3) = -1

Operation where the result is an out-of-range value during calculation


6 Calculation Precision Calculation formula (example) Result Remarks
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

0-1= 4294967295
2-word unsigned decimal 4294967295+1= 0
1/0= Division by Zero
-2147483648-1= 2147483647
2-word signed decimal 2147483647+1= -2147483648
1/0= Division by Zero
-3.40282347x1038- Calculation Error The allowable numerical
3.40282347x1038+ Calculation Error value range is exceeded.
Float real number -1.17549x10-38+ Calculation Error The value was considerably
1.17549x10-38- Calculation Error small close to 0.
1/0= Division by Zero

Result of special calculation


2-word signed decimal : With sign inversion of -2147483648, the result is the same as the value before
inversion.
1-word signed decimal : With sign inversion of -32768, the result is the same as the value before inversion.

Example of cautions in calculation formulas


Addition/subtraction of float (real numbers): Due to the relationship with effective digits, the result of calculations
A+(B+C) and (A+B)+C is not the same.
Multiplication, division : For example, when making indivisible divisions, the result of calculations
(A/B)*C and (A*C)/B is not the same.
10/3*3=9 10*3/3=10

Operation at a calculation error


"Calculation Error" is displayed at the bottom left of the screen for all write calculations.

6-60 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


6-9 Calculation

Calculation Setting Example


To perform unit conversion on value (2000) of PLC device: DM00000 and display the result "2" on the VT3 numerical
value display, set as follows:
Reference word device : Calculation
Calculation formula : DM00000/1000
DM00000 : 1-word unsigned decimal

To only display the calculation result on the VT3, there is no need to unmark the key entry checkbox and set the next
write word device, set as follows:

Alternatively, to enter value "3" resulting from unit conversion on the numeric keypad after touching that numerical
value display, and then set the value of PLC device: DM00000 to (3000)
Write word device : DM00000 (Set also the data length and data format.)
Calculation
Calculation formula
: Mark this checkbox.
: X *1000 (inverse of previous calculation) 6

BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS


Color and Line
Type

Touch Switches

Key Entry Parts

Fonts

Text Codes

Device

Setting of
Devices

Indirect reference

Calculation

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 6-61


6-9 Calculation

2 Touch numerical value display "2".


CANCEL ENTER
END

Frame blinks. 2 Enter "3" on the numeric keypad.


(Active mode)
CANCEL ENTER
END

6
BEFORE YOU START SETTING PARTS

3 Numerical value display indicates "3".


CANCEL ENTER
END

Press "Enter". (At this time, the numerical value


2
display on VT3 displays "2" momentarily.)
CANCEL ENTER
END

2 Inverse operation (X * '1000') is executed,


and 3000 is written to DM00000 on the PLC.
CANCEL ENTER
END

PLC

3 Calculation (DM00000/'1000') is executed, and


"3" is displayed on the numerical value display.
CANCEL ENTER
END

6-62 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


7
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT
This chapter describes how to set graphics and text.

SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT


7-1 Setting Graphics ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7-2
7-2 Image Setting ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7-5
7-3 Setting Decorative Frames ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7-6
7-4 Setting Outline Text •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7-7
7-5 Setting Bitmap Text •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7-10
7-6 Setting Memos•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7-11
7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 7-12

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 7-1


7-1 Setting Graphics

Types of Graphics and Drawing Graphics


The following graphics can be drawn on VT STUDIO :
Type Line Art Graphic Paint Graphic
line  -
Continuous lines  -
Rectangles  
Graphics

Polygons  
Circles/Ellipses  
Arc  -
Fan  

1 Either select from the Menu in order, or click the button on the tool bar.
• Line : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Lines"
• Continuous lines : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Continuous lines"
• Rectangles : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Rectangles"

7
Polygons : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Polygons"
• Circles/Ellipses : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Circles/Ellipses"
• Arc : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Arc"
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT

• Fan : "Parts" -> "Graphics" -> "Fan"

Reference Draw a Figure


(1) To draw a line, press Shift and at the same time drag&drop the cursor.
•Line: Dragging direction can be horizontal, vertical, and 45° direction.
•Rectangles: Get a square.
•Circles/Ellipses: Get a circle.
(2) Press Ctrl and at the same time drag&drop the cursor. The starting position becomes the center
of the geometric figure.
•Rectangles: The starting point now becomes the center of the geometric figure.
•Circles/Ellipses: The starting point now becomes the center of the circle.
•Arc/Fan : The starting point now becomes the center of the circle.
(3) Press both Shift and Ctrl at the same time and drag the cursor, one of the functions described in
(1) and (2) becomes active.

7-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


7-1 Setting Graphics

Setting Graphics
Set graphic attributes such as line type, line color and screen color for drawn graphics in the "Property" window.

1 Click the button on the tool bar, and select the graphic whose attribute is to be set.
The selection frame is displayed on the perimeter of the selected graphic.
Also, the "Property" window is displayed.

2 Set the graphic attributes in the "Property" window.


Set the graphic attributes of lines, continuous lines, rectangles, polygons, circles/ ellipses, arcs, and fans.
Some items cannot be set depending on the graphic. Items that cannot be set are displayed faint.

SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT


Item Description
Line
When this checkbox is marked, line type, line color and arrow can be set.
attribute(L)
Selects the line type. This item can be set only when drawing straight lines, continuous
Line type(T)*2
lines or paint graphics when the "Line attribute" checkbox is marked.
Line attribute *1
Line Select the line color. This item can be set only when drawing straight lines, continuous Graphics
color(C)*2 lines or paint graphics when the "Line attribute" checkbox is marked.
Image
Select from "None/Start point/End point/ Both ends" for the arrow setting. This item can be
Arrows(A)
set only when drawing straight lines or continuous lines. Decorative frames
When this checkbox is marked, the inside of the graphic is filled and the graphic is turned
Plane
into a paint graphic. This item can be set only drawing rectangles, polygons, circles/ Outline text
Plane attribute(P)
ellipses, and fans.
attribute Bitmap text
Plane
Select the color of the plane.
color(N)*2 Memo
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at
BLK(L)*2 Graphic attribute
all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval. controls
When this checkbox is marked, the four corners of the rectangle are rounded. The part
Chamfer(M)
Chamfer blinks at all times on the VT2 screen at the set interval.
Radius(R) Set the corner radius at this item.
Start angle Sets the start/end angle within the range 0 to 359 deg. This item can be set only when
Arc/Fan*3
End angle drawing arcs and fans.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 7-3


7-1 Setting Graphics

*1 When this checkbox is marked, an outer frame line is attached when drawing rectangles, polygons, circles/
ellipses, arcs, and fans.
*2 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"
*3 The start angle and end angle are set as follows:

Arc
(Setting example)
End
angle
End angle 45° Start angle45°

0° 0°
Start
angle
0° Start angle 315° End angle 315°

Fan
(Setting example)

7 End
angle
End angle 45° Start angle 45
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT

0° 0°
Start
angle
0° Start angle 315° End angle 315

Reference "4-1 Editing Graphics"


• Making graphics blink
• Display/hide a figure
• Changing line type and line color
• Changing the color of paint graphics
• Changing the position of graphics
"7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls"
• Line type, line color, screen color and other defaults
"Option Settings", page 4-22

7-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


7-2 Image Setting
Image is a function for pasting Windows bitmap files or JPEG files to screens.

Image Setting
Parts(P) -> Graphics(F) -> Image(I)

Specify bitmap images in the "Open Image" window.


The "Open Image" window is displayed by one of the following methods:
• Double-click the figure.
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By clicking the right mouse button and selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu

SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT


Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to be opened.
File name(N) Select the name of the file to be opened.
Files of type(T) Select the type of file.
Original size(Z) When this checkbox is marked, the image is displayed on VT3 at the bitmap file image size.
When this checkbox is marked, the color information of bitmap images is converted to a gray
Gray scale(G)
scale image.
When this checkbox is marked, the image is dithered. Dithering is used to make the boundary
Dithering(D) between colors stand out when reduction to the VT32's display color (32768) colors is
performed. Graphics
Frame width(F) Specify the width of the area that is not to be resized in dots (0 to 32) when the image is resized.
Image
If you click this button, a preview of the image after reduction to the VT3's display color (32768)
After conversion
colors, dithering, and gray scale processing is displayed. Decorative frames
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
Outline text

Bitmap text

Point • Specify 8-bit (256 color) or 24-bit (True Color) Memo


Windows bitmap file or JPEG file as the bitmap file format.
Graphic attribute
• Of JPEG formats, progressive JPEG format is not supported. controls

Reference By draging & dropping a file in an Edit screen of VT STUDIO, it becomes a figure part which can be set.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 7-5


7-3 Setting Decorative Frames

Setting Decorative Frames


Parts(P) -> Graphics(F) -> Decorative frame(D)

Set decorative frames in the "Decorative frame" window.


The "Decorative frame" window is displayed by one of the following methods:
• Double-click a decorative frame.
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By clicking the right mouse button and selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu

7 STYLE
Item
Select the style of the decorative frame.
Description

COLOR Select the color of the decorative frame.


SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT

7-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


7-4 Setting Outline Text

Setting Outline Text


Parts(P) -> Text(T) -> Outline text(O)

The "Property" window is displayed by clicking outline text.

SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT


Item Description
Font name(N) Sets the font name of the text string to draw.
Size(Z) Set the font size of the text string to be drawn.
Auto-size(A) Automatically adjusts the font size and kerning.
Kerning(I) Set the spacing between characters.
Rotate(R) Select rotation angle for text from rotating towards right "0º/90º/180º/270º".
Text color(C)*1 Selects the text color.
Bold Sets the text to bold.
Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Decoration(D)

Logo Turns text into a decorative logo. Graphics


Italic Sets the text to italic.
Image
Underline Underlines text.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration. Decorative frames
Shadow color(W)
The settings are the same as "Text color".
Outline text
When "Logo" is specified for decorating text, and the "LOGO" button is clicked, the "Outline text
Logo
logo settings" window is displayed. Bitmap text
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all
BLK*1
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval. Memo

Align left Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the left. Graphic attribute
Alignment

controls
Align center Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the center.
Align right Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the right.
Even spacing Aligns text strings of multiple lines to the longest line, and evens out the character spacing.
Enter the text string to be placed in the Edit window. Up to 256 1-byte characters or 128 2-byte
Text string(T) characters can be entered to a text string. When text is wrapped at the end of the line, the line
feed code is counted as a single 1-byte character.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*2 Only "0º/90º" can be selected when VT is VT2 series.

Reference • Setting default outline text attributes


"Option Settings", page 4-22
• Controlling display of outline text
"7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 7-7


7-4 Setting Outline Text

Outline Text Logo Settings


Various text decorations can be set to outline text.
The "Outline text logo settings" window is displayed by clicking the "LOGO" button when "Logo" is specified under
text decoration in the "Property" window.

Effect

Select "Effect type", and select text decoration from the displayed examples.

7
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT

Item Description
EFFECT TYPE Select the effect type from "Bordering/Shadow/3D/...".
PREVIEW Displays a preview image of the outline text at the selected effect.
To further change the text color, background and special effects from the displayed examples, set the desired items
on the "Settings" tab.

7-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


7-4 Setting Outline Text

Setting

Change the effect settings.

SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT


Item Description
Text color*1 Selects the text color. Graphics

Fill effect Select from "Monochrome/Shades of Gray/Style/Texture". Image


Color settings

Color *1 Selects the color.


Text

Decorative frames
Sample Display the color-filling result of the figure.
Outline text
Type Select from available color types.
Bitmap text

Background color
Select the background color.
Background

*1 Memo

Graphic attribute
controls
Color settings *1 This setting is the same as "Color settings" for "Text".

Set the color of the special effect such as "Frame color/ Shadow color/...".*2
Effect color *1
Special effects

Set the color of the effect.

Degree of effect Enter the degree of special effect such as "Frame width/ Depth/...".*2

*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2


*2 The settings change according to the type of effect.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 7-9


7-5 Setting Bitmap Text

Setting Bitmap Text


Parts(P) -> Text(T) -> Bitmap text(B)

The "Property" window is displayed by clicking bitmap text.

7
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT

Item Description
Set the size of text strings in the vertical direction to multiples of 1/2X or within the range 1X to
Size(V)
8X.
Size(H) Set the size of text strings in the horizontal direction to multiples within the range 1X to 8X.
Rotate(R) Rotates text strings clockwise by (0, 90, 180 or 270 ) deg.
Text color(C)*1 Selects the text color.
Bold Sets the text to bold.
Decoration(D)

Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
Shadow color(W)
The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all
BLK*1
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Enter the text string to be placed in the Edit window. Up to 64 1-byte characters or 32 2-byte
Text string(T) characters can be entered to a text string. When text is wrapped at the end of the line, the line
feed code is counted as a single 1-byte character.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

Reference • Setting default bitmap text attributes


"Option Settings", page 4-22
• Controlling display of bitmap text
"7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls"

7-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


7-6 Setting Memos

Setting Memos
Parts(P) -> Text(T) -> Memo(C)

Set memos in the "Memo" window.

Display the "Memol" window by one of the following methods:


• By double-clicking the memo
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By clicking the right mouse button and selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu

SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT


Item Description
Font name Set the font name of the text string to be displayed.
Font size Set the font size of the text string to be displayed.
Text color*1 Selects the text color.
Background color *1 Select the background color of the memo. The settings are the same as "Text color".
Frame color *1 Select the frame color of the memo. The settings are the same as "Text color".
Enter the text string to be placed in the memo. Up to 256 1-byte characters or 128 2-byte
Text string characters can be entered to a text string. When text is wrapped at the end of the line, the line Graphics
feed code is counted as a single 1-byte character.
Image
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
Decorative frames

Reference • Displaying/hiding memos Outline text


"Memo", page 5-27
Bitmap text
• Setting memo default font name and font size
"Option Settings", page 4-22 Memo

Graphic attribute

Point When the figure data edited from "PC->VT Data Transmit" is transmitted to VT3, Memo is also controls

sent to VT3 (hideed on the screen).


So after running "VT->PC Data Receive", Memo is displayed on the screen.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 7-11


7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls
Graphic attribute controls such as color or line type can be changed when the bit device is ON (OFF) by setting
graphic attribute controls to drawn graphics or text.

Graphic Attribute Control Restrictions


Though multiple graphic attribute controls can be set, the display state of some objects on the VT3 does not change
depending on the drawn graphic that is set. The following shows the relationship between controllable graphics and
each of the graphic attribute controls.
Blink Display Line attribute Plane attribute Text attribute Position
Controllable Graphics
control control control control control control
Lines, continuous lines    - - 
Line Art Graphic    - - 
Rectangles
Paint Graphic     - 
Line Art Graphic    - - 
Polygons
Paint Graphic     - 
Circles/ Line Art Graphic    - - 
Ellipses Paint Graphic     - 

7
Arcs    - - 
Line Art Graphic    - - 
Fans
Paint Graphic     - 
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT

Bitmap text   - -  
Standard   - -  
Outline text
Logo *1  - - - 
Image *1  - - - 
*1 Only display/hide blink functions.

Setting Graphic Attribute Controls


Parts(P) -> Graphic attribute control(Z)

Sets graphic attribute controls to drawn graphics.

1 Select the drawn graphic to which a graphic attribute control is to be set.


The selection frame is displayed around the selected drawn graphic.

2 Set attribute controls in the "Graphic attribute control" window.


Display the "Graphic attribute control" window by one of the following methods:
• By selecting "Parts(P)" -> "Graphic attribute control(Z)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By selecting "Graphic attribute control(Z)" from Menu that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button

7-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls

Marking a checkbox enables a graphic control. Set the graphic control referring to the following descriptions.

Point Graphic attribute controls cannot be set when multiple objects are selected, or drawn
graphics are grouped with switches/lamps, basic parts, and meters/ graphs.

Item Description
You can confirm the display state when the reference bit device is ON for drawn graphics for
ON
which graphic attribute control is set.
Preview display *1
You can confirm the display state when the reference bit device is OFF for drawn graphics for
OFF
which graphic attribute control is set.
The label "L_****" is automatically assigned as the default to drawn graphics for which graphic
Label attribute control is set. Correct this label as necessary. (**** is the creation number. A number
starting from 0000 is appended.)
*1 The display state of "Individual Device ON/OFF Display" depends on its ON/OFF setting. This doesn't include
the blinking control and position control.

Blink control

Makes the drawn graphic blink when the reference bit device is ON (OFF when the Reference mode is a B contact).

SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT


Graphics

Image

Decorative frames

Outline text
Item Description
Set the reference bit device for control. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit Bitmap text
Reference bit device *1
device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Memo
Set the mode in which the reference bit device is referenced.
A contact: Blinks drawn graphics when the reference bit device is ON and does not blink them Graphic attribute
Mode when the device is OFF. controls
B contact: Blinks drawn graphics when the reference bit device is OFF and does not blink them
when the device is ON.
Blink type Select the blink type from "Reverse color", "Display/ hide" or "Change color".
Blink speed *2 Select the blink speed "Standard/Speed 1/Speed 2".
Set blink color 1 and 2 when "Blink type" is set to "Change color".
When the plane color (line color) under the plane attributes (line attributes) in the "Property" window
Color 1

for the drawn graphic is set to single color:


Set the color to change to color 1, and the same color as the plane color (line color) of the plane
Blink color *3 attribute (line attribute) in the "Property" window to color 2.
When the plane color (line color) under the plane attributes (line attributes) in the "Property" window
Color 2

for the drawn graphic is set to pattern (Advanced "Plane attribute settings (line attribute settings)"):
To colors 1 and 2 set the colors for changing plane colors 1 and 2 (line colors 1 and 2) that are
set (as line attribute settings) in the respective plane attribute settings.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 The speed 1/speed 2 values for "Blink speed" can be changed in the "VT system".
When the color is reversed and blinks, the VT3-Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/
W4G(A) is fixed to standard (0.4 s).
"VT System", page 12-12
*3 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 7-13
7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls

Blink type

Reverse color
 In the case of a line graphic

Color set as the line attribute Inverted color of color set as the
color in the "Property" window line attribute color in the
"Property" window

 In the case of a paint graphic

Color set as screen attribute Reverse color of color set as


color and line attribute color screen attribute color and

7
in the "Property" window line attribute color in the
"Property" window

Display/hide
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT

Color set as screen attribute Drawn graphic hidden


color and line attribute color
in the "Property" window

Change color
 In the case of a line graphic

Color set as the line attribute Color set in the "Graphic attribute
color in the "Property" window control" window

 In the case of a paint graphic

Color set as screen attribute Color set in "Graphic attribute


color and line attribute color in control" window
the "Property" window At this time, the color set as the
line attribute color in the
"Property" window also becomes
the color set in the "Graphic
attribute control" window.

7-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls

Hardware blink and software blink


The following describes hardware blinks and software blinks.
Item Description
BLK
Hardware blink The blinking interval is managed by the VT3 hardware.
Blink control (reverse color)
Blink control (display/hide) The blinking interval is managed by the VT3 system
Software blink
Blink control (change color) program.

Point Software blinking is not synchronized with hardware blinking. For example, if a drawn
graphic to which a color reverse blink is set is placed on the same screen together with a
drawn graphic to which color change blinking is set, the cycle that these graphics will blink
will not match.

Display control

Displays the drawn graphic when the reference bit device is ON (OFF when the Reference mode is a B contact).
The drawn graphic is hideed when the reference bit device is OFF (ON when the Reference mode is a B contact).

SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT


Graphics

Image

Decorative frames

Item Description Outline text

*1 Set the reference bit device for control. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit
Reference bit device Bitmap text
device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Set the mode in which the reference bit device is referenced. Memo
Mode A contact: When the reference bit device is ON, displayed; when OFF, hideed. Graphic attribute
B contact: When the reference bit device is OFF, displayed; when ON, hideed. controls

*1 Selectable from "PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 7-15


7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls

Line attribute control

The line type and line color of the drawn graphic can be changed and displayed when the reference bit device is ON
(OFF when the Reference mode is a B contact).

7
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT

Item Description
Set the reference bit device for control. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit
Reference bit device *1
device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Set the mode in which the reference bit device is referenced.
A contact: Changes and displays the line type and line color when the reference bit device is
Mode ON and does not change them when the device is OFF.
B contact: Changes and displays the line type and line color when the reference bit device is
OFF and does not change them when the device is ON.
Line type *2 Select the line type.
Line color *2 Select the line color.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all
BLK*2
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"

7-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls

Plane attribute control

The plane color of the drawn graphic can be changed and displayed when the reference bit device is ON (OFF when the
Reference mode is a B contact).

SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT


Item Description
Set the reference bit device for control. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit
Reference bit device *1
device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Set the mode in which the reference bit device is referenced.
A contact: Changes and displays the plane color when the reference bit device is ON and does
Mode not change them when the device is OFF.
B contact: Changes and displays the plane color when the reference bit device is OFF and
does not change them when the device is ON.
Plane color *2 Select the plane color.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all
BLK*2
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"
Graphics
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
Image
*2 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"
Decorative frames

Outline text

Bitmap text

Memo

Graphic attribute
controls

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 7-17


7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls

Text attribute control

The text color and text decoration of bitmap text can be changed and displayed when the reference bit device is ON
(OFF when the Reference mode is a B contact).

7
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT

Item Description
Set the reference bit device for control.
Reference bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings"
window.
Set the mode in which the reference bit device is referenced.
A contact : Text attributes are controlled and displayed when the reference bit device is ON and
Mode are not changed when the device is OFF.
B contact : Text attributes are controlled and displayed when the reference bit device is OFF and
are not changed them when the device is ON.
Text color*2 Selects the text color.
Bold Sets the text to bold.
Text Decoration

Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.

Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.

Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
Text shadow color*2
The settings are the same as "Text color".
*1 Selectable from "PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

7-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls

Position control

When this checkbox is marked, the drawn graphic is moved and displayed at the point specified by the reference
word device.
There are two ways of specifying position, direct specification and point specification. By direct specification, you
specify the relative coordinates of the position that the graphic moves to By point specification, you specify the No. of
the preset location.
Drawn graphics are moved referenced to the top left.

Running
Rectangle Circle/ellipse Bitmap text

Reference "Origin, X-axis and Y-axis in Edit window", page 2-4

Position
Directly specify the display position of the drawn graphic on the VT3's screen as a relative coordinate in the X-, Y- or XY-axis.
7

SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT


Graphics

Image

Decorative frames

Outline text

Item Description
Bitmap text
Specify position Selects "Position" as the position specify method.
Sets the control method of the display position for drawn graphics. Memo

X-axis : Controls the position in the horizontal direction. Graphic attribute


Control direction
Y-axis : Controls the position in the vertical direction. controls
XY-axis : Controls the position in the diagonal direction.
X-axis relative coordinate Sets the word device for specifying the relative coordinate in the X-axis direction. When the
specified device *1 "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Y-axis relative coordinate Sets the word device for specifying the relative coordinate in the Y-axis direction. When the
specified device *1 "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data format of the X and Y direction relative coordinate specified device from "Unsigned
Data Format
decimal/ Signed decimal/BCD". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement.
Sets the upper and lower limit values to be written to the X direction relative coordinate
X input range
specified device.
X display range Sets the range in which the drawn graphic moves on the VT3 screen in the X direction.
Sets the upper and lower limit values to be written to the Y direction relative coordinate
Y input range
specified device.
Y display range Sets the range in which the drawn graphic moves on the VT3 screen in the Y direction.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

Reference Advanced settings (drawing options)


" Screen attribute settings", page 4-18

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 7-19


7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls

[Example] To directly specify the display position of the X- and Y-axis relative coordinates by XY-axis control
(data format: signed decimal)
The figure below shows the display on the VT3 screen.

  Position on editing screen


(1) (240,50)

  Position on
VT3 screen
(2) (520,220)

  Position on
VT3 screen
(3) (40,400)

7
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT

Coordinate (X,Y) is the (absolute) coordinate on the VT3 screen.


The following describes how to write values to the coordinate specification devices.
Draw the rectangle at location (1) on the edit screen when editing the screen. This location (X,Y) = (240,50)
becomes the basic display position.

To move the display position of the drawn graphic on the VT3 screen to location (2), write the following to
the coordinate specification device:
At X-axis, 520 - 240 = 280 (X-axis relative coordinate)
Y axis, write 220-50=170 (Y axis relative coordinate) to the coordinate specified device.

Next, to move the display position of the drawn graphic on the VT3 screen to location (3), write the following
to the coordinate specification device:
At X-axis, 40 - 240 = - 200 (X-axis relative coordinate)
Y axis, write 400-50=350 (Y axis relative coordinate) to the coordinate specified device.

The following table shows the relationship between the display position of drawn graphics on the VT3
screen and the value of the coordinate specification device:
When the data format of the coordinate specification device is signed (±) decimal, minus numbers are
written in 2's complement format.

Display Position of Graphics on VT3 Screen (1) (2) (3)


Value of X-axis relative coordinate specified device 0 280 -200
Value of Y-axis relative coordinate specified device 0 170 350

7-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls

About input range and display range in direct specification (conversion of values)

Values written to the coordinate specification device can be converted and drawn graphics moved by setting the input
range and display range.
Item Description
Input range Range of value to be written to coordinate specified device
Display range Range in which the display of the graphic is moved on the VT3 screen

[Example] When the value of the coordinate specification device for the X- and Y-axis relative coordinates has
changed within 0 to 1000 (data format: signed decimal)
The display of the drawn graphic moves in the X-axis from left to right from 0 to 300 (relative
coordinates).

Value of coordinate specification device = 0 Value of coordinate specification device = 1000

Position on editing screen Position on VT3 screen

7
(X,Y) (X+300,Y)

SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT


300

In the above figures, set as follows:


Input range lower limit value = 0, Input range upper limit value = 1000
Display range lower limit value = 0, Display range upper limit value = 300

0 1000
Graphics
Input range
Image
Conversion
Display range Decorative frames

0 300 Outline text

Bitmap text
The upper and lower limit values of the input range and display range can be set as desired within the
ranges shown in the following table: Memo

When the data format of the coordinate specification device is signed (±) decimal, minus numbers are Graphic attribute
controls
written in 2's complement format.

Item Range
Unsigned decimal 0to65535
X input range Signed decimal -32768to+32767
BCD 0to9999
X display range -799to+799
Unsigned decimal 0to65535
Y input range Signed decimal -32768to+32767
BCD 0to9999
Y display range -799to+799

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 7-21


7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls

Point
The display position of a drawn graphic on the VT3's screen is specified as a preset point.

7 Item Description
Specify position Select "Point" as the position specify method.
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT

Set the number (1 to 16) of points by which the position of drawn graphics is controlled on
Number of points
screen.
Reference word device Set the reference word device for control. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference
*1 bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data format of the reference word device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Data Format
BCD". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement.
Point coordinates Displays the coordinates of the set point No. Coordinates can be entered directly.
Delete Deletes specified points.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

Reference Advanced settings (drawing options)


"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18

Up to 16 point Nos. can be set within the range No.1 to No.16.


Set the display position of drawn graphics for point Nos. as the (absolute) coordinates (X,Y) on the VT3 screen when
manipulating control settings.

7-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls

[Example] To move the display position of drawn graphics by point specification


The figure below shows the display on the VT3 screen.

(1) Position on editing screen (2) Point No.1

(4) Point No.3 (3) Point No.2

(5) Point No.16

Point Nos.1 to No.16 are positions on the VT3 screen.


7

SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT


The numerical value of the point No. is written to the value of the reference word device.

The following table shows the relationship between the display position of the drawn graphic on the VT3
screen and the value of the reference word device:

Display position of the drawn graphic on the


(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
screen of VT3
Point No. - 1 2 3 16
Value of reference word device 0*1 1 2 3 16
*1 When the value of the reference word device is "0", the drawn graphic is displayed at the (original)
position on the edit screen. Graphics

Image
Point How drawn graphics to which position controls are set are displayed cannot be confirmed in
VTSTUDIO. Decorative frames

Outline text

Bitmap text

Memo

Graphic attribute
controls

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 7-23


7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls

MEMO

7
SETTING GRAPHICS & TEXT

7-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS
This chapter describes how to set switches and lamps.

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


8-1 Setting Styles and Nameplates•••••••••••••••••••••••••• 8-2
8-2 Setting Switches ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 8-9
8-3 Setting Lamp Switch••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 8-36
8-4 Setting Lamps •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 8-38
8-5 Setting of N State Lamp •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 8-39
8-6 Setting N State Parts •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 8-41
8-7 Setting of Cross-key (only for VT3-V7R) •••••••••••• 8-45
8-8 Function Switch Settings (Only for Handy Series) •••8-46

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-1


8-1 Setting Styles and Nameplates
This section describes how to set styles and nameplates for switches, lamp switches, lamps, and N state lamps.

Setting Nameplates

Point The nameplates of lamp switches and lamps are not displayed even if screen data is sent to a
VT3 that is not communicating with a PLC.
With lamp switches and lamps whose nameplate character string changes by the ON/OFF
state of the lamp bit device, nameplates are displayed only when communications between
the VT3 and PLC is established.

Nameplates can be displayed in the center or at the top, bottom, left and right of switches, lamp switches and lamps.

1 Click the switch, lamp switch or lamp whose nameplate is to be changed.


The "Property" window is displayed.

2 Select the "Nameplate" tab of the "Property" window.

8
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

Reference When setting the nameplate of lamp switches and lamps, an image of the lamp in an ON/OFF state is
displayed at ON/OFF on the "Nameplate" tab in the "Property" window.

OFF/ON on "Nameplate" Tab


Item
OFF ON

Mode: A contact

Style when lamp bit device is OFF Style when lamp bit device is ON

Mode: B contact

Style when lamp bit device is ON Style when lamp bit device is OFF

8-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-1 Setting Styles and Nameplates

When "Text" is selected as the type


Make the nameplate using Windows outline font. Enter the name of the switch, lamp switch, or lamp at "character
string" to specify the text.
Item Description
OFF(F)/ON(O)*1 Switches the nameplate settings between OFF and ON.
OFF=ON*1 Sets the nameplate at OFF/ON switching of lamp bit devices to the same state.
Copy ON/Copy OFF *1 Copies the nameplate setting when ON or OFF.
Font name(N) Set the font name of the character string in the nameplate.
Size(Z) Set the font size of the character string in the nameplate.
Kerning(I) Set the spacing between characters.
Position(P) Set the placement position of the nameplate.
Set the spacing between the nameplate and lamp switch when "Position" is set to Top, Bottom,
Interval
Right or Light.
Auto-size(A) Automatically adjusts the font size and kerning.
Text color(C) *2 Selects the text color.
Bold Sets the text to bold.
Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Decoration(D)

Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Italic Sets the text to italic.
Underline Underlines text.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
Shadow color(N)*2

8
The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all
BLK*2
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Align left Aligns character strings of multiple lines to the left.

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


Alignment

Align center Aligns character strings of multiple lines to the center.


Align right Aligns character strings of multiple lines to the right.
Aligns character strings of multiple lines to the longest line, and evens out the character
Even spacing
spacing.
Enter the character string to be placed in the nameplate. Up to 64 half-width characters or 32
Character string(T) full-width characters can be entered to a character string. When text is wrapped at the end of the
line, the line feed code is counted as a single half-width character.

*1 Not exist in switch settings.


Individual device ON/OFF display state depends uponOFF/ONsettings.
*2 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
Styles and
Nameplates
Point When Auto-size is set, the font size and kerning of the nameplate are adjusted to match the
size and character string of the switch/lamp. So, when arranging multiple switches/lamps, the Switch

font size and kerning of nameplates may differ with each switch/lamp. The font size may not Lamp switch
be appropriate when the nameplate position is set to a position other than the center or
depending on the style. Lamp

N state lamp

Reference • Setting the default font name and size N state parts
"Option Settings", page 4-22
cross-key
• To enable entry of nameplate character strings, select the switch or lamp and press the Enter key.
Function switch

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-3


8-1 Setting Styles and Nameplates

When "Image" is selected as the type


Specify and place the Windows bitmap file or JPEG file on the nameplate.

Item Description
OFF(F)/ON(O)*1 Switches the nameplate settings between OFF and ON.
OFF=ON*1 Sets the nameplate at OFF/ON switching of lamp bit devices to the same state.
Copy ON/Copy OFF*1 Copies the nameplate setting when ON or OFF.

8 *1
Open(N) Displays the "Open Image" window for selecting the image file to place in the nameplate.

Not exist in switch settings.


Individual device ON/OFF display state depends uponOFF/ONsettings.
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to open.
File Name(N) Select the name of the file to open.
File of type(T) Select the type of file.
Specifies dithering. Dithering is used to compensate the boundary between colors when the
Dithering(D)
number of display colors has been reduced to the VT3 display colors (32768).
Gray scale(G) Converts the color information of image files to gray scale.
Displays a preview of the image after substraction color (4096), dithering or gray scale
After conversion
processing.
Specifies the width (in dots (0 to 32)) of the area that is not enlarged or reduced as the frame
Frame width(F)
when the image is resized.
Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently. This can be
Move(M)
easily moved to the location saving the current part.

8-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-1 Setting Styles and Nameplates

Setting Style
The style of switches, lamp switches and lamps can be changed.

1 Select the switch, lamp switch or lamp whose style is to be changed.


The "Property" window is displayed.

2 Select the "Style" tab.

Item Description
Selects the theme/style (/type) of lamp switch.
8
Style(S)
When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, this item is nonactive.

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


Select the color of the switch or lamp.
Color(T)
When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, this item is nonactive.
You can change the display image at device ON/OFF switching and at touch switch ON/OFF
Free style(C)
switching.
Change(F) When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, "Select styles & images" window is displayed.
Parts Designer(P) Start the type creation software "Parts Designer".

Changing the style image


The "Free style Select image" window is displayed when "Free style" is selected on the "Style" tab and the "Change"
button is clicked. In this window, you can individually change the display image at device ON/OFF switching or touch Styles and
Nameplates
switch ON/OFF switching.
Switch

Lamp switch

Lamp

N state lamp

N state parts

cross-key

Function switch

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-5


8-1 Setting Styles and Nameplates

When the "Select from file" checkbox is marked


Specify the Windows bitmap file or JPEG file, and specify the display image.
When the "Select" button is clicked, the "Open image" window is displayed.

Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to open.
File Name(N) Select the name of the file to open.
File of type(T) Select the type of file.
When this checkbox is marked, the color information of image files is converted to a gray scale
Gray scale(G)
image.
When this checkbox is marked, the image is dithered. Dithering is used to make the boundary
Dithering(D)
between colors stand out when substraction color is performed.

8 Frame width(F)
Specifies the width (in dots (0 to 32)) of the area that is not enlarged or reduced as the frame
when the image is resized.
If you click this button, a preview of the image after substraction color to the VT3's displays
After conversion
color (32768) colors, dithering, and gray scale processing is displayed.
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently. This can be
Move(M)
easily moved to the location saving the current part.

When the "Select styles" checkbox is marked


Select from the images of the switches and lamps preinstalled to VT STUDIO and specify the desired display image.
Item Description
Style Selects the theme/style (/type) .
Color Selects the color.
Display style Click to select the display image.

Reference The styles of multiple switches and lamps can be changed in a single operation. This is handy when
changing the styles of ten key-pad or keyboards.

1 Select the switch or lamp whose style is to be changed.


The "Property" window is displayed.
"Selecting Objects (graphics)", page 4-6
"Continuously Selecting Objects", page 4-7

2 Select the "Style" tab on the "Property" window.


Change the style.
"Changing the style image", page 8-5

8-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-1 Setting Styles and Nameplates

Setting the Style and Nameplate of N State Lamps

Setting the nameplate of N state lamps


A nameplate can be displayed on N state lamps.

1 Click the N state lamp whose nameplate is to be changed.


The "Property" window is displayed.

2 Select the "Nameplate" tab of the "Property" window.

3 Select the state No. whose nameplate is to be changed, and set the nameplate.
Set the nameplate to each state.

State(S)
Item Description
Displays and sets the No. of the state currently being edited.
8
Clicking this button displays the "N state lamp" window so that you can set the number of

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


Set number of states(F)
states.
Font name(N) Set the font name of the character string in the nameplate.
Size(Z) Set the font size of the character string in the nameplate.
Auto-size(A) Automatically adjusts the font size and kerning.
Kerning(I) Set the spacing between characters.
Position(S) Set the placement position of the nameplate.
Set the interval between the nameplate and N state lamp when "Position" is set to Top, Bottom,
Interval
Right or Left.
Text color(C) *1 Selects the text color.
Bold Sets the text to bold.
Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Decoration(D)

Styles and
Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Nameplates
Italic Sets the text to italic.
Underline Underlines text. Switch

Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
Shadow color(W)*1 Lamp switch
The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all Lamp
BLK*1
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
N state lamp
Align left Aligns character strings of multiple lines to the left.
Alignment

Align center Aligns character strings of multiple lines to the center. N state parts

Align right Aligns character strings of multiple lines to the right.


cross-key
Aligns character strings of multiple lines to the longest line, and evens out the character
Even spacing
spacing. Function switch

Enter the character string to be placed in the nameplate. Up to 64 half-width characters or 32


Character string(T) full-width characters can be entered to a character string. When text is wrapped at the end of the
line, the line feed code is counted as a single half-width character.
*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

Point • When Auto-size is set, the font size and kerning of the nameplate are adjusted to match the
size and character string of the switch/lamp. So, when arranging multiple switches/lamps,
the font size and kerning of nameplates may differ with each switch/lamp. The font size
may not be appropriate when the nameplate position is set to a position other than the
center or depending on the style.
• Nameplates are displayed only when the PLC is communicating with the VT3.

Reference Setting the default font name and size


"Option Settings", page 4-22
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-7
8-1 Setting Styles and Nameplates

Setting the style of N State Lamps


Set the display image in each state of N state lamps.

1 Select the N state lamp whose display image in each state is to be changed.
The "Property" window is displayed.

2 Select the "Style" tab.

3 Select the state NO. of the displayed image to be changed from the "List of
States", and set the displayed image to.
set the displayed image based on the states.
The states of the display image displayed in "State" are displayed for the number set
at "Number of states" in the "N state lamp" window.
"N state lamp" window
"8-5 Setting of N State Lamp"

Item Description
State(S) Displays and sets the No. of the state currently being edited.
Set number of states(E) Clicking this button displays the "N state lamp" window so that you can set the number of states.

8 Style(T)

Color(C)
Selects the theme/style (/type). When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, this item is
nonactive.
Selects the color. When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, this item is nonactive.
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

When this checkbox is marked, you can select the display image from Windows bitmap files or
Free style(F)
JPEG files.
Change(N)*1 When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image" window is displayed.
State(L) Displays an image of each of the state of the N state lamp.
Copy in full status(A) To copy the style/nameplate setting of selected status in full status*2.
/ Swaps the style/nameplate of the currently selected state with the previous/next state.
*1 "Free style Select image" window
"Changing the style image", page 8-5
*2 The character string of nameplate isn't copied.

8-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-2 Setting Switches

Setting Switches
Parts(P) -> Switches/Lamps(S) -> Switch(T)

Set switches in the "Switch" window.


Display the "Switch" window by one of the following methods:
• By double-clicking the switch
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu
• By clicking the button
• Selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)" from the right-click menu

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


Item Description
Add*1 Adds a switch function.
Delete Delete a switch function.
Up/Down Changes the switch function execution order.
Change to lamp switch*2 Converts switch to lamp switch.
The label "T_****" is automatically assigned as the default to switches. Correct this label as
Label
necessary. “****” stands for the creation number. A number starting from 0000 is appended.
*1 "Adding Switch Functions", page 8-33
Styles and
*2 Part settings, styles and labels sometimes are changed. Nameplates

Switch

Lamp switch

Lamp

N state lamp

N state parts

cross-key

Function switch

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-9


8-2 Setting Switches

List of switch functions


Item Description
Set bit Changes the ON/OFF state of the specified target bit device.
Switch page Switches the VT3 screen to the specified page.
Display local window Turns display of the local window (window 1 to 3) ON and OFF.
Display global window Turns display of the global window ON and OFF.
Set word Changes the numerical values of the target word device.
Set digits Digitally increments/decrements the numerical values of the target word device.
Set character string Sets a character string to the target word device.
Switch to device monitor of system mode, PLC Data Folder, save data to memory card screen
Call up system screen and operation log viewer. Global window display can also be executed with device monitor and
unit monitor under running mode.
• Outputs a hard copy of the VT3 screen.
Print • Save Windows bitmap files or JPEG files in VT3 screen into the memory card.
• Output alarm log from thermal printer (alarm log printing).
Stop print Cancels printing.
Video play/pause Switches play/pause display video display.
• Save Windows bitmap files or JPEG files in VT3 screen into the memory card.
Video capture
• Save video display (images) into memory card using Windows bitmap files or JPEG files format.
Video Console Switch is used for a console.
Changing display character Switches to the display character string ID to which multiple character strings set to parts, etc.
strings are specified.
Restart VT Sets the VT3 to the power ON state.
Key entry Switch is used for a ten key-pad or keyboard.

8 VNC key switch


Extended command
Use the ten-key pad and keyboard to enter values in the VNC display screen (VNC server).

Create any communication command and send/receive the same.


communication
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

Set bit
Changes the ON/OFF state of the specified target bit device.

Item Description
Set the bit device targeted for switch control.
Target bit device *1
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Set the switch mode.
Set momentary : Sets (turns ON) switch bit devices only for the duration that switch is
touched. (The device is turned OFF when the switch is released.)
Reverse bit: : Reverse ON/OFF state of target bit device by pressing the rising edge of
Switch mode switch (the state is held even the touch screen is released).
Set : Set ON state of target bit device by pressing the rising edge of switch
(the state is held even the touch screen is released).
Reset : Reset OFF state of target bit device by pressing the rising edge of switch
(the state is held even the touch screen is released).
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Indirect reference/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

Reference After the form screen on the workspace is drag-and-dropped to the edit window, it is possible to
generate a component with print start trigger bit form screen being set.

8-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-2 Setting Switches

Switch page
Switches the VT3 screen to the specified page.

Item Description
Set the page switching mode.
Specify page No. :specifying page No.
Previous page : switch to the previous display page. Pages can be switched back down the

Page switching mode


last ten pages. Pages switched to by PLCs and other external devices also
can be returned to. 8
Page move (+) : move to the page with larger page ID than the current one.
Page move (-) : move to the page with smaller page ID than the current one.

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


Increment 1 page : The next page (current page No. +1) is switched to.
Decrement 1 page : switch to previous page (current page No. -1).
When "Page switching mode" is "Specify page No.", set the specified page No. to within switch
Page No.
to the range of "0 to 8999".
When this item is marked, the target bit device is set when the page switching switch is pressed
Set page switching bit
to notify that page switching has occurred.
Set the target bit device of the page switch bit set. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the
Target bit device *1
reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

Styles and
Point Page switching bit set is executed only on set (OFF->ON). With VT3, a reset (ON->OFF) is not Nameplates
performed, so perform the reset (ON->OFF) in the PLC ladder program.
Switch

Lamp switch
Reference • After the base screen on the workpace is drag-and-dropped to the edit window, it is possible to
generate a part with the page switching function being set. Lamp

• Switching pages using system memory area


N state lamp
"14-4 PLC-Based Page Switching"
• Switching pages using function control by devices N state parts

"Page switching", page 9-113 cross-key


• "12-7 Global Function Control"
Function switch
• About bases and windows
"Screen Configuration", page 2-5

 Page move (+)/(-)


When ID of the created screen is 1, 2, 4, and 10

Page move (+)

Page move (+) Page move (+) Page move (+)

Screen ID1 Screen ID2 Screen ID4 Screen ID10


Page move (-) Page move (-) Page move (-)

Page move (-)

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-11


8-2 Setting Switches

Display local window


Turns the display of the specified local window (windows 1 to 3) ON and OFF.

Item Description
Select the target window. When this checkbox is marked, the window is
Window 1 to 3
targeted for display ON/OFF.
Select window

8 Close the window which


this part is configured.
Close the window onto which the part is placed. After reselection, the
local window placed with the switch is changed into targets of OFF state.
When this checkbox is marked, the local window is displayed at the
Specify window display position *1
specified position when the local window display switch is pressed.
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

Set two numerical values for the X and Y coordinates (top left corner of
(X, Y)=
window screen that is displayed) in multiples of 16.
*1 The setting for specifying the window display position isnít reflected during active edit.

Point • "Specify window display position" can be set when there is only one window that displays
(turns ON) by "Select window".
• When "Specify window display position" isn’t set, the window is displayed at the position
where it was drawn.

Reference • After the screen on the workspace (window 1/2/3) is drag-and-dropped to the edit window, it is
possible to create a part with the local window display function being set.
• Displaying the local window using system memory area
"14-5 Turning Windows ON/OFF by PLCs"
• Displaying local windows using function control by devices
"Display local window", page 9-114
• "12-7 Global Function Control"
• About bases and windows
"Screen Configuration", page 2-5

8-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-2 Setting Switches

Display global window


Turns the display of the specified global window ON and OFF.

Item Description
Set whether to turn the global window display ON or OFF when the switch is
Display ON/OFF
touched.
Select
Global Global window ID Select the target global window ID (0 to 7).
window Global window No.
Close the window which
Set the global window No. to be displayed (turned ON)
After reselection, the local window placed with the switch is changed into
8
the part is placed targets of OFF state.

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


If this checkbox is marked, the global window is displayed at the specified
Specify window display position *1
position when the global window display switch is pressed.
Set the two numerical values for the X and Y coordinates (top left corner of
(X, Y)=
window screen that is displayed) in multiples of 16.
*1 The setting for specifying the window display position isnít reflected during active edit.

Point • When "Specify window display position" isn’t set, the window is displayed at the position
where it was drawn.
• Global windows sometimes cannot be displayed due to restrictions in the number of
devices, screen data size, number of key entry parts, overlapping data, and other factors.
To display multiple global windows simultaneously, thoroughly check operation on an
Styles and
actual working unit.
Nameplates
• When an interrupt window display is turned ON while a global window is displayed, the
following happens if the number of devices, screen data size, number of key entry parts, Switch

size of overlapping data, and other restrictions are exceeded.


Lamp switch
• The display of all currently displayed global windows turns OFF, and display of the
interrupt window turns ON. Lamp
• The states of local windows (windows 1 to 3) do not change.
N state lamp
• The notify bit device for notifying global window errors turns ON.
• The unit monitor and device monitor are set to Global window display through special N state parts
operations in unit screen.
cross-key
unit monitor: Global window ID6;
Device monitor: Global windowID7. Function switch

Chapter 5 System Mode, VT3 Series Hardware Manual

Reference • After the global window on the workspace is drag-and-dropped to the edit window, it is possible to
create a part with the global window display function being set.
• Global window Nofity error
"Other", page 12-31
• Function control by devices, Global window display
"Display global window", page 9-115
• "12-7 Global Function Control"
• About bases and windows
"Screen Configuration", page 2-5

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-13


8-2 Setting Switches

Set word
Changes the numerical value of the specified target word device.

Item Description
Set the switch mode of the word set.
Set data : write the set-value of data set into target word device.
Add data : add the set-value of data set and current value of target word device.

8 Switch mode Subtract data : subtract the set-value of data set from current value of target word device.
OR logic operation : execute OR operation of the set-value of data set and current value of target word device.
AND logic operation : execute AND operation of the set-value of data set and current value of target word device.
XOR logic operation: execute XOR operation of the set-value of data set and current value of target word device.
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

Set the target word device for switch control.


Target word device *1
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target word device from "1 word/2 words". When the data length is
Data length set to 2 words, numerical value data is set to two continuous word devices starting from the
target word device. When the data format is set to Float, the data length is fixed to 2 words.
Select the data format to be set to the target word device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Data Format BCD/Hex/Float". When OR, AND or XOR operation is selected as the switch mode, select from
"Unsigned decimal/Hex" as the data format.
Set the numerical value to be set, added, subtracted, ORed, ANDed, or XORed.
Set data The specified value cannot be set to exceed the range that is determined from the data format
and the data length.
Specify the range (upper limit value/lower limit value) for writing the result of addition/
Specify addsubtract subtraction to the target word device.
range When the result of addition/subtraction exceeds the upper limit value (lower limit value), the
upper limit value (lower limit value) is written.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Indirect reference/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

Point • When a numerical value that exceeds the range determined from "Data format" and "Data
length" is entered to "Set data", the upper limit value and lower limit value are set.
• When the value of the target word device exceeds the addition/subtraction range before
data addition or data subtraction, data addition or data subtraction by switches is not
executed.

Numerical value setting range


The following table shows the setting range of the set data.
Data length Display format Setting Range
Unsigned decimal 0 to 65535
Signed decimal -32768 to 32767
1 word
BCD 0 to 9999
Hex 0 to FFFF (Hex)
Unsigned decimal 0 to 4294967295
Signed decimal -2147483648 to 2147483647
2 word BCD 0 to 99999999
Hex 0 to FFFFFFFF (Hex)
Float -3.40282347x1038 to 3.40282347x1038

8-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-2 Setting Switches

Set digits
Digitally adds and subtracts the numerical values of the specified target word device.

Item Description
Set the switch mode of the set digits.
Switch mode + plus : add the set digit value of target word device onto the digit.
- minus : subtract the set digit value of target word device from the digit.

Target word device*1


Set the word device to be added or subtracted by this switch.
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings"
8
window.

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


Select the data length of the target word device from "1 word/2 words". When the data length is
Data length
set to 2 words, continuous two words are added or subtracted by the digital switch.
Set the data format to be added or subtracted by the digital switch.
Unsigned decimal : Data addition/subtraction in decimal format.
Data Format HEX display : Data addition/subtraction in HEX format.
BCD : Data addition/subtraction in BCD format.
With set digit, "-" signed numerical values are not handled.
Number of digits Set the number of digits to be added or subtracted digitally.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Indirect reference/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

Numerical value setting range Styles and


Nameplates
The following table shows the setting range of the numerical values that can be set digitally.
Switch
Data length Data Format Setting Range
Unsigned decimal 0 to 9999 Lamp switch

1 word Hex 0 to FFFF (Hex) Lamp


BCD 0 to 9999
N state lamp
Unsigned decimal 0 to 99999999
2 word Hex 0 to FFFFFFFF (Hex) N state parts

BCD 0 to 99999999
cross-key

Function switch

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-15


8-2 Setting Switches

Set character string


Sets the character string to the specified target word device.

Item Description
Set the target word device to which character string data is to be set. Continuous word devices
starting from the target word device are used according to the number of characters to be set.
Target word device *1
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings"
8 UNICODE strings *2
window.
When this checkbox is marked, UNICODE character strings are supported.
Switch upper/lower The data of the upper and lower bytes of the character string to be set to the target word device
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

bytes are switch.


Set the character string to be set to the target word device. Use half-width characters (ASCII
code), full-width characters (shift JIS code) and UNICODE for the character string data. (Mixing of
Character string*2 half-width characters and full-width characters is possible). 64 half-width characters and 32 full-
width characters can be set as the number of characters. Write a null code (00H) at the end of the
character string data to delimit the character string.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Indirect reference/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 "About UNICODE", page 6-24

Point When a character string contains both half and full-width characters, consider one full-width
character as being the equivalent of two half-width characters. Up to 64 characters can be set
counting in half-width characters.

Number of Settable Number of Bytes Used Max. Number of


Character Codes
Characters for 1 Character Devices Used
Half-width characters
64 characters 1 byte 32 words
(ASCII code)
Full-width characters
32 characters 2 bytes (1 word) 32 words
(Shift JIS code)
64 half-width
64 words
UNICODE characters 2 bytes (1 word)
32 full-width characters 32 words

Example of character string data


Character string data is as follows when the switch upper/lower bytes checkbox is not marked. When this checkbox is
marked, the upper bytes of the target word device are switched with the lower bytes, and then the character string
data is set.

half-width characters are set as ASCII codes and full-width characters are set as Japanese shift JIS codes and
UNICODE.
Seven continuous word devices are used starting from the target word device in Example 1), ten continuous word
devices are used starting from the target word device in Example 2), and 13 continuous word devices are used
starting from the target word device in Example 3).

8-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-2 Setting Switches

Example 1) (9 half-width characters Example 2) high-grade touch panel


‫ޓ‬+ 2 full-width characters) (9 2-byte characters)
Uppermost Lowermost
Target word device + 0 㨌 (27H) 0 (30H) Target word device + 0 催 (8D82H)
Target word device + 1 2 (32H) / (2FH) Target word device + 1 ક (9569H)
Target word device + 2 0 (30H) 3 (33H) Target word device + 2 ԡ (88CAH)
Target word device + 3 / (2FH) 1 (31H) Target word device + 3 ࠲ (835EH)
Target word device + 4 5 (35H) (90Ƥ Target word device + 4 ࠶ (8362H)
Target word device + 5 Ƥ BBH) (91Ƥ Target word device + 5 ࠴ (8360H)
Target word device + 6 Ƥ A2H) (00H) Target word device + 6 ࡄ (8370H)
Target word device + 7 ࡀ (836CH)
Target word device + 8 ࡞ (838BH)
Target word device + 9 (0000H)

Null code
Example 3) entry of UNICODE (7 1-byte UNICODE characters
text strings‫ޓ‬
+ 5 2-byte characters)

Target word device + 0 U (0055H)


Target word device + 1 N (004EH)
Target word device + 2
Target word device + 3 C
I (0049H)
(0043H) 8
Target word device + 4 O (004FH)

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


Target word device + 5 D (0044H)
Target word device + 6 E (0045H)
Target word device + 7 ᭛ (6587H)
Target word device + 8 ᄫ (5B57H)
Target word device + 9 ߫ (5217H)
Target word device + 10 ܹ (5165H)
Target word device + 11 ࡯ (529BH)
Target word device + 12 (0000H)

Null code Styles and


Nameplates

Call up system screen Switch

Lamp switch
Touching a "Call up system screen" function switch to switch to the system mode screen.
But, the window display of device monitor and unit monitor is a Run mode screen, rather than a System mode screen. Lamp

• Device monitor screen (bit device monitor, word device monitor) N state lamp
"5-10 Monitoring", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
N state parts
• PLC Data Folder screen
cross-key
"5-12 PLC Data Folder", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Save record data to memory card screen Function switch

"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual


• Unit monitor screen
"5-10 Monitoring", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• operation log viewer
"5-8 Viewer", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Ladder monitor
"5-10 Monitoring", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Backup sensor settings/Recover sensor settings/Sensor monitor
"5-10 Monitoring", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-17


8-2 Setting Switches

The original page is redisplayed when the call up system screen is quit. However, the window state prior to switching
is not saved, but changed to initial state of that page. Also, Set "Do not close window during page switching" on
function controls by devices (global window display), and global windows that were displayed ON are turned OFF.
As call up system screens are not saved as a page switching log, pages are not returned to by switches to which the
"Previous page" page switching function is set to.

8
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

8-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-2 Setting Switches

Item Description
Select the types of system screens to be switched (device monitor/Ladder monitor/PLC data
Screen
folder/save data to memory card/unit monitor/operation log viewer/Ladder monitor).
Select the type (Bit device monitor/Word device monitor) of the device monitor to be switched
Monitor type
when "Screen" is set to "Device monitor".
PLC Select PLC when MultiTalk is used.
If this checkbox is marked when "Screen" is set to "Device monitoring", writing to devices
Write
after the Device monitor screen is switched to is inhibited.
protection
(Only monitoring of current values is possible.)
Device Monitor

Display After selection, device monitor is displayed in global window.


window Device monitor can be used in Run mode.
Global
Set global window ID (0 to 7).
window ID
Specify
window
After selection, global window is displayed in a specified position.
display
position
Set two numerical values for the X and Y coordinates (top left corner of window screen that is
(X, Y)=
displayed) in multiples of 16.
PLC Select the type (PLC to VT/VT to PLC) of PLC data folder screen to be switched when
Access type
Data "Screen" is set to "PLC data folder".
Folder PLC Select PLC when MultiTalk is used.
Save
record

8
When "screen" is "save record data to memory card", select the types of data to be saved
data to Data type
(alarm log/trend graph/operation log)
memory
card

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


PLC Select PLC when MultiTalk is used.
Write
Writing through unit monitor screen is inhibited (Only monitor of current values is possible.)
protection
Global Set global window ID(0 to 7).
window ID unit monitor can be used in Run mode.
Unit
monitor*1 Specify
window
After selection, global window is displayed in a specified position.
display
position
Set two numerical values for the X and Y coordinates (top left corner of window screen that is
(X, Y)=
displayed) in multiples of 16.
Operation log viewer
No setting item exists.
ladder monitor Styles and
Backup Nameplates
Display
sensor To select sensor display format (model/comments) .
format Switch
settings
Restore Lamp switch
Display
sensor To select sensor display format (model/comments) .
format
settings Lamp

Write
To select whether to start sensor monitor in the Read Only (write disabled) mode. N state lamp
disabled
Sensor
Display N state parts
monitor To select sensor display format (model/comments) .
format
cross-key
Display item To select sensor status as required. For example, error sensors can be displayed only.
Function switch
*1 The unit monitor can only be used when connected to KV-7000 Series, KV-5500/5000/3000 Series or
KV-1000/700 Series.
Moreover, it cannot be used as a sub-network of VT2 MultiLink.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-19


8-2 Setting Switches

The following considerations are required for window display of device monitor and unit monitor.
Point
• Follow the restrictions of global window.
• Maintain an ON state of window display after page switching.
• Unit monitor cannot be used by VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A/
W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).
• The device monitor and unit monitor can be displayed individually at the same time.

The following functions are disabled when displaying system mode screen under VT3.
(1) Monitoring of states of alarm detection devices (saving of alarm log)
(2) Capturing (sampling) data for trend graphics (real time) and XY charts (real time).
(3) Updating of system memory area (Reading of VT3->PLC, reading of PLC->VT3)
(4) Worksheets
(5) Device sending
(6) Data receiving/sending between PC (VTSTUDIO) and VT3
(7) Remote COM port tool
(8) Global function control
With (1) to (4) of the above functions, the functions are automatically resumed when display
of the system screen ends and the original page is redisplayed.

In addition, when displaying system mode screen under VT3, the expansion state (in VT
mode) and expansion display state (initial number+6, MT compatible mode) of system
memory area are in ON state.
• Device Monitor screen -> bit 0 (during display of the Device Monitor screen)
• PLC Data Folder screen -> bit 2 (during execution of the PLC data folder)
• Save data to memory card screen -> bit 1 (during display of the Save record data to
memory card screen)
8 • operation log viewer screen -> bit 4(operation log viewer screen in display)
• Backup sensor settings screen -> Bit 6 ("Backup sensor settings" screen is being displayed)
• Restore sensor settings screen -> Bit 7 ("Recover sensor settings" screen is being displayed)
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

• Sensor monitor screen -> Bit 8 ("Sensor monitor" screen is being displayed)
"Chapter 14 SYSTEM MEMORY AREA"

Switches set with "Call up system screen" do not function in the following instances:
• When using the simulator to communicate with the PC and VT3.
• When "Communications with PLC" is set to "OFF" in the VT3's System mode

Even if pressing the switch of “call up system screen”under the following operations, it ís
also switched to system mode screen.
After operation is completed, the call up system screen is automatically executed.
• During execution of printing (printing of hardcopy, form printing, alarm log)
• During video capture
• During saving to Memory Card and reading from Memory Card (saving of record data to
Memory Card, PLC data folder, etc.)
• When there is a part with a switch in an ON state (finger held down and not released from a
switch, lamp switch, key entry part) (including switch extension function OFF delay)
• When there is a switch (set momentary) (at a slow communications speed) for which OFF
has not been executed
• Record date (operation log, trend chart, alarm log) receive in progress
• Screen image receive in progress
"13-5 VT -> PC Receive Data", Page 13-21

Print
The following are operations after pressing functional switch of “execute printing”.
Settings under printer with VT system setting
Description
Printer Type Output target
ESC/P Raster Printer Hard copy the screen of VT3.
ESC/P Raster 2 Memory Card *1 Save VT3 screen to memory card in Windows bitmap files or JPEG file format.
LIPS IV Raster
PictBridge
ESC/P-R Ether*2 Printer/memory card Export to printer and memory card.
ESC/Page Ether*2
Press functional switch of “execute printing” from the screen placed with
Printer alarm display parts, and execute print-out of alarm log of alarm ID from
thermal printer "alarm log printing"
Thermal printer
VT3 screen isn’t saved to memory card since only form printing is
Memory Card *1
effectively set. Alarm logs, also, are not saved on Memory Card.
Printer/memory card Execute printer/memory card alarm log printing. Saving memory card is not executed.
*1 Screen saving format is set through the memory card set by VT system.
*2 This can be used only when the VT3 series and printer are connected via Ethernet.
The VT3 system program must be Ver. 4.81 or later.
8-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
8-2 Setting Switches

Reference "6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual


"6-5 Ethernet Unit", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"6-6 Printer Unit", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"Memory Card", page 12-25
"Printer", page 12-26
• Form printing
"11-5 Form Printing"
• Saving alarm logs on Memory Card
8
"Save log data to memory card", page 9-131

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


Point • Printer output can be performed by VT3 Series (excluding VT3-V7R/Q5M(W)/Q5M(W)A/
W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A)). However, the Printer Unit (VT2-P1/P2) or Ethernet Unit (VT2-E1/E2,
VT3-E3) is required.
• The "ESC/P-R Ether" and "ESC/Page Ether" printer types can only be used when the VT3
series and printer are connected via Ethernet. The VT3 system program must also be
Ver. 4.81 or later.
• For all models other than VT3-W4 Series, data can be stored in a memory card. Even if the
VT3-W4 Series is configured, the configuration will be disabled.
• When VT3 is used on a vertical screen, if bitmap files or JPEG files saved to memory card
by printing are opened in PC screen, they are changed into a screen after 90° rotation.

Styles and
Nameplates
GHIJKL
ABCDEF

123456

When the bitmap file is The image is displayed


saved to Memory Card rotated 90 deg. Switch
123456 by executing printing,
and the file is opened Lamp switch
ABCDEF on the PC screen
GHIJKL Lamp

N state lamp

N state parts

cross-key

VT3 unit PC
Function switch

Reference • Printing using system memory area


"Chapter 14 SYSTEM MEMORY AREA"
• Printing using function control by devices
"Print", page 9-126
• "12-7 Global Function Control"
• Confirming the bitmap file saved on Memory Card
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Outputting the alarm log from a thermal printer
"Printing Alarm Logs", page 9-98
• Calling up bitmaps saved into memory card to VT3 screen for display
"9-8 Setting BMP File Switching"
• Canceling printing by switches
"Stop print", page 8-22
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-21
8-2 Setting Switches

Stop print
Printing is canceled by touching a "Stop print" function switch during printing.

Point • "Stop print" function switches are valid for all of the following operations:
• "Print" using switches
• "Print" using function control by devices

8 • "Execute printing" using global function control


• "Print" using system memory area
• Form printing
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

• The operations are shown below after pressing the functional switch of ”stop printing”.
Settings under printer with VT
system setting Description
Printer Type Output target
Stop print-out of VT3 operation screen (hardcopy) or form
ESC/P Raster Printer screen. But, the form screen page or hardcopy being printed
ESC/P Raster 2 will still be printed.
LIPS IV Raster- Stop memory card saving of VT3 operation screen (hardcopy)
PictBridge Memory Card or form screen. But, the form screen page or hardcopy being
ESC/P-R Ether saved will still be saved.
ESC/Page Ether Printer/
Please refer to the description of “Printer”, “Memory card”.
Memory Card
Stop print-out of form screen or alarm log. But, the form
screen page or alarm log being printed will still be printed.
Printer With screens containing multiple alarm display parts, the
alarm log is printed in order of alarm IDs. However, when
printing is canceled, the currently printing alarm IDs are printed.
Thermal printer
Stop memory card saving of VT3 operation screen (hardcopy)
Memory Card or form screen. But, the form screen page or hardcopy being
saved will still be saved.
Printer/
Please refer to the description of “Printer”, “Memory card”.
Memory Card

8-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-2 Setting Switches

Video play/pause
Touching a "Video play/pause" function switch during video display to switch between play (moving image display)
and pause (still image display). Such a switch functions as a video PAUSE button.

Item Description
Select the video display channel for switching between video play display and pause display
Channel

"9-5 Setting Video Displays"


from "Video (channel 1)/Video (channel 2)/Video (channel 3)/Video (channel 4)/RGB".
8

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


Point Functions only available for VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8. Other models cannot bring such
functions into play even if configuration.
The Video Unit (VT3-VD4/VD1) is required.
"6-4 Video Unit", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

Reference • Video play/pause by function control by devices.


"Video play/pause", page 9-128
• "12-7 Global Function Control"

Video capture
Styles and
If pressing the functional switch of "video capture" during video display, the video display (images) will be saved to Nameplates

memory card in Windows bitmap files or JPEG file formats. Switch


The video display (images) can also be output using a printer that supports PictBridge, ESC/P-R or ESC/Page. In this
Lamp switch
case, they are not saved to a memory card.
Lamp
The output target of video capture is set through the video frequency settings of VT system.
N state lamp

N state parts

cross-key

Function switch

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-23


8-2 Setting Switches

Item Description
Select the video display channel for performing video capture from "Video (channel 1)/Video
Channel
(channel 2)/Video (channel 3)/Video (channel 4)/RGB".
File name settings Click the button to display the memory card setting screen of VT system.
Mode*4 Select captured images from "capture in display size, capture in initial size”*3
Display date *1 When this checkbox is marked, the date/time information is displayed on the captured image.
When this checkbox is marked, an image of placed parts also is displayed overlapped on the
Overlap parts video display area during video capture.
Setting is not allowed if selecting “capture in initial size” mode.
When this checkbox is marked, the color information of the image is converted to gray scale,
Gray scale *2
and the camera image is captured.
*1 "VT System Parameters", page 12-12
*2 VT3 models not displayed.
*3 The so-called initial size refers to maximum size that can be set in display area size of video display parts.
*4 VT2 models not displayed. VT2 models are captured in display size.

Point • Functions only available for VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8. Other models cannot bring such
functions into play even if configuration.
The Video Unit (VT3-VD4/VD1) is required.
"6-4 Video Unit", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Number of colors during video capture.
When “Overlap parts” is not selected : 260,000
8 When “Overlap parts” is selected
"9-5 Setting Video Displays"
: 65536

"6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual


SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

• A static picture displayed in VT3 can be captured by undertaking video capturing when the
Static Picture is selected by switching from the Dynamic Picture.
• When VT3 is used on a vertical screen, if bitmap files or JPEG files saved to memory card
by printing are opened in computer screen, they are changed into a screen after 90°
rotation.

When the bitmap file is The image is displayed


saved to Memory Card by rotated 90 deg.
video capture, and the file
is opened on the PC screen.

VT3 unit PC

• When a vertical screen is used on the VT3, part of the date/time display character string
may not fit in the captured image depending on the display area size of the video display
and the date/time display setting (VT system).
• If not selecting "overlap parts", video display parts, even if not at front, can also be
captured.
• If selecting "overlap parts", video display parts are changed below in the presence of other
overlapped video displays at front.
• Overlapped video display will be captured as parts.
• Overlapped video display is in pause state during capture process.

Reference • Video capture through device-based functional control.


"Video Capture", page 9-129
• "12-7 Global Function Control"
• Video capture trigger
"6-4 Video Unit", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Confirming video-captured bitmap file
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Calling up video-captured bitmap files saved on Memory Card and displaying them on VT3 screen
"9-8 Setting BMP File Switching"
8-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
8-2 Setting Switches

Video Console
Key functions on consoles such as Keyence Corporations image Sensor CV series can be set, and the same
operations as those on the console can be performed on the VT3 screen while monitoring the video display.
Video display
"9-5 Setting Video Displays"

Maker
Item Description
Selects the manufacturer from "Keyence/Omron/Panasonic Electric Works (MATSUSHITA
8
DENKO)".

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


Console function *1 Sets the console key functions.

*1
Maker Assignable Key Functions
Set from "Input (OK)""Return""Menu Switching""Trigger""Clear/
FNC""Up""Down""Left""Right""Top Left""Bottom Left""Upper Right""Lower
Keyence
Right""Operation Mode""Setup Mode""VIEW""MENU""Back Key (LOCK)""Clear/FNC
(LOCK)""Back Key".
Omron Set from "ESC/TRIG/ENT/Top/Bottom/Left/Right/SHIFT".
Panasonic Electric
Works Co. Ltd.
Set from "ENTER/A/B/C/Top/Bottom/Left/Right".
(MATSUSHITA DENKO
Corporation)
Styles and
Nameplates

Reference With a Panasonic Electric Works Co. Ltd. (MATSUSHITA DENKO Corporation) model, to set the switch
Switch
for the "Top left" key, for example, set two functions "Left" and "Top" to a single switch by adding
switch functions. Lamp switch

"Adding Switch Functions", page 8-33 Lamp

N state lamp
Point • About compatible models
"6-4 Video Unit", VT3 Series Hardware Manual N state parts

• For details on the console function, refer to the manual for the respective manufacturer. cross-key
• VT3 Functions only available for VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8. Other models cannot bring such
functions into play even if configuration. Function switch

Video unit (VT3-VD4/VD1


"6-4 Video Unit", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• CV switches to the Run mode in the following instances:
• When the "Run mode" switch is pressed
• When the VT3 mode is switched from the System mode to the Run mode

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-25


8-2 Setting Switches

Changes display character string


Changes to the display character string ID to which multiple character strings set to parts, etc.are set.
"11-6 Changing Display Text Strings"

Item Description
Display character
Selects the display character string ID from "0 to 7 Default".
string ID

Restart VT3
Resets the VT3 (to the state when the power is turned ON).

8
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

Key entry
Normally, the ten key-pad or keyboard currently registered to the Part catalog is used. The user can use this function
to create individual ten key-pads or keyboards.

Item Description
Select the part ("Numerical value display/Text display/Message display/Alarm display/Trend
Key entry destination
graph") to perform key entry to.
Key functions Set the key entry functions.
For details on key function, see the descriptions for each key entry destination below.

8-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-2 Setting Switches

When the key entry destination is a numerical value display


Key functions Description
Numerical values Sends numerical values within the range of 0 to 9 and A to F (Hex) .
Backspace (BS) Deletes the character before the cursor.
Delete (DEL) Deletes the character after the cursor.
When this switch is pressed with the numerical value display in an active state, the data
Copy (MS) currently being referenced by the numerical value display is copied to internal special devices
(MW0070 to MW007B).
When this switch is pressed with the numerical value display in an active state, the value of
Paste (MR)
internal special devices (MW0070 to MW007B) is keyed-in.
Clear all (AC) Deletes all. Operated results are also deleted.
Clear (CLR) Deletes all. Operated results are held.
Cancel (ESC) Cancels the numerical value display operation, and switches the mode.
Applies the numerical value (writes the numerical value to the target device), and switches the
Apply (ENT)
mode.
Switch sign (+/-) Switches the sign (+/-) of the numerical value.
Increments the numerical value of the numerical value display by 1. This function is not
Count up (+1)
available when the display data format of numerical value displays is Float.
Decrements the numerical value of the numerical value display by 1. This function isnot
Count down (-1)
available when the display data format of numerical value displays is Float.
Decimal point Sends the decimal point.
Calculator: Add (+) Functions as the “+” key on the calculator.
Calculator: Subtract (-) Functions as the “-” key on the calculator.
Calculator: Multiply (x)
Calculator: Divide (/)
Functions as the “x” key on the calculator.
Functions as the “/” key on the calculator. 8
Calculator: Remainder Calculates the remainder of division.

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


Calculator:End
Functions as the “=” key on the calculator.
operation (=)
Move cursor () Moves the cursor to the right.
Move cursor () Moves the cursor to the left.
Move entry Cancels the current numerical value display operation, and moves the operation to the key entry
destination(+1) part that has the next higher order in the key entry order.
Move entry Cancels the current numerical value display operation, and moves the operation to the key entry
destination(-1) part that has the next lower order in the key entry order.
Move entry destination When this switch is pressed with the key entry part in an active state, the previously active key
forward entry part becomes active.
Increments the numerical value of the numerical value display by one, and directly (without
Direct count up (+1) performing the apply operation) writes to the target device. This function is not available when
Styles and
the display data format of numerical value displays is Float.
Nameplates
Decrements the numerical value of the numerical value display by one, and directly (without
Direct count down (-1) performing the apply operation) writes to the target device. This function is not available when Switch
the display data format of numerical value displays is Float.
Lamp switch

Lamp
Reference When the MS (copy) switch is pressed, the key entry is converted to a UNICODE character string and
saved to VT internal special devices (MW0070 to MW007B). When the MR (paste) switch is pressed, N state lamp

the keyentry is automatically converted to a numerical value. N state parts

Numerical value display cross-key


Numerical value display
MS MR Function switch
12345 VT internal special device 12345

Memorized as UNICODE Automatically converted

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-27


8-2 Setting Switches

When the key entry destination is a text display


Key functions Description
Text Sends characters (half and full-width characters).
Backspace (BS) Deletes the character before the cursor.
Delete (DEL) Deletes the character after the cursor.
When this switch is pressed with the text display in an active state, the data currently being
Copy (MS)
referenced by the text display is copied to internal special devices (MW0080 to MW00BF).
When this switch is pressed with the text display in an active state, the value of internal special
Paste (MR)
devices (MW0080 toMW00BF) is keyed-in.
Clear (CLR) Deletes all.
Cancel (ESC) Cancels the numerical value display operation, and switches the mode.
CAPS Switch upper/lower case English letter
Apply (ENT) Applies the numerical value (writes the numerical value to the target device), and switches the mode.
Switch Kanji
conversion mode. Switches to the Kanji conversion mode.
(Kana input)
Switch Kanji
conversion mode Switches to the Kanji conversion mode.
(English input)
Move cursor (->) Moves the cursor to the right.
Move cursor (<-) Moves the cursor to the left.
Within the number of texts range of the text display part, the cursor moves to the right. If no text
Free cursor move (->)
is entered at the moving destination, a half-width space will be stored.

8 Move entry
destination(+1)
Move entry
Cancels the current text display operation, and moves the operation to the key entry part that
has the next higher orderin the key entry order.
Cancels the current text display operation, and moves the operation to the key entry part that
destination(-1) has the next lower orderin the key entry order.
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

Move entry destination When this touch switch is pressed with the key entry part in an active state, the previously
forward active key entry part becomes active.

Reference When the MS (copy) switch is pressed, the key entry is saved in UNICODE to VT internal special
devices (MW0080 to MW00BF). When the MR (paste) switch is pressed and the copy destination is
set to ASCII/Shift JIS, the key entry is automatically converted to ASCII/Shift JIS.

Text display VT internal special device Text display


MS MR
X X X X X X X X X X X X

ASCII/Shift JIS UNICODE MR ASCII/Shift JIS

Text display
Memorized as
UNICODE Automatically
X X X X
converted

UNICODE

When the key entry destination is a message display


Key functions Description
Cancel Cancels the message display operation, and switches the mode.
Apply Writes the line No. of the cursor position to the notify word device.
Scroll up () Scrolls the display in the message display up.
Scroll down () Scrolls the display in the message display down.
Page up () Scrolls the display in the message display one page up.
Page down () Scrolls the display in the message display one page down.
Move entry Cancels the current message display operation, and moves the operation to the key entry part
destination(+1) that has the next higher order in the key entry order.
Move entry Cancels the current message display operation, and moves the operation to the key entry part
destination(-1) that has the next lower order in the key entry order.
Move entry destination When this switch is pressed with the key entry part in an active state, the previously active key
forward entry part becomes active.

8-28 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-2 Setting Switches

When the key entry destination is an alarm display


Key functions Description
Delete 1 line Deletes the currently selected alarm log.
Clear all Deletes all alarm logs.
Clear all identical alarms Deletes all alarm logs having the same alarm No.
Cancel Cancels the alarm display operation, and switches the mode.
Writes the alarm No. of the cursor position to the notify word device. When a function control by
Apply apply is set, the content set in the "Option setting mode" in the alarm system settings is
executed.
Confirm Confirms the currently selected alarm log, and stores the confirmed date and time.
When the display direction is set to "Up"->"Down", the cursor is moved to the top most line.
Home jump
When the display direction isset to "Down"->"Up", the cursor is moved to the bottom most line.
When the display direction is set to "Up"->"Down", the cursor is moved to the bottom most line.
End jump
When the display directionis set to "Down"->"Up", the cursor is moved to the top most line.
Previous alarm Moves the cursor to the previous alarm.
Next alarm Moves the cursor to the next alarm.
Scroll up () Scrolls the display in the alarm display up.
Scroll down () Scrolls the display in the alarm display down.
Page up () Scrolls the display in the alarm display one page up.
Page down () Scrolls the display in the alarm display one page down.
Move entry Cancels the current alarm display operation, and moves the operation to the key entry part that
destination(+1) has the next higher order in the key entry order.
Move entry Cancels the current alarm display operation, and moves the operation to the key entry part that
destination(-1)
Move entry destination
has the next lower order in the key entry order.
When this switch is pressed with the key entry part in an active state, the previously active key 8
forward entry part becomes active.

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


When the key entry destination is a trend graph
Key functions Description
Clear all Clear (delete) the stored trend graph, XY graph data.
Stop Stop temporarily data access (sampling).
Start SRestart data access (sampling) after stopping temporarily data access (sampling).
Apply*1 Writes the cursor information to the target word device.
Cancel*1 Stop the operation and switching modes through trend graph parts.
Extend time axis*1 Enlarge time axis through trend graph parts (real-time).
Compress time axis*1 Shrink time axis through trend graph parts (real-time).
Scroll forward*1 Scroll the screen in the deviation direction. Styles and
Nameplates
Scroll back*1 Scroll the screen to the direction opposite to the deviation direction.
Page scroll forward*1 Scroll the page in the deviation direction. Switch

Page scroll back*1 Scroll the page to the direction opposite to the deviation direction. Lamp switch
Move cursor forward *1 Moves the cursor in the deviation direction.
Lamp
Move cursor back*1 Moves the cursor to the direction opposite to the deviation direction.
Move entry Terminate the current trend chart part or XY chart part, and move to the key entry part with the N state lamp
destination(+1) key entry order being increased by 1.
N state parts
Terminate the current trend chart part or XY chart part, and move to the key entry part with the
Move entry destination(-1)
key entry order being decreased by 1. cross-key
Move entry destination When this switch is pressed with the key entry part in an active state, the previously active key
forward entry part becomes active. Function switch

*1 No function is brought into play for XY graph parts.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-29


8-2 Setting Switches

VNC key switch


VNC key switch is used to create a ten-key pad or a key board for key-entry in the VNC display screen (VNC server).
Normally, the VNC ten-key pad and VNC key board registered in the part catalog can be used.
"Part Catalog", page 5-2

8
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

Item Description
VNC No. To set up the VNC server No. (0 to 3) for key entry.
To set up key-entry functions ("Character/Esc/F1 to F12/Home/End/Insert
/Delete/full-width/Half-width/BackSpace/Tab/Enter/PageUp
/PageDown/////PrintScreen/Left SHIFT ON
Key function
/Left SHIFT OFF/Left CTRL ON/Left CTRL OFF/Left ALT ON
/Left ALT OFF/Right SHIFT ON/Right SHIFT OFF
/Right CTRL ON/Right CTRL OFF/Right ALT ON/Right ALT OFF").
To specify the characters that can be entered when "Character" is selected as the key function.
Character
(Available characters are 0x20 to 0x7E in the ASCII code).

Point When there is no VNC display part on the screen, no entry will be possible even if VNC key
switch is touched.

8-30 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-2 Setting Switches

Extended command communication


Extended command communication function enables reference device to support more communication commands
through reference device setting.
For example, you can set up multiple parameter value commands by one sent command and read multiple parameter
value commands from one received command.

Point Only PLC models that support extended command communication can be used.
VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC Connection Manual

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


Item Description
Switch ON To display the communication command when switch is ON.
Switch OFF To display the communication command when switch is OFF.
Add To add new command.
Delete To delete the command of selected row.
Settings To set up the command of selected row.
Styles and
/ To change the executing sequence of selected commands.
Nameplates

Switch
Point • Extended command communication function will be executed in the sequence of request
receiving. Lamp switch

• If the following extended command communication request is received, the next Lamp
communication cycle will be executed after the current extended command
communication is completed. N state lamp

• Up to 8 requests can be received. N state parts


• The functions like page switching, window switching, system screen calling, PLC data
folder execution, language switching, and data transfer, accompanied with screen cross-key

switching, will be executed after the current extended command communication is


Function switch
completed.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-31


8-2 Setting Switches

8
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

Item Description
Communication time To specify the communication time of released command (switch ON, switch OFF).
To specify an target PLC.
PLC/Station No.
Enabled only for Multitalk or PLC model whose station No. is setup.
Command To select a command to be released.
Send To display send parameters.
Receive To display receiving parameters.
No. To display parameter No.
Parameter To display parameter name.
To display setting data. Double click to select "Numeric value", "PLC device", or "Indirect
reference". If "PLC device" or "Indirect reference" is selected, the specified device value will be
Data sent as part of the command and the received command is saved in a specified device.
"6-7 Setting of Devices", Page 6-37
"6-8 Indirect Reference", Page 6-43
Min value To display min settable value.
Max value To display max settable value.
To assign device or indirect reference in successive number to parameter of selected row. This
Assign successive No.
is possible only when device is set up to "PLC device" or "Indirect reference".

Reference • For command details, refer to VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC Connection Manual.
• Extended command communication of function control by devices
"Extended command communication", page 9-138

8-32 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-2 Setting Switches

Adding Switch Functions


Switches are added each time that the "Add" button on the "Switch" window is clicked. Up to 16 switches can be added.
When a switch is pressed, preset switch functions are executed in order from the top.
Set the execution order at "Parts" under "VT system settings" on the "System Settings" tab in the workspace. When
"Process in preset function order" is selected at "When multiple functions are set" at "Switches/Lamp Switch Parts",
execution is basically from the top down. Fully check the execution order on an actual unit.
"Parts", page 12-21

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


Reference List of switch functions
"Setting Switches", page 8-9

Switch function restrictions


Color in Setting
Switch functions Description
Window
Multiple functions can be set. Functions are executed in
Set bit, set word
the order that they are set. Note, however, that the final Green
Set digits, set character strings
result is written to the PLC's device.
Key entry, VNC key switch, Video Multiple functions can be set. Functions are executed
Green Styles and
console successively in the order that they are set.
Nameplates
Page switching, display local window,
display global window, execute print, Switch
Only one function can be set. Other switch functions can
terminate print, restart VT3 , video play/
not be added after these functions have been set as Yellow
pause, video capture, system screen Lamp switch
these functions are always executed last of all.
calling, changing display character string,
Lamp
extended command communication.
N state lamp

Reference When setting multiple switch functions (making radio buttons)


N state parts
Radio buttons: Only one of multiple switches can be turned ON.
Set as follows to make a radio button (switch) that sets (turns ON) only one of internal relays 1000 cross-key

(M0), 1100 (M10) and 1200 (M20) on the PLC by the bit set function. Function switch
Set the switch setting for setting the internal relay to switch 3 to be executed last.

Setting 1 Setting 2 Setting 3

Internal relay Only 1000 Only 1100 Only 1200


(M0) is set. (M10) is set. (M20) is set.

Correct setting
Switch Setting Switch of "Setting 1" Switch of "Setting 2" Switch of "Setting 3"
Switches 1 1100 (M10) reset 1000 (M0) reset 1000 (M0) reset
Switches 2 1200 (M20) reset 1200 (M20) reset 1100 (M10) reset
Switches 3 1000 (M0) set 1100 (M10) set 1200 (M20) set

Set the switch setting for setting the internal relay to switch 3 to be executed last.
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-33
8-2 Setting Switches

Wrong setting
Switch Setting Switch of "Setting 1" Switch of "Setting 2" Switch of "Setting 3"
Switches 1 1000 (M0) set 1000 (M0) reset 1000 (M0) reset
Switches 2 1100 (M10) reset 1100 (M10) set 1100 (M10) reset
Switches 3 1200 (M20) reset 1200 (M20) reset 1200 (M20) set

When switches are set as shown in the above table, and internal relay 1100 (M10) or 1200 (M20) is ON
when switch of “setting 1” is pressed, setting of internal relay 1000 (M0) is executed before these internal
relays are reset. For this reason, a state occurs in which two or more internal relays in 1000 (M0) and 1100
(M10) or 1200 (M20) are simultaneously ON.

Reference When writing to PLC data memory by the word set function
Successive arithmetic operation is not performed even if multiple switch functions for writing to the
same device are set.

Successive processing in order "setting of numerical value '1000'" followed by "addition of numerical
value '200'" is not executed even if data setting (set data ="1000") is set to switch 1 and data addition
(set data = "200") is set to switch 2, and the switches are pressed. For this reason, numerical value
"1200" is not written tothe word device.
In this case, as addition of numerical value "200" is the latter processing in the execution sequence,
the numerical value obtained by adding "200" to the original value of the data memory is written to the

8
word device.
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

8-34 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-2 Setting Switches

Setting Extended Functions


Sets extended functions for switches.

Item Description
Disables switch operation when the inhibit bit device is ON (OFF when the mode is set to B contact).
Interlock
Even if the switch is touched, the buzzer does not sound, and the image is at the setting of touch switch
OFF. When the inhibit bit device is ON (OFF when the mode is set to B contact) after a touch switch is
touched, regular switch OFF processing is performed when the touch switch is released.
8
Interlock

Inhibit bit Set the bit device on which switch operation is inhibited when the "Interlock" checkbox is marked.

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Set the mode in which the inhibit bit device is referenced.
A contact : Inhibits switch operation when the inhibit bit device is ON, and enables switch operation
Mode when the inhibit bit device is OFF.
B contact : Inhibits switch operation when the inhibit bit device is OFF, and enables switch
operation when the inhibit bit device is ON.
Switch operation is enabled when a touch switch is touched for the time set at "Delay time" or
longer. If the touch switch is released before it is enabled, switch operation is disabled, the buzzer
does not sound, and the image is at the setting for when the touch switch OFF.
ON delay

ON delay If the "Press twice" checkbox is marked, the ON delay is enabled when the touch switch is first
touched. The ON delay does not function when the touch switch is touched the second time.
If the "Interlock" checkbox is marked, switch operations are disabled when the inhibit bit device turns ON
(OFF when the mode is set to the B contact) during the ON delay after the touch switch is touched.
Delay time Set ON delay time in 0.5s (0.5 to 15.0s). Styles and
Nameplates
Set the time that switch operation continues for after the touch switch is released. Operation is the
same during the OFF delay when the touch switch is continuously touched. The display image Switch
during operation is at the setting when the touch switch is ON.
When the touch switch is touched during the OFF delay time, the OFF delay operation is performed Lamp switch
again for the delay time from when the touch switch is next released.
When page switching or window display (ON/OFF) is performed during the OFF delay time, the
OFF delay

Lamp
OFF delay OFF delay operation is continued, and page switching or window display operation is performed
after the OFF delay ends. N state lamp
If the "Interlock" checkbox is marked, regular switch OFF processingis performed after the delay
time has elapsed when the inhibit bit device turns ON (OFF when the mode is set to B contact) N state parts
during the OFF delay.
When the "Press twice" checkbox is marked, the OFF delay operation is performed after the touch cross-key
switch is released after it is touched for the second time.
Function switch
Delay time Set OFF delay time in 0.5s (0.5 to 15.0s).
Switch operation is enabled when the touch switch is touched two times continuously. Switch
operation is enabled when the switch is touched during the time set at "Acceptable time".
During the acceptable time, the display image is displayed blinking and in a hatched state.
Press twice

The wait state is canceled when another touch switch is touched duringthe acceptable time.
Press twice
Operation is reset when the touch switch is not touched during the acceptable time.
The wait time is cancelled when page switching or window display (ON/OFF) operation is
performed during the acceptable time.
When the "Interlock" checkbox is marked, the state of the inhibit bit deviceis referenced.
Acceptable Set the acceptable time for when the "Press twice" checkbox is marked in 0.5 second increments
time within the range 0.0 to 15.0 seconds (start time) through 0.5 to 30.0 seconds (end time).
Inhibit Set this item to prevent simultaneous operation with other switches. Other switches are disabled for the duration
simultaneous that a touch switch is pressed, and this switch is disabled for the duration that other switches are pressed.
pressing To enable "Inhibit simultaneous pressing", "2-touch switch" must be set to"Enabled" in the VT system settings.
Buzzer OFF On VT3 system, the buzzer is disabled when touching switch parts.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-35
8-3 Setting Lamp Switch

Setting Lamp Switches


Parts(P) -> Switches/Lamps(S) -> Lamp switch(S)

Set lamp switches in the "Lamp Switch" window.


Display the "Lamp Switch" window by one of the following methods:
• By double-clicking the lamp switch
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu
• By clicking the button
• By selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)" from right-click menu

8
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

Item Description
Switch bit Set the bit device targeted for switch control.
device*1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Set the mode for controlling bit devices.
Set momentary : Sets (turns ON) switch bit devices only for the duration that touch switches
are touched. (The device is turned OFF when the touch switch is released.)
Reverse bit : Reverses the ON/OFF state of switch bit devices when the touch switch
is turned ON by being touched. (The state is also held after the touch
Switch

Switch mode switch is released.)


Set : Sets (turns ON) switch bit devices when the touch switch is turned ON
by being touched. (The state is also held after the touch switch is
released.)
Reset : Sets (turns OFF) switch bit devices when the touch switch is turned OFF by
being touched. (The state is also held after the touch switch is released.)
Disable control of the switch bit device when additional switch functions have been set.
Disabled
Mark this checkbox to initially disable control of switch bit devices by pressing the lamp switch.
same as switch
When this checkbox is marked, the lamp bit device becomes the same as the switch bit device.
bit device.
Set the reference bit device for lamp display.
Lamp bit device *2
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Lamp

Set the mode for referencing lamp bit devices.


A contact: Turns the lamp display ON when the lamp bit device is ON, and OFF when the lamp
Mode bit device is OFF.
B contact: Turns the lamp display OFF when the lamp bit device is ON, and ON when the lamp
bit device is OFF.
Blinks the lamp switch display when the lamp bit device is ON (OFF when lamp mode is set to B
Blink by Bit
contact) and the blink bit device is ON (OFF when mode is set to B contact).
Set the reference bit device for blink display. Click the "Browse" button.
Blink bit device*1
Set through "device setting" window.
Blink

Set the mode for referencing blink bit devices.


A contact: Lamp switch blinks when BLINK bit device is ON.
Mode and the lamp switch does not blink when the blink bit device is OFF.
B contact: lamp switch blink displays when BLINK bit device is OFF.
and the lamp switch does not blink when the blink bit device is ON.
Add Adds a switch function.
Delete Delete a switch function.
Up/Down Changes the switch function execution order.

8-36 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-3 Setting Lamp Switch

Item Description
Change to lamp/switch*3 Converts "Lamp switches->Lamps" or "Lamp switches->Switches".
Lamp switches are automatically assigned the label "Ls_****" as the default. Correct this label
Label
as necessary. (“****” is the creation number. A number starting from 0000 is appended. )
*1 Selectable from "PLC device/Indirect reference/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 Selectable from "PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*3 Part settings, styles and labels sometimes are changed.

Adding Switch Functions


Up to 15 switch functions can be added to lamp switches. A switch is added with each click of the "Add" button in the
"Lamp switch" window, enabling addition of switch functions.
When a lamp switch is pressed, the preset switch functions assigned to the switch are executed in order after control
of the switch bit device is performed.
"List of switch functions", page 8-10
Details of switch functions
"8-2 Setting Switches"

Switch function restrictions 8


"Switch function restrictions", page 8-33

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


Reference "Adding Switch Functions", page 8-33

Setting Extended Functions


Sets extended functions for lamp switches.
Details of extended functions
"Setting Extended Functions", page 8-35

Styles and
Nameplates

Switch

Lamp switch

Lamp

N state lamp

N state parts

cross-key

Function switch

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-37


8-4 Setting Lamps

Setting Lamps
Parts(P) -> Switches/Lamps(S) -> Lamp switch(L)

Set lamps in the "Lamp" window.


Display the "Lamp" window by one of the following methods:
• By double-clicking the lamp
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu
• By clicking the button
• By selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)" from right-click menu

8
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

Item Description
Set the reference bit device for lamp display.
Lamp bit device*1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings"
window.
Lamp

Set the mode for referencing lamp bit devices.


A contact: Turns the lamp display ON when the lamp bit device is ON, and OFF when the lamp
Mode bit device is OFF.
B contact: Turns the lamp display OFF when the lamp bit device is ON, and ON when the lamp
bit device is OFF.
Blink by Bit Blinks the lamp display when the lamp bit device is ON (OFF when lamp mode is set to B
contact) and the blink bit device is ON (OFF when lamp mode is set to B contact).
Set the reference bit device that performs blinking.
Blink bit device*2 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings"
window.
Blink

Set the mode for referencing blink bit devices.


A contact: Lamp blinks when the blink bit device is ON
Mode and lamp does not blink when the device is OFF.
B contact: Lamps blinks when the blink bit device is OFF
The lamp does not blink when BLINK bit device is ON.
Change to Lamp switch*3 Converts "Lamp->Lamp switch".
Lamps are automatically assigned the label "Lp_****" as the default.
Label Correct this label as necessary. (“****“ is the creation number. A number starting from 0000 is
appended. )
*1 Selectable from "PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 Selectable from "PLC device /Indirect reference/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*3 Part settings, styles and labels sometimes are changed.

8-38 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-5 Setting of N State Lamp

Setting of N state lamp


Parts(P) -> Switches/Lamps(S) -> N state lamp(N)

Set N state lamps in the "N state lamp" window.


Display the "N state lamp" window by one of the following methods:
• Double-click N state lamp
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu
• By clicking the button
• By selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)" from right-click menu

Item Description
8
Number of states Set the number (1 to 16) of states in which the N state lamp changes.

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


Bit device : The display changes corresponding to the state of each bit of the reference
device. The display is used continuously for the number set to "Number of
Specify mode states".
Word device : The display changes according to the numerical value stored to the
reference device.
Set the reference device for the N state lamp.
Reference device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings"
window.
Set the mode for referencing the reference device when the "Specify mode" is set to bit device.
A contact : Displays the specified state when each bit of the reference device is ON (other bits are
Mode OFF).
B contact : Displays the specified state when each bit of the reference device is OFF (other bits
are ON).
Styles and
Select the data format of the reference device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD" when the "Specify
Data Format Nameplates
mode" is set to word device.
Specify the display mode when the value of the reference device exceeds the"Number of Switch
states" range with "Specify mode" set to word device and when all reference devices
Lamp switch
Processing out of corresponding to each state are OFF (all ON when the lamp mode is set to
specified range B contact) when "Specify mode" is set to bit device.
Lamp
Display image of state 0 : Displays state 0 image.
Not display : Images are not displayed. N state lamp
N state lamps are automatically assigned the label "NsL_****" as the default.
Label Correct this label as necessary. (“****” is the creation number. A number starting from 0000 is N state parts
appended. )
cross-key
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"
Function switch
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-39


8-5 Setting of N State Lamp

[Example] When the "Number of states" is set to 3

Specify mode: Bit device


Reference device: PLC relay 1000
Lamp mode: A contact

Relay 1000 turns ON ‫ޓޓޓ‬State 0 is displayed.

Relay 1001 turns ON ‫ޓޓޓ‬State 1 is displayed.

Relay 1002 turns ON ‫ޓޓޓ‬State 2 is displayed.

Point • When relays 1000 to 1002 are all OFF, the display becomes that set at "Processing out of
8 specified range".
• When two or more relays (1000 to 1002) are ON, the state corresponding to the relay having
the smallest relay number of the ON relays is displayed.
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

• Relays from relay number 1003 onwards are not used as reference devices for N state
lamps.

Specify mode: Word device


Reference device: PLC data memory DM1000

DM1000㧩0‫ޓޓޓޓޓ‬State 0 ‫ޓ‬is displayed.

DM1000㧩1 ‫ޓޓޓޓ‬State 1 is displayed.

DM1000㧩2‫ޓޓޓޓ‬State 2 is displayed.

Point When DM1000 is a numerical value outside of the range 0 to 2, the display becomes that set at
"Processing out of specified range".

8-40 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-6 Setting N State Parts
N state parts are parts whose display can be swapped to multiple (1 to 16) states matched to changes in the state of
the reference device. The following parts can be swapped:
• With switches and lamps, lamp switches, lamps and switches are swapped.
• With key entry parts, numerical value displays and text displays are swapped.

Point Key entry parts cannot be combined with switches/lamps when setting an N state part.

Setting N State Parts


Parts(P) -> Switches/Lamps(S) -> N state parts(P)

Set N state parts in the "N state parts" window.


Display the "N state parts" window by one of the following methods:
• Double-click the N state part.
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu
• By clicking the button
• By selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)" from right-click menu

Settings
8

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


Styles and
Nameplates

Switch

Lamp switch

Item Description Lamp

Number of states Set the number (1 to 16) of states in which the N state part changes. N state lamp
Bit device : The display changes corresponding to the state of each bit of the reference device.
The display is used continuously for the number set to "Number of states". N state parts
Specify mode
Word device : The display changes according to the numerical value stored to the
cross-key
reference device.
Set the reference device for the N state lamp.
Reference device*1 Function switch
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Set the mode for referencing the reference device when the "Specify mode" is set to bit device.
Mode A contact : Displays the specified state when each bit of the reference device is ON (other bits are OFF).
B contact : Displays the specified state when each bit of the reference device is OFF (other bits are ON).
Select the data format of the reference device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD" when the "Specify
Data Format
mode" is set to word device.
Specify the “specify mode” to bit device when all reference bit devices of various states are in
OFF (all in ON in the case of B contact mode). Specify the “specify mode” to word device when
Processing out of
the values of all reference bit devices exceed the range o f”number of states”
specified range
Display parts of state 0 : The part of state 0 is displayed.
No display : Not displayed.
Labels "NsP_****" on N state parts are automatically assigned with initial value.
Label
Correct this label as necessary. (“****” is the creation number. A number starting from 0000 is appended. )

*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-41


8-6 Setting N State Parts

State

Set the parts for each state of the N state part.

Item Description

8 Parts type
State
Select the type of part from "Switch/Lamp" or "Numerical/Text display".
Displays the state No.
When "Parts type" is set to Switch/Lamp:
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

Select from "Lamp switch/Lamp/Switch".


Parts
When "Parts type" is set to Numerical/Text display:
Select from "Numerical disp./Text disp.".
Sets each part selected by respective state No. Clicking the "Settings" button displays the
Setting*1
setting window for the part.
Up/Down Swaps the top/bottom parts.
Copy Copies the settings of the selected state No.
Paste Pastes the settings of the copied state No. to the selected state No.

*1 For details on setting methods, refer to the description for each part.

Point Switch/Lamp
• The position of parts that are displayed and the size of parts are common in all states.
• The switch area cannot be changed for individual states.
• Parts are not swapped even if a part swap occurs while a switch is held down. Parts are
swapped after you release your finger from the switch.
• When an OFF delay is set by a switch extended function, parts are not swapped even if a part
swap occurs while the OFF delay is being executed. Parts are swapped after the OFF delay is
completed.
• Parts are swapped when a part swap occurs during an interlock, ON delay, simultaneous
pressing (between the 1st and 2nd switch press) by a switch extended function.

Reference "Setting Extended Functions", page 8-35

Point Numerical/Text display


• N state parts become the same size as the largest size part that is displayed.
• The position (top left corner) of parts that are displayed is common in all states.
• The switch area cannot be changed for individual states.
• When a part is swapped in the Active mode, the new swapped part inherits the Active
mode.
• When a part is swapped in the Active mode, the Input mode is canceled, and the new
swapped part inherits the Active mode.
• The extremely small font can’t be used for image font.
• Font and screen frame are universally used in all states.

Reference "Key Entry Part Modes", page 6-10

8-42 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-6 Setting N State Parts

Setting styles and nameplates


This Section describes how to set styles and nameplates for switches and lamps in each state when switches/lamps
is selected as the part type.

1 Click the N state parts to display the "Property" window.

2 Set the style and nameplate to each state number.

Item Description 8
State(S) Displays and sets the No. of the state currently being edited.

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


Clicking the "Set number of states" button to displays the "N state parts" window , so that you can set the number of
Set number of states(E)
states.

How to set styles and nameplates


"8-1 Setting Styles and Nameplates"

[Example] When the "Number of states" is set to 3


Specify mode: Bit device
Reference device: Relay 1000 of PLC device
Mode: A contact
Parts type: Switch/Lamp
Styles and
When the following is set:
Nameplates

Switch

Lamp switch

Lamp

N state lamp

N state parts

cross-key

Function switch

Relay 1000 ON the par t(switch) of state 0 is displayed.


Relay 1001 ON the par t(lamp switch) of state 1 is displayed.
Relay 1002 in ON the part(lamp) of state 2 is displayed.

• When relays 1000 to 1002 are all OFF, the display becomes that set at "Processing
Point
out of specified range".
• When two or more relays (1000 to 1002) are ON, the state corresponding to the
relay having the smallest relay number of the ON relays is displayed.
• Relays from relay number 1003 onwards are not used as reference devices for N
state parts.
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-43
8-6 Setting N State Parts

S
[Example] When the "Number of states" is set to 3
Specify mode: Word device
Reference device: PLC devices data memory DM1000
Parts type: Numerical/Text display
When the following is set:

DM1000 = 0 The part (numerical value display) of state NO. 0 is displayed. 1234

8 DM1000 = 1 The part (text display) of state NO. 1 is displayed.


DM1000 = 2 The part (numerical value display) of state NO. 2 is displayed.
ABCD
6789
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

Point When DM1000 is a numerical value out of the range 0 to 2, the display becomes that
set at "Processing out of specified range".

8-44 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


8-7 Setting of Cross-key (only for VT3-V7R)
If cross-key is placed on VT3-V7R screen, ON/OFF of bit device, page switching and OF/OFF of window display can
be executed by pressing cross-key buttons, as in the same case of switches on touch panel.

Setting of cross-key
Parts(P) -> Switch/lamp(S) -> Cross-key(C)

Set cross-key through "Cross-key" window.


"Cross-key" window is displayed in either of the following ways.
• Double-click cross-key.
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu
• By clicking the button
• By selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)" from right-click menu

SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS


Item Description
Top, bottom, left and right The setting window can be displayed to set functions by clicking buttons in a single operation.
Labels "Ck_****" are automatically assigned on cross-key in the form of initial value. Correct this
Label
label as necessary. (“****” is the creation number. A number starting from 0000 is appended. )

Point • The cross-keys are only available with functions of VT3-V7R. They’re not operated in other
models.
• Only a single cross-key is placed separately on screen (base, window 1, 2, 3 and global
window).
Only a single cross-key functions even if multiple cross-keys are placed.
• Please place Cross-key in the display frame of edit window.
• Cross-key is not displayed in VT3 system. Styles and
Nameplates

Switch

Settings of top, bottom, left and right buttons Lamp switch

Lamp

N state lamp

N state parts

cross-key

Function switch

Execute setting using “add”, “delete”, "up" and "down" buttons. Switch functions can be set separately on top, bottom,
left and right buttons.
For the settable switch functions, refer to the overview of "8-2 Setting Switches". The switch functions can be
added up to 16, but no expansion functions can be set.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 8-45


8-8 Function Switch Settings (Only for Handy Series)
Once function switches are configured in the VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G) screen, you can click the buttons, just like touch
panel switches, to set ON/OFF of bit device and window display, as well as to switch screen.

Reference • To assign functions common to all pages, please set up with the "Global function switch".
• Function switch settings of basic parts have a priority higher than global function switch settings.
"12-14 Global Function Switch (Only for Handy Series)", Page 12-62

Function switch settings


Part(P) -> Switch/Lamp(S) -> Function switch(F)

The following means are available to display the "Function switch" window.

• Double click the function switch part .

• Select the part, then select "Edit(E)" -> "Part attribute settings(S)" from the menu.
• Select the part and then click the button.
• Select the part, then select "Part attribute settings(S)" from the right-click menu.

8
SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS

Item Description
Set up ON/OFF function of each function switch.
Settings The functions to be set is the same as the switch part.
"8-2 Setting Switches", Page 8-9
System settings To display the "Global function switch" in the system settings.

Reference F1, F2, F5, and F6 can also be used for external output.

Point No functionswitch is displayed in VT3. In case this is not configured in the display
frame of VT3, no data can be sent to VT3.

8-46 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9
SETTING BASIC PARTS
This chapter describes how to set numerical value displays, text displays, and
other basic parts.

9
9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-2

SETTING BASIC PARTS


9-2 Setting Text Displays •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-17
9-3 Setting Message Displays•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-36
9-4 Setting Alarm Displays •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-54
9-5 Setting Video Displays •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 9-99
9-6 Setting Animation Display •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••9-102
9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices •••••••••••••••• 9-111
9-8 Setting BMP File Switching •••••••••••••••••••••••••••9-140
9-9 VNC Display Settings ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••9-144

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-1


9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays

Setting Numerical Value Displays


Parts(P) -> Basic parts(P) -> Numerical value display(N)

Set numerical value displays in the “Numerical value display” window.


Display the “Numerical value display” window by one of the following methods:
• Double-click the numerical value display.
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menm
• By clicking the button
• By opening the menu by clicking the right mouse button, and selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)"

Setting

9
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Item Description
Set the word device to be targeted for numerical value display.
Reference word device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Select the data length of the target word device from "1 word/2 words". When "2
Data length words" is set, use two continuous word devices. Of the data formats, "Signed decimal"
is handled in 2's complement format.
Select the data format of the reference word device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Hex/Float*2. Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's
complement format.
Set the number of digits (1 to 12 digits) of numerical values to be displayed. When the
Number of display digits data format is set to "Signed decimal", add one extra digit for the sign. To display the
decimal point, add one extra digit for the decimal point.
Set the position (0 to 12 digits) where the decimal point is inserted referenced to the
Decimal point position *3
lowermost digit. To not insert a decimal point, set "0".
When zero suppress (below) is set to "ON", select the direction that display shifts from
Shift display
"Shift to right/Shift to left".
Zero suppress When this checkbox is marked, unwanted zeros are no longer displayed.
When this checkbox is marked, "+" is displayed for plus numbers in the numerical
Display +
value display.
After selected, prefix and suffix (half-width 16 characters) are shown in numerical
Prefix/suffix
value display.
Prefix/suffix
This item is displayed when image font is selected.
Setting *10
"Image font" window is displayed.

9-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays

Item Description
Style Select the style to be used for display from "Basic/image frame".
Frame color *4 Select the frame color.
When this checkbox is marked, the frame color is set to transparent. With this setting,
Hide frame
the drawing speed slows down.
Frame² Background

Background color *4 Select the background color.


When this checkbox is marked, the background color is set to transparent. In the Input
Transparent mode, the background color becomes the color set as the background color. With this
setting, the drawing speed slows down.
Color Select the color system of image frame.
If selecting "Free style" when image frame is used, it's possible to change the display
Free style
images in display mode/entry mode and lower alarm limit/upper alarm limit.
When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image" window is
Change*9
displayed.
Cursor color Set the cursor color when image frame is used.
Text color*4 Selects the text color.
Bold Sets the numerical value display text to bold.
Shadow Gives numerical value display text a shadow so that it has a 3D effect.
Text
Decorati Engraved Gives numerical value display text a shadow so that it looks engraved.
on Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
Text shadow
decoration.
dolor *4
The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK*4
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Select the fonts to be used for display from "bitmap font/stroke font/image font/
Font *6
Text

Windows font/Extremely small font".

Style
This item is displayed when image font is selected.
Select the style of image font. 9
Color Selects the color.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Advanced *10 "Image font" window is displayed.
This item is displayed when Windows font is selected. The fonts to be used in graphics
List of available fonts
data are displayed in the list. Select the fonts to be used.
The fonts not specified in the font list can be set.
Font settings After font type and size are set in "Select font" window, the fonts will be added to the
list of available fonts.
Character type Select the font to be used for display from "Narrow/Wide/7-segment *5.
When this checkbox is marked, the entered numerical value is written to the write word
Specify write device
device not the reference word device.
Sets the write word device.
Specify write device

Write word device *7 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device Numerical Value
settings" window. Display

Data length Select the data length of write word devices from "1 word/2 words."
Text Display
Select the data format of the write word device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Message
Data Format decimal/BCD/Hex/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's Display
complement format.
Alarm Display
Arithmetic When this checkbox is marked, the value entered on the numeric keypad is calculated
Calculati operations according to the "Calculation formula" and the result is written to the write word device.
ons *8 Video Display
Expression Set the calculation formula in the "Device setting" window.
Animation
Numerical value displays are automatically assigned the label "N_****" as the default. Display
Label Correct this label as necessary. ("****" is the creation number. A number starting from Function Controls
0000 is appended.) Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-3


9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays

*1 Selectable from "PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation (writing)/Cell".


"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 When float (real numbers) of eight digits or more is keyed-in, numerical values pastthe 8th digit are discarded.
The effective number of digits for a float (real numbers) is seven.

[Example] When number of display digits = 10 and Decimal point position = 9


1.23456789 is displayed on VT3 as. 1 .2 3 4 5 6 7 0 0

This is discarded.

"1.234567" is written to the PLC.

[Example] When number of display digits = 12 and Decimal point position = 11

0.0123456789 is displayed on VT3 as.


0.0123456700

This is discarded.

"0.01234567" is written to the PLC.

[Example] When number of display digits = 12


123456789012 is displayed on VT3 as.
123456700000

This is discarded.

"123456700000" is written to the PLC.


9 [Example] When number of display digits = 4 and Decimal point position = 2
When "1.23" is keyed-in, 1.2 is displayed on VT3.
SETTING BASIC PARTS

(The numerical values of parts that are not displayed are discarded even if adecimal point that
exceeds the number of displayed digits is entered.)
"1.2" is written to the PLC.

*3 [Example] When Number of display digits = 6 and Decimal point position = 4

12. 345

4th digit (The decimal point is displayed at the


4th digit from the lowermost digit.)
6 digits including the decimal point are displayed. (5 numbers are displayed.)

[Example] When Number of display digits = 5 and Decimal point position = 2

123. 4

2nd digit (The decimal point is displayed at the


2nd digit from the lowermost digit.)

5 digits including the decimal point are displayed. (4 numbers are displayed.)

*4 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2


*5 When the "7-segment" checkbox is marked, the display changes to that shown below on the right.
Common display 7-segment display

Point Only 2-byte fonts are used for "7-segment".

*6 "6-4 About Fonts"


*7 Selectable from "PLC device /Indirect reference/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*8 "6-9 Calculation"
*9 For the details, refer to "Change the style of image frame", page 9-5
9-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays

*10 For the details, refer to "About image font", page 9-6

Reference • To set "Shift to right" at "Shift display" on the "Settings" tab and also display numerical values that
are entered on the numerical keypad in the Input mode shifted to the right
Numerical value displays/Text display parts
"Parts", page 12-21
• When underflow of floating point real number is treated as 0
Numerical value display parts
"Parts", page 12-21

Change the style of image frame


If selecting "Free style" and clicking “Change” button, "select free style image" window is displayed. It’s possible to
change separately the display images in display mode/entry mode and lower alarm limit/upper alarm limit.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


When the "Select from file" checkbox is marked
Specify the Windows bitmap file or JPEG file, and specify the display image.
When the "Select" button is clicked, the "Open image" window is displayed.

Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Item Description Function Controls
Device
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to open.
BMP File
File Name(N) Select the name of the file to open. Switching
File of type(T) Select the type of file. VNC Display
Settings
When this checkbox is marked, the color information of image files is converted to a gray scale
Gray scale(G)
image.
When this checkbox is marked, the image is dithered. Dithering is used to make the boundary
Dithering(D)
between colors stand out when reduction to the VT3's display color (32768) is performed.
Specifies the width (in dots (0 to 32)) of the area that is not enlarged or reduced as the frame
Frame width(F)
when the image is resized.
If you click this button, a preview of the image after reduction to the VT3's display color (32768),
After conversion
dithering, and gray scale processing is displayed.
Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently. This can be
Move(M)
easily moved to the location saving the current part.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-5


9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays

When the "Select from style" checkbox is marked


Select and specify display images from image frame installed into VT STUDIO.

Item Description
Style Selects the style.
Color Selects the color.
Display style Click to select the display image.

Changing the style image


Click “Parts Designer” button, and start the style creation software "Parts Designer". The style can be created easily
by using Windowsí bitmap (BMP) files and JPEG files.
"11-7 Active Edit"

About image font


If selecting "image font" and clicking “Expansion setting” button, "image font" window is displayed. It’s possible to
change separately the numerical display images in common mode/lower alarm limit/upper alarm limit,
or set prefix and suffix when using image fonts.

9
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Item Description
State Select state from "common mode/lower alarm limit/upper alarm limit".
Style Selects the style.
Color Selects the color.
After selection, it's possible to specify Windows bitmap files and JPEG files of every numerical
Free style
image.
Display currently displayed numerical images. Select numerical images to be changed in the
Numerical image
case of free style.
In the "open image" window, specify Windows bitmap files and JPEG files in prefix and suffix
images.
File Change
In the case of free style, specify Windows bitmap files and JPEG files in selected numerical
images.
Prefix and suffix display
Set the size of digits displaying prefix and suffix during numerical value display.
size
Parts Designer *1 Start Parts Designer and create digital images.
*1 "11-7 Active Edit"

9-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays

Change numerical images


Select "free style" and the numerical images to be changed.
Click "Change file" button, and open "open images" window.

Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to be opened.
File name(N) Select the name of the file to be opened.
Files of type(T) Select the type of file.
Gray scale(G) When this checkbox is marked, the color information of image files is converted to a gray scale image.
When this checkbox is marked, the image is dithered. Dithering is used to make the boundary
Dithering(D)
between colors stand out when reduction to the VT3's display color (32768) is performed.
If you click this button, a preview of the image after reduction to the VT3's display color (32768),
After conversion

Move(M)
dithering, and gray scale processing is displayed.
Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
9

SETTING BASIC PARTS


 Minimum Font
When "Minimum font" is selected, an Minimum font with fixed 6 x 4 dots can be set.

Point • The Minimum font is fixed as 6 x 4 pixels. Size can not be changed.
• Prefix and suffix cannot be set. If necessary, please configure outline text or bitmap text.

Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-7


9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays

Range/Alarm

Set the input and display ranges of numerical values, and alarm ranges.

The following table shows the setting ranges for the lower limit values/upper limit values of the input range, display
range and alarm range.

9
Data length Display format Setting Range
Unsigned decimal 0 to 65535
Signed decimal -32768 to 32767
1 word
SETTING BASIC PARTS

BCD 0 to 9999
Hex 0 to FFFF
Unsigned decimal 0 to 4294967295
Signed decimal -2147483648 to 2147483647
2 word BCD 0 to 99999999
Hex 0 to FFFFFFFF
Float real number -3.40282347X1038 to 3.40282347X1038

Point The max. number of digits (including decimal point and signs) is 12 when displaying float
(real numbers) on numerical value displays.

9-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays

Item Description
Set the input range (lower limit value/upper limit value) of numerical values to
Lower limit be displayed as numerical values.
value *4 Velue : Set a constant as the input range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
Input range *1
PLC device/Indirect reference/caculation/cell
Upper limit : The alarm range can be changed by setting a PLC device/indirect reference/
value *4 calculation/cell tothe alarm range (lower limit value/upper limitvalue).
When this checkbox is marked, the display range (lower limit value/upper imit
value) of the numerical values to be displayed on the VT3 can be set. When
Display range the display range is set, the values of the reference word device are
converted for display on the VT3. If not selecting this item, the value of
Display range *2 reference word device isnít converted, and displayed by entry range.
Range*3

Value : Set a constant as display range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
Lower limit value*4
PLC device/Indirect reference/Cell
: The display range can be changed by setting the PLC device/indirect reference/
Upper limit value*4 calculation/cell as the display range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
When this checkbox is marked, the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit
value) can be set. When the value of the reference word device exceeds the
Alarm range
alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value), the alarm can be displayed
(text color changed or made to blink) on the VT3.
Alarm range
Value : Set a constant as alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
Lower limit value*4
PLC device/Indirect reference/Cell
: The alarm range can be changed by setting the PLC device/indirect reference/
Upper limit value*4 calculation/cell as the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
Select the frame color of the alarm display. The settings are the same as "Text color".
Frame color *6
This item cannot be selected when the Hide frame checkbox is marked on the "Settings" tab.
Select the background color of the alarm display. The settings are the same as "Text color".
Background color *6
This item cannot be selected when the Transparent checkbox is marked on the "Settings" tab.
Text color *6 Selects the text color.
Bold
Shadow
Sets the text of the alarm display to bold.
Gives the text of the alarm display a shadow so that it has a 3D effect. so that it has a 3D effect.
9
Alarm Color*5

Text Decoration

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Engraved Gives the text of the alarm display a shadow so that it has a 3D effect. so that it looks engraved.
Text shadow Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
color *6 The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK*6
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Color Set the color of image frame for alarm display.
Image frame This item is displayed when selecting free style in "Setting" tab. "Select free
Change*7
style image" window is displayed after clicking.
Style Set the type of image font for alarm display.
Image font Color Set the color of image text for alarm display.
Advanced*8 "Image font" window is displayed. Numerical Value
Display

*1 [Example] When the input range was set to Lower limit value = 10 and Upper limit value = 100 Text Display

Message
When 100 is exceeded, the numerical value Display

Numerical value of reference word device 0 ···· 10 ···· 50 ···· 100 ···· indicated on the VT3 becomes +++ (blinking). Alarm Display

Numerical value display on the VT3 --- --- 10 ···· 50 ···· 100 +++ When the value is below 10, the numerical value Video Display
indicated on the VT3 becomes --- (blinking).
Animation
Display
Function Controls
*2 [Example] When the input range is set to Lower limit value = 10 and Upper limit value = 100, and display Device

range is set to Lower limit value = 100 and Upper limit value = 1000 BMP File
Switching
10 100 VNC Display
Input range Settings

Conversion
Display range
100 1000

When 100 is exceeded, the numerical value


Numerical value of reference word device 0 ···· 10 ···· 50 ···· 100 ···· indicated on the VT3 becomes +++ (blinking).

Numerical value display on the VT3 --- --- 100 ···· 500 ···· 1000 +++ When the value is below 10, the numerical value
indicated on the VT3 becomes --- (blinking).

*3 For details on the setting range in the range setting, see page 9-8.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-9


9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays

*4 Selectable from "Numerical constant/PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*5 The alarm color can be set for each of the alarm lower limit and alarm upper limit.
*6 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*7 For the details, refer to "Change the style of image frame", page 9-5
*8 For the details, refer to "About image font", page 9-6

Point Other than numerical values are displayed via the numerical value display in the following
instances:
"OVERFLOW" /" UNDERFLOW":
• When a value exceeding the input range is entered on the numeric keypad
• When a value exceeding the display range is entered on the numeric keypad when the display range is
set
• When the result of calculation on the calculator exceeds the number of display digits
• "- - - - - - - -":
• For example, when the value of the device on the PLC is 10000 and the number of display digits on the VT3 is
4
• When the calculation result exceeds the range of the data format for the numerical value
display
• When the cell values exceeds the range of the data format for the numerical value display
• "ERROR":
• When an error occurs in the write calculation by entry on a numerical value (for example,
when an attempt has been made to divide by 0)
• When an entry is made on the numeric keypad when the same value is set to the upper and
lower limit values of the display range

9
• When the entered numerical value exceeds the number of display digits
• When "Paste (MR)" (key input switch) is executed on a numerical value display having a
different (either HEX display, or difference other than HEX display) data format
• When the number of digits of the numerical value to be pasted exceeds the number of
SETTING BASIC PARTS

display digits during a "Paste (MR)" operation

Reference The input range and display range on the VT1 are as follows:

[Example] When the input range was set to Lower limit value = 10 and Upper limit value = 100

Numerical value of reference word device 0 ···· 10 ···· 50 ···· 100 ····
Numerical value display on the VT 10 10 10 ···· 50 ···· 100 100

When the value is below 10, the numrical When 100 is exceeded, the numrical value
value indicated on the VT remains at 10. indicated on the VT remains at 100.

[Example] When the input range is set to Lower limit value = 10 and Upper limit value = 100, and
display range is set to Lower limit value = 100 and Upper limit value = 1000

10 100
Input range
Conversion
Display range
100 1000

The numerical values of the target word devices are displayed on the VT multiplied by 10X.

Numerical value of reference word device 0 ···· 10 ···· 50 ···· 100 ····
Numerical value display on the VT 100 100 100 ···· 500 ···· 1000 1000

When the value is below 10, the numrical When 100 is exceeded, the numrical value
value indicated on the VT remains at 100. indicated on the VT remains at 1000.

An alarm is displayed when the calculated numerical values exceed the alarm range (lower limit value/
upper limit value).
9-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays

Key entry

Sets key entries.

Item Description
Key entry *1 ,2 When this checkbox is marked, key entry parts are set.
Set the key entry order when there are multiple key entry parts on the
Key entry order *1
screen.
Key entry Select by switch *1

Select by switch and


When this checkbox is marked, display of each window is turned ON
When the "Settings" button is clicked, the "Window to display" window is
displayed. When the "Settings" button is clicked, the "Window to display"
9
display window*2 window is displayed so that you can set the window whose display is to be

SETTING BASIC PARTS


turned ON.
Enable changes to If enabled bit device is On (OFF) after selection, the value can be changed
settings by numeric keypad.
Set the enabled bit device.
Enabled bit device*3 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in
Enable changes the "Device settings" window.
to settings *2 Set the mode for referencing enabled bit devices.
A contact : Numerical values can be changed by the numeric keypad
Mode when the enabled bit device is ON.
B contact : Numerical values can be changed by the numeric keypad
when the enabled bit device is OFF. Numerical Value
Notify changes to When this checkbox is marked, the PLC is notified of any changes to the Display
settings numerical values.
Text Display
Sets the notified bit device.
Notify changes Notified bit device *3 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in Message
to settings *2 the "Device settings" window. Display

Reset notifybit before Alarm Display


When sending "notify changes to settings" after selection, execute setting
execution
again after resetting the notified bit device. Video Display

Animation
*1 "6-3 Key Entry Parts" Display

*2 For details of each item, refer to the descriptions that follow. Function Controls
Device
*3 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell" BMP File
Switching
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
VNC Display
Settings

Reference Key repeat


"Other", page 12-31

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-11


9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays

Key entry
When the "Key entry" checkbox is marked, the numerical value display becomes a key entry part, and numerical
values can be entered on the numeric keypad.
If a number is entered on the numeric keypad to a numerical value display in the Active mode, and the "Enter" key
entry switch is touched, the entered numerical value is written to the reference word device.
When using write word devices, the entered numerical value (calculation result when using calculations) is written to
the write word device when the "Enter" key entry switch is touched.
Key entry part mode, key entry order, selection by switch
"6-3 Key Entry Parts"

Frame blinks (Active mode) Cursor blinks (Entry mode) Frame blinks (Active mode)

777 1234 1234

CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER

END END END

Select the numerical value Enter the number. Touching "Enter" writes
indication. the numerical value.

Numerical value of Numerical value of Numerical value of


reference word device reference word device reference word device

9
777 777 1234

Reference • To set "Shift to right" at "Shift display" on the "Settings" tab and also display numerical values that
SETTING BASIC PARTS

are entered on the numerical keypad in the Input mode shifted to the right
Numerical value displays/Text display parts
"Parts", page 12-21
• Return to display mode if no input value is confirmed.
Numerical value display parts
"Parts", page 12-21

Enable changes to settings


When the "Enable changes to settings" checkbox is marked, changes to numerical values using the numeric keypad
are enabled only when the enabled bit device turns ON (OFF).
When the enabled bit device turns OFF (ON), the numerical value display in the Active mode switches to the "Display
mode" and numerical values cannot be entered on the numeric keypad.

Frame blinks (Active mode) Frame does not blink (Display mode)

777 777

CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER

END END

Numerical values cannot be entered.

Mode Enabled bit device


ON
ON
A contact
OFF OFF

ON ON
B contact
OFF
OFF
9-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays

Notify changes to settings


When the "Notify changes to settings" checkbox is marked, the PLC can be notified when a numerical value is
changed.
Once a numerical value is entered to a numerical value display in the Active mode, and the "Enter" key entry switch is
touched, the numerical value is written to the reference (write) word device and the notified bit device is set.

Frame blinks (Active mode) Cursor blinks (Entry mode) Frame blinks (Active mode)

777 1234 1234

CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER

END END END

Select the numerical value Enter the numerical value. Touching "Enter" writes the
indication. numerical value and sets the
notified bit device.

Notified bit device


ON
ON

OFF The device is set when "Enter"


OFF OFF
is touched.

Numerical value of
reference word device
Numerical value of
reference word device
Numerical value of
reference word device
9

SETTING BASIC PARTS


777 777 1234

Point The notified bit device is set (state changed from OFF to ON) after numerical values are
written. With VT3, a reset (ON -> OFF) is not performed, so perform the reset (ON -> OFF) in
the PLC ladder program.
If "Reset notifybit before execution" is used, the notified bit device can be reset before
sending "notify changes to settings" on VT3.

Numerical Value
Reset notifybit before execution Display

The time chart is shown below. Text Display

Message
Display

Confirm execution Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
Notified bit device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

Reference word device

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-13


9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays

Select by switch and display window


When the "Settings" button under "Select by switch and display window" on the "Key entry" tab is clicked, the
"Window to display" window is displayed so that you can set the window to display.

Item Description
Select the window to display from "Auxiliary system numerical keyboard/Local window/
Window to display
Global window".
When the auxiliary system numerical keyboard is selected in "Window to display",
Operation when it is
operation can be selected from "Follow the VT system setting/OK + Close window/OK +
determined *2
Move input object (+1)/only OK".
When Local window is selected at "Window to display", the respective window whose
Window 1 to 3
checkbox is marked is targeted for display ON.

9 Global window ID
Global window No.
When Global window is selected at "Window to display", select the global window ID (0 to 7).
Select the global window No. to display.
Specify window display When this checkbox is marked, the window is displayed at the specified position when the
SETTING BASIC PARTS

position *1 window (local, global) display is ON.


Set two numerical values of X-coordinate and Y-coordinate (upper left corner on the window
(X, Y) =
screen displayed) by 16 multiplying factor.
*1 This item cannot be set when multiple checkboxes are marked in "Windows 1 to 3."

Point • Global windows sometimes cannot be displayed due to restrictions in the number of
devices, screen data size, number of key entry parts, overlapping data, and other factors.
To display multiple global windows simultaneously, thoroughly check operation on an
actual working unit.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"
• Global window Nofity error
"Other", page 12-31

9-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays

 Auxiliary system numerical keyboard


When the auxiliary system numerical keyboard is used, even if the window for displaying the auxiliary numerical keyboard is not
created on the VT STUDIO, the auxiliary numerical keyboard will also be displayed automatically when a numerical value is touched.

Display the value stored in the selected numerical value display part.
Dispaly the input range of selected numerical value display part.

When the auxiliary system numerical keyboard is used, operation can be selected from "Follow the VT system
setting/OK + Close window/OK + Move input object (+1)/only OK" when numerical value is determined.
"8-2 Setting Switches", Page 8-9
"12-4 VT System Parameters", Page 12-12

• By default, the auxiliary system numerical keyboard will use the global window ID7.
Point
"12-4 VT System Parameters", Page 12-12
• When the auxiliary system numerical keyboard is used, the display position will be
adjusted automatically when "Window display position" is not specified.
• When "Key input moving" is executed using the auxiliary system numerical keyboard, even 9
if the data format (unsigned BIN/signed BIN/BCD/HEX) of the numerical display component
is different, the auxiliary system numerical keyboard will not be changed.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


• When "Key input destination moving" is executed using the auxiliary system numerical
keyboard, the display position of the auxiliary system numerical keyboard will be fixed at
the original display position.
• The screen data that using the auxiliary system numerical keyboard cannot be saved as a
.vs2/.vu2 file.
• Auxiliary system numerical keyboard will automatically OFF under following circumstances.
• When key input destination does not exist
• When a component other than the numerical display component (text display
component, alarm display component, etc.) is activated
• When the window with configured numerical value display calling the auxiliary system
numerical keyboard is first closed Numerical Value
Display
"12-4 VT System Parameters", Page 12-12
Text Display
Preview
Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

Item Description
The numerical value display is previewed according to entered value.
Display value In addition, when closing the setting dialogue box by pressing "OK" button, the numerical value
is displayed on edit screen as in the preview display.
Reset Reset as a value for starting configuration.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-15


9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays

Internal Annotation of Float (real numbers)


Float (real numbers) conform to IEEE standard format, and values in the following range can be handled:
-3.40282347x1038n3.40282347 X 1038
(number of effective digits is 7)

To be more precise, the precision of float (real numbers) is 32-bit single-precision, and the number of effective digits
is as follows:
• Mantissa: (24 bits)
• Indicator: 8 bits (2- 126 to 2127)

The float (real numbers) value is a numerical value annotated as follows:

1. x2

Sign Mantissa Characteristic

Sign Characteristic Mantissa


bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 bit

9 Sign (1 bit)
0= Plus
SETTING BASIC PARTS

1= Minus

Characteristic (8 bits)

00000000(00H) = Unused
00000001(01H) = -126
00000010(02H) = -125
00000011(03H) = -124

01111110(7EH) = -1
01111111(7FH) = 0
10000000(80H) = 1
10000001(81H) = 2

11111100(FCH) = 125
11111101(FDH) = 126
11111110(FEH) = 127
11111111(FFH) = Unused

Mantissa (23 bits)


0 to 8388607

Point The maximum number of digits (including decimal point and signs) is 12 when displaying
float (real numbers) on numerical value displays.

9-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-2 Setting Text Displays

Setting Text Displays


Parts(P) -> Basic parts(P) -> Text display(S)

Set text displays in the "Text display" window.


Display the "Text display" window by one of the following methods:
• Double-click the numerical text display.
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By opening the menu by clicking the right mouse button, and selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)"

Setting

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Item Description
Set the reference word device to be targeted for text display. Numerical Value
The number of displayed word devices are used continuously starting from the Display
Reference word device *1 reference word device you set here.
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the Text Display
"Device settings" window.
Message
UNICODE strings When this checkbox is marked, UNICODE text strings are supported. Display
When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper and lower bytes of the text
Swap upper/lower bytes Alarm Display
string to be stored to the reference word device are swapped.
Set the number of digits (1 to 64) in the text string to be displayed. Set 1-byte characters Video Display
(ASCII code, UNICODE) to be equal to the number of characters to be displayed. Set 2-
Animation
Number of display digits byte characters (ASCII/shift JIS code, UNICODE) to be 2X the number of characters to Display
be displayed. When 1-byte characters and 2-byte characters are to be mixed, set to Function Controls
"number of 1-byte characters + number of 2- byte characters x 2". Device
Shift display Select the display shift direction from "Shift to right/Shift to left". BMP File
Switching
Style Select the style to be used for display from "Basic/image frame".
VNC Display
Frame color *3 Select the frame color. Settings

When this checkbox is marked, the frame color is set to transparent. With this
Hide frame
setting, the drawing speed slows down.
Frame\Background

Background color *3 Select the background color.


When this checkbox is marked, the background color is set to transparent. In the
Transparent Input mode, the background color becomes the color set as the background color.
With this setting, the drawing speed slows down.
Color Select the color system of image frame.
If selecting "Free style" when image frame is used, itís possible to change the
Free style
display images in display mode/entry mode and lower alarm limit/upper alarm limit.
Change*5 When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image" window is displayed.
Cursor color Set the cursor color when image frame is used.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-17


9-2 Setting Text Displays

Item Description
Text color*3 Selects the text color.
Bold Sets the text in text display to bold.
Shadow Gives text in text display a shadow so that it has a 3D effect.
Text
Decoration Engraved Gives text in text display a shadow so that it looks engraved.
Text shadow Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as
dolor *3 the text decoration.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The
BLK*3
part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Text Select the fonts to be used for display from "bitmap font/stroke font/image font/
Fonts *2
Windows font".
This item is displayed when Windows font is selected. The fonts to be used in
List of available fonts
graphics data are displayed in the list. Select the fonts to be used.
The fonts not specified in the font list can be set.
Font setting After font type and size are set in "Select font" window, the fonts will be added
to the list of available fonts.
Registered characters ID Select logon text ID.
After clicking, the text converted to Windows font logs onto edit window. Log on
Registered characters *6
the text to be used in text display.
Display entered characters with * After selection, the entered text is displayed as*.
Specify text color

When this checkbox is marked, the text color can be changed by writing the
Specify text color by device
RGB values to the target word device.
by device*4

Sets the target word device.


Target word device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
"Device settings" window.
9 When this checkbox is marked, the entered numerical value is written to the
Specify write

Specify write word device


word device

write word device not the reference word device.


SETTING BASIC PARTS

Sets the write word device.


Write word device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
"Device settings" window.
Text displays are automatically assigned the label "S_****" as the default.
Label Correct this label as necessary. (**** is the creation number. A number starting
from 0000 is appended.)
*1 Selectable fromº×PLC device/Indirect reference/Cellº±.
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 "6-4 About Fonts"
*3 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*4 "About Specifying Text Color by Device", page 9-28
*5 For the details, refer to "Change the style of image frame", page 9-19
*6 For the details, refer to "12-5 Windows Font"

9-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-2 Setting Text Displays

Change the style of image frame


If selecting “Free style” and clicking “change” button, "select free style image" window is displayed. Itís possible to
change separately the display images in display mode/entry mode and lower alarm limit/upper alarm limit.

When the "Select from file" checkbox is marked


Specify the Windows bitmap file or JPEG file, and specify the display image.
When the "Select" button is clicked, the "Open image" window is displayed.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to open.
File Name(N) Select the name of the file to open.
File of type(T) Select the type of file.
When this checkbox is marked, the color information of image files is converted to a gray scale Numerical Value
Gray scale(G)
image. Display
When this checkbox is marked, the image is dithered. Dithering is used to make the boundary
Dithering(D) Text Display
between colors stand out when reduction to the VT3's display color (32768) is performed.
Specifies the width (in dots (0 to 32)) of the area that is not enlarged or reduced as the frame Message
Frame width(F) Display
when the image is resized.
Alarm Display
If you click this button, a preview of the image after reduction to the VT3's display color (32768),
After conversion
dithering, and gray scale processing is displayed.
Video Display
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.
Animation
Display
Function Controls
When the "Select from style" checkbox is marked Device
BMP File
Select and specify display images from image frame installed into VT STUDIO. Switching
VNC Display
Item Description Settings
Style Selects the style.
Color Selects the color.
Display style Click to select the display image.

Changing the style image


Click “Parts Designer” button, and start the style creation software "Parts Designer". The style can be created easily
by using Windowsí bitmap (BMP) files and JPEG files.
"11-7 Active Edit"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-19


9-2 Setting Text Displays

Key/Barcode entry

Sets key and barcode entry.

Item Description
Communication with PLC is executed only one time during
9 Read only once when whiching pages *1
page switching, and the text display is updated. The display
contents are not updated since communication with PLC is
no longer executed.
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Key entry When this checkbox is marked, key entry parts are set.
*3 Set the key entry order when there are multiple key entry
Key entry order
parts on the screen.
When this checkbox is marked, key entry is enabled by
Select by switch *3
touching text displays.
When clicking text display after selection, the display of
windows will be opened. When the "Settings" button is
Select by switch and display window *4
clicked, the "Window to display" window is displayed so that
you can set the window whose display is to be turned ON.
Key entry *2
When this checkbox is marked, text data can be entered
Barcode entry
from the Barcode Reader.
When this checkbox is marked, entry from the Barcode
Auto apply
Reader can be automatically applied.
Barcode
entry *2 After auto applied, set
When barcode entry is confirmed automatically after
the following key entry
selection, the next key entry parts will be in active mode.
parts to activated
Barcode offset entry *6 The data acquired from barcode will be displayed from
offset after starting offset according to set byte data.
When this checkbox is marked, text can be changed by the
Enable changes to settings keyboard or barcode entry only when the enabled bit
device is ON (OFF).
Set the enabled bit device.
Enable Enabled bit device *5 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit
changes to device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
settings *2 Set the mode for referencing enabled bit devices.
A contact : Text can be changed by keyboard or barcode
Mode entry when the enabled bit device is ON.
B contact : Text can be changed by keyboard or barcode
entry when the enabled bit device is OFF.
When this checkbox is marked, the PLC is notified of any
Notify changes to settings
changes to the text.
Sets the notified bit device.
Notify changes
Notified bit device *5 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit
to settings *2
device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
When sending "notify changes to settings" after selection,
Reset notifybit before execution
execute setting again after resetting the notified bit device.

9-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-2 Setting Text Displays

*1 When text is displayed on window, read only one time if window display is ON.
After this item is set, "Key entry", "Enable changes to settings" and "Notify changes to settings" cannot be
selected.
This item cannot be set if indirect reference is set in reference word device.
*2 For details of each item, refer to the descriptions that follow.
*3 "6-3 Key Entry Parts"
*4 "Select by switch and display window", page 9-14
*5 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*6 The data acquired from barcode is saved into linking device(LNW00C2 to LNW10C1). LNW00C2 starts offset
according to set byte data, and displays the text from the offset.
"Link Device", page 6-36

Example of offset at 3 bytes

LNW00C2 LNW00C3 LNW00C4

Linking device A B C D E F

Text display D E F 9

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Reference • Numerical value displays/Text display parts
"Parts", page 12-21
• Key repeat
"Other", page 12-31

Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-21


9-2 Setting Text Displays

Key entry
When the "Key entry" checkbox is marked, the numerical value display becomes a key entry part, and text can be
entered on the numeric keypad.
If text is entered on the keyboard to a text display in the Active mode, and the "Enter" key entry switch is touched, the
codes of entered text are written to the reference word device as ASCII code (when 1-byte characters are entered),
shift JIS code (when 2-byte characters are entered) or UNICODE (when 1-byte or 2-byte characters are entered).
When using write word devices, the entered text code is written to the write word device when the "Enter" key entry
switch is touched.
Key entry part mode, key entry order, selection by switch
"6-3 Key Entry Parts"

Frame blinks (Active mode) Cursor blinks (Entry mode) Frame blinks (Active mode)

TOKYO OSAKA OSAKA

Q W E R T Y U I O P Q W E R T Y U I O P Q W E R T Y U I O P

A S D F G H J K L A S D F G H J K L A S D F G H J K L
CA Z X C V B N M ĘĖ CA Z X C V B N M ĘĖ CA Z X C V B N M ĘĖ
PS PS PS
BS DEL ĕė SPACE Cancel OK BS DEL ĕė SPACE Cancel OK BS DEL ĕė SPACE Cancel OK

Select text display. Enter character from keyboard. Touching "Enter" writes
the character codes.
1-byte character (ASCII code) screen example
The example below is for when the "Swap upper/lower bytes" button is not marked. The resulting text string data
9 after the upper and lower bytes are swapped is stored to the reference word device when "Swap upper/lower bytes"
button is marked.
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Reference word device Reference word device Reference word device

Uppermost Lowermost Uppermost Lowermost Uppermost Lowermost


n+0 T (54H) O (4FH) n+0 T (54H) O (4FH) n+0 O (4FH) S (53H)
n+1 K (4BH) Y (59H) n+1 K (4BH) Y (59H) n+1 A (41H) K (4BH)
n+2 O (4FH) (00H) n+2 O (4FH) (00H) n+2 A (41H) (00H)

* (* * H)

Display data Input data

n is the leading number set to the target word device.

Point The Active mode remains even if the "Enter" key entry switch is pressed in the Active mode.
To change to the Display mode when the "Enter" key entry switch is pressed in the Active
mode, set in the VT system settings.
"Parts", page 12-21

9-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-2 Setting Text Displays

Barcode entry
After selecting "Barcode entry", the barcode data read by barcode reader connected on PORT3 of VT3 can be
directly entered into text display.
It’s also possible to enter texts from keyboard to the text display after selecting "Barcode entry".
Barcode entry is also possible when text displays are in the Active mode. Barcodes cannot be entered when text
displays are in the Display mode. Either mark the "Key entry parts (initially active)" checkbox in the "Screen attribute
settings" window, or switch the mode by the touch switch, or switch the mode by the PLC device to switch text display
to the Active mode before entering the barcode.
The data acquired from barcode is saved into linking device (LNW)(data is saved no matter if text display parts exist).
Displayed on VT3 according to the set text display.
Write to reference word device by clicking "OK" key entry switch, or by "Auto apply".

VT3

Text display
ABCDEFG Confirmation

Linking device

PLC
Barcode

9
reader Reference word device

"Link Device", page 6-36

SETTING BASIC PARTS


"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18
“6-3 Barcode Reader”, VT3 Series Hardware Manual

Point Barcode input can be realized for all models other than VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/
W4G(A)/V7R. Even if the VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A)/V7R is set up, the setting
will be disabled.

Auto apply
Numerical Value
After selecting “Auto apply”, barcode data read by barcode reader will be automatically written to reference (write) word Display
device. By this setting, the "Enter" key entry switch need not be touched each time that barcode data is to be read.
Text Display

When "Auto apply" is set to OFF Message


Display
Text code is written to the reference (write) word device at the moment that the "Enter" key entry switch is touched
after the barcode data is read by the Barcode Reader. Alarm Display

Video Display
Frame blinks (Active mode) Cursor blinks (Entry mode) Frame blinks (Active mode)
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
123AB 4F2DE 4F2DE
BMP File
Switching
Q W E R T Y U I O P Q W E R T Y U I O P Q W E R T Y U I O P
VNC Display
A S D F G H J K L A S D F G H J K L A S D F G H J K L
Settings
CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė
PS PS PS
BS DEL ĕė SPACE Cancel OK BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK

Select the text display. Read the barcode. Touching "Enter" writes the character
codes to the reference (write) word
Read device.
Barcode Reader
BL Series

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-23


9-2 Setting Text Displays

When "Auto apply" is set to ON


Text code is automatically written to the reference (write) word device without having to touch the "Enter" key entry
switch when reading barcode data by the Barcode Reader.

Frame blinks (Active mode) Cursor blinks (Entry mode) Frame blinks (Active mode)

123AB 4F2DE 4F2DE

Q W E R T Y U I O P Q W E R T Y U I O P Q W E R T Y U I O P

A S D F G H J K L A S D F G H J K L A S D F G H J K L
CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė
PS PS PS
BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK

Select the text display. Read the barcode. The character codes are automatically
written to the reference (write) word
Read device.
Barcode Reader
BL Series

Point Please confirm the spacing of barcode entry on the device.

9 Enable changes to settings


SETTING BASIC PARTS

When the "Enable changes to settings" checkbox is marked, changes to text using the keyboard or by barcode entry
are enabled only when the enabled bit device turns ON (OFF).
When the enabled bit device turns OFF (ON), the text display in the Active mode switches to the "Display mode" and
text cannot be entered on the keyboard or by barcode entry. (When "Barcode entry" is set to ON, and "Auto apply" is
set to ON, text codes read by the Barcode Reader also are not written.)

Frame blinks (Active mode) Frame does not blink (Display mode)

TOKYO TOKYO

Q W E R T Y U I O P Q W E R T Y U I O P

A S D F G H J K L A S D F G H J K L
CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė
PS PS
BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK

Characters cannot be input.

Mode Enabled bit device


ON
ON
A contact
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
B contact
OFF
OFF

9-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-2 Setting Text Displays

Notify changes to settings


When the "Notify changes to settings" checkbox is marked, the PLC can be notified when text is changed.
Once text is entered to a text display in the Active mode on the keyboard or by barcode entry, and the "Enter" key
entry switch is touched, the text code is written to the reference (write) word device and the notified bit device is set.
(When "Barcode entry" and "Auto apply" are set to ON, the notified bit device is set after text code is written once it
has been read by the Barcode Reader.)

Frame blinks (Active mode) Cursor blinks (Entry mode) Frame blinks (Active mode)

TOKYO OSAKA OSAKA

Q W E R T Y U I O P Q W E R T Y U I O P Q W E R T Y U I O P

A S D F G H J K L A S D F G H J K L A S D F G H J K L
CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė CA Z X C V B N M Ę Ė
PS PS PS
BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK BS DEL ĕ ė SPACE Cancel OK

Select text display. Enter character from keyboard. Touching "Enter" writes the character
codes, and sets the notified bit
device.
1-byte character (ASCII code) screen example
The example below is for when the "Swap upper/lower bytes" button is not marked. The resulting text
string data after the upper and lower bytes are swapped is stored to the reference word device when
"Swap upper/lower bytes" button is marked.

9
Notified bit device
ON
ON

SETTING BASIC PARTS


OFF Touching "Enter" sets the device.
OFF OFF

Reference word device Reference word device Reference word device

Uppermost Lowermost Uppermost Lowermost Uppermost Lowermost


n+0 T (54H) O (4FH) n+0 T (54H) O (4FH) n+0 O (4FH) S (53H)
n+1 K (4BH) Y (59H) n+1 K (4BH) Y (59H) n+1 A (41H) K (4BH)
n+2 O (4FH) (00H) n+2 O (4FH) (00H) n+2 A (41H) (00H)
Numerical Value
Display

* (* * H) Text Display

Message
Display
Display data Input data
Alarm Display
"n" is the leading number set to the target word device.
Video Display

Animation
Point The notified bit device is set (state changed from OFF to ON) after text code is written. With Display
VT3, a reset (ON->OFF) is not performed, so perform the reset (ON->OFF) in the PLC ladder Function Controls
Device
program.
BMP File
If "Reset notifybit before execution" is used, the notified bit device can be reset before Switching
sending "notify changes to settings" on VT3. VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-25


9-2 Setting Text Displays

Reset notify bit before execution


The time chart is shown below.

Confirm execution

Notified bit device

Reference word device

Preview

9
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Item Description
The text display is previewed according to entered text strings.
Display text string In addition, when closing the setting dialogue box by pressing "OK" button, the text is displayed
on edit screen as in the preview display.
Reset Reset as a value for starting configuration.

9-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-2 Setting Text Displays

About Text String Data


• Text string data is written continuously to word devices starting from the reference (write) word device.
• ASCII code, shift JIS code and UNICODE are used for text string data.
• All UNICODE characters are annotated using two bytes (1 word).
• Be sure to append text string data with a null code (00 Hex) to delimit the text string data.
• When the "Swap upper/lower bytes" checkbox is marked, text string data obtained by swapping the upper byte
with the lower byte is stored to the reference (write) word device.

Reference "6-5 About Text Codes"

When the "Swap upper/lower bytes" checkbox is not marked

ASCII code ASCII code


"ABC" 3 character data "ABCD" 4 character data
Uppermost Lowermost Uppermost Lowermost
Leading reference word device No.+0 A (41H) B (42H) Leading reference word device No.+0 A (41H) B (42H)
Leading reference word device No.+1 C (43H) (00H) Leading reference word device No.+1 C (43H) D (44H)
Leading reference word device No.+2 (00H) (00H)
Null code Null code

Shift JIS code UNICODE

9
"᮹ᴀ" 2 character data "᮹ᴀ" 2 character data
Uppermost Lowermost Uppermost Lowermost
Leading reference word device No.+0 ᮹ ( 9 3 F A H ) Leading reference word device No.+0 ᮹ ( 6 5 E 5 H )

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Leading reference word device No.+1 ᴀ ( 9 6 7 B H ) Leading reference word device No.+1 ᴀ ( 6 7 2 C H )
Leading reference word device No.+2 (0000H ) Leading reference word device No.+2 (0000H)

Null code Null code

When the "Swap upper/lower bytes" checkbox is marked

ASCII code ASCII code


Numerical Value
"ABC" 3 character data "ABCD" 4 character data
Uppermost Lowermost Uppermost Lowermost Display

Leading reference word device No.+0 B (42H) A (41H) Leading reference word device No.+0 B (42H) A (41H) Text Display

Leading reference word device No.+1 (00H) C (43H) Leading reference word device No.+1 D (44H) C (43H) Message
Display
Leading reference word device No.+2 (00H) (00H) Alarm Display
Null code
Null code
Video Display

Shift JIS code UNICODE Animation


Display
"᮹ᴀ" 2 character data "᮹ᴀ" 2 character data
Function Controls
Uppermost Lowermost Uppermost Lowermost Device
Leading reference word device No.+0 ᮹ ( F A 9 3 H ) Leading reference word device No.+0 ᮹ (E565H) BMP File
Switching
Leading reference word device No.+1 ᴀ ( 7 B 9 6 H ) Leading reference word device No.+1 ᴀ (2C67H) VNC Display
Settings
Leading reference word device No.+2 (0000H ) Leading reference word device No.+2 (0000H)

Null code Null code

Important Do not use reference word devices that overlap system memory area.
"Chapter 14 SYSTEM MEMORY AREA"

Point Be sure to append text string data with a null code (00 Hex) to delimit the text string data.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-27


9-2 Setting Text Displays

About Specifying Text Color by Device


When the "Specify text color by device" checkbox is marked, the text color can be changed by writing RGB values to
the target word device.

Target word device


Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BLK Spare R G B

Bit Description
0 to 3 B (blue) Set the brightness of blue by 4 bits. (dark 0H <-->FH light)
4 to 7 G (green) Set the brightness of green by 4 bits. (dark 0H<-->FH light)
8 to 11 R (red) Set the brightness of red by 4 bits. (dark 0H <-->FH light)
12 to 14 Spare Set to 0.
15 BLK*1 0: Blink OFF, 1: Blink ON

*1 The blinking speed can be changed.


System blinking speed
"VT System", page 12-12

9 Setting example
Setting Values of Target Word Device
Color
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Blink OFF Blink ON


White 0FFFH 8FFFH
Black 0000H 8000H
Light gray 0BBBH 8BBBH
Gray 0777H 8777H
Dark gray 0333H 8333H
Red 0F00H 8F00H
Orange 0F70H 8F70H
Yellow 0FF0H 8FF0H
Yellow-green 00F0H 80F0H
Dark green 0090H 8090H
Light blue 00FFH 80FFH
Blue 000FH 800FH
Purple 070FH 870FH
Red-purple 0F0FH 8F0FH

9-28 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-2 Setting Text Displays

Kanji Conversion Mode

The Kanji conversion function can be used when entering to text display parts.
Two entry modes, kana entry mode and Romaji entry mode, are supported. Only Japanese is supported in the Kanji
conversion mode.

System settings
Mark the "Text display Key entry: Kanji conversion" under "Parts" in the VT system settings.
Dictionary data can be transferred to the VT3 when PC -> VT Send data is performed and the Kanji conversion
function can be used only when this checkbox is marked.
About 300 Kbytes of screen data storage (system data) space is used for the dictionary data.

Reference "12-4 VT System Parameters"


"12-9 Data Check"

Conversion method
This section describes how to convert Kanji characters.

1 Touch a text display part to set it to the Active mode or Entry mode.

2 Press the "Kanji Mode" on the Kanji conversion keyboard placed from the Part catalog.

3 In Kanji conversion mode.


Enter the text string to be converted on the keyboard (in kana entry mode or Romaji entry mode).
The text string you entered is displayed at the bottom of the VT3 screen.
9

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Hiragana entry Romaji entry

Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display
Kanji Kana Kanji Romaji
Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
State with reading Current input mode State with reading Current input mode
Function Controls
"か" , "ん" and "じ" entered (hiragana) "K" "A" "N" "N" "J" (Romaji) Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-29


9-2 Setting Text Displays

4 Press one of the "/ ", "/ " or "SPACE/ " keys.
This selects the candidate.
With the candidate selected, the message "Candidate: No. of current candidate/ Total number of candidates" is
displayed at the bottom right corner of the screen.
The text string of the current candidate is displayed at the bottom left corner of the screen.

Candidate selection

response Candidate 10/16

Current candidate Current candidate:


text string current candidate number/total number of c

5 Press one of the "/ ", "/ " or "SPACE/ " keys to search for the desired candidate.

9 6 Press the "OK" key.


The converted character (Kanji) is entered to the text display part.
SETTING BASIC PARTS

7 Press "(R) Kanji mode" key.


This exits the Kanji conversion mode.

8 Pressing the "OK" key writes the text on the text display part to the PLC device.

9-30 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-2 Setting Text Displays

Role of keys in each state


The role of some keys on the keyboard varies according to its state.
The table below shows the role of the keys in each state when the respective key is pressed.
Conversion cancel state : Kanji conversion mode is canceled.
The regular text display part is either in the Active mode or Entry mode.
Conversion text string input state: The text string to be converted is being entered in the Kanji conversion mode by
either kana entry or Romaji entry.

Candidate selection state : The candidate is currently selected in the Kanji conversion mode.

Conversion Conversion Text String Entry State


Key Candidate Selection State
Cancel State Kana Entry Romaji Entry
To conversion
Conversion (Kana) To kana entry To kana entry Nothing happens
cancel state
To conversion
Conversion (Romaji) To Romaji entry To Romaji entry Nothing happens
cancel state
Enter entered text Enter entered text Candidate is entered, and then
Apply/ENT Write to device string unconverted string unconverted to conversion text string
entered state
Candidate selection is
Text display parts To conversion To conversion canceled, and then to
Cancel/ESC
Cancel selection cancel state cancel state conversion text string entered
state
To previous part
To previous To candidate select To candidate select Previous conversion candidate
(move to
candidate state state is displayed.

9
destination (-1))
To next part (move
To next candidate to destination (+1))

SETTING BASIC PARTS


To candidate select To candidate select Next conversion candidate is
Full-angle state state displayed.
backspace
SPACE
half-width
backspace
Candidate selection is
Delete one Delete one canceled, and then to
BS (backspace) BS
character back character back conversion text string entered
state (same as ESC)
Candidate selection is
Clear entire Clear entire
canceled, and then to
CLR (clear) CLR entered text string entered text string
conversion text string entered
Numerical Value
state (same as ESC)
Display
Enter while
Current candidate is confirmed
1-byte alphabet Enter as is Enter as is converting Romaji Text Display
and entered continuously.
to kana
Message
Current candidate is confirmed Display
Hiragana Enter as is Enter as is Enter as is
and entered continuously. Alarm Display
Current candidate is confirmed
Other characters Enter as is Enter as is Enter as is
and entered continuously. Video Display

Animation
Display

Precautions Function Controls


Device
BMP File
• The Kanji conversion mode also functions when the display language is set to "English". Note, however, that Switching

"kana", "Romaji" and "Candidate" that are displayed at the bottom right corner of the screen are displayed in VNC Display
Settings
Japanese in the Kanji conversion mode.
"5-1 What is System Mode", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

• The Kanji conversion mode is canceled when page switching occurs during Kanji conversion.
"6-3 Key Entry Parts"

• Either of the following actions is adopted when window switching occurs during Kanji conversion:
(1) Kanji conversion is continued when a part in the Active mode stays in the Active mode.
(2) Kanji conversion is canceled when a part in the Active mode is changed or disappears.
"6-3 Key Entry Parts"

• The display area for text strings or candidates to be converted is the same even in vertical screens.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-31


9-2 Setting Text Displays

16 dots
Horizontal screen orientation Vertical screen orientation

16 dots

Display area

Display area

Kana Entry
9 Text string to be entered is entered by the "Hiragana" key. A "Katakana" key is currently not supported.
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Hard and soft pronunciation marks


Hard and soft pronunciation marks are entered following the text.

[Example] 「は」+「゛」⇒「ば」
Entry of hard pronunciation mark "and soft pronunciation mark" during hiragana entry is enabled only on specific characters.
Characters for which hard Characters for which soft
pronunciation marks are allowed pronunciation marks are allowed

う+゛ は+゜ ひ+゜ ふ+゜ へ+゜ ほ+゜


ヴ ぱ ぴ ぷ ぺ ぽ

か+゛ き+゛ く+゛ け+゛ こ+゛


が ぎ ぐ げ ご

さ+゛ し+゛ す+゛ せ+゛ そ+゛


ざ じ ず ぜ ぞ

た+゛ ち+゛ つ+゛ て+゛ と+゛


だ ぢ づ で ど

は+゛ ひ+゛ ふ+゛ へ+゛ ほ+゛


ば び ぶ べ ぼ

Romaji Entry
Enter the text string to convert using the 1-byte alphabet keys. Romaji characters can be entered using either the 1-
byte upper-case or lower-case alphabet keys. 2- byte alphabet entry is not supported.
1-byte alphabet characters you have entered are converted to hiragana according to the rules summarized in the following table.
Characters not listed in the conversion table are entered as they are.
For the double consonant, when two of the same consonants excluding "n" are entered continuously, the first
consonant is converted to the double consonant.

[Example] (entry) tt => (conversion)


9-32 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
9-2 Setting Text Displays

Romaji character entry table

a I u e o
あ い う え お

ka ki ku ke ko ga gi gu ge go
か き く け こ が ぎ ぐ げ ご

sa si/shi su se so za zi/ji zu ze zo
さ し す せ そ ざ じ ず ぜ ぞ

ta ti / chi tu/tsu te to da di du de do
た ち つ て と だ ぢ づ で ど

na ni nu ne no
な に ぬ ね の

ha hi hu/fu he ho ba bi bu be bo
は ひ ふ へ ほ ば び ぶ べ ぼ

ma mi mu me mo pa pi pu pe po
ま み む め も ぱ ぴ ぷ ぺ ぽ

ya yu yo
や ゆ よ

9
ra ri ru re ro
ら り る れ ろ

wa wo nn

SETTING BASIC PARTS


わ を ん

kya kyi kyu kye kyo gya gyi gyu gye gyo
きゃ きぃ きゅ きぇ きょ ぎゃ ぎぃ ぎゅ ぎぇ ぎょ

sya/sha syi syu/shu sye/she syo/sho zya/ja zyi zyu/ju zye/je zyo/jo
しゃ しぃ しゅ しぇ しょ じゃ じぃ じゅ じぇ じょ

tya/cha tyu/chu tye/che tyo/cho


tyi/cyi dya dyi dyu dye dyo
/cya /cyu /cye /cyo
ちぃ ぢゃ ぢぃ ぢゅ ぢぇ ぢょ
ちゃ ちゅ ちぇ ちょ Numerical Value
Display
nya nyi nyu nye nyo
にゃ にぃ にゅ にぇ にょ Text Display

Message
hya hyi hyu hye hyo bya byi byu bye byo Display

ひゃ ひぃ ひゅ ひぇ ひょ びゃ びぃ びゅ びぇ びょ Alarm Display

Video Display
mya myi my mye myo pya pyi pyu pye pyo
みゃ みぃ みゅ みぇ みょ ぴゃ ぴぃ ぴゅ ぴぇ ぴょ Animation
Display
Function Controls
rya ryi ryu rye ryo Device
りゃ りぃ りゅ りぇ りょ BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
tsa tsi tse tso Settings
つぁ つぃ つぇ つぉ

tha thi thu the tho dha dhi dhu dhe dho
てゃ てぃ てゅ てぇ てょ でゃ でぃ でゅ でぇ でょ

fa fi fe fo
ふぁ ふぃ ふぇ ふぉ

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-33


9-2 Setting Text Displays

xa/la xi/li xu/lu xe/le xo/lo


ぁ ぃ ぅ ぇ ぉ

xka/lka xke/lke
ヵ ケ

xya/lya xyu/lyu xyo/lyo


ゃ ゅ ょ

同一子
xwa/lwa − (マイナス)
音繰返
ゎ ー (長音符号)

ye
いぇ

wha whi/wi whe/we who


うぁ うぃ うぇ うぉ

kwa/qa kwi/qi kwe/qe kwo/qo


くぁ くぃ くぇ くぉ

gwa gwi gwu gwe gwo


ぐぁ ぐぃ ぐぅ ぐぇ ぐぉ

dwa dwi dwu dwe dwo


どぁ どぃ どぅ どぇ どぉ

9 va vi/vyi vu ve/vye vo
ヴぁ ヴぃ ヴ ヴぇ ヴぉ
SETTING BASIC PARTS

fya fyi fyu fye fyo


ふゃ ふぃ ふゅ ふぇ ふょ

vya vyi vyu vye vyo


ヴゃ ヴぃ ヴゅ ヴぇ ヴょ

 Text selection input


To input text with the feeling similar to mobile phone key input.

 Input mode
After the switch with "Text selection" set, the set text will be displayed in sequence.

[Example] The setting of text selection: “あいうえお“

9-34 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-2 Setting Text Displays

The first touch The second touch The third touch The fourth touch The fifth touch The sixth touch
޽ ޿ ߁ ߃ ߅ ޽

 Hard and soft pronunciation marks


For hard and soft pronunciation, hard and soft pronunciation marks can be directly entered after the characters.

[Example] 「は」+「゛」⇒「ば」

When inputing hiragana or katakana, "゛" will be entered as an independent character except the following charaters
to which hard and soft pronunciation marks need to be added.
Characters for which hard pronunciation marks are allowedCharacters for which soft pronunciation marks are
allowed.

ぅ+゛ は+゜ ひ+゜ ふ+゜ へ+゜ ほ+゜


ヴ ぱ ぴ ぷ ぺ ぽ

か+゛ き+゛ く+゛ け+゛ こ+゛


が ぎ ぐ げ ご

さ+゛ し+゛ す+゛ せ+゛ そ+゛


ざ じ ず ぜ ぞ

た+゛ ち+゛ つ+゛ て+゛ と+゛


だ ぢ づ で ど

は+゛ ひ+゛ ふ+゛ へ+゛ ほ+゛


9
ば び ぶ べ ぼ

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-35


9-3 Setting Message Displays

Outline of Message Displays

Structure of message data


Messages are edited in block units. The maximum number of blocks that can be edited is 32768 (block No.0 to
32767). The maximum number of digits per line is 100, and the maximum number of lines that can be edited in each
block is 256.

Reference Item VT1 VT3


Max. number of blocks 1024 blocks 32768 blocks
Block No. setting range 0 to 1023 0 to 32767
Max. number of digits per line 100 digits 100 digits
Max. number of lines 256 lines 256 lines

Block No. VT1 VT3


Block No.0 For alarm ID=0 or for message
Block No.1 Alarm ID=for 1 or message
Block No.2 For messages
• For messages (up to block No.
• 1023)
Block No.32767

On the VT1, block No.0 (1) was for alarm type 0 (1) or messages. On the VT3, alarms and messages
are completely separated, and each is handled by an ID No. and block No.
9 Setting message displays
SETTING BASIC PARTS

The following two settings are required before message display.


• Setting of message display parts
"Setting message displays", page 9-36
• Editing the Content of Messages
"Editing the Content of Messages", page 9-45

Setting message displays


Parts(P) -> Basic parts(P) -> Message display(M)

Set message displays in the "Message display" window.


Display the "Message display" window by one of the following methods:
• By double-clicking the message
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By opening the menu by clicking the right mouse button, and selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)"

9-36 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-3 Setting Message Displays

Setting

Item Description
Set how to specify the message block No.
Internally : Set the message block No. to be displayed.
Specify block No.
Externally : Set the value of the target word device as the block No. of the
message to be displayed. Any message block No. can be displayed.
Edit messages When this button is clicked, the edit screen for the message details is displayed.
When "Externally" is selected, set the target word device for specifying the block
Specify block No.
Target word
Device *1
No. to be displayed.
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
"Device settings" window.
9
Select the data format of the target word device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD"

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Data Format
when "Externally" is selected.
Block No. Set the block No. to be displayed when "Internally" is selected.
Set the number of digits (1 to 100 digits) of the message to be displayed. Set one character
Number of display digits
as one digit for 1-byte characters and one character as two digits for 2-byte characters.
Number of display lines Set the number of lines (1 to 48 lines) of the message to be displayed.
*2 When this checkbox is marked, the message data is automatically scrolled in the
Horizontal scroll
horizontal direction. The number of display lines at this time is fixed to one line.
When horizontal scroll is selected and this checkbox is marked, messages are
Fill spaces between messages*2
displayed with the spacing between messages shifted.
Vertical scroll *2 When this checkbox is marked, the message display automatically scrolls in the vertical direction. Numerical Value
When this checkbox is marked, the scroll bar is displayed to the right of the message display. Display
Scroll bar*2
When ìhorizontal scroll/vertical scrollî is selected, the scroll bar cannot be set.
Text Display
Set the text to be used for display from ìbitmap font/stroke font/Windows fontî. When this
Font *3 checkbox is marked, stroke font is used. Stroke front cannot be set when the number of Message
display digits is set to 51 or more, or the number of display lines is set to 26 or more. Display

This item is displayed when Windows font is selected. The fonts to be used in Alarm Display
List of available fonts
graphics data are displayed in the list. Select the fonts to be used.
Video Display
The fonts not specified in the font list can be set. After font type and size are set
Font setting
in "Select font" window, the fonts will be added to the list of available fonts. Animation
Display
Message displays are automatically assigned the label "Mb_****" as the default. Correct this
Label Function Controls
label as necessary. (**** is the creation number. A number starting from 0000 is appended.) Device
BMP File
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell" Switching

"6-7 Setting of Devices" VNC Display


Settings
*2 For details of each item, refer to the descriptions that follow.
*3 "6-4 About Fonts"

Point When the block No. is set to "Externally" and the data format is set to "BCD", the maximum
number of blocks that can be used is 10000 (0 to 9999).

Reference The number of display lines differs on the VT1 and VT3 as follows:
Item VT1 VT3
Number of display lines 1 to 36 lines 1 to 48 lines

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-37


9-3 Setting Message Displays

Horizontal scroll and vertical scroll


When the "Horizontal scroll"/"Vertical scroll" checkbox is marked, the message is displayed scrolled horizontally or
vertically as follows:

Message block No.1


Machine A Method of Operation
Set feed in 0.1 mm increments.
After checking workpiece length
set to specified position.
Horizontal scroll
Horizontal scroll "Fill spaces between messages" set Vertical scroll
Machine A Machine A Machine A Method of Operation
Set feed in 0.1 mm increments.
Machine A Method of Operation Operating method of Machine A Set feed 0 After checking workpiece length
set to specified position.

Operation The sending size is set in a unit of 0.1mm.

Set feed in 0.1 mm increments.


Setting. After checking workpiece length After checking workpiece length,
set to specified position.
Set set to specified position Machine A

9 Set feed in 0.1 mm Operating method of Machine A Set feed After checking workpiece length,
Position
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Position

Machine A Method of Operation

• In the case of horizontal scroll, the next line is displayed when the message content of the
Point currently displayed line disappears.
• When the "Fill spaces between messages" checkbox is marked in the case of horizontal
scroll, the message content set to the message block is displayed continuously.
In the above example, to delimit messages such as "...Method of Operation Set..." as "... Method of
Operation Set...", adjust the spacing by inserting a space when editing the message. After the
message contents are displayed 1 week circularly, "position of device A" is changed as "position".
Adjust the message contents of "Device A", namely, separate by adding backspace between the end
of 1st week and start of 2nd week.
• In the case of vertical scroll, the next scroll operation starts after all currently displayed lines
disappear.
• When the "Horizontal scroll"/"Vertical scroll" checkbox is marked, themessage display
does not become a key entry part.

Reference The scroll speed can be changed.


"Parts", page 12-21
9-38 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
9-3 Setting Message Displays

Scroll bar
The length of the scroll bar indicates the entire message, and the length of the position cursor indicates the ratio with
the position of the currently displayed message.

Machine A Method of Operation Machine A Method of Operation


Set feed in 0.1 mm increments. Set feed in 0.1 mm increments.
After checking workpiece length,
set to specified position.
Position cursor

Color/image frame

9
Item Description

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Image frame Image frame can be used after selection.
Style Select the style of image frame.
Image frame Free style If this item is selected when image frame is used, the display images can be changed.
Change*1 When the Free style checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image" window is displayed.
Color Select the color system of image frame.
DescriptionWhen this checkbox is marked, the background of the message
Background

Background display is displayed according to the "Background color" setting. When it is not
marked, the background color is transparent. (Drawing speed slows down.)
Background color *2 Select the background color of the message display.
Use background color specified When this checkbox is marked, the background color set for line in the message Numerical Value

by message data *3 display is used. Display

Data frame The frame of data is displayed after selection. If it isnot marked, the frame color is transparent. Text Display
Data frame
Frame color *2 Select the frame color. Message
Text color Selects the text color. Display

Bold Sets the text of the message display to bold. Alarm Display

Shadow Add shadow onto text for message display. so that it has a 3D effect. Video Display
Text
Engraved Add shadow onto text for message display. so that it looks engraved.
Text

Decoration Animation
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the Display
Text shadow color*3
text decoration. The settings are the same as "Text color". Function Controls
Device
Use text color specified by When this checkbox is marked, the text color set for each line in the message
BMP File
message data *3 data is used. Switching
Specify text color When this checkbox is marked, the text color can be changed by writing RGB VNC Display
by device values to the target word device. Settings
Specify text color
by device*4 Sets the target word device.
Target word
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
device *5
"Device settings" window.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK*2
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 "Change the style of image frame", page 9-40
*2 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*3 "Color setting mode", page 9-47
*4 "About Specifying Text Color by Device", page 9-28
*5 Selectable from "PLC device /Indirect reference/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-39
9-3 Setting Message Displays

Change the style of image frame


If selecting "Free style" and clicking (change)button, "Free Style Select image" window is displayed.

Item Description
Specifies the width (in dots (0 to 32)) of the area that is not enlarged or reduced as the frame when the
Frame width
image is resized.

When the "Select from file" check box is marked


Specify the Windows bitmap file or JPEG file, and specify the display image.
When the "Select" button is clicked, the "Open image" window is displayed.

9
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the file to open.
File Name(N) Select the name of the file to open.
File of type(T) Select the type of file.
Gray scale(G) When this checkbox is marked, the color information of image files is converted to a gray scale image.
When this checkbox is marked, the image is dithered. Dithering is used to make the boundary between
Dithering(D)
colors stand out when reduction to the VT3's display color (32768) is performed.
Frame Specifies the width (in dots (0 to 32)) of the area that is not enlarged or reduced as the frame when the
width(F) image is resized.
After If you click this button, a preview of the image after reduction to the VT3's display color (32768),
conversion dithering, and gray scale processing is displayed.
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.

Changing the style image


Click “Parts Designer” button, and start the style creation software "Parts Designer". The style can be created easily
by using Windowsí bitmap (BMP) files and JPEG files.
"11-7 Active Edit"

9-40 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-3 Setting Message Displays

Key entry

Item Description
Key entry *1,2 When this checkbox is marked, key entry parts are set.
Set the key entry order when there are multiple key entry parts on the
Key entry order*1
screen.
When this checkbox is marked, key entry is enabled by touching a
Select by switch*1
Key entry message display.
When this checkbox is marked, the scroll bar on the touch panel can be
Control scroll bar directly*2

9
directly operated.
When this checkbox is marked, each line on a message display on the
Select message line directly*2
touch panel can be directly selected.
When this checkbox is marked, the cursor position (numerical value

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Notify cursor position
corresponding to the line No. of the selected line) is notified.
Set the word device to be notified of the cursor position (numerical value
corresponding to the line No. of the selected line).
Notified word device*3
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set
Notify in the "Device settings" window.
cursor Select the data format to be written to the notified word device from
Data Format
position *2 "Unsigned decimal/BCD".
Set the numerical value to be added to the cursor position (numerical
Cursor position ID offset value corresponding to the line No. of the selected line) for writing to the
notified word device.
Notify ID with each cursor When this checkbox is marked, the cursor position ID is notified each Numerical Value
move*2 time that the cursor is moved. Display

*1 "6-3 Key Entry Parts" Text Display

*2 For details of each item, refer to the descriptions that follow. Message
Display
*3 Selectable from "PLC device/Cell"
Alarm Display
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
Video Display

Reference Key repeat Animation


Display
"Other", page 12-31
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-41


9-3 Setting Message Displays

Preview

Item Description
The message display is previewed according to entered block No.. In addition, when closing the
Block No. setting dialogue box by pressing "OK" button, the numerical value is displayed on edit screen as
in the preview display.
Reset Reset as a value for starting configuration.
Preview internally This item is set if block NO. is internally specified. After selection, message contents of

9 selected block No. internally specified block No. are displayed.


SETTING BASIC PARTS

9-42 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-3 Setting Message Displays

Key entry
When the "Key entry" checkbox is marked, the message display becomes a key entry part. Scroll up and scroll down,
and notification of the cursor position to the notified word device are possible.
When "Scroll up" and "Scroll down" key entry switches are touched, messages protruding outside of the frame can be
displayed in message displays in the Active mode. Which part of the entire message is currently displayed can be
confirmed by the scroll bar.

Reference Key entry part mode, key entry order, selection by switch
"6-3 Key Entry Parts"
9
Scroll bar

"scroll up" key entry switch


Frame blinks Machine C Method of Operation
Colors of characters and Press the Default button. "scroll down" key entry switch
Set up the items following the CANCEL
background are inverted. on-screen instructions. ENTER
(Active mode)

Touching "scroll down" displays messages

9
outside of the frame area.
Ė
Press the Default button.
Set up the items following the Ę
on-screen instructions.
When you have finished setting up,
Frame blinks

SETTING BASIC PARTS


press the End Setting button.
Colors of characters and
background are inverted.
(Active mode)

Control scrollbar directly


When the "Control scroll bar directly" checkbox is marked, the scroll bar can be operated by directly touching the
scroll bar without using the "Scroll up" or "Scroll down" key entry switch. Scroll up if clicking top half of the scroll bar,
or scroll down if clicking bottom half of the scroll bar.
Numerical Value
When the top half (bottom half) of the scroll bar is touched, the area where the cursor is located is displayed at the Display
bottommost line (topmost line) of the message display, and the cursor is displayed at the topmost line (bottommost
Text Display
line). (This is the same operation as when a "Page down" or "Page up" key entry switch is used.)
Message
Display

Point To switch a message display from the Active mode to the Display mode, touch any part other Alarm Display
than the scroll bar.
Video Display

Animation
 Switching from the Active mode to the Display mode when the "Select message line directly" Display
Function Controls
checkbox is marked Device
BMP File
Switching
When a message display to which "Select message line directly" is set is in the Active mode, switch to the Display VNC Display
mode as follows: Settings

• By pressing the "Cancel" key entry switch


• By touching the line where the cursor is located

Point • Do not change the switch area when "Control scroll bar directly" or "Select message line
directly" are used. Doing so might cause message displays to malfunction.
• When Windows fonts are used, if the font size is too small, the info line may be smaller than
the smallest switch area. In this case, "Directly select info line" cannot operate normally.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-43


9-3 Setting Message Displays

Notify cursor position


When the "Notify cursor position" checkbox is marked, the notified word device can be notified of the cursor position.
If the message line is selected by a "Scroll up" or "Scroll down" key entry switch, and the "Apply" key entry switch is
touched, a numerical value corresponding to the line No. of the selected line is written to the notified word device.
When the "Notify ID with each cursor move" checkbox is marked, the numerical value corresponding to the line No. of the selected
line is written to the notified word device each time that the cursor moved without the need to press the "Apply" key entry switch.

When Cursor position ID offset = 0 and Notified word device = DM00100

Write
Machine A Notified word device
Machine B CANCEL

Machine C ENTER
DM00100 1

Line No.1

Numerical value "1" is written to the notified word device when the 1st line is selected and the "Apply" key entry switch is touched.

Write
Machine A Notified word device

9 Machine B
Machine C
CANCEL

ENTER
DM00100 2
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Line No.2

Numerical value "2" is written to the notified word device when the 2nd line is selected and the "Apply" key entry switch is touched.

When Cursor position ID offset = 100 and Notified word device = DM00100

Write
Machine A Notified word device
Machine B CANCEL

Machine C ENTER
DM00100 101

Line No.1

Numerical value "101 (1 + 100)" is written to the notified word device when the 1st line is selected and the "Apply" key
entry switch is touched.

Write
Machine A Notified word device
Machine B CANCEL

Machine C ENTER
DM00100 102

Line No.2

Numerical value "102 (2 + 100)" is written to the notified word device when the 2nd line is selected and the "Apply"
key entry switch is touched.

9-44 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-3 Setting Message Displays

Editing the Content of Messages

Message List

The message list displays a list of block Nos. of multiple messages and their content. Messages can be batch-edited.

1 Display the message list.


You can display the message list by the following methods:
• By clicking "Message" on the "System Settings" tab in "Workspace"
• By selecting "Resources(R)" -> "Message(M)" from Menu in that order

2 Editing message list

9
Item Description

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Edit Displays the window for editing the content of the message at the selected block No. line.
Cut Cuts the selected block No. line.
Copy Copies the selected block No. line.
Paste Pastes the selected block No. line to the selected block No. line.
Delete Deletes the selected block No. line.
Enters (imports) messages from other VTS files or text files
Import *1
(*.txt) in all blocks or block units.
Export *1 Outputs (exports) messages from text files (*.txt) in all blocks.
Block No. Displays the block No.
Numerical Value
Comment Displays the comment of the block No. Display
Message Displays the 1st line of the message content for the block No.
Text Display
*1 "Example of text file format during message import/export", page 9-50
Message
"Importing/exporting messages", page 9-48 Display

Alarm Display

Reference • You can select continuous multiple block lines by clicking the block No. lines with the key
Video Display
held down.
Animation
• You can select an entire block No. line by pressing + A key. Display
• You can select non-continuous multiple block lines by clicking the block No. lines with the key Function Controls
Device
held down.
BMP File
• If you select the block No. line and drag, you can select block No. lines in the range you dragged. Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-45


9-3 Setting Message Displays

Editing the Content of Messages

Edit the content of the message by each message block No.

1 Display the screen for editing the content of messages.


You can display the screen for editing the content of messages by the following methods.
• Click the block No. to be edited from "Message" on the "System Settings" tab in the "Workspace".
• Select the block No. line from the message list, and click .
• Double-click the block No. line from the message list.

Add new block Nos. by the following methods.


• Click "Message" the "System Settings" tab in the "Workspace", and click "New".
Set the message block No. in the "Specify block No." window that is displayed.
• Double-click an unset block No. line from the message list.

2 Edit the content of the message.

9
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Item Description
Cut Cuts the text of the selected message content.
Copy Pastes the text of the copied message content to the specified position.
Paste Pastes the text of the copied message content to the specified position.
Delete Deletes the text of the selected message content.
Enters (imports) messages from other VTS files or text files
Import *1
(*.txt) in all blocks or block units.
Export *1 Outputs (exports) messages in block units in text file format (*.txt).
Return to message list The message list is displayed by clicking the "Return to message list" button.
Block No. Displays the block No. currently being edited. (Sets the block No. to be edited.)
Comment Displays the comment of the block No. Comments can be entered directly.
Message entry field Enter the message. Messages can be entered up to 100 digits and up to 256 lines.
When this button is clicked, the text color, text decoration and background color can be set to
Color setting mode *2
each line of the message.

*1 "Example of text file format during message import/export", page 9-50


"Importing/exporting messages", page 9-48
*2 The following items shall be selected from message display parts.
"Use background color specified by message data”
"Use text color specified by message data"
"Color/image frame", page 9-39

9-46 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-3 Setting Message Displays

Color setting mode

Item Description
Copy *2 Copies the color setting of the selected line.
Paste *2 Pastes the copied color setting to the selected line.
Return to message list The message list is displayed by clicking the "Return to message list" button.
Text color*1 Selects the color of the text on the selected line.
Bold Sets the text on the selected line to bold.
Shadow Gives the text on the selected line a shadow so that it has a 3D effect.
Text
Decoration Engraved Gives the text on the selected line a shadow so that it looks engraved.
Text shadow Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
dolor *1 decoration. The settings are the same as "Text color".
Background color *1

BLK*1
Select the background color of the selected line.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part
9
blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*2 Only color settings can be copied/pasted in the Color setting mode; text strings cannot be copied/pasted.

Reference • You can select continuous multiple message lines by clicking the message lines with the
key held down.
• You can select all message lines by holding down the + A keys simultaneously.
• You can select non-continuous multiple message lines by clicking messages lines with the
key held down.

Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-47


9-3 Setting Message Displays

Importing/exporting messages

Importing messages
Copy and paste the content of message from other VTS files/VT2 files or text files(*.txt).

1 Click the "Import" button in the screen for message list or editing the content of the messages.
The "Import messages" window is displayed.

Item Description

9 File Name

Select File
Displays the name of the file to be imported as a full path.
When this button is clicked when the message to copy is in another file, the "Open Import
File" window is displayed so that you can select the file.
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Select all Selects all blocks.


Block No. offset Sets the numerical value to add and write to the block No. during an import.

Reference When you are importing messages for the first time, the "Open Import File" window and not the
"Import messages" window will be displayed. After selecting files and clicking “Open(O)” button,
"Import message" window is opened.
In such case, if "block to edit" is selected in "block", "Import message" window isn’t displayed.

2 Click the "Select file" button.


The "Open Import File" window is displayed.
In the case of edit screen for the content of message, "block" can be selected from "block to edit/all blocks" as entry
targets. If you select "currently edited block" at "block", the "Import messages" window is not displayed.

Reference When display text string switching function is used, display text string ID can be selected as entry
targets.
Blocks Display text string ID
All Blk All IDs
Editing block All IDs/IDs to edit

3 Select the file containing the message to import, and click the "Open(O)" button.
The "Import messages" window (file containing the message to import) is displayed.

9-48 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-3 Setting Message Displays

4 Click the comment in the "Import messages" window, select the message to import, and click the "OK"
button.
If imported from other VTS files/VT2 files, block No. in "Import message" window and all contents of message will be
imported directly.

Point Messages cannot be imported directly from VT1 files. If imported from VT1 files, the following
methods are used for import.
• Open the VT1 file in VT STUDIO and then save the file as a VTS file.
• Export the file as a text file on VT BUILDER.

Exporting messages
The comment of the block No. in the screen for editing the content of messages and the content of the message can
be output (exported) to a text file (*.txt).

1 Click the "Export" button in the screen for editing the content of the messages.
The "Export Messages" window is displayed.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


2 Select either to output only the currently selected block No. or all block Nos.
In the case of message list, "Blocks" are all blocks.

Reference When display text string switching function is used, display text string ID to be exported can be
selected.
Blocks Display text string ID
All Blk All IDs
Editing block All IDs/IDs to edit
Numerical Value

3 Select the file type from "text file (MBCS)(*.txt)" or "text file (UNICODE)(*.txt)".
Display

4 Enter the file name and save the file.


Text Display

Message
The comment of the block No. or the message content in the edit screen is output as a text file. Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-49


9-3 Setting Message Displays

Example of text file format during message import/export


The following example shows the format of a text file (*.txt) when exporting the comment of the block No. in the
message content edit window and the content of the message to text file (*.txt), or when alternatively importing the
comment of the block No. and the content of the message from a text file (*.txt).

Export in text file format. Import in text file format.

9
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Reference Example of format during text string switching


During display text strings are switched, the comment of block No. and the content of message in edit
window can be exported to text files (*.txt) ,or imported to text files. The examples are shown below:

Export in text file format. Import in text file format.

9-50 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-3 Setting Message Displays

Message Display Examples


This item describes display examples when displaying operation method as messages for each machine and when
selecting an item in a list to display the detailed contents.

Examples of displaying operation method as messages for each machine

Set the "Specify block No." for the message display to Externally, and the "Target word device" to PLC data memory.
The message of the block No. corresponding to the numerical value written to data memory can be displayed.

Display example

Operation Method
Machine A Method of Operation
Read Target word device
Set feed in 0.1 mm increments.
After checking workpiece
length, set to specified position.

DM00100 2

Message block No.2


9

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Operation Method
Machine C Method of Operation
Press the Default button. Read Target word device
Specify each item according to
the on-screen instructions.
When you have finished setting
the items, press the End
Setting button.
DM00100 4

Message block No.4 Numerical Value


Display

Text Display
Point When a numerical value other than 0 to 32767 has been written to the target word device, the
Message
message is not displayed. Display

Alarm Display

Message setting example Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-51


9-3 Setting Message Displays

Examples of displays when selecting an item in a list to display the detailed contents

Display a list of items, and display a detailed message of the content selected from that list.
The line No. of the currently selected line is written to the PLC data memory by notifying the cursor position in message
A in the figure below, and the message corresponding to the No. of the selected line is displayed for message B by
setting that data memory to the externally specified target word device.

Display example

Message display A Message display B

Detailed Detailed
Item List Description Item List Description
Machine A Machine A Machine C Method of Operation
Machine B Machine B Press the Default button.
Specify each item according to
Machine C CANCEL
Machine C CANCEL the on-screen instructions.
Machine D Machine D When you have finished
Machine E ENTER Machine E ENTER setting the items, press the
End Setting button.

Select the item to display at Touching "Apply" displays the


message display A. details of the item at message display B.

Example of editing messages

9 Block No.2 Machine A


Machine B
Machine C
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Machine D Item List


Machine E

Block No.11 Machine A Method of Operation

Block No.12 Machine B Method of Operati

Detailed
Description
Block No.13 Machine C Method of Operation
Press the Default button.
Specify each item according to the on-screen
instructions. When you have finished setting
the items, press the End Setting button.

9-52 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-3 Setting Message Displays

Example of message display setting

Message display A (item list)

Specify 2 as the "Block No." at Internally, and Write the line No. to PLC data memory DM00100 by
display the item list. "Notify cursor position".
If "Cursor position ID offset" is set to 10, the numerical
value to be written to the notified word device is as
follows when the line No. is selected.
Select line No.1 (machine A) -> Numerical value 11 is written.
Message display B (detailed description)
Select line No.2 (machine B) -> Numerical value 12 is written.
Select line No.3 (machine C) -> Numerical value 13 is written.
9
Set PLC data memory DM00100 that is set as "Notified word

SETTING BASIC PARTS


device" in message display A (Item List) to "Target word device"
at "Externally".
When line No.3 (machine C) is selected, numerical value 13 is
written to DM00100 of the notified word device. So, "Machine C
Method of Operation" is displayed at message block No.13.

Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-53


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Overview of Alarm Display

About settings of alarm display

Up to 4 alarms can be used in an entire screen, and divided separately by alarm ID(0 to 3).
The following 2 settings are required before alarm display.
• Setting alarm displays
"Setting Alarm Displays", page 9-60
• Alarm system settings
"Alarm System Settings", page 9-82

Schematic drawing of alarm display

The following is a schematic drawing of alarm display.


It may provide a reference for setting alarm display.

Display item
(item name)

Title line Date Count State Message

00/05/30 00:00:00 3 Occurred Motor rpm drop

9 Alarm display
00/05/30 00:00:10

00/05/30 00:00:25
3

25
Confirmed

Occurred
Motor rpm drop

Workpiece supply error


SETTING BASIC PARTS

00/05/30 00:03:35 3 Restored Motor rpm drop

Horizontal table line Vertical table line Frame line Scroll bar

Alarm display
Display items : you can select the items to be displayed, or set the sequence of display items.
Sequencing condition: you can set alarm display according to time sequence or the sequence of generating
frequency.
In addition, other display settings are possible.
Please confirm the details of settings in the alarm display setting.
Setting alarm displays
"Setting Alarm Displays", page 9-60

9-54 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Type of alarm display

Alarm display is categorized into real-time display and log display.


The generated alarms will be saved to internal memory (SRAM) as logs. Since backup battery is provided, these
information can be saved even if VT3 is switched off.

Real-time display
Only currently generated alarms are displayed.
The contents of real-time alarm display are shown in table below.
Alarm has occurred

Source pressure drop


Cover A open
Workpiece blockage

Alarm detection trigger State of trigger bit Alarm display Alarm display
Occurrence ↑, ON Display ON/Occur
Occurrence↑/recovery↓ OFF : Not display -
ON : Not display -
Occurrence↓
OFF Display OFF/Occur
Confirm of alarms - Display after setting *1 CHK/Confirm
*1 "Alarm System Settings", page 9-82

Log display
9

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Log display for alarm.
The contents of alarm log are shown below.
Alarm log
09 : 03 : 18 CHK Workpiece blockage
The recorded alarm log can be saved in memory card as CSV files(*.csv). 08 : 51 : 15 ON Source pressure drop
08 : 48 : 25 ON Workpiece blockage

"Save log data to memory card", page 9-131


"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
Numerical Value
Display
Alarm detection trigger
State of trigger bit Alarm display Alarm display
Confirmation of alarm log Text Display

(OFF->)ON Display ON/Occur Message


Occurrence ↑ Display
(ON->)OFF Not Display -
Alarm Display
(OFF->)ON Not Display -
Occurrence ↓
(ON->)OFF Display OFF/Occur Video Display

(OFF->)ON Display ON/Occur Animation


Occurrence↑/recovery↓ Display
(ON->)OFF Display OFF/Restore Function Controls
Confirm of alarms - Display after setting *1 CHK/Confirm Device
BMP File
*1 "Alarm System Settings", page 9-82 Switching
VNC Display
Settings

Maximum number of alarm logs


The alarm logs can record up to 2400 alarm IDs(0 to 3) (up to 1200 records for VT3-W4 series). The log number
excludes "confirmation" and "restore".
The maximum recording number of alarm IDs is set in "memory size" of alarm system setting.
"Memory size", page 9-85

Point When "clearing all the same alarms" (key entry switch) by "deleting a line", the
corresponding logs are still included in the log number, though they are deleted from the log
display.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-55


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Reference In VT1, every alarm ID(0 to 1) can record up to 512 alarm logs.
"Confirmation" and "restore" are also included in log No..

Classification of alarm contents

The display contents of alarm are displayed according to different alarm states and levels.

Alarm state
The alarm state can be divided into "occurrence, confirmation and restore".
With three states of "occurrence, confirmation and restore", you can set text strings for corresponding display, but
also the background color and text color for various state displays.
• State display text string/color classification(background color and text color)/state display settings
"Setting Alarm Displays", page 9-60
• Setting of "maintain confirmation log".
"Alarm System Settings", page 9-82

Level
The alarm contents set in the same alarm ID can be divided according to levels(1 to 8).
After the alarm contents are divided by the degree of significance, they can be displayed orderly according to level, or
the levels are displayed by different colors (background color and text color) for easy check of alarm display.
Low High

9 Level 1<Level 2<Level 3<Level 4<Level 5<Level 6<Level 7<Level 8


SETTING BASIC PARTS

• Display sequence/classification of color (background color and text color)


"Setting Alarm Displays", page 9-60
• Setting Level
"Option setting mode", page 9-91

Reference After combination of alarm state, level, background color and text color, they can be set as easily
identifiable alarm display.

1st alarm
In the case of absence of "Occurrence" state of alarm (generated alarm are in previous state of "restore"), the text
color and background color of the first alarm can be changed. The alarm contents can be highlighted as a 1st factor.

Point 1st alarm cannot be used in the case of real-time display.

9-56 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Normal Alarm, Extended Alarm


In VT3, you can select the following alarm data acquisition modes:
• Normal • Extended (sequential device) • Extended (individual device)
Number of alarm points and monitoring methods for alarm detecting devices set in each mode are different.

Reference Setting the acquisition mode


"Alarm System Settings", page 9-82

Item Common Extended(sequential device) Extended(individual device)


Alarm detection device Word Device(Continuous) Word device/bit device(Continuous) Word device/bit device(any)
Alarm number 512 4096/256 4096/256
Alarm detection cycle Fast Slow
Influence upon alarm
detection cycle Low Adjusted by sampling speed

Point The alarm isn't detected within the following cycle.


• During migration to the System mode screen
• PLC data folder currently being executed
• When computer(VT STUDIO) and VT3 are sending/receiving data
• When remote COM tools are being used(VT3 function pause)

Normal alarm
9
Select the number of alarm detection device for Normal alarm

SETTING BASIC PARTS


The connected word device enables alarm detection using up to 32 devices.
Thatís to say: 1 word=16 bits
32(devices) X16=512 points
You can set and detect the alarms of 512 points.

Alarm detection device monitoring for Normal alarm


Alarm detection device monitoring methods for common alarm are shown in the following schematic drawing.
Numerical Value
Display
VT3
Text Display

Message
Display
12345
Alarm Display
PLC
Video Display
12345
Animation
Display
Function Controls
ABCD Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings
Device monitoring
interval internally set on VT3: T

The state of all devices at the monitored


Monitored target target are updated at time T.
・Devices in currently displayed page T increases as the number of monitored targets increases.
・Alarms (normal)
・Trend graph (normal)
・System memory area
…etc

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-57


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Extended alarm

The number of alarm detection devices when extended alarm (sequential device)
is selected.
Alarm detection can be executed by using up to 256 sequential devices.

Specifying word devices


256(devices)X16=4096 points
You can set and detect the alarms of 4096 points.

Specifying bit devices


256(devices)X1=256 points
You can set and detect the alarms of 256 points.

The number of alarm detection devices when extended alarm (individual device)
is selected.
Alarm detection can be executed by using up to 256 devices.

Specifying word devices


256(devices)X16=4096 points
You can set and detect the alarms of 4096 points.

9 Specifying bit devices


256(devices)X1=256 points
SETTING BASIC PARTS

You can set and detect the alarms of 256 points.

9-58 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Alarm detection device monitoring for extended alarm


Alarm detection device monitoring methods for extended alarm are shown in the following schematic drawing.

VT3

12345
PLC
12345

ABCD

Device monitoring
interval internally set on VT3: T

Monitored target

Monitored target A Monitored target B


・Devices in currently displayed page ・Alarms (extended)
・Alarms (normal)
・Trend graph (normal)
・System memory area
…etc

T increases as the number of monitoring tar-gets increases.


9
Monitored target A is always updated at each T. However, since there are many devices for monitored target B, they

SETTING BASIC PARTS


shall be divided to monitor alarm detection devices. And, division of B is separately updated at each T.

Division of monitored target B


(1) T A+B (1) is updated.
B (1)
(2) T A+B (2) is updated.
B (2)
(3) T A+B (3) is updated.
B (3)
       


Numerical Value
 (N) T A+B (N)   is updated.
B (N) Display

Text Display
Sampling speed Message
Display
Sampling speed Description
Alarm Display
Low (screen renewal Priority is given to updating of monitored target A. For this reason, the update cycle (time it
priority) takes forall devices on monitored target B to update once) ofmonitored target B is extended. Video Display

 Animation
Medium
 Display
Function Controls
High speed (alarm Priority is given to updating monitored target B.(The update cycle of monitored target B is short- Device
detection priority) ened.) For this reason, the time it takes to updatemonitored target A increases. BMP File
Switching
Sampling speed VNC Display
Settings
"Alarm System Settings", page 9-82

Please use extended alarm in case there are many devices requiring alarm detection and the monitoring cycle of
alarm detection device is very slow.

Point When there are many alarm detection devices during data recording of extended alarms, data
acquisition time (recording time) differs a lot from occurrence time of alarm (actual occurrence
time).

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-59


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Setting Alarm Displays


Parts(P) -> Basic parts(P) -> Alarm display(A)

Setting alarm displays in "Alarm display" window.


"Alarm display" window can be opened using either of the following methods.
• Double-click of alarm display.
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By opening the menu by clicking the right mouse button, and selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)"

Setting

9
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Item Description
Alarm ID Select alarm ID(0 to 3)to be displayed.
Device settings *1
After clicking the button, the system setting screen of alarm will be displayed.
Message setting *1
Setting display mode of alarm.
Log display : according to the state number of alarm detection device(bit), the alarm
Display mode contents are displayed as per "sequencing conditions".
Real-time display: the alarm contents of alarm detection devices corresponding to bit
of ON(or OFF)state are displayed as per "sequencing conditions".
Select the sequencing methods of alarm contents.
Time : the last alarm content is displayed at the top.
Counting : the alarm contents with maximum cumulative number are displayed
at the top.
Sort conditions *2 Alarm No. : the alarm contents with smaller alarm No. are displayed at the top.
Level+ time : the alarm contents with higher level are collated in priority sequence,
or, collated in time sequence if within the same level.
Level+ counting: the alarm contents with higher level are collated in priority sequence,
or, collated in cumulative number if within the same level.
After selection, the alarm contents are displayed in inverse sequence according to the
Reverse
sequencing methods set in "Sequencing conditions".
Set the display digit number of alarm(1 to 100 bits). Set one character as one digit for
1-byte characters and one character as two digits for 2-byte characters.Backspace
Number of Display digit *3
shall be added when setting of date, time, state and alarm frequency. Please add
required backspace according to respective digit number.
Specify number of digits with After selection, you can set the display digit number for various display items. The digit
each display items number for various display items can be set in "Display item" tab.
*1 "Alarm System Settings", page 9-82
*2 In VT1, alarm contents for log display are displayed in time sequence; alarm contents for real-time display are
displayed in alarm No. sequence.

9-60 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Item Description
Set the alarm line number(1 to 48 lines) to be displayed. Please drag the scroll bar if
Number of Display line *3 you intend to check alarm log exceeding the displayed line number up to 48.
Even-numbered lines can be only set when "line mode" selects "2-line display".
Line mode Set if an alarm is displayed in 1 or 2 lines.
Display occurrence, in one line
After selection, three states (occurrence, confirm and restore) are displayed in 1 line.
confirmation restore
After selection, alarm permits horizontal scroll automatically. The number of display
Horizontal scroll
lines at this time is fixed to one line.
When horizontal scroll is selected and this checkbox is marked, messages are displayed
Fill spaces between messages
with the spacing between messages shifted.
Vertical scroll After selection, alarm contents permit vertical scroll automatically.
Scroll bar After selection, a scroll bar will be displayed at right of alarm display.
After selection, title line is displayed. This can be set only when line mode selects 1
Show title
line display.
You can select the text used for display from "bitmap font/stroke font/image font/
Windows font".
Font *4 When this checkbox is marked, stroke font is used. Stroke front cannot be set when
the number of display digits is set to 51 or more, or the number of display lines is set to
26 or more.
This item is displayed when Windows font is selected. The fonts to be used in graphics
List of available fonts
data are displayed in the list. Select the fonts to be used.
The fonts not specified in the font list can be set. After font type and size are set in
Font setting
"Select font" window, the fonts will be added to the list of available fonts.
State display After selection, the text strings of "Occur/confirm/restore" are displayed with full-angle
string 4 characters or 8 half-width characters.
Set the display text string for "Occurrence" state.
Occurrence
In alarm system setting, initial value for alarm trigger of alarm ID is:
"Occurrence ↑"/"Occurrence↑/recovery↓" :ON
"Occurrence↓" :OFF
9
Set the display text string for "confirmation" state.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


State display
text string In alarm system setting, initial value set for "maintain confirmation log" of alarm ID is:
Confirm Yes : CHK
No : without text string

Set the display text string for “restore” state.


In alarm system setting, initial value for alarm trigger of alarm ID is:
Restore
"Occurrence↑/recovery↓" : OFF
"Occurrence↑"/"Occurrence↓": without text string
Select display
After selection, only selected contents are displayed in alarm display.
details
Select display For alarm level(1 to 8), display/hiding is selected separately. After selection, the level Numerical Value
Level
details is displayed. Display
For the "occurrence/confirmation/restore" of alarm state, display/hiding is selected
State Text Display
separately. After selection, the state is displayed.
In alarm display, label "Ab_****" is automatically assigned as initial value. Correct this Message
Display
Label label as necessary. (**** is the creation number. A number starting from 0000 is
appended.) Alarm Display

*3 The number of display lines differs on the VT1 and VT3 as follows: Video Display

Item VT1 VT3 Animation


Display
Number of display lines 1 to 36 lines 1 to 48 lines Function Controls
Device

*4 "6-4 About Fonts" BMP File


Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-61


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Cautions related to sort conditions in real-time display


Display as per sequencing conditions is impossible in the following cases.

Example 1 Processing is set as "overlapping old alarms" when memory size is exceeded, and real-time alarm
display is collated according to generating sequence.

Occurrence Count Alarm Message Time

Alarm No.3 70 Workpiece blockage 17:10

Alarm No.1 40 Low on raw materials 17:01


Occurrence count order
Alarm No.5 20 Source pressure drop 11:10

Alarm No.2 10 Rise in cooling water temperature 10:30

If the log overflows without alarm Nos. 2 and 5 restored

Thick line appears.


Occurrence Count Alarm Message Time

Alarm No.2 10 Rise in cooling water temperature 10:30


Alarm No. order
Alarm No.5 20 Source pressure drop 11:10

Alarm No.3 70 Workpiece blockage 17:10


Occurrence count order
Alarm No.1 40 Low on raw materials 17:01

9 In case the log hasnít spilled over, it allows display as per sequencing conditions. But, when the generated alarm
hasnít recovered, but spilled over from log, the spillover alarm is displayed in alarm No. sequence.
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Example 2 Processing is set as "Stop alarm monitoring" when memory size is exceeded, while log display (time
sequence) and real-time display (time sequence) are used for alarm display.
When new alarm No. 8,9 have generated and exceeded the memory size,
Log display(time sequence): log display is not updated.

Occurrence Count Alarm Message Time

Alarm No.3 40 Workpiece blockage 17:10

Alarm No.1 60 Low on raw materials 17:01


Chronological order
Alarm No.5 20 Source pressure drop 16:50

Alarm No.2 10 Rise in cooling water temperature 10:30

Real time display (chronological order): Alarms that newly occurred are displayed.
Thick line appears.
Occurrence Count Alarm Message Time

Alarm No.8 100 Workpieces full 18:15


Alarm No. order
Alarm No.9 5 Unit stopped 18:30

Alarm No.3 40 Workpiece blockage 17:10


Chronological order
Alarm No.1 60 Low on raw materials 17:01

Since log hasn’t been updated, the log display will not be updated (the logs of alarm No. 8,9 are not maintained).
During real-time display, the latest alarm is displayed in alarm No. sequence (the Occurrence frequency and time,
etc, of latest alarm No.8,9 is displayed).
Processing when memory sizeis exceeded
"Alarm System Settings", page 9-82

9-62 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Example 3 When log display (time sequence) and real-time display (time sequence) are used for alarm display.

Log display (chronological order)

Occurrence Count Alarm Message Time

Alarm No.3 4 Workpiece blockage 17:10

Alarm No.1 6 Low on raw materials 17:01


Chronological order
Alarm No.5 2 Source pressure drop 16:50

Alarm No.2 1 Rise in cooling water temperature 10:30

Real time display (chronological order)

Occurrence Count Alarm Message Time

Alarm No.3 4 Workpiece blockage 17:10

Alarm No.1 6 Low on raw materials 17:01


Chronological order
Alarm No.5 2 Source pressure drop 16:50

Alarm No.2 1 Rise in cooling water temperature 10:30

If alarm Nos. 2 and 5 are deleted in the log display by "Delete 1 line"
(key entry switch), etc. when alarm Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 5 are not restored

9
Log display (chronological order)

Occurrence Count Alarm Message Time

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Alarm No.3 4 Workpiece blockage 17:10
Chronological order
Alarm No.1 6 Low on raw materials 17:01

Alarm No.5 2 Source pressure drop 16:50 These disappear from


Alarm No.2 1 Rise in cooling water temperature 10:30 log display.

Real time display (chronological order)


Thick line appears.
Occurrence Count Alarm Message Time
Numerical Value
Alarm No.2 1 Rise in cooling water temperature 10:30
Alarm No. order Display

Alarm No.5 2 Source pressure drop 16:50


Text Display

Alarm No.3 4 Workpiece blockage 17:10 Message


Chronological order Display
Alarm No.1 6 Low on raw materials 17:01
Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-63


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Line mode
When 1-line display mode is set, time display, alarm frequency display, state display, alarm level, word log and alarm
message are displayed in 1 line.
When 2-line mode is set, time display, alarm frequency display, state display, alarm level and word log are displayed
at upper line, while alarm message displayed at lower line.

1-line display 2-lines display


08:48:25 CHK Workpiece blockage 08:48:25 CHK
08:51:15 ON Source pressure drop Workpiece blockage
09:03:18 ON Workpiece blockage 08:51:15 ON
Source pressure drop
09:03:18 ON
Workpiece blockage

When "Specify the digit number of various display items" are set, and line mode is set as "2-line display", display digit
number are decided by either first line or second line with bigger digit number.

1-line display of occurrence, confirmation and restore


Display item: alarm message, alarm state, time of occurrence, time of confirmation, time of restore
(1) When "1-line display of occurrence, confirmation (2) When "1-line display of occurrence, confirmation
and restore" isn't selected and restore" is selected

Message State Occurrence Confirmatio Restore Message State Occurrence Confirmatio Restore
9 Conveyor error stop Occurrence 03/15 12:00 Conveyor error stop Occurrence 03/15 12:00
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Message State Occurrence Confirmatio Restore Message State Occurrence Confirmatio Restore
Conveyor error stop Confirmation 03/15 12:10 Conveyor error stop Confirmation 03/15 12:00 03/15 12:10
Conveyor error stop Occurrence 03/15 12:00

Message State Occurrence Confirmatio Restore Message State Occurrence Confirmatio Restore
Conveyor error stop Restore 03/15 12:20 Conveyor error stop Restore 03/15 12:00 03/15 12:10 03/15 12:20
Conveyor error stop Confirmation 03/15 12:10
Conveyor error stop Occurrence 03/15 12:00

9-64 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Display item: alarm message, alarm state, date(occur, confirm, restore)


(3) When "1-line display of occurrence, confirmation (4) When "1-line display of occurrence, confirmation
and restore" is selected (same case in VT1) and restore" isnít selected

Message State Date/time Message State Date/time


Conveyor error stop Occurrence 03/15 12:00 Conveyor error stop Occurrence 03/15 12:00

Message State Date/time Message State Date/time


Conveyor error stop Confirmation 03/15 12:10 Conveyor error stop Confirmation 03/15 12:10
Conveyor error stop Occurrence 03/15 12:00

Message State Date/time Message State Date/time


Conveyor error stop
Conveyor error stop
Restore 03/15 12:20
Confirmation 03/15 12:10
Conveyor error stop Restore 03/15 12:20
9

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Conveyor error stop Occurrence 03/15 12:00

Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-65


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Horizontal scroll and vertical scroll


When the "Horizontal scroll"/"Vertical scroll" checkbox is marked, the message is displayed scrolled horizontally or vertically as follows:

Content of alarms that are occurring


Source pressure drop
Workpiece blockage
Low on raw materials
Cover A open
Water tank temperature drop

Horizontal scroll "Fill spaces


Horizontal scroll between messages" set Vertical scroll
Source pressure drop Source pressure drop Source pressure drop
Workpiece blockage
Low on raw materials
drop pressure drop Workpiece blockage
Cover A open

Workpiece blockage Low on raw materials


Workpiece blockage
blockage Low on Cover A open Low on raw materials
Cover A open

raw materials A open Water tank temperature drop

9 Low on drop Source pressure drop Low on raw materials


Cover A open
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Cover A open

Source pressure drop

• In the case of horizontal scroll, the next line is displayed when the message content of the
Point
currently displayed line disappears.
• If "Reduce interval of message" is selected during horizontal scroll, the alarm contents set
in iMessagei of alarm system setting "Message" will be continuously displayed with 4-digit
interval.
• As shown in above-specified examples, next alarm content will be displayed after 4-digit
space is reserved for "Initial pressure drops  Workpiece blockage".
• In the case of vertical scroll, the next scroll operation starts after all currently displayed
lines disappear.
• When the "Horizontal scroll"/"Vertical scroll" checkbox is marked, themessage display
does not become a key entry part.

Reference The scroll speed can be changed.


"Parts", page 12-21
9-66 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Scroll bar
The length of scroll bar represents all alarms, and the length of position cursor represents the position and
percentage of alarms displayed.

Currently occurring alarm (when "Real time


Alarm display display" is selected)
Alarm log (when "Log display" is selected)
09 : 03 : 18  CHK  Workpiece blockage 09 : 03 : 18  CHK  Workpiece blockage
08 : 59 : 46  OFF  Source pressure drop 08 : 59 : 46  OFF  Source pressure drop
08 : 51 : 15  ON   Source pressure drop 08 : 51 : 15  ON   Source pressure drop
08 : 35 : 21  ON   Cover A open
Position cursor

"Control scrollbar directly", page 9-79

Title line
Display items selected in "Display item" tab of alarm can be displayed at topmost section of alarm display.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Display Item Item Name

Date(occur/confirm/restore) Date

Occurrence count Count

Alarm state State

Alarm message Message


Numerical Value
Items are arranged and displayed in order from the top of Display
the Select display item column.
Text Display
Title line Date Count State Message Message
Display
00/05/30 00:00:00 3 Occurrence Motor rpm drop
Alarm Display
00/05/30 00:00:10 3 Confirmation Motor rpm drop
Video Display
Alarm display 00/05/30 00:00:25 25 Occurrence Workpiece supply error
Animation
00/05/30 00:03:35 3 Restore Motor rpm drop Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-67


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Display items

Item Description
Select one ore more alarm display items, and enable them to be displayed according to selected sequence.
• Alarm message • Restored date
• Alarm state • Occurrence count *1
Select display item
• Date(occur, confirm, restore) • Alarm level
• Occurred date • Word log*2
• Confirmed date

9 Add
Select the intended items from candidate column of display items. After clicking ((add)
button, the selected items will be added to "Select display item" column.
Select the intended items from "Select display item" column. After clicking ((delete) )
Delete
SETTING BASIC PARTS

button, the selected items will be deleted from "Select display item" column.
Up/Down Switch the display sequence of display items in "Select display item" column.
Item Select items from display items of "Select display item" column.
Set the item names of various display items displayed from ìSelect display itemî column to title line.

Display items Initial value of item name


Alarm message Message
Alarm state State
Date (occur/confirm/restore) Date
Item name Occurred date ON
Confirmed date Confirm
Restored date Restore
Occurrence count Count
Alarm level Level
Word log Word log
Item setting

Number of display Set the number of display digits of various display items in "Select display item" column. This can
digits be set by clicking "Setting" tab to specify the number of display digit of various display items.
Display vertical right
After selection, vertical lines will be displayed at right-hand of display items of alarm.
line of ruled line
Display date After selection, the time (YY/MM/DD) of alarm will be displayed.
Year not
After selection, year is not displayed.
displayed
Date format

4-digit display
After selection, year is displayed in 4-digit.
of year
Display time After selection, the time (hour, minute, second) of alarm is displayed.
Second not
After selection, second is not displayed.
displayed
Select the display data format of word log from "Unsigned decimal/signed decimal/BCD".
display format

Data Format
Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's complement format.
Word log

Decimal point Set the position (0 to 6 digits) where the decimal point is inserted referenced to the
position *3 lowermost digit. To not insert a decimal point, set "0".
Zero suppress When this checkbox is marked, unwanted zeros are no longer displayed.

9-68 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

*1 The maximum occurrence frequency of alarm is 65535. This value is still maintained even if itís exceeded.
When the number of display digit of various display items is specified, "----" is displayed if the frequency
exceeds the number of display digit.
Up to 65535 is accumulated within VT3.
*2 "Option setting mode", page 9-91
When the number of display digit of various display items is specified, "----" is displayed if the log value
exceeds the number of display digit of word log.
*3 Example of setting of decimal point position
"Setting Numerical Value Displays", page 9-4

Reference Number of display digit of time display

Year Month
(4-digit display) (English annotation) Date Space (AM/PM display) Time Min. Sec.
Example 06(2006) / 01(Jan) / 23 (AM) 10 : 23 : 56
Number 2(4) 1 2(3) 1 2 1 0(2) 2 1 2 1 2
of digits

Max. 22 digits

Point The alarms in occurrence state prior to switching-off will be resumed once switching-off.

Alarm (1)

9
Alarm (1): 1 count before power OFF.
Alarm (2): 1 count before power OFF + 1
Alarm (2) count at power ON.
(Alarm occurrences when the

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Alarm (3) power is OFF are not counted.)
Alarm (3): Counted as 1 count before power
OFF and as 1 count at power ON.
Alarm (4)
Alarm (4): 1 count at power ON.
power

Power cut

Alarm level Numerical value


display

Text display
"Classification of alarm contents", page 9-56
Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-69


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Color/image frame

Item Description
Image frame Image frame can be used after selection.
Style Select the style of image frame.
Image
Free style If this item is selected when image frame is used, the display images can be changed.
frame
Change *1 When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image" window is displayed.
Color Select the color system of image frame.

9
After selection, you can select the background color of alarm display. If not selected,
Background color
the background color is transparent.
Select the color specify method of background color from "don't classify color/classify
Background color

Color specify method state/classify level/classify state+level/classify item". When line mode is set to "2-line
SETTING BASIC PARTS

display", "classify item" cannot be selected.


When "classify state/classify level/classify state+level/classify item" is selected from color specify
Color setting *2 method, "Alarm display background color setting" window will be displayed after clicking (Color
setting) button. So, you can set in detail the background color matching various settings.
Basic color *3 Select the background color.
Title *3 You can select background color of title line after selection.
Primary alarm *3 You can select background color after selection.
Frame The frame of alarm display will be displayed after selection.
Frame/Ruled Lines

Frame color *3 Select frame color of alarm display.


Vertical of Line type *3 Set the type of vertical line.
ruled line Line color*3 Set the color of vertical line.
Horizonta
Horizontal line will be displayed after selection.
l line
Horizontal line
Line type*3 Set the type of horizontal line.
Line color*3 Set the color of horizontal line.
Select the color specify method of background color from "donít classify color/classify
Color specify mode state/classify level/classify state+level/classify item".
When line mode is set to "2-line display", "classify item" cannot be selected.
When "classify state/classify level/classify state+level/classify item" is selected from color specify
Color setting *2 method, "Alarm display background color setting" window will be displayed after clicking (Color
setting) button. So, you can set in detail the background color matching various settings.
Text color *3 Select the text color of alarm display.
Bold Sets the text to bold.
Basic Color

Text
Decorati Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Text color

on Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
Text shadow color *3
decoration. The settings are the same as "Text color".
Title line You can select the text color of title line after selection.
Text color *3 Select the text color of title line.
Bold Sets the text to bold.
Title line

Text
Decorati Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
on Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
Text shadow color *3
decoration. The settings are the same as "Text color".

9-70 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Item Description
1st alarm You can select the text color of 1 time alarm after selection.
Text color*3 Selects the text color.
Primary alarm*4

Decoration Bold Sets the text to bold.


Text color

Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Text

Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.

Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
Text shadow color *3
decoration. The settings are the same as "Text color".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part
BLK*3
blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 For the details, refer to "Change the style of image frame", page 9-40
*2 Refer to the following descriptions.
*3 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"
*4 1st alarm
"Classification of alarm contents", page 9-56

Color settings(background color)


Describe the color settings of background color according to different color specify methods.

Classify state

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Item Description
Color Occurrence Set the background color of alarm line in occurrence state. Numerical Value
Display
specified by Confirm Set the background color of alarm line in confirmed state.
state Restore Set the background color of alarm line in restore state. Text Display
Basic Color Select the background color. Message
Display
Title You can select background color of title line after selection.
Primary alarm You can select the background color of 1 time alarm after selection. Alarm Display

The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK Video Display
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Animation
"Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2 Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-71


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Classify level

Item Description
Color
Specified by Level 1 to 8 Select the background of various lines according to different alarm levels(1 to 8).
level
Basic Color Select the background color.
Title You can select background color of title line after selection.
Primary alarm You can select the background color of 1 time alarm after selection.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK
9 The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
"Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Classify state+level

Item Description
Color Set the text colors after combination of state (occur, confirm, restore) and alarm level(1
Specified by Color settings to 8). Click and select the combination of state and level, then select the text color
state/level through color setting.
Basic Color Select the background color.
Title You can select background color of title line after selection.
Primary alarm You can select the background color of 1 time alarm after selection.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
"Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

9-72 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Classify item

Item Description
Color Specified by Item Select the text color of various display items.
Basic Color Select the background color.
Title You can select background color of title line after selection.
Primary alarm You can select the background color of 1 time alarm after selection.

BLK
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval. 9
"Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Color setting (text color)
Describe the color settings of text color according to different color specify methods.

Classify state

Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
Item Description BMP File
Switching
Text color Set the text color of various states (occur, confirm, restore).
Color Specified

VNC Display
Bold Sets the text to bold. Settings
Text
by state

Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Decoration
Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
Text shadow color
The settings are the same as "Text color".
Basic Color Selects the text color.
Title You can select the text color of title line after selection.
Primary alarm You can select the text color of 1 time alarm after selection.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
"Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-73


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Classify level

Item Description
Text color Select the text color of various levels (1 to 8).
Color Specified

Bold Sets the text to bold.


Text
by level

Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Decoration
Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text decoration.
Text shadow color
The settings are the same as "Text color".
9 Basic Color
Title
Selects the text color.
You can select the text color of title line after selection.
Primary alarm You can select the text color of 1 time alarm after selection.
SETTING BASIC PARTS

The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
"Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

9-74 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Classify state+level

Item Description
Set the text colors after combination of state (occur, confirm, restore) and alarm level(1
Text color to 8). Click and select the combination of state and level, then select the text color
through color setting.
Color Specified

Color settings
by State/level

Bold Sets the text to bold.


Decoration

Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
Text

Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
Text shadow color decoration.
The settings are the same as "Text color". 9
Basic Color Selects the text color.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Title You can select the text color of title line after selection.
Primary alarm You can select the text color of 1 time alarm after selection.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
"Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-75


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Classify item

Item Description
Text color Select the text color of various display items.
Color Specified

Bold Sets the text to bold.


Text
Shadow Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it has a 3D effect.
by Item

Decoration

9 Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. so that it looks engraved.
Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
Text shadow color decoration.
The settings are the same as "Text color".
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Basic Color Selects the text color.


Title You can select the text color of title line after selection.
Primary alarm You can select the text color of 1 time alarm after selection.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.

"Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

9-76 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Key entry

Item Description
Key entry *1,2 When this checkbox is marked, key entry parts are set.
Key entry order *1 Set the key entry order when there are multiple key entry parts on the screen.
Select by switch *1 After selection, you can execute key entry by clicking alarm display.

Function controls by apply *3


When performing "Execute" (by pressing "Execute" key entry switch) after selection,
9
Key entry

the settings in "Option setting mode" of alarm system setting will be executed.
*2 After selection, you can select directly various lines of alarm display on the touch
Select message line directly

SETTING BASIC PARTS


panel.
After selection, you can perform "Execute" (by pressing "Execute" key entry switch)
Select and Apply
while selecting directly various lines of alarm display on the touch panel.
When this checkbox is marked, the scroll bar on the touch panel can be directly
Control scrollbar directly *2
operated.
Notify cursor position After selection, notify alarm No. of cursor position.
Set the word device used for notifying cursor position alarm No.. When the "Browse"
Notified word device *4
Notify cursor

button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
position *2

Select the data format to be written to the notified word device from "Unsigned
Data Format
decimal/BCD".
Cursor position ID offset Set the numerical value to be written to notified word device after alarm No. is added. Numerical Value
Display
Notify ID with each cursor
After selection, notify cursor position ID with each cursor moves.
move
Text Display

*1 "6-3 Key Entry Parts" Message


Display
*2 For details of each item, refer to the descriptions that follow.
Alarm Display
*3 "Option setting mode", page 9-91
*4 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell" Video Display

"6-7 Setting of Devices" Animation


Display
Function Controls
Reference Key repeat Device

"Other", page 12-31 BMP File


Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-77


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

 Key entry
After "key entry" is selected, they are turned into key entry parts. You can scroll up or down, clear alarm log, and
notify cursor position to notified word device, etc.
By clicking "scroll up" or "scroll down" key entry switch, all alarms in active mode that are outside of alarm display
screen range can be displayed. You can confirm which part of alarms is displayed through scroll bar.
Key entry part mode, key entry order, selection by switch
"6-3 Key Entry Parts"

Frame blinks
(Active mode)
Scroll bar

"Scroll up" key entry switch


Cursor Source pressure drop
Workpiece blockage
"Scroll down" key entry switch
Colors of characters and CANCEL

Remaining materials low


background are inverted. ENTER

Touching "scroll down" moves


the cursor and displays alarms
Source pressure drop outside ofthe frame area.
Workpiece blockage CANCEL

Cursor moves. Remaining materials low

9
ENTER
SETTING BASIC PARTS

In addition, after pressing key entry switches of "Delete 1 line", "Clear all" and "Clear the same alarms", you can
delete alarm logs selected under log display mode.
"Delete 1 line" key entry switch : delete the selected alarm logs.
"Clear all" key entry switch : delete all alarm logs.
"Clear the same alarms" key entry switch : delete all alarm logs of the same alarm No..

ً χ ً χ
08:58:46OFFSource pressure drop 08:58:46OFFSource pressure drop
ٕ ω ٕ ω
08:51:15ONSource pressure drop 08:51:15ONSource pressure drop
ENTER ENTER
08:35:21ONWater vat temperature drop DEL
08:22:15ONWorkpiece blockage DEL

Touching the "Delete 1 line" key entry


switch (Delete) deletes the currently
selected alarm log.

Point • If "Delete 1 line" and "Clear the same alarms", the occurrence frequency will not be
cleared.
• If "Clear all", the occurrence frequency will be cleared.
• You can only perform "Delete 1 line" for "occurrence". The alarms will not be deleted even
if performing "confirmation" and "restore". But, if "1 line display of occurrence,
confirmation and restore" is set, the alarms will be deleted.

9-78 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

By pressing "confirmation" key entry switch, you can record the date and time of confirmed alarm logs, and save
them as alarm logs.

08:58:46 ON Source pressure drop 09:01:15 CHK Source pressure drop


08:51:15 OFF Water vat temperature drop 08:58:46 ON Source pressured drop
CANCEL CANCEL

08:35:21 ON Water vat temperature drop ENTER


08:51:15 OFF Water vat temperature drop ENTER

Select the alarm log and touch the The date and time checked for the
"Confirm" key entry switch. alarm log are memorized.

Point • After confirmed and restored alarm logs are selected, the confirmed date and time cannot
be saved even if pressing "confirmation" key entry switch.
• You can only perform "confirmation" for the latest "occurrence" of alarms. When the
"occurrence" of alarms with over two same alarm Nos. is displayed, no "confirmation" can
be executed for old "occurrence" of alarms.

Control scrollbar directly


When "Control scroll bar directly" is selected, you can control it by clicking the scroll bar, without needing to use
"Page up" or "Page down" key entry switch. The scroll bar will move up by pressing the upper part, or move down by
pressing the lower part.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Source pressure drop Source pressure drop
Workpiece blockage CANCEL
Workpiece blockage CANCEL

Remaining materials low ENTER


Remaining materials low ENTER

When the top half (bottom half) of the scroll bar is touched, the area where the cursor is located is displayed at the
bottommost line (topmost line) of the message display, and the cursor is displayed at the topmost line (bottommost
line). (This is the same operation as when a "Page down" or "Page up" key entry switch is used.)
Numerical Value
Display
Point When the alarm mode of alarm display is switched to display mode, click the section outside
of the scroll bar. Text Display

Message
Display
Switching from the Active mode to the Display mode when the "Select message line directly" Alarm Display

checkbox is marked Video Display

When the alarm display set to "Select message line directly" is in active mode, the method of switching to display Animation
Display
mode is as follows: Function Controls
Device
• By pressing the "Cancel" key entry switch
BMP File
• By touching the line where the cursor is located Switching
VNC Display
Settings

Point • Do not change the switch area when "Control scroll bar directly" or "Select message line
directly" are used. Doing so might cause message displays to malfunction.
• When Windows fonts are used, if the font size is too small, the info line may be smaller than
the smallest switch area. In this case, "Directly select info line" cannot operate normally.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-79


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Notify cursor position


When the "Notify cursor position" checkbox is marked, the notified word device can be notified of the cursor position.
Select alarms through "Scroll up" or "Scroll down" key entry switch. After pressing ìconfirmationî key entry switch, the
numerical value corresponding to alarm No. will be written to notified word device.

When Cursor position ID offset = 0 and Notified word device = DM0100

Write
Source pressure drop Notified word device
Workpiece blockage
CANCEL

Remaining materials low ENTER DM0100 0

Alarm No.0

When selecting alarm No.0 and pressing "confirmation" key entry switch, numerical value 0 is written into notified word
device.

Write
Source pressure drop Notified word device
Workpiece blockage
CANCEL

Remaining materials low ENTER DM0100 1

9
Alarm No.5
SETTING BASIC PARTS

When selecting alarm No.5 and pressing "confirmation" key entry switch, numerical value 1 is written into notified word
device.

When Cursor position ID offset = 100 and Notified word device = DM0100

Write
Source pressure drop Notified word device
Workpiece blockage
CANCEL

Remaining materials low ENTER DM0100 100

Alarm No.0

When selecting alarm No.0 and pressing "confirmation" key entry switch, numerical value 100(0+100) is written into
notified word device.

Write
Source pressure drop Notified word device
Workpiece blockage
CANCEL

Remaining materials low ENTER DM0100 101

Alarm No.5

When selecting alarm No.5 and pressing "confirmation" key entry switch, numerical value 101(1+100) is written into
notified word device.

Reference When "Notify ID with cursor moves" is selected, the numerical value of alarm No. for selected lines
will be written into notified word device whenever the cursor moves.

9-80 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Preview

Alarm display will be previewed according to preview settings.


In addition, after(OK)button is clicked and the setting dialogue box is closed, the alarm message will be displayed in
edit window under the same state with preview display.

Item Description

Add
"Alarm preview setting" window *1 is displayed.
Add preview setting. 9
Delete Delete the selected preview setting.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


To Upper Move up the selected preview setting.
To Lower Move down the selected preview setting.
"Alarm preview setting" window is displayed.
Setting
Change the selected preview setting.
Copy the selected preview setting. The copied preview setting will be added to lower part of selected
Copy
preview setting.
Reset Reset as an alarm display for starting configuration.
*1 "Alarm preview setting" window

Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
Item Description BMP File
Switching
The content of settings will be displayed in alarm system setting(message). Select the alarm
Message VNC Display
message for preview display. Settings
State Select the alarm state for preview display.
Advanced After "Advanced settings"button is clicked, "Advance settings" window will be displayed. You can
execute preview settings of time of occurrence, time of confirmation, occurrence frequency, word
settings log and 1 time alarm.

Point The settings for preview display sometimes may differ from actual display.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-81


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Alarm System Settings


When alarm display is used, alarm system settings shall be required in addition to settings of alarm display parts.
Alarm system settings can be broadly classified into the following:
• "Setting" : setting of alarm detection devices, etc.
• "Message" : setting of alarm contents, etc.

1 System setting screen for alarm display


The alarm systemís setting screen is displayed by the following methods,
• Double-click alarm display parts, and click (Device setting), (Message setting) buttons in "Setting" tab of "Alarm
display" window.
• Click various alarm IDs in "alarm" of "System setting" tab of "workspace".
• Select "Resources(R)" -> "Alarm(A)" from the menu in that order.
Then, click alarm ID in "workspace".

2 For various IDs(0 to 3) in (workspace).


•Setting alarm detection device, etc, through “Setting”.
•Setting alarm contents, etc, through “Message”.

9
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Setting Message

9-82 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Setting

Specify alarm detection device for various IDs of alarm ID(0 to 3).

9
Item Description

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Select data acquisition mode of alarm from "common/extended (specifying
Logging Mode *1
sequential device)/extended (specifying individual device)".
Select alarm detection device from "word device/bit device". When "common" is
Specify mode
selected in data acquisition mode, word device is fixed.
Set the number of devices used for alarm detection.
Common : up to 32 sequential devices can be set
Point number of alarm: when "specify method" is for word device
32 devices X 16 = 512 points
Extended(sequential device)
: Up to 32 continuous devices can be set.
Point number of alarm: when "specify method" is for word device
Number of Devices 256 devices X 16 = 4096 points Numerical Value
*2 When Specify mode is Bit device Display
256 devices X 1 = 256 points
Extended(individual device) Text Display
: Up to 512 individual devices can be set.
Message
Point number of alarm: when "specify method" is for word device
Alarm Display
256 devices X 16 = 4096 points
detection Alarm Display
When Specify mode is Bit device
device
256 devices X 1 = 256 points
Video Display
Set the devices used in alarm detection(starting No.).
Animation
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the Display
*4 "Device settings" window.
Detection device Function Controls
Common : number of devices used continuously Device
Extended(sequential device) BMP File
: Number of devices used continuously Switching

Click(Device setting)button in "extended(specifying individual device)" mode. Set VNC Display


Device settings *5 Settings
alarm detection device in "Setting individual device" window.
Set the trigger type for detection.
Occurrence↑: ON(real-time display), startup(log display)
Trigger
Occurrence↓: OFF(real-time display), shutdown(log display)
Occurrence↑/recovery↓: ON(real-time display), startup and shutdown(log display)
Store confirmation In the alarm display of log display, set if the date and time of confirmed alarm is
log *3 saved as log when "confirm" key entry switch is pressed.
After selection, point the cursor to target alarm contents in alarm display. When
Alarm option
performing "Execute"(by pressing "Execute" key entry switch), the word device set
Alarm word value *6
in "Option setting mode" will be written into target word device.
Options
Word value Set the target word device into which the word value is written.
Target word
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
Device *4
"Device settings" window.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-83


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Item Description
After clicking (Advanced setting) button, the memory size and extended alarm can be
Advanced settings
set.
Displays which blocks of the total 12 blocks of memory size are in use. After clicking
Memory size *5
(Memory size) button, you can set in "Setting alarm memory size" window.
After selection, the rate of utilization of memory size will be saved to specified device.
The value will be updated in the following cases.
Rate of consumed
of memory size *8
• In the case of change over 5%
• When memory size over alarm is opened.
• In the case of memory size of 0%, 100%.
Memory size

Memory size
After selection, the set value reached by memory size will be notified.
over alarm
Sets the notified bit device.
Notified bit
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Advanced settings

Device *4
settings" window.
Nofity when
memory is Set in a unit of 1%.
consumed
Processing when
Select the processing method from "Overlapping old alarm/stop alarm monitoring"
memory sizeis
when memory size is exceeded.
exceeded *7
When "Extended(specifying sequential device)/extended(specifying individual device)"
Notify end of
is selected from data acquisition mode and then selected, send the notification that
Extended alarm
reading of alarm detection device has completed 1 week.
Extended alarm

Sets the notified bit device.


Notified bit
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Device *4
settings" window.
Reset notify bit

9
After selection, notified bit device will be set before next cycle of reading alarm
before execution
detection device.

Sampling Select sampling speed from "low speed(screen updating with a priority)/medium speed/
Speed *1
SETTING BASIC PARTS

high speed(alarm detection with a priority)".


*1 "Overview of Alarm Display", page 9-54
*2 For the restrictions on the number of devices, refer to the following descriptions.
•In the case of common alarm, the total number of alarm detection devices set by alarm ID(0 to 3) is within 32.
•In the case of extended alarm (specifying sequential device + specifying individual device), the total number
of alarm detection devices set by alarm ID(0 to 3) is within 256.
*3 In real-time alarm display on VT3, the date and time of confirmed alarm will be recorded to internal memory of
VT3 as logs, when "confirmation" key entry switch is pressed.
In the case of real-time display, "confirmation" will also be displayed in alarm state.

Point For the alarms ("occur") exceeding logs, when "confirmation" key entry switch is
pressed, "confirmation" will be displayed in real-time display, but no log is maintained.
Thus, when the same alarm is displayed in log, the alarm isnít displayed.

*4 Selectable from "PLC device"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*5 For details, see the following description.
*6 "Option setting mode", page 9-91
*7 On VT3, "Occur, confirm, restore" are incorporated into a single one for management. Thus, when the memory
size is exceeded under
"Overlapping old alarms", occurrence, confirmation and restore of old alarms will be deleted at the same time.
*8 Selectable from "PLC device / Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

9-84 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Number of Devices
When "Data acquisition mode" is set to "Extended (specifying individual device)", alarm detection device can be set.
Clicking the "Device settings" button displays the "Individualdevice settings" window.

Item Description
Up/Down Change the sequence of alarm detection device.

Memory size
After clicking “Memory size” button, "Setting alarm memory size" window will be displayed.
Here, you can set the memory size of various alarm IDs (0 to 3).

SETTING BASIC PARTS


There are total 12 blocks of memory size, which are distributed to various alarm IDs (0 to 3) for setting.
Alarm log is accumulated as "occurrence", and the total alarm IDs (0 to 3) can record up to 2400 logs (up to 1200
records for VT3-W4 series).
The maximum log number of various alarm IDs (0 to 3) is decided by the distributed number of blocks.
With respect to the number of records per block, 12 blocks 2400 records for non VT3-W4 series, so 200 records per Numerical Value
block, while 12 blocks 1200 records for VT3-W4 series, so 100 records per block. Display

Text Display

[Example] Distribution of number of blocks Number of logs Message


Display
Alarm ID0 : 8 blocks (8/12)... 1600
In non VT3-W4 Alarm Display
series, when alarm Alarm ID1 : 3 blocks (3/12)... 600
ID is assigned to 8/ Alarm ID2 : 0 blocks (0/12)... 0 Video Display
3/0/1 respectively
Alarm ID3 : 1 blocks (1/12)... 200 Animation
Display
Total 12 blocks (12/12) 2400
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching

Point During PC->VT data sending, the alarm log data saved to internal memory (SRAM) of VT3 will be VNC Display
Settings
cleared.
PC->VT Send data
"13-3 PC->VT Send Data"

Reference During PC->VT data sending, the alarm log data saved to internal memory (SRAM) of VT3 will be cleared.
• VT3 system mode
"5-6 Memory Clear", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Function control by devices
"Clear alarm log", page 9-124
• "12-7 Global Function Control"
• "Clear all" key entry switch
"Key entry", page 8-26
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-85
9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Message

Set alarm contents for various IDs of alarm ID (0 to 3).

Item Description
Alarm ID Display alarm ID (0 to 3) in edit.
Cut Cut the selected text.

9 Copy
Paste
Copy the selected text.
Paste the copied text to specified position.
Delete Delete the selected text.
SETTING BASIC PARTS

*1 Input (import) alarm in a unit of alarm ID from other VTS files/VT2 files or CSV files (*.csv), text
Import
files (UNICODE) (*.txt).
Export *1 Output (export) alarms in a unit of alarm ID from CSV files (*.csv) or text files (UNICODE) (*.txt).
Device No. Display device No. of alarm detection device.
Message entry field Input alarm contents. Up to 100 digits can be input.
*1 After clicking "Option setting mode", you can set the level, function, bit set, word value write and
Option setting mode
word log of various alarm contents.
*1 For details, see the following description.

Reference When "Option setting mode" is OFF.


• You can select continuous multiple message lines by clicking the message lines with the key held
down.
• You can select non-continuous multiple message lines by clicking messages lines with the key held
down.
• You can select all information by pressing and holding + A key.
• You can select continuous multiple lines in dragging range when selecting and dragging the message lines.
• When multiple message lines are selected, cut or copied, the text of selected lines will be cut or
copied. The setting of option setting mode cannot be cut or copied.
• When multiple-line texts are copied for paste from other applications (Microsoft Excel, etc), multiple
lines from the selected lines will be pasted.

When "Option setting mode" is ON.


• You can select continuous lines by clicking message lines with key held down.
• You can select non-continuous multiple message lines by clicking messages lines with the
key held down.
• You can select all information by pressing and holding + A key.
• When multiple message lines are selected and set in (Alarm item) window, the settings will be
updated to all selected message lines.
• Irrespective of 1 line or multiple lines are selected, you can cut, copy, paste and delete in lines.
However, this is executed only for the settings of option setting mode (level, function, bit set, word
value write and word log).

9-86 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Reference About display of device No. as well as alarm No.


• Alarm detection device: D M00000 Specify method: Word device
Device No.
"DM000000" represents bit 0 of DM00000. (Alarm No.0)
"DM000000" represents bit 1 of DM00000. (Alarm No.1)
:
"DM000000" represents bit 15 of DM00000. (Alarm No.15)
"DM00001 0" represents bit 0 of DM00001. (Alarm No.16)
"DM00001 1" represents bit 1 of DM00001. (Alarm No.17)
:
Example: when bit 1 and bit 15 of DM00000 is ON.
DM00000 1000 0000 0000 0010 = 8002H = 32770
DM00000 1 Message of alarm display
DM00000 15

• Alarm detection device: Relay01000 Specify method: Word device


Device No.
"01000 0" Represents relay 01000. (Alarm No.0)
"01000 1" Represents relay 01001. (Alarm No.1)
:
"01000 15" Represents relay 010015. (Alarm No.15)
"01100 0" Represents relay 01100. (Alarm No.16)
"01100 1" Represents relay 01101. (Alarm No.17) 9
:

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Example: message of alarm display 01000 15 when relay 01015
is ON.

Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-87


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Import, export
Importing alarms
Alarm contents are copied and pasted from other VTS files/VT2 files or CSV files(*.csv), text files(UNICODE) (*.txt).

1 Click the "Import" button in the screen for editing alarm system settings (message).
The "Import alarms" window is displayed.

Item Description
9 File Name Displays the name of the file to be imported as a full path.
When this item is clicked when the desired alarm to copy is in another file, the "Open Import
File selection
File" window is displayed for selection of the file.
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Alarm ID Select alarm ID to import.

Reference When you are importing alarms for the first time, the "Open Import File" window and not the "Import
alarms" window will be displayed. To open the "Import alarms" window, select the file and click the
"Open" button.

2 Click the "Select file" button.


The "Open Import File" window is displayed.

3 Select the files containing the alarm to import, and click "Open(O)" button.
The "Import alarms" window (file containing the alarm to import) is displayed.

9-88 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

4 Select the alarm to import from the alarm IDs in the "Import alarms" window, and click the "OK" button.
When imported from CSV files (*.csv), text files(UNICODE) (*.txt), the message will be imported to message entry
column of alarm ID being edited.
When imported from other VTS files/VT2 files, alarm ID and alarm contents in "Alarm import" window will be
imported.

Point Messages cannot be imported directly from VT1 files. To import from a VT1 file, first execute
either of the following:
• Open the VT1 file in VT STUDIO and then save the file as a VTS file.
• Export the file as a CSV file on VT BUILDER.

Exporting alarms
The alarm contents in the screen for editing the alarm system settings (message) can be output (exported) to a CSV
file (*.csv) or an UNICODE Text file(Excel format, *.txt).

1 Click (Export) button in edit screen of alarm system setting (message).


The "Export Alarms" window is displayed.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


2 Select the file type from "CSV file (MBCS)(*.csv)" or "text file (UNICODE)(*.txt)".

3 Enter the file name and save the file.


The alarm ID currently being edited is output as a CSV file or a Text file (UNICODE).

Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-89


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Example of CSV (UNICODE Text) file format

Export in CSV (UNICODE Import in CSV (UNIC


Text) file format Text) file format

9 Point • When CSV (UNICODE Text) files are imported, the values in the A column (device No.) are
not imported. Set the alarm detection devices on .VT STUDIO.
SETTING BASIC PARTS

• When you make a CSV (UNICODE Text) file, enter at least one character in cell A1. (in this
example, "Alarm")
• Enter the alarm content starting from cell B2.
• To import the alarm contents of VT1 files, export the alarm contents on VT BUILDER as a
CSV file, and import the CSV file on VT STUDIO.

Reference Example of format during text string switching

Export in CSV (UNICODE Import in CSV (UNICODE


Text) file format Text) file format

9-90 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Option setting mode

Set the following items for each alarm No.


Item Description
Alarm level *1 Sets the alarm level (1 to 8).
When this checkbox is marked, the function that is set when the "Apply" key entry switch
is pressed with the cursor at the target alarm details in the alarm display is executed.
Page switching : set page No..
Display local window : set window 1 to 3.
Function *2
Display global window 0
Display global window 1 Sets the global window No.
:
Display global window 7
When this checkbox is marked, the target bit device when the "Apply" key entry switch is
Set bit
pressed with the cursor at the target alarm details in the alarm display is executed is set.

9
Set bit *2
Sets the target bit device.
Target bit
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Device *3
settings" window.
Sets the word value (0 to 65535) to write to the target word device when the "Apply" key

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Write word value *2 entry switch is pressed with the cursor at the target alarm details in the alarm display is
pressed.
When this checkbox is marked and an alarm isdetected, the value preset to the target
Word log word device is read and recorded to the alarm log. Up to 256 word logs can be set for
all alarm IDs.
Word log
Sets the target word device.
Target word
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Device *3
settings" window.

*1 Level
"Classification of alarm contents", page 9-56
Numerical Value
"Setting", page 9-60 Display

*2 Function controls by apply


Text Display
"Key entry", page 9-77 Message
*3 Selectable from "PLC device" Display

"6-7 Setting of Devices" Alarm Display

Video Display

Point Global windows sometimes cannot be displayed due to restrictions in the number of devices, Animation
screen data size, number of key entry parts, overlapping data, and other factors. To display Display

multiple global windows simultaneously, thoroughly check operation on an actual working Function Controls
Device
unit. BMP File
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens" Switching
VNC Display
Global window Nofity error Settings
"Other", page 12-31

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-91


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Examples of How to Use Alarm Displays


This item describes display examples when displaying in real time, when displaying logs and when displaying how to
remedy alarms.

Example when displaying in real time

Alarm display setting example


Setting alarm displays
"Display mode" : Real-time display "Select display item" : Alarm message
"Sequencing conditions": Time "Item name" : Abnormality currently occurred
"Show title" : Checkbox marked

9
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Alarm system settings


"Logging Mode" : Normal
"Number of device" :1 "Trigger" :Occurrence ↑
"Alarm detection device" : PLC relay 1000

9-92 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Display example
To display only ON alarms from among alarms corresponding to alarm detection relays 1000 to 1015 in chronological
order.

Alarm No.0

Read Alarm detection device


Currently occurring error
1000 ON
Source pressure drop 1001 to 1015 OFF

Only relay 1000 is ON.

Alarm No.1

Read Alarm detection device


Currently occurring error
1000 OFF
Workpiece blockage
1001 to 1002 ON
Remaining materials low 1003 to 1015 OFF
Relays 1001 and 1002 are ON.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Alarm No.2

Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-93


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Example of a log display

Setting alarm displays


"Display mode" : Log display
"Sort condition" : Time
"Show title" : Checkbox marked

"Select display item": Date, Alarm state, Alarm message


"Item name" : Time, State, Alarm log

9
SETTING BASIC PARTS

9-94 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Alarm system settings


"Logging Mode" : Normal
"Number of device" :1 "Trigger" :Occurrence↑/recovery↓
"Alarm detection device" : PLC relay 1000

Display example
To display the alarm log corresponding to alarm detection relays 1000 to 1015 in chronological order

Alarm No.0 (source pressure drop) occurred at 09:03

Alarm detection device


Time State Alarm log
1000 OFF→ON(↑)
09:03 ON  Source pressure drop

State of relay 1000 changes


to ON.
9

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Alarm No.2 (low on raw materials) occurred at 10:14

Numerical Value
Display

Time State Alarm log Text Display


Alarm detection device
10:14 ON  Low on raw materials Message
09:03 ON  Source pressure drop 1002 OFF→ON(↑) Display

State of relay 1000 stays ON, Alarm Display

and state of relay 1002


Video Display
changes to ON.
Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-95


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Display example when displaying how to remedy alarms

How to remedy an alarm can be displayed as a message if you select the alarm for which the remedy is to be
displayed as an alarm message, and touching the "Apply" key entry switch.
The currently selected alarm No. is written to PLC data memory by "Notify cursor position" in the alarm display, and
the message (remedy) corresponding to the currently selected alarm No. is displayed as the message display by
specifying that data memory to the externally specified target word device.

Display example

Alarm display Message display

Alarm has occurred Remedy Alarm has occurred Remedy


Source pressure drop Source pressure drop Remedy for
workpiece blockage
Workpiece blockage Workpiece blockage alarm
Remaining materials low Remaining materials low (1)Open loader cover.
(2)Remove blocked
workpiece.
(3)Close the cover.

Select the alarm to display Touching "Apply" displays the


in the alarm display. remedy for the alarm on the
message display.

9 Editing alarm and message content


SETTING BASIC PARTS

The above example is for when the remedy for alarm No.1 (workpiece blockage) is set to message block No.1.
The remedy for each alarm No. is set to message displays.
Remedy for alarm No.0 -> Message block No.0
Remedy for alarm No.1 -> Message block No.1
Remedy for alarm No.2 -> Message block No.2
: :
"9-3 Setting Message Displays"

9-96 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Setting example
Setting alarm displays

Write the alarm No. to PLC data memory DM00100 by "Notify cursor position".
The alarm No. can be written to the notified word device by setting "Cursor position ID offset" to 0.
When alarm No.0 (source pressure drop) is selected, numerical value "0" is written to the notifiedword device,
and when alarm No.1 (workpiece blockage) is selected, numerical value "1" is writtento the notified word device.
Cursor position ID offset "Key entry", page 9-77 9

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Setting message displays

Sets data memory DM00100 on the PLCthat is set


to "Notified word device" in thealarm display to the
"Target word device" byexternal specification.
As numerical value "1" is written to notifiedword
device DM00100 when alarm No.1(workpiece
blockage) is selected, "Remedyfor workpiece
blockage..." for block No.1 isdisplayed on the
message display. Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Reference PLC data memory values are sometimes held, and the previous remedy for the alarm is sometimes Display
Function Controls
displayed in the message display when the power is turned ON or a page is switched. Previous Device
messages can be set to not display by the following method: BMP File
Switching
• Set so that numerical value "65535" (data format: unsigned decimal) is written to the target word device
VNC Display
(specified externally) for the message by "Notify screen switching" to the screen in which the message Settings

display part is placed.


When the data format is BCD, set so that "9999" is written. However, do not set the message
content for block No.9999.
Notify screen switching
"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18
• After confirming the remedy, delete the message display by writing numerical value "65535" (data
format: unsigned decimal) to the target word device (specified externally) for the message by a
word set function switch.
Word set function switches
"Set word", page 8-14

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-97


9-4 Setting Alarm Displays

Printing Alarm Logs


When printing is executed on screens in which alarm display parts are placed, the alarm log of alarm IDs on that
screen can be printed from the thermal printer.
There are four ways of executing printing as follows. Settings such as the number of alarm logs to be printed out are
set at "Printer" in the VT system settings.
• Printing using switches
"Print", page 8-20
• Printing using function controls by device
"Print", page 9-126
• Execute printing using global function control
"12-7 Global Function Control"
• Printing using system memory area
"Chapter 14 SYSTEM MEMORY AREA"
• Number of alarm logs and other settings to be printed out
"Printer", page 12-26

Illustration of an alarm log printout


The print date/time is printed out according to the "Date and time format" setting in "VT system".
"VT System", page 12-12

Printing date/time

9 Title text string can be set.


(36 1-byte character digits max.)
SETTING BASIC PARTS

1st line =Date/time


2nd line =State + Count
    + Level + Word log
3rd line =Message
(34 1-byte character digits max.)

1st line =Date/time + State


    + Count (+Level)
2nd line =Message

When a word log is set to the alarm display area, the word log is printed in three lines for each alarm.

Point • Alarm logs can be printed out only on a thermal printer.


• Printer output can be performed by VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8/V7/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5T(W)A.
Note, however, that the Printer Unit (VT2-P1) or Ethernet Unit (VT2-E1) is required.
• Alarm logs are printed even when the alarm display part is set to a real time display.
• Alarms logs are printed successively in alarm ID order when there are multiple alarm
display parts in the same screen.
• Alarm logs are not printed even if printing is executed when a screen in which alarm
display parts are not placed is currently displayed.
• Settings on alarm display parts are not reflected. Chronological order only can be set as
the sort condition.
The setting on alarm display parts is reflected as the data format of word logs.

Reference "6-5 Ethernet Unit" VT3 Series Hardware Manual


"6-6 Printer Unit" VT3 Series Hardware Manual

9-98 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-5 Setting Video Displays
This section describes how to set video displays. Images from a camera connected to the Video Input terminal or
screens on the PC can be displayed on the VT3. The function is available only for VT3-X15(D)/S12(D)/S10/V10/V8,
and the Video Unit (VT3-VD4/VD1) is required. It cannot be set on other models.
"6-4 Video Unit", VT3 Series Hardware Manual,

Setting Video Displays


Parts(P) -> Basic parts(P) -> Video display(V)

Set video displays in the "Video display" window.


Display the "Video display" window by one of the following methods:
• By double-clicking the video display
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By opening the menu by clicking the right mouse button, and selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)"

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Item Description
Select the video input signal from "Video (VGA)/Video (VT1 compatible)/RGB (VGA)/
Input *1
RGB (SVGA)/RGB (XGA) ".
Channel Internally Select the video input channel (1 to 4).
Set the word device used for specifying channel. Please specify channel device *5
within the range of 1 to 4.
Externally
No video display is executed if a value outside of this range is specified. Numerical Value
External specification is impossible when RGB is input. Display
Size of display area Specify the size (points) of video display.
Text Display
160 x 120, 320 x 240, 480 x 360, 640 x 480, free size *3
display area*2,4

Video (VGA)
Message
Video (VT1
160 x 120, 320 x 240, 480 x 360, 640 x 480, free size *3
Size of

Display
compatible)
Alarm Display
RGB (VGA) 160 x 120, 320 x 240, 480 x 360, 640 x 480, free size *3
RGB (SVGA) 200 x 150, 400 x 300, 600 x 450, 800 x 600, free size *3 Video Display

RGB(XGA) 256 x 192, 512 x 384, 768 x 576, 1024 x 768, free size *3 Animation
Display
Gray scale After selection, the color video display is converted to gray scale.
Function Controls
CV-300/100 When this checkbox is marked, video output for CV-300/100 is supported. Device
BMP File
Video displays are automatically assigned the label "Vid_****" as the default. Correct this Switching
Label label as necessary. (**** is the creation number. A number starting from 0000 is VNC Display
appended. Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-99


9-5 Setting Video Displays

*1 No normal display is possible in the case of conflict between input setting of graphics “RGB(VGA)/RGB(SVGA)/R
GB(XGA)” and actual signal input to VT3 (VGA/SVGA/XGA).
*2 The original size of the video image captured from camera is the maximum size that can be selected as the
display area size. With sizes other than the maximum, the original size will be reduced for display.
*3 About any size
Video images of original size (size of input signal) are reduced to the basic size. The size to be displayed can
be resized in 2-dot increments within the following settingranges from the basic size. When the video image has
been resized, part of the video display that is currently placed may be displayed cut from the center of the basic
size

Original size Basic size Free size


(input signal size) Reduction

Input Basic size Setting Range


Video (VGA) 320 x 240 dots 64 x 64 to 320 x 240 dots
Video (VT1 compatible) 300 x 240 dots 76 x 64 to 300 x 240 dots
RGB (VGA) 320 x 240 dots 64 x 64 to 320 x 240 dots
RGB (SVGA) 400 x 300 dots 64 x 64 to 400 x 300 dots

9 RGB(XGA) 512x384 dots 64x64 to 512x384 dots

*4 The display area sizes for horizontal and vertical screens are as follows, for example, for a 400 x 300 dots
SETTING BASIC PARTS

display.

Horizontal screen Vertical screen

400 300

300
400

POWER indicator POWER indicator

*5 Selectable from "PLC device"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"

Point • Two or more video display parts for the same channel cannot be placed in a single page.
(For example, only one video display part will function for video display evenif multiple
video display parts for channel 1 are placed on a single pageincluding windows.)
• All video display parts can be displayed simultaneously even if they are overlapped. *
* If video display parts are overlapped, VT2 and VT3 cannot be displayed due to different display.
For the details, refer to the manual of VT2.
"8-5 Setting Video Displays", VT2 Series Reference Manual

9-100 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-5 Setting Video Displays

Point • The color number of video display is as follows:

Input Color Size Color number


Original size * 260 thousand color
Color
Reduced size 65536 colors
Video
Original size * 256 color tone
Gray scale
Reduced size 256 color tone
Original size *
RGB Color 260 thousand color
Reduced size
* Original size refers to maximum size that can be set within the display area size of video display
parts.

• If video display parts for video input(channel 1 to 4) and RGB input are placed in the same
screen (page, window), or in the same page *
* Video input(channel 1 to 4) and RGB input cannot be displayed simultaneously due to different
displays of VT2 and VT3. For the details, refer to the manual of VT2.
"8-5 Setting Video Displays", VT2 Series Reference Manual

• other drawn graphs, switches/lamps, basic parts, and meters/graphs can be displayed
overlapping video display parts.
• When the system memory area is set to VT mode and control is in use, video cannot be
displayed if bit 8 (video input) is set to 0 (OFF). Video is displayed at all times when control
is not in use or when MT mode is set.
• Video display parts can be only placed in a coordinate with starting X and Y coordinates as
even numbers.
• When the video camera orientation is left as it is, and the VT3 is set to vertical screen, the
display is as follows. To display video correctly on a vertical screen, adjust the orientation
of the video camera.
9

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Numerical Value
Input from video camera Video is displayed normally If the video camera's Display
on a horizontal screen. orientation is set to vertical
screen as it is, the video image Text Display
will be rotated 90 deg. and
Message
displayed. Display

Alarm Display

Reference • Video Image


Video Display
"Video capture", page 8-23, page 9-129
Animation
• Video play/pause Display
"Video play/pause", page 8-23, page 9-128 Function Controls
Device
• Video capture, video play and pause image switching through global function control.
BMP File
"12-7 Global Function Control" Switching

• Displaying/hiding video images VNC Display


Settings
"Control (PLC->VT)", page 14-9
• On the VT1, video display no longer was performed when a window screen or error message was
displayed overlapping the video display.
• On the VT2, the number of colors in video display is 65536. On the VT1, this number was 4096.
• VT2 can only be internally specified on channel.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-101


9-6 Setting Animation Display
Animation display allows switching of multiple images and display at any position.

Reference If GIF files are dragged to edit screen of VT STUDIO, they will be set as animation display parts.

Setting of Animation Display


Parts(P) -> Basic parts(P) -> Animation display(I)

Set animation display in "Animation display" window.


"Animation display" window can be displayed by either of the following ways.
• Double-click animation display.
• Select "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute setting(S)" from menu in that order.
• By clicking the button
• By opening the menu by clicking the right mouse button, and selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)"

Frame

Frame indicates a series of animation plays. Multiple images in animation display are set individually.

9
SETTING BASIC PARTS

9-102 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-6 Setting Animation Display

Item Description
Set the updating method of frame display.
Frame updating Specified cycle: update frame with specified cycle
Specified No.: update frame with specified device.
When frame updating is specified as "specified cycle", the updating cycle of frame can be set.
Updating cycle *1 Internally : Internal timer is used. Updating cycle can be set in a unit of 0.1s.
Externally : use device to specify the updating cycle.
When "Updating cycle" is set to "Externally", word device used for specifying the
Updating cycle specified device updating cycle is set.
*9 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings"
window. The updating cycle can be specified within the range of 1 to 100 (unit of 0.1s).
The data format for updating cycle specified device can be selected from "Unsigned
Data Format
decimal/BCD".
When frame updating is specified as "Specified No.", the device used for specifying
Frame No. specified device *2,3 frame No. is set. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be
set in the "Device settings" window.
The data format for frame No. specified device can be selected from "Unsigned
Data Form
decimal /signed decimal".
Display preview image and additional information of various frames. After double-clicking
the frames, the image files can be selected from "Open image". According to different
Frame image display area updating methods set in "Frame updating", additional information may differ as follows:
Updating cycle: display frame No. and playback time*4.
Specified No.: display frame No. and device value.
When frame updating is specified as "Specifying cycle", set if itís displayed cyclically
Repeat display
after all frames are displayed. Cyclic display is possible after selection.
Set the number of frame(1 to 32). When the number of frames is increased, add
Number of frame frames at the final position. When the number of frames is reduced, start deletion from
the last frame.

Insert
After clicking, insert frame before the selected frame. No insertion can be executed
when reaching the maximum number of frames (32). 9
After clicking, delete the selected frames. No deletion can be executed when reaching
Delete

SETTING BASIC PARTS


the minimum number of frames (1).
After clicking, copy the selected frames, and insert(copy) the subsequently copied
Copy
frames. No copy can be executed when reaching the maximum number of frames (32).
After clicking, "Open images" window is opened. Select the images displayed on
Select image
selected frames. *5
After clicking, move forward the selected frames. The frontmost frame
To Upper
(frame No.0) cannot be moved forward.
After clicking, move backward the selected frames. The final frame
To Lower
(last frame) cannot be moved backward.
Play After clicking, "Playback" window is displayed.
*6
Use Scaling After selection, it's in a state of setting "input range". Numerical Value
Use Scaling
Input range When "scaling" is selected, set the input range of frame No. specified device. Display

Processing out of specified


Set if frame No.0 is displayed when the value outside of input range is specified. Text Display
range *6
Message
Notify end of Display
After selection, send end notice after all frames are displayed.
frame
Alarm Display
When "Notify frame end" is selected, set the Notify shift end device.
Notify shift
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Notify end of end device *8 Video Display
settings" window.
frame *7 Animation
Set the mode of checking Notify shift end device. Display
Mode A contact: when the display of all frames is finished, set the Notify shift end device Function Controls
B contact: when the display of all frames is finished, reset the Notify shift end device Device
BMP File
Reset bit at start After selecting "Notify frame end", reset the Notify shift end device when updating frame is started. Switching

*1 Stop updating frame when the value lower than 0.1s or over 10s is specified. VNC Display
Settings
*2 Selectable from “PLC device/indirect/calculation/cell”
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*3 Frame No. is specified within the range of 0 to -1.
*4 The value of playback time is displayed only when "updating time" is set to "Internally".
*5 Selectable image formats include BMP, JPEG and GIF files.
*6 This item can be set when frame updating is specified as "Specified No.".
*7 This item can be set when frame updating is specified as "Specified cycle" without cyclic display.
*8 Selectable from "PLC device / Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-103


9-6 Setting Animation Display

Play

Item Description
During playback process, move rightward according to displayed frame No..
Slide Alternatively, display the frame of moving target when the position of slide is moved.
Preview will pause if clicking slide during playback process.
Frame Display frame No. displayed during playback process.
Repeat After selection and displaying all frames, playback is executed from the first frame.
After clicking "Playback" button, the images specified in the display frame can be
Play/Close
switched. Stop playback after clicking "Pause" button.

Scaling (frame)
If scaling is used, you can update frame No. according to the value of frame No. specified device.

9 Data format of frame No. specified device


Unsigned decimal
Input range
0 to 65535
Signed decimal -32768 to +32767
SETTING BASIC PARTS

BCD 0 to 9999

[Example] When the value of frame No. specified device (data format: unsigned decimal) is between 0 to 999,
after setting the point number=4, input range=0 to 999.

Value of frame No. specified device Displayed frame No.


0 to 249 0
250 to 499 1
500 to 749 2
750 to 999 3

9-104 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-6 Setting Animation Display

Position control

The animation display parts are displayed after being shifted to specified position.
Shift based on animation display parts at upper left.

Reference "Origin, X-axis and Y-axis in Edit window", page 2-4

Item Description
After selection, the position control can be set.
Position control Point specification: display the specified coordinate.
Direct specification: display the specified coordinate to device value. 9

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Point specification

Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-105


9-6 Setting Animation Display

Item Description
Set the method of updating the position of animation display parts.
Point update Specified cycle : shift points with specified cycle.
Specified No. : shift points with specified device value.
Point updating is specified as "specified cycle", set the time interval shifting to the next point.
Updating cycle *1 Internally : Internal timer is used. Updating cycle can be set in a unit of 0.1s.
Externally : use device to specify the updating cycle.
When "Updating cycle" is set to "Externally", word device used for specifying the
updating cycle is set.
Updating cycle specified device
*2 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
The updating cycle can be specified within the range of 1 to 100 (unit of 0.1s).
The data format for updating cycle specified device can be selected from "Unsigned
Data Format
decimal/BCD".
When point updating is specified as "Specified No.", the device used for specifying
point No. is set.
Point No. specified device *3
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
The data format for point No. specified device can be selected from "Unsigned
Data Format
decimal /signed decimal".
Set the point number for shifting animation display parts(1 to 32). If point number is
Number of points
increased, the point number of "Point list" will also increase or decrease accordingly.
When point updating selects "Specifying cycle", set if it returns to starting point after
Repeated display
shifting to the final point. Cyclic display is possible after selection.
X-coordinate of various points is displayed. The absolute coordinate of X-direction can
X-coordinate*4
be directly input.
Y-coordinate of various points is displayed. The absolute coordinate of Y-direction can
Point list Y-coordinate*4
be directly input.

9 Device value
Time (s)
When point updating selects "Specified No.", the device value is displayed.
When point updating selects "Specified cycle", the playback time is displayed.
Inset new points before selected points. No insertion can be executed when reaching
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Insert
the maximum number of points(32).
Delete the selected points. No deletion can be executed when "point number" is a
Delete
minimum value (1), or no point is selected.
Notify end of
Set if sending end notice after shifting to the final point.
movement
When "Notify shift end" is selected, set the Notify shift end device.
Notify shift
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Notify end of end device *2
settings" window.
movement *5
Set the mode of checking Notify shift end device.
Mode A contact : when shifting to the final point, set the Notify shift end device
B contact : when shifting to the final point, set the Notify shift end device
Reset bit at start When "Notify shift end" is selected, set if resetting shift end notifybit at start of shift.
Devide points
After selection, divide the point space. After that, shift can be displayed smoothly.
equidistantly *7
Devide points When shifting after setting the division point space, shift the amount of shift for a time
Interval
equidistantly *6 (unit of dot).
Divide when
move from end
After selection, division is also possible when shifting from final point to starting point.
point to start
point
Use Scaling After selection, itís in a state of setting "input range".
Use Scaling *8
Input range Specify the input range of point No. specified device.
Processing out of specified range*8 Set if point No.0 is displayed when the value outside of input range is specified.
*1 Stop shifting when the value lower than 0.1s or over 10s is specified.
*2 Selectable from "PLC device / Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*3 Selectable from "PLC device/indirect/calculation/cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*4 Point No.0 cannot be changed since itís a coordinate placed with play parts.
*5 This item can be set if no cyclic display is selected.
*6 This item can be set when point updating is specified as "Specified cycle".
*7 The coordinate of division point cannot be set when selecting "Equidistant division point space". In addition, division point
will also be displayed after the final point when selecting "Division also when shifting from final point to starting point".
*8 This item can be set when point updating is specified as "Specified No.".
9-106 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
9-6 Setting Animation Display

Equidistant division point space


The alternative division point space (position of point No. is set) is set in a unit of dot.
Within the time set for every updating cycle, the animation display parts will be shifted to the division position.

During division, equidistant division is performed after division decimal fraction is rounded up.
Thus, dot for actual shift sometimes may differ from point for alternative setting.

Example 1 v, point No.1 is (100,0), with a spacing of 20


Shift after 5 equal division between point No.0 and point No.1 (100/20=5).
9
Example 2 Point No.1 is (100,0), point No.2 is (100,50), with a spacing of 20.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Shift after 3 equal division between point No.1 and point No.2 (50/20=2.5->3).

Point No.0 Division point 0-1 Division point 0-2 Division point 0-3 Division point 0-4
(0,0) (20,0) (40,0) (60,0) (80,0)

Point No.1
(100,0)

Division point 1-1


(100,16) Numerical Value
Display
Division point1-2
Text Display
(100,33)
Message
Display
Point No.2
(100,50) Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-107


9-6 Setting Animation Display

Scaling (point specification)


If scaling is used, you can update the position of animation display parts according to the value of point No. specified
device.

Data format of point No. specified device Input range


Unsigned decimal 0 to 65535
Signed decimal -32768 to +32767
BCD 0 to 9999

[Example] When the value of point No. specified device (data format: unsigned decimal) is between 0 to 100,
after setting the point number=3, input range=0 to 100.

Value of point No. specified device Position of animation display parts


0 Point No. 0
: :
50 Point No. 1
: :
100 Point No. 2
After mean value is specified, point space is displayed by the position of straight line.

Point No.1 Point No.1


Device value=50 Device value=50

9 Device value=75
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Device value=25
Point No.2 Point No.2
Device value=100 Device value=100

Point No.0 Point No.0


Device value=0 Device value=0

9-108 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-6 Setting Animation Display

Position

Item Description
Direction Select the shift direction of frame from "X-direction/Y-direction/XY-direction".
X axis relative position
Set relative position specified device of X direction.
specified device *1,2
Y axis relative position
Set relative position specified device of Y direction.
specified device *1,2
Relative position specified device can be selected from "Unsigned decimal /signed
Data Format
decimal/BCD".
Sets the upper and lower limit values to be written to the X direction relative coordinate
X input range *3

X axis display range *3,4


specified device.
In VT3 screen, set the shift range of animation display parts towards X direction. 9
*3 Sets the upper and lower limit values to be written to the Y direction relative coordinate
Y input range

SETTING BASIC PARTS


specified device.
Y axis display range *3,4 In VT3 screen, set the shift range of animation display parts towards Y direction.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device/indirect/calculation/cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 The following are examples about the method of writing value into relative position specified device.
"7-7 Graphic Attribute Controls", page 7-20
*3 You can convert the value written into coordinate specified device and shift animation display parts by setting
the input range and display range.
"About input range and display range in direct specification (conversion of values)", page 7-21 Numerical Value

*4 The lower limit value of display range is the coordinate set for editing animation display parts. Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-109


9-6 Setting Animation Display

Display control

Item Description
Display control After selection, display control can be set.
Bit device with OF/OFF can be set.
Display control
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Bit device *1
settings" window.
Display The mode for checking bit device can be set.
control Mode A contact : play display when bit device is ON.
B contact : play display when bit device is OFF.

9
This item can be set when frame updating or point updating is set as specified cycle.
When turn on the
When OFF is turned to ON after selection, display starts from first frame (frame No.0),
display ... .
first point (point No.0).
Operation Enabled Enabled operation can be set.
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Enabled bit device can be set.


When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Operation Enabled Enabled : update play display.
Bit device *1 Inhibited : stop updating play display.
Re-enabled : In the case of specified cycle, restart from state before
Operation
inhibition. In the case of specified No. display according to
Enabled device value.
The mode for checking enabled bit device can be set.
Mode A contact: play display is activated when enabled bit device is ON.
B contact: play display is activated when enabled bit device is OFF.
Display the first
After selection, the first frame (frame No.0) is displayed if enabled bit device is
frame when action
stopped.
stops.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device / Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

9-110 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices
When a function control by device is placed in a screen, pages can be switched or windows displayed by the trigger
bit device turning ON (OFF) when that screen is displayed.

Reference Global function control has the same function as the function control by devices.
"12-7 Global Function Control"

Placing Function Control by Devices


Parts(P) -> Basic parts(P) -> Function control by devices(D)

Set function control by devices in the "Function control by devices" window.


Display the "Function control by devices" window by one of the following methods:
• By double-clicking the function control by devices
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By opening the menu by clicking the right mouse button, and selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)"

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Item Description
Function Select the function of function control by devices.
The label "Df_***" is automatically assigned as the default to the function control by devices. Numerical Value
Label Correct this label as necessary. (**** is the creation number. A number starting from 0000 is Display
appended.)
Text Display

Message
Point The function control by devices isnít displayed in VT3. If not placing into display box of VT3, Display
the function control by devices isnít sent to VT3 as data, so it doesnít function. Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-111


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

List of functions
The following table summarizes the functions that can be set in function control by devices.

Item Description
Page switching Switches the VT3 screen to the specified page.
Display local window Turns the specified local window display ON and OFF.
Display global window Turns the display of the specified global window ON and OFF.
Writes record data in the PLC data folder currently stored to internal memory (SRAM)
Execute PLC data folder or Memory Card to the PLC's devices, or writes PLC data to specified records in PLC
data folders.
Writes the record comment of the PLC data folder currently stored to internal memory
Transfer Comment of PLC Data (SRAM) or Memory Card to PLC devices.
Folder (The trigger bit device setting is not provided. This is written when the file No./record
No. is specified while the currently placed screen is displayed on the VT3.
Clear alarm log Clears (deletes) the alarm log stored to internal memory (SRAM).
Start/stop data access to specified trend ID, and clear the data of trend graph and XY
Control trend graph
graph saved in the internal memory (SRAM).
• Outputs a hard copy of the VT3 screen.
Print • Save the screen of VT3 into the memory card by Windows bitmap files or JPEG files.
• Outputs the alarm log from the thermal printer. (print alarm log)
Video play/pause Plays and pauses video when video images are displayed.
• Save video display (images) into the memory card by Windows bitmap files or JPEG files.
Video Capture • Output video display (images) from a printer that supports PictBridge, ESC/P-R or
ESC/Page.
Save the data of trend graph, XY graph and alarm log stored to memory of VT3 into
Save log data to memory card
the memory card in CSV format.
Save Worksheet data to
9 Memory Card
Saves the worksheet data on the Memory Card in CSV format.

Writes the value of the specified transfer source word device to the transfer destination
Transfer 1 word
word device.
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Save operating log to memory Save the operating log stored to memory of VT3 into the memory card by CSV files or
card UNICODE text files.
Clear operating log Clear the operating log stored to internal memory (SRAM).
Extended command
Create any communication command and send/receive the same.
communication

Point The various functions set to function control by devices are executed by the trigger bit device
turning ON (OFF) when the screen in which a function control by device is placed is
displayed.

Placement of DF Screen State VT1 VT3


While DF page
DF on base • Not executed even if trigger Up ( Down) is ON (OFF)..
is switched
• Not executed even if trigger • Not executed even if trigger
Up ( Down) is ON (OFF).. Up ( Down) is ON (OFF)..
While window • DF (transfer comment of PLC • DF (transfer comment of PLC
display is OFF data folder) is not executed data folder) is not executed
even if the record No. is even if file No. or record No. is
changed. changed..
• Not executed even if trigger Up
( Down) is ON (OFF) when the
• Executed when trigger Up
window display turns ON. To
When window ( Down) is ON (OFF) when
DF on window execute, turn trigger Up
display turns window display turns ON..
(local, global) ( Down) ON (OFF) again after
ON • F (transfer comment of PLC
the window display turns ON.
data folder) is not executed.
• DF (transfer comment of PLC
data folder) is not executed.
• Executed when trigger Up
• Executed when trigger Up
( Down) turns ON (OFF).
( Down) turns ON (OFF).
While window • DF (transfer comment of PLC
• DF (transfer comment of PLC
display is ON data folder) is executed when
data folder) is executed when
the file No. or record No. is
the record No. is changed.
changed.

DF: Function control by devices

9-112 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Page switching
Switches the VT3 screen to the specified page when the trigger bit device is turned ON (OFF).

Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the page switching condition.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Select when the page is to be switched by the state of the trigger bit device (OFF ->

9
ON, or ON -> OFF).
Trigger
 : Page switching when the device state changes to ON
 : Page switching when the device state changes to OFF
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes

SETTING BASIC PARTS


the trigger.
Reset trigger bit
When the trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON -> OFF
When the trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF -> ON
Set the page switching mode for page switching.
Specify page No. : switching after specifying page No..
Previous page : switched to previous display page.
Pages can be switched back down the last ten pages.
Pages switched to by PLCs and other external devices also can
Page switching mode
be returned to.
Page move (+) : move to the page with larger page ID than the current one.
Page move (-) : move to the page with smaller page ID than the current one.
Increment 1 page : The next page (current page No. +1) is switched to. Numerical Value
Decrement 1 page: The next page (current page No. -1) is switched to. Display
Specify the page No. to be switched within the range 0 to 8999 when Page switching
Page No.
mode is set to "Specify page No.". Text Display

Message
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell" Display
"6-7 Setting of Devices" Alarm Display

Reference • After the base screen on the workspace is drag-and-dropped to the edit window, it is possible to Video Display

create a component with the page switching function being set. Animation
Display
• Switching pages using system memory area Function Controls
"14-4 PLC-Based Page Switching" Device
BMP File
• Switching pages using switches Switching
"Switch page", page 8-11 VNC Display
Settings
• About bases and windows
"Screen Configuration", page 2-5

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-113


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Display local window


Turns the display of the specified local window ON/OFF when the trigger bit device is turned ON (OFF).

Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the local window display condition.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Select when the local window is to be displayed by the state of the trigger bit device
(OFF to ON, or ON to OFF).
Trigger
9 

: Local window display when the device state changes to ON
: Local window display when the device state changes to OFF
When the trigger is "Up": Reset at ON -> OFF
Reset trigger bit
When the trigger is "Down": Reset at OFF -> ON
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Select window Select the target window. When this checkbox is marked, the window is targeted for
Window 1 to 3
display ON/OFF.
Specify
window When displaying local window after selection, local window is displayed at specified
display position.
position
Specify window X-coordinate
display position specified Set the two numerical values for the X and Y coordinates (top left corner of window
*2 Device *3 screen that is displayed) in multiples of 16.
Y-coordinate When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
specified settings" window.
Device *3
Data Format Select the data format of the coordinate specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD".

*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 "Specify window display position" can be set when there is only one window that displays (turns ON) by
"Select window".
• When "Specify window display position" is not set, the window is displayed at the position where it was drawn.
*3 Selectable from "Numerical value/PLC device/cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

Point When "PLC device/cell" is selected for the coordinate specified device, and the global
window is displayed:
When the trigger is set to Up (Down), and the trigger bit device is ON (OFF), the window
display position will not change even if the value of the coordinate specified device changes.

Reference • After the screen (window 1/2/3) on the workspace is drag-and-dropped to the edit window, it is
possible to create a component with the local window display function being set.
• Displaying the local window using system memory area
"14-5 Turning Windows ON/OFF by PLCs"
• Displaying the local window using switches
"Display local window", page 8-12
• About bases and windows
"Screen Configuration", page 2-5
9-114 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Display global window


Turns the display of the specified global window ON/OFF when the trigger bit device is turned ON (OFF).

Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the global window display condition.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
"Device settings" window.
Select when the global window is to be displayed by the state of the trigger bit
device (OFF to ON, or ON to OFF).
Trigger
 : OFF->ON, display global window
 : ON->OFF, display global window

Reset trigger bit


When the trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON -> OFF
When the trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF -> ON 9
Display ON/OFF Sets whether to turn the global window display ON or OFF.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Global window ID Select the target global window ID (0 to 7).
Do not close
When this checkbox is marked, the global window to be displayed is left open at
window during
page switching.
page switching
Sets the method for specifying the global window No. to be displayed.
Internally : specify by the constant set to global window No..
Window No.
Externally : specify by the numerical value stored to global window No.
specify mode
Select global specified device. This numerical value can be changed to any
window value.
Sets the global window No. to be displayed (turned ON) when the "Window No.
Window No.
specified mode" is set to "Internally".
Numerical Value
Sets the word device for specifying the global window No. when the "Window No. Display
Window No. specified mode" is set to "Externally".
specified device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the word device can be set in the "Device Text Display
settings" window.
Message
The data format for window No. specified device can be selected from "Unsigned decimal/ Display
Data Format
BCD". Alarm Display
Specify window When this checkbox is marked, the global window is displayed at the specified
display position position when the global window is displayed. Video Display

X-coordinate Animation
specified Display
Specify Set the two numerical values for the X and Y coordinates (top left corner of
window Device *3 window screen that is displayed) in multiples of 16. Function Controls
Device
display Y-coordinate When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
BMP File
position *2 specified "Device settings" window. Switching
Device *3 VNC Display
Settings
Select the data format of the coordinate specified device from "Unsigned decimal/
Data Format
BCD".

*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 When "Specify window display position" is not set, the window is displayed at the position where it was drawn.
*3 Selectable from "Numerical value/PLC device/cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-115


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Point • Global windows sometimes cannot be displayed due to restrictions in the number of
devices, screen data size, number of key entry parts, overlapping data, and other factors.
To display multiple global windows simultaneously, thoroughly check operation on an
actual working unit.
• "2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"
• Global window Nofity error
"Other", page 12-31
• When an interrupt window is turned ON while a global window is displayed, the following
happens if the number of devices, screen data size, number of key entry parts, size of
overlapping data, and other restrictions are exceeded:
• The display of all currently displayed global windows turns OFF, and display of the
interrupt window turns ON.
• The states of local windows (windows 1 to 3) do not change.
• The notify bit device for notifying global window errors turns ON.
• When "PLC device/cell" is selected for the coordinate specified device, and the global
window is displayed:
When the trigger is set to Up (Down), and the trigger bit device is ON (OFF), the window
display position will not change even if the value of the coordinate specified device
changes.
• When Externally is set as the global window No. specify mode, and the global window is
displayed:
When the trigger Up (Down) is set, and the trigger bit device turns ON (OFF), the global
window screen switches when the value of the global window No. specified device
changes.
At this time, the window display position also is updated when the value of the coordinate
specified device changes if the coordinate specified device is set to "PLC device/cell".

9 • When global window display is performed for the unit monitor, the device monitor or the
system auxiliary numerical keyboard via the special operations of the unit screen:
Unit monitor: global window ID6
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Device monitor: global window ID7


System numeric keyboard: global window ID7
"Chapter 5 System Mode", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

Reference • After the global window on the workspace is drag-and-dropped to the edit window, it is possible to
create a component with the global window display function being set.
• Display global window using switches
"Display global window", page 8-13
• About bases and windows
"Screen Configuration", page 2-5
• When the "Do not close window during page switching" checkbox is marked

Page 0 Page 1

GW Page switched GW

The GW (global window) stays displayed. To turn the GW OFF (hide the window), turn OFF by a
switch to which the "Global window display OFF" function is set or a control function by device.

9-116 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Execute PLC data folder


Record data currently stored to VT3 internal memory (SRAM) or Memory Card is written to the PLC when the trigger
bit device turns ON (OFF). PLC data is also written to records in the specified PLC data folder. You can also notify
that writing to a record in the PLC data folder has ended.
"15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)"

Settings

Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the PLC data folder execution condition.

9
Trigger bit device *1
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select when the PLC data folder is to be executed by the state of the trigger bit device
(OFF to ON, or ON to OFF).

SETTING BASIC PARTS


 : PLC data folder execution when the device state changes to ON
Trigger
 : ON->OFF, PLC data folder trigger bit device will be reset after execution of PLC data folder.
When the trigger is "Up" :Reset at ON -> OFF
When the trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF -> ON
Select the PLC data folder execution method:
VT to PLC : The record data currently stored to internal memory (SRAM) or Memory
Access mode
Card is written to PLC devices.
PLC to VT : The PLC data is written to internal memory (SRAM) or Memory Card.
PLC If MultiTalk is used, select PLC "A/B". For the selected PLC, execute PLC data folder.
PLC No. Set the serial number during networking and linking of thermolator (1:N).
Save to *2 Select the directory for saving the PLC data folder data from "SRAM/Memory Card".
Numerical Value
Sets how to specify the file No. for writing to PLC or saving PLC data.
Display
File No. Internally : Specify by the constant set to the file No.
specify mode Externally : Specify by the numerical value stored to the file No. specified device. This Text Display
numerical value can be changed to any value.
Message
Specify file File No. *3 Specify the file No. (0 to 99) when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Internally". Display
File Comment Display the file comments set to PLC data folder editing tool. Alarm Display
File No. Sets the word device for specifying the file No. when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Externally".
specified When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device Video Display

device *4 settings" window. Animation


Display
Data Format Select the data format of the file No. specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD".
Function Controls
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell" Device
BMP File
"6-7 Setting of Devices" Switching
*2 The setting will be disabled even if the VT3-W4 series is set to "Memory card". VNC Display
Settings
*3 If different "file save destinations" are specified, the execution may also differ. Refer to the following table:
Specified File Save Destination Action
File is saved as the file name "VTDVC**.WD3". (** stands for the specified file No.)
Memory Card
File is stored to folder "\VTDVC" on the Memory Card.
Internal memory (SRAM) File is saved as part of VTS file (*.vs2, *.vu2).

*4 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"
Specify the device within the range 0 to 99 to the file No. specified device. PLC data folders will not be executed if
a numerical value outside of this range is specified.

On the "Notify" tab, you can set the end notification device for notifying that PLC data folder execution has ended.
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-117
9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Record
The setting items in the "Function control by devices" window change by selecting the "Record specify mode" item on
the "Record" tab in the "Function control by devices" window.
"15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)"

When "Specify No. (Internally)" is selected at "Record specify mode"

When "Specify No. (Externally)" is selected at "Record specify mode"


9
SETTING BASIC PARTS

When "Specify comment" is selected at "Record specify mode"

9-118 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Item Description
Sets how to specify the record No. for writing to PLC or saving PLC data.
None : Save the data to the record with the smallest unused record No.
(This item can be set only when "Access mode" is set to "PLC to
VT".)
Specify No. (Internally): Specify by the constant set to the record No.
Record specify mode Specify No. (Externally): Specify by the numerical value stored to the record No.
specified device. This numerical value can be changed to any
value.
Specify comment: Searches for and specifies records whose record comment
matches the text string data (ASCII code, shift JIS code, UNICODE)
stored to the commentspecified device.
Record No. Specify the record No. when "Record specify mode" is set to "Specify No. (Internally)".
*1/2 Sets the word device for specifying the record No. when "Recordspecify mode" is set
Record No. specified device
to "Specify No. (Externally)."
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Data format *3 settings" window.Select the data format of the record No. specified device from
"Unsigned decimal/BCD".
Select whether to automatically create a new record and save to that record when
there is no record comment matching the text string data stored to the comment
specified device under the following conditions. (Text string is ASCII code, shift JIS
New
code or UNICODE.)
• When "Access mode" is set to "PLC to VT"
• When "Record specify mode" is set to "Specify comment"
When this checkbox is marked when "Access mode" is set to "PLC to VT", the text
string data stored to the comment specified device is saved as a record comment
Specify
when the record data is saved.If not selected (text string is ASCII code, Shift-JIS code,
comment
UNICODE), the text string is stored in a state without record comment.
This item cannot be set when "Access mode" is set to "VT to PLC".
• When "Record specify mode" is set to "Specify comment", set the word device for
storing the text string data of the comment to be searched.
• When "Access mode" is set to "PLC to VT" and "Record specify mode" is set to
9
other than "Specify comment" and the "Specify comment" checkbox is marked, set

SETTING BASIC PARTS


the word device for storing the text string data to be saved as a record comment
Specify Comment
when the record data is saved.
comment Specify Device
*1, 4 • Use 1-byte characters (ASCII code), 2-byte characters (shift JIS code) or
UNICODE for the text string data. (Mixing of 1-byte characters and 2-byte
characters is possible.)
• A device having 16continuous words is used.
• When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
"Device settings" window.
UNICODE
When this checkbox is marked, UNICODE text strings are supported.
String
Swap upper/ When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper and lower bytes of the text string
lower bytes to be stored to the comment specified device are swapped. Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-119


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 Specify the device within the range 0 to 65534 to the file No. specified device. When a numerical value
outside of this range is specified, the device is not saved and an error occurs.
*3 When "Data format" is set to "BCD", record Nos. 0 to 9999 can be specified.

Point Touch switches are invalid during PLC data folder execution.

*4 The text string data of the record comment is written to a device of 16 continuous words starting from the
comment specified device.
ASCII code (1-byte characters), shift JIS code (2-byte characters) and UNICODE are used for text string data.
Be sure to append text string data with a null code (00 Hex) to delimit the text string data.
In the following example, "Swap upper/lower bytes" checkbox is not marked.When the "Swap upper/lower
bytes" checkbox is marked, text string data obtained by swapping the upper byte with the lower byte is stored
to the target word device.

[Example] One-touch Sensor Link System One-touch Sensor Link System


(ASCII code + shift JIS code: (UNICODE: 9 2-byte characters + 3 1-byte characters
9 2-byte characters + 3 1-byte characters)
Uppermost Lowermost Uppermost Lowermost
Comment specified device + 0 㸼 ‫(ޓ‬95 5CH) Comment specified device + 0 㸼 (88 68H)
Comment specified device + 1 ⼎ ‫(ޓ‬8E A6H) Comment specified device + 1 ⼎ (79 3AH)
Comment specified device + 2 ″ ‫(ޓ‬8B 40H) Comment specified device + 2 ″ (6A 5FH)
Comment specified device + 3 㛑 ‫(ޓ‬94 5CH) Comment specified device + 3 㛑 (80 FDH)

9
Comment specified device + 4 ‫ݙ‬ ‫(ޓ‬93 E0H) Comment specified device + 4 ‫ݙ‬ (51 85H)
Comment specified device + 5 㬉 ‫(ޓ‬91 A0H) Comment specified device + 5 㬉 (85 35H)
Comment specified device + 6 䍙 ‫(ޓ‬92 B4H) Comment specified device + 6 䍙 (8D 85H)
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Comment specified device + 7 ᇣ ‫(ޓ‬8F ACH) Comment specified device + 7 ᇣ (5C 0FH)
Comment specified device + 8 ൟ ‫(ޓ‬8C 5EH) Comment specified device + 8 ൟ (57 8BH)
Comment specified device + 9 P ‫(ޓ‬50H) L (4CH) Comment specified device + 9 P (00 50H)
Comment specified device + 10 C ‫(ޓ‬43H) ‫(ޓ‬00H) Comment specified device + 10 L (00 4CH)
Comment specified device + 11 (00H) ‫(ޓ‬00H) Comment specified device + 11 C (00 43H)
Comment specified device + 12 (00H) ‫(ޓ‬00H) Comment specified device + 12 (00 00H)
Comment specified device + 13 (00H) ‫(ޓ‬00H) Comment specified device + 13 (00 00H)
Comment specified device + 14 (00H) ‫(ޓ‬00H) Comment specified device + 14 (00 00H)
Comment specified device + 15 (00H) ‫(ޓ‬00H) Comment specified device + 15 (00 00H)

Point • Text codes used for text string data in record comments must be made to match
the text code on the PLC data folder editing tool.
"PLC Data Folder Editing Tool", page 15-14
• With ASCII codes, a 1-byte character is one byte. However, with UNICODE, a 1-byte
character is two bytes (one word).

9-120 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Notify

Item Description
When this checkbox is marked, the notified bit device is set when PLC data folder
Notify end
execution ends.
Sets the bit device for notifying end.
Notified bit
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Device *1
settings" window.
Notify end
Sets the mode for referencing the notified bit device.
Mode

Reset bit at
A contact : Sets the notified bit device when PLC data folder execution ends.
B contact : Resets the notified bit device when PLC data folder execution ends.
When this checkbox is marked, resets the notified bit device at start of PLC data folder
9
start execution.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


When this checkbox is marked, sets the notified bit device when an error occurs
Notify error
during PLC data folder execution.
Sets the bit device for notifying the error.
Notified bit
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Device *1
settings" window.
Notify error
Sets the mode for referencing the notified bit device.
A contact: Sets the notified bit device when an error occurs during PLC data folder
Mode execution.
B contact: Resets the notified bit device when an error occurs during PLC data folder
execution.
Numerical Value
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"
Display
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-121


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Transfer comment of PLC data folder


Record comments for PLC data folders currently stored to VT3 internal memory SRAM) or Memory Card are written
to VT3 internal word devices or PLC devices.
A setting for trigger bit devices is not provided. After VT3 is placed with a screen, execute writing if file No. and record
No. are changed.
To execute writing (display) of record comments at high speed, use VT3 internal word devices (MW) for record No.
specified devices and comment write devices.
For details on PLC data folders
"15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)"

9 Item Description
Save to *1 Select the directory for saving the PLC data folder data from "SRAM/Memory Card".
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Sets the method for specifying the file No. of the PLC data folder data.
File No. specify Internally : Specify by the constant set to the file No.
mode Externally : Specify by the numerical value stored to the file No. specified device. This
numerical value can be changed to any value.
File No. Specify the file No. (0 to 99) when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Internally".
Specify file
File Comment Display the file comments set to PLC data folder editing tool.
Sets the word device for specifying the file No. when "File No. specify mode" is set to
File No.
"Externally".
specified device
*2 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Data Format Select the data format of the file No. specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD".
Sets the word device for specifying the file No.
Record No. specified device *3, 6 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Data format *4 Select the data format of the record No. specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD".
Sets the word device for storing the text string data (ASCII code, shift JIS code,
UNICODE) of the record comment. A device having 16continuous words is used.
Comment write device *5, 6
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
UNICODE strings When this checkbox is marked, UNICODE text strings are supported.
When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper and lower bytes of the text string
Swap upper/lower bytes
to be stored to the comment write device are swapped.
*1 The setting will be disabled even if the VT3-W4 series is set to "Memory card".
*2 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
Specify the device within the range 0 to 99 to the file No. specified device. PLC data folders will not be executed
if a numerical value outside of this range is specified.
*3 Specify the device within the range 0 to 65534 to the file No. specified device. PLC data folders will not be
executed if a numerical value outside of this range is specified.
*4 When "Data format" is set to "BCD", record Nos. 0 to 9999 can be specified.

9-122 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

*5 The text string data of the record comment is written to a device of 16 continuous words starting from the
comment write device.
ASCII code (1-byte characters), shift JIS code (2-byte characters) and UNICODE are used for text string data.
Be sure to append text string data with a null code (00 Hex) to delimit the text string data.
In the following example, "Swap upper/lower bytes" checkbox is not marked.When the "Swap upper/lower
bytes" checkbox is marked, text string data obtained by swapping the upper byte with the lower byte is stored
to the target word device.

[Example] One-touch Sensor Link System One-touch Sensor Link System


(ASCII code + shift JIS code: (UNICODE: 9 2-byte characters + 3 1-byte characters)
9 2-byte characters + 3 1-byte characters)
Uppermost Lowermost Uppermost Lowermost
Comment write device + 0 㸼 ‫(ޓ‬95 5CH) Comment write device + 0 㸼 ‫(ޓ‬88 68H)
Comment write device + 1 ⼎ ‫(ޓ‬8E A6H) Comment write device + 1 ⼎ ‫(ޓ‬79 3AH)
Comment write device + 2 ″ ‫(ޓ‬8B 40H) Comment write device + 2 ″ ‫(ޓ‬6A 5FH)
Comment write device + 3 㛑 ‫(ޓ‬94 5CH) Comment write device + 3 㛑 ‫(ޓ‬80 FDH)
Comment write device + 4 ‫ݙ‬ ‫(ޓ‬93 E0H) Comment write device + 4 ‫ݙ‬ ‫(ޓ‬51 85H)
Comment write device + 5 㬉 ‫(ޓ‬91 A0H) Comment write device + 5 㬉 ‫(ޓ‬85 35H)
Comment write device + 6 䍙 ‫(ޓ‬92 B4H) Comment write device + 6 䍙 ‫(ޓ‬8D 85H)
Comment write device + 7 ᇣ ‫(ޓ‬8F ACH) Comment write device + 7 ᇣ ‫(ޓ‬5C OFH)
Comment write device + 8 ൟ ‫(ޓ‬8C 5EH) Comment write device + 8 ൟ ‫(ޓ‬57 8BH)
Comment write device + 9 P ‫(ޓ‬50H) L (4CH) Comment write device + 9 P ‫(ޓ‬00 50H)
Comment write device + 10 C ‫(ޓ‬43H) ‫(ޓ‬00H) Comment write device + 10 L ‫(ޓ‬00 4CH)
Comment write device + 11 (00H) ‫(ޓ‬00H) Comment write device + 11 C (00 43H)

9
Comment write device + 12 (00H) ‫(ޓ‬00H) Comment write device + 12 (00 00H)
Comment write device + 13 (00H) ‫(ޓ‬00H) Comment write device + 13 (00 00H)
Comment write device + 14 (00H) ‫(ޓ‬00H) Comment write device + 14 (00 00H)

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Comment write device + 15 (00H) ‫(ޓ‬00H) Comment write device + 15 (00 00H)

Point With ASCII codes, a 1-byte character is one byte. However, with UNICODE, a 1-byte
character is two bytes (one word).

*6 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"

Point When a screen in which a function control by device is placed is currently displayed,
Numerical Value
transfer of comments is executed when the value of the file No. specified device or Display
record No. specified device changes.
Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-123


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Clear alarm log


Alarm logs currently stored to internal memory (SRAM) are cleared (deleted) when the trigger bit device turns ON
(OFF). You can also notify that clearing of the alarm log has ended.

Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the alarm log clear condition.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.

9 Trigger
Select when clearing of alarm log data is to be executed by the state of the trigger bit
device (OFF to ON, or ON to OFF).
 : Clearing of alarm logs is executed when the device state changes to ON.
 : Clearing of alarm logs is executed when the device state changes to OFF.
SETTING BASIC PARTS

When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes
the trigger.
Reset trigger bit
When the trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON -> OFF
When the trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF -> ON
Alarm ID Sets the target alarm type (0 to 3).

*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"

On the "Notify"tab, you can set the end notification device for notifying the end of clearing alarm log.
"Notify", page 9-121

Reference • Clearing alarm logs by switches


"Key entry", page 8-26
• Clearing alarm logs on the VT3
"5-6 Memory Clear", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

9-124 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Control trend graph


Stop/start data sampling of specified trend ID when trigger bit device turns ON(OFF). Clear (remove) the data of trend
graph and XY graph stored to internal memory (SRAM). Meanwhile, you can notify after clearing is executed.

Item Description
Set the stop/start of data sampling, or bit device as a condition of data clearing.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.

Trigger
Select when clearing of alarm log data is to be executed by the state of the trigger bit
device (OFF to ON, or ON to OFF).
 : OFF-> ON, stop/start data sampling, or execute data clearing.
9
 : ON -> OFF, stop/start data sampling, or execute data clearing.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes
the trigger.
Reset trigger bit
When the trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON -> OFF
When the trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF -> ON
Sets the function to be executed.
Data clearing : clear (remove) the data saved to the specified trend ID. *3
Control mode *2 Start recording : restart data sampling when recording of data sampling of
specified trend ID is stopped.
Stop recording : stop data sampling of specified trend ID.
Trend ID Set the trend ID as target ID (0 to 3).
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell" Numerical Value
Display
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 If trend graph (real-time) or XY graph (real-time) is set after turning on, data access (sampling) is being Text Display

executed. To stop data sampling, turn OFF recording after turning the VT3 ON. Message
Display
*3 On the "Notify" tab, you can set the end notification device for notifying that execution of data clear has ended
Alarm Display
only when data clear has been set to the control mode.
Video Display
"Notify", page 9-121
Animation
Display
Reference • Trend graph control by switches Function Controls
"Key entry", page 8-26 Device
BMP File
• Clear the data of trend graph and XY graph in VT3 system. Switching
"5-6 Memory Clear", VT3 Series Hardware Manual VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-125


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Print
Execute the following operations when trigger bit device turns ON(OFF).
Printer settings of VT system setting
Description
Printer Type Output target
ESC/P Raster Printer Hard copy the screen of VT3.
ESC/P Raster 2 VT3 screen is saved on memory card in Windows bitmap files or JPEG
Memory Card *1
LIPS IV Raster files format.
PictBridge
ESC/P-R Ether*2 Printer, memory card Output to printer and memory card simultaneously.
ESC/Page Ether*2
On the screen placed with alarm display parts, the alarm log of alarm ID
Printer will be output from thermal printer (alarm log printing) if trigger bit device
turns ON (OFF).
Thermal printer
This setting is only valid to bill printing. VT3 screen will not saved to
Memory Card *1
memory card. Alarm logs, also, are not saved on Memory Card.
Printer, memory card Execute alarm log printing. Saving to memory card is not executed.
*1 The saving format of images is set through the memory card set by VT system.
*2 This can be used only when the VT3 series and printer are connected via Ethernet.
The VT3 system program must be Ver. 4.81 or later.

• Hard copy of screen


"6-6 Printer Unit", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"6-5 Ethernet Unit", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Saving screens on Memory Card
"6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

9 "Memory Card", page 12-25


"Printer", page 12-26
• Form printing
SETTING BASIC PARTS

"11-5 Form Printing"


• Saving alarm logs on Memory Card
"Save log data to memory card", page 9-131

Point This feature does not function even if placed on screens on other models.
• Printer output
For VT3, this can be used for the VT3-X15(D)/S12(D)/S10/V10(D)/V8/V7/V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/
Q5S(W)/Q5T(W)A. A printer unit (VT2-P1/P2) or Ethernet unit (VT2-E1/E2, VT3-E3) is required.
(Excluding V6H(G)/Q5H(G))
• Memory Card
For VT3, it can be used for all models other than VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A). Even if the
VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) is configured, the configuration will be disabled.
• When VT3 is used on vertical screen, and bitmap files or JPEG files saved on memory card
during printing are opened by computer, the images will rotate 90°.
"Print", page 8-20

9-126 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the print execution condition.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Select when printing is to be executed by the state of the trigger bit device (OFF to
ON, or ON to OFF).
Trigger
 : Printing is executed when the device state changes to ON.
 : Printing is executed when the device state changes to OFF.
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes
Reset trigger bit
the trigger.
When the trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON ->OFF
When the trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF -> ON
9

SETTING BASIC PARTS


*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

On the "Notify" tab, you can set the end notification device for notifying the end of printing.
"Notify", page 9-121

Reference • Printing by switches


"Print", page 8-20
• Printing using system memory area
Numerical Value
"Chapter 14 SYSTEM MEMORY AREA"
Display
• Confirming bitmap files saved on Memory Card
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual Text Display

• Outputting the alarm log from a thermal printer Message


Display
"Printing Alarm Logs", page 9-98
Alarm Display
• Calling up bitmap files saved on Memory Card and displaying them on screen
"9-8 Setting BMP File Switching" Video Display

• Canceling printing by switches Animation


Display
"Stop print", page 8-22
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-127


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Video play/pause
Playing and pausing video is performed when the trigger bit device turns ON (OFF) during video display.

Point This feature does not function even if placed on screens on other models.
Only VT3-X15(D)/S12(D)/S10/V10(D)/V8 support video display, but video units(VT3-VD4/VD1)
are required. For other models, even configuration is performed, it will be disabled.

9 Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the video play/pause switching condition.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
SETTING BASIC PARTS

"Device settings" window.


Set video play/pause image switching in the case of OFF -> ON or ON -> OFF of
trigger bit device.
Trigger
 : Switching in OFF -> ON
 : Switching in ON -> OFF
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3
recognizes the trigger.
Reset trigger bit
When the trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON -> OFF
When the trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF -> ON
Switch channel *2 After selection, it becomes the target of video play/pause image switching.
Select video play or pause display.
Switch mode Play : Moving image display is switched to.
Pause : Still image display is switched to.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 In VT3, video display and RGB cannot be selected at the same time.

Reference • Setting Video Displays


"9-5 Setting Video Displays"
• Video display/pause by switches
"Video play/pause", page 8-23

9-128 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Video Capture
If trigger bit device turns ON (OFF) during video display, the video display (images) will be saved on memory card as
Windows bitmap files or JPEG files by specified file No.. The saving format of images is set through memory card set
by VT system.
You can also notify that saving of the video display to Memory Card has ended.
The video display (images) can also be output using a printer that supports PictBridge, ESC/P-R or ESC/Page. In this
case, they are not saved to a memory card. Video capture output target is set through video set by VT system.
"Video", page 12-27
"Memory Card", page 12-25
"9-5 Setting Video Displays"
"6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"5-2 Option Setup", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

Point For the cautions related to video capture, refer to "Video capture", page 8-23

Setting

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the video capture condition.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
"Device settings" window.
Numerical Value
Select when video capture is to be executed by the state of the trigger bit device Display
(OFF to ON, or ON to OFF).
Trigger
 : Video capture is started when the device state changes to ON. Text Display
 : Video capture is started when the device state changes to OFF.
Message
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 Display
recognizes the trigger.
Reset trigger bit Alarm Display
When the trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON -> OFF
When the trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF -> ON Video Display

Capture target *2, 7 After selection, it becomes the target of video capture. Animation
Display
Mode *8 Select the size of capture images from "display size capture/original size capture" *5.
Function Controls
When this checkbox is marked, the date/time information is displayed on the Device
Display date
captured image. BMP File
Switching
When this checkbox is marked, an image of placed parts also is displayed
VNC Display
Overlap parts overlapped on the video display area during video capture. Settings
This item cannot be set when "original size capture" is selected.
When this checkbox is marked, the color information of the image is converted to gray
Gray scale *3
scale, and the camera image is captured.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-129


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Item Description
Sets how to specify the file No. for saving video display.
File No. specify Internally: Specify by the constant set to the file No.
mode Externally: Specify by the numerical value stored to the file No. specified device. This
numerical value can be changed to any value.
File No. *4 Specify the file No. when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Internally."
Sets the word device for specifying the file No. when "File No. specify mode" is set to
Specify file File No. "Externally."
specifieddevice *1, 4 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Select the data format of the file No. specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD"
Data Format
when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Externally".
The setting screen of memory card set by VT system will be displayed after clicking
File name setting *6
this button. The file name for saving on memory card is set.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 Only one channel can be selected when outputting from a PictBridge, ESC/P-R or ESC/Page compatible
printer. If multiple channels are selected, only the smallest channel in video display will be printed.
*3 No display in VT3.
*4 The settable range of value in file No. will change depending upon the mode set in memory card in VT system
setting.
"6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"Memory Card", page 12-25
*5 Original size refers to maximum size that can be set within the display area size of video display parts.

9
*6 No display in VT2.
*7 In VT2, video display and RGB cannot be selected at the same time.
*8 No display in VT2. No display in VT2. Captured by display size in VT2.
SETTING BASIC PARTS

On the "Notify" tab, you can set the end notification device for notifying that video capture has ended.
"Notify", page 9-121

Reference • Date and Time Format


"VT System", page 12-12
• Video capture by switches
"Video capture", page 8-23
• Video capture trigger
"6-4 Video Unit", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Confirming captured bitmap files
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• If video capture is performed when video is paused by Video play/pause, the still image displayed
on VT3 is captured.
• The files from video capture are called to VT3 screen for display.
"9-8 Setting BMP File Switching"

9-130 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Save log data to memory card


When trigger bit device turns ON (OFF), the data stored to internal memory (SRAM) of VT3 will be saved on memory
card in CSV format (*.csv) (alarm log can be saved by UNICODE text file). Meanwhile, also send notification after log
data is saved.
The following data is saved:
• Alarm Log
• Data of trend graph and XY graph (real-time log data)

Point For VT3, it can be used for all models other than VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A). It cannot be
used for VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).

Record data can also be saved on Memory Card from the VT3. For details on the Memory Card, refer to the following:
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

Reference The following features were confirmed as not functioning on the VT1 when Save log data on Memory
Card was executed on the VT1 (though they are functional on the VT3):
• Monitoring of states of alarm detection devices (saving of alarm log)
• Loading (sampling) of data for real time trend graphs

Setting

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

On the "Notify" tab, you can set the end notification device for notifying that save log data to memory card has ended.
"Notify", page 9-121

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-131


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the save log data on Memory Card condition.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Select when the log data is saved on Memory Card by the state of the trigger bit
device (OFF to ON, or ON to OFF).
Trigger
 : Data is saved when the device state changes to ON.
 : Data is saved when the device state changes to OFF.
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes
the trigger.
Reset trigger bit
When the trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON -> OFF
When the trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF -> ON
Data type Select the type (Trend graph/Alarm log) of data to be saved on Memory Card.
Trend ID When "Data type" is "Trend graph", set the trend ID (0 to 3) to be saved.
Trend Graph
Select the data format of the data to be saved when "Data type" is set to "Trend graph"
Data Format
from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/BCD".
Sets the alarm type (0 or 3) of the alarm log to be saved when "Data type" is set to
Alarm ID
"Alarm log".
Alarm Log
When "Data type" is set to "Alarm log", selects the type of file to save from "CSV file
File type
(MBCS)/Text file (UNICODE)".
Sets how to specify the file No. for saving on Memory Card.
File No. specify Internally : Specify by the constant set to the file No.
mode *2 Externally : Specify by the numerical value stored to the file No. specified device. This
numerical value can be changed to any value.
File No. *2 Specify the file No. when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Internally."
Sets the word device for specifying the file No. when "File No. specify mode" is set to
File No.
Specify file "Externally."
specifieddevice
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
9
*1,*2
settings" window.
Select the data format of the file No. specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD"
Data Format
when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Externally".
SETTING BASIC PARTS

File name setting The setting screen of memory card set by VT system will be displayed after clicking this
*3 button. The file name for saving on memory card is set.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 The settable range of value in file No. will change depending upon the mode set in memory card in VT system setting.
"6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"Memory Card", page 12-25
*3 No display in VT2.

9-132 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Save worksheet data to memory card


When trigger bit device turns ON(OFF), the worksheet data will be saved on memory card in CSV format(*.csv) or
UNICODE text file(*.txt). Meanwhile, also send notification after worksheet data is saved.

Point For VT3, all models other than VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) can be used. VT3-W4T(A)/
W4M(A)/W4G(A) can not be used.

Setting

Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the saveworksheet data to memory card condition.
9
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device

SETTING BASIC PARTS


settings" window.
Select when the worksheet data is saved on Memory Card by the state of the trigger bit
device (OFF to ON, or ON to OFF).
Trigger
 : Data is saved when the device state changes to ON.
 : Data is saved when the device state changes to OFF.
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes
the trigger.
Reset trigger bit
Trigger is in "" : ON -> OFF is reset.
Trigger is in "" : OFF -> ON is reset.
Worksheet ID Sets the ID (0 to 3) of the worksheet to save.
File type Select the type of file to save from "CSV file (MBCS)/Text file (UNICODE)".
Numerical Value
Sets how to specify the file No. for saving on Memory Card. Display
File No. specify Internally : Specify by the constant set to the file No.
mode Externally : Specify by the numerical value stored to the file No. specified device. This Text Display
numerical value can be changed to any value.
Message
File No. *2 Specify the file No. when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Internally." Display

Sets the word device for specifying the file No. when "File No. specify mode" is set to Alarm Display
File No.
Specify file "Externally."
specified device
*1,2 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device Video Display
settings" window. Animation
Select the data format of the file No. specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD" Display
Data Format
when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Externally". Function Controls
Device
File name setting The setting screen of memory card set by VT system will be displayed after clicking BMP File
*3 this button. The file name for saving on memory card is set. Switching
VNC Display
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell" Settings

"6-7 Setting of Devices"


*2 The settable range of value in file No. will change depending upon the mode set in memory card in VT system setting.
"6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"Memory Card", page 12-25
*3 No display in VT2.

On the "Notify" tab, you can set the end notification device for notifying that saving of the worksheet data has ended.
"Notify", page 9-121

Reference Details of worksheets


"Chapter 16 WORKSHEET"
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-133
9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Point • The data (cell values) of the worksheet that was executed before Save worksheet data to
memory card was executed is saved to file.
Cell values can be rewritten from parts (switches, numerical value displays, text displays,
etc.) placed on the VT3 screen. However, values written to cells after a worksheet is
executed are not targeted for Save worksheet to memory card.

• Worksheet data is saved according to the data format set to each cell.

Data format of Cell Range


Bit 0,1
2-word unsigned
0 to 4294967295
decimal
2-word signed decimal -2147483648 to 2147483647
Numerical value in range that can be expressed in "sign + 10 digits before
the decimal point + 12 digits after the decimal point" format
-XXXXXXXXXXXX. DXXXXXXXXXX
to XXXXXXXXXXXX. XXXXXXXXXX
(X: numerical value 0 to 9)
Note, however, that due to the relationship with the effective number of
Float digits, the number is rounded to the nearest whole number at the 8th digit
from the leftmost digit, and all numerical values following are expressed as
zeros.
(Example) When 1234567890.123 is saved by Save worksheet data to
memory card, it becomes 1234568000.000.
If the value is outside of the above range, or the value is an illegal float (real
numbers), ERROR is output.
Text strings are saved as shift JIS code enclosed by double quotations (" ").
When an UNICODE text string is saved, text in shift JIS code is saved as

9 Text string shift JIS code. Other text code is saved as "•••" where  is a 2-byte
space.
Special text codes (double quotations, etc.) are not displayed correctly.
SETTING BASIC PARTS

9-134 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Transfer 1 word
The value of the transfer source word device is written to the transfer destination word device when the trigger bit
device turns ON (OFF).

Item Description
Sets the bit device to be used as the transfer one word condition.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.

Trigger
Select when clearing of alarm log data is to be executed by the state of the trigger bit
device (OFF to ON, or ON to OFF).
 : Transfer one word is executed when the device state changes to ON.
9
 : Transfer one word is executed when the device state changes to OFF.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes
the trigger.
Reset trigger bit
When the trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON -> OFF
When the trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF -> ON
Sets the transfer source word device.
Other word device *2 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Sets the transfer destination word device.
Other word device *2 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell" Numerical Value
Display
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 Selectable from "PLC device" Text Display

"6-7 Setting of Devices" Message


Display

Alarm Display
Point When the trigger is set to Up (Down), and the trigger bit device is ON (OFF), the value of the
original word device is written to the other word device when the value of the original word Video Display

device changes. Animation


Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-135


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Saving the operating log on memory card


When trigger bit device turns ON (OFF), the operating log data saved to internal memory (SRAM) of VT3 will be
saved on memory card in CSV format (*.csv) or UNICODE text file.
Meanwhile, also send notification after log data is saved.

Point For VT3, all models other than VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) can be used. VT3-W4T(A)/
W4M(A)/W4G(A) can not be used.

The operating log on VT3 system can also be saved on memory card. For details on the Memory Card, refer to the following:
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

Setting

9
SETTING BASIC PARTS

On the "Notify" tab, you can set the end notification device for notifying the end of saving the operating log.
"Notify", page 9-121

Item Description
Set bit device as a condition of saving the operating log on memory card.
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings"
window.
Set the saving of operating log on memory card in the case of OFF -> ON or ON -> OFF
of trigger bit device.
Trigger
Up : Data is saved when the device state changes to ON.
Down: Data is saved when the device state changes to OFF.
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes the trigger.
Reset trigger bit When trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON to OFF
When trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF to ON
Clear log if saving is completed After selection, clear the operating log when saving on memory card is finished.
Clear log if saving is failed After selection, clear the operating log when saving on memory card fails.
File type Select the type of file to save from "CSV file (MBCS)/Text file (UNICODE)".

9-136 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Item Description
Sets how to specify the file No. for saving on Memory Card.
Auto *2 : unused smallest file No..
File No. specify
Internally : Specify by the constant set to the file No.
mode
Externally : Specify by the numerical value stored to the file No. specified device. This
numerical value can be changed to any value.
File No. Specify the file No. when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Internally."
Specify Sets the word device for specifying the file No. when "File No. specify mode" is set to
File No. specified
file "Externally."
mode
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Device *1
settings" window.
Select the data format of the file No. specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD"
Data Format
when "File No. specify mode" is set to "Externally".
The setting screen of memory card set by VT system will be displayed after clicking this
File name setting
button. The file name for saving on memory card is set.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device / Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 In all present file folders, itís saved to the unused smallest file No. within file folder with biggest number. If the file
folder is fully loaded, create the next file folder, and save by smallest file No..

Reference About details of operating log


"11-11 Operation Log"

Clear operation log


When trigger bit device turns ON (0FF), the operating log saved to internal memory (SRAM) will be cleared (removed).
Meanwhile, also send notification after operating log is cleared.
9

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Item Description Animation


Display
Set bit device as a condition of clearing the operating log.
Trigger bit device *1 Function Controls
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window. Device

Set the saving of operating log on memory card in the case of OFF -> ON or ON -> OFF of BMP File
Switching
trigger bit device.
Trigger VNC Display
 : OFF -> ON, execute clearing of operating log. Settings
 : ON -> OFF, execute clearing of operating log.
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes the trigger.
Reset trigger bit When trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON to OFF
When trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF to ON
*1 Selectable from "PLC device/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
On the "Notify" tab, you can set the end notification device for notifying the end of clearing the operating log.
"Notify", page 9-121

Reference Clearing the operating log on VT3


"5-6 Memory Clear", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-137


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

Extended command communication


Extended command communication function enables reference device to support more communication commands
through reference device setting.
For example, you can set up multiple parameter value commands by one sent command and read multiple parameter
value commands from one received command.

Point Only PLC models that support extended command communication can be used.
VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC Connection Manual

9
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Item Description
To set up bit device that is necessary for extended command communication.
Trigger bit device
Click the "Browse" button to set up in the "Device settings" window.
Extended command communication is started once the trigger bit device OFF -> ON
or ON -> OFF.
Trigger
 : Start extended command communication when OFF -> ON.
 : Start extended command communication when ON -> OFF.
If this option is checked, trigger bit device will be reset after VT3 identifying trigger.
Reset trigger bit device Trigger "" : ON -> OFF
Trigger "" : OFF -> ON
Command To display the title of command.
Add To add new command.
Delete To delete the command of selected row.
Settings To set up the command of selected row.
Up/Down To change the executing sequence of selected commands.

A notify end device can be set up in the "Notification" tab to notify that extended command communication is over.
"Notify", page 9-121

Point • Extended command communication function will be executed in the sequence of request
receiving.
• If the following extended command communication request is received, the next
communication cycle will be executed after the current extended command
communication is completed.
• Up to 8 requests can be received.
• The functions like page switching, window switching, system screen calling, PLC data
folder execution, language switching, and data transfer, accompanied with screen
switching, will be executed after the current extended command communication is
completed.

9-138 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Item Description
When in communication "When triggering" will be displayed in function control by devices.
To specify an target PLC.
PLC/Station No.
Enabled only for Multitalk or PLC model whose station No. is setup.
Command To select a command to be released.
Send To display send parameters.
Receive To display receiving parameters.
No. To display parameter No.
Parameter To display parameter name. Numerical Value
Data To display setting data. Double click to set up data. Display

Min. value To display min settable value.


Text Display
Max. value To display max settable value.
Message
To assign device or indirect reference in successive number to parameter of selected Display
Assign successive No.
row. This is possible only when device is set up to "PLC device" or "Indirect reference". Alarm Display

Video Display
Reference • For command details, refer to VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC Connection Manual.
Animation
• Switch-based extended command communication Display
"Extended command communication", page 8-31 Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-139


9-8 Setting BMP File Switching
This feature allows you to call up bitmap files saved on Memory Card and display them on the VT3 screen.

Point It cannot used for VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).

Setting BMP File Switching


Parts(P) -> Basic parts(B) -> BMP file switching(B)

Set BMP file switching in the "BMP file switching" window.


Display the "BMP file switching" window by one of the following methods:
• Double-click BMP file switching.
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By opening the menu by clicking the right mouse button, and selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)"

9
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Item Description
Select the ratio used when bitmap files currently saved on Memory Card are to be
Display ratio
displayed on VT3 screen from "1/2X, 1X, 2X".
Select the save destination directory for the bitmap file currently saved on Memory
Specify directory *1
Card from "VTBMP/ VTCPT/VTIMG"
Set the method of specifying channels.
Channel Internally : specify by setting of channels.
specify mode Externally : specify by the numerical value stored to channel specified device. The
numerical value can be changed to any value.
Specify from "RGB/channel 1/channel 2/channel 3 /channel 4", when "Specify mode" is
Channel
Specify set to "Internally".
Channel *4 Set the word device used for specified channel, when "Specify mode" is set to
Channel "Externally".
specified device When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
*2 settings" window.
RGB: 0 Video: 1 to 4
Data Format Select the data format of the file No. specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD".
Sets how to specify the file No.
File No. specify Internally : Specify by the constant set to the file No.
mode Externally : Specify by the numerical value stored to the file No. specified device. This
numerical value can be changed to any value.
Specify File File No. *1 Specify the file No. when "Specify mode" is set to "Internally".
No.
File No. Sets the word device for specifying the file No. when"Specify mode" is set to "Externally."
specified device When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
*2, 3 settings" window.
Data Format Select the data format of the file No. specified device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD".
BMP file switches are automatically assigned the label "lm_****" as the default.
Label Correct this label as necessary. (**** is the creation number. A number starting from
0000 is appended.)

9-140 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-8 Setting BMP File Switching

*1 The saving list of files is shown below.


The settable range of value in file No. will change depending upon the mode set in memory card in VT system
setting.
"6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"Memory Card", page 12-25

Directory Name Description


VTBMP The saving list of files for BMP file switching
VTCPT The saving list of files captured from video
VTIMG The saving list of files to start printing (save on memory card)

The switching files will be saved by a fixed file name (file folder names and file names are half-width characters) into
\VTBMP file folder, which is previously created under root directory of memory card. The directory structure and
file name may differ depending upon the mode set in memory card of VT system.
For the details, refer to "6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

*2 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"

*3 BMP file switching is not executed when a numerical value outside of the file No. range is specified to the file
No. specified device.
*4 In the memory card set in VT system, the mode is set as "VT3 mode". This item can be set when "VTCPT" is
selected by specified directory.

Point • Specify 24-bit (True Color) Windows bitmap file as the bitmap file to save on Memory Card.
JPEG files could use expansion name .jpg.
• JPEG files over 1024x768 cannot be read. 9
• The bitmap files have a priority in the case of same file No. for bitmap files and JPEG files.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


• The files saved on memory card will be reduced to 32768 colors display on VT3.
• Place BMP file switch parts inside the display frame of the edit screen. These parts will not
function properly if they are placed outside the display frame.
• Reading big file display will take a longer time.
• BMP file switches do not function even if they are placed in printer forms.
• The maximum number of BMP file switch parts that can be displayed simultaneously in a
single page (base screen + window screens) is 32.
• The display contents of BMP file switch parts on Base screen (window screen) will be read
from memory card and then updated during page switching (windows ON).
• The window placed with BMP file switch parts will be shifted. When the display position of
BMP file switch parts is changed, BMP file switch parts will be read again from window Numerical Value
Display
screen of memory card.
• When the files in memory card are changed through network card (FTP server function), Text Display
the displayed BMP file switch parts cannot be updated. To update the display via Ethernet,
Message
use the Memory Card lock function provided in the FTP server functions. The display Display
content can be updated when the Memory Card is unlocked. Alarm Display
"8-5 FTP Server Function", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
Video Display
• When printing, video capture, form printing, record data receiving (operation record
receiving, trend chart receiving, alarm log receiving) or screen image receiving is Animation
Display
performed, display of the BMP file switching component will not be updated. After these
Function Controls
operations are finished, files will be read again from the memory card for all the BMP file Device
switching components. BMP File
Switching
• The display content of BMP file switch parts sometimes "grays out" during printing, video
VNC Display
capture or printing of printer forms. Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-141


9-8 Setting BMP File Switching

Point • The size of BMP file switch parts set during placing must match the size of files read from
memory card.
Bitmap files are displayed as follows when their sizes differs from that of the BMP file
switch part:

Size of read bitmap file < Display size of BMP file switch part

Size of read bitmap file

As the read bitmap file is smaller, the


remaining area is displayed in gray.
Display size of BMP file switch part

Size of read bitmap file > Display size of BMP file switch part

Display size of BMP


file switch part

As the read bitmap file is larger, the


protruding area is not displayed.
Size of read bitmap file

9
• Bitmap files are displayed as follows when they are used on a vertical screen, and a file
SETTING BASIC PARTS

saved as a video capture or hardcopy on Memory Card is read on the VT3 screen.

Size of read bitmap file < Display size of BMP file switch part

Display size of BMP file


switch part

As the read bitmap file is smaller, the


remaining area is displayed in gray.

Size of read
bitmap file

Size of read bitmap file > Display size of BMP file switch part

Size of read bitmap file

As the read bitmap file is larger,


the protruding area is not displayed.

Display size of
BMP file
switch part

9-142 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-8 Setting BMP File Switching

Point • When two or more BMP file switch parts are placed overlapping each other on screen, only
the BMP file switch part at the front (top) will be displayed.

(1) When BMP file switch parts are (2) When BMP file switch parts in
overlapping each other in the same different screens (base windows) are
screen (base window). overlapping each other.

(3) When screens are overlapping but


BMP file switch parts are not
overlapping each other.
: BMP file switch parts
that are displayed.

: BMP file switch parts
that are not displayed.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-143


9-9 VNC Display Settings
As the client of VNC server, VT3 can display PC screens or allow key entry.

Point • Not available for the VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A/W4T(A)/W4G(A)/


W4M(A)/V7R.
• Up to 4 VNC display parts can be configured/displayed in one screen.
• Only one VNC display part with the same VNC server No. can be displayed in one screen.
• When VNC display part and BMP file switch part are overlapped, only the front one can be
displayed. Other parts cannot be displayed.
• VNC display part must be configured in the display frame of the Edit window. In case it is
beyond the display frame, exception may occur.

VNC Display Settings


Parts(P) -> Basic parts(P) -> VNC display(C)

Set up VNC display in the "VNC display" window.


The following means are available to display the "VNC display" window.
• Double click the "VNC display".
• Select "Edit(E)" -> "Part attribute settings(S)" from the menu.
• Click button.
• Select "Part attribute settings(S)" from the right-click menu.

9
SETTING BASIC PARTS

Item Description
VNC No. Specify a VNC server No. (0 to 3) to be connected.
VNC server settings To set up IP address and port No. of VNC server.
To specify the display size (320x240 dots, 512x384 dots, 640x480 dots, 1024x768
Display area size
dots, free size) on VT screen.
Scale server To scale down VNC server image (1, 1/2, 1/3).
Zoom in To scale up the VNC server image (1, 2).
If this option is checked, mouse operation will not be possible for VNC server even if
Disable touch entry
VNC display part is touched. But you can still use the VNC key switch.
Scroll bar Check this option to display scroll bar on the right and bottom of the screen.

Point • In one screen, only one VNC display part with the same VNC server No. can be displayed.
• Up to 4 VNC display parts can be displayed in one screen.
• No VNC display part can be displayed in the portrait screen.

9-144 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


9-9 VNC Display Settings

VNC server settings


When VNC display is used, in addition to VNC display parts, the VNC server should also be set up.

Point • The VNC server of ULtraVNC can be connected with PC.


• Operation check is complete on the Ver.1.0.5.6.
* UltraVNC is a GNU GPL license free software.

1 Display the VNC server settings screen.


The VNC server settings screen can be displayed in the following ways.
• Double click the VNC display part and click the "VNC server settings" button in the "Settings" tab of the "VNC
display" window.
• Click the "VT system settings" -> "VNC server" in the "System settings" tab of the "Workspace".
• Select Resources(R) -> VT system settings(S) -> VNC server(N) from the menu.

SETTING BASIC PARTS


2 Set up IP address and port No. of VNC server.
Numerical Value
Display

Text Display

Message
Display

Alarm Display

Video Display

Animation
Display
Function Controls
Device
BMP File
Switching
VNC Display
Settings

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 9-145


9-9 VNC Display Settings

Item Description
VNC No. Select the VNC No. to be used.
IP address Set up IP address of VNC server.
Port No.* Set up port No. of VNC server.
Advanced settings Set up timeout value and password.
* The following TCP port No. will be used for VNC server connection. So please keep it usable.
VNC No. 0: 20000 VNC No. 1: 20001
VNC No. 2: 20002 VNC No. 3: 20003

Item Description
Timeout value Set up timeout value (1 to 30s) for communication with VNC server.

9
Password Check this option to enable the Password (max 8 half-width characters).
Server image color Specify the image color of VNC server.
SETTING BASIC PARTS

9-146 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10
SETTING METERS &
IMAGES
This chapter describes how to set meters and images.

10-1 Setting Meters •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 10-2


10-2
10-3
Setting Statistical images ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••10-22
Setting Trend images•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••10-28
10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


10-4 XY image Settings ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••10-62

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-1


10-1 Setting Meters

Setting Meters
Parts(P) -> Meters/images(M) -> Bar image meter(B)
Parts(P) -> Meters/images(M) -> Circle meter(C)
Parts(P) -> Meters/images(M) -> Sector meter(F)

Set meters in the " meter" window. (: Bar image/Circle meter/Sector).
Display the "meter" window by one of the following methods:
• By double-clicking the meter
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)" from right - click menu

Data

10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Item Description
Set the word device to be targeted for metering.
Reference word device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings"
window.
Select the data length of the target word device from "1 word/2 words". When the data length is
Data length set to 2 words, two continuous words are used.
When the data format is set to Float, the data length is fixed to 2 words.
Select the data format of the reference word device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Data Format BCD/Float".
Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's complement format.

*1 Selectable from "PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"

10-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-1 Setting Meters

Item Description
Set the input range (lower limit value/upper limit value) of numerical values to be
displayed as a meter. When the reference word device exceeds the input range
Lower limit *3
(lower limit value/upper limit value), the display on the VT3 does not change.
Num:
Input range *2
PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell:
PLC device/Indirect reference/Cell:
Upper limit*3 The alarm range can be changed by setting a PLC device/indirect reference/
calculation/cell to the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
After selection, you can set the display range (lower limit value/upper limit
value) of meters displayed on VT3. When the display range is set, the values
Display range of the reference word device are converted for display on the VT3. When
this checkbox is not marked, the numerical values of the reference word
device are not converted and are isplayed at the input range.
Display range*2,*4
Num:
Lower limit *3
Set a constant as the display range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/cell:
Upper limit*3 The display range can be changed by setting the PLC device/indirect reference/
calculation/cell as the display range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
When this checkbox is marked, the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit
value) can be set. When the value of the reference word device exceeds the
Alarm range
alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value), alarms can be displayed on
the VT3 (data color can be changed or made to blink).
Alarm range*2 Lower limit *3 Num:
Set a constant as the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/cell:
Upper limit*3 The alarm range can be changed by setting the PLC device/indirect reference/
calculation/cell as the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
Ideal line When this item is checked, the ideal line is displayed.
Num:
Ideal line *2 Set a constant as the ideal line (ideal value).
Ideal Value *3 PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/cell:
The ideal line (ideal value) can be changed bysetting a PLC device/indirect
reference/calcula-tion/cell to the ideal line (ideal value).
Meters are automatically assigned the following labels as the default.
10
Correct this label as necessary. (""****" " is the creation number. A number

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


starting from 0000 is appended.)
Label
Bar image meter: Bm_"****"
Circle meter: Cm_"****"
Sector meter: Sm_"****"

*2 About setting ranges


"Numerical value setting range", page 10-3
*3 Selectable from "Numerical value/PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*4 [Example] When the input range is set to Lower limit value = 10 and Upper limit value = 100, and display
range is set to Lower limit value = 100 and Upper limit value = 1000

10 100
Input range Meters

Conversion Statistical images


Display range
100 1000 Trend image

XYimages

Numerical value setting range


The setting range of lower limit value/upper limit value of input range/display range and alarm range is as follows.
Data length Display format Setting Range
Unsigned decimal 0 to 65535
1 words Signed decimal -32768 to 32767
BCD 0 to 9999
Unsigned decimal 0 to 4294967295
Signed decimal -2147483648 to 2147483647
2 words
BCD 0 to 99999999
Float -3.40282347x1038 to 3.40282347x1038

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-3


10-1 Setting Meters

Display(bar image meter)

10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Item Description
Select the meter format from "Absolute value/Deviation".
Absolute value:
Displays the input range as the display range (meter start point as lower limit
Display format *1 value and meter end point as upper limit value).
Deviation:
Displays the upper limit value of the input range at both the plus and minus sides
with the lower limit value of the input range as the center of the display range.
Displacement direction *2 Select the direction of data increase from "Left -> right/right -> left/bottom -> top/top -> bottom".
Data Display pattern Select the meter display pattern from "Paint/Needle/image".
Data color *3 Select the color of the data area.
Alarm lower limit
Select the color of the data area when the value falls below the lower limit value.
data color*3
Data Alarm upper limit
Select the color of the data area when the value exceeds the upper limit value.
(Paint) data color*3
The background color of data area of meters is displayed after selection. If it is not
Background color *3
marked, the background color is transparent.
Separate When this checkbox is marked, the separate display appears when an alarm occurs.
Needle type Select the type of needles.
Line type *3 Select the line type of the needle.
Needle
Line color*3 Select the line color of the needles.
Lower limit Line type *3 Select the line type of the needle when the value falls below the lower limit value.
Data Alarm
needle Line color*3 Select the color of the needle when the value falls below the lower limit value.
(Needle)
Upper limit Line type *3 Select the line type of the needle when the value exceeds the upper limit value.
Alarm
needle Line color*3 Select the color of the needle when the value exceeds the upper limit value.
The background color of data area of meters is displayed after selection. If it is not
Background color *3
marked, the background color is transparent.
See page 10-6 for descriptions on *1 to *3

10-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-1 Setting Meters

Item Description
Style Select the display style.
Free style Change ON image/OFF image, alarm lower limit image/alarm upper limit image.
When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image"
Change
window is displayed.
ON image color Select the color of the data area.
Lower limit alarm Select the color of the data area when the value falls below the lower
image color limit value.
Upper limit alarm Select the color of the data area when the value exceeds the upper limit
image color value.
The background color of data area of meters is displayed after selection.
Data (Image) Background color*3
If it is not marked, the background color is transparent.
Use image After selection, you can set OFF image.
OFF image color Select the color system of OFF image.
Set how many images can be displayed in bar image meters according
to display style.
Number of repetitions
Absolute value: 1 to 20
Deviation : 1 to10
Select the display modes from "Partial display/round-up display/round-
Display mode
off display".
When this checkbox is marked, the separate display appears when an
Separate
alarm occurs.
When this checkbox is marked, the data frame of the meter is displayed.
Image frame
Data frame If it is not marked, the frame color is transparent.
Frame color*3 Select the data frame color.
Image frame After selection, the image frame can be used.
Style Select the style of image frame.
Free style When image frame is used, you can change the display images after selection.
When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image"
Change
Image frame
Normal color
window is displayed.
Select the color of image frame in normal state. 10
Select the color of image frame when the value falls below the lower
Lower limit alarm color

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


limit value.
Ppper limit alarm color Select the color of image frame when the value exceeds the upper limit
value.
Alarm After selection, alarm line or alarm image can be displayed.
Alarm/Ideal line
Style Slect the style used for alarm display from "Line/alarm image ".
Alarm Alarm lower
When this checkbox is marked, the lower limit line is displayed.
lower limit line
limit Line type*3 Select the type of the lower limit line.
line Line color*3 Select the color of the lower limit line.
Alarm (line)
Alarm Alarm upper
When this checkbox is marked, the upper limit line is displayed.
upper limit line
limit Line type*3 Select the type of the upper limit line.
line Line color*3 Select the color of the lower limit line.
Meters
Free style When alarm image is used, you can change the images after selection.
When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image" Statistical images
Change
window is displayed.
Trend image
Normal color Select the color of alarm image in normal state.
Alarm (image)
Select the color of alarm image when the value falls below the lower XYimages
Lower limit alarm color
limit value.
Select the color of alarm image when the value exceeds the upper limit
Upper limit alarm color
value.
Line type*3 Select the type of the ideal line.
Ideal line
Line color*3 Select the color of the ideal line.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is
BLK*3
clicked. The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
See page 10-6 for descriptions on *3

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-5


10-1 Setting Meters

*1 The display format is as follows when the displacement direction of the bar image meter is left to right:

Absolute value Deviation

- side - + + side
Lower limit Upper limit Lower limit Upper lim
Input range Input range

*2 The displacement direction of bar image meters is as follows:

Left -> right Right -> left Bottom -> top Top -> botto

*3 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"

10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

10-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-1 Setting Meters

About image meter


In image meters, the area where the set style image are displayed will increase or decrease in relation to data value.
The image can be set to any image. In addition, after "iuse image" of background color is selected, OFF image can
also be set.

When OFF image isn't used


Displacement direction Left->right

ON graph
Value of reference word device

When OFF image is used Displacement direction Left->right

OFF graph
ON graph
Value of reference word device

The following are examples of how the images are displayed based on the setting of "display mode" and "display
mode".
Input range : 0 to 100
display mode : 10 10
Value of reference word device : 65

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


When display mode is for "Partial display"

6.5 images are displayed since the images are displayed according to the value of reference word device.

When display mode is for "Round-up display"

Meters

Statistical images

Trend image
7 images are displayed owing to round-up display.
XYimages

When display mode is for "Round-off display"

6 images are displayed owing to round-off display.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-7


10-1 Setting Meters

About image frame/alarm image


More beautiful meters can be generated using Image frame and alarm image.

Data area
image frame

Alarm graph

Adjust the display position of alarm image


You can change the position of display alarm image.
When meters are selected, click the lines between - marks on corners of alarm image for displacement.
When displacement direction is left -> right/right -> left, the alarm image can move up and down.
When displacement direction is top -> bottom/bottom -> top, the alarm image can move left and right.

10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

10-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-1 Setting Meters

Change style image (Bar image meter)


The "Free style Select image" window is displayed when "Free style" is selected on the "Display" tab and the "Change"
button is clicked.
When the data area is used, you can change individually ON image/OFF image and the display images for lower limit value/
upper limit value.
When Image frame and alarm image are used, you can change individually the display images for normal/lower limit value/
upper limit value.

Data Image frame

Alarm image

10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


When the "Select from file" checkbox is marked
Specify the Windows bitmap file or JPEG file, and specify the display image.
When the "Select" button is clicked, the "Open image" window is displayed.

Meters

Statistical images

Trend image

XYimages

Item Description
Look in Select the drive and folder containing the file to open.
File Name Select the name of the file to open.
File of type Select the type of file.
Gray scale When this checkbox is marked, the color information of image files is converted to a gray scale image.
When this checkbox is marked, the image is dithered. Dithering is used to make the boundary
Dithering between colors stand out when Substraction Color to the VT32's display colors (32768) is
performed.
Frame width Refer to "Change style image (Circle Sector meter)", page 10-17
If you click this button, a preview of the image after substraction color to the VT3's display color
After conversion
(32768), dithering, and gray scale processing is displayed.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-9


10-1 Setting Meters

When the "Select from style" checkbox is marked


Select and specify display images from images of meters installed into VT STUDIO.
Item Description
Style Selects the style.
Color Selects the color.
Setting After clicking, set the image of selected style/color system.

Creation of style image


Click "Parts designer" button, start the style creation software "Parts designer ". The style can be created easily by
using Windows bitmap files and JPEG files.
"11-7 Active Edit"

Separate display
[Example] When an alarm range is set on a bar image meter
When separate display isn't set When separate display is set

Alarm upper limit

Alarm lower limit

10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

10-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-1 Setting Meters

Display (Circle Sector meter)

10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


Item Description
Select the meter format from "Absolute value/Deviation".
Absolute value:
Displays the input range as the display range (meter start point as lower limit value
Display format *1 and meter end point as upper limit value).
Deviation:
Displays the upper limit value of the input range at both the plus and minus sides
with the lower limit value of the input range as the center of the display range.
Select the direction that data increases:
Displacement direction *2 Circle : CW/CCW
Sector : CW/CCW
Data Display pattern Select the meter display pattern from "Paint/Needle/image".
Data color *4 Select the color of the data area.
Meters
Lower limit alarm
Select the color of the data area when the value falls below the lower limit value.
data color*4 Statistical images
Upper limit alarm
Select the color of the data area when the value exceeds the upper limit value.
data color*4 Trend image

The background color of data area of meters is displayed after selection. If it is


Background color *4 XYimages
not marked, the background color is transparent.
Data (Paint)
Set the scoopout ratio (0 to 90%, in 10% increments) when the center of the
Scoop out ratio
meter is to be displayed scooped out. Set this item on sector meters.
Set the start angle within the range 0 to 359 deg. Set this item on circle/sector
Start angle*3
meters.
End angle*3 Set the end angle within the range 0 to 359 deg. Set this item on sector meters.
*5 When this checkbox is marked, the separate display appears when an alarm
Separate display
occurs.
See page 10-13 for descriptions on *1 to *5.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-11


10-1 Setting Meters

Item Description
Needle type Select the type of the needle.
Line type*4 Select the line type of the needle.
Needle
Line color*4 Select the line color of the needles.
Lower limit Line type*4 Select the line type of the needle when the value falls below the lower limit value.
alarm
needle Line color*4 Select the color of the needle when the value falls below the lower limit value.
Upper limit Line type*4 Select the line type of the needle when the value exceeds the upper limit value.
Data area alarm
needle Line color*4 Select the color of the needle when the value exceeds the upper limit value.
(Needle)
The background color of data area of meters is displayed after selection. If it
Background color*4
is not marked, the background color is transparent.
Set the scoopout ratio (0 to 90%, in 10% increments) when the center of the
Scoop out ratio
meter is to be displayed scooped out. Set this item on Circle Sector meters.
Set the start angle within the range 0 to 359 deg. Set this item on circle/
Start angle*3
sector meters.
End angle*3 Set the end angle within the range 0 to 359 deg. Set this item on sector meters.
Style Select the display style.
Free style Change ON image/OFF image, alarm lower limit image/alarm upper limit image.
When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image"
Change
window is displayed.
ON image color Select the color of the data area.
Lower limit alarm
Select the color of the data area when the value falls below the lower limit value.
image color
Upper limit alarm
Select the color of the data area when the value exceeds the upper limit value.
image color
The background color of data area of meters is displayed after selection. If it
Data (Image) Background color*4
is not marked, the background color is transparent.
Use image After selection, you can set OFF image.

10 OFF image color

Start angle*6
Select the color system of OFF image.
Set the start angle within the range 0 to 359 deg. Set this item on circle/
sector meters.
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

End angle*6 Set the end angle within the range 0 to 359 deg. Set this item on Sector meters.
Separate display*5 When this checkbox is marked, the separate display appears when an alarm occurs.
Display mode Select the display modes from "Partial display/round-up display/round-off display".
When "round-up display/round-off display" as the display modes, you can
Division angle
set in 15× increment.
When this checkbox is marked, the data frame of the meter is displayed. If it
Frame
Frame is not marked, the frame color is transparent.
Frame color *3 Select the data frame color.
Image frame After selection, the image frame can be used.
Style Select the style of image frame.
Free style When Image frame is used, you can change the display images after selection.
When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image"
Change
window is displayed.
Image frame
Normal color Select the color of image frame in normal state.
Lower limit alarm
Select the color of image frame when the value falls below the lower limit value.
color
Upper limit alarm
Select the color of image frame when the value exceeds the upper limit value.
color
Alarm After selection, alarm line or alarm image can be displayed.
Alarm/Ideal line
Style Elect the style used for alarm display from "Line/alarm image ".
Alarm
Alarm lower When this checkbox is marked, the lower limit line is displayed.
lower limit limit line
line Line type *3 Select the type of the lower limit line.
Alarm Line color*3 Select the color of the lower limit line.
(Line) Alarm
Alarm upper limit When this checkbox is marked, the upper limit line is displayed.
upper limit line
line Line type *3 Select the type of the upper limit line.
Line color*3 Select the color of the lower limit line.
See page 10-14 for descriptions on *3 to *6.

10-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-1 Setting Meters

Item Description
Free style When alarm image is used, you can change the images after selection.
When the "Free style" checkbox is marked,"Free style Select image"
Change
window is displayed.
Alarm Normal color Select the color of alarm image in normal state.
(Image) Select the color of alarm image when the value falls below the lower limit
Lower limit alarm color
value.
Select the color of alarm image when the value exceeds the upper limit
Upper limit alarm color
value.
Line type *3 Select the type of the ideal line.
Ideal line
Line color*3 Select the color of the ideal line.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is
BLK*3 clicked. The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set
interval.
See page 10-14 for descriptions on *3.

*1 The display format is as follows when the displacement direction of the circle meter is clockwise:

Absolute value Deviation

Upper limit Lower limit Lowe


- +

-side
+side

Input range
Uppe

The display format is as follows when the displacement direction of the sector meter is clockwise:
10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


Absolute value Deviation

Input range - Lower limit +


Input ra

- side
+ side

Lower limit Upper limit Upper limit

Meters

*2 The displacement direction of circle meters is as follows: Statistical images

Trend image
Clockwise Counterclockwis
XYimages

The displacement direction of sector meters is as follows:

Clockwise Counterclockwis

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-13


10-1 Setting Meters

*3 The start angle and end angle of sector are set as follows:

(setting examples)

End angle
End angle 45° Start angle 4

0° 0°
Start
angle
0° Start angle 315° End angle 3

The start angle of circle is changed as follows.

Start angle

*4 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"


*5 "Separate display", page 10-10
*6 When round-up or round-off display is selected as the display mode, you can set in 15° increment.

10 About image meter


SETTING METERS & IMAGES

In image meters, the area where the set style image are displayed will increase or decrease in relation to data value.
The image can be set to any image. In addition, after "Use image" of background color is selected, OFF image can
also be set.

When OFF image isn't used

ON graph
Value of reference word device

When OFF image is used

ON graph

Value of reference word device

OFF graph

10-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-1 Setting Meters

The following are examples of how the images are displayed based on "display mode " and "Division angle".
Input range : 0 to 360
Division angle : 15
Value of reference word device : 50

When display mode is for "Partial display"

50° images are displayed since the images are displayed according to the value of reference word device.

When display mode is for "Round-up display"

10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


60° images are displayed owing to round-up display.

When display mode is for "Round-off display"

Meters

Statistical images

Trend image

XYimages

45° images are displayed owing to round-off display.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-15


10-1 Setting Meters

About image frame/alarm image


More beautiful meters can be generated using Image frame and alarm image.

Image frame

Data area

Alarm image

Adjust the display position of alarm image


You can change the position of display alarm image.
When meters are selected, click the lines between •-• marks on corners of alarm image for displacement.

10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

10-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-1 Setting Meters

Change style image (Circle Sector meter)


The "Free style Select image" window is displayed when "Free style" is selected on the "Display" tab and the
"Change" button is clicked.
When the data area is used, you can change individually ON image/OFF image and the display images for lower limit
value/upper limit value.
When Image frame and alarm image are used, you can change individually the display images for normal/lower limit
value/upper limit value.

Refer to "Change style image (Bar image meter)", page 10-9

Data Image frame

Alarm image

10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


Frame width
For example, when frame width is set to 10 dots, area (10 dots starting from periphery of source image selected)
also maintain 10 dots during enlargement/reduction, and also enlarges/reduces vertically or horizontally.

source image

10 dots
Meters

Statistical images
Reduce 10 dots
Trend image

10 dots XYimages

10 dots

* The area of 4-side 10 x10 dots


is not enlarged or reduced.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-17


10-1 Setting Meters

Circular frame width


For example, when circular frame width is set to 10 dots, area (10 days starting from periphery of source image
selected) also maintain 10 dots during enlargement/reduction, and also enlarges/reduces circularly.

area is changed as follows.


• Scoop out when used for data area or alarm image of circle/sector meter.
• Not scoop out when used for image frame.

source image

Reduce

10 dots 10 dots

Scoop out ratio


For example, when scoopout ratio is set to 80%, area maintain the scoopout ratio even during enlargement/
10 reduction, and also enlarges/reduces circularly and centrally.
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Initial graph

Reduce
80 dots 40 dots
20 dots 10 dots

None
No frame width/circular frame width/scoopout ratio is set, and selected initial image is used.

Point For the data area of bar image meter, frame width of every ON image, OFF image, lower limit
image and upper limit image can be set through "Open image" window.

10-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-1 Setting Meters

Scale

Item Description
When this item is checked, a scale (main scale 6 dots, auxiliary scale 3dots) is
Scale
attached around the meter (up, down, left or right).
Set the scale display position.
Bar image meter:
When the displacement direction is "Left -> right" or "Right -> left": Select from "Top/
Bottom".
Scale position
Scale position When the displacement direction is "Bottom -> top" or "Top -> bottom": Select from
"Right/Left".
Circle/sector meter:
When scoopout ratio is set: select from "external/internal".

Scale layout*1
Add to data side After selection, display the scale at data side.
Select the scale layout method from "Equal intervals/Equal divisions".
10
Main scale When this checkbox is marked, the main scale is displayed on the meter.

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


Interval Set the scale interval on the main scale.
Main scale
Number of
Set the number of divisions (2 to 100) on the main scale.
divisions
Auxiliary scale When this checkbox is marked, the auxiliary scale is displayed on the meter.
Interval Set the interval on the auxiliary scale.
Auxiliary scale
Number of
Set the number of divisions (2 to 100) on the auxiliary scale.
divisions
Normal Set the line color.
Lower limit alarm Set the line color of the scale at the alarm lower limit.
Scale line color*2 Upper limit alarm Set the line color of the scale at the alarm upper limit.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part
BLK
blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Meters
*1 "About Scale Layout", page 10-21
Statistical images
*2 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"
Trend image

Point The scale is not displayed when a narrow scale interval is set. Either make the meter larger, XYimages
or change the scale setting.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-19


10-1 Setting Meters

Scale markings

Item Description
Scale markings When this checkbox is marked, numerical values are displayed on the main scale.
Number of display digits Set the number of digits (1 to 12 digits) in numerical values to be displayed on the scale.
Decimal point position*1 Set the position (0 to 12 digits) where the decimal point is inserted.
Zero suppress When this checkbox is marked, unwanted zeros are no longer displayed.
When this checkbox is marked, "+" is displayed for plus numbers in the numerical value
Display +
display.
Fonts Select the font to be used for display from "Bitmap font/Windows font".
The fonts are displayed when Windows font is selected. The fonts to be used are
List of available fonts
10 Font setting
displayed from imageics data list. Select the available fonts.
You can set the fonts not included in the list of available fonts. After the font type and
size are set through "Select font" window, add them to the list of available fonts.
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Character type Select the font to be used for display from "Half-width/Fuf-rwidth/7-segment*4".
Select the font size of the numerical values to be displayed on the scale from "1//2X, 1X,
Text size*3, *4
or 2X".
Set the color of text on the scale for each of normal operation, alarm lower limit, and
Text color*2
alarm upper limit.
Set the text on the scale to bold for each of normal operation, alarm lower limit, and
Bold
alarm upper limit.
Gives text a shadow£¨ so that it looks engraved. Thus it has a 3D effect for each of
Shadow
Text normal operation, alarm lower limit, and alarm upper limit.
Decoration Gives text a shadow£¨ so that it looks engraved. Thus it looks engraved for each of
Engraved
normal operation, alarm lower limit, and alarm upper limit.
Text shadow Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
color*2 decoration.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part
BLK*2
blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 Example of setting decimal position
“Setting Numerical Value Displays” page 9-4
*2 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*3
Half-width Fuf-rwidth-
Text size
characters segment
At 1/2X text size 8 x 8 dots -
At 1X text size 8 x 16 dots 16 x 16 dots
At 1X text size 16 x 32 dots 32 x 32 dots
When "Text decoration"is set 2 dots

*4 No setting is possible when Windows font is selected.

10-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-1 Setting Meters

Preview

Item Description
The meter may be displayed in preview mode according to entered value.
Display value In addition, when the setting dialog box is closed by pressing "OK" button, the meters in edit window will
be displayed under the same state with preview display.
"Reset" Reset to the value in the first time setting.

About Scale Layout


The following describes equal interval and equal division. 10
Item Description

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


Displays the scale on the display range (input range) of the meter for each value set at "Interval" on the
Equal intervals
main scale. Displays the scale for each value set at "Interval" also on the auxiliary scale.
Equal Divides the display range (input range) of the meter into Equal divisions by the number of divisions on the
main scale. Also, for the auxiliary scale, divides one section of the main scale further into equal divisions
divisions by a number of divisions.

[Example] Equal intervals (Bar image meter) Equal divisions(Bar image meter)
Input range : 0 to 50000 Input range : 0 to 10000
Displacement direction: Bottom to top Displacement direction: Bottom to top
Scale position : left Scale position : left
Main scale : 10000 Main scale :2
Auxiliary scale : 2000 Auxiliary scale :5
Scale markings : Yes Scale markings : Yes
Meters

50000 10000 Statistical images

Trend image
Scale marking
40000
XYimages
5000
30000 5000 Auxiliary scale

20000 Main scale

10000 0

Point The scale marking is displayed only on the main scale.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-21


10-2 Setting Statistical images

Setting Statistical images


Parts (P) Meters/images(M) Statistical bar image meter(S)
Parts (P) Meters/images(M) Statistical Circle meter(G)

Set statistical images in the “ statistical image" window. ( : Bar image/Circle meter).
Display the " statistical image" window by one of the following methods:
• By double-clicking statistical images
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)" from fight-click menu.

Setting

10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Item Description
Set the leading word device to be targeted for the statistic image. When the
Reference word device*1 "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
Data format Select the data format of the reference word device from "Unsigned decimal/BCD".
Select the direction that data increases:
Displacement direction *2 Bar image :Left -> right/Right -> left/Bottom -> top/Top -> bottom
Circle meter :CW/CCW
Number of deivisions Set the number of times (2 to 8) that the image is to be divided.
Image frame After selection, the image frame can be used.
Style Select the style of image frame.
Image frame Free style When image frame is used, you can change the display images after selection.
Change*4 When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image" window is displayed.
Color Select the color system of image frame.
The frame of data area is displayed after selection. If it is not marked, the frame
Data frame
Data frame color is transparent.
Frame color *3 Select the frame color.
Data color*3 Select the color of the data area.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The
BLK*3
part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Statistical images are automatically assigned the following labels as the default.
Correct this label as necessary. ("****" is the creation number. A number starting
Label from 0000 is appended.)
Bar image : Bs_****
Circle meter : Cs_****

See next page for descriptions on *1 to *3

10-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-2 Setting Statistical images

*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Indirect reference/Cell"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"

Word devices are used continuously for the number of set divisions.
[Example] When number of divisions = 3

Word device Statistical bar graph meter

Color of data 2
Leading reference word device No. +0 Data 1
Leading reference word device No. +1 Data 2
Leading reference word device No. +2 Data 3

Color of data 1 Color of data 3

Word device Statistical circle meter

Color of
Leading reference word device No. +0 Data 1
data 3
Leading reference word device No. +1 Data 2 Color of data 1

Leading reference word device No. +2 Data 3

Color of data 2

*2 The displacement direction is as follows:

Left -> right Right -> left Bottom -> top


Data 3
Top -> bottom
Data 1
10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 3 Data 2 Data 1 Data 2 Data 2

Data 1 Data 3

Clockwise Counterclockwise

Data 3
Data 3

Data 1

Meters

Data 1 Statistical images

*3 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types" Trend image

XYimages

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-23


10-2 Setting Statistical images

Change the style of image frame


Select "Free style", click "Change" button, then "Select free style image" window is displayed.

"Change style image (Bar image meter)", page 10-9


"Change style image (Circle Sector meter)", page 10-17

10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

10-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-2 Setting Statistical images

Scale

Item Description
When this item is checked, a scale (main scale 6 dots, auxiliary scale 3 dots) is attached around
Scale*1
the statistical image (top, bottom, left or right).
Set the scale display position.
Scale position*2 When the displacement direction is "Left -> right" or "Right -> left": Select from "Top/Bottom".
When the displacement direction is "Bottom -> top" or "Top -> bottom": Select from "Right/Left".
Main scale When this checkbox is marked, the main scale is displayed on the statistical image.
Main scale Number of
Set the number of divisions (2 to 100) on the main scale.
divisions
Auxiliary
When this checkbox is marked, the auxiliary scale is displayed on the statistical image.
Auxiliary scale
scale Number of
Set the number of divisions (2 to 100) on the auxiliary scale.
divisions
Scale line color*3 Set the line color.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all times

10
BLK*3
on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 "About scales", page 10-27
*2 This is set only in the case of statistical bar image meters.

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


*3 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2

Point The scale is not displayed when a narrow scale interval is set. Either make the image larger,
or change the scale setting.

Meters

Statistical images

Trend image

XYimages

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-25


10-2 Setting Statistical images

Scale markings

Item Description
Scale markings When this checkbox is marked, numerical values are displayed on the main scale.
Number of display digits Set the number of digits (1 to 12 digits) in numerical values to be displayed on the scale.
Decimal point position*1 Set the position (0 to 12 digits) where the decimal point is inserted.
Zero suppress When this checkbox is marked, unwanted zeros are no longer displayed.
Fonts Select the font to be used for display from "Bitmap font/Windows font".
The fonts are displayed when Windows font is selected. The fonts to be used are displayed
List of available fonts
from image data list. Select the available fonts.
You can set the fonts not included in the list of available fonts. After the font type and size are
Font setting
set through "Select font" window, add them to the list of available fonts.
Character type Select the font to be used for display from "Half-width/Full-width/7-segment*4".
Text size*3, *4 Select the font size of the numerical values to be displayed on the scale from "1//2X, 1X, or 2X".
Text color*2 Set the color of text on the scale.

10 Bold
Shadow
Set the text on the scale to bold.
Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. Thus it has a 3D effect.
Text
Engraved Gives text a shadow so that it looks engraved. Thus it looks engraved.
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Decoration
Text shadow Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
color *2 decoration.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all
BLK*2
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Display Lower limit Set the lower limit value (0 to 65535) of the display range for the scale markings.
range Upper limit Set the upper limit value (0 to 65535) of the display range for the scale markings.

*1 Example of setting decimal position


“Setting Numerical Value Displays”, page 9-4
*2 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*3
Half-width Full-width/7-
Text size
characters segment
At 1/2X text size 8 x 8 dots -
At 1X text size 8 x 16 dots 16 x 16 dots
At 2X text size 16 x 32 dots 32 x 32 dots
When "Text decoration"is set 2 dots

*4 No setting is possible when Windows font is selected.

10-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-2 Setting Statistical images

About scales

This section describes the scales.


The image display range is divided equally by the number of divisions on the main scale. Also, for the auxiliary
scale, divides one section of the main scale further into equal divisions by a number of divisions.

[Example] Statistical bar image meter


Displacement direction : Bottom -> top
Scale position : left
Main scale : 2
Auxiliary scale :5
Display range : 0 to 100

100

Scale marking

50
50 Auxiliary scale

Main scale

Point The scale marking is displayed only on the main scale.

10
Preview

SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Meters

Statistical images

Trend image

XYimages
Item Description
The images are previewed according to entered value.
Display value In addition, when the setting dialog box is closed by pressing "OK" button, the meters in edit
window will be displayed under the same state with preview display.
"Reset" Reset to the value in the first time setting.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-27


10-3 Setting Trend images

Overview

Types of trend images

There are three types of trend images as follows:


• Real time settings
• Batch sampling
• Worksheet Related

Real time settings


• Trend images are generated by loading data from trend sample devices each time that a sampling trigger is
generated.
• Data is sampled even when a screen in which a trend image is placed is currently not displayed.
• Sampled data is stored in VT3 internal memory by backup battery even after theVT3 is turned OFF.
• Stored data can be saved on Memory Card as a CSV file (*.csv).
• Up to four trend images (real time) can be used on all pages (all screens), and each trend image is classified by a
trend ID (0 to 3).
• Up to eight images can be displayed for each trend ID (0 to 3).

Loaded latest data

Sampling trigger

10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

ψTime ψTime

"Memory size", page 10-60


"Save log data to memory card", page 9-131
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"Normal Trends/Extended Trends", page 10-29

Batch sampling
• When a sampling trigger is generated, the data of continuous word devices is batch-sampled to generate the trend
image.
• Eight images can be displayed for a single trend image (batch sampling).
• Only one trend image (batch sampling) can be placed in a single page (base + window).

Batch-sampled data

Sampling trigger

10-28 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-3 Setting Trend images

Worksheet Related
• When the data of a worksheet is updated, the data of continuous cells on the worksheet are batch-sampled to
generate the trend image.
• Up to eight images can be displayed in a single trend image (worksheet).

Batch-sampled data

Worksheet data
update

About Trend image Settings


To display a trend image (real time), broadly speaking the following two settings must be made.
• Setting trend image parts
"Setting Trend images", page 10-32
• Trend image system settings
"Trend image (real time) System Settings", page 10-57
When displaying trend images (batch sampling), set only trend image parts.
To display a trend image (worksheet), broadly speaking the following two settings must be made:
• Setting trend image parts
"Setting Trend images", page 10-32
• Setting Worksheets
10
"Chapter 16 WORKSHEET"

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


Normal Trends/Extended Trends
The trend image (real time) data acquisition mode can be selected from the followingon for VT3:
• Normal
• Extended (sequential device)
• Extended (individual device)
The number of trend sample devices that can be set and sampling method vary according to the mode.
Setting the acquisition mode
Meters
"Trend image (real time) System Settings", page 10-57
Statistical images
Extended(sequential Extended(individual
Item Normal
device) device) Trend image

Trend sample device Word device (cont.) Word device (cont.) Word device (any) XYimages
1 word 32 4096 512
Number of trends
2 words 16 2048 256
Trend monitor interval Fast Slow
Influence on trend monitor interval Low Adjusted by sampling speed

Point Trend image (real time) data cannot be sampled during the following periods:
• During migration to the System mode screen
• PLC data folder currently being executed
• Data being received and sent by PC (VT STUDIO) and VT3
• Remote COM port tool being used (pause of VT3 function)

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-29


10-3 Setting Trend images

Normal trends

Number of sampling devices when normal trend is selected


Up to 32 continuous word devices are used for sampling.

When data length of 1 word is set for the trend sample device:
Up to 32 images can be sampled. In other words, 32 images can be distributed by trend ID (0 to 3) for sampling.

When data length of 2 words is set for the trend sample device:
Up to 16 images can be sampled. In other words, 16 images can be distributed by trend ID (0 to 3) for sampling.
For example, Trend ID0: 8 images, Trend ID1: 5 images, Trend ID2: 2 images, Trend ID3: 1 images

Data sampling of normal trends


The following illustrates sampling of normal trend data.

VT3

12345

PLC
12345

ABCD

10
Device monitoring
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

interval internally set on VT3: T

The states of all devices at the monitoringtarget are updated at time T.


Monitored target T increases as the number of monitoring targets increases.
࡮Devices in currently displayed page
࡮Alarms (normal)
࡮Trend graph (normal)
࡮System memory area ̖etc

Extended trends

Number of sampling devices when extended trend (sequential devices) is selected.


Up to 4096 continuous word devices are used for sampling.

When data length of 1 word is set for the trend sample device:
Up to 4096 trends can be set. Eight trends can be selected to each trend ID (0 to 3) out of 4096 samples and
displayed as a image.

When data length of 2 words is set for the trend sample device:
Up to 2048 trends can be set. Eight trends can be selected to each trend ID (0 to 3) out of 2048 samples and
displayed as a image.

10-30 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-3 Setting Trend images

Number of sampling devices when extended trend (individual devices) is selected


Up to 512 individual word devices (either continuous or non-continuous) are used for sampling.

When data length of 1 word is set for the trend sample device:
Up to 512 trends can be set. Eight trends can be selected to each trend ID (0 to 3) out of 512 samples and displayed
as a image.

When data length of 2 words is set for the trend sample device:
Up to 256 trends can be set. Eight trends can be selected to each trend ID (0 to 3) out of 256 samples and displayed
as a image.

Data sampling of extended trends


The following illustrates sampling of extended trend data.

VT3

12345

PLC
12345

ABCD

10
Device monitoring
interval internally set on VT3: T

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


Monitored target

Monitored target A Monitored target B


• Devices in currently displayed page • Trend graph (extended)
• Alarms (normal)
• Trend graph (normal)
• System memory area
̖etc

T increases as the number of monitored targets increases.


Monitored target A is always updated at each T. However, as there are many devices being handled, monitored
target B is divided up and sampled, and record edafter finally being regrouped.
Meters
Division of monitored target B
(1) T A+B (1) Statistical images
B (1)
(2) T A+B (2) Trend image
B (2)
(3) T A+B (3) XYimages
B (3)


(N) T A+B (N) B is summarized and stored here.


B (N)

The data of all monitored targets B (B (1) to B (N)) is recorded to internal memory(SRAM) on VT3 the moment B (N) is
updated.
Data Hours
B(1) data ::XX
B(2) data ::XX This is actually the data at a moment in the past from
B(3) data ::XX time ::XX.

::XX
B(N) data ::XX

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-31


10-3 Setting Trend images

Sampling speed

Sampling speed Description


Priority is given to updating of monitored target A. For this reason, the update
Low (screen update priority) cycle (time it takes for all devices on monitored target B to update once) of
monitored target B is extended.

Medium

Priority is given to updating monitored target B. (The update cycle of monitored
High (trend sampling priority) target B is short-ened.) For this reason, the time it takes to update monitored
target A increases.

Sampling speed
"Trend image (real time) System Settings", page 10-57

Use extended trends when there are many devices to be sampled, and the sampling of these devices is set to a slow cycle.

Point • When the sampling trigger is set to "VT timer (auto)," the sampling period cannot be set.
The VT3 automatically memorizes the sampling cycle.
Sampling trigger/sampling period
"Trend image (real time) System Settings", page 10-57
• As recording of data by extended trends is executed when all data acquisitions are
completed, the data acquisition time (recording time) does not match the time that the trigger
occurred.

Setting Trend images


Parts(P) -> Meters/images(M) -> Trend image(T)

10 Set trend images in the "Trend image" window.


Display the "Trend image" window by one of the following methods:
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

• By double-clicking the trend image


• By selecting "Edit" -> "Parts attribute settings" from Menu
• By clicking the button
• By selecting "Parts attribute settings" from right-click menu

Point The trend image drawing speed slows down depending on the following items:
• Number of images
• Number of display items
• Display range setting
• Alarm range setting
• Setting bold line/shadow in the line type of line chart
• Setting non-display value

10-32 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-3 Setting Trend images

Data

Common settings
Item Description
image type Select the type of trend image from "Real time/Batch sampling/Worksheet".
Number of images Set the number of images (1 to 8) to be displayed as trend images.
Number of data*1 Set the number of data to be displayed (number of image plot points) (range: 2 to 900).
The label "Tg_"****" " is automatically assigned as the default tothe trend image. Correct this
Label label as necessary. Correct this label as necessary. ("****" is the creation number. A number
starting from 0000 is appended.)

*1 Set the number of data taking the dot size (e.g. 800 x 600 dots on the VT3-S12) of the unit's display panel into
consideration. To display data, one dot is required for each data, for example, number of data 800 cannot be
set for the VT3-V10 (640 x 480 dots) .
"Auto-size(image)", page 10-41

The number of data is as follows:


[Example] When number of data = 3 [Example] When number of data = 7

Numerical axis 2 5
Numerical axis Data 2

Data 7
Data 1
Data 1
Data 3
Item axis
Item axis 3 4 6
→ Time (real time) → Time (real time)
→ Reference word device → Reference word device
(batch sampling)
→ Reference cell (worksheet)
(batch sampling)
→ Reference cell (worksheet) 10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Meters

Statistical images

Trend image

XYimages

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-33


10-3 Setting Trend images

Real time trend images

Item Description
Set the trend ID (0 to 3) to be displayed when the image type is set to trend image (real
Trend ID
time).
When the "Device setting" button is clicked, the system setting screen for the trend image
Device settings *1
is displayed.

10
Real time settings

Select the data length of the trend sample device from "1 word/2 words". When "2
Data length
words" is set, use two continuous word devices.
Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/BCD". Of the data
Data Format
formats, "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's complement format.
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Arithmetic
Calculatio When this checkbox is marked, calculations can be used for trend image data.
operations
ns*2
Expression Set the calculation formula in the "Device setting" window.
Display mode*3 Select the display mode from "Normal/Recorder".
Set the number of data (1 to 32767) by which the image is scrolled when the trend image
Scroll pitch
is reverse-scrolled by key entry.
*1 "Trend image (real time) System Settings", page 10-57
*2 "6-9 Calculation"
*3 Display as follows.

Normal Recorder

Latest data Latest data

Displacement directio Displacement direction


Time Time
Data is displayed as if a pen is Data is displayed as if paper is
moving over paper. moving like a pen recorder.

10-34 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-3 Setting Trend images

[Example] When Number of trends = 5, Number of images (trend No. 0 to 2 selected for display) = 3, Data length = 2 words

Trend graph
Word Device Trend No.

Leading trend sample device No. +0, +1 No.0 (1)


(1)
Leading trend sample device No. +2, +3 No.1 (2)
Leading trend sample device No. +4, +5 No.2 (3) (2)

Leading trend sample device No. +6, +7 No.3 (4)


(3)
Leading trend sample device No. +8, +9 No.4 (5)

In the above example, five (number of trends) trend data are sampled, and three (number of images: trend Nos. 0 to
2) of these are selected and displayed as trend images. Select the image (trend No.) to be displayed on the "image"
tab. Set the leading No. of the trend sample device in the trend image system setting screen.
"Trend image (real time) System Settings", page 10-57

Reference Trend sample device : The device used for sampling data of trend images (real time)
Set the leading device No. in the trend image syste m settings.
Number of trends : The number of data of the trend image (real time) to be sampled. For
example, when the umber of trends is set to 5, five data are sampled and
recorded to VT3 internal memory.
Trend No. : When the leading trend sample device and number of trends are set, the
trend No. is assigned in order as show nin the above example.
Number of images : Number of images to be displayed for trend image parts.
Up to eight data to be displayed as images are selected from the data, to
be sampled by the number of trends, by trend No., and are displayed on
the trend image part.
10
Trend No. 0 Trend No. 1 Trend No. 2 Trend No. 3 Trend No. 4

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


Number of Trends

•••••• •••••• •••••• •••••• ••••••


•••••• •••••• •••••• •••••• ••••••
•••••• •••••• •••••• •••••• ••••••
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
•••••• •••••• •••••• •••••• ••••••

Meters

Statistical images
Number of graphs:
Select the data (trend No.) to be displayed as a Trend image
graph (max. 8)
XYimages

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-35


10-3 Setting Trend images

Batch sampling trend images

Item Description
Set the word device that is targeted for the trend image (batch sampling). A
continuous number of word devices is used for the number (number of images
Reference word device*1, *2 x number of displayitems x data length) starting from the reference word device
set here. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be
set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target word device from "1 word/2 words". When
Data length
"2 words" is set, use two continuous word devices.
Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/BCD". Of the
10 Data format

Arithmetic
data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's complement format.

When this checkbox is marked, calculations can be used for trend image data.
Batch sampling settings

Calculations*3 operations
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Expression Set the calculation formula in the "Device settings" window.


Execute the timing of data reading when Trend image (batch sampling) is set.
Sampling
Internal timer : read data using the timer of VT3.
trigger
Bit device : read data using "ON/OFF" changes of bit device.
Sampling Set the data sampling timing (1 to 32767 seconds) when the sampling trigger is
period set to "VT timer".
Set the bit device to be used as the trigger when the sampling trigger is set to
Trigger bit
"Bit device". When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can
Sampling device *4
be set in the "Device settings" window.
trigger
Set the data sampling timing when the sampling trigger is set to "Bit device".
Sampling : Rising edge
edge : Falling edge
 : Both rising edge and falling edge
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3
Reset trigger recognizes the trigger.
bit When the trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON -> OFF
When the trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF -> ON
*1 [Example] When Number of images = 2, Number of data = 3, Data length = 2 words
2 x 3 x 2 = 12 continuous word devices are used.

Word Device No.


No.1
Leading reference word device No. +0, +1 Data 1 of No.1 (1)
(1) (3)
Leading reference word device No. +2, +3 Data 2 of No.1 (2) (2)
Leading reference word device No. +4, +5 Data 3 of No.1 (3)
(6)
Leading reference word device No. +6, +7 Data 1 of No.2 (4) (4) (5)
Leading reference word device No. +8, +9 Data 2 of No.2 (5)
Leading reference word device No. +10, +11 Data 3 of No.2 (6) No.2

See next page for descriptions on *2 to *4

10-36 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-3 Setting Trend images

*2 Selectable from "PLC device"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*3 "6-9 Calculation"
*4 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

Calculations (multiple/read calculation)


Calculations allow you to further process the values of trend image sampling data according to calculation formula,
and display the results of these calculations. For example, calculations can be used for performing scaling and unit
conversion, and displaying the results on the VT3.

-5V to +5V analog data PLC digital data Calculation Display on VT3 in required unit

"6-9 Calculation"

10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Meters

Statistical images

Trend image

XYimages

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-37


10-3 Setting Trend images

Worksheets

Item Description
WS Set the ID (0 to 3) of the worksheet to be displayed as a image.
Reference cell Cell position Set the position of the cell to start imageic display.
Worksheet
Cell direction Select the cell alignment direction from "Row/Column".
settings
Data length The data length is fixed to 2 words when the image type is "Worksheet".

10 Data Format Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal".

[Example] When Number of images = 2, Number of data = 3, Cell position = (A1), Cell direction = Column
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Data of No.1 Data of No.2 No.1

(1) (A1) (4) (B1) (1) (3)


(2)
(2) (A2) (5) (B2)
(3) (A3) (6) (B3) (6)
(4) (5)

No.2
[Example] When Number of images = 2, Number of data = 3, Cell position =(B3), Cell direction = Column

Data of No.1 (1) (B3) (2) (C3) (3) (D3) No.1

Data of No.2 (4) (B4) (5) (C4) (6) (D4) (1) (3)
(2)

(6)
(4) (5)

No.2

10-38 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-3 Setting Trend images

Range

Item Description
Set the input range (lower limit value/upper limit value) of the trend data.
Lower limit value*2 Num:
Input Set a constant as the input range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
range *1 PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell:
Upper limit value*2 The alarm range can be changed by setting a PLC device/indirect reference/
calculation/cell to the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value). 10
After selection, you can set the display range (lower limit value/upper limit value)

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


Display range of trend image to be displayed in VT3. After display range is set, convert the value
of trend sample device, and have it displayed at VT3.
Display Num:
range*1, *4 Lower limit value*2 Set a constant as the display range(lower limit value/upper limit value).
PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell:
Upper limit value*2 The display range can be changed by setting the PLC device/indirect reference/
calculation/cell as the display range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
When this checkbox is marked, the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit
Alarm range
value) can be set.
Num:
Lower limit value*2 Set a constant as the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell:
Upper limit value*2 The alarm range can be changed by setting the PLC device/indirect reference/
calculation/cell as the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
Alarm lower Meters
Alarm When this checkbox is marked, the alarm lower limit line can be displayed.
limit line
range*1 Alarm lower Statistical images
Line type*3 Select the type of the alarm lower limit line.
limit line
Line Trend image
Select the color of the alarm lower limit line.
color*3
XYimages
Alarm upper
When this checkbox is marked, the alarm upper limit line can be displayed.
Alarm upper limit line
limit line Line type*3 Select the type of the alarm upper limit line.
Line color*3 Select the color of the alarm upper limit line.
Ideal line When this checkbox is marked, the ideal line can be displayed.
Num:
Set a constant as the ideal value.
Ideal value*2
Ideal line PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell:
Ideal value can be set through PLC device/indirect reference/calculation/cell.
Line type*3 Select the type of the ideal line.
Line color*3 Select the color of the ideal line.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked.
BLK*3
The part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
See page 10-40 for descriptions on *1 to *4.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-39


10-3 Setting Trend images

*1 About setting ranges


"Numerical value setting range", page 10-40
*2 Selectable from “Numerical value /PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell”
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*3 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*4 [Example] When the input range is set to Lower limit value = 10 and Upper limit value = 100, and display
range is set to Lower limit value = 100 and Upper limit value = 1000

10 100
Input range
Conversion
Display range
100 1000

Numerical value setting range


The setting ranges of upper limit value/lower limit value of input range, display range, alarm range and the ideal value
of ideal line are as follows.
Data length Display format Setting range
Unsigned decimal 0 to 65535
1 word Signed decimal -32768 to 32767
BCD 0 to 9999
Unsigned decimal 0 to 4294967295
2 words Signed decimal -2147483648 to 2147483647
BCD 0 to 99999999

10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

10-40 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-3 Setting Trend images

images

Common settings
Item Description
image format Select the display format of the trend image from "Line chart/Bar chart".
Select the direction in which the trend image is formed from "Left -> right/Right -> left/Bottom
Displacement direction *1
-> top/Top -> bottom".
When this checkbox is marked, the scroll bar is displayed. This item can be set only in the
Scroll bar*3
case of a trend image (real-time).
Style Select the style used for display from "Base/image frame".
Frame color *2 Select the frame color.
Background color *2 Select the background color.
When this checkbox is marked, the background color becomes transparent. With this setting,
Frame/background

Transparent
the drawing speed slows down.
Lower limit alarm
Select the background color for alarm lower limit.
background color*2
Upper limit alarm
Select the background color for alarm upper limit.
background color*2
Color Select the color system of image frame.
Free style When image frame is used, you can change the display images after selection.
Change*4 When the Free style checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image" window is displayed.
When this checkbox is marked, the size of the image is automatically adjusted according to the number
Auto-size(image)
of data. When the image format is set to "Bar chart", "Auto-size (image)" is fixed to "ON".
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at all
BLK*2
times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.

*1 The displacement direction is as follows:

Numerical axis Numerical axis Numerical axis


Left -> right Right -> left Bottom -> top Top -> bottom

10
Item axis

SETTING METERS & IMAGES




Item axis

→Item axis Item axis←

Numerical axis
Item axis (time: in case of trend graph (real time))
*2 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*3 For the details, refer to "Scroll bar", page 10-41.
*4 For the details, refer to "Change the style of image frame", page 10-42.

Scroll bar
The scroll bar can be set only for trend images (real time).
Meters
Length of scroll bar : representing the entiret trend image (realtime).
Statistical images
Length of position cursor: representing the position percentage of trend image (realtime) being displayed.
Trend image

When the "Control scnal bar directly" check-box is marked, the scroll bar
XYimages
can be directly operated by touching the scroll bar without using "Forward
scroll" or "Reverse scroll" key entry switches.
"Control scroll bar directly", page 10-51

Position cursor

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-41


10-3 Setting Trend images

Change the style of image frame


Select "Free style", click "Change" button, then "Select free style image" window is displayed.

"Change style image (Bar image meter)", page 10-9


"Change style image (Circle Sector meter)", page 10-17

10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

10-42 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-3 Setting Trend images

Line charts

Item Description
No. Displays the No. (1 to number of images) of the trend data to be displayed on the image.
Set the trend No. to be displayed on the image only when the image type is set to trend
Trend No.*1
image (real time).
Normal Select the line type and color of the trend image during normal operation.
Line type/
Lower limit alarm Select the line type and color of the trend image during an alarm lower limit.
color *2
Upper limit alarm Select the line type and color of the trend image during an alarm upper limit.
*1 "Trend image (real time) System Settings", page 10-57
*2 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"

Bar charts 10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Meters

Statistical images

Trend image

Item Description XYimages


Bar width Set the width (2 to 50) of the bars in bar charts.
Interval
Bar chart Set the interval (0 to 50) between items in bar charts.
between items
setting*1
When this checkbox is marked, the surface colors of the bar charts are displayed
Separate
separately.
No. Displays the No. (1 to number of images) of the trend data to be displayed on the image.
Trend No.*2 Set the trend No. to be displayed on the image only when the image type is set to trend image (real time).
Normal Select the line type and color of the trend image during normal operation.
Surface
Lower limit alarm Select the line type and color of the trend image during analarm lower limit.
color*3
Upper limit alarm Select the line type and color of the trend image during analarm upper limit.
*1 For details of each item, refer to the descriptions that follow.
*2 "Trend image (real time) System Settings", page 10-57
*3 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-43


10-3 Setting Trend images

Bar width and interval between items (normal, left ->right)


Numerical axis

: Trend data No.1 Image of line chart


: Trend data No.2
: Trend data No.3

Bar width

Interval between items Item axis


(→time)

Separate display
[Example] When alarm range is set to bar chart
When separate display isn't set When separate display is set

Alarm upper limit

10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Alarm lower limit

10-44 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-3 Setting Trend images

Scale

Item Description
When this checkbox is marked, the scale of the item axis (scale line (in)) is
Scale of item axis
displayed.
Scale layout Select the scale layout from "Equal intervals/Equal divisions".
Scale of item axis
Interval When "Equal intervals" is selected at "Scale layout", set the scale interval (1 to 1024).
Number of divisions
Line type/line color*1
When "Equal divisions" is selected at "Scale layout", set the scale division (2 to 100).
Set the line type and line color of the scale.
10
Scale of numerical axis When this checkbox is marked, the scale on the numerical axis is displayed.

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


Scale layout Select the scale layout from "Equal intervals/Equal divisions".
When "Equal intervals" is selected at "Scale layout", set the scale interval on
Interval
the main scale.
Main scale
Number of When "Equal divisions" is selected at "Scale layout", set the number
divisions (2 to 100) of scale divisions on the main scale.
When "Equal intervals" is selected at "Scale layout", set the scale interval on
Interval
the auxiliary scale.
Auxiliary scale
Number of When "Equal divisions" is selected at "Scale layout", set the number (2 to
divisions 100) of scale divisions on the auxiliary scale.
When this checkbox is marked, the scale line (in) is displayed at the interval
Scale line(in)
Scale line(in) on the main scale.
Scale of numerical axis

Line type/line color*1 Set the line type and color of the scale line (in).
Scale (out) When this checkbox is marked, the scale line (out) is displayed. Meters
Set the position where the scale is displayed.
Statistical images
When “Displacement direction” is set as "left -> right/right -> left": select from
Scale position "left/right".
Trend image
When "Displacement direction" is set as "top -> bottom/bottom -> top" : select
from "top/bottom". XYimages
When this checkbox is marked, the main scale (length 6 dots on outer side)
Main scale
is displayed.
When this checkbox is marked, the auxiliary scale (length 3 dots on outer
Scale (out) Auxiliary scale
side) is displayed.
Scale markings When this checkbox is marked, the scale markings are displayed.
When this button is clicked, the "Scale markings settings" window appears so
Setting
that you can make settings relating to scale markings.
Normal Set the line color of the scale during normal operation.
Lower
Line Set the line color of the scale at the alarm lower limit.
limit alarm
color*1
Upper
Set the line color of the scale at the alarm upper limit.
limit alarm
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The
BLK*1
part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-45
10-3 Setting Trend images

Item axis/numerical axis


The following describes the item axis and numerical axis.
Types of trend images Item axis Numerical axis
Real time settings Time Value of trend sample device
Batch sampling Reference word device Value of reference word device
Worksheet Related Worksheet cell Value of worksheet cell

Selecting which of the image horizontal and vertical axis is to be assigned as the item axis and numerical axis
Displacement direction of "Trend images" page 10-41

Assigning the scale on the numerical axis


This section describes the scale of the numerical axis.
The main scale and auxiliary scale can be displayed on the numerical axis scale.
Item Description
Displays the scale for each value set at "Interval" for the main scale. Displays the scale for
Equal intervals
each value set at "Interval" also on the auxiliary scale.
Displays the scale divided equally by the number of divisions set for the main scale. Also, for
Equal divisions the auxiliary scale, divides one section of the main scale further into equal divisions by a
number of divisions.

Scale marking

5000
Auxiliary scale

10 Main scale
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

[Example] Example of equal divisions Example of equal intervals


Input range : 0 to 20000 Input range : 0 to 30000
Main scale : 2 Main scale : 10000
Auxiliary scale : 5 Auxiliary scale : 2000
Scale markings : Yes Scale markings : Yes

Numerical axis
30000

Numerical axis
20000 20000

10000 10000

0 0

Point The scale marking is displayed only on the main scale.

10-46 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-3 Setting Trend images

Scale line (in)/scale line (out)


For example, when the numerical axis is set to vertical and the item axis is set to horizontal, the scale line (out) and
scale line (in) can be displayed on the numerical axis as follows, and the scale line (in) can be displayed on the item
axis.

Numerical axis
Scale (inner):
Numerical axis is displayed
at main scale intervals.

Scale (outer)

Item axis

Point The scale line (out) is displayed as a solid line on the main and auxiliary scales.

10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Meters

Statistical images

Trend image

XYimages

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-47


10-3 Setting Trend images

Numerical value setting of scale

Item Description
Number of display digits Set the number of digits (1 to 12 digits) in numerical values to be displayed on the scale.
Decimal point position *1 Set the position (0 to 12 digits) where the decimal point is inserted.
Zero suppress When this checkbox is marked, unwanted zeros are no longer displayed.
When this checkbox is marked, "+" is displayed for plus numbers in the numerical value
Display +
display.
Fonts Select the font to be used for display from "Bitmap font/Windows font".
The fonts are displayed when Windows font is selected. The fonts to be used are displayed
List of available fonts
from imageics data list. Select the available fonts.
You can set the fonts not included in the list of available fonts. After the font type and size
Font setting
are set through "Select font" window, add them to the list of available fonts.
Character type Select the font to be used for display from "Half-width/Full-width/7-segment*4".
Select the font size of the numerical values to be displayed on the scale from "1/2X, 1X, or
Text size*2, *4
2X".
10 Text color*3
Set the color of text on the scale for each of normal operation, alarm lower limit, and alarm
upper limit.
Set the text on the scale to bold for each of normal operation, alarm lower limit, and alarm
Bold line
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

upper limit.
Gives text a shadow, so that it looks engraved. Thus has a 3D effect for each of normal
Shadow
Text operation, alarm lower limit, and alarm upper limit.
Decoration Gives text a shadow, so that it looks engraved. Thus it looks engraved for each of normal
Engrave
operation, alarm lower limit, and alarm upper limit.
Text shadow Select the color of the shadow when "Shadow" or "Engraved" is selected as the text
color*3 decoration.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks at
BLK*3
all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 Example of setting decimal position
“Setting Numerical Value Displays” page 9-4
*2
Half-width Full-width/7-
Text size
characters segment
At 1/2X text size 8 x 8 dots -
At 1X text size 8 x 16 dots 16 x 16 dots
At 2X text size 16 x 32 dots 32 x 32 dots
When "Text decoration" is set 2 dots

*3 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2


*4 No setting is possible when Windows font is selected.

10-48 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-3 Setting Trend images

Key entry/cursor

Item Description
Key entry*1, 2 When this checkbox is marked, key entry parts are set.
Key entry order*1 Set the key entry order when there are multiple key entry parts on the screen.
Key entry Select by switch*1 When this checkbox is marked, key entry is enabled by touching trend images.
Control scroll bar When this checkbox is marked, the scroll bar on the touch panel can be directly
directly operated. The scroll bar can be set only for trend images (real time).
Cursor*2 When this checkbox is marked, the cursor is displayed on the trend image.
Cursor color*3 Sets the cursor color.

10
Store When this checkbox is marked, the cursor position,date/time, image data, and
cursor data other information is stored to the target word device.
When this checkbox is marked, the cursor position is stored to the target word device.
One target word device is used.

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


Trend image (real time):
Numerical values are stored in order 1, 2, 3 and so forth taking the latest data as
No.0. (unsigned decimal: 0 to 65535).
Cursor Trend image (batch sampling):
position*2 Numerical values are stored in order 1, 2, 3 and so forth from a low device
number taking the smallest reference word device No. in a single image as No.0.
Trend image (worksheet):
Numerical values are stored in order 1, 2, 3 and so forth from the smallest cell
Cursor Store number taking the lowest cell position in a single image (A, B, C in the case of a
cursor row, and 1, 2, 3 in the case of a column) as "1".
data
When this checkbox is marked, the date/time information of the cursor position is
stored to the target word device.
Date data*2 11 target word device is used.
This item cannot be used when the image type is set to trend image (batch
sampling, worksheet).
Meters
When this checkbox is marked, trend image data of the cursor position is stored to
images
the target word device. "(number of images x data length)" number of target word
data*2 Statistical images
devices are used for storage.
Sets the target word device to which cursor data is stored. In the case of an Trend image
Target word internal word device, set (VT internal free device MW0100 onwards). Up to 28
device*4 continuous words are used. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference XYimages

bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.


The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The
BLK*3
part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 For the details of every item, refer to "6-3 Key Entry Parts".
*2 For the details of every item, see the descriptions that follow.
*3 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*4 Selectable from "PLC device (Internal device/Link device)/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
For details on assigning word devices for cursor position, date data, and image data, see the descriptions that follow.

Reference • Internal Free Device


"VT Internal Device", page 6-29
• Key repeat
"Other", page 12-31
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-49
10-3 Setting Trend images

Key entry

Frame blinks (Active mode) Frame blinks (Active mode)


Time display using date/time storage

19:12 20:12 18:24 19:24


Start Stop Cancel Clear



Start Stop Cancel Clear

"Scroll forward" key entry switch "Stop" key entry switch


"Scroll back" key entry switch "Start" key entry switch

Select trend graph. When "Scroll back" is touched, past data


currently stored to memory is displayed.

When the "Key entry" checkbox is marked, the part becomes a key entry part, and the trend image (real time) can be
scrolled to display past stored data.
If you press a "Scroll forward" or "Scroll back" key entry switch in a trend image (realtime) in the Active mode, data
(past stored data) protruding outside of the frame is displayed.
"6-3 Key Entry Parts"
10 "Key entry", page 8-26

Also, if date/time storage is used, past data can be scrolled and displayed by date, time or data No. by which the data
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

was stored.
"Store date/Display control", page 10-55

If you touch a "Stop" or "Start" key entry switch, recording of data of trend images (real time) in the Active mode can
be paused or started. If you touch a "Clear all" key entry switch, all past data stored by the trend ID of trend images
(real time) in the Active mode is cleared (deleted).
Touching a "Stop" key entry switch stops sampling of trend image data, and touching a "Start" key entry switch
resumes sampling. Stop/start of trend image data sampling can also be executed by turning a bit device ON/OFF.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
"12-7 Global Function Control"

10-50 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-3 Setting Trend images

Control scroll bar directly


If you touch a "Control scroll bar directly" key entry, the scroll bar can be operated by directly touching the scroll bar
without using a "Page scroll forward" or "Page scroll back" key entry switch. If you divide the scroll bar display area
into two equal divisions, and touch one of the areas, it will scroll forward in the displacement direction, and if you
touch the other area, it will scroll backward, and data (past stored data) protruding outside of the frame will be
displayed.

[Example]

Displacement direction (left to right)

Scroll bar

Touching the area on the left half of the scroll bar scrolls the page backwards, while touching the area on the right half
scrolls the page in the forward direction.

Point To switch the trend image (real time) from the Active mode to the Display mode, touch any
part other than the scroll bar. When a "Control scroll bar directly" key entry switch is used,
do not change the switch area. Doing so will cause operation of the trend image to
malfunction.

10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Meters

Statistical images

Trend image

XYimages

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-51


10-3 Setting Trend images

Cursor

Numerical value display using graph data


Time display using date data

19:12 12345

Frame blinks (Active mode)

Cursor

ً
ٕ

Apply

"Move cursor forward" key entry switch


"Move cursor back" key entry switch
The cursor is displayed only in the Active mode, and is not displayed in the Display mode.
In the case of line images, the cursor is displayed as a solid line.
Touch a "Move cursor forward" or "Move cursor back" key entry switch to move the cursor to the target position, and
touch the "Apply" key entry switch. The cursor position, date data, and image data of the point of intersection between
the trend image and the cursor are stored to the target word device.

Point Even with trend images that are not displayed by display control, the cursor position, date

10 data, and image data are stored to the target word device.
"Store date/Display control", page 10-55
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

19:12 12345

Cursor
ً
ٕ

Apply

In the case of a bar image, the cursor is displayed on the plane.

"Key entry", page 8-26

10-52 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-3 Setting Trend images

Reference In the case of trend images (real time), the time axis can be scaled. This feature is useful for viewing
the time axis scaled or for accurately positioning the cursor. This is not set in trend images. All that
needs to be done is to place a "keyentry" function switch.

Enlarged display Reduced display

Enlarge Reduce Enlarge Reduce Enlarge Reduce

"Compress time axis" key entry switch "Extend time axis" key entry switch

Set the trend image to the Active mode.


If you touch a "Compress time axis" key entry switch, the trend image is displayed enlarged along the
time axis.
If you touch an "Extend time axis" key entry switch, the trend image is displayed reduced along the
time axis.

Cursor position, date data, image data


About cursor position
Real-time (normal, left->right) Batch sampling (left->right) Worksheet (left->right)

10
Latest data
(No.3) (No.4)
cursor position (No.0)
(No.1) (No.2)
(No.4) (No.5)

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


(No.2) (No.3)

Cursor position Cursor position


(No.0) (No.1)

The following shows an example of assigning a target word device.

[Example] To store the cursor position and image data by a trend image of number of images = 4 and data length
= 1 word
Device No. Description Description Meters

Stores the cursor position to the target word device. Statistical images
One target word device is used.
Trend image (real time): Trend image
Stores numerical values in order of past data, for example, as 1, 2, 3 and
so forth with the latest data as No.0. (unsigned decimal: 0 to 65535) XYimages
Trend image (batch sampling):
Target word device
Data No. Numerical values are stored in order 1, 2, 3 andso forth from a low device
Leading No. + 0
number taking the smallest reference word device No. in a single image as
No.0.
Trend image (worksheet):
Numerical values are stored in order 1, 2, 3 and so forth from the smallest
cell number taking the lowest cell position in a single image (A, B, C in the
case of a row, and 1, 2, 3 in the case of a column) as "1".
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.1 (1st image) where the cursor
image data
Leading No. + 1 is located.
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.2 (2nd image) where the
image data
Leading No. + 2 cursor is located.
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.3 (3rd image) where the cursor
image data
Leading No. + 3 is located.
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.4 (4th image) where the cursor
image data
Leading No. + 4 is located.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-53


10-3 Setting Trend images

[Example] To store the cursor position, date data and image data by a trend image of numberof images = 8 and
Data length = 2 words
Device No. Description Description
Stores the cursor position to the target word device.
One target word device is used.
Target word device
Data No. Trend image (real time):
Leading No. + 0
Stores numerical values in order of past data, for example, as 1, 2, 3 and
so forth with the latest data as No.0. (unsigned decimal: 0 to 65535)
Target word device
Year "Year (lower two digits)" 00 to 99 (decimal)
Leading No. + 1
Target word device
Month "Month" 01 to 12 (decimal)
Leading No. + 2
Target word device
Day "Day" 01 to 31 (decimal)
Leading No. + 3
Target word device Day of the week
"Day of the week" 0 to 6 (decimal) (0: Sunday to 6: Saturday)
Leading No. + 4 (number)
Target word device
Leading No. + 5 Day of the week
"Day of the week" Sunday to Saturday (shift JIS code)
Target word device (Kanji)
Leading No. + 6
Target word device
Leading No. + 7 Day of the week
"Day of the week" SUN to SAT (ASCII code)
Target word device (English)
Leading No. + 8
Target word device
Hour "Hours" 00 to 23 (decimal)
Leading No. + 9
Target word device
Minute "Minutes" 00 to 59 (decimal)
Leading No. + 10
Target word device
Second "Seconds" 00 to 59 (decimal)
Leading No. + 11
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.1 (1st image) where the cursor

10
image data
Leading No. + 12, 13 is located.
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.2 (2nd image) where the
image data
Leading No. + 14, 15 cursor is located.
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.3 (3rd image) where the cursor
image data
Leading No. + 16, 17 is located.
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.4 (4th image) where the cursor
image data
Leading No. + 18, 19 is located.
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.5 (5th image) where the cursor
image data
Leading No. + 20, 21 is located.
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.6 (6th image) where the cursor
image data
Leading No. + 22, 23 is located.
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.7 (7th image) where the cursor
image data
Leading No. + 24, 25 is located.
Target word device Stores the data of the trend image set to No.8 (8th image) where the cursor
image data
Leading No. + 26, 27 is located.

Point When the cursor position is not stored, the target word device No. shifts forward by one
device.
When the date data is not stored, the target word device No. shifts forward by 11 devices.
To store image data, (number of images x data length) target word devices are required.

10-54 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-3 Setting Trend images

Store date/Display control

Set the function for storing the date/time that trend image data currently displayed in the trend image is stored to
memory.
Store date can be set only on trend images (real time). It cannot be set on trend images (batch sampling and
worksheet).

Item
Store old data
Description
When this checkbox is marked, the date/time that the oldest of the currently
10
date/time displayed trend image data was stored is stored to the target word device.

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


Store old data Set the word device to which the date/time is stored. In the case of an
date/time *1 Target word device internal word device, set (Internal free device MW0100 onwards). A device
*2, 3 having 12 continuous words is used. When the "Browse" button is clicked,
the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Store new data When this checkbox is marked, the date/time that the newest of the currently
date/time displayed trend image data was stored is stored to the target word device.
Store new data Set the word device to which the date/time is stored. In the case of an
date/time *1 Target word device internal word device, set (Internal free device MW0100 onwards). A device
*2, 3 having 12 continuous words is used. When the "Browse" button is clicked,
the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
When this checkbox is marked, each of the lines in the trend image can be
Display control
displayed/hidden by ON/OFF switching of the control bit device.
Sets the control bit device. Bit devices continuous for the number of images
Control bit device *2 are used. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can Meters
be set in the "Device settings" window.
Display control
Sets the mode that control bit devices are referenced: Statistical images
A contact : Displays the device when the control bit device is ON, and does not
Trend image
Mode display the device when the control bit device is OFF.
B contact : Displays the device when the control bit device is OFF, and does not XYimages
display the device when the control bitdevice is ON.
It can be set in case of line chart. After selection, you can set non-display
value in trend image displayed in VT3.
Num:
Non-display value*4, *5 Set a constant as non-display value.
PLC device/Indirect reference calculation/Cell:
You can set and change non-display value through PLC device/indirect
reference/calculation/cell.
*1 This item can be set only on trend images (real time).
*2 Selectable from "PLC device (Internal device, Link device)/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-55


10-3 Setting Trend images

*3 Layout of target word device


Device No. Description Description
Target word device Save the newest data as No.0 in the sequence of old data,
Data No.
Leading No. + 0 e.g.1,2,3. 0 to 65535 (decimal)
Target word device
Year "Year (lower two digits)" 00 to 99 (decimal)
Leading No. + 1
Target word device
Month "Month" 01 to 12 (decimal)
Leading No. + 2
Target word device
Day "Day" 01 to 31 (decimal)
Leading No. + 3
Target word device Day of the Week
"Day of the week" 0 to 6 (decimal) (0: Sunday to 6: Saturday)
Leading No. + 4 (number)
Target word device
Leading No. + 5 Day of theweek
"Day of the week" Sunday to Saturday (shift JIS code)
Target word device (Kanji)
Leading No. + 6
Target word device
Leading No. + 7 Day of theweek
"Day of the week" SUN to SAT (ASCII code)
Target word device (English)
Leading No. + 8
Target word device
Hours "Hours" 00 to 23 (decimal)
Leading No. + 9
Target word device
Minute "Minutes" 00 to 59 (decimal)
Leading No. + 10
Target word device
Second "Seconds" 00 to 59 (decimal)
Leading No. + 11

*4 Selectable from "Numerical constant/PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*5 [Example] When non-display value isn't set When non-display value is set to 0

10
100 100
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

0 0

-100 -100
The lines connecting 2 points are not displayed.

Trend image Precautions


• The data format of the reference word device (in the case of batch sampling) is set to BCD, and the value of the
reference word device is treated as "0" when it is an illegal value as a BCD value.
• The data format of the trend sample device (in the case of real time) is set to BCD, and the value of the trend
sample device is treated as "0" when it is an illegal value as a BCD value.
• When a calculation is set, the value is treated as "0" when a calculation error occurs.
• When the value of the reference cell (in the case of a worksheet) is a value outside the trend image data format
range, it is treated as "0".

10-56 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-3 Setting Trend images

Trend image (real time) System Settings


The following system settings are required only when trend images (real time) are used.

1 Display the trend image system setting screen.


The trend image system setting screen can be displayed by one of the following methods:
• By clicking the trend image part, and clicking the "Device settings" button on the "Data" tab in the "Trend image"
window.
• By clicking each trend ID from "Trend image" on the "System Settings" tab in the
"Workspace"
• By selecting "Resources(R)" -> "Trend image(T)"
from Menu and then clicking the trend ID in the "Workspace".

2 Set the trend sample device, etc. in the trend system settings screen.

10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Meters

Statistical images

Trend image

XYimages

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-57


10-3 Setting Trend images

Trend image (real time) System Settings

Set the trend image (real time) by trend ID = 0 to 3.


Item Description
Select the trend image data acquisition mode from "Normal/Extended (sequential
devices)/Extended (individual devices)."
Logging Mode *1 Normal : Up to 32 continuous devices can be set.
Extended (sequential device) : Up to 4096 continuous devices can be set.
Extended (individual device) : Up to 512 individual devices can be set.
Set the number of trends as shown below when "Data length" is set to 1 word in
each mode.
Normal mode : Number of trends (0 to 32)
Number of Trends Extended (specifying sequential device) mode : Number of trends (0 to 4096)
Extended (specifying individual device) mode : Number of trends (0 to 512)
When "Data length" is set to 2 words in each mode, the maximum number of
trends becomes half of that when 1 word is set.
Sets the leading device for sampling the trend image (real time) data. When the
"Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings"
window.
Normal mode:
Trend sample device *2 "number of trends x data length" is used continuously. (max. 32 devices)
Extended (sequential devices) mode:
"number of trends x data length" is used continuously. (max. 4096 devices)
Extended (individual devices) mode:
"number of trends x data length" is used. (max. 512 devices)
In the extended (individual devices) mode, click the "Device settings" button, and set
Number of devices
the trend sample device in the "Individual device settings" window.
Select the data length of the trend sample device from "1 word/2 words".
Data length
When "2 words" is set, use two continuous word devices.
Set the data sampling timing.
VT timer (auto) : Sample data using the VT3 timer.
Sampling trigger
Bit device : Sample data using the change in state "ON/OFF" of the PLC

10
bit device.
Set the data sampling timing (1 to 32767 seconds) when the sampling trigger is set
to "VT timer (auto)". When "Logging mode" is set to extended, and "Sampling
Sampling period
trigger" is set to VT timer (auto), the sampling period cannot be set. The VT3
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

automatically performs sampling.


Sampling Set the bit device to be used as the trigger when the sampling trigger is set to "Bit
Trigger bit device *2
trigger device".
Sets the data sampling timing when "Bit device" is selected for the sample trigger.
 : Rising edge
Sampling edge
 : Falling edge
: Both rising edge and falling edge
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3
recognizes the trigger.
Reset trigger bit
When trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON to OFF
When trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF to ON
When this checkbox is marked, the fact that sampling of trend image (real time)
Notify trend stop
Notify data has stopped is notified.
trend Sets the bit device for notifying that sampling of trend image (real time) data has
stop Notified bit device *2 stopped. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set
in the "Device settings" window.
See page 10-59 for descriptions on *1 to *2

10-58 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-3 Setting Trend images

Item Description
When the "Advanced settings" button is clicked, the memory size and extended
Advanced settings
trend can be set.
Displays which blocks of the total 60 blocks of memory size are in use. When the
Memory size "Memory size" button is clicked, the memory size can be set in the "Trend memory
size settings" window.
After selection, the rate of utilization of memory size is stored into the set device.
Rate of The numerical value is updated in the following cases:
consumed • In the case of change over 5%
memory size*3 • When memory size spillover alarm is ON
• When memory size is 0%, 100%
Memory size
Memory After selection, notify that memory size becomes a setting value.
over alarm
size
Notified bit Sets the notified bit device. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit
device*2
Advanced settings

device can be set in the "Device settings" window.


Notify when
memory size Set in 1% increment.
is cosumed
Processing
when memory Select the remedy when the memory size is exceeded from "Overwrite old trend/
size is Stop trend monitoring".
exceeded
Notify end of When "Extended (sequential devices)/Extended (individual devices)" is selected
Extended as the logging mode, and this checkbox is marked, the fact that 1-period sampling
trend of the trend sample device is completed is notified.
Notified bit Sets the notified bit device. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit
device *2 device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Extended
trend Reset notify
bit before When this checkbox is marked, the notified bit device is reset before the next trend
execution sample device period is started.

Sampling
speed *1
Select the sampling speed from "Low (screen renewal priority)/Medium/High (trend
sampling priority)." 10
*1 "Overview", page 10-28

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


Point • In the case of normal trends, set so that the total number of trend sample devices on the
trend ID (0 to 3) is 32 or less.
• In the case of extended trends (sequential devices), set so that the total number of sample
deviceson the trend ID (0 to 3) is 4096 or less.
• In the case of extended trends (individual devices), set so that the total number of sample
deviceson the trend ID (0 to 3) is 512 or less.

*2 Selectable from "PLC device"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*3 Selectable from "PLC device/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices" Meters

Statistical images

Trend image

XYimages

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-59


10-3 Setting Trend images

Devices Settings
When the "Logging mode" is set to "Extended (individual device)," set the trend sample device here. Clicking the
"Device settings" button to display the "Individual device settings" window.

Item Description
Up/Down Changes the order of trend sample devices.

Point When data length is 1 word, the trend sample device, such as:
DM00000, DM00003, DM00008••••
are set through uncontinuous word device.
When data length is 2 words, the trend sample device, such as:
(DM00001/DM00000), (DM00004/DM00003), (DM00009/DM00008)••••
are set through 2 continuous word devices. The trend sample devices are uncontinuously
set.

10 Memory size
The "Trend memory size settings" window is displayed by clicking the "Memory size" button.
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

In this window, set the capacity to be stored for each trend ID (0 to 3).

The data capacity of trend images (real time) that can be stored on VT3 varies according to whether or not a PLC
data folder whose save destination is internal memory (SRAM) is being used.
PLC Data Folder
PLC Data Folder
Trend saving capacity (save destination: internal memory) Not
(save destination: internal memory)
Used
non VT3-W4 series 300 Kbyte 150 Kbyte
VT3-W4 series 117 Kbyte 42 Kbyte

10-60 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-3 Setting Trend images

How trend memory size is mapped


The entire trend memory size is divided into 60 equal parts, called as, 1/60 trend memory size = 1Block.
PLC Data Folder
Storage capacity per PLC Data Folder
(save destination: internal memory) Not
block (save destination: internal memory)
Used
non VT3-W4 series 5KB 2.5KB
VT3-W4 series 1.95KB 0.7KB

Trend memory size divided into 60 equal parts is individually distributed among trend IDs (0 to 3).
For example,
Trend ID0 : 30 blocks (30/60)
Trend ID1 : 15 blocks (15/60)
Trend ID2 : 15 blocks (15/60)
Trend ID3 : 0 Block (00/60)
Total 60 Block (60/60)

Relationship between memory size and number of memory data


The following shows the relationship between memory size and number of memory data.

Memory size (bytes) = (2 x data length x number of trends + 4) x (number of memory data + 1)

[Example] When non VT3-W4 series type is used, PLC data folder is not used (save address as built-in memory):

(1) When Data length = 1 word, Number of trends = 1, trend only ID0 is used (60 blocks = 300 KB)
300 x 1024 >= (2 x 1 x 1 + 4) x (number of memory data + 1)
Number of memory data = 51199 10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


(2) When Data length = 1 word, Number of trends = 4096, trend only ID0 is used (60 blocks = 300 KB)
1024 >= (2 x 1 x 8 + 4) x (number of memory data + 1)
Number of memory data = 15359

(3) When Data length = 1 word, Number of trends = 4096, trend only ID0 is used (60 blocks = 300 KB)
300 X1024 >= (2 x 1 x 4096 + 4) x (number of memory data + 1)
Number of memory data = 36

Point When data is transmitted by PC->VT Send data, the data of the trend images (real time) stored
on VT3 internal memory (SRAM) is cleared.
PC->VT Send data
"13-3 PC->VT Send Data" Meters

Statistical images
Reference The data of trend images (real time) stored on VT3 internal memory (SRAM) can be cleared by the
following methods: Trend image

• VT3 system mode


XYimages
"5-6 Memory Clear", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Function control by devices
"Control trend graph", page 9-125
• Global function control
"12-7 Global Function Control"
• Switch "Key entry"
"Key entry", page 8-26

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-61


10-4 XY image Settings

Overview

Types of XY images

XY images are divided into three types.


• Real time settings
• Batch sampling
• Worksheet related

Real time settings


• When the sample triggering occurs, read the data of trend sample device, and generate XY images.
• When the display data already set is exceeded, delete the initial data, and display the newest data.
• The data is also read when the screen placed with XY images isn't displayed.
• Sampled data is stored in VT3 internal memory by backup battery even after the VT3 is turned OFF.
• Stored data can be saved on Memory Card as a CSV file (*.csv).
• In the case of XY images (real-time), up to 4 images can be used on entire page (entire screen), and identified
separately by trend ID (0 to 3).
• Up to four images can be displayed for each trend ID (0 to 3).

XY graph XY graph

10 Sampling trigger
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Latest read-in data

"Memory size", page 10-60


"Save log data to memory card", page 9-131
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"Normal Trends/Extended Trends", page 10-29

10-62 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-4 XY image Settings

Batch sampling
• When the sample triggering occurs, read in batch data of sequential word device, and generate XY images.
• 4 images can be displayed in a XY image (batch sampling).
• Only 1 XY image (batch sampling) can be placed in 1 page (Base + window).

XY graph XY graph

Sampling trigger

Read-in batch data

Worksheet Related
• When the data of worksheet is updated, read in batch cell data of sequential worksheet, and generate XY images.
• 4 images can be displayed in a XY image (worksheet).

XY graph XY graph
10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


Worksheet data updating

Read-in batch data


Meters

Statistical images

Trend image

XYimages

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-63


10-4 XY image Settings

About settings of XY images


When XY images (real-time) are displayed, the following two items are set generally.
• Settings of XY image parts
"XY image settings", page 10-64
• XY image system setting
"System Settings of XY image (real-time)", page 10-84

When XY images (batch sampling) are displayed, only XY image parts are set.

When XY images (worksheet) are displayed, the following two items are set generally.
• Settings of XY image parts
"XY image settings", page 10-64
• Setting Worksheets
"Chapter 16 WORKSHEET"

Normal Trends/Extended Trends


For the details of normal trend/extended trend, the “trend images” in "Normal Trends/Extended Trends", page 10-
29 are switched to “XY images”.

XY image settings
Parts(P) -> Meter/image(M) -> XY image(X)

10 XY images are set through "XY images" window.


"XY images" can be displayed in either of the following methods.
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

• Double-click XY images.
• By selecting "Edit(E)" ->"Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By selecting "Parts attribute settings(S)" from right-click menu

Point The ploting speed of XY images may slow down due to the following items.
• Number of images
• Number of data
• Ideal curve used
• Display range setting
• Alarm range setting
• Setting bold line/shadow in the line chart

10-64 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-4 XY image Settings

Data

Common settings

Item Description
image type Select the types of XYimages from “real-time/batch sampling/worksheet”.
Number of images Set the number (1 to 4) displayed as XY images.
Number of data Set the number of data (plot number of images) (2 to 320) to be displayed.
Ideal curve
Ideal curve After selection, ideal curve can be used.
used
used *1
Setting *2 “Ideal curve” window is displayed.
As initial value, “XY -"****" “ is assigned automatically into XY images. Correct this label as
Label
necessary. ("****" is the creation number. A number starting from 0000 is appended. )

*1 For the details, refer to "About ideal curve", page 10-65.


*2 For the details, refer to "Setting of ideal curve", page 10-66.

About ideal curve


Unlike sampling data for XY images, the data used for display of ideal curve shall be prepared in advance.
The aforementioned data is captured to VT3 through sampling trigger, and ideal curve is displayed on XY image
parts.
The relative ideal curve can be observed while XY images are compared.

Ideal curve Ideal closed curve

10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


Sampling data

polygonal sheet Dispersion pattern

Meters

Statistical images

Trend image

XYimages

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-65


10-4 XY image Settings

Setting of ideal curve

Item Description
Number of data Set the number of data (2 to 320) used for creating ideal curve.
The closed curve that is set to
connect start point and end After selection, connect the starting point and end point to form a closed curve.
point
Set the word device as the ideal curve target. The set reference word device is
Reference word placed at front, and the devices corresponding to (number of data/data length) are
device *1 used continuously. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can
be set in the "Device settings" window.
X-axis/Y-axis Data length The data length and data format of X-axis and Y-axis are displayed by setting with
Data format “Data” tab.

10 Calcu
lation*2
Arithmetic
operations
After selection, arithmetic operation can be used for the value of reference word
device.
Expression Set the calculation formula in the "Device setting" window.
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Trigger bit Set the bit device as trigger. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit
device *3 device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Setting the data reading timing.
 :Rising edge
Sampling Sampling edge
 :Falling edge
Trigger  :Both rising edge and falling edge
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3
recognizes the trigger.
Reset bit
When the trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON -> OFF
When the trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF-> ON
Line type/line
Line Select line type/fline color of ideal curve.
color*4
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part
BLK*4
blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 "6-9 Calculation"
*3 Selectable from "PLC device/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*4 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"

10-66 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-4 XY image Settings

Real time trend images

Item Description
Trend ID Set trend ID (0 to 3) displayed in the case of XY image (real-time).
When the "Device setting" button is clicked, the system setting screen for the trend
Device settings *1
image is displayed.
Select the data length of the trend sample device from "1 word/2 words". When "2
Real time settings

Data length
words" is set, use two continuous word devices.
Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/BCD". Of the data
Data format
X-axis/Y-axis

formats, "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's complement format.


Arithm
etic
After selection, operations can be used for XY images data.
10
Calcula operati

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


tions*2 ons
Expres
Set the calculation formula in the "Device setting" window.
sion
*1 "System Settings of XY image (real-time)", page 10-84
*2 "6-9 Calculation"

Meters

Statistical images

Trend image

XYimages

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-67


10-4 XY image Settings

Example 1 When Number of trends = 5, Number of images (trend No. 0 to 3 selected for display) = 2, Data length
= 1 word

Data Word device Trend No. No.

X-axis data for No.1 Leading trend sample device No.+0 No.0
(1)
X-axis data for No.1 Leading trend sample device No.+1 No.1
XY graph display
X-axis data for No.2 Leading trend sample device No.+2 No.2
(2)
X-axis data for No.2 Leading trend sample device No.+3 No.3
X-axis data for No.3 Leading trend sample device No.+4 No.4
(3)
X-axis data for No.3 Leading trend sample device No.+5 No.5

In above examples, 6 trend data items (number of trends) are sampled, and 2 (number of
images: trend No. 0 to 3) are displayed as XY images.
Select the image (trend No.) to be displayed on the "image" tab.

XY graph

(1)

10 (2)
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Set the leading No. of the trend sample device in the trend image system setting screen.
"System Settings of XY image (real-time)", page 10-84

10-68 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-4 XY image Settings

Example 2 Number of trend = 4, number of images = 3, data length = 2 words

Graphs Word device Trend No. No.


X-axis data(common) for
Leading trend sample device No.+0,+1 No.0 ─
No.0~2
Y-axis data(common) for No.1 Leading trend sample device No.+2,+3 No.1 (1) XY graph display
Y-axis data(common) for No.2 Leading trend sample device No.+4,+5 No.2 (2)
Y-axis data(common) for No.3 Leading trend sample device No.+6,+7 No.3 (3)

In above examples, 4 trend data items (number of trends) are sampled, and 3 (number of
images: trend No.0 to 3) are displayed as XY images.
Select the image (trend No.) to be displayed on the "image" tab.

XY graph

(1)

(2)

(3)
10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


Set the leading No. of the trend sample device in the trend image system setting screen.
"System Settings of XY image (real-time)", page 10-84

Reference Trend sample device : device for sampling of XY image (real-time) data. Set the leading device
No. in the trend image system settings.

Number of trends : the number of XY image (real-time) data for sampling. For example, Meters
when the umber of trends is set to 5, five data items are sampled and
Statistical images
recorded to VT3 internal memory.
Trend image
Trend No. : after the leading and trend number of trend sample devices, the trend
No. s, are distributed as mentioned above. XYimages

Number of images : the number of images displayed on XY image parts. In the data sampled
according to the number of trends, up to 4 XY image data items
displayed by trend No. are displayed in XY image parts.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-69


10-4 XY image Settings

Batch sampling trend images

Item Description
Set the word device as XY image (batch sampling) target. A continuous number of
Reference word device word devices is used for the number (number of images x number of display items x
*1, *2 data length) starting from the reference word device set here. When the "Browse"
button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
X-axis/Y-axis

Select the data length of the target word device from "1 word/2 words". When "2
Data length
words" is set, use two continuous word devices.
Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/BCD". Of the data
Data Format
10 Calculati
Arithmetic
formats, "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's complement format.

After selection, operations can be used for XY images data.


operations
Batch sampling settings

ons *3
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Expression Set the calculation formula in the "Device setting" window.


When XY image (batch sampling) is set, obtain the data timing.
Sampling trigger Internal timer: obtain data using the timer of VT3.
Bit device: obtain data through “ON/OFF” change of bit device.
Set the data sampling timing (1 to 32767 seconds) when the sampling trigger is set to
Sampling period
"VT timer".
Sampling trigger

Set the bit device to be used as the trigger when thesampling trigger is set to "Bit
Trigger bit device*4 device". When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in
the "Device settings" window.
Set the data sampling timing when the sampling trigger is set to "Bit device".
: Rising edge
Sampling edge
: Falling edge
: Both rising edge and falling edge
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes
the trigger.
Reset trigger bit
When the trigger is "Up" : Reset at ON->OFF
When the trigger is "Down" : Reset at OFF->ON
See page 10-71 for descriptions on *1 to *4

10-70 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-4 XY image Settings

*1 [Example] When Number of images = 2, Number of data items = 3, Data length = 2 words
12(=2X3X2) sequential word devices are used for X-axis and Y-axis.
X-axis Y-axis No.
Leading reference word device No. + 0, + 1 Leading reference word device No. +0, +1 Data 1 of No.1 (1)
Leading reference word device No. + 2, + 3 Leading reference word device No. + 2, + 3 Data 2 of No.1 (2)
Leading reference word device No. + 4, + 5 Leading reference word device No. + 4, + 5 Data 3 of No.1 (3)
Leading reference word device No. + 6, + 7 Leading reference word device No. + 6, + 7 Data 1 of No.2 (4)
Leading reference word device No. + 8, + 9 Leading reference word device No. + 8, + 9 Data 2 of No.2 (5)
Leading reference word device No. + 10, + 11 Leading reference word device No. + 10, + 11 Data 3 of No.2 (6)

Y-axis

No.1

(1) (3)
(2)

X-axis

(5)

(4) (6)
No.2

*1 Selectable from "PLC device"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 "6-9 Calculation"
*3 Selectable from “PLC device/cel”
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Meters

Statistical images

Trend image

XYimages

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-71


10-4 XY image Settings

Worksheets

Item Description
WS Set the ID (0 to 3) of the worksheet to be displayed as a image.
X-axis/Y-axis

Reference
Cell position Set the position of the cell to start imageic display.
Worksheet cell
Cell direction Select the cell alignment direction from "Row/Column".
settings
Data length The data length is fixed to 2 words when the image type is "Worksheet".
Data format Select the data format from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal".

10 [Example] Number of images=2, number of data=3, cell position of X-axis= (A1) , cell position of Y-axis= (A11) ,
direction of cell=vertical
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

No.1 No.2

X coordinate of (A1)(1) X coordinate of (B1)(4) Y-axis


X coordinate of (A2)(2) X coordinate of (B2)(5) No.1
X coordinate of (A3)(3) X coordinate of (B3)(6)
(1) (3)
• • (2)
• •
• • X-axis
Y coordinate of (A11)(1) Y coordinate of (B11)(4)
(5)
Y coordinate of (A12)(2) Y coordinate of (B12)(5)
Y coordinate of (A13)(3) Y coordinate of (B13)(6) (4) (6)
No.2
• •
• •
• •

10-72 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-4 XY image Settings

[Example] Number of images=2, number of data=3, cell position of X-axis= (A1), cell position of Y-axis= (A11),
direction of cell=vertical

No.1
X coordinate of (A1)(1) X coordinate of (B1)(2) X coordinate of (C1) (3)
No.2
X coordinate of (A2)(4) X coordinate of (B2)(5) X coordinate of (C2) (6)
• • •
• • •
• • •
No.1
Y coordinate of (A11) (1) Y coordinate of (B11)(2) Y coordinate of (C11) (3)
No.2
Y coordinate of (A12) (4) Y coordinate of (B12)(5) Y coordinate of (C12) (6)
• • •
• • •
• • •

Y-axis

No.1

(1) (3)
(2)

X-axis

(5)

10
(4) (6)
No.2

SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Meters

Statistical images

Trend image

XYimages

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-73


10-4 XY image Settings

Input/display range

Item Description
Set the input range of numerical value for display of XY images (lower limit value/
Lower limit upper limit value).
X-axis/Y-axis

value *2 Num:
Input range *1 Set a constant as a display range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
PLC device/Indirect reference Calculation/Cell:
Upper limit The alarm range can be changed by setting a PLC device/indirect reference/
value *2
10
calculation/cell to the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
After selection, You can set the display range (lower limit value/upper limit value) of
Display
XY images displayed on VT3. After display range is set, the value of trend sample
range
device is converted and then displayed on VT3.
X-axis/Y-axis
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Display Num:
Lower limit
range*1,3 value *2 Set a constant as a display range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
PLC device/Indirect reference Calculation/Cell:
Upper limit The display range can be changed by setting the PLC device/indirect reference/
value *2 calculation/cell as the display range (lower limit value/upper limit value).

*1 About setting ranges


The following table shows the setting ranges for the lower limit values/upper limit values of the input range,
display range and alarm range.
Data length Display format Setting range
Unsigned decimal 0 to 65535
1 word Signed decimal -32768 to 32767
BCD 0 to 9999
Unsigned decimal 0 to 4294967295
2 words Signed decimal -2147483648 to 2147483647
BCD 0 to 99999999

*1 Selectable from "Numerical constant/PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"


"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 [Example] When the input range is set to Lower limit value = 10 and Upper limit value = 100, and display
range is set to Lower limit value = 100 and Upper limit value = 1000
10 100
Input range
Conversion
Display range
100 1000

10-74 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-4 XY image Settings

Alarm range/base

Item Description
X-axis/Y-axis Set a constant as a display range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
Num:
Lower limit value *2 Set a constant as the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
PLC device/Indirect reference Calculation/Cell:
Upper limit value *2 The alarm range can be changed by setting the PLC device/indirect reference/
calculation/cell as the alarm range (lower limit value/upper limit value).
Alarm
10
Alarm range *1

X-axis/Y-axis

lower When this checkbox is marked, the alarm lower limit line can be displayed.
Alarm lower limit line

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


limit line Line type *3 Select the line type of the alarm lower limit line.
Line
Select the color of the alarm lower limit line.
color*3
Alarm
upper limit When this checkbox is marked, the alarm upper limit line can be displayed.
Alarm upper line
limit line Line type *3 Select the type of the alarm upper limit line.
Line
Select the color of the alarm upper limit line.
color*3
X-axis/Y-axis After selection, the base line can be displayed.
Num:
Set a constant as the base value.
X-axis/Y-axis

Base *2 PLC device/Indirect reference Calculation/Cell:


Base *4

The base value can be changed by setting PLC device/cindirect reference/


Meters
calculation/cell into base value.
Line type *3 Select the line type of base line. Statistical images
Base line Line
Select the line color of base line. Trend image
color*3
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The XYimages
BLK*3
part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 About the setting range, refer to *1 in "Input/display range", page 10-74
*2 Selectable from "Numerical constant/PLC device/Indirect reference/Calculation/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*3 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-75


10-4 XY image Settings

*4 [Example] The deviations of ideal value and actual value of X=50, Y=50 are displayed through dispersion
pattern.
The images can be observed more clearly through display of base line.

100
Benchmark
line

50

0 50 100

10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

10-76 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-4 XY image Settings

images

Item Description
image format *1 Select the image format of XY images from “Line chart/dispersion pattern”.
Style Select the display style from “Base/image frame”.
Frame color *2 Select the frame color.
Background
Select the background color.
color *2

10
When this checkbox is marked, the background color becomes transparent. With this
Transparent
Frame/ setting, the drawing speed slows down.
background Alarm
background After selection, you can set the background color in the case of alarms.

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


color*2
Color Select the color system of image frame.
Free style When Image frame is used, you can change the display image after selection.
Change*3 When the Free style checkbox is marked, "Free style Select image" window is displayed.
Paste points outside input
If numerical value outside of input range is input after selection, the points are displayed on
range to frames*5
data frame.The image format can be set in the case of dispersion pattern.

No. No. (1 to number of images) of XY images displayed on display images.


Trend No. For image display, separately set to X/Y only in the case of XY images, (real-time).
Line type/ Normal When the image format is line chart, select the line type/color in the normal state.
color*4 Alarm When the image format is line chart, select the line type/color in the case of alarm.
Point type/ Normal When the image format is dispersion pattern, select the shape/color in the normal state. Meters
color*4 Alarm When the image format is dispersion pattern, select the shape/color in the case of alarm.
Statistical images
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks
BLK*2
at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval. Trend image

See page 10-78 for descriptions on *1 to *5. XYimages

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-77


10-4 XY image Settings

*1 The display images of line chart and dispersion pattern are shown below.

Polygonal line Dispersion pattern

*2 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2


*3 For the details, refer to "Change the style of image frame", page 10-42.
*4 This can be set through “Line attribute setting” window when the image format is line chart.
This can be set through “Dispersion pattern“ when the image format is for dispersion pattern.

10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

*5 [Example] Input range: -10 to 10 (X-axis/Y-axis is the same)


The data of X=5, Y=15 is displayed below.

Not set Already set


Not displayed in VT3 Displayed by pasting into data frame

(5,15)

10 10

0 0

-10 -10
-10 0 10 -10 0 10

10-78 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-4 XY image Settings

Scale

Item Description
Scale of X-axis/Y-axis After selection, scale is displayed on X-axis/Y-axis.
Scale layout Select the scale layout method from "Equal intervals/Equal divisions".
When "Equal intervals" is selected at "Scale layout", set the scale interval on the
Interval
main scale.
Main scale
Number of When “Equal divisions” is selected at “Scale layout”, set the scale division number

10
divisions on the main scale (2 to 100).
When "Equal intervals" is selected at "Scale layout", set the scale interval on the
Interval
Auxiliary auxiliary scale.
scale Number of When "Equal intervals" is selected at "Scale layout", set the scale division number

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


divisions on the auxiliary scale (2 to 100).
When this checkbox is marked, the scale line (in) is displayed at the interval on the
Scale line (in)
main scale.
Scale (in)
Line type/line
Set the line type and color of the scale line (in).
color*1
X-axis/Y-axis scale

Scale (out) When this checkbox is marked, the scale line (out) is displayed.
The position of scale is to be displayed
X-axis: “Bottom/base/top”
Y-axis: “Left/base/right“
Scale position
Light chain
Bottom/top/left/right: the scale is displayed along bottom/top/left/right of data frame.
Base : the scale is displayed on base line.
When this checkbox is marked, the main scale (length 6 dots on outer side) is
Main scale
displayed. Meters

Scale (out) When this checkbox is marked, the auxiliary scale (length 3 dots on outer side) is
Auxiliary scale Statistical images
displayed.
Scale markings When this checkbox is marked, the scale markings are displayed. Trend image

When this button is clicked, the "Scale markings settings "window opens so that
Setting XYimages
you can make settings relating to scale markings.
Normal Set the line color of the scale during normal operation.
Line color

Lower limit
Set the line color of the scale at the alarm lower limit.
alarm
Upper limit
Set the line color of the scale at the alarm upper limit.
alarm
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The
BLK*1
part blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-79


10-4 XY image Settings

About scale layout


This section describes the scales.
The scale can display main scale and auxiliary scale.
Item Description
Displays the scale for each value set at "Interval" for the main scale. Displays the scale for each value
Equal intervals
set at "Interval" also on the auxiliary scale.
Displays the scale divided equally by the number of divisions set for the main scale. Also, for the
Equal divisions auxiliary scale, divides one section of the main scale further into equal divisions by a number of
divisions.

Numerical value of scale

5000
Auxiliary scale

Main scale

[Example] Exam of Equal divisions (Y direction) Exam of Equal divisions (Y direction)


Input range : 0 to 20000 Input range : 0 to 30000
Main scale : 2 Main scale : 10000
Auxiliary scale : 5 Auxiliary scale : 2000
Scale markings : Yes Numerical value of scale : Yes
30000

10 20000 20000
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

10000 10000

0 0

Point The scale marking is displayed only on the main scale.

10-80 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-4 XY image Settings

Scale line (in)/scale line (out)


For example, when the following settings are made, the scale line is displayed as shown in the following diagrams.

X-direction scale (out): yes, scale position: bottom, scale(in): yes( )


Y-direction scale (out): yes, scale position: left, scale(in): yes( )

Scale line(inner):
numerical value axis is
displayed at the interval
on main scale.

Scale line(outer)

Point The scale line (out) is displayed as a solid line on the main and auxiliary scales.

Scale markings settings


For the details, "Numerical value setting of scale", page 10-48.

10

SETTING METERS & IMAGES

Meters

Statistical images

Trend image

XYimages

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-81


10-4 XY image Settings

Key entry

Item Description
Key entry*1 When this checkbox is marked, key entry parts are set.
Key
Key entry order *1 Set the key entry order when there are multiple key entry parts on the screen.
entry
Select by switch *1 When this checkbox is marked, key entry is enabled by touching trend images.
*1 For the details of every item, see "6-3 Key Entry Parts" .

10 Reference • After pressing “Stop”, “start” key entry switches, you can temporarily stop/start data storage of XY
images (real-time) in active mode.
Pressing “Clear all” key entry switch, you can delete (clear) all old data stored in trend ID of XY
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

images (real-time) in active mode.


Stop data sampling of XY images by pressing “Stop”, or restart sampling by pressing “Start”.
"Key entry", page 8-26

• The stop, start and clearing of data sampling of XY images can also be executed by bit device in
ON(OFF) state.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
"12-7 Global Function Control"

10-82 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-4 XY image Settings

Store date/Display control

After selection, the date/time stored with newest XY image data is stored to the target word device.
This can be set only in the case of XY image (real-time).

Item Description
Store old date/ After selection, the date/time stored with newest XY image data is stored to the target
time word device.
Store old date/
10
Set the word device to which the date/time is stored. In the case of an internal word
time*1 Target word device, set (VT internal free device MW0100 onwards). A device having 12
device *2,3 continuous words is used. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit
device can be set in the "Device settings" window.

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


Store new data After selection, the date/time stored with newest XY image data is stored to the target
/time word device.
Store new date/ Set the word device to which the date/time is stored. In the case of an internal word
time*1 Target word device, set (VT internal free device MW0100 onwards). A device having 12
device *2,3 continuous words is used. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit
device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
After selection, the lines and points of XY images can be displayed/not displayed
Display control
through ON/OFF of control bit device.
Sets the control bit device. Bit devices continuous for the number of images are used.
Control bit
When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
device*4
"Device settings" window.
Display control
Sets the mode that control bit devices are referenced:
A contact : Displays the device when the control bit device is ON, and does not
Mode display the device when the control bitdevice is OFF.
Meters
B contact : Displays the device when the control bit device is OFF, and does not
display the device when the control bitdevice is ON. Statistical images

Trend image

XYimages

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-83


10-4 XY image Settings

*1 This can be set only in the case of XY image (real-time).


*2 Selectable from "PLC device (internal device/link device)/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*3 Layout of target word device
Device No. Description Description
Target word device Stores numerical values in order of past data, for example, as 1, 2, 3 and
Data No.
Leading No. + 0 so forth with the latest data as No.0. (unsigned decimal: 0 to 65535)
Target word device
Year "Year (lower two digits)" 00 to 99 (decimal)
Leading No. + 1
Target word device
Month "Month" 01 to 12 (decimal)
Leading No. + 2
Target word device
Day "Day" 01 to 31 (decimal)
Leading No. + 3
Target word device Day of the week
"Day of the week" 0 to 6 (decimal) (0: Sunday to 6: Saturday)
Leading No. + 4 (number)
Target word device
Leading No. + 5 Day of the week
"Day of the week" Sunday to Saturday (shift JIS code)
Target word device (Kanji)
Leading No. + 6
Target word device
Leading No. + 7 Day of the week
"Day of the week" SUN to SAT (ASCII code)
Target word device (English)
Leading No. + 8
Target word device
Hour "Hours" 00 to 23 (decimal)
Leading No. + 9
Target word device
Minute "Minutes" 00 to 59 (decimal)
Leading No. + 10
Target word device
Second "Seconds" 00 to 59 (decimal)
Leading No. + 11
*1 Selectable from "PLC device / Cell"
10 "6-7 Setting of Devices"
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

XY image Precautions
• The data format of the reference word device (in the case of batch sampling) is set to BCD, and the value of the
reference word device is treated as "0" when it is an illegal value as a BCD value.
• The data format of trend sample device (in the case of realtime) is set to BCD, and the value of the trend sample
device is treated as “0“ when it is an illegal value as a BCD value.
• When a calculation is set, the value is treated as "0" when a calculation error occurs.
• It’s treated as “0“ when the value of reference cell (in the case of worksheet) is outside of the data format of XY
images.

System Settings of XY image (real-time)


Like the trend images (realtime), the system settings of XY images (realtime) can be executed through “Trend
images” in "System setting" tab of workspace.

For the details of settings, please read after converting "Trend images” in "Trend image (real time) System
Settings", page 10-57.

10-84 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


10-4 XY image Settings

 Relationship of system settings between XT image parts, trend image parts and
trend images

System setting

System setting of trend graph

VT3

Internal
10
memory

SETTING METERS & IMAGES


(SRAM)

Sampling data

Display through
parts

XY graph parts Trend graph parts


Meters

Statistical images

Trend image

XYimages

The sampling data is displayed as XY graphs The sampling data is displayed as trend
(real-time) on XY graph parts graphs(real-time) on trend graph parts

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 10-85


10-4 XY image Settings

MEMO

10
SETTING METERS & IMAGES

10-86 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11
OTHER FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes screen callups, loading DXF files, and other functions.

11-1 Call Up Screen ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-2


11-2 Load DXF file ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-5
11-3 Ruled Line Creation ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-7
11-4
11-5
Table •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-8
Form Printing •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-13 11
11-6 Changing Display Text Strings•••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-18

OTHER FUNCTIONS
11-7 Active Edit •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-32
11-8 Multiple Program Startups ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-35
11-9 Batch Edition of the Part Attributes •••••••••••••••••• 11-36
11-10 Device Comments •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-38
11-11 Operation Log ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 11-44

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-1


11-1 Call Up Screen
Screen callup is a function used for calling up a specified screen to another screen.

Call Up Screen
Parts(P) -> Call up screen(G)

About screen callups


Calls up specified screens for use in other screens. When the callup source screen is changed, all of the call
destination screens are changed to the same content, so screens can be made common.

1 page 2 pages 10 pages

12345 ABCD
The pictures
to be displayed 67890 EFGH

Run Stop Run Stop Run Stop

This is the common part for all


the pages, making it easier to
use.
Run Stop

Draw in 100 pages with the common part as the source call-up screen.
11 1 page drawing Overlapped after 100 pages are called up.
OTHER FUNCTIONS

12345 12345

67890 + 67890

Run Stop Run Stop

2 page drawing Overlapped after 100 pages are called up.

ABCD ABCD

EFGH + EFGH

Run Stop Run Stop

10 page drawing Overlapped after 100 pages are called up.

Run Stop Run Stop

11-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-1 Call Up Screen

About nesting
Screens can be nested up to three levels (four layers).

RUN AUTO MANUAL RUN AUTO MANUAL RUN AUTO MANUAL RUN AUTO MANUAL

0 page 1 page 10 pages 100 pages


(0 page has been called up) (1 page has been called up) (10 pages have been called up).

About the screen callup list


You can confirm in a list to which screens a certain screen has been called up.
Select "Resources(R)" -> "Screen callup list(G)" from Menu in that order.
"12-11 Screen Configuration Management"

11

OTHER FUNCTIONS
About editing callup screens
You can edit the source callup screen placed on the screen currently being edited.
Click the screen callup to select it, and either select “Edit(E)” -> “Edit callup screen(Y)” from Menu in that order, or
open Menu by clicking the right mouse button and select “Edit callup screen(Y)”.
"Edit Callup Screen", page 4-20

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-3


11-1 Call Up Screen

Placing Screen Callups

1 Either select "Parts(P)" -> "Call up screen(G)" from Menu in that order, or click the button.

2 Click at the position where the screen isto be called up.


The screen is placed so that the top left corner of the source screen becomes
the clicked position.

3 In the "Call up screen" window, select the ID of the screen to be called


up.
Display the "Call up screen" window by one of the following methods:
• Double-click the screen.
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By opening the menu by clicking the right mouse button, and selecting
"Parts attribute settings(S)"

Item Description
Screen ID Select the screen ID of the screen to call up.

11 Select image
Displays the "Select screen" window for selecting the screen tocall up by a display image
of the screen.
OTHER FUNCTIONS

Point • The Call up a Screen screen can only be moved, and cannot be enlarged or shrunk.
Movement of screen callups is possible in switch grid size (16 x 16 dots) units. Screen
callups cannot be moved in such as way that they will protrude from the editscreen.
• When a screen callup has been moved, objects that protrude outside of the display frame
are not displayed on the VT3. Though base screens can be called up to window screens,
objects that protrude outside of the window frame are not displayed on the VT3.
• Screens cannot be cyclically browsed in the following instance. When screen A (self
screen) is called by screen callup to screen A in which you are about to place a screen
callup
• When a screen A to which a screen callup is about to be placed is called to another screen
B, the screen cannot be browsed cyclically also when screen B is called up to screen A.
• The background color and wallpaper of the screen are not called up.
• Objects containing screen callups cannot be registered to the part catalog file.
• Screen callups cannot be used in printer forms.
• Printer forms cannot be called up from regular screens (base screen,window screen).

11-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-2 Load DXF file
Loading of DXF files is a function for pasting DXF files saved in AutoCAD R12 format (made by Autodesk Inc.) to
screens as a drawn graphic.

Load DXF File


Parts(P) -> Load DXF file(D)
Loads DXF files saved in AutoCAD R12 (made by Autodesk) format as drawn graphics. After that, they are
immediately grouped together. You change an individual graphics by un-grouping them.

1 Either select "Parts(P)" -> "Load DXF file(D)" from Menu in that order, or click the button.

2 In the "Open DXF File" window, specify the name of the file and folder(directory) containing the DXF file to be
loaded.

Item Description
Look in(I) Select the drive and folder containing the DXF file to be loaded.
File Name(N) Select the name of the DXF file to be loaded.
File of type(T) Select the type of file. Select the type of file. Select "DXF file (*.dxf)".
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.

3 Click the "Open(O)" button.


11
4

OTHER FUNCTIONS
Set the size and conversion of text, points and hatching in the "DXF Load
Conditions Setup" window.

Item Description
Select whether to load DXF file by Graphic size ($EXTMIN,$EXTMAX) or by Drawing size
Size
($LIMMIN, $LIMMAX).
Text string conversion OFF When this checkbox is marked, text strings are not loaded.
Dot conversion OFF When this checkbox is marked, dots are not loaded.
Hatching conversion OFF When this checkbox is marked, hatching is not loaded.

5 Click the "OK" button to place the file at a size to fit the VT3's screen size.

6 To change the size of the loaded data, scale the data.


To scale the file with the aspect ratio intact, drag with the key held down.
"Scaling Graphics", page 4-3

7 Data is loaded in a grouped state. To change each of the graphic elements of the group, ungroup the data.
"Ungroup", page 4-14
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-5
11-2 Load DXF file

Point • Only DXF files in the AutoCAD R12 (made by Autodesk, Inc.) format can be loaded.
• This doesn't apply to Autocad R13J or above. Note, however, that only ELLIPSE (ellipse)
data can be loaded. To generate DXF files in versions AutoCAD R13 or later, specify "R12
format" by the file write command.
• Text in DXF files is handled as VT STUDIO bitmap text. Also, text isloaded at 1X size in
both the horizontal and vertical directions. Only ASCII/shift JIS text can be loaded.
• The line changing code only supports CR+LF. LF only is not supported.
• Objects made on display OFF layers cannot be loaded.
• XY plot area ranges ($EXTMIN/$EXTMAX) and XY paper size ranges ($LIMMIN/$LIMMAX)
cannot be loaded correctly unless they have been correctly set.
• 3D data cannot be loaded as the Z-axis coordinates are ignored.
• When a "Screen data size exceeded" error occurs during transfer of screen data or during
a data check, this indicates that the upper limit of the screen data size that can be edited on
a single page is exceeded. Ungroup the ata, and cut the loaded graphics to reduce the size
of the screen data.

About Conversion Rules

Line type conversion


DXF File VT STUDIO
CONTINUOUS Solid Line
DASHED, DOT, HIDDEN Dotted Line
CENTER, BORDER, DASHDOT One-dot Chain
PHANTOM, DIVIDE Two-dot Chain
Other Solid Line

Graphic conversion
DXF File VT STUDIO
LINE (segment) Lines

11 POINT (point)
POLYLINE (polyline, donut, spline, ellipse,polygon, rectangle)
Straight line (start and end points arethe same)
Continuous lines
TRACE(Thick Line), SOLID(Pattern Fill) Polygons
OTHER FUNCTIONS

CIRCLE (circle), ELLIPSE (ellipse) Circles/Ellipses


ARC (arc) Arc or straight line
TEXT(Character), ATTRIB(Attribute) Bitmap text
DIMENSION(dimension graphic),INSERT (insert graphic) Opened and converted at a target

*DXF color Nos. 1 to 255 are converted to the same color.

Point • The display position sometimes shifts due to coordinate conversion errorin the graphics.
• POINT (point) data is converted with the start and end points as the same straight line.
• POLYLINE (polyline, donut, spline, ellipses, polygons and rectangles) are converted after
the coordinates of VERTEX (apices) data following arejoined by a continuous straight line.
Data whose number of VERTEX(apices) exceeds 100 points is converted after being
divided at each 100 points. When VERTEX (apices) data continuously becomes the same
coordinate, subsequent coordinates are omitted. Also, the POLYLINE width is not
converted.
• Small size ARC (arc) data (such as corner radii) is converted to straight lines.
• The TEXT (text) angle of rotation is converted to the angle closest to 90º. Text size is 1X in
both the horizontal and vertical directions. Only %%d (º),%%c (Ø), %%p (±), %%% (%), and
%%*** (***: decimal ASCII text string) are converted as special characters. %%O (overline)
and %%U (underline)are not converted. Text strings exceeding 64 characters are converted
after being divided at each 64 characters. Divided text strings, however, areplaced with a
deviation of several dots.
• ATTRIB (attributes) data is converted in the same way as TEXT (text).
• DIMENSION (dimensions) data is converted after breaking down the various graphics to
individual graphics by verifying the BLOCK sections from the block graphic name.
• INSERT (graphic insertion) data is converted after breaking down the block graphic defined
to BLOCK sections into individual graphics. Though the angle of rotation and number of
lines and rows are converted, the scale isnot converted. These graphics are not converted
when block graphics from other files are inserted or when other files are verified.

11-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-3 Ruled Line Creation
The table creation function allows you to easily made tables by combining straight lines.

Ruled Line Creation


Parts(P) -> Grid Line Creation(R)

Item Description
Number of
Sets the number of lines (1 to 50) in the table.
lines
Number of
Sets the number of digits (1 to 50) in the table.
digits

Click the start point where the table is to be made in the Edit screen, and drag to the end point.

Start point

Drag

End point

This makes a table that fits in the area you specified.

<number of digits ̢ 1> vertical lines in table 11

<number of lines ̢ 1>


horizontal lines in table
OTHER FUNCTIONS

Outer frame is rectangular.

The table is placed so that the frame lines and


table lines are equal in both the horizontal and
vertical directions.

Reference • The table is placed so that the intervals between frame lines and table lines, andthe interval
between table lines are equal in each of the horizontal and vertical directions.
• The lines and corners of tables are grouped. To change the intervals between lines or graphic
attributes, first ungroup the table.
"Ungroup", page 4-14
"7-1 Setting Graphics"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-7


11-4 Table
Simple tables can be made with this function.
In addition, the following advantages can be provided if parts are arranged in these tables.
• If such a table is moved, parts in it can also be moved together.
• Parts can be easily arranged and handled.
• The auto fill function can be used.

Make a Table
Parts (P) -> Table(A)

Item Description
Number of lines Sets the number of lines (1 to 30) in the table.
Number of Columns Sets the number of columns (1 to 30) in the table.

From the edit window, click the start point of the table to be made, and drag to the end point. A table is successfully
made.
Each grid in the table is called a cell.

Start Point

Drag

11
OTHER FUNCTIONS

End Point

Move a Table
When a table part is selected, the line and column numbers are displayed.
To move a worksheet, select the worksheet and then drag and drop the “ “ on the top left.

Anchor

 Resizing worksheet
To resize a worksheet , drag the 8 anchors in the worksheet part.
No drag, resize, and drop of the table is required. Please wait until the following window is displayed. Select "No
change to the size of registered part" to keep the size of parts unchanged.

11-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-4 Table

Select a Cell
To select a cell, click it (the cell is highlighted).
All cells in a selected column can be selected by clicking the column No.
Click a line number, all the cells in the line are selected.
Double-click the upper left corner of the table, all the cells are selected.

The Right-Click Menu of a Line and Column Number


Describe the displayed menu by right-clicking a line or column number.

Item Description
Width/height auto
Automatically adjust the width of a column or height of a line.
adjustment
Width/height equally
Equally set the width of all the columns or the height of all the lines in a table.
adjustment
Copy To copy the selected row.
Paste To paste the copied row to the selected row.
Add last row *1 Add a line beneath the last line.
Insert row *1 Insert a line on the top of the selected line.
Insert copied row To insert the copied row on the top of the selected row.
Delete row Delete the selected line.
Add last Column *1 Add a column behind the last column.
Insert Column *1 Insert a column on the left of the selected column.
Insert copied column To insert the copied column on the left of the selected column.
Delete Column Delete the selected column.
*1 When the upper limit of the dimensions and number (1152x896) of lines and columns is reached, you cannot
insert a line or column.

Adjust the Width and Height


11

OTHER FUNCTIONS
When the mouse cursor is moved between two adjacent line numbers and column numbers and on a style line, the
cursor becomes .
The width and height can be adjusted by dragging.
When double-clicking, the width and height can be automatically adjusted.

No drag is required. Please wait until the following window is displayed. Select "No change to the size of registered
part" to keep the size of parts unchanged.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-9


11-4 Table

Table Attributes
When a cell is selected, the “Attributes” window is displayed. The following operations can be executed.
• The grid line of the selected cell can be selected.
• The background color of the selected cell can be selected.
• The targets in the selected cell can be configured.

Item Description
Line type *1 Select the grid line types.
Line color *1 Select the colors of the grid line.
Pattern The grid line of the selected cell can be made with the selected line types and colors.
Outer Frame
An outer frame and inner grid lines are made for the selected cell.
+ Inner Lines

11
Outer Frame An outer frame is made for the selected cell.
Inner Lines The inner grid lines are made for the selected cell.
None Delete all the grid lines of the selected cell.
OTHER FUNCTIONS

The Up Line
Cell Line of the Outer The up grid line of the outer frame is made for the selected cell.
Frame
The Down
Line of the The down grid line of the outer frame is made for the selected cell.
Outer Frame
The Left Line
of the Outer The left grid line of the outer frame is made for the selected cell.
Frame
The Right
Line of the The right grid line of the outer frame is made for the selected cell.
Outer Frame
By checking it, you can select the background colors. If not selected, the
Cell Background
Cell background color is transparent.
Background Background
Select background colors.
color *1
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part
BLK*1
blinks at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Align Top
Align Middle
Align bottom
Alignment incell The selected multiple targets in the cell can be aligned left, right, and middle.
Align left
Align Center
Align right

*1 "6-1 Selection of Colors and Line Types"

11-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-4 Table

Register a Part in a Cell

Register a Part
Drag and drop the part to the desired cell.
Select " Register a Part". You can also register a part by moving it and then immediately releasing it.
When the "Not Register" option is selected, this part is only overlapped on the table.

* After a short moment, the above window is displayed.


This is displayed only when you drag a part in the edit

Reference • When a part is registered in the cell, the cell is highlighted.


• To bring out the part, you can select it, and its frame is highlighted.
• When creating parts from device comments list by dropping and dragging, the part can also be
registed to the cell.

 Change registration

11

OTHER FUNCTIONS
To register a registered part in other cell, drag the part to the top of the cell to be registered and do not release the
mouse. A moment later, the above window will appear.
Select the "Change registered cell" to change the registered cell.

Undo a Registration

Drag a registered part out of the worksheet and do not release the mouse. A moment later, the above window will
appear.
Select "Unregsiter part" to cancel the registration.
You can un-register a part by cutting-pasting it.

Delete a Part
To delete the registered part in the cell, select the cell, and press the key.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-11


11-4 Table

Auto Fill
You can use the auto fill function by registering the part to a cell.
The little square display at the lower-right corner of the selected cell is called fill handle.
If you bring the mouse pointer over the fill handle, the mouse pointer turns into a cross-hair pointer.
To copy the contents of the cell to an adjacent cell, or make the parts with successive numbers, you can drag the fill
handle.

Drag

Fill handle

Selected Cell Results of Auto Fill


Single Copy
When the difference of the device
Copy using the difference.
Multiple settings can be calculated *1
When not Copy the contents of the selected cells repeatedly.
*1 The requirements when calculating the difference of the device settings.
• The set devices in the part should be “PLC device/indirect/Cell"
• The device numbers of the part should be unique.
• The same number of devices should be set
• The number and type of parts in the cells should be the same.

11 • The types of parts in the cells are limited to the following


• Switch, Lamp, Lamp Switch • Numeric Value Display
• Text display • The controls enabled with the devices
OTHER FUNCTIONS

• Animation Display • Meter (Bar/Circle/Sector)


• Statistic Chart (Circle/Sector)
• The overlapping order in the cells should be the same.

Reference Double-clicking the fill handle, the parts registered in the cell are selected.

Copy/Paste a Cell
You can copy ( + )and paste ( + ) a selected cell.
When being pasted, the contents, grid lines, and background colors are copied.
When being pasted outside the cell, the contents + straight lines + quadrilateral are copied (the grid lines are
dissolved into straight lines while the cell background is dissolved into a quadrilateral).

Notes
• For a part that is registered in the cell, it, even outside the frame (the green area), can also be transferred to VT3
together with the picture data.
• The table parts can also be used by the VT2 models. Under the following circumstances, however, they are grouped
together after being dissolved into straight line + quadrilateral (cell grid line -> straight line, cell background ->
quadrilateral).
•Receive picture data from the VT2 unit
•Read from Memory Card.

11-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-5 Form Printing

Form Printing
When a print start trigger bit device turns ON, the pre-prepared printer forms can be output (saved on Memory Card) to a printer.

Point • Printer output can be realized by VT3 series (excludeing VT3-V7R/Q5M(W)/Q5M(W)A/


W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A)). Note, however, that the Printer Unit (VT2-P1/P2) or Ethernet Unit
(VT2-E1/E2, VT3-E3) is required (Excluding VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G)).
"6-6 Printer Unit", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"6-5 Ethernet Unit", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Saving to memory card can be realized for all the VT3 series except for VT3-W4T(A)/
W4M(A)/W4G(A).
"6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

Procedure for setting printing of printer forms


This section describes the procedure for setting printing of printer forms.

1 Set "Common settings" under "Printer" in the VT system settings.


First, select a output printer model.
Set the paper size if you have selected ESC/P Raster, ESC/P Raster 2, LIPS IV Raster, PictBridge, ESC/P-R Ether or
ESC/Page Ether.
Select the Output Target.
"Printer", page 12-26

ESC/P Raster, ESC/P Raster 2


LIPS IV Raster, or PictBridge ESC/P-R Ether or ESC/Page Ether

11

OTHER FUNCTIONS

ESC/P-R Ether or ESC/Page Ether

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-13


11-5 Form Printing

2 Make a form Picture


"12-1 New Screen"

ESC/P Raster, ESC/P Raster 2,


LIPS IV Raster, PictBridge,
ESC/P-R Ether, or ESC/Page Ether Thermal Printer

3 Set the screen attributes of the printer form.


For ESC/P Raster, ESC/P Raster 2, LIPS IV Raster, PictBridge, ESC/P-R Ether and ESC/Page Ether printers, the
size of the form picture is determined by the set paper size (Step 1) and printing direction.
For a thermal printer, the size of the form picture is determined by the set printing direction and paper size, and
double density.

4 Make the printer form.


The method of making the printer form is the same as that for a regular screen (base screen, window screen)
displayed on the VT3.
11 • The background color of printer forms is fixed to white.
Point
• Make a printer screen in color when setting color models other than the VT3-Q5M as the
OTHER FUNCTIONS

target VT.
When VT3-Q5M is set in the target VT, black and white colors or grey scale are used for the
form picture (determined by the number of colors of the target VT). When the grey scale is
used, the printout is grey. When black and white colors are used, the printout is black and
white totaling 2 colors.
• Screen callups cannot be used in printer forms.
"11-1 Call Up Screen"
• Printer forms are saved as part of screen data, and printer form data is transferred to the
VT3 by PC->VT Send data. However, printer form datais not displayed on VT3 screen as this
screen data is for printing.
• About the functional limitations on the parts in the form picture.
"Restrictions on part functions in printer forms", page 11-17
• In the case of thermal printers, white text or lines may not be properly formed or disappear
if placed on black backgrounds. Check the printing results on an actual printer.
• The "ESC/P-R Ether" and "ESC/Page Ether" printer types can only be used when the VT3
series and printer are connected via Ethernet. The VT3 system program must also be
Ver. 4.81 or later.

Reference • An output image of an edited printer form can be confirmed in the View mode.
"View Mode", page 5-28
• Screen IDs of printer forms and number of forms that can be made
"Screen Configuration", page 2-5
• After the form screen on the workspace is drag-and-dropped to the edit window, it is possible to
create a component with the print start trigger bit of the form screen being set.

11-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-5 Form Printing

Printer model specifications and restrictions


When an ESC/P-R Ether or ESC/Page Ether printer is selected
Screen size
Print Paper
ESC/P-R ESC/Page
Direction Size
Width (dots) Height (dots) Width (dots) Height (dots)
A4 712 992 992 712
Vertical B5 616 848 848 616
A5 496 688 688 496
A4 584 816 816 584
B5 496 696 696 496
Horizontal
A5(Not
- - - -
selectable)
* 90dpi
When an ESC/P raster printer is selected
Screen size
Print Paper ESC/P Raster ESC/P Raster2 LIPS IV Raster
Direction Size Width Width Width
Height (dots) Height (dots) Height (dots)
(dots) (dots) (dots)
A4 722 992 708 960 700 974
Vertical A5 502 684 488 650 480 666
B5 622 850 608 818 602 832
A4 992 722 960 708 974 700
Horizontal A5 684 502 650 488 666 480
B5 850 622 818 608 832 682
* 90dpi

When thermal printer is selected

11
Screen size
Printing Direction Paper Size
Width (dots) Height (dots)
Vertical A4 708 960

OTHER FUNCTIONS
Horizontal A4 960 708

When thermal printer is selected


Screen size
Printing Direction Printing Density
Width (dots) Height (dots)
Single 288 24 to 1008*1
Vertical
Double 576 24 to 1008*1
Single 288 to 1008*1 288
Horizontal
Double 288 to 1008*1 576
*1 Changeable for the 24 points. Single Density: 4 dots Double Density: 8 dots

Printing Direction
ESC/P Raster, ESC/P Raster 2,
LIPS IV Raster, PictBridge,
ESC/P-R Ether, or ESC/Page Ether Thermal Printer
Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal

A
A

A
A

Thermal printer Thermal printer

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-15


11-5 Form Printing

Single-density and double-density

[Example] Printing Direction: Vertical

Single-density Double-density
screen size screen size

24 to 1008 dots

288 dots 576 dots

The printer form you made is printed out.

A Single-density screens are printed larger


than double-density screens even if parts
of the same size are used in the screen.

Paper width 80 mm

Memory Card
• The form size varies according to the printer settings. (The screen size is the same as that when a printer is used
merely when the output destination is a Memory Card and not a printer.)
• Each page is saved in the VTRPT folder in Memory Card as the bitmap or JPEG format. The picture format is set
with Memory Card in the VT system.

11 "6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual


• The bitmap files or JPEG files of the form pictures are save in Memory Card in the form of color files. (except
VT3-Q5M(W)/Q5M(W)A)
OTHER FUNCTIONS

• Printer forms saved on Memory Card cannot be displayed by "Viewer" on the VT3.
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Printer forms saved on Memory Card cannot be displayed by BMP file switching.

11-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-5 Form Printing

Restrictions on part functions in printer forms


Printer forms differ from regular screens (base, windows) in that parts placed inprinter forms are subject to restrictions
in setting items in the setting window.

Parts type Restrictions Placed Upon Setting Item


Common to All Parts BLK (blink setting) setting is invalid.
Graphics
Graphics Image Setting of graphic attribute control (blinking control) is invalid.
Decorative frames
Bitmap text
Setting of graphic attribute control (blinking control) is invalid.
Text Outline text
Memo None
Graphic attribute controls "Blink control" setting is invalid.
Switch "Switch function" and "Extended function" settings are invalid.
Lamp switch "Switch function", "Extended function" and "Blink by bit" settings are invalid.
Lamp "Blink by bit" setting is invalid.
Switch/Lamp
N state lamp None
N state parts See restrictions for each parts.
Cross Button All setting items are invalid (not printed even if placed)
• "Specify write word device" setting is invalid.
Numerical value display
• All setting items on the "Key entry" tab are invalid.
• "Specify write word device" setting is invalid.
Text display
• All the options in the "Key and Bar Code Entry" tab are disabled.
• "Vertical/horizontal scroll" setting is invalid.
Message display
• All setting items on the "Key entry" tab are invalid.
• "Vertical/horizontal scroll" setting is invalid.
Alarm display
• All setting items on the "Key entry" tab are invalid.
Video display All setting items are invalid (always printed in gray evenif placed)
• Frame Update means when the period is specified, all the options in
Basic part the "Frame" tab are disabled. Print in Frame 0.
• Frame Update means when the number is specified, printing is

Animation Display
undertaken with Frame o marking the start of printing.
• When the position control is “Specify by Do”t and dot update is “Specify by
Period”, all the options in the "Position Control" tab are invalid. Print in NO.0.
11
• When the position control is “Specify by Dot” and dot update is “Specify

OTHER FUNCTIONS
by Number”, printing is undertaken from the start dot number.
• When the position control is “Specify Directly”, printing is undertaken
from the start position.
• Options in the "Display Control" tab are invalid.
Function control by devices All setting items are invalid (not printed even if placed))
BMP file switching All setting items are invalid (always printed in gray even if placed))
Meters (bargraph, pie
None
chart, Fan)
Statisticalgraphs
None
(bargraph, circle)
• "Scroll pitch" setting is invalid.
Meters/Graphs • "Sampling trigger" setting is invalid. *1
Trend Graph
• All the options in the "Key and Bar Code Entry" tab are disabled.
• "Store Date and Time of Old Data" and "Store Date and Time of New Data" are invalid.
• "Sampling trigger" setting is invalid. *2
• The "Sampling Contact" option of the ideal curve is invalid. *2
XY graphs
• All setting items on the "Key entry" tab are invalid.
• "Store Date and Time of Old Data" and "Store Date and Time of New Data" are invalid.
*1 This item is sampled when printing is started on trend graphs (batch sampling,worksheet).
*2 The XY Chart (batch samples, worksheets) is sampled when printing begins.

Restrictions in printing of printer forms


• Printer forms are not necessarily printed in page No. order even if multiple print start trigger bit devices turn ON at
the same time and the printer attempts to print in page No. order.
Also, the print order when multiple triggers are accepted during printing is not necessarily the order in which triggers are accepted.
• Do not set the same print start trigger bit device to multiple printer forms.
• If a "Stop print" function switch is touched during printing of printer forms, printing continues until the currently
printing form is printed out, and all queued requestsare cleared.
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-17
11-6 Changing Display Text Strings

Outline of Changing Display Text Strings


Multiple (up to four) text strings can be set to parts, for example, that text strings areset to on VT STUDIO.
These 8 text strings are assigned to different IDs, which can be switched with the switches on VT3 or PLC.

For example, you can set the following four text strings to switch plates.

Display text string ID0 Display text string ID1 Display text string ID2 Display text string ID3

Next, make four switches for switching the text string, and set the "change display text string" switch function.

The switch to display text string ID0 The switch to display text string ID1 The switch to display text
string ID2 The switch to display text string ID3
Chinese Character Alphanumeric Character SymbolRoman Character

Each press of the switch for changing display text string switches the text string.

11
OTHER FUNCTIONS

Press the switch Press the switch

Point Total 8 text string IDs 0-7 can be displayed. It is not necessary to set up all the display text
string IDs. Set the text strings of the display text string ID forthe number of text strings to be
switched.

Parts to which multiple text strings can be set


Multiple text strings can be set to the following parts:
• Outline text
• Bitmap text
• Base Plate (switch, lamp switch, lamp, N state lamp, N state part)
• Screen attribute settings (screen IDs)
• Message Display (message contents)
• Alarm Display (item name, state display text string, message contents)
• Heading of the alarm log to be printed

11-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-6 Changing Display Text Strings

How to Set Change Display Text Strings


When using the change display text string function, set by following the order below:
(1) From the System Settings, select the Change Display text string option.
(2) Set text strings in the parts.
(3) Make a switch for switching the text string. (To change the PLC device values, the switches are not needed)

Set to use the change display text string function in system settings.

1 Display the VT system settings screen.


The VT system settings screen can be displayed by either of the following methods:
• Click "Work Space", "System Settings", and "VT System Settings", then click "Change Display text string".
• Select "Resources(R)" - "VT System Settings(S)" -> "Change Display text string(L)" from the menu.

2 Check the "Use the display text string switching function" checkbox.

Point If you unmark a checkbox, a message confirming that the text string data of ID1 to 7 will not
be saved will be displayed.

11

OTHER FUNCTIONS
3 At "Default display text string ID", set the display text string ID to be displayed when theVT3 is started up.
To switch the display character ID in a PLC device, check the checkbox "Specify the display text string ID". Sets the
target word device. You can set comments for each text string ID if necessary.
"Changing display character strings", page 12-22

Point • When the VT3 is started up, the display text string is displayed by the default display
textstring.
• The default display text string ID can be changed in the VT system settings in thesystem
mode.
"5-3 VT System Settings", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

4 Click the "Back to edit screen" button.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-19


11-6 Changing Display Text Strings

Setting Display Text Strings


Set text strings to parts. The method for setting text strings differs by part and by screenattribute settings (screen ID).

Text/Switch/Lamp

1 From the "Attributes" windows where multiple text strings need to be set up, check the "Multiple" checkbox.

Outline Text Bitmap Text Base Plate *1

*1 Plates can be set on switches, lamp switches, lamps, N state lamps, and N stateparts.
Chapter 8 "SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS"

2 Displays the No. to set at "Display text string ID" on the "View" tool bar.

11
OTHER FUNCTIONS

3 In the "Properties" window, set the items that can be set to each display textstring ID such as font name,
size, auto-correction, pitch, and position.

Point • Regarding items other than those that can be set to each display text string ID, the Nos.
currently displayed at "display text string ID" on the "View" toolbar are displayed in gray
when they are selected to 1 to 3. This indicates that they cannot be set.
• When the "Multiple" checkbox is not marked, settings are reflected in all display text string
IDs regardless of the No. currently displayed at "display text string ID" on the "View" tool
bar.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3, and set the items for the number of display text string IDs to be displayed.

11-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-6 Changing Display Text Strings

Items that can be set to each display text string ID


Parts Items that can be set to each display text string ID
• Font name • Size
Outline text *1 • Auto adjust • Spacing
• text string
Bitmap text *2 • text string
Name Plate *3 • Font name • Size
(switch, lamp switch, lamp, • Auto adjust • Spacing
N state lamp, N state part) • Position • text string
*1 "7-4 Setting Outline Text"
*2 "7-5 Setting Bitmap Text"
*3 Chapter 8 "SETTING SWITCHES & LAMPS"

About the size of text strings


When the size of text strings that are set to each display text string ID differs, thesize becomes the maximum value of
all the text strings.

Size of ID0 Size of ID1 Size of ID2 Size of ID3 Size of text string to be displayed

UP UP ▲
UP
Vertical
size of
ID3

Horizontal size of ID1

About the position of text strings made by outline text


Text strings are aligned so that their centers are aligned in the vertical direction. The horizontal position of text strings
is determined by the text alignment setting.

11

OTHER FUNCTIONS
Justified Left alignment

Point When "Direction" is set to "Vertical", text strings are aligned so that their centers are aligned
in the horizontal direction. The vertical position of textstrings is determined by the text
alignment setting.

About bitmap text


When there is even one ID to which 2-byte characters are used among ID0 to ID7,1/2X size cannot be selected as
the vertical size.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-21


11-6 Changing Display Text Strings

Screen attributes

1 Display the "Screen attribute settings" window.


Display the "Screen attribute settings" window by one of the following methods:
• By selecting "Edit(E)" -> "Screen attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By selecting the screen to edit on the "Screen" tab in the workspace, opening Menu by clicking the right mouse
button, and selecting "Screen attribute settings(S)"
• By double-clicking the screen to edit at the "Screen" tab in the work space

2 Mark the "Multiple" checkbox.

The "Text string setting" button is dis-played.

3 Click the "Text string setting" button.


The "Display text strings setting" window isdisplayed.

4 Enter the text string to each ID No., and click the "OK" button.

11
OTHER FUNCTIONS

Point Text strings cannot be set by screen ID in the printer form screen.

11-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-6 Changing Display Text Strings

Message display

1 From the "Settings" tab in the "Message Display" window, check the checkbox "Use change display text
string function". To use the Windows fonts, select "Windows Fonts" from "Fonts".
The "Set Fonts" button is displayed.

2 To change the font of the display text string, click the "Set Fonts" button. Then, set the font for each text
string ID in the displayed "Select Fonts" window.

11

OTHER FUNCTIONS
3 To validate the settings, click "OK" in the "Message Display" window.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-23


11-6 Changing Display Text Strings

4 Compile the message contents of each text string ID.


"Editing the Content of Messages", page 9-45

Select the program block Number to be compiled. You can set comments for each program block number if
necessary.
Next, display the text string ID, and enter message in the message line. Repeat the above steps to enter the
message for each text string.

Display text
string ID

You can check the entered messages for the List of Messages.

11
OTHER FUNCTIONS

Point When the Window fonts are used, the size of the displayed message is determined by the
widest font of the display text string ID.

11-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-6 Changing Display Text Strings

Alarm display

1 From the "Settings" tab in the "Alarm Display" window, check the checkbox "Use change display text string
function". To display the heading line, check the checkbox "Display Heading Line".

2 When the Windows fonts are used, the "Select Fonts" window is displayed, allowing you to set the font for
each display text string ID.
To display the "Select Fonts" window, select the "Window Fonts" option from "Fonts", then click the "Set Fonts"
button.

11

OTHER FUNCTIONS
3 From the "Alarm Display" window, check the checkbox "State Display text string", then click the "Set text
strings" button.
The "Set up State Display text string" window is displayed.

4 Set up the state display text string for each display text string ID, and click "OK".

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-25


11-6 Changing Display Text Strings

5 To display the heading line, display the "Set up Item Name text strings" window where you can set up the
heading for each display text string ID.
To display the "Set up Item Name text strings" window, click the "Set text strings" button in the "Display Items" tab.

6 To validate the settings, click "OK" in the "Alarm Display" window.

7 Set up the alarm message contents to be displayed for each display text string ID.
"Message", page 9-86

11
Point When the Window fonts are used, the size of the displayed alarm message is determined by
OTHER FUNCTIONS

the widest font of the display text string ID.

11-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-6 Changing Display Text Strings

To Print the Alarm Log

1 Click Printer in the System Settings.

2 Select "Thermal Printer" from "Printer Models". And check the checkbox "Use change display text string
function" under the "Set up the Print Alarm Log".
The "Text string setting" button is displayed.

3 Click the "Text string setting" button.


The "Set up Heading text string" window is displayed.

4 Set up the heading for each display text string ID.

11

OTHER FUNCTIONS
Reference Not only the heading, but also the alarm messages are printed for the specific text string ID.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-27


11-6 Changing Display Text Strings

Creating selector switches

Make a switch for changing the display of the text string.

1 Configure the switch use to change the text string display.

2 From the "Switches" window, select the "Change Display text string" option from the "Functions of Switch".

3 Select the display text string ID to be displayed when the switch is pressed.
"Changes display character string", page 8-26

4 Repeat steps 1 and 3, and make switches for the number of display text string IDs to be displayed.

11
OTHER FUNCTIONS

11-28 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-6 Changing Display Text Strings

How to Change Display Text Strings


The following describes how to switch text strings using the change display text stringfunction. When the change
display text string function is set, you can switch the display text string ID in the following window.

Edit Screen
In the edit screen, switch the No. at "Display text string ID" on the "View" tool bar.

"View", page 5-12

Part Catalog
In the "Part Catalog" window, switch the No. at "Display text string ID".

11
"Part Catalog", page 5-2

OTHER FUNCTIONS
View Mode
In the View mode, switch the No. at "Display text string ID".

"View Mode", page 5-28

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-29


11-6 Changing Display Text Strings

Print Settings
In the "Print settings" window, switch the No. at "Display text string ID" under "Print screen settings".

"Print Settings", page 3-23

Output screen data BMP file


In the "Output screen data to BMP file" window, switch the No. at "Display text string ID".

11
OTHER FUNCTIONS

"Output Screen Data BMP File", page 3-31

11-30 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-6 Changing Display Text Strings

About Operations during Changing Display Text Strings

Note that the following operations are performed during changing display text string. Note.

• When changing display text strings, the following parts change state to the state afterpage changing is performed:
Parts State
Numerical value
The input state is canceled. With text displays, the key entry"CAPS" settings is also
display
canceled.
Text display
Message display
The cursor and scroll positions are reset.
Alarm display
The scale of trend graphs is also reset.
Trend Graph

• When screens have been displayed by page previewer in the unit's system mode, parts to which multiple text
strings are set are printed using the text string selected by the default display text string ID.
• The parts that are set up with multiple text strings are
• After PC->VT transfer data has been performed from VT STUDIO
• The text string display selected by the defaulted display text string ID after being transferred from the System
mode to the Run Mode.

• The alarm log printing doesnít apply to the state display strings for the alarm display. They are printed with ON/
CHK/OFF.

when display text strings are changed with both the switches and PLC.
when the switch-based display text string switching and the PLC-based display text string switching are used
simultaneously, the display text string IDs specified with the switches are written into the target word devices
specified by the display text string IDs.

Switch (display character string switching) Switched to ID2


11
Switched to ID1

OTHER FUNCTIONS
Target Word Device 0 1 2

The character string


ID displayed on the ID0 ID1 ID2
host

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-31


11-7 Active Edit
Active Mode means moving a picture based on the settings made to the target part.

Active Edit
Display(V) -> Active Edit + ,

Enable/Disable the Active Edit.

1 Select "Display(V)" -> "Active Edit(Q)" from the menu, and click the button to
enable/disable the Active Mode.

The functions and parts when Active Edit is enabled.


When enabled, the following icons are displayed depending on the settings of the target part. Clicking one of the
icons, the picture moves as instructed by the settings.
Functions when Active Mode is The position where the icon is
Target Parts
enabled displayed
Switch, lamp switch, N state part,
Page switching The lower-left of the part
Cross Button
Display local window *1, Switch, lamp switch, N state part, On the lower right of the component -
Display global window *1 numeric display right
Switch, light switch, N status component,
On the lower right of the component -
Cascade display of windows *2 numerical value display (key input), text
left
display (key input), cross key
Local window
Closing windows On the " " button in the Title Bar*2
Global window
*1 ON/OFF is displayed on the relevant window.
Irrelevant windows are displayed on the specified position. (At the Active Mode, not displayed on the specified
position, but on the drawn position.)
*2 The icon is displayed at the same position even if the title bar is not displayed.
11 The title bar is displayed The title bar is not displayed
OTHER FUNCTIONS

11-32 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-7 Active Edit

Page switching

1 To change the page, click the icon at the lower-right corner of the target part.
Page switching.
[Example]
Set the switch on Page No. 10
by page switching Page No. 10

2 To return to the previous page, click on the ìî button or press the key.
Now you have returned to the previous page.

Display a part or the full window

1 Click the icon at the lower-right corner of the target part.


The window is displayed depending on the settings of the target part.

11

OTHER FUNCTIONS

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-33


11-7 Active Edit

Closing windows

1 Click the " " icon on the displayed window,


And the window is closed.

Notes about the picture activities


The icons cannot be clicked under the following circumstances.
• The icons cannot be seen due to the part overlapping.
• The icons at the back of the picture when the pictures are overlapped
• The icons on the part when pictures are overlapped on the part.

You cannot return to the previous page under the following circumstances.
• No a target picture to return to
• VT STUDIO is started

11 Active Mode is disabled under the following circumstances.


• View Mode
OTHER FUNCTIONS

• Part Catalog
• Printer form screen

Pay attention to the following points when using the system auxiliary numerical keyboard.
• When displaying the system auxiliary numerical keyboard in the active edit area, only the frame is displayed.
• If you want to clear the system auxiliary numerical keyboard displayed in the active edit area, then it is necessary
to execute "Show(V)" -> "Cascade over other windows(P)", or switch over to other pages.

11-34 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-8 Multiple Program Startups
This section describes multiple startups of the VT STUDIO program.

Multiple Program Startups


Two VT STUDIO can be started at the same time.
Multiple program startups allows you to copy and paste parts between two separately running VT STUDIO.

Notes about the multiple startup.


• For multiple starting, in case the same part catalog files (user defined) are opened, the part catalog file opened
later will be a Read Only file.
• When two VT2 BUILDERs are started up, settings (window size, opened catalog file, option settings,
communications port settings, etc.) of the last exited application are the settings that are enabled when VT2
STUDIO is next started up.
• When copying screen call-up parts, parts in the screen that are referenced by screen call-up are copied grouped.
• When copying parts, the key entry order at the copy source is also reflected at the copy destination.
• Two different versions of VT STUDIO cannot be started up at the same time.
• (When multiple programs are started up, the last backup file to be created becomes "!AutoBackup1.vs4".)
"Auto-backup files", page 3-4

11

OTHER FUNCTIONS

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-35


11-9 Batch Edition of the Part Attributes

Batch Edition of the Part Attributes


The part attributes can be batch edited. For example, batch change the character color of all the values displayed in
the compiling picture.

1 Select all the parts to be changed.


Select from the compiling picture or the list of the search results.

2 Either select "Edit(E)" -> "Parts attribute settings(S)" from Menu in that order, or click the button.
The setting window for the respective object is displayed. The window that is displayed varies according to the object
that is selected. To display it, double-click or right-click the menu and select "Part Attribute Settings(S)".

Point • Only the same kind of parts can be batch-edited.


• For switches and lamp switches, the extended functions can be batch-edited even if
switches and lamp switches are selected mixed.
• For switches and lamp switches, only the extended functions can be batch-edited when
selected multiple parts fail the meet the following requirements.
• The same number of functions is set up.
• The same sequence of functions is set up.

Example 1 Since both the quantity and sequence of the functions are the same, "bit
settings", "sub-settings", and "extensions" can be totally batch-edited.

Switch A Switch B
Function: bit settings Function: bit settings
Function: word settings Function: word settings
Extensions Extensions

Example 2 Since the quantity of function is different, only the "Extensions" can be batch-
11 edited.

Switch A Switch B
OTHER FUNCTIONS

Function: bit settings Function: bit settings


Function: word settings Extensions
Extensions

Example 3 Since the sequence of functions is different, only the "Extensions" can be
batch-edited.

Switch A Switch B
Function: bit settings Function: word settings
Function: word settings Function: bit settings
Extensions Extensions

11-36 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


The parts that can be batch-edited with Part Attribute Settings.
• Switch
• Lamp switch
• Lamp
• Numerical value display
• Text display
• Bar graph meter, Circle meter, Sector meter
• Statistical bar graph/Circle graph
• Graphic attribute controls
• Decorative frames
• Screen attribute settings

Point • Picture Attribute Settings can only be selected from the list of the search results.
• Once selected from the list of the search results, parts on different pages can also be
batch-edited. For example, the numeric displays on Page 1 and 3 can be batch-edited.

The batch edition of the switch function units


For the switches and lamp switches, the switch function units can be batch-edited.
For example, the following batch-editing can be performed.

Example 1 Select the first function of Switch A: bit settings. And select the second function of Switch B. And
batch-edit them.
Switch A Switch B
Function: bit settings Function: word settings
Function: word settings Function: bit settings
Function: word settings Function: bit settings
Extensions Extensions
11

OTHER FUNCTIONS
Example 2 Select the first function of the switch: bit settings and the third function of the switch: bit settings.
And batch-edit them.
Switch
Function: bit settings
Function: word settings
Function: bit settings
Extensions

Select the first function of the switch: bit settings and the third function of switch: bit settings. And batch-
Example 3
edit them.
Switch A Switch B
Function: bit settings Function: lamp switch
Function: word settings Function: bit settings
Function: word settings Function: bit settings
Extensions Extensions

1 From List of Search Results, select the switch functions of the parts (switches, lamp switches) to be
changed.
"Seach result list", page 5-17

2 Click the "Change" button in List of Search Results.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-37


11-10 Device Comments

Overview of Device Comment


The following operations can be enabled by capturing the device comments from VT STUDIO.
• The device comments can be referenced when you set up the devices.
• You can search in the device comments.
• The device comments can be referenced in List of Search Results
• Part settings (base plate and device settings) can be made from List of Search Results.
• Parts (switches, lamps, numeric display, text display, outline text) can be created from List of Search Results.
• To display units meeting the criteria.
(When unit configuration information of KV STUDIO Ver.6.0 or higher are read)
• When the destination PLC is an external equipment such as a temperature regulator or an inverter, the files saved
in the "dvcmt" folder of the VT STUDIO installation directory will be read automatically in case of creating a new
file. When other models are used, the files for various models saved in the "others" folder under the "dvcmt" folder
must be read manually.

Reference • Display the device comments beside the device numbers


"Option Settings", page 4-22
• "Search", page 4-11
• "Seach result list", page 5-17
• "List of Device Comments", page 11-41

Loading Device Comments


1 From the menu, select "Resources(R)" -> "Device Comments(I)". Then click the "Settings" from the "Device
Comments" in the "System Settings" tab in the Work Space.

Normal When MultiTalk is used

11
OTHER FUNCTIONS

Item Description
PLC If MultiTalk is used, select PLC "A/B".
PLC No. Set station numbers for the Ethernet(1:N) and thermoregualtor connections.
Number of Device Comment Display the captured pieces of device comments
Device Comment load Capture device comments.
Device Comment clear Delete the captured device comments.

11-38 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-10 Device Comments

2 Select the PLC from which you capture device comments, and select the "Capture Device Comments" button.
The contents displayed in the "Capture Device Comments" window vary depending on PLCs.
PLC Manufacturers PLC *1 Capture Device Comments
KV-7000 Series (Serial)
KV-7000 Series (KV-LM2*V)
KV-7000 Series (Ethernet) Used with KV STUDIO
KV-7000 Series (Serial) <XYM> (applicalble to KV STUDIO Ver.8 or later)
KV-7000 Series (KV-LM2*V) <XYM>
KV-7000 Series (Ethernet) <XYM>
KV Nano Series [KV-N*] Used with KV STUDIO
KV Nano Series [KV-N*]<XYM> (applicalble to KV STUDIO Ver.7 or later)
KV-5500/5000/3000/KV-L2*V
KV-5500/5000/3000(KV-LM2*V)
Used with KV STUDIO
KV-5500/5000/3000(Ethernet)
Keyence Corporation (applicable to KV STUDIO Ver 4.00 or
KV-5500/5000/3000/L2*V<XYM>
later)
KV-5500/5000/3000(KV-LM2*V)<XYM>
KV-5500/5000/3000(Ethernet)<XYM>
KV-1000/700, KV-L20*/21V
KV-1000/700 (KV-LM20*/21V)
KV-1000/700 (Ethernet)
KV-L20 (VT multi-link) KV STUDIO
(Equivalent to KV STUDIO Ver.3.03 or
KV-10/16/24/40, KV-P16
later)
KV-1000, KV-L20*/21V<XYM>
KV-1000 (KV-LM*20/21V)<XYM>
KV-1000(Ethernet)<XYM>
A Series CPU Direct
AnA Series CCU Link
AnN Series CCU Link
QnU series CPU direct link
QUTE series CPU direct link
Q Series (A mode) CPU direct link
Q Series (A-mode) CCU Link
VT-L16CA (A-mode) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC (Equivalent to GX-Developer Ver.8)
Q Series (Q mode) CPU direct link
CORPORATION. (Only GX-Works2 simple projects can be
Q Series (Q-mode) CCU Link
11
supported)
Q Series (Ethernet)
QnA Series CPU Direct
QnA Series CCU Link

OTHER FUNCTIONS
FX Series
FX1N/2N Series
FX3USeries
FX Series CCU Link
All the thermoregulators and transformers,
Peripherals *2 Serial
etc. connected with the VT3 series
Other than the above The target PLCs other than the above External files
*1 It is also the case when "By DT" is selected.
*2 For more information, please see the following parts in the "VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC Connection
Manual".
"Chapter 18 Connect with the Thermoregulators"
"Chapter 25 Connect with the Peripherals"

In the "Open file" dialog box, click the "Move" button on the right bottom,
select the "Device comments" folder, then you can use the device
comments for each model.

Item Description
KV STUDIO Currently used KV STUDIO Capture device comments from the targets in the currently used KV STUDIO.
United KV STUDIO Targets *2 Capture device comments from the specified KV STUDIO targets.
MITSUBISHI Capture device comments by specifying WCD files outputted from GX-
WCD Files
ELECTRIC Developer.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-39


11-10 Device Comments

Item Description
Capture the device comment files that are registered in the peripherals
Serial Auto Register
of VT STUDIO.
External Files *1 Capture device comments from CSV or text files.
Load internal device/link device Load the comments of internal device and link device of VT3.
*1 For the details, refer to "Create External Files", page 11-40, "Capture External Files", page 11-40.
*2 When version of KV STUDIO is Ver.5.5 or older, the buffer memory comment of the expansion unit must be loaded.

Create External Files


Since external files contain CSV or text files that use "(comma)" or "tab" as the delimiter, please use the ladder
diagram software to write the files.
When creating the external files, please match the device type and device number with the contents displayed in
Device Settings window of VT STUDIO.

[Example]

Point For the device type and device number, please observe the following precautions when
creating external files.
• For the device type, please use the text strings displayed in the Device Settings window of
VT STUDIO to describe.
• Please do not leave out the zeros in the device number.
• For example, please do not set DM00123 to DM123, please use DM00123.
• Please use half-width characters to describe device types and device numbers.

11
Capture External Files
OTHER FUNCTIONS

1 Capturing the device comments.


For more information, please see "Capture the operation Log", page 11-46.
To open the "Open Files" window, click the "Capture External Files" button.
After specifying your desired external files, click "OK".

2 The "Capture Device Comments - External Files" window is opened.

11-40 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-10 Device Comments

Item Description
Delimiter Select the delimiter from "Comma/Tab".
Start Line Set up the line from which the device comments are captured.
Set up device column Specify the device and comment column of the external files and capture.
Device setup
Capture comments by specifying the comment column of the external
methods Front device
devices. Configure the captured comments starting from the specified device.
Device Column Specify a device column.
Comments Column Specify a comment column.

3 Click "OK" to load the device comments.

Precautions about Loading device comments

• The captured device comments are saved in the VTS files.


• They are saved in the VT3 files of the memory card, but not in the VT2 files.
• They are transferred to VT3. But they cannot be transferred to VT2.
• When PLC models are changed, they are totally cleared from such models.
• Screen entry in progress, without entry
• They become the objects to be compared or examined.
• For KV STUDIO United, some devices are not applicable.
• For Capture Device Comments - Serial, the device comments captured by automatic registration may be different from the
actual device comments depending on the peripherals to be used. Please select the files that are specific to the connected
peripherals as the captured external files from the devcmt other folders in the targeted installation folders of VT STUDIO.

List of Device Comments


Display(V) -> Work Space(W) -> List of Device Comments(D)

11

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Item Description
PLC If MultiTalk is used, select PLC "A/B".
PLC No. Set station numbers for the Ethernet(1:N) and thermoregualtor connections.
Loading *1 Capture device comments.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-41


11-10 Device Comments

Item Description
To display units meeting the criteria.
Unit
(When unit configuration information of KV STUDIO Ver.6.0 or higher are read)
Device Set up the devices to be displayed.
The content displayed in the search list can be further compressed via the device
Compress and find(F)
No. or device comment.
Only display comments registered device(S) Only the devices that are registered with a device comment will be displayed.
Overview *3 Display the read device comments and No..
Set up text string (T) when dropping When outline text is created, please set up the content of the text strings created.
Options Clicking it, and "Set up the Options" window is displayed*2.
*1 For the details, refer to "Loading Device Comments", page 11-38
*2 for more information, please see "Set up the Options-Device Comments", page 4-28.
*3 When loading device comments with KV STUDIO United, the device numbers and device comments used in
the ladder diagram program are displayed in the upper case.

Create a part from List of Device Comments

1 From List of Device Comments, select the device comment used to create the part and drag it to the
compiling window.

11
OTHER FUNCTIONS

2 Select the part from the drop-down list in the window.


The part is then created and the device number and comment are reflected in the settings.
Parts The targets
Device No. Target Bit Device
Switch
Comment Nameplate
Device No. Lamp bit device
Lamp
Comment Nameplate
Device No. Switch bit devices, lamp bit devices
Lamp switch
Comment Nameplate
Numerical value display Device No. Reference word device
Text display Device No. Reference word device
Outline text Device No. Comment *1 Nameplate
Outline text + Device No. Reference word device
Device No. Device No. Comment *1 Nameplate
*1 The set comment varies depending on the setting of "character string set by dropping".

11-42 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-10 Device Comments

Reference • You can create multiple parts at one time by dragging multiple device comments from List of Device
Comments to the window. (Up to 100 devices can be selected simultaneously.)
Set up the part spacing when multiple parts are created.
"Option Settings", page 4-22
• When drag-and-dropping, if the created text string is a device No., then " DEV " will be displayed at
the cursor position; if the created text string is a device comment, then " CMT " will be displayed at
the cursor position; If the created text string is both a device No. and a device comment, then
" DEV CTM " will be displayed at the cursor position.
• When "Text string set at drag-and-dropping" is set to "Device comment" or "Device + device
comment", a device No. will be set for the components that are not created via the devices with
comments registered.

Set a part from List of Device Comments

1 From List of Device Comments, select the device comment to be set as the part and drag it onto the part in
the compiling window.
The window holding the device and base plate options is displayed.

11

OTHER FUNCTIONS

2 Drag the selected option.


The displayed options vary depending on the parts.
When the background of one option is red, this option cannot be selected.

Point • For N state lamps and N state parts, the settings of the current state number are selected.
"Display Tool Bar - State Number", page 5-12
• When the base plate is set with the display text string switching function, the settings of
the current display text string ID are seleted.
"Display Tool Bar - Display text string ID", page 5-12

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-43


11-11 Operation Log

Overview
Work Records are the time-based log information of the VT3 panel touching or page switching operations which are
stored in the memory card for later reference.

Automatically record the panel touching operations and


display screen states.

Example
1234
Numeric value display: Yes

Memory Card Trend Chart: all cleared


(SRAM) Page switching requests

Message: yes

Can be viewed on VT3 Save CSV files Can be viewed


in Memory Card from the PC

Point The following functions can not be used by VT3-W4.

11 • Memory card
• Operation record viewer
OTHER FUNCTIONS

Saving operation logs


Operation logs (records) are saved in the memory card on VT3.
The capacity of the memory card is 30k bytes. (VT3-W4 Series: 15KB)
The consumption of the memory capacity varies depending on the specific records.
For more information, please see "The Relation Between the Contents of the Operation Log and Memory
Capacity", page 11-49.

Save the operation records to Memory Card


The operation records saved in the internal memory can be saved to Memory Card in CSV files or UNICODE files.
For more information, please see the following.

• According to the controls of the devices - save operation records in Memory Card.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
• Global Controls - save operation records in Memory Card
"12-7 Global Function Control"
• VT3 system mode
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

11-44 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-11 Operation Log

Viewing the operation records


The following methods can be used to view operation records.
• From the views of the operation records in the system mode of VT3
"5-8 Viewer", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• View the operation record files saved in Memory Card using Microsoft Excel
• View the operation record files saved in Memory Card using VT STUDIO
• Receive operation record data from PC
"Operation program receive", page 13-23
“4 How to operate VT transfer tool”, VT Transfer Tool User's Manual

Using the operation records


To use the operation records, follow the bellowing steps.

1 Set the operation records


Set up from the "Operation Records" in the "VT Series System Settings".
"Set the Operation Log", page 11-46

2 Transfer the picture data to VT3


Operate VT3.
The operation records are saved in the internal memory on VT3.

3 Save the operation record files 11


Please refer to the "Save the operation records to Memory Card",

OTHER FUNCTIONS
page 11-44, "Operation program receive", page 13-23

4 Capture the operation record files from VT STUDIO


Please refer to "Operating Log File Loading", page 3-19

5 From VT STUDIO, confirm the operation records while view the painting data
Please refer to "List of the Operation Log", page 11-47

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-45


11-11 Operation Log

Set the Operation Log


1 From the menu, select "Resources(R)" -> "VT Series System Settings(s)" - "Operation Log(G)". And click
"Operation Records" from "VT Series System Settings" in the "System Settings" of the work space.

2 Set up the record objects from the system setting screen for the operation log.

Item Description
Operation Log If checked, the functions of Operation Records are enabled.
Operation Enabled If being checked, settings can be made for the operations.
Operation Enabled Operation Enabled Bit
Enabled bit device can be set.
Device *1

11 Rate of consumed of
memory size *2
Memory size over alarm
If being checked, the use rate of the memory capacity is saved in
the set word devices in the 1% unit.
After selection, the set value reached by memory size will be notified.
Notified bit device *3
OTHER FUNCTIONS

Sets the notified bit device.


Memory size
Nortify when memory is
Set in a unit of 1%.
consvmud
Processing when memory Select the solution when the memory capacity is exceeded from
size is exceeded "Overwrite the old operation records/Stop recording operations"
Allows you to select the items that are treated as the object to be
Objects to be recorded *4
recorded.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*2 You can select "PLC Devices (only MW and LNW)"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*3 You can select "PLC Devices (only MB and LNB)"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*4 Please refer to "The contents recorded in the operation records", page 11-51

Capture the operation Log


For more information, please refer to "Read from Memory Card", page 3-14

11-46 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-11 Operation Log

List of the Operation Log


Display the contents of the captured operation records.

1 From the menu, select "View(V)" -> "Work Space(W)" -> "List of Operation Records(G)".
The List of Operation Records is displayed.

Item Description
Filed Loading*1 Capture CSV or text operation record files.
Start If being checked, the contents of the list can be compressed in the date and time.
END Set the start date/time and end date/time.
 If being checked, marks can be set up manually.
Date/time Display the date and time of the operations.
*4
Display Page Display the number of the page to work with.
List
Category *2 Display the list of operations.
Item *2 Display the operation items.
Details *2 Display item details.
Add Marker *3 Display the "Mark Settings" window.
Remove All Clear all the marks.
Up Move the cursor to the next marked record upward.
Down
Introduce Display
Move the cursor to the next marked record downward.
Only display the marked records. To undo, click again.
11
*1 Please refer to "Operating Log File Loading", page 3-19

OTHER FUNCTIONS
Among the files in List of Operation Records, the Memory Card-specific VT3 files cannot be captured.
*2 For the details, refer to "The contents recorded in the operation records", page 11-51
*3 For more information, please see the "Mark Settings", page 11-48
*4 The individual columns in List of Operation Records can be replaced after the left checkboxes are unchecked.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-47


11-11 Operation Log

Mark Settings
You can find a desired record from the captured records and mark it.
A marked record is checked from the left checkbox, and its background becomes red.

Item Description
The selected parts The selected parts are marked.
Catalog The records that are in conformity with the checked catalog are marked.
Specify Display Page Marked in the record page.
Condition Select from ìbit device/word device/device comment/noneî. When this device is set
Device
up in the part or system settings, it is marked.

Display List of Operation Log and the Edit Window


11 When a record in List of Operation Records is selected, the edit window is displayed as follows.
• Display the page where this record is recorded.
OTHER FUNCTIONS

• When this record is correlated with a window, this window is displayed.


• The parts correlated with this record are selected. (for the parts in a screen call-up, the screen call-up is selectedc.)

11-48 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-11 Operation Log

The Relation Between the Contents of the Operation Log and Memory Capacity
Table of Contents

Item Size (byte)

Numerical value display Apply 32


Numerical value display Direct count up 32
Numerical value display Direct count down 32
Text display: Apply 28 + Number of characters x 2 *1

Trend Graph: Clear all 24


Trend Graph: Stop 24
Trend Graph: Start 24
Trend Graph: Apply 28 + number of graphs * 8
Keycode

XY graphs: Clear all 24


XY graphs: Stop 24
XY graphs: Start 24
Alarm: Delete 1 line 28
Alarm: Clear all 24
Alarm: Clear the same alarm 28
Alarm: Apply 28
Alarm: Confirm 28
Message: Apply 24
Picture switching requests 24
The current page 24 + Number of words to be written x 8
Window display request 28
Picture Switching

Displayed window 28
System screen call-up - request 24
System screen call-up - execute 24
Run mode transfer 20
Run mode end
System mode transfer-request
20
20
11
System mode transfer-execute 20

OTHER FUNCTIONS
System mode end 20
Printer 20
Memory Card Printer-request

Execute printing 24
Stop print 20
Memory Card save - request 28
Memory Card save - execute 28
form printing - request 24

form printing - execute 28

Bit write issue 24


Device Write

Word write issue 32

text string write issue 28 + Number of characters x 2 *1

PLC Data Folder - request 28 (when comments are specified 92)


PLC Data Folder

Execute PLC data folder 28 (when comments are specified 92)

Video capture - request 24


Video

Video capture - execute 28


Video Console "ENT" 20

*1 When the size is not a multiple of 4, use a multiple of 4 as the size value.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-49


11-11 Operation Log

Table of Contents

Item Size (byte)

Screen Display control 24


Beeper control 24
Restart VT 20
Clear error 20
Display text string switching - request 24
Display text string switching - execute 24
Change calendar timer settings 20
Key Protection 24
Change system mode settings 20
Password picture 24
System Control

Operation record start 20


Operation record end 20
Power supply ON 20
Operation record buffer over flowed 20
A communication error occurs 20
Communication error return 20
Specify backlight color by devices 24
Connect VNC server 24
Time synchronization - Request 20
Time synchronization - Execution 24
Time repair - Request 20
Time repair - Execution 24
Disconnect VNC server 24
Successful execution 20
Request 20
Extended command

Request failed 20

11
communication

Send error 24
Error response 24 + number of characters x 2
Warning response 24 + number of characters x 2
OTHER FUNCTIONS

Receive error 24
Write warning 24
Send command 24 + command length
Receive command 24 + command length

11-50 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-11 Operation Log

The contents recorded in the operation records


Table of Contents

Item Details Description Parts

The value has been entered into Numeric Display


Success definition " "
and the OK key has been pressed.
Numerical value • An value error has been confirmed (overflow, Numerical value
display Apply display
Fail "*1" underflow)
• Confirmed without a value being entered
Numerical value Succeed definition " " Select Numeric Display and direct counting ends
Numerical value
display An error occurs to the result of direct count end
Fail Confirmed " " display
Direct count up (overflow, underflow)
Numerical value Success definition " " Select Numeric Display and direct count start
display Numerical value
Direct count An error occurs to the result of direct count start display
Fail Confirmed " "
down (overflow, underflow)
The value has been entered into Numeric Display
Character Confirmed " "
and the OK key has been pressed. Text display
Display: Enter
Fail Confirmed without a value being entered
Trend Graph: Trend ID " " Select Trend Chart and press the Clear All button
Trend Graph
Clear all Invalid Operation Operate the parts other than Trend Chart (real time)
Trend Graph: Trend ID " " Select Trend Chart and press the Stop button
Trend Graph
Stop Invalid Operation Operate the parts other than Trend Chart (real time)
Trend Graph: Trend ID " " Select Trend Chart and press the Stop button
Trend Graph
Start Invalid Operation Operate the parts other than Trend Chart (real time)
Select Trend Chart (batch sampling, worksheet) and
Graph data " " press the OK key (only when the "Chart Data" of the
Trend Graph: "Cursor Information Storage" is checked).
Trend Graph
Apply Select Trend Chart (real time) and press the OK key
Trend ID " "

11
(only when the "Chart Data" of the "Cursor
Graph data " "
Information Storage" is checked).
Keycode

Trend ID " " Select XY Chart and press the Clear All button
XY graphs:
Operate the parts other than XY Chart (real time) as XY graphs
Clear all

OTHER FUNCTIONS
Invalid Operation
the above said
Trend ID " " Select XY Chart and press the Stop button
XY graphs:
Operate the parts other than XY Chart (real time) as XY graphs
Stop Invalid Operation
the above said
Trend ID " " Select XY Chart and press the Start button
XY graphs:
Operate the parts other than XY Chart (real time) as XY graphs
Start Invalid Operation
the above said
Alarm ID " " Select an alarm part and press the delete a line
Alarm: Alarm No. " " switch
Alarm display
Delete a Line Operate the parts other than the alarm part (real
Invalid Operation
time) as the above said
Alarm ID Select an alarm part and press the Clear All switch
Alarm:
Operate the parts other than the alarm part (real Alarm display
Clear all Invalid Operation
time) as the above said
Alarm ID " " Select an alarm part and press the Clear All the
Alarm: Alarm No. " " Same Alarm
The same alarm Alarm display
CLR Operate the parts other than the alarm part (real
Invalid Operation
time) as the above said
Alarm ID " " Select an alarm part and press the OK key validating
Alarm No. " " the entry.
Alarm: Confirm Alarm display
• "Record acknowledgement log" is not checked
Invalid Operation • To acknowledge other alarms
Select an alarm part and press the OK key (only
Alarm ID " "
when the "Cursor position notice" or "To Control with
Alarm: Apply Alarm No. " " Alarm display
confirmed functions" is checked)
Invalid Operation Conform to the above but no alarm is displayed
Message: Select an message part and press the OK key Message
Cursor position" "
Apply (only when the ìCursor position noticeî is checked) display

*1 A description of the failure is listed here.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-51


11-11 Operation Log

Table of Contents

Item Details Description Parts

• Press the Page Switching button


• Switch to a new page in the system memory area • Switch
Succeed Page No. " " • Switch to a new page using the device controls/ • The controls
global controls that are
Picture
switching • A specified page is not stored. enabled
requests • Respond to a request more than one time before with SWITCH
Fail Page No. " " switching to a new page DEVICE
• Ready to switch to the same page
CLR A failure is encountered in the password screen. -
The current Page No. " " • The page has been changed
• When moving to the Run mode -
page Page No. " " Initial Value " "
• Press the Local Window Display switch
• Display the local window in the system memory
area • Switch
• Display the local window through the alarm • The controls
acknowledging function that are
• Press the local Close button enabled
Succeed Display "ON/OFF" • Switch to a new local window through the device with SWITCH
Window " " functionality/global functionality DEVICE
• From the "Display the window when using the • Alarm display
switch to select" option of the Numeric Display/Text • Numerical
Display, set the window to Switch to Set up and value display
touch the Numeric Display/Text Display. • Text display
• To move a window
• Set the window to the forefront
• Press the Global Window Display switch
• Display the global window through the alarm
Succeed Display "ON" acknowledging function • Switch
Global window ID " " • Switch the global window through the device • The controls
Global window No. " " functionality/global functionality that are
• To move a window enabled
• Set the window to the forefront
Picture Switching

with SWITCH
• Press the Global Window Display switch DEVICE

11 Succeed Display "OFF"


Global window ID " "
• Press the Close button in the global window
• Switch the global window through the device
functionality/global functionality
• Alarm display
OTHER FUNCTIONS

Display partition windows and change window No. in


Succeed Display "ON" the system memory area Partition
Partition Window No. " " (when the specified window doesn't exist, it cannot
Window display be saved in the record) -
request
Succeed Display "OFF" Display Not display the partition window in the
Interrupt Window system memory area.
• To display the device monitoring (Window Display)
• To move the device monitoring (Window Display)
Succeed Display "ON" • Change the device monitoring (Window Display) to
the forefront Switch
Global window ID" " Device Monitoring
• Change the contents displayed in the device
monitoring (Window Display)
• To display the unit monitoring
• To move the unit monitoring
Succeed Display "ON" • Change the unit monitoring to the forefront of the
screen Switch
Global window ID " " Unit Monitoring
• To change the contents displayed in the unit
monitoring window

• The specified picture doesnít exist “Succeed


• Not display a window by setting the display to OFF Display "On/
Fail Display "ON/OFF" **4
• Set the display of the forefront window to ON *1 OFF" ---” same
as parts
CLR A failure is encountered in the password screen. -
Succeed Move Window " "
Succeed Move Global window ID " "
Global window No. " "
Move the window -
Success Move Interrupt window
Succeed Move Global window ID " "
Device Monitoring
Fail Move **5 Window movement timeout -

*1 When setting a non-existing global window to Display ON, the "Succeed" record is saved.
*4 Any "part" of the "Succeed Display" contains "*".
*5 Any "part" of the "Succeed Move" contains "*".

11-52 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-11 Operation Log

Table of Contents

Item Details Description Parts

Window " "


• When the state of the window display changes
Global window ID " " • When the window position changes
Global window No. " " • When the display sequence of the windows
Displayed Partition Window No. " " changes
window Global window ID " " Device Monitoring
• When no window is displayed after the display text -
string switching is executed.
Global window ID " " Unit Monitoring
When no window is displayed after the display text
None
string switching is executed.
When the call-up switch that is set with the functions
system screen "*2" other than the device monitoring and unit monitoring
system screens is pressed.
• When the call-up switch that is set with the writable
device monitoring and unit monitoring system
System Screen (device monitoring/ unit screens is pressed.
monitoring) • When special operations are needed to display the
Call up system
screen device monitoring and unit monitoring (except the Switch
window display)
Picture Switching

Request
• When the call-up switch that is set with the non-
writable device monitoring and unit monitoring
System Screen (device monitoring/ unit system screens is pressed.
monitoring) non-writable • When special operations are needed to display the
device monitoring and unit monitoring (except the
window display)
When the system screens other than the device
system screen "*2" monitoring and unit monitoring screens are called
Call up system up.
screen -
System Screen (device monitoring) Writable
Execute
System Screen (device monitoring) Non- When the device monitoring screen is called up.
writable
Run mode
- Transferred to the run mode. -
transfer
Run mode end
System mode
transfer-request
-

-
End the run mode
When special operations are needed to transfer to
the system mode.
-

-
11
System mode Transfer to the system mode (except system screen

OTHER FUNCTIONS
- -
transfer-execute call-up)
System mode
- End the system mode -
end

*2 When one of the following items are entered.


• PLC data folder (PLC->VT)
• PLC data folder(VT->PLC)
• Trend Graph
• Alarm Log
• Operation Records (file save)
• Operation Records (view)

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-53


11-11 Operation Log

Table of Contents

Item Details Description Parts

• Switch
• When the Execute switch of the printer is pressed • The controls
• To execute print through the device control that are
Print Request - functionality/global control functionality enabled
• To execute print from the system memory area with SWITCH
DEVICE

Execute Succeed Print is properly executed


-
printing Fail Fail to execute print
Stop print - When the Stop button is pressed Switch
Through the device control functionality/global
Data type (trend chart/alarm log/worksheet) control functionality
• Saving trend charts on Memory Card Function control
ID" " • Saving alarm logs on Memory Card by devices
Memory Card- File No. " " • To save worksheets in Memory Card
Request
Data type (operation record) To save operation records in Memory Card (file No. Function control
File No. " " are automatically saved) by devices
Data type (operation record) To save operation records in Memory Card (file No. Function control
File No. (auto) are automatically saved) by devices
Memory Card

Succeed Data type (trend chart, alarm log/ When the following Memory Card saving actions are
worksheet) successfully completed.
• Saving trend charts on Memory Card -
ID" " • Saving alarm logs on Memory Card
File No. " " • To save worksheets in Memory Card
Succeed Data type (operation record) When operation records have been successfully
-
File No. " " saved in Memory Card
Fail Data type (trend chart/alarm log/
Memory Card- worksheet) • Memory Card is not inserted
Execute • Fail to save data in Memory Card (Memory Card is -
ID" " full)
File No. " "
• Memory Card is not inserted
Fail Data type (operation record) • Fail to save data in Memory Card (Memory Card is -

11
File No. " " full)
• Memory Card is not inserted
Fail Data type (operation record) • Fail to save data in Memory Card (Memory Card is -
full)
OTHER FUNCTIONS

form printing -
Page No. " " To execute form printing through a form contact bit -
request
Succeed Page No. " " form printing is successfully completed
form printing -
form printing is terminated due to an printer error or -
execute Fail Page No " "
Memory Card error
when bit setting switches (set/reset/bit reverse/
Write Value "ON/OFF"
Bit write issue instant reset) are pressed Switch
Fail An error happens when wirting
Device

When word setting switches or numeric value setting


Word write Write Value " "
switches are pressed Switch
issue
Fail An error happens when wirting
text string write Write Value " " text string setting switches are pressed
Switch
issue Fail An error happens when wirting
While you intended to execute PLC Data Folder, a
BCD conversion error happens, which makes the file
Execute "PLC->VT/VT->PLC"
No. or record No. fail to be read
(and the error record is saved)
Execute "PLC->VT/VT->PLC" Through the device control functionality/global
File No. " " control functionality to execute PLC Data Folder Function control
PLC Data Folder
Comment text string " " (record No. is specified through comments) by devices
- request
PLC Data Folder

Execute "PLC->VT/VT->PLC" Through the device control functionality/global


File No. " " control functionality to execute PLC Data Folder
Record No. " " (record No. is specified through comments)
Execute "PLC->VT/VT->PLC" Through the device control functionality/global
File No. " " control functionality to execute PLC Data Folder (the
Record No “Not Specify” record No. is "Not Specify")
Folder - Execute "PLC->VT/VT->PLC" PLC Data Folder executing is successfully
-
Execute PLC File No. " " Record No. " " compelted
data folder Fail to execute PLC Data Folder due to a BCD
Fail Access Type "PLC->VT/VT->PLC" conversion error which, makes, for example, the file -
No. or record No. fail to be read.

11-54 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


11-11 Operation Log

Table of Contents

Item Details Description Parts

• Press the Video Capture switch • Switch


Video Image • Through the device control functionality/global • Function
Channel " " control functionality
control by
Request • To execute the video capture through an external devices
contact
Video

Succeed Capture " " The video capture is successfully compelted -


Video capture - • Memory Card is not inserted
execute Fail Channel " " • Video capture fails due to, for example, a full -
Memory Card
Video Console
- Press ENT through switch video control Switch
"ENT"
To execute Picture ON/OFF through Auto Backlight.
Screen Display
Picture (Display ON/Display OFF) To execute Picture ON/OFF through the system -
control
memory area.
To execute Beeper ON/off in the system memory
Beeper Controls Beeper "OFF" -
area.
Restart VT - Press the Reset switch on the host Switch
Clear error - Execute a wrong area in the system memory area -
Display text
To execute the text string switching from the switches Switch
string switching Language ID " "
or devices request*3
- request
Display text
string switching Language ID " " When Display text string is executed -
- execute
• When the value of the calendar timer has been
Change changed in the system memory area
calendar timer - • When the settings of the calendar timer has been -
settings changed in the system mode
Devices are protected with Locking Switch. The key
Key Protection Key Protected "ON/OFF" -
protection state has been changed
Change the settings in the system mode and save
Set - Change - -

11
System Control

the new settings


Succeed to enter the password in the Password
Password Succeed
Picture -
picture
Fail Fail to enter the password in the Password Picture

OTHER FUNCTIONS
Operation
- Start to record operation records -
record start
• Stop recording the operations
Operation • Set up the "Operation Record Stop" when the
- memory capacity is exceeded, and the operation -
record end
records are overflowed.
Power supply
ON
Operations
- Turn the power VT3 to ON. -
continue to be
recorded even
being disabled.
Operation Excessive operations are recorded in the operation
record buffer - records of the device control functionality/ global -
over flowed control functionality, which are saved in Memory Card.
A When an communication error occurs (please note
communication - that it takes a specific amount of seconds to record a -
error occurs communication error)
When an communication error is removed (please
Communication
- note that it takes a specific amount of seconds to -
error return
remove and record a communication error)

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 11-55


11-11 Operation Log

Table of Contents

Item Details Description Parts

Connect VNC
VNC No.[ ] In case of successful connection with VNC server -
server
Disconnect VNC
VNC No.[ ] In case of disconnection with VNC server -
server
Time
synchronization - When a time synchronization request was received
VNC key switch

- Request
Time When the execution of time synchronization
Success
synchronization completed normally
- Execution Failure When the execution of time synchronization failed
Time repair -
- When a time repair request was received
Request
When the execution of time repair completed
Time repair - Success
normally
Execution
Failure When the execution of time repair failed

*3 When using the PLC to change the display text strings, the functions of the switches are not specific even the
switches are used to change the display text strings.

Point Even for the device monitoring and unit monitoring screens in the system mode, the records
in "Window Display Requests" and "Display Windows" are still kept.

11
OTHER FUNCTIONS

11-56 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12
RESOURCE
This chapter describes some methods of creating new screens and using the list of
screen call, etc.

12-1 New Screen ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-2


12-2 VT Model Setting••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-9
12-3 PLC Model Settings •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 12-11
12-4 VT System Parameters ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12-12
12-5 Windows Font •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12-34
12-6 Device Transfer••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12-38
12-7 Global Function Control••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12-43 12
12-8 Cross-reference •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12-45

RESOURCE
12-9 Data Check•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12-46
12-10 Batch-change Device ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12-52
12-11 Screen Configuration Management •••••••••••••••••12-53
12-12 List of Screen call •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12-58
12-13 Ladder Monitor Data••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••12-59
12-14 Global Function Switch (Only for Handy Series) •••••12-62

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-1


12-1 New Screen

New Screen
Resources(R) -> New screen(N) + +
Display the "New screen(N)" window by one of the following methods:
• By selecting "Resources(R)" -> "New screen(N)" from Menu in that order
• By clicking the button
• By clicking "New screen" under "Screen", "Global window" or "form screen" on the "Screen" tab in the workspace
• By selecting the screen to edit in the workspace, opening Menu by clicking the right mouse button, and selecting
"New screen"

Item Description
Select the type of new screen to make from "Screen (Basic, Window 1/2/3)/Global
Screen type window/form screen."
* Form screen can not be created by VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A).
Sets the page No. (global window No.) of the new screen tomake in the following ranges:
screen(Basic, Window1/2/3) : 0 to 8999
Page No. (window No.)
Global window :G000 to G999
form screen :P00 to P15
Sets the comment of the specified page No. (window No.) using up to 12 1-byte
Comment
characters or six 2-byte characters.
Sets the type (Basic, Window 1 to 3) of the new screen to make when the screen (Basic,
Window Window 1 to 3) is selected at "Screen type". Sets the type of newly created screens
(Basic/Windows 1 to 3).

Screen settings (screen, global windows)

12
RESOURCE

12-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-1 New Screen

Item Description
Screen ID *1 Sets the ID numbers specific to each screen.
Key entry parts (active as When this checkbox is marked , the key entry parts having the lowest keyentry order are
default) set to the Active mode during page switching and window display.
Background color *2 Set the background color of the screen.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks
Background setting

BLK*2
at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
Use wall paper "Wall paper setting" button is displayed after selection. So, wall paper function can be used.
By clicking "Wall paper setting" button, you can open "Wall paper setting" window and set
Wall paper setting *4
the wall paper.
Backlight setting *6 To set when using VT3-W4M(A)/W4G(A). Set up backlight color.
When this checkbox is marked for the window screen (windows 1 to 3),the window screen
Initial display
(windows 1 to 3) is displayed from the beginning during page switching.
Window frame When this checkbox is marked, the window frame is displayed.
Display 3D frame When this checkbox is marked, the window frame is displayed in 3D.
Title bar *3 When this checkbox is marked for the window screen, the title bar is displayed.
Title bar (large) *3 When this checkbox is marked for the window screen, the title bar (large) is displayed.
Window settings

Close button *3 When this checkbox is marked for the window screen, the close button is displayed on the title bar.
Available Windows
After selection, screen ID of title bar is displayed as Windows fonts.
fonts*5
This is displayed when Window fonts are used. The fonts to be used in graphics data are
List of available fonts
displayed in the list. Then, you can select desired fonts.
The fonts not specified in the font list can be set. When the font types and sizes are set
Font settings
through "Font selection" window, they are added to the list of available fonts.
Bar/frame color *2 Sets the color of the title bar/frame.
Text color *2 Sets the color of the screen ID that is displayed on the title bar.
The "Blink settings" window is displayed when the "BLK" button is clicked. The part blinks
BLK*2
at all times on the VT3 screen at the set interval.
*1 The defaut value of screen ID can be obtained automatically. This can be changed as desired using up to 16
1-byte or 8 2-byte characters.
*2 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*3 The screen ID is displayed on the title bar. Also, by attaching a title bar, the window screen can be moved,
displayed at the front or closed.
"Screen Configuration", page 2-5 12
Move Screen ID Move to front Close

RESOURCE
@0000_1

Window screen

*4 For the details, refer to "Wall paper setting", page 12-4


*5 "About Fonts", page 6-23
*6 When it is set to "Blinking", the blinking period will follow "Blinking speed of system" in the system setting.
"12-4 VT System Parameters", page 12-12.

Point The "Close" button is hideed when window 3 is used as an interrupt window.

Reference • The initial activities of key entry parts can only be set through Basic screen in VT1.
• Screen settings can be changed in the screen attribute settings even if you are halfway through
making the screen.
"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-3


12-1 New Screen

Wall paper setting

Item Description
You can make sure how the wall paper already set is display on VT3 system. By dragging
Preview display and dropping the image files to the preview display, the wall paper can be set as a free
style.
Setting format: Select from "Gradation/image".
Gradation Type Select the types of gradation.
Gradation
Color 1/Color 2*1 Selects the color.
Style Select the style of wall paper. When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, this item is nonactive.
Color Selects the color. When the "Free style" checkbox is marked, this item is nonactive.
Free style *2 You can change the images available in the wall paper.
Change "Open image window" is displayed after "Free style" is selected.
Select from "Enlarged display/centralized display/parallel display".
Image Enlarged display : the selected bitmap files are enlarged or reduced and then set
into wall paper according to the screen size.

12 Display position *3
Centralized display : the initial size of selected bitmap files is maintained and
displayed in the center of screen. However, the excessive part
shall be cut if the read-in bitmap files are larger than the screen.
Parallel display : the selected bitmap files are displayed in parallel starting from
RESOURCE

top left corner of screen.


*1 "Color Selection and BLK", page 6-2
*2 Specify 8-bit (256 color) or 24-bit (True Color) Windows bitmap file or JPEG file as the bitmap file format.
Of JPEG formats, progressive JPEG format is not supported.
*3 When "Centralized display" and "Parallel display" is selected, the overflow zone isn't transmitted to VT3
system if the read-in bitmap files are larger than the screen.

Point • After VT3->VT2 switching


The wall paper setting is cleared, and the screen of typical background color is set.
• When turned into systems of different resolutions(e.g. change of VT3-S12->VT3-V8)
Reset such that the screen size is matched.
• After the change of horizontal screen <--> vertical screen.
Reset such that the screen size is matched.

12-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-1 New Screen

Notify screen switching

Item Description
When this checkbox is marked, PLC relays can be set at screen switching, or numerical
values can be written to data memory.
Notify screen switching When the Basic screen or window screen is displayed, any bit devices (1 bit) on the
PLC can be set, or a constant can be written to any word device (up to four continuous
word devices).
Sets the default to be written to the word device. When "Notify only" is set, the
Notify screen switching

Notification bit device is only set and defaults are not written to the word device. When
Number of word writes
"Number of word writes" is set, defaults are written to the word devices continuously for
the number set from the default word device at screen switching.
Sets the bit device to be set at screen switching. When the "Browse" button is clicked,
Notification bit device *1
the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Sets the start word device when defaults are written to the word device. This item can be used
Default word device *1 continuously for the number set at "Number of word writes". When the "Browse" button is
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Sets the data format to be written to the default word device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format

Leading+0
decimal/BCD/Hex". "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's complement format.

Sets the numerical value of word devices to write defaut value.


12
Default *2 to
The corresponding number can be only set through "Number of word write".

RESOURCE
Leading+3
*1 Selectable from "PLC device /Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37
*2 The word device to write defaut value is supported below.

Default Word Device


Leading+0 Default word device+0
Leading+1 Default word device+1
Leading+2 Default word device+2
Leading+3 Default word device+3

The following table shows the setting ranges of defaults that are written:

Data Format Setting Range of Default


Unsigned decimal 0 to 65535
Signed decimal -32768 to 32767
BCD 0 to 9999
Hex 0 to FFFF

Point "Notification bit device" is set (OFF -> ON) when the screen in question is switched to, and is
reset (ON -> OFF) when a different screen is switched to.
Notify screen switching settings can be changed in the screen attribute settings even if you
are halfway

Reference "Screen attribute settings", page 4-18

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-5


12-1 New Screen

Advanced settings

Item Description
When this checkbox is marked, set the password and security level. The screen is
Password
hideed if the password satisfying the security level is not entered.
Password

Security level Sets the security level (1 to 5) of the screen.


*1 When this item is clicked, the "Password" screen in "VT system settings" is displayed, and
Password settings
the password and security level notification for each security level can be set.
Sets the method for drawing objects on the VT3 unit.
Speed priority : redraw the last changing items for overlapped drawing items, switch/
lamp and basic parts, and meters/graphs. Compared with draw priority,
drawing speed is higher. However, the overlay relationship of objects
and the graphics themselves are sometimes displayed differently from
that when creating screens on VT STUDIO.
Draw priority : redraw the changing items and those overlapped onto themselves for
overlapped drawing items, switch/lamp and basic parts, and meters/
Draw options
graphs. Though the overlay relationship of objects is displayed the
same as that when making screens on VT STUDIO, the drawing speed

12 on the VT3 unit is slower than that of speed priority.


Normally, set this item to "Speed priority". Please select "Draw priority" when VT3 model
is displayed differently from that when making graphics on VT STUDIO.
RESOURCE

Redraw every part:


After selection, the graphics processing is updated for every part.
Disabled switches on When a window to which this function is set is displayed, switches on the Basic or
background window *2 windows in the background of that window are disabled.
Backlight will not OFF When a screen with this function set is displayed, the backlight auto OFF function will be
automatically during display disabled through the backlight OFF time.
*1 "Password", page 12-17

12-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-1 New Screen

*2 Example of "Disable switches on background window"


Window in which "Disable switches on background window" is set: "ON"
Window in which "Disable switches on background window" is not set: "OFF"
Basic: B, Window 1: W1, Window 2: W2
: Basic/Window in which switches are enabled : Basic/window in which switchesare disabled

Example 1 B B
W1 "W/" W1 "W/"
Touch the title bar to move
W2 "W/O" W1 to the front. W2 "W/O"

The effective area of the switch changes

Example 2 B B

W1 "W/" W1 "W/"

W2 "W/"

Open W2.

W1 "W/"

W2 "W/O"

12

RESOURCE
Point When you return to the original display screen after executing a system screen callup,
windows are re-arranged, and the window containing the enabled switches may change.

Reference Advanced settings can be changed in the screen attribute settings even if you are halfway through
making the screen.
"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-7


12-1 New Screen

Screen setting (form screen screen)

When the printer is ESC/P Raster, ESC/P Raster2, When the printer is a thermal printer
LIPS IV Raster, PictBridge,
ESC/P-R Ether or ESC/Page Ether

Item Description
Screen ID Sets the ID numbers specific to each screen.
File name setting By clicking the button, the memory card setting screen is displayed in system settings.
Set bit device as printing conditions of form screen. When the "Browse" button is
Print trigger bit device *1 clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
After VT3 is triggered and identified, trigger bit device is reset.
Print Direction Select the printing direction of form screen from "Vertical/horizontal".
Other Printer Color Mode Select color printing of form screen, or black-and-white printing.
than
thermal When "Color" is selected from "Printer color mode", printing quality can be selected from
Print Quality
printer *2 "High-speed/standard".

Screen Width: When "Horizontal" is set in "Printing direction", the width is set (288 to 1008: times of 24).
Size Height: When "Vertical" is set in "Printing direction", the width is set (24 to 1008: times of 24).
12 Thermal
printer Double density
printing
Double density printing is executed after selection.

Paper cutting The paper is cut when the form screen is printed after selection.
RESOURCE

Notify end Notify bit device is set when the form screen printing finishes after selection.
Sets the bit device for notifying end. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference
Notify Notify bit device *1
bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
end
Reset notify bit
The bit device for notifying end is set when the form screen printing starts after selection.
before execution
*1 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37
*2 ESC/P raster, ESC/P raster 2, LIPS IV raster, PictBridge

Reference • About the details of form screen printing


"11-5 Form Printing", page 11-13
• About printer types
"Printer", page 12-26
• Screen setting (form screen) can also be changed through screen attribute setting even during
drawing process.
"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18

12-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-2 VT Model Setting

VT Model Setting
Resource (R)->VT model setting(V)
Set the target VT to create screen.

Item Description
Series
Select VT series and models to be used.
Model
Display the color number of selected models. When VT3-Q5M is selected, you can select from "2
Color guality
-color black/white/32-gray scale".
Addon memory Mark this checkbox to use addon memory .
Vertical screen Mark this checkbox to support vertical screens.

Notices during horizontal screen (common) <--> vertical screen


The notices are presented below when the screen data created through horizontal screen is changed into vertical
screen, or the screen data created through vertical screen is changed into horizontal screen.
• The items on edit window are sometimes forcibly moved, and then edited as required.
• The window screen may be forcibly moved, and then edited as required.
• The file name is changed.
Horizontal -> vertical: <file name of horizontal screen> _ vertical. <extension name>
Vertical-> horizontal: <file name of vertical screen> _ horizontal. <extension name> extension name vs*/vu*

Notices during VT2 <--> VT3


Please refer to Chapter 1 "BEFORE YOU START USING VT STUDIO"
• The file name is changed.
12
VT2 -> VT3: <file name for VT2> _VT3. <extension name>

RESOURCE
VT3 -> VT2: <file name for VT3> _VT2. <extension name> extension name: vs*/vu*

Reference For the horizontal screen of VT2->vertical screen of VT3, the file names are changed below.
<File name for VT2>_VT3 vertical. <extension name> extension name: vs*/vu*

 Precautions when changing from other series rather than VT3-W4 to VT3-W4.
Pay attention to the following points when changing the model of VT3 series from a model other than VT3-W4 to a
model of VT3-W4.
• All the functions not applicable to VT3-W4 series, such as form screen, barcode input etc, will be initialized.
• When capacity of the PLC data folder is above 75k bytes, it is not possible to make change if errors occur.
• All the components with stroke font set will be changed to bitmap font.
• When volume of the buzzer is set to "High", "Medium" or "Low", it will be changed to "High".
• PLC connection port is disabled.
• Communication speed will change to 115.2kbps when exceeding the speed of 115.2kbps.
• All devices set to PLC_B with MmltiTalk will become unset devices.
• The selected status of "Bar code" for "VT system setting" can be removed by selecting it.

 Precautions when a model of VT3-W4 series is changed to a model other than VT3-W4
Pay attention to the following points when changing the model of VT3 series from a model of VT3-W4 to a model
other than VT3-W4. (VT3 handhold series excluded)
• When the set switch area is below 16 x 16 pixels, it will be initialized to the default switch area (16 x 16 pixels).
• Initialize backlight color setting
• Change PLC connection port to Port2. (Port4 when using Megalink)
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-9
12-2 VT Model Setting

 Precautions when resetting screen size with different resolution


• When the resolution is increased, the position will be changed, allowing the components configured outside the
screen to enter into the edit window.
• When Windows fonts are used, text size will also change according to the reset size.
• According to size reset operation, the position control of the animation component and the position control Basicd
on graphic control will also change according to proportion of the screen size.
• In the following cases, change of the component size will be different from the proportion of the screen size.
•When the changed switch size is less than 16 x 16 pixels (2x2 pixels for VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A))
•When the changed component size is larger than 800 x 800 pixels
•Other cases when the size is larger or smaller than the settable size of each component
• Position of the components may not conform to the switch grid.
• When a switch area is set up for each component, all the switch areas that are set up will be initialized.
• Reset window size by taking 16 x 16 pixels as unit.
• Model setting change of VT3 series between model 5 or above and model 4 will be performed as follows.
From model 5 or above to model 4 From model 4 model 5 or above

Size is reduced according to the horizontal Size is enlarged according to the horizontal width, and
width, and lower part of the screen is exposed. lower part of the screen changes to blank status.

Point Be sure to confirm the layout of screen after size is reset.

12
RESOURCE

12-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-3 PLC Model Settings

PLC Model Settings


Resource(R) -> PLC model setting(P)
Set the target PLC to create screen.

Item Description
Vendon Select PLC Vendons and models to be connected. Click "Confirm connection" to
Series *1 display PLC connection manual of vendor selected.
Port Select the ports to be connected.
Target PLC_A
Use XYM
When selected, devices use XYM notation. (XYM notation compatible models only)
notation
By DT After selected, connection with VT3 will be established via DT. (communication via DT)
MultiTalk function *2, 3, 4 MultiTalk can be used after selection. Set target PLC_B.
Vendon Select PLC Vendons and models to be connected. Click "Confirm connection" to
Series *1 display PLC connection manual of vendor selected.
Port Select the ports to be connected.
Target PLC_B *4
Use XYM
When selected, devices use XYM notation. (XYM notation compatible models only)
notation
By DT After selected, connection with VT3 will be established via DT. (communication via DT)
Port details *3 The service condition of ports can be confirmed through "Port details" window.

*1 For more information about selecting a Series for a target PLC, see
PLC Connection Manual.
VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series 12

RESOURCE
*2 For details and notes about MultiTalk function, see "Chapter 4 Operation and Unit Functions", VT3 Series
Hardware Manual.
*3 It does not display when VT is VT2 or VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A) series.
*4 It can not be set when VT is VT2 or VT3-V7R/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) series.

Point • MultiTalk function can not be used by VT3-V7R/W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A).
• After create menu and change target PLC, display the following validation dialog box.
Please validate, change device setup as required, then change PLC type. If device setup is
not changed when PLC type is changed, sometimes device setup will become unset.
• When MultiTalk is applied, the following PLCs shall be used and set to target PLC_A.
(1) DB router
(2) 2-port Function
(3) Remote COM tool
(4) VT Through communication
(5) Window display of unit monitor and device monitor Basicd on special screen
operations.
"Chapter 4 Operation and Unit Functions", VT3 Series Hardware Manual.
"5-10 Monitoring", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-11


12-4 VT System Parameters

About Setting of VT System


VT system setting can be executed by either of the following methods:
• Select "Resource(R)" -> "VT system settings(S)" from the menu in that order.
• Select "VT system settings" from "System settings" tab of workspace.
"Workspace", page 5-15

VT system settings cover:


• VT System
• PLC Communication Condition
• System Memory Area
• Password
• Parts
• character strings display OFF
• Operation Log
• KL Setup
• Barcode
• Memory Card
• Printer
• Video
• VNC server
• PLC time synchronization
• VT timer
• Other
For the respective settings, refer to the following descriptions.

Item Description
Return to edit screen Return to edit screen from the setting screens of VT system.

12 VT System
Resource(R)->VT system setting(S)->VT system(V)
RESOURCE

Set the hardware of VT3 model.

12-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-4 VT System Parameters

Item Description
This item is for setting the page number of the screen that is initially displayed
Initial Page No.
after the power is turned ON.(0 to 8999)*1
Page No. Specify Format Select the specify format of page No. from "Unsigned decimal/BCD".
Set the delay time of rising edge of VT3 when the power is turned ON. (0 to
System Startup Delay
120s)
If VT3 isnít operated after exceeding the setting time, back light is protected by
Back Light OFF Start Time
turning OFF automatically. (0 to 120m) *2
Buzzer Volume Set the volume of buzzer within VT3.
VT 2-Touch Switch *5 Set if 2-touch switches are pressed simultaneously.
System Alarm buzzer Set if VT3-V7R alarm buzzer is used.
Set if the active mode of VT3-V7R Grip switch or Grip switch is used.
Alternation : switch valid/invalid of cross-key and touch switch by
Grip switch pressing the rising edge of Grip switch.
Instantaneous : cross-key and touch switch are valid only when Grip switch
is pressed.
Select from reading externally the screen data, and prohibiting from checking
Read Protection
"No protect/protect/protect (with password)".
Set the password when "Read protect" is set to "Protect(with password)". The
Password
password is set to half-width number up to 8 characters.
The display format settings of date/time in VT3 unit are selected from "YY/MM/
Date format
DD", "MM/DD/YY/", "DD/MM/YY/" and "YY/DD/MM".
The separators are selected from "/(oblique)", ".(full stop)", "-(hyphen)" and
Date and Separator
"""(blank)".
time
format *3 After selection, month display is changed into an English representation(Jan/
Display(Jan/Feb/...)
Feb/...).
Display "AM/PM"
After selection, hour display is changed into 12-hour display showing AM/PM.
(12 hour display)
Select display/hide for "Page Switching""Global Window Switching" etc state
Display “Changing Page”
messages displayed in VT3. (initial value: display)
Display “Cannot Change Select display/hide for "Disabling Page Switching by SW", "Disabling Window
Page” Display by SW" etc state messages displayed in VT3. (initial value: display)
WARNIN
Select display/hide for "Interlocking" etc state messages displayed in VT3.
G Display Interlocking
(initial value: hide)
Message
Executing PLC data folder/ Select display/hide for "Executing PLC Data Folder", "Transmitting Notes" etc
transmitting notes *6 state messages displayed in VT3. (initial value: display)

Executing worksheet *6

Standard
Select display/hide for "Executing Worksheet" etc state messages displayed in
VT3. (initial value: display) 12
Set the blinking speed of hardware blink and flash control (color inversion
Blink control
Speed 1 blink) of VT3 unit within the range of 0.1 to 2.5s in the increment of 0.1s.

RESOURCE
(reverse color) *4
Speed 2 The standard is fixed to 0.4s.
Blink control Standard Set the blinking speed of software blink (flash control (display/non display
Blink (display/non Speed 1 blink, color change blink) of VT3 unit within the range of 0.4 to 2.5s, in the
display/color increment of 0.1s.
change) Speed 2 The standard is fixed to 1.0s.
Set the blinking speed of system blink (blink and error prompt of cursor and
System blink speed parts in the active mode) of VT3 unit within the range of 0.1 to 2.5s, in the
increment of 0.1s.
The value of internal free
Backup device can also be After selection, the value of internal free device can also be maintained even if
internal maintained even if VT power VT3 power is turned OFF.
devices is turned OFF.
even if VT Lo Blk
Maintain the value of internal device of lower block(MW0100 to MW07FF).
is turn (MW0100 to MW07FF)
OFF Hi Blk
Maintain the value of internal device of higher block(MW0800 to MW0FFF).
(MW0800 to MW0FFF)
Device backlight color
After checked, backlight color of device can be used.
specifying
Small Specifying method Select backlight color specifying device from "Word device/bit device".
model Backlight color specifying
setting *7 Click "Browse" button to specify "Device setting" window.
device
Blinking speed of the backlight for VT3-W4M(A)/W4G(A) can be set up within the
Backlight blinking period
range of 0.4 to 2.5s in 0.1s unit.
*1 Don't set the page No. not yet created into initial display page No..
*2 For the settings of starting time of back light OFF, see the description in the next page.
*3 Use data/time display during alarm display and video capture.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-13


12-4 VT System Parameters

*4 Speed 1 and 2 cannot be set in the case of VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A/


W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).
*5 No setting is allowed in the case of VT3-X15/V6H(G)/Q5H(G)/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).
*6 It could not be set in VT2 series.
*7 Only VT3-W4M (A)/W4G (A) can be set.
For other values, backlight color will be switched according to various status of the backlight color specifying
device. Backlight colors will switch as follows.
Device for specifying
VT3-W4G(A) VT3-W4M(A)
backlight color
1 Red Red
2 Green White
3 Orange Pink
4 The corlor of screen attribute setting blinking The corlor of screen attribute setting blinking
5 Red blinking Red blinking
6 Green blinking White blinking
7 Orange blinking Pink blinking
Blinking status is as follows according to Blinking status is as follows according to
different screen attributes different screen attributes.
8 Red -> red/orange blinking Red -> red/pink blinking
Green -> green/red blinking White -> white/red blinking
Orange -> green/red blinking Pink -> white/red blinking
9 Red -> orange blinking Red/pink blinking
10 Orange/green blinking Pink/white blinking
11 Green/red blinking White/red blinking
16 to 31 Backlight OFF Backlight OFF
Other values Compliant with screen attributes Compliant with screen attributes

Important • After read protect is set, the screen data in VT3 cannot be read and checked any longer. To cancel
memory read, the screen data must be transferred again. The screen data should be copied.
• However, when read protect "Protect(with password)" is set, you can read and check them
after entering password through VT STUDIO.
• The data in PLC data folder can be read and checked even if read protect is set.

Point • VT3-W4T(A) can be set but disabled.


• On the password screen in the system mode, color of the backlight will be displayed
according to the original color (VT3-W4M(A): white; VT3-W4G(A): green).

12 Reference Read Protect


"5-2 Option Setup", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
RESOURCE

About starting time of back light OFF


If VT3 isn't operated after exceeding the setting time, back light is protected by turning OFF automatically in
the following cases.
1. Touch switch isn't pressed.
2. No page switching is performed (page switching, ON/OFF of window display).
3. Interrupting window isn't displayed.
4. The devices set with alarm detection has no any change.
Back light isn't turned OFF in the following cases.
1. Set the starting time of back light OFF into "0".
2. Page switching is performed (page switching, ON/OFF of window display) within the set starting time of back light OFF.
3. Interrupting window is displayed.
4. The devices set with alarm detection has changed within the set starting time of back light OFF.
5. Press the touch switch within the set starting time of back light OFF.
6. Only specific screen is set to "Backlight not auto-off during display".
7. When the device bit for device-Basicd backlight color specifying is 1 to 11.
In the case of back light OFF, the back light can be turned ON again by the following operations.
1. Press the touch switch.
2. Page switching is performed (page switching, ON/OFF of window display).
3. The interrupting window is displayed.
4. The devices set with alarm detection has changed.
5. The device set in device-Basicd backlight color specifying is changed.

Reference Refer to "Back light OFF" in the system memory area.


Chapter 14 "SYSTEM MEMORY AREA"
12-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
12-4 VT System Parameters

The value of internal free device can also be maintained even if VT power is turned OFF.
Even if "The value of internal free device can be maintained even if VT power is turned OFF" is set, internal free
device will be cleared in the following cases.
• In the case of data transmission from PC of VT STUDIO->VT.
• When system settings are changed through VT STUDIO for differential transmission.
• When the settings maintained by internal device are changed through system mode.

Communication Condition
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->PLC communication conditions(C)
The communication conditions are set according to PLC to be connected.
PLC_A and PLC_B communication conditions are available when MultiTalk function is used.
Click "Confirm connection" to display PLC connection manual of vendor selected.

PLC No.
Item Description
Sets according to the PLCs to be connected.
12

RESOURCE
Sets address No. of VT3 when MlutiLink units, high-speed MlutiLink units and
VT No.
universal serial communications are used.
PLC I/F Sets according to the PLCs to be connected.
Baud Rate Sets the baud rate.
Data Bits Sets the data bits.
Stop Bits Sets the stop bit.
Parity Sets the parity.
Flow Control Sets the control mode.
CheckSum Sets the addition of checksum.
CR Sets the addition of CR.
LF Sets the addition of LF.
Changes the timeout, sending waiting, retrying frequency and register number of
Advanced settings monitors
(no change in common case).
Sets the devices to be used for confirmation of connection when there isnít
PLC communication Target word
communication within a fixed period.
special setting Device *1
No setting is required in common cases.
Cut off or reset the erroneous Once selected, the communication with an erroneous station is cut off. And this
station No. number is regularly monitored and re-connected once the error is removed.

*1 Selectable from "PLC device"


"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37.
*2 Follow the procedure described in VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC Connection Manual to configure this
setting only when required by the target PLC.
*3 This can be set up when a PLC model that supports 1-to-N connection is selected.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-15


12-4 VT System Parameters

Point Set different screens during Ethernet connection.


Chapter 17 "ETHERNET CONNECTION"

System Memory Area


Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->System memory area(M)
The system memory area is an area of system information that is maintained between VT3 and PLC, and used to
control VT3 through PLC, and read the status of VT3 from PLC.
Chapter 14 "SYSTEM MEMORY AREA"

Item Description
Set the devices (starting No.) to be used in system memory area.
System Memory Area *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
settings" window.
VT mode /
Select if the system memory area is used in VT mode, or in MT compatible mode.
12 MT mode *2
Details When VT mode is set, it's required to select again if various items are used.
Device No. Display device No. designated to various items.
RESOURCE

Number of words The number of words used in various items is displayed when VT mode is set.
Total number of words The total number of words of devices to be used is displayed when VT mode is set.
When MT compatible mode is set, it's required to select again if calendar timer set value is
Use PLC Date/Time
changed through the system memory area.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37
MW0040(VT mode) and MW0000(MT compatible mode) are fixed in the case of universal serial communication.
*2 After VT mode is selected, you can set individually the availability of various items in the system memory area.
Please set to this mode in common case.
After MT compatible mode is set, you can set MultiDisplay MT-260/250/450 and compatible 16-word fixed
system memory area.

12-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-4 VT System Parameters

Password
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Password(W)

About password(safety function)


It indicates the safety level set for every screen. If no correct password matching the safety level is entered, the
corresponding screen function will not be displayed on VT3.
The safety level is set to 5 levels (1 to 5), with level 5 as the maximum level.

When the safety level is shown to be higher than currently displayed screen through page switching and window
display, the password entry screen is displayed. If no correct password is entered, "Password error" is displayed,
and the screen hideed. (The password entry screen is returned to original screen by pressing "Cancel" button).

When the safety level is shown to be lower than or equal to currently displayed screen, the password entry screen
isnít displayed. In such case, pages can be switched freely and the window displayed.

Low authority High authority

No password (Level 0) < Level 1 < Level 2 < Level 3 < Level 4 < Level 5

Point As compared to current screen, when the safety level of screen to be switched for display is:
• Higher : password entry screen is displayed. If no correct password is entered,
"Password error" is displayed, and the screen hideed.
• Lower or equal : the password entry screen isnít displayed, the pages can be switched
freely and the window displayed.

The safety level of screen is set through "Advanced settings" tab in "Create new screens" or "Screen attribute settings".

12

RESOURCE

"New Screen", page 12-2


"Screen attribute settings", page 4-18

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-17


12-4 VT System Parameters

About the setting methods of password

Item Description
Password Set the password for various safety levels. The digital password can be set up to 8 bits.
Notify safety level After selection, the safety level of currently displayed screens will be written to notify word device.
*1 Set the word device of notifying the safety level. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the
Notified word device
reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37

Notify safety level


The safety level of currently displayed screens can be notified to PLC using notify word device.
Write the safety level of currently displayed screens into PLC. The method of mechanical operation is prohibited.

Point • The password (safety) is valid when page switching and window display is executed
through touch switch of VT3.
• When page switching and window display is executed at PLC and external equipments with
the help of system memory area, device-Basicd functional control and Global function
control, the password entry screen isn't displayed, the pages can be switched freely and
the window displayed.
• The password entry screen isn't displayed after VT3 is switched to operating mode. If the

12 safety level is set in Basic with initial display page No. and window "With initial display",
the password entry screen isnít displayed, and the screen displayed.
• When page switching is performed for VT3 in the operating state, and if you donít intend to
display the screen with safety level, the screen attribute of Basic set with next display page
RESOURCE

NO. and window ìWith initial displayî may be set to "Without password".
• When the window screen is created in the page to be switched, and also set to ìWith initial
displayî, the page cannot be switched if Basic screen has different safety levels from
window screen, and if no password with higher safety level is entered.
• The password entry screen may be returned to initial screen after 1 minute without any
operation. In addition, if the device with alarm detection has changed, the password entry
screen is returned to initial screen.
• The screen data is written to PC through "Communication(C)"->"VT -> "PC data
receiving(R)"->"All data(A)". The password can be confirmed if screen data is read from the
memory card. If the password shall be kept confidential, reading of screen data is disabled
through the following settings.
• The read protect is set to "Protect" through "VT system" in "VT system settings".
• "Read protect" is set through VT system settings in VT3 system mode .
• After "Prohibit transfer of system mode" is set through option settings in VT3 system
mode , the screen data of VT3 unit cannot be written to memory card since it's not
allowed for transfer to system mode.
• The content of password can be changed even under the system mode.
"5-3 VT System Settings", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

Reference Read protect (with password)


Prohibit from externally reading and checking the screen data
" VT System", page 12-12

12-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-4 VT System Parameters

Example of password (safety function)

Security
Screen Explanation
LevelStatus

When the screen that is


about to be displayed by
Initial Screen
OFF (level 0) page switching is in security
Base: level 1
No password

Monitor Page selection switch

Enter password
(Level 1 or higher).

The password of any level 1


to 5 is acceptable as the
entered password.
******** Password entry screen

1 2 3 4 5 BS EN
6 7 8 9 0 CLRCANCE

Enter password (Level 1 or higher).

When the screen that is


about to be displayed by
Monitor Screen window display is in security
Base: level 5.
Level 1 Security level 1

Modify End
Window display ON switch

Enter password
12
(Level 5 or higher).

RESOURCE
Only the password of level 5
is accepted as the entered
password.
******** Password entry screen

1 2 3 4 5 BS EN
667 78 980 9CLR0 CLR CANCEL

Enter the level 5 password.

Monitor Screen
Window:
Level 5 Security level 5

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-19


12-4 VT System Parameters

Security
Screen Explanation
LevelStatus

Entry of the password is not


Monitor Screen required when turning the
Level 5 window display OFF.
Window:
Security level 5

Window display OFF switch

The security level of the


Monitor Screen base screen is "1" as
Base: display of the window
Level 1 Security level 1 screen is set to OFF.
Modify End Page selection switch

A level 5 password must be en-


tered again to display a security Entry of the password is not
level 5 window again. required when switching the
page to a screen having a
lower or equal security level.
A password need not be entered
again to display a screen having
a security level lower than the
currently displayed screen.

12
RESOURCE

Initial Screen

OFF (level 0)
Monitor

A level 1 or higher password


must be entered again to display
a security level 1 window again.

Point When the screens with higher safety level are displayed, the screens with lower safety level
can be displayed freely. If you don't want the others to access the screen, don't maintain the
screens with higher safety level, but switch to the screens with lower safety level.

12-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-4 VT System Parameters

Parts
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Parts(A)
Set the behavior of parts.

Item Description
When entered through numerical keypad and keyboard in the
Key entry : Follow "Shift
Numerical displays/Text entry mode after selection, the parts are displayed on edge,
display" settings for poarts at
display similar to edge display (left-hand/right-hand) set in the
text entry position
"Settings" tab of numerical value display•character display.
Key entry : When apply key is

Numerical display
pressed without entering
values, return to display
If there isn't entered value in numerical display parts after
selection, it's returned to display mode after pressing "OK"
button.
12
mode

RESOURCE
Treat under flow of floating After selection, the floating point real number is treated as "0" in
point real number as zero the case of underflow.
Key entry : Do not change to After selection in the active mode, the display mode is not
display mode when apply activated, and active mode will be maintained even if pressing
key is pressed "OK" key entry switch.
If pressing "Switch Kanji conversion mode" key entry switch after
Text display Key entry : Kanji conversion
selection, it's switched to Kanji conversion mode.
After selected, even if there is no input character on the
Key entry : blank character
character display part, if you press "OK", NUL (00H) will still be
string may be input
written.
Select the scroll speed of message display parts and alarm
Message/Alarm display Scroll speed
display parts from "Low-speed/medium-speed/high-speed".
When multiple functions are set to switches and lamp switching
Switch/Lamp switch When are set multiple
parts, select from "Optimizing write PLC/processing as per the
part*1 functions
sequence of set functions".
It's not related to data length of Basic device after selection. The
Indirect reference Index address to be referenced is preset according to the value of Index
Independent on data length
action*2 device.
(Changed to the same behavior of VT3 if not selected.)
when PLC data folder is The buzz generated from PLC data folder can be canceled after
PLC Data Folder
excuted, buzter doesn't sound selection.
*1 After "Processing as per the sequence of set functions" is selected, the operation starts basically from the top.
But, the behavior shall be confirmed through commissioning.
*2 "6-8 Indirect Reference", page 6-43

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-21


12-4 VT System Parameters

Changing display character strings


Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Display character string display ON/OFF(L)
Set the switching function of display character strings.

Item Description
Use change display
After selection, you can use the switching function of display character strings.
character string function
Usechange Default display character
display Set the display character string ID displayed when VT3 power is turned ON.
string ID
character
Display character string ID
string After selection, switch character string ID through the value (0 to 7) of PLC device.
specification*1
function
Target word device*2 Set the word device specifying display character string ID.
Comment*3 Set the comment of display character string IDs.
*1 character strings will not changed over when values out of range are specified. When the unit starts, the
character string ID defaulted will be displayed if values out of range are specified.
*2 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37

12 *3 The comment cannot be transferred to the main machine when target VT belongs to VT3 series. In addition,
the screen data written into memory card isn't included.
RESOURCE

Reference "11-6 Changing Display Text Strings", page 11-18

Operation Log
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Operating log(G)
Set for operating log.
"11-11 Operation Log", page 11-44

12-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-4 VT System Parameters

KL
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->KL(K)
Set for KL.

Item Description
KL After selection, KL can be connected to RS-485 port(PORT4).
Send address Set the sending address(00 to FE)(only even number can be set).
Number of send addresses Set the number of sending address(00H to 100H)(only even number can be set).
Receive Address Set the receiving address(00 to FE)(only even number can be set).
Number of receive addresses Set the number of receiving address(00H to 100H)(only even number can be set).
Select the communication speed of KL from "156kbit/s", "625kbit/s", "2.5Mbit/s" and
KL

Communication speed
"5Mbit/s".
FINAL Select in the case of FINAL.
Select in the case of ERR HOLD(the value of output relay is maintained during off-
ERR HOLD
line error).
KL address setting software KL address setting software is activated by clicking "KL address setup software
tool start-up".

Point • KL can not be used by VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).


• When PORT4 is used to connect PLC and thermoregulator, etc, KL cannot be applied.
• About settings of KL
"Chapter 7 KL Link", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

12

RESOURCE

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-23


12-4 VT System Parameters

Barcode
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Barcode(B)
Set the communication conditions according to the barcode to be connected.
For the communication settings of Vendons and models, refer to "6-3 Barcode Reader", VT3 Series Hardware
Manual.

Item Description
Barcode Connects barcode by using PORT3.
Baud Rate Sets the baud rate.
Data Bits Sets the data bits.
Stop Bits Sets the stop bit.
Parity Sets the parity.
Barcode

Read mode Sets auto identification or manual setting of header and delimiter.
Header Sets the header.
Delimiter Sets the delimiter.
CheckSum Sets the checksum.
Barcode is energized by PORT3 after selection.
Supply power to barcode
Please use it only in BL-80RK/210RK.

Point • Bar code can not be used by VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).


• Barcode cannot be set when PORT3 is used for connection to PLC, etc.

12 • The data from barcode is saved to Link device.


"6-6 About Devices", page 6-25
RESOURCE

12-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-4 VT System Parameters

Memory Card
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Memory card(F)
Sets the file format and file name saved to the memory card.

12

RESOURCE
Item Description
Hard Copy image
Image saving Select the file format for image saving from "Bitmap/JPEG".
Video capture images
mode Sets the picture quality when JPEG is selected.
form screen image
Ratio of consumed After selection, the ratio of utilization of memory size is saved to the set devices
Memory size
memory size *2 in the increment of 1%.
Mode*1 Select from "VT2 compatible mode/VT3 mode".
Alarm Log
Trend Graph Set if date/time and character string are added to the saved file names in VT3
Worksheet Related mode.
Save file name Video Capture The saved file names can be confirmed through preview.
form screen
Set if date/time and character string are added to the saved file names. The
Operation Log
saved file names can be confirmed through preview.
*1 The number of processable files increases considerably in VT3 mode than in VT2 compatible mode.
For the file folder structure and file name under VT2 compatible mode/VT3 mode, refer to "6-1 Memory
Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual.
*2 Selectable from "PLC device/Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37

Point Memory card can not be used by VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-25


12-4 VT System Parameters

Printer
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Printer(P)
Sets the printer.

Item Description
Printer Type *1 Sets the printer modes connected to VT3.
Select output targets from "Printer/memory card/printer•memory card". If
Output target *2 memory card is used, VT3 screen and form screen are saved to the memory
Common settings

card in Windows bitmap or JPEG file format.


Paper Size Select the size of printing paper from "A4/A5/B5".
IP Address When the printer type is set to "ESC/P-R Ether" or "ESC/Page Ether", set the IP address of the printer.
The port No. used when the printer type is set to "ESC/P-R Ether" or "ESC/Page Ether".
Port No.
The port number is fixed at 515 and cannot be changed.
Auto Cut If thermal printer is used, select the method of cutting paper from "little residual/full cut".
Other than printer mode PictBridge: sets the timeout for printing.
12 Advanced settings

Print Direction
Printer Type PictBridge : Sets the file format for printing.
Select the printing direction from "Vertical/horizontal".
Printer Color Mode Sets color printing or black-and-white gray printing.
RESOURCE

Hard copy setting

Black and white tone Sets if black and white colors are reversed for printing during black-and-white printing.
Print Quality Select the printing quality form "Standard/high-speed".
Select the printing size(printing magnification) from "2 times", "3/2 times", "1 time",
Print size "3/4 time" and "1/2 times". The selectable printing magnification may differ from VT3
models, paper size and paper direction, etc.
Top Sets the printing residual white(top).
Margin*3
Left Sets the printing residual white(left).
Alarm ID Sets alarm ID(0 to 3).
print settings
Alarm log

Enter the title character strings when paper printing is started. The character strings that
Title
can be entered may contain up to 36 half-width characters and 18 full-angle characters.
Print setting
Number of print Sets the maximum number of alarm history to be printed(1 to 512).
Display level Alarm level is displayed after selection.
*1 Refer to the following descriptions about printer types.
"6-6 Printer Unit" , VT3 Series Hardware Manual
*2 When "Printer type" is thermal printer and memory card is selected as "Output target", the form screen can
only be saved to the memory card.

Reference • Printing using switches


"Print", page 8-20
• Printing using function controls by device
"Print", page 9-126
• Execute printing using global function control
"12-7 Global Function Control", page 12-43
• Printing using system memory area
Chapter 14 "SYSTEM MEMORY AREA"
• About the details of form printing.
"11-5 Form Printing", page 11-13
12-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
12-4 VT System Parameters

*3 The setting range of residual white may differ from varied "Printer type".
Printer Type Setting range of residual white
ESC/P Raster Top 3 to 999mm Left 3 to 999mm
ESC/P Raster2 Top 5 to 999mm Left 5 to 999mm
LIPS IV Raster Top 6 to 999mm Left 6 to 999mm
PictBridge* Top 5 to 999mm Left 5 to 999mm
ESC/P-R Ether Top 5 to 999mm Left 5 to 999mm
ESC/Page Ether Top 5 to 999mm Left 5 to 999mm
* The set residual white and actual residual white may differ from varied printers.

Point • Printer can not be used by VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).


• The "ESC/P-R Ether" and "ESC/Page Ether" printer types can only be used when the VT3
series and printer are connected via Ethernet.
The VT3 system program must also be Ver. 4.81 or later.

Video
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Video(I)

Set the capture target, etc, triggered by video capture.

Item Description
Sets the video capture trigger of video units (VT3-VD4/VD1) to capture targets 12
during video capture.
Capture target Internally : select the capture target.

RESOURCE
Externally*2 : specify the capture target (video entry) through the value (1 to 4) of
Video capture PLC device. RGB cannot be specified.
trigger Mode Select the image size captured from "Capture by display size/capture by initial size*3".
Display date After selection, date/time is overlapped on the captured images.
When this checkbox is marked, an image of placed parts also is displayed
Overlap parts
overlapped on the video display area during video capture.
Set if the images from video capture are saved to a memory card, or output to a
Video capture output destination*1
printer that supports PictBridge, ESC/P-R or ESC/Page.
*1 The following aspects shall be considered when the output target from vide capture is set to "Printer".
• Set the printer type in VT system settings to PictBridge, ESC/P-R Ether or ESC/Page Ether.
• VT2-E2/P2, VT3-E3 is required.
• According to the display size of printers and video display parts, the edge of captured images may be cut
during printing.
• The printing direction of captured images may vary from different display sizes of printers and video display parts.
*2 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37
*3 The so-called initial size refers to the maximum dimension that can be set in the display area of video display parts.

Reference "6-4 Video Unit", VT3 Series Hardware Manual


"6-6 Printer Unit", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

Point • Color number during video capture


When no display is selected for overlapped parts: 260,000 colors
When display is selected form overlapped parts : 65536 colors.
• Vedio can not be set by VT3-W4T (A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-27


12-4 VT System Parameters

VNC Server
Resources(R) -> VT system settings(S) -> VNC server(N)
To setup VNC server. Select a VNC No. to setup it.

Item Description
IP address To setup the IP address of VNC server.
Port No. To setup the port No. of VNC server.
To setup timeout value, password, and server image color in the "Advanced settings"
Advanced settings
window.

 Advanced settings

12
RESOURCE

Item Description
Timeout value To setup the timeout value (1 to 30s) for connecting with VNC server. (Default value: 5s)
Password Check it to setup password (max. 30 half-width characters).
Server image color To select the image color of VNC server. (Default value: 32768 colors)

12-28 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-4 VT System Parameters

PLC time synchronization


Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->PLC time synchronization(S)
Set the PLC time to the VT3 Series calendar timer.

Item Description
PLC When using the MultiTalk function, select the PLC to set its time.
Adjust the clock time of PLC to calendar
When selected, set the PLC time to the VT3 calendar timer.
timer
Set when to set the time.
Fixed cycle (initial value): The time is set at a fixed cycle.
Trigger
Up: The time is set when the device changes OFFON.
Down: The time is set when the device changes ONOFF.
When "Fixed cycle" is selected for the trigger, set the cycle to set the time.
• 1 minute
• 10 minutes
Fixed cycle Cycle
• 30 minutes
• 1 hour (initial value)

12
• 3 hours
• 8 hours
• 1 day
When "Up/Down" is selected for the trigger, set the device to determine when
Trigger bit device*1

RESOURCE
to set the time.
Up/Down When checked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3 recognizes the
trigger.
Reset trigger bit
When the trigger is "Up": Reset when ONOFF
When the trigger is "Down": Reset when OFFON
When error of RTC voltage drop occurs in When checked, the PLC time data is repaired by setting the VT3 time data
PLC, the time of PLC is recovered when a time abnormality error occurs on the PLC.

*1 Selectable from "PLC device/cell"


"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-29


12-4 VT System Parameters

Point • PLC time synchronization can only be used when the target PLC is KV-7000 Series,
KV-5500/5000/3000 Series and KV Nano Series.
• The repair function can only be used when the target PLC is the KV Nano Series.
• When a connection is possible with multiple PLCs, PLC time synchronization can only be
used for station number 0.
• PLC time synchronization cannot be used with a VT2 MultiLink slave station.
• PLC time synchronization cannot be used when connected over DT routed through
communication.
• Time synchronization is not executed during the following intervals.
• When switching to system mode (including displaying the system mode screen)
• During PLC data folder execution
• While data is being sent and received between the PC (VT STUDIO) and the VT3
• While using the remote COM port tool (when the VT3 communication is stopped)
• While displaying the password input screen

VT Timer
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Internal timer(T)
Sets internal timer.

12
Item Description
Select timer ID (0 to 3)
Timer ID
In addition, the target device for timer IDs is displayed.
Use timer After selection, use the timer IDs.
RESOURCE

Sets the maximum value of timing counter according to various timer IDs.
Maximum timer count
(1 to 65535)
Sets the cycle of timing counter (in the increment of 0.1s) according to various timer IDs.
Timer count period
(0.1 to 3600.0)
According to various timer IDs, select "Auto return/no return" from ring counter
Restart
(automatically returned to 0 when timing counter reaches the maximum value).
According to various timer IDs, you can control (run/stop) the timer through PLC device
Timer control
Timer after selection.
control Sets the timer control bit device according to various timer IDs. When the "Browse"
Control bit device*1
button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
According to various timer IDs, you can clear the timer through PLC device after
Clear Timer
selection.
Sets the trigger bit device for clearing timer according to various timer IDs.
Clear
Trigger bit device *1 When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
Timer
settings" window.
According to various timer IDs, the trigger bit can be reset through PLC device clearing
Reset trigger bit
timer after selection.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37

Reference Current value of internal timer


"VT internal special devices (word devices)", page 6-30

Point Timing counter cycle may differ from actual period due to error caused by the influence of
VT3.

12-30 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-4 VT System Parameters

Reference

Restart not performed


Maximum timer count: 99
Timer count period: 1 sec

Count value 0 1 98 99 99

Time 0s 1s 2s 98s 99s 100s 101s

Restart is performed
Maximum timer count: 99
Timer count period: 1 sec

Count value 0 1 98 99 0

Time 0s 1s 2s 98s 99s 100s 101s

Automatically returns to 0 at this point.

Other
Resource(R)->VT system settings(S)->Other(O)
Set specified key entry targets, key repeat, notify Global window error, key protect, bit page switching device and
DATA BUILDER communication timeout, etc.

12

RESOURCE

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-31


12-4 VT System Parameters

Item Description
After selection, specify key entry parts switched to active mode through
Specify key entry destination
the value saved into PLC target word device.
Specify key entry Sets the word device of specified key entry parts switched to active
destination mode in key entry sequence. A device having 2 words is used. When
Target word device *2
the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
"Device settings" window.
Key repeat Key repeat is allowable after selection.
Key repeat *4
Key repeat start time Sets the starting time of key repeat in the increment of 0.1s. (0.2 to 1.0s)
Global window the error relationship of Global window is notified to Notification bit
Global window Notify error device.
Notify error Sets the Notification bit device. Click the "Browse" button.
Notification bit device *2
You can set through "Device setting" window.
After selected, set key protection device, only specific VT3 key input is
Key Protection
allowed.
Key Protection *3
Key Protected Set key protection device (initial No.). Click (browse) button to set in
Device *2 [Device Setup] window.
Sets the device of bit page switching (starting No.) used for system
memory area is in MT compatible mode. When the "Browse" button is
Target word device *2
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings"
Bit page switching window.
Sets the word of bit page switching used for system memory area is in
Number of words
MT compatible mode. (0 to 16)
DATA BUILDER timeout Timeout time Sets the timeout of DATA BUILDER (4 to 30) when DB router is used.
When toggling pages, update
After selection, the drawing of every component is updated during page
Drawing processing drawing for each part
switching.
respectively
PLC_A/B
connection
After selection, PLC connection setting/connection state can be used.
PLC_A/B PLC No.
PLC connection settings
connection
setting/
PLC No. Target word Sets the device (starting No.) used in PLC connection setting/connection
Connection State *5
settings Device *2 state.
Updating
Sets the Updating cycle (5 to 120s).
cycle
Device transfer is with highly As compared to the others, the communication frequency of device transfer
Device transfer
priority during performing increases after selection.

12 Page/window switching
Page/window will be switched
after pressing touch control
switch.
After selected, page/window can be switched even if touch control switch is
pressed.
RESOURCE

Expansion of the image The upper limit of the image After this option is selected, the upper limit of number of available images
number number is expanded will be extended from 10000 to 20000.
*1 "Switching the Key Entry Part Mode by PLC Devices", page 6-17
*2 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37
*3 Key protection for multilink
"Chapter 19 MultiLink", "Chapter 20 VT2 MultiLink", and "Chapter 21 MegaLink" of VT5 Series/VT3
Series/DT Series PLC Connection Manual
*4 For the details, refer to "Key repeat", page 12-32.
*5 For the details, refer to "PLC connection setting/connection state", page 12-33.

Reference "Device settings" window


"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37

Key repeat
For example, if key repeat (starting time 0.5s) is preset when characters are entered into text display through
keyboard, "A" is entered when key A is pressed and released within 0.5s.

If pressing and holding key A over 0.5s, "AA•••" is entered repetitively until the finger releases.

For example, when alarm display (alarm history) is displayed through / ( scroll up/scroll down), one line scrolls
if key repeat (starting time 0.5s) is preset and / key is released within 0.5s.
If pressing and holding / over 0.5s, continuous scroll is performed within the hold-on time.

12-32 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-4 VT System Parameters

PLC connection setting/connection state


For example, VT3:PLC is connected in 1:N in the case of Ethernet connection and thermoregulator connection.
4 continuous words are occupied starting from the device set through target word device.
.

Description
Device No.
Station No. Description Higher-level word (15) <--> Lower-level word (0)
Leading No. +0 Connection State
0 to 15 Station No. 15 <--> Station No. 0
Leading No. 1 Connection setting
Leading No. 2 Connection State
16 to 31 Station No. 31 <--> Station No. 16
Leading No. 3 Connection setting

Connection state: confirm which PLC is connected to VT3.


0 (OFF) : not connected 1 (ON) : connection

Connection setting : set which PLC is connected to VT3.


0 (OFF) : cut 1 (ON) : connection

This is described in the following examples.

PLC_A
VT3
PLC_B

Specified PLC_B connection station No. VT3 internal special device

(1) PLC_B
Station No. 0 to 15 Connection state DM00000
Station No. 0 to 15 Connection state MW00D8

12
Station No. 16 to 31 Connection state DM00002
Station No. 16 to 31 Connection state MW00DA

RESOURCE
PLC_B
Station No. 0 to 15 Connection state DM00001
Station No. 0 to 15 Connection state MW00D9
Station No. 16 to 31 Connection state DM00003 (2) Station No. 16 to 31 Connection state MW00DB

Updating cycle

(1) The value of VT3 internal special device is written into PLC.
(2) PLC value is read into VT3, and reflected by the internal special device.
"VT internal special devices (word devices)", page 6-30

Point • Donít write into connection setting of internal special device when PLC connection setting/
connection state is used.
• The defaut value of device (MW00D0/MW00D2/MW00D8/MW00DA) in PLC_A/B connection
state is turned to the value of device (MW00D1/MW00D3/MW00D9/MW00DB) in PLC_A/B
connection setting.
• The station No. of specified screen data is reflected in the defaut value of device (MW00D1/
MW00D3/MW00D9/MW00DB) in PLC_A/B connection setting.
• Updating device (MW00D0/MW00D2/MW00D8/MW00DA) in PLC_A/B
connection state requires timeoutx(retry frequency+1).
• The fault of other station numbers sometimes cannot be detected in the case of
communication failure of 1 station No. However, it can be detected if the detected station
No. is shut through PLC connection setting.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-33


12-5 Windows Font
Windows fonts can be used in numerical value display, text display, message display and alarm display parts, etc.
When Windows fonts are used in text display parts, the character to be used shall be logged-on through Windows
fonts in the system setting.

Reference • Part that can be set with Windows fonts Text register
Log on the character to be used through
Text display
Windows fonts in the system setting.
Numerical value display, message display,
alarm display, meters, statistical chart, trend Automatically log on with character.
graph and XY graph.

• The type and size of Windows font to use is configured in each part.

Windows Font Setting


You can display and list the Windows fonts in the system setting, and register separately the intended character in register
character ID0 to ID7.

List of register character ID

1 The list of register character ID is displayed.


The list of register character ID is displayed by the following methods.
• By clicking "Windows font" in "System setting" tab in "Workspace".
• Select "Resource(R)"->"Windows font(F)" from the menu in that order.

2 Register the character to be used in the register character IDs.

12
RESOURCE

Item Description
Back to edit screen Click to return to the edit screen.
Edit Display register character screen used for the selected register character IDs.
Cut Cut the contents of selected ID line.
Copy Copy the contents of selected ID line.
Paste Paste the contents of copied ID line to the selected ID line.
Delete Delete the contents of selected ID line.
Import *1 Import the register characters from other VTS files(*.vs* ,*.vu*) in all IDs or ID unit.
ID Display ID of register characters.
Comment Display the comment of ID. Double-click to shift to the register text screen with selected ID.
Available Windows font Click to display "Use level of Windows font resources", and confirm the fonts to be used and the
resources use level of fonts (KB) through the list.

*1 "Entry of register characters", page 12-37

Reference • Continuous lines can be selected by clicking ID line while key is pressed down.
• ID No. can be selected by pressing key + A.
• Discontinuous lines can be selected by clicking ID line while key is pressed down.
• Continuous lines in the dragging range can be selected by selecting and dragging ID lines.

12-34 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-5 Windows Font

Register character

Register the characters of IDs used by Windows fonts.

1 Display register text screen


Register text screen can be displayed by the following methods.
• By clicking "Windows fonts" on "System setting" tab of "Workspace", and clicking character ID for register.
• By selecting ID lines from the list of register character IDs, and then clicking
• By double-clicking ID lines from the list of register character IDs.
• After "Windows fonts" is selected from the setting window of text display parts, ID select ID from "register character
ID", and click "Character register" button.
After the setting contents are changed in parts attribute, confirmation message will be displayed. After clicking
"Yes" button, register text screen is displayed.

2 Register the character to be used.


12

RESOURCE

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-35


12-5 Windows Font

Item Description
Return to registered
Click to return to Windows font screen.
character list
Display the comment of selected ID. The comment cannot be directly entered (up t 31 half-width
Comment
characters).
Overall registration You can register entire character after selection.
Individual
After selection, you can enter individually the character in the individual register column.
registvation
Individual
Display the characters for register. You can directly enter the characters or drag and enter
registvation Individual
the text file. In addition, characters can be entered by reading text files when "register by text
register column
file" is used.
Character quantiy Display the character for register.
Conform registerd
Click to display "Confirm register character" window *1.
character
Click to display "Open files" window. Read automatically the text files selected by "Open
Register from text file
files" window, and display at ìIndividual register columnî.

*1 "Confirm registered character", page 12-36

Confirm registered character


After the characters for register are entered into "Confirm register character" window, you can confirm if register
characters are contained. If no such character is logged on, it can be added into register character.

Item Description
registered character You can directly enter the characters for register confirmation, or drag and enter the text file.
confirmation column In addition, characters can be entered by reading text files when "register by text file" is used.

12 register from text file


Click to display "Open files" window. Read automatically the text files selected by "Open files"
window, and display at "Individual register column".
After clicking, you can confirm if the characters displayed in register character column
Confirm
contain the register characters. The confirmed results are displayed in the form of prompting.
RESOURCE

Close "Confirm register character" window is closed after clicking.

12-36 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-5 Windows Font

Entry of register characters

Copy and paste the register characters from other VTS files ( * .vs * , * .vu * ).

1 Click "Enter" button in "list of register character ID".


"Enter register character" window is displayed.

Item Description
File Name Displays the name of the file to be imported as a full path.
When the register characters to be entered are in other files, click to display "Enter opened
Select file
files" window and select the files.
ID Display ID of register characters.
Comment Displays the comment of register character ID added on the entered files.

2 Select ID lines to be entered, and click "OK" button.


Enter the register characters of selected ID.

Point The register characters to be entered are overlapped on the same ID.

12

RESOURCE

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-37


12-6 Device Transfer

Overview of Device Transfer


The device transfer indicates the function of writing device value of traditional source in fixed time through the transfer target device.
Device transfer can be performed between PLC_A device, PLC_B device and VT3 internal device/Link device.

PLC_A device Internal device


/Link device

PLC_B device

Point PLC_B can not be used by VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).

Settings of device transfer


The contents of device transfer are set for every device transfer No..
1 Select "Resource(R)"->"Device transfer(E)" from the menu in that order, or click "Device transfer" on
"System setting" tab in the workspace.

12 2 Click device transfer No. for setting from "Device transfer" on "System setting" tab in the workspace.
New device transfer No. is added by the following methods.
RESOURCE

• Click "Device transfer" on "System setting" tab in the workspace, and then click "New".
Select device transfer No. through displayed "Specified device transfer No." window.

3 Sets the contents of every device transfer No..

12-38 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-6 Device Transfer

Item Description
Back to edit screen Click to return to the edit screen.
Display the comment of device transfer No..
Comment
The comment cannot be directly entered (up to 31 half-width characters).
Set the startup trigger of device transfer.
Auto : VT3 automatically performs device transfer as per fixed
frequency.
Device transfer Bit device : device transfer is executed using OFF->ON change of bit device
setup of PLC.
Trigger Internal timer : device transfer is executed within the set time interval of starting
cycle.
Receiving : device transfer is executed when data is received from barcode
Device (when written into Link device).
transfer setup When device transfer startup trigger selects "Auto", the communication frequency is
Processing cycle selected from "High-speed (device transfer priority)/Medium speed/standard/low-
trigger speed (screen updating priority)".
When device transfer startup trigger selects "Bit device", the bit device for trigger is
Trigger bit
set. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the
Device *1
"Device settings" window.
When this checkbox is marked, the trigger bit device is reset after the VT3
Reset trigger bit
recognizes the trigger.
When device transfer startup trigger selects ìInternal timerî, the starting cycle is set in the
Startup cycle
increment of second (1 to 32767).
Date type Select the data type of data transfer from "Bit/word/two-word".
Transfer data Count Set continuous data.
register Transfer target Displays the transfer source device. After double-clicking, the transfer source device
device *2 can be set from "Device setting" window.
column
Transfer target Displays the transfer target device. After double-clicking, the transfer target device
device *1 can be set from "Device setting" window.
Add new data. No adding is allowed when 8 groups of transfer data have already
Add
logged on.
Delete Delete data of selected lines.
Up Move up the data of selected lines.
Down Move down the data of selected lines.
End bit
Device 1*1
When device transfer ends after selection, set the end bit device.
End bit
Notify end
Device 2*1
Reset end bit
before execution
When notifying end after selection, reset temporarily end bit device and then set up. 12
Error bit

RESOURCE
Device 1*1 If error occurs during device transfer after selection, set error bit device.
Error bit When device transfer ends normally, reset the error bit of error bit device.
Notify error
Device 2*1
Reset error bit When notifying error after selection, reset temporarily error bit device and then set
before execution up.
*1 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37
*2 Selectable from "PLC device / Cell"
"6-7 Setting of Devices", page 6-37

Reference • Adjust device transfer communication frequency


"Other", page 12-31

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-39


12-6 Device Transfer

Restrictions/Notices for Device Transfer


• Device transfer No. can be only set to 0 to 15 (16) since it's intended for setting and executing device transfer
units.
• 1 trigger is set for every device transfer No..
• Up to 8 groups of transfer sources/transfer targets can be set in one device transfer No..
• Every device transfer No. can transfer up to 128 data.
• Up to 2048(=16x128) data can be transferred.
• No device transfer is executed in the next phase.
• During switching system mode (including the state displaying the system mode screen)
• Execute PLC data folder in progress
• PC(VT STUDIO) and VT3 are receiving and sending data
• Remote COM tools are being used (disabling of VT3)
• Password entry screen is being displayed.

• Summary sheet of device number and behavior when continuous number N is to be set.
Transfer source device Transfer source device
Date type Number of Number of Remarks
Device type Device type
devices devices
The devices outside of bit device
Bit Bit N Bit N
cannot be selected.
Word N
Word N 32 bits Superior word is often filled by 0.
N
Device (Example 1)
Word
Word N Superior word is deleted. (Example 2)
32 bits
N 32 bits Superior word is often filled by 0.
Device N
Device (Example 3)
Word 2N
Word 2N 32 bits
N Combine 2 words. (Example 4)
Device
double word
Word 2N Separate into two words (Example 5)
32 bits
N 32 bits
12
Device N
Device

Example 1 Word type Transfer from word device->32 bit device


RESOURCE

Since the data type is set to word, and transfer target is 32bit device, the insufficient superior word
is filled by 0.

16 bit device 32 bit device

DM0 0x0123 0x00000123 T0

DM1 0x4567 0x00004567 T1

DM2 0x89ab N transfer 0x000089ab T2

DM3 0xcdef 0x0000cdef T3

N N

Superior word is 0.

12-40 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-6 Device Transfer

Example 2 Word type transfer from 32 bit device-> word device


Since the data type is set to word, transfer source is 32bit device, and transfer target is word device,
the superior word is deleted.

32bit device 16 bit device

T0 0x01230123 0x0123 DM0

T1 0x45674567 0x4567 DM1

T2 0x89ab89ab N transfer 0x89ab DM2

T3 0xcdefcdef 0xcdef DM3

N N

The superior
word is deleted.

Example 3 Word type transfer from 32 bit device->32 bit device


Since the data type is set to word, the superior word is deleted, and the insufficient superior word is
filled by 0.

32bit device 32bit device

T0 0x01230123 0x00000123 T0

T1 0x45674567 0x00004567 T1

T2 0x89ab89ab N transfer 0x000089ab T2

T3 0xcdefcdef 0x0000cdef T3
12

RESOURCE
N N

The superior
word is deleted. The superior word is 0.

Example 4 Two-word type transfer from word device->32 bit device


Since the data type is two-word, and transfer source is word device, 2 words are combined together.

16bit device 32bit device

DM0 0x0123 0x45670123 T0

DM1 0x4567 N transfer 0xcdef89ab T1

DM2 0x89ab
N
DM3 0xcdef

2N Combine 2 words

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-41


12-6 Device Transfer

Example 5 Two-word type transfer from 32 bit device-> word device


Since the data type is two-word, and transfer source is word device, 2 words are separated for
saving purpose.

32bit device 16bit device

T0 0x45670123 0x0123 DM0

T1 0xcdef89ab N transfer 0x4567 DM1

0x89ab DM2
N

0xcdef DM3
Separate two
words into 2 words.
2N

• The following settings describe the example of time sequence.


• Select bit device in "Device transfer startup trigger"
• Select again "Reset trigger bit"
• Select again "Reset end bit prior to execution" for notifying end.

Trigger execution VT3 reset

Trigger bit

12
Read Write
Other Trigger Notify Notify Other
Communication reset
transfer transfer
communication end reset source data target data end communication
RESOURCE

Notify end

Notify end

VT3 reset

12-42 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-7 Global Function Control

Overview of Global Function Control


"Device-Basicd functional control" in the basic parts are executed by turning trigger bit device ON (OFF), when the
screen placed with this functional control is displayed.
Global function control is used to execute the function of this part (device-Basicd functional control) independently of
screen display.

Specifications
• Up to 64 functions can be set.
• The settable functions are the same as "Device-Basicd functional control" in basic parts.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices", page 9-111

Global Function Control Settings


1 Select "Resource(R)"->"Global function control(O)" from the menu in that order, or click "Setting" in "Global
function control" of "System setting" tab in the workspace.

2 Set functions.

12

RESOURCE
Item Description
Function Displays the already set functions.
Trigger bit device Displays the triggered bit device that runs the already set functions.
Comment Comment can be entered (up to 31 half-width characters).
Add Add functions.
Delete Delete functions of the selected lines.
Setting *1 Set functions of the selected lines.
Up Move up the functions of selected lines.
Down Move down the functions of selected lines.
*1 For the details, refer to "9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices", page 9-111.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-43


12-7 Global Function Control

Restrictions/Notices for Global Function Control


• Global function control is not executed in the next phase.
• During switching system mode (including the state displaying the system mode screen)
• Execute PLC data folder
• PC(VT STUDIO) and VT3 are receiving and sending data
• Remote COM tools are being used (disabling of VT3)
• Password entry screen is being displayed.

• For the notices concerning settable functions, refer to "9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices", page 9-111.

• When page switching mode is set to specify page No. using page switching function:
The trigger is set to  () when the trigger bit device is ON (OFF), and the Basic screen of specified page No.. is
still displayed.

• When local window display function is set:


The trigger is set to () when trigger bit device is ON (OFF). Local window in ON or OFF state is still displayed
according to ON/OFF setting.

• When global window display function is set:


The trigger is set to () when trigger bit device is ON (OFF). Global window in ON or OFF state is still displayed
according to ON/OFF setting.
• To check the data set up via "Resources(R)" -> "Data check(D)" -> "Global function control(G)".
"12-9 Data Check", page 12-46

12
RESOURCE

12-44 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-8 Cross-reference

Displaying Cross-references
Resources(R) -> Cross-reference (R)
Displays as a list which target device (control or function) device Nos. are set as.

Item Description
Page No. Selects the page to be displayed as a list.
Window Selects the window to be displayed as a list.
PLC Select PLC when MultiTalk function is used.
PLC No. Select station No. in the case of Ethernet connection.
Device type Select the device type to display as a list.
When this checkbox is marked, only the leading device is displayed for settings that use
Show only start device
multiple devices.
Device No. Displays device Nos.
B/W B: Bit device W: Displays the word device.
Page No. Displays the page No. (global window No. ).
B: Basic 1: Window 1
Window 2: Window 2
G: Global window
3: Window 3
P: form screen. 12
Label Displays the label.

RESOURCE
When this item is clicked, the "Export cross-reference" window is displayed, and you
Export CSV file
export cross-references by "CSV file (MBCS)(*.csv)" or "Text file (UNICODE)(*.txt)".

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-45


12-9 Data Check

All Data Check


Resources(R) -> Data check(D) -> All data(A)
Checks whether or not the file currently being edited has exceeded restrictions.

When restrictions are not exceeded

Item Description
Result Displays the results of the data check.
Displays the total number of pages (maximum 1024 pages) of the file currently being
Number of pages
edited.
Displays the total number of global windows (maximum 1000 screens) of the file
Number of global windows
currently being edited.
Displays the total number of form screens (maximum 16 screens) of the file currently
Number of form screens
being edited.

12 Number of screens
Displays the total number of screens (maximum 1024 screens) of the file currently
being edited.
Detailed Description

The total number of images (max. 10000 or 20000) for the file currently being edited is
Number of Images
RESOURCE

displayed.
Displays the total size of the screen data of the file currently being edited. (unit:
Screen Data
Kbytes)
Image data Displays the total size of the image data of the file currently being edited. (unit: Kbytes)
Message data Displays the total message data size of the file currently being edited. (unit: Kbytes)
Screen data

Displays the total data size of overlapping objects of the file currently being edited.
Overlapping data
(unit: Kbytes)
Displays the total size of the system data of the file currently being edited. (unit:
System data
Kbytes)
Windows font Data Displays the data length of Windows fonts of the file being edited (unit: Kbyte).
Device comment data Displays the data length of device comment of the file being edited. (unit: Kbyte).
Displays the total size of the communications tables of the file currently being edited.
Communication table
(unit: Kbytes)
Displays the number of VT3 data blocks used by the file currently being executed.
Used data blocks
One block is 128 Kbytes
Details of restrictions
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens", page 2-14

12-46 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-9 Data Check

In case of beyond the limit


In case of any over-limit page, global window, form screen, and global function control, data check is stopped and the
Data Check window is displayed.

Item Description
Displays the results of the data check. Displays the page No., global window No.or
Result
form screen page No. and items where restrictions are exceeded.
Reference data Displays the number of referenced data currently set to the screen.
PLC devices Displays the number of PLC devices currently set to the screen.
Number of control objects Displays the number of control objects currently placed in the screen.
Displays the data size of overlapping objects currently used in the screen. (unit:
Key entry parts
bytes)
Displays the data size of overlapping objects currently used in the screen. (unit:
Overlapping data
Detailed Description

bytes)

12
Screen data Displays the size of screen data currently used in the screen. (unit: bytes)
Basic Displays the check results on the Basic.
Screen Window 1 Displays the check results on window 1.

RESOURCE
(Basic,Window Window 2 Displays the check results on window 2.
1 to 3) Window 3 Displays the check results on window 3.
System Displays the check results on the system.
Global window Window Displays the check results on the currently selected global windows.
Printer from Printer from Displays the check results on the currently selected form screens.
Displays the total check results of the Basic, windows 1 to 3and system (currently
Total
selected global windows and printerforms).

Point Numerical values displayed in red indicate items for which a restriction isexceeded.
Delete the number of placed objects from the page in which restrictions areexceeded so that
the number of objects is within the restriction.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens", page 2-14

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-47


12-9 Data Check

Current Page Check


Resources(R) -> Data check(D) -> Current page(P)
Checks whether or not data in the page, global window screen or form screen currentlybeing edited exceeds the
restrictions.

12
Item Description
RESOURCE

Displays the results of the data check. Displays item swhere restrictions are exceeded in the
Result
event of an error. When there are multiple errors, displays one of these errors.
Reference data Displays the number of referenced data currently set to the screen.
PLC devices Displays the number of PLC devices currently set to the screen.
Number of control objects Displays the number of control objects currently placed in the screen.
Key entry parts Displays the data size of overlapping objects currently used in the screen. (unit: bytes)
Overlapping data Displays the data size of overlapping objects currently used in the screen. (unit: bytes)
Detailed Description

Screen data Displays the size of screen data currently used in the screen. (unit: bytes)
Basic Displays the check results on the Basic.
Screen Window 1 Displays the check results on window 1.
(Basic,Window Window 2 Displays the check results on window 2.
1 to 3) Window 3 Displays the check results on window 3.
System Displays the check results on the system.
Global window Window Displays the check results on the currently selected global windows.
form screen form screen
Displays the check results on the currently selected form screens.
screen screen
Displays the total check results of the Basic, windows 1 to 3and system (currently
Total
selected global windows and printerforms).

Point Numerical values displayed in red indicate items for which a restriction isexceeded.
Delete the number of placed objects from the page in which restrictions areexceeded so that
the number of objects is within the restriction.
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens", page 2-14

12-48 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-9 Data Check

Reference • The following windows are displayed when there are many overlapping objects placed on screen.
Place the objects again so that there is not an excessive number of objects.

• When image attribute control(position control) and video display(with position control) are used, an
excessive overlapping data length shall be required.
• The following window is displayed when there are many indirect reference devices placed on
screen.
Set the devices again so that the number of devices does not exceed 64 perscreen.

• The following window is displayed when the setting of parts (device setting: cell)placed on screen is
incorrect.

• The following window is displayed when nonexistent page No. is specified by initial display page
No. of VT system in VT system settings.

12

RESOURCE
• The following window is displayed when there is unused station No. of PLC communication
conditions not set through VT system.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-49


12-9 Data Check

Global function control check


Resources(R) -> Data check(D) -> Global function control(G)
To check if data of global function control is not out of range.

Item Description
To display data check result. Exceptional item will be displayed. If there are multiple
Result
exceptional items, one of them is displayed.
Data volume referenced To display reference data volume.
Contents

Number of PLC devices To display the number of PLC devices.


Number of control objects To display the number of control objects.
Screen data volume To display screen data capacity (unit: byte) used in global function control.

Point Values in red color are out-of-range values.

12 To delete the objects configured in out-of-range page.


"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens", page 2-14
RESOURCE

12-50 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-9 Data Check

Version Check
[Resource (R)] -> [Data check (D)] -> [Version check (V)]
For the functions that are set up via VT STUDIO and the functions that are set up via the files saved through VT
STUDIO, please check if it is possible to set up under this version of system program.

When OK? When NG?

Items Description
Version after checking Display the system program version after checking.
Result
Detailed Description
Display version check result.
Display contents when the result of version check is NG.
12
Export(E) Save version check result in text format.

RESOURCE
Check the following functions during version check.
• Screens (Basic, window 1/2/3)
• Global window
• Form screen
• VT system parameters
• Global function switch
• Device comment
• Trend chart
• Alarm
• Message
• Windows fonts
• Device transferring
• Global function control
• PLC data folder
• Worksheet

Excute version check automatically when using the following functions.


• "Save as"
• "Write Memory Card"
• "Sending data from PC to VT"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-51


12-10 Batch-change Device

Batch-change Device
Resources(R) -> Batch change devices(B)
The device No. of target devices (currently set as objects) can be batch-changed.

Item Description
Date type Select from "Bit/word".
Continuous count The continuous device No. of already set quantity can be changed.
Charge device
Device before changing Set the device before the change.
Device after changing Set the device after the change.
Add Add the settings of changing device.
Delete Delete the settings of changing device.
After selection, the screen (entire page/current page/current screen(Basic/
Screen
window)) can be set as the change target.
VT system
When this checkbox is marked, VT system settings are targeted for the change.
12 parameters

Trend Graph
When this checkbox is marked, the devices currently used in the trend settings
are targeted for the change.
RESOURCE

When this checkbox is marked, the devices currently used in the alarm settings
Change target Alarm
are targeted for the change.
PLC Data Folder When this checkbox is marked, the PLC data folder is targeted for the change.
When this checkbox is marked, the devices currently used in the work sheet
Worksheet
data are targeted for the change.
Device transfer After selection, the device used in device transfer can be taken as change target.
Global function After selection, the device used in global function control can be taken as change
control target.

Reference When the devices of selected items are to be entirely changed.


Select items through group selection and continuous selection, and select "Entire device change" in
menu by clicking right mouse button.
Set and run the devices after change through "Entire device change" window.

12-52 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-11 Screen Configuration Management

Page Configuration Management


Resources(R) -> Page configuration management (C)
This panel allows you view the configuration of screens made on each page, and to perform copy, delete and other
editing operations on the screens you have made.

1 Displays the "Page configuration management" window.


Display the "Page configuration management" window by one of the followingmethods:
• By selecting "Resources(R)" -> "Page configuration management(C)" from Menu in thatorder
• By clicking the button
• By opening Menu by clicking the right mouse button by the "Screen" tab in theworkspace, and selecting "Page
configuration management"

Item Description
Copy Copies the specified screen.
Cut Cuts the specified screen.
Paste Pastes the copied screen to the specified Basic screen, window screen, or form screen.
Deletes the screens on the specified pages, and moves the deleted screens to Trash.
Delete
Screens you have deleted are moved to Trash.
Pastes screens currently saved to a different file onto each of the screens on
Import
specified pages.
Opens the "Screen attribute settings" window to change the attributes of the specified screen.
Attribute
Screen attributes can also be changed by double-clicking the screen ID or screen image.
Display Switches between the text display and image display.
Display entire page When this checkbox is marked, the entire page is displayed in the screen list.
When this checkbox is marked, the same screen list is displayed split into an upper
Split view
window and a lower window.
Selects the details to be displayed in the screen list from "Screen (Basic, Window 1/2/
Switch screen list 3)", "Global window" and "form screen". Form screen can not be displayed when
using VT3-W4T (A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).
Displays the page No. When this item is double-clicked, the "Move page" window
Page No.
isdisplayed and the page No. can be changed.
Screen list

Displays the comment. When this item is double-clicked, the "Page comment setting"
Comment

12
window is displayed and the page comment can be set.
Screen ID Displays the screen ID and the screen image (only during image display). When this
(Basic, Window 1,Window 2, item is double-clicked, the "Screen attribute settings" window is opened, and the
Window 3, Gwin, form screen) attributes ofthe specified screen can be changed.

RESOURCE
Displays deleted screens or screens that were overwritten and deleted. Screens in
Trash
Trash can be re-used by copy-and-paste.
Enlarge display Displays screens enlarged to their actual size.
Reset screen size according to
Change resolution to "VT model setting" when pages are imported after selected.
resolution *1

The screen configuration will also change when change of VT3 series model setting is performed between a model of
VT3-W4 series and a model other than VT3-W4 series.
"12-2 VT Model Setting", page 12-9
The same operations can be performed from Menu that is displayed by clicking thescreen list with the right mouse button.

Point With page configuration management operations, the previous operation cannot be undone.

Operations in Page Configuration Management

New screen
When you double-click a "New" cell on the last line or an unset "Screen ID" cell, the "New screen" window is
displayed. Create a new specified screen.
"New Screen", page 12-2

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-53


12-11 Screen Configuration Management

Changing page No.


You can change the currently set page No.

1 Double-click the "Page No." cell.


The "Move page" window is displayed.

2 Set the leading page No. and final page No. before the move.

3 Set the leading page No. after the move.


The leading page No. after the move is changed according to the number of
pagesin the range you selected.

4 Click the "OK" button.


This changes the page No.

Setting page comments


You can change the currently set page comment.

1 Double-click the "Comment" cell.


The "Page comment setting" window is displayed.

2 Set page comment.

3 Click the "OK" button.


Page comment is changed.

Reference Direct change is also possible by selecting "Comment" CELL and pressing button.

About screen ID
When multiple character strings are set, the screen ID of already set display character string ID(0 to 7) is displayed by

12 switching display character string.

Copying, cutting, pasting and deleting screens


RESOURCE

Point • Window screens cannot be copied and pasted to Basic screens, or viceversa. (Pasting
between local windows and global windows is possible.)
• Copying and pasting between the form screen screen <-> common screens(Basic screen,
window screens) is not possible. (Copying and pasting between form screen screens is
possible.)

The "New screen" window is displayed when a screen ispasted to a "New" cell.
Sets the page No.When multiple pages are selected, set the leading page No.

• When an already set page No. exists, a confirmation message is displayed.


To overwrite the page No., click "Yes".

• When a page exists and a pasted window No. does not, the screen of the window isadded to the existing page.
• When a page or screen to which a comment is not set is pasted to a page that isalready set with a comment, the
comment will not be deleted and will be left behind.

Reference Imported screens are displayed in red lettering. Screens or comments that havebeen copied or
moved, or whose settings have been changed are displayed ingreen lettering.The screen list is
switched, and "Page configuration management" window is closed.
When "Page configuration management" window is displayed again, the letter is turned to black color.
12-54 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
12-11 Screen Configuration Management

To select multiple "Screen IDs":


• You can select continuous multiple screen IDs by clicking "Screen ID" cells with the key held down.
• cYou can select continuous multiple screen IDs by clicking "Screen ID" cells with the key held down.
• If you select a "Screen ID" cell and drag, you can select screen ID cells in the rangeyou dragged.

To copy screens:
Screens can be copied by dragging a selection of multiple "Screen ID" cells with the key held down, and dropping at
the "Screen ID" cell at the copy destination.

To move screens:
Screens can be moved (cut-and-paste) by dragging a selection of multiple "Screen ID"cells with the key held down,
and dropping at the "Screen ID" cell at the movedestination.

Importing screens
Copy and paste screens from other VTS/VT2 files.

1 Either click the button, or select "Import" from the menu displayed by clicking with the right mouse button.
The screen list is divided into two parts, upper and lower, and the list of screens in the import file are displayed in the
lower screen list.

12

When you are importing screens for the first time, the "Open Import File" window opens. When you RESOURCE
Reference
click the "Open" button, the screen list is split into two windows, an upper window and a lower
window, and the screen list of import files is displayedin the lower window.

2 Click the "Select file" button.


The "Open Import File" window is displayed.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-55


12-11 Screen Configuration Management

3 Select the files to be imported into screen, and click "Open(O)" button.
The screen list is divided into two parts, upper and lower, and the list of screens in the import file are displayed in the
lower screen list.

4 Copies the screen ID from the screen list of import files, and pastes the screen ID at the target location in the
screen list in the upper window.

pastes the screen ID

Copies the screen ID

• How to copy, cut, paste and delete screen IDs is the same as operations in thesame file.
• When the display is switched or the screen list is switched, the screen lists at the upper and lower windows are also switched.
• Imported screens are displayed in red lettering. Screens or comments that have been copied or moved, or whose
settings have been changed are displayed in green lettering. If you switch the screen list, or exit the "Page
configuration management" window, the lettering will change color to black.

5 Clicking the button closes the screen list of import files.

Point • Only the data of Basic screens can be copied to Basic screens, and only thedata of local
window screens of local window screens can be copied to localwindow screens.

12 • Global window screens and local window screens can be copied to globalwindow screens.
• Only form screen screens can be copied to form screen screens.
• VT files created by VT1 cannot be imported directly. Please read through VT STUDIO and
RESOURCE

save to VTS files for subsequent importing.

Split view
When the "Split view" checkbox is marked, the screen list can be displayed split intoan upper window and a lower window.
This feature comes in handy when copying, cutting and pasting screens havingquite different page Nos. when there are many pages.

12-56 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-11 Screen Configuration Management

Trash
Screens you have deleted are moved to Trash. Screens in Trash can be re-usedby cutting and pasting. The screens
in Trash can be completely deleted by clicking "Clean out trash" in Menu that is displayed by clicking the right mouse
button.

Point When there is a screen in Trash, andyou click the "Close"


button to exit the "Page configuration management"
window, a confirmation message is displayed.
If you click the "Yes" button, the con-tent of trash is
deleted. At this time,the content of trash in work space is
also deleted at the same time.

12

RESOURCE

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-57


12-12 List of Screen call
Call resource and call destination screens of screens configured with call screen function can be confirmed in listing
mode.

List of Screen call


Resources(R) -> Screen callup list(G)

Item Description
Screens to call up Selects the target screen to be displayed as a list.
"Source" Displays the call source screen.
"Dest" Displays the call destination screen.
When the screen to edit is specified, and the "Edit selected screen" button is clicked, the
Edit selected screen
specified screen is ready forediting.

12
RESOURCE

12-58 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-13 Ladder Monitor Data
For creating/managing data used for ladder monitor.

List of call screens

1 Select [Resources(R)]→[Ladder monitor data(J)] from menu in order, and click "Ladder monitor" in "System
setting" tab of workspace.

2 Specify data save destination in "Ladder monitor data" window, and click "Generate" button.

Item Description
Internal memory Save destination of ladder monitor data becomes "Internal memory (ROM)"
(ROM) *1 when selected.
Memory card Save destination of ladder monitor data becomes "Memory card" when selected
Data storage location To select the memory card drive.
Drive
New a "\VTLDR folder" when no "\VTLDR folder" exists in selected drive.
To display drive and folder of memory card when "Data save destination" is "Memory card".
Folder The folder is \VTLDR folder of drive.
(e.g. D:\VTLDR is displayed when drive of memory card is D)
Ladder project Project name To display project name of selected ladder monitor data.
information Project comments To display project comments of selected ladder monitor data.
Delete To delete selected ladder monitor data.
Detail To display details of selected ladder monitor data
*1 The upper limit of ladder monitor data output is 2MB when using internal memory (ROM).

3 Select the project to be output.


12
<When object PLC is KV-5500/5000/3000 series and KV Nano Series>

RESOURCE

Item Description
KV STUDIO currently being
To output project of currently started KV STUDIO.
started
KV STUDIO Project To specify and output project of KV STUDIO.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-59


12-13 Ladder Monitor Data

<When object PLC is Q series(Q mode)/QnU series CPU direct link>

"Select ladder project" window appears.

4 Select the project to be output, and click "Execute" button.


<When object PLC is KV-5500/5000/3000 series and KV Nano Series>

<When object PLC is Q series(Q mode)/QnU series CPU direct link>

12 Item Description
Comment output To select the device comments to be output when common comments
RESOURCE

Output comments
setting and other program comments are all set

5 Display result and output size.


<When object PLC is KV-5500/5000/3000 series and KV Nano Series>

* Output sizes of disabled module, password-protected module and unselected module are "0" byte.

12-60 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


12-13 Ladder Monitor Data

<When object PLC is Q series(Q mode)/QnU series CPU direct link>

* Output size of unselected module is "0" byte.

Point • For KV-5500/5000/3000 series and KV Nano Series PLCs whose ladder diagram cannot be
converted, no output will be possible.
• For KV-5500/5000/3000 series and KV Nano Series PLCs whose ladder diagram doesn't use
return mark, but a return is required, no output will be possible.
• The number of display rows of ladder monitor of VT3 is one circuit block. Ladder program
can't be output when exceeding 50 rows.
• One comment row is 50 rows. Ladder program can't be output when the continuous
comment rows in total exceed 100.

12

RESOURCE

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 12-61


12-14 Global Function Switch (Only for Handy Series)
A global function switch enables to execute the functions of function switch, independent of screen display.
Via menu [Part (P)] -> [Switch Indicator Lamp (S)] "Function Key", various functions may be executed only after part
menu is displayed, while global function key may execute various functions in all menus.

Point Only for VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G).


Functions to be set are the same as "Function switch" in the parts.
In the screen, the function switch settings of part has a higher priority.
In case only global function switch is set, the function switch will be ON when pressing
global function switch to switch page or window.
"8-8 Function Switch Settings (Only for Handy Series)", page 8-46

Global function switch settings


1 Select Resources(R) -> Global function switch(H) from the menu, or click the "Settings" of the "Global
function switch" in the "System settings" tab of the workspace.

2 Set up function.

12
Item Description
RESOURCE

To set up the switching mode of enable/disable of function switch and touch switch (Not use/
Operation switch Alternate (enable/disable upon pressing the switch)/Momentary (enabled only when being
pressed)).
Set up ON/OFF function of each function switch.
Settings The functions to be set is the same as the switch part.
"8-2 Setting Switches", page 8-9

Reference F1, F2, F5, and F6 can also be used for external output.
"I/O Specification (VT3-V6H(G)/Q5H(G))", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

12-62 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13
COMMUNICATION
BETWEEN PC & VT3
This chapter describes the settings of the target VT3 models and PLC and the
communication between PC and VT3.

13-1 Preparations for Communication Between PC & VT3 •••13-2


13-2 Communications Settings •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 13-4
13-3 PC->VT Send Data •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••13-12
13-4 PC -> VT Send Screen Data Differences ••••••••••13-19
13-5 VT -> PC Receive Data ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••13-21
13-6 PC <--> VT Verify Data ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••13-27
13-7 Simulator••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••13-30
13-8 Remote COM Port Tool ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••13-37

13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-1


13-1 Preparations for Communication Between PC & VT3
This section describes the settings for the communication between PC and VT3 and precautions to be observed.

Communication Between PC (VT STUDIO) and VT3


The following communications are available between PC (VT STUDIO) and VT3

Item Description
PC->VT Send data The PC sends compiled screen data and others to VT3.
PC->VT Send screen data
The PC only sends the screen data differences to VT3.
differences
VT ->PC Receive data PC receives screen data from VT3.
PC <- -> VT Verify data Verify the currently compiled data and VT3 unit data from the PC.
Simulator Simulates edited screens for confirmation.

Point • The VT1 models cannot communication with VT STUDIO. Use VT BUILDER when making
or editing screen data for the VT1, or when sending/receiving or verifying data with the
VT1.
• The VT2 models can communication with VT STUDIO.

Preparations for Communication Between PC (VT STUDIO) and VT3

Setting the communications port


For the communication between PC and VT3, the serial or USB port on the PC or Ethernet port should be set up. To
connect VT3 with PC through USB, you need install the USB driver on your PC.
• Setting the communications port
"13-2 Communications Settings"
• Install the USB driver
"1-6 Installation of USB Driver"

PC connector cables


For the communication between PC and VT3, the PC cable needs to be used to connect PC with the VT3 series.
Details of PC connector cable

13 "1-2 System Configuration", in the VT3 Series Hardware Manual

Ethernet Unit
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

The Ethernet components (VT2-E1/E2, VT3-E3) need to be used for the communication between PC and VT3.
In addition, before the communication, settings associated with Ethernet like the IP address should be set on the VT3
side in advance. Set up the IP address and more in the System Mode screen on VT3 before the communication
between PC and VT3 over Ethernet.

Reference • About the Ethernet Components


"6-5 Ethernet Components", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• The Ethernet settings in the System Mode screen.
"5-2 Option Setup", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

Precautions when using the USB port


• To use the USB cable, please set the power of VT3 to ON.
• To use USB, you need install an OS like Windows XP that supports USB.
• Make USB connections directly to the USB port on the PC without passing via a hub.
• Communications using USB may be disrupted midway when noise causes the communications state to be unstable.
In addition, when the communication is interrupted, please first exit from VT STUDIO, and re-plug the USB cable.
• If communications is unstable in noisy environments, for example, attach a ferrite core to the cable.

13-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13-1 Preparations for Communication Between PC & VT3

Precautions on Communication Between PC (VT STUDIO) and VT3


• To enable the communication between PC and VT3 (except the simulator), please set VT3 to "Run Mode" or "Data
Transfer Standby". In addition, when a communication error occurs to the PC (VT STUDIO) under "Run Mode",
please set VT3 to "Data Transfer Standby".
"Run mode", "Data Transfer"
"Chapter 5 System Mode" ,VT3 Series Hardware Manual

(before communication) (after communication)


data transmission standby data transmission standby

After being interrupted

Run mode Run mode


• In the case that the communication is interrupted during the data Transfer to VT3, the data saved on VT3 may be lost.
• Data Transfer cannot be enabled when the simulator/Remote COM Port Tool is used.
• The serial port and USB port cannot be used simultaneously.

13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-3


13-2 Communications Settings

Communications Settings
Communications (C)->Communications settings (C)

Communications port

Set up the PC communication ports to communicate with VT3.

Item Description
Serial port Select the serial port on the PC.
Communication Port

USB Select the USB port on the PC.


IP Address Set up the IP address of the connected VT3 series (or unit name).
Port no. Set up the port number of the connected VT3 series (0 to 65535).
ETHER Selects the connection destination from the connection destination list file, or adds
NET Connect to*1
connection destinations.
Connection Tests whether the connection destination is operating normally using the Ping or
test*2 Tracert commands.

Descriptions of *1 and *2 are given on the following pages.

Point • To connect VT3 with PC through USB, you need install the USB driver on your PC.
"1-6 Installation of USB Driver"
• Be sure to set only unique IP addresses to each device within the LAN.
• When changing the port No., do not use numbers 0 to 1023 as the new port No. Also, take
care not to use another port No. that is already in use.

13
Sending
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

Item Description
Page that is being
During a differential transmit, the pages displayed in VT STUDIO
edited through DT
are, after the differential transmit, displayed on VT3.
STUDIO
Page displayed after
Continue with the page The pages displayed on VT3 before the differential transmit
the differential sending
displayed by VT continue to be displayed after the differential transmit.
The pages that are set up from the "Initial Display Page NO." in the VT
Initial page series system are, after the differential transmit, displayed on the VT3
series.

Reference The pages that are set up from the "Initial Display Page NO." in the VT series system are, after the
differential transmit, displayed on the VT2 series.

13-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13-2 Communications Settings

Precautions when selecting the "Page that is being edited through VT STUDIO"
option.
• When compiling the Base screen, the page No. of the currently compiled Base screen becomes, after the
differential transmit, the No. of the page to be displayed.
• When compiling the local window, the page No. of the currently compiled Base screen that has the local window becomes,
after the differential transmit, the No. of the page to be displayed. In addition, the target local window is also displayed.
• When compiling the Global window, the initial display page + the Global window is displayed.
• When compiling the system settings and the ticket screen, the initial display page becomes, after the differential
transmit, the page to be displayed.
• When compiling the Base screen, the corresponding screens are, after the differential transmit, also displayed
when the "Overlapped with Other Screens, Display" is used.
• When compiling the Global screen, the corresponding Base screens are, after the differential transmit, also
displayed when the "Overlapped with Other Screens, Display" is used.
• Even the picture is not changed, the picture, after the differential transmit, is changed in the displayed page
compiled with VT STUDIO.
• When multiple windows are displayed based on the "Overlapped with Other Screens, Display", the currently
compiled page is displayed at the foremost.
• Terminate the displayed window, and display/not display it based on the settings made in the system memory area and device values.

Precautions when selecting "Continue with the page displayed by VT"


• After the page is deleted, the initially displayed page, after the differential transmit, becomes the displayed page.
• When other pages are not specifically selected, the initially displayed page, after the differential transmit, becomes the displayed page.
• Save the settings of the window and continue.
• Terminate the displayed window, and display/not display it based on the settings made in the system memory area
and device values.

List of Connection Destinations


From the "Communication Settings", click the "List of Connected Objects" button to display the "List of Connected
Objects" window.
From the "List of Connected Objects" window, listed files for VT3 communicating with the PC (VT STUDIO) can be
created. You can differentiate the target VT3s by assigning names to them. So connection can be established simply
by selecting the VT3 to be communicated with from the listed files. 13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

Item Description
File Displays the currently selected file names in the connection destination list file.
Add When this button is clicked, connection destinations can be added to the connection destination list file.
Edit When this button is clicked, connection destinations in the connection destination list file can be edited.
When this button is clicked, connection destinations can be deleted from the connection
Delete
destination list file.
When this button is clicked, connection destinations can be selected from the connection
Select
destination list file.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-5


13-2 Communications Settings

Making a new connection destination list file


The following describes the procedure for making a new connection destination list file.
If this is the first time you open the "List of Connected Objects" window, please open the sample.ali file in the installation destination folder in VT STUDIO.

1 Click the "Browse" button.


The "Specify connection destination list file" window is displayed.

2 Enter the name to give the new connection destination list file in the "File name" field using the keyboard.

3 Click the "Open" button.


The "Specify connection destination list file" window is displayed.

13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

4 Click "OK" button.


The "Specify connection destination list file" window is closed.

5 The newly made connection destination list file is displayed in the "Connection Destination List" window.

13-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13-2 Communications Settings

Reading connection destination list files


Open the newly created file, and ensure this file can be used by VT STUDIO.
If this is the first time you open the "List of Connected Objects" window, please open the sample.ali file in the
installation destination folder in VT STUDIO.

1 Click the "Browse" button.


The "Specify connection destination list file" window is displayed.

2 Specify the connection destination list file to be read.

Item Description
Verify(I) Specify the folder containing the connection destination list file to be read.
File Name(N) Enter the name of the connection destination list file to be read.
File of type(T) Specify "connection destination list file(*.ali)."
Move(M) Click "Move" button and move to the specified folders and the folders used recently.

3 Click the "Open" button.


The selected connection destination list file is displayed.

Adding connection destinations


Add new connection destinations to an already opened connection destination list file.

1 Click the "Add" button in the "Connection Destination List" window.


The "Add Connection Destination" window is displayed.

2 Set the new connection destination to add to the list.


13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

Item Description
Name Sets the name of the new connection destination to add to the list.
PLC type Set up the PLC model to be connected VT3.
Connection Methods This item cannot be changed.
IP Address Sets the IP address of the new connection destination to add to the list.
Port no. Sets the port No. of the new connection destination to add to the list.

Reference Any connection destination name can be set. Multiple VT3s can be differentiated by assigning to them
the names based on the purpose and setting location of the VT3s.

3 Click the "OK" button.


This adds the connection destination to the list.
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-7
13-2 Communications Settings

Deleting connection destinations


Delete a connection destination selected from the currently open connection destination list file.

1 Select the connection destination to be deleted and click "Delete",

2 The "Deletion Confirm" window is displayed.


Click the "Yes" button. This deletes the connection destination.

Editing connection destinations


Change the settings of a selected connection destination.

1 Select the connection destination to be edited and click "Edit".


The "Edit connection destinations" window is displayed.

2 Change the settings of a selected connection destination.

13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

3 Click the "OK" button.


This changes the settings of the connection destination.

13-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13-2 Communications Settings

Selecting connection destinations


Select a connection destination from the currently open connection destination list file.

1 Select the connection destination from the list.

2 Click the "Select" button.


A list of connection destination IP addresses and port Nos. is displayed.

Connection Test
Click the "Connection Test" button in the "Communication Settings" window to display the "Communication Test"
window.
Connection can be confirmed by checking a response from another terminal (node) on Ethernet by the Ping
command or checking the communications path by the Tracert command. This is functionally the same as executing
the Ping or Tracert command on the MS-DOS prompt.

Item Description 13
You can confirm that the connection destination is operating normally by sending an IP packet to
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
the specified IP address and checking that it returned normally from that connection destination.
Ping
In addition, if the Ping command is used, the response time and packet loss are also displayed,
which, therefore, enables the speed to reach the connection destination to be evaluated.
This command displays the route between units. It also allows you to confirm the status of the
Tracert router located on the route up to the connection destination, and to find bottlenecks on the route
based upon the response time of each router.

Checking connections using the Ping command

1 Click the "Ping" button.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-9


13-2 Communications Settings

2 The results of the ping command to be run are displayed in the "Ping Results" window.

Example of display indicating a response

Example of display indicating no response

Point • The Ping command sometimes cannot be used depending on the router setting. For
details, confirm with the network administrator.
• If there is a problem with the execution result, confirm with the network administrator and
remedy as required.

3 Click the "Close" button.


close the "Communication Test" window.

13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

13-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13-2 Communications Settings

Checking connections using the Tracert command

1 Click the "Tracert" button.

2 The results of the Tracert command to be run are displayed in the "Tracert Results" window.

Example of display indicating successful confirmation of communications path

Example of display indicating unsuccessful confirmation of communications path

13
Point If there is a problem with the execution result, confirm with the network administrator and COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
remedy as required.

3 Click the "Close" button.


close the "Communication Test" window.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-11


13-3 PC->VT Send Data

PC->VT Send Data


Send the compiled screen data and PDF data from PC to VT3.

Item*1 Description
All data Send the screen data and PDF data to VT3.
Screen Data Only the screen data is sent to VT3
PLC data folder data Sends only PLC data folder data.
System Program Send the system program to VT3, and then modify the same.
The bitmap fonts are sent to VT3 to replace fonts.
System font
Generally, it is not necessary to send.

*1 When no PLC folder data is saved in the new file and the internal memory (SRAM) of VT3, the following
limitations may occur to the menu.
Selectable: "All data", "System program"
Not selectable: "Screen data", "PLC data folder data"

Reference • "System Program", VT3 Series Hardware Manual, page 4-4


• The current version of the system program can be confirmed in the system mode screen.
"5-1 What is System Mode", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

All data

Communications(C) -> PC -> VT Send data(S) -> All data (A)


Send all the compiled screen data and PLC data to VT3.

When sending all data:


• Screen Data
When screen data is sent to the VT3, the screen data on the VT3 is overwritten and erased.
->Depending on the needs, please receive and save the data from VT3 by selecting
"Communications(C)"->"VT ->PC Receive Data(R)"->"All Data (A)".
• PLC data folder data
When VT3 is used to read the PLC data and change the data in the PLC folders, all the data
sent to VT3 is saved in VT STUDIO (PLC Folder Compiling Tool) where it is to be compiled.
13 To send only the screen data, please select "Communications(C)"->"PC->VT Send Data
(S)"->"Screen Data (S)", or you can first receive the data from VT3 then save the same by
selecting "Communications(C)"->"VT->PC Receive Data(R)"->"PLC Folder Data (D)".
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

• When you send alarm records / trend chart data / XY chart data / operation logs,
NOTICE
etc., the alarm records/trend chart (real time) data/XY chart data (real time)/operation logs,
etc. saved in the internal memory (SRAM) may be lost. Please save them to Memory Card
first.
Saving data on Memory Card
"Save log data to memory card", page 9-131
"Saving the operating log on memory card", page 9-136
"12-7 Global Function Control"
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"8-5 FTP Server Functions", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• VT internal device
The values of internal devices are cleared even if holding of internal devices is set.

13-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13-3 PC->VT Send Data

1 From the menu, select "Communications(C)"->"PC->VT Send Data(R)"->"All Data (A)". Or click the button.

2 Display the "Data Transfer" window.


If you click the "Yes" button, proceed to step 3.
If you click the "No" button, data Transfer is canceled.

3 VT3 changes to the Transfer mode automatically, with the send status being
displayed.

Item Description
Terminate transmitting data to VT3.
Abort
When aborted, the VT3 screen data and PLC folder data are lost.

When the version of the system program is higher than the system program on VT3.
When the version of the system program if VT STUDIO is higher than the system program of VT STUDIO, the "Data
Transfer" window is displayed.

Click "Yes (Y)" and the system program of VT3 begins to be upgraded.

13
Do not turn the VT3 OFF or disconnect the PC connector cable while the system program is
NOTICE being sent. Otherwise, the VT3 system may be damaged.

COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3


Point • When the version of the system program of VTS is not Ver. 4
The system program of VT3 below Ver.3 cannot send the screen data and PLC folder data
created with VT STUDIO Ver.4 or later. Before sending, please upgrade the system program of
VT3 to Ver.4.
Otherwise, the "Data Transfer" window is displayed when you send the data.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-13


13-3 PC->VT Send Data

• When the version of the system program of VT2 is not Ver.4.


The system program of VT2 cannot send the screen data and PLC folder data created by VT
STUDIO to a Ver.1 to 3 VT2. Before the Transfer, please upgrade the VT2 system program to
Ver.4.
The "Data Transfer" window is displayed if data is sent without the system program on the
VT2 being rewritten to Ver.4.

Screen Data

Communications(C) -> PC -> VT Send data(S) -> Screen data(S)


This section describes how to send edited screen data to the VT3.

When sending screen data:


• Screen Data
When screen data is sent to the VT3, the screen data on the VT3 is overwritten and erased.
->Depending on the needs, please receive and save the data from VT3 by selecting
"Communications(C)"->"VT->PC Receive Data(R)"->"All Data (A)".
• When you send alarm records / trend chart data/XY chart data / operation logs,
etc., the alarm records/trend chart (real time) data/XY chart data (real time) / operation logs,
etc. saved in the internal memory (SRAM) may be lost. Please save them to Memory Card
first.
NOTICE
Saving data on Memory Card
"Save log data to memory card", page 9-131
"Saving the operating log on memory card", page 9-136
"12-7 Global Function Control"
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"8-5 FTP Server Functions", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• VT internal device
The values of internal devices are cleared even if holding of internal devices is set.

13 1 Select "Communications(C)" -> "PC -> VT Send data(S)" -> "Screen data(S)" from Menu in that order.

2
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

The VT3 automatically enters the transfer mode, and a progress bar indicating how far Transfer has
progressed is displayed.

Item Description
Terminate transmitting data to VT3.
Abort
When Transfer is aborted, the screen data on the VT3 is erased.

13-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13-3 PC->VT Send Data

When the version of the system program is higher than the system program on VT3.
When the version of the system program if VT STUDIO is higher than the system program of VT STUDIO, the "Data
Transfer" window is displayed.

Select "Communications(C)" -> "VT -> PC Receive data(R)" -> "PLC data folder data(D)" in that order, and receive
the PLC data folder data from the VT3. Then, select "Communications" -> "PC -> VT Send data" -> "All data" in that
order, and send all data to the VT3.

When a file having a different target PLC is sent


When the data in a file that is not matched with the target PLC is sent from VT3, the "Data Transfer" window is
displayed. Change the target PLC to match the PLC.

When the PLC folder data is not on VT3 but in a compiled screen data file
The "Data Transfer" window is displayed when the PLC data folder data is located not in the data saved on the VT3
but in the edited screen data.

Either select "Communications(C)" -> "PC -> VT Send data(S)" -> "All data(A)" in that order, and send all the data to
the VT3, or delete the PLC data folder data, and send the screen data to the VT3.

Point • When the version of the system program of VT3 is not Ver.4.
The system program of VT3 Ver.1, Ver.2, Ver.3 cannot send the screen data created by VT 13
STUDIO Ver.4 or later to a VT3. Before the Transfer, please upgrade the VT3 system
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
program to Ver.4.
Otherwise, the "Data Transfer" window is displayed when you send the data.

• When the version of the system program of VT2 is not Ver.4.


The system program of VT2 cannot send the screen data created by VT STUDIO to a Ver.1
to 3 VT2. Before the Transfer, please upgrade the VT2 system program to Ver.4.
The "Data Transfer" window is displayed if data is sent without the system program on the
VT2 being rewritten to Ver.4.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-15


13-3 PC->VT Send Data

PLC data folder data

Communications(C) -> PC -> VT Send data(S) -> PLC data folder data(D)
Send compiled PLC folder data to VT3

VT3 reads the PLC folder data sent to it. To change the data, the data is saved in a place
where it can be compiled with VT STUDIO (PLC Data Folder Compiling Tool).
To back up PLC data folder data, either select "Communications(C)" -> "PC -> VT Send
NOTICE data(S)" -> "Screen data(S)" in that order and send only the screen data, or select
"Communications(C)" -> "VT -> PC Receive data(R)" -> "PLC data folder data(D)", in that
order to receive and save the data before you send new screen data to the VT3.

Point This item can be selected only when PLC data folder data saved to VT3 internal memory
(SRAM) exists in the edited screen data.

1 Select "Communications(C)" -> "PC -> VT Send data(S)" -> "PLC data folder data(D)" from Menu in that order.

2 Display the "Data Transfer" window.

If you click the "Yes" button, proceed to step 3.


If you click the "No" button, data Transfer is canceled.

3 VT3 changes to the Transfer mode automatically, with the send status being displayed.

Item Description
13 Abort
Terminate transmitting data to VT3.
When Transfer is aborted, the PLC data folder data on the VT3 is erased.
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

When a file having a different target PLC is sent


If the target PLC sends the PLC data folder data of a different file when PLC data folder data exists on the VT3, the
"Data Transfer" window is displayed. Change the target PLC to match the PLC.

If you click the "OK" button, data Transfer is canceled.

13-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13-3 PC->VT Send Data

When PLC data folder data does not exist on the VT3
Only PLC data folder data cannot be sent when PLC data folder data does not exist on the VT3. Select
"Communications(C)" -> "PC -> VT Send data(S)" -> "All data(A)" in that order, and send both the screen data and
PLC data folder data.

If you click the "OK" button, data Transfer is canceled.

System Program

Communications(C) -> PC -> VT Send data(S) -> System program(P)

Sends the system program to the VT3 and rewrites the system.

• Do not turn the VT3 OFF or disconnect the PC connector cable while the system program is
being sent. Otherwise, the VT3 system may be damaged.
• When the system program is sent to the VT3, the screen data and the PLC data folder data
is lost.
• Select "Communications(C)" -> "PC -> VT Send data(S)" -> "All data(A)" from Menu in
thatorder, and send the data again.
Alarm log/trend chart (real-time), data /XY chart (real-time) and data/operation log stored in
the internal memory (SRAM) will also disappear, please first save relating data to the
memory card, or send them to a PC.
NOTICE "Save log data to memory card", page 9-131
"Saving the operating log on memory card", page 9-136
"12-7 Global Function Control"
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"8-5 FTP Server Functions", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• VT internal device
The values of internal devices are cleared even if holding of internal devices is set.
• When the version of the system program of the VT3 is Ver.4.5 or above, it is not possible to
transfer the system program of below Ver.4.5.
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
1 Select "Communications(C)" -> "PC -> VT Send data(S)" -> "System program(P)" from Menu in that order.

Reference • Sending the system program from the Memory Card


"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"Write to Memory Card", page 3-15
• Send the system program Ver.4 to VT2.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-17


13-3 PC->VT Send Data

System Font

[Communication(C)] -> [Send date from PC to VT(S)] -> [System Font(F)]


Send System font to VT3.
Generally, standard System font will be sent to VT3, however, when VT3 is used in China, it is necessary to send
GB2312 fonts to VT3.

• Do not turn off power of the VT3 unit or pull out the connection cable when System font are
being sent. Otherwise, font data of the VT3 unit may be damaged, with the result that the
unit cannot operate normally.
• When font data of the VT3 unit is damaged or garbled characters are produced, select
[Communication(C)] -> [Send data from PC to VT(S)] -> [System font(F)] before sending
System font again.
• The screen data and the PLC data file folder data will disappear when System font are sent
to the VT3 unit.
• Alarm log/trend chart (real-time), data /XY chart (real-time) and data/operation data stored
in the internal memory (SRAM) will also disappear, please first save relating data to the
NOTICE
memory card, or send them to a PC.
"Save log data to memory card", page 9-131
"Saving the operating log on memory card", page 9-136
"12-7 Global Function Control"
"13-5 VT -> PC Receive Data"
"5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"8-5 FTP Server Functions", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Internal device
The values of internal devices are cleared even if holding of internal devices is set.

1 Select [Communication(C)] -> [Send data from PC to VT(S)] -> [System Font(F)] from Menu in turn.

2 Select System font to be sent from "System font", click "OK".

13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

Items Description
Standard fonts VT3 Standard System font. It is usually not necessary to send.
GB2312
The System font of Chinese. Be sure to send to VT3 when using VT3 series in China.
corresponding fonts

13-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13-4 PC -> VT Send Screen Data Differences

PC -> VT Send Screen Data Differences


Communications(C) -> PC -> VT Send screen data differences(D)
The time it takes to transfer data can be reduced as only screen data that has been changed is sent to the VT3.
Send all screen data in the following instances. (same operation as "PC -> VT Send data(S)" -> "All data(A)")
• When the target VT or PLC has changed.
"12-2 VT Model Setting"
"12-3 PLC Model Settings"

• When the data is different from the saved one in VT3.


(It is possible to copy and change name of the same file.)
"Save as/Compress and Save", page 3-8
• Horizontal Screen (Regular) <- -> Changed to Vertical Screen.
"12-2 VT Model Setting"

• When the data saved in VT3 is different from the compiled data and there is/is not the PLC folder data.

• When the data stored in the unit is the data created via Ver.1.

• After the alarm system setting is changed and when differential sending is performed for the
screen data, the alarm log data stored in the internal memory (SRAM) will be cleared.
If necessary, please first save data to a memory card, or perform receive operation for the
alarm log.
• After the trend chart system setting is changed and when differential sending is performed

NOTICE
for the screen data, the trend chart (real-time) stored in the internal memory (SRAM) will be
cleared.
13
If necessary, please first save data to a memory card, or perform receive operationfor the
trend chart. COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
• When the screen data is differentially sent, the operation log data saved in the internal
memory (SRAM) is lost. If necessary, back up alarm log/trend graph data in advance on
Memory Card.

• Saved to Memory Card


"Save log data to memory card", page 9-131
"Saving the operating log on memory card", page 9-136
"12-7 Global Function Control"

• Operation record receive


"Operation program receive", page 13-23

• Trend chart reveive


"Receive trend chart", page 13-24

• Alarm system settings


"Alarm System Settings", page 9-82

• Trend graph system settings


"Trend image (real time) System Settings", page 10-57

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-19


13-4 PC -> VT Send Screen Data Differences

1 From the menu, select "Communications(C)"->"PC->VT Screen Data Differential Transmit (D)". Or click the
button.
The VT3 automatically enters the transfer mode, and a progress bar indicating how far Transfer has progressed is
displayed.

Item Description
Terminate transmitting data to VT3.
Abort
When Transfer is aborted, the screen data on the VT3 is erased.

Point • For the PC->VT screen data differential transmit, the differential of the PLC folder data
cannot be transmitted.
• The VT3 display after the differential transmit depends on the setting of the "Displayed
Page after Differential Transmit" in the Communication Settings window.
"13-2 Communications Settings"

13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

13-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13-5 VT -> PC Receive Data

VT -> PC Receive Data

Point • VT STUDIO cannot receive data from the VT1 models. Receive this data on VT BUILDER.
• VT STUIDIO Ver.1 cannot receive data from the VT2 models that transmit data through VT
STUDIO Ver.2.

All data

Communications(C) -> VT -> PC Receive data(R) -> All data(A)


Receive the screen data and PLC folder data on VT3 from the PC.
If necessary, first save the screen data and PLC data folder data currently being edited as it is overwritten and
deleted.

1 From the menu, select "Communications(C)"->"VT->PC Receive Data(R)"->"All Data (A)". Or click the
button.
VT3 changes to the Transfer mode automatically, with the receive status being displayed.

Item Description
Abort Terminate receiving data from VT3.

Point • When Download Protection is set to "Yes"


Data cannot be received as read protection is set.

• When Download Protection is set to "Yes (Password)"


Data reception is started when the currently set password is
entered.
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
• Read Protect
"VT System", page 12-12
"5-2 Option Setup", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-21


13-5 VT -> PC Receive Data

PLC data folder data

Communications(C) -> VT -> PC Receive data(R) -> PLC data folder data(D)

Receives PLC data folder data on the VT3 on the PC. If necessary, first save the PLC data folder data currently being
edited as it is overwritten and deleted.

Reference PLC data folder data can be received even if read protection is set.

1 Select "Communications(C)" -> "VT -> PC Receive data(R)" -> "PLC data folder data(D)" from Menu in that
order.
The "VT STUDIO" window is displayed.

If you click the "Yes" button, proceed to step 2.


If you click the "No" button, data reception is canceled.

2 VT3 changes to the Transfer mode automatically, with the receive status being displayed.

Item Description
Abort Terminate receiving data from VT3.

When a file having a different target PLC is received

13
When the currently compiled data file is different from the target PLC of the PLC folder data of VT3, the "Data
Transfer" window is displayed. Change the target PLC of the file currently being edited so that it marches the PLC of
the PLC data folder data.
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

When PLC data folder data does not exist on the VT3
The "Data Transfer" window is displayed if PLC data folder data does not exist on the VT3.

13-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13-5 VT -> PC Receive Data

Operation program receive

[Communication(C)] -> [VT -> PC data receive(R)] -> [Operation record receive(O)]
Receive VT3 operation record data with PC.

Reference Even if read protection is set up for the operation log data, it is also possible to finish data receiving.

1 Select in turn from the menu [Communication (C)] -> [VT -> PC data receive (R) -> [Operation record receive
(O)].
Display "Operation record receive" window.

Item Description
Output destination folder Input driver and directory (folder) name for saving operation record data.
File format Select the format in which files will be saved.
Date (YY/MM/DD)
Date/time Set up whether date/time and text string are added to the saved file name. The file
Time (HH/MM/SS)
name upon saving can be checked via the "File name" item.
Leading text string
If it is selected, the screen data will be received after the operation log data is
Receive screen data received. After it is received, the confirmation dialog box "Do you want to open the
saved screen data and operation log file?".
Display "Communication setting" window. 13
Receive(R) Receive operation record data.
Cancel(C) Cancel the receiving of operation record, return to edit screen.
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-23


13-5 VT -> PC Receive Data

Receive trend chart

[Communication(C)] -> [VT -> PC data receive(R)] -> [Trend record receive(T)]
Receive VT3 trend chart data with PC.

Reference Even if read protection is set up for the trend data, it is also possible to finish data receiving.

1 Select in turn from the menu [Communication(C)] -> [VT -> PC data receive(R)] -> [Trend chart receive(T)].
Display "Trend chart receive" window.

Item Description
Output destination folder Input driver and directory (folder) name for saving trend data.
Trend ID
Set up whether trend ID, date and time are added to the saved file name.
File Name Date (YY/MM/DD)
The file name upon saving can be checked via the "File name preview" item.
Time (HH/MM/SS)

13 ID0 to 3
Leading text string
File name preview
Select the leading text string of the saved file name and the data format of the
saved trend data.
Data Format The file name upon saving can be checked via the "File name preview" item.
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

Display "Communication setting" window.


Receive(R) Receive trend data.
Cancel(C) Cancel the receiving of trend chart, back to edit screen.

13-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13-5 VT -> PC Receive Data

Receive alarm log

[Communication(C)] -> [VT -> PC data receive(R)] -> [Alarm log receive(H)]
Receive VT3 alarm log data with PC.

Reference Even if read protection is set up for the alarm data, it is also possible to finish data receiving.

1 Select in turn from the menu [Communication(C)] -> [VT -> PC data receive(R) -> [Alarm log receive(H)].
Display "Receive alarm log" window.

Item Description
Output destination folder Input driver and directory (folder) names for saving alarm log data.
Trend ID
Set up whether alarm ID, date and time are added to the saved file name.
File Name Date (YY/MM/DD)
The file name upon saving can be checked via the "File name preview" item.
Time (HH/MM/SS)
Leading text string Set up the leading text string for saving file names.
ID0 to 3
File name preview The file name upon saving can be checked via the "File name preview" item.
Display "Communication setting" window.
Receive(R)
Cancel(C)
Receive alarm log data.
Cancel the receiving of alarm log, back to edit screen.
13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-25


13-5 VT -> PC Receive Data

Receive screen image

[Communication(C)] -> [VT -> PC data receive(R)] -> [Screen image receive(C)]
Capture screens displayed on VT3.

Item Description
Output destination folder Input driver and directory (folder) name for saving captured images.
File format Select the format in which files will be saved.
Image quality Screen quality can be set up when JPEG is selected.
The captured screen will be stored to the folder specified by "Output destination folder" according to the format of "Screen
data name_page ID_date (YY [2-digit] +, MM+DD) time (hh+mm+ss).bmp (jpg).

Point • When a file with the same file name exists in the "Output destination folder", screen image
receiving will be cancelled due to an error.
• When the following functions are performed, it is not possible to receive screen image.
• BMP file switching
• Vedio capture
• Execute printing
• Form print

13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

13-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13-6 PC <--> VT Verify Data

PC<-->VT Verify Data

Point • Data verification cannot be performed between the VT1 models and VT STUDIO. Receive
this data on VT BUILDER.
• Data verification cannot be performed between the VT2 models that send data through VT
STUDIO Ver.2 and VT STUIDIO Ver.1.

All data

Communications(C)-> PC <--> VT Verify data(V) -> All data(A)

Communications -> PC <--> VT Verify data -> All data

1 From the menu, select "Communications(C)"->"PC->VT Verify Data (V)"->"All Data (A)". Or click the
button.
VT3 changes to the Transfer mode automatically. The verification results are displayed after data is received.

Item Description
Abort Terminate receiving data from VT3.

2 Display the verification results.

13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

Point • When Download Protection is set to "Yes"


Data cannot be verified as read protection is set.

When Download Protection is set to "Yes (Password)"


Data verification is started when the currently set password is
entered.

Read Protect
"VT System", page 12-12
"5-2 Option Setup", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-27


13-6 PC <--> VT Verify Data

Screen Data

Communications(C) -> PC <--> VT Verify data(V) <- Screen data(S)


Verifies the screen data currently being edited on the PC with the data on the VT3.

1 Select "Communications(C)" -> "PC <-->VT Verify data(V)" -> "Screen data(S)" from Menu in that order.
VT3 changes to the Transfer mode automatically. The verification results are displayed after data is received.

Item Description
Abort Terminate receiving data from VT3.

2 Display the verification results.

Point • When Download Protection is set to "Yes"


Data cannot be verified as read protection is set.

13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

• When Download Protection is set to "Yes (Password)"


Data verification is started when the currently set password is
entered.

Read Protect
"VT System", page 12-12
"5-2 Option Setup", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

13-28 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13-6 PC <--> VT Verify Data

PLC data folder data

Communications(C) -> PC<-->VT Verify data(V) -> PLC data folder data(D)
Verify the PLC folder data compiled on the PC with the data of the VT3 unit.

Reference PLC data folder data can be verified even if read protection is set.

1 Select "Communications(C)" -> "PC<-> Verify data(V)" -> "PLC data folder data(D)" from Menu in that order.
VT3 changes to the transfer mode automatically. The verification results are displayed after data is received.

Item Description
Abort Terminate receiving data from VT3.

2 Display the verification results.

13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-29


13-7 Simulator
The Simulator allows you to confirm the edited screen with the VT3 connected to the PC.

Preparing the Simulator


Prepare to use the Simulator as follows.

1 Connect PC to VT3.
• When using the Simulator via the serial port or USB port
"PC Cable", VT3 Series Hardware Manual, page 1-12

PC PC Cable VT3 Series

• When the simulator is used over Ethernet


To use the Simulator over Ethernet, Ethernet settings must be made on the VT3.
"Chapter 8 Ethernet", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"Preparations for Communication Between PC (VT STUDIO) and VT3", page 13-2
"Chapter 17 ETHERNET CONNECTION"

Ethernet Line (LAN)

VT3 PC

13 2 Send the file to be checked on the Simulator to the VT3.


"13-3 PC->VT Send Data"
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

"13-4 PC -> VT Send Screen Data Differences"

3 Set the VT3 to the Run mode.

Point • When the simulator is used, please set the "System Startup Delay Time" in the VT System
Settings window to 0 second.
If not, the simulator cannot be used.
"VT System", page 12-12
• When serial communications are used, the simulator cannot be used.

13-30 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13-7 Simulator

Starting Up Simulator
Communications -> Simulator

Title Bar

Menu Bar
Tool Bar

The simulator screen

Status Bar

Item Description
Title bar Displays "Simulator".
Menu bar Displays the Simulator menu.
Tool bar Displays available tools. Faintly displayed tools are currently unavailable functions.
Simulator screen Displays the currently registered devices, current states, update date/time, etc.
Status bar Display the button name, VT3 communication status, and page No..

Simulator Menu

Item Description
Open(O) + Open the CSV files (*.csv) saved with the simulator.

13
File Save as(A) Save the simulator screen information in the CSV format (*.csv).
Exit Simulator(X) Exits the Simulator.
Start(S) Starts Simulator communications.

COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3


Communi Stop(E) Stops Simulator communications.
cations Communications port
Sets the communications port, baud rate, and IP address.
settings(T)
Switches whether to specify the page No. to be displayed, or not specify and
Page No.(P)
display the devices on all pages.
Target PLC(L) Set up the PLC that activates the simulator and its station number.
View Sets support of UNICODE text strings, and swapping of upper byte and lower
String(S)
byte data of text strings stored to reference word devices.
Tool bar(B) Display or hide the tool bar
Status bar(U) Display or hide the status bar
Change data(E) Changes the data of the currently selected device.
Clear all data(C) Turns the data of all devices on the Simulator screen to 0 (OFF).
Link(N) Connect with multiple devices. For 2-word data and character string data.
Unlink(D) Cancels the link.
Device Hide(B) Hides devices selected on the Simulator screen.
Redisplay(R) Redisplays devices hidden by "Hide" on the Simulator screen.
Add(A) + Adds devices to the Simulator screen.
Clear (D) Deletes devices from the Simulator screen.
Clear all(C) Deletes all devices from the Simulator screen.
Tools Option(O) Sets Simulator startup options.
Help Simulator info(A) Displays the Simulator version.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-31


13-7 Simulator

How to Operate Simulator

Setting the communications port

Communications(C) -> Communications port settings(T)


Sets the communications conditions matched to the currently connected PC.

1 Select "Communications(C)" -> "Communications port settings(T)" from Menu in that order.
The "Communications port settings" window is displayed.

2 To use the serial port from the tool bar, select the button. To use the USB port, select the button. To
use Ethernet, select the button.

Item Description
Serial port Select the serial port on the currently connected PC.
Serial port
Communication Port

Baud Rate Sets the baud rate.


USB Select the USB port on the currently connected PC.
IP Address Set up the IP address of the connected VT3 unit (or unit name).
Port no. Sets the port No. (0 to 65535) of the VT3 at the connection destination.
Selects the connection destination from the connectiondestination list file, or
ETHERNET Connect to*1
adds connection destinations.
Connection Tests whether the connection destination is operating normally using the Ping or
test*2 Tracert commands.
For more information about *1 and *2, please refer to "13-2 Communications Settings".

13 Starting communications
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

Communications(C) -> Start(S)


The VT3 displays the page of the initial display page No., and the devices currently set to this page are automatically
registered to The Simulator screen.

Point The communications settings need not be made on the VT3.


The simulator, however, cannot be used when the target PLC of VT3 is undertaking the
general serial communication (the general ASCII mode, general binary mode, binary mode
(Ethernet)).
When the simulator is used, please set the "System Startup Delay Time" in the VT System
Settings window to 0 second.
If not, the simulator cannot be used.

13-32 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13-7 Simulator

How to View the Simulator Screen

Item Description
Device Displays device Nos. indicates the bit device. Indicates the bit device. indicates the 32-bit device.
Display the device data. For bit devices, ON or OFF is displayed; numeric values are displayed for
Data
word devices.
For bit devices, bits are displayed. For word devices, select from "binary/octal/decimal (±)/decimal/
hexadecimal/floating number/character string".
Display format Float can be selected only in the case of 2-word (linked) data.
Text strings can be selected only when multiple word devices are linked.
(±): Signed
Final update Displays the date and time when the device data was last updated.
Displays the device attributes.
R/W : Read/write device
R/W
R : Read device
W : Write device
Displays the registration source of the device.
VT Device : Devices that are read by VT3 and registered automatically
Explanation
User Registration : Devices that are registered using the simulator.
Linked device : Linked devices
13
Reference The display details can be sorted by clicking each of the items in the Simulator screen.
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

Point Simulator devices are represented as follows.

VT2 Models
Normal With an Ethernet connection

<Device Type> <Device Number>@ <Station Number>

VT3 Models
Normal Ethernet or thermoregulator (1:N) connection

<Device Type> <Device Number>_<Station Number>_<PLC_A/B>


When the MultiTalk is used, _<PLC_A/B> is displayed.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-33


13-7 Simulator

Changing data

Change the data of the devices currently registered to Simulator.

In the case of bit devices


Change data by one of the following methods:
• Double-click the data of the device whose data is to be changed.
• Click and select the device data to be changed. From the menu, select "Device (D)"->"Data Change (E)".
• Click the data of the device whose data is to be changed to select the data, and press the (space) bar.
• Click and select the device data to be changed, and then press( Enter).

In the case of word devices


Display the "Word entry" window by either of the following methods:
• Double-click the data of the device whose data is to be changed.
• Click and select the device data to be changed. From the menu, select "Device (D)"->"Data Change (E)".

Item Description
Device Displays the device.
Select the data format from "Binary/Octal/ Signed decimal/Unsigned decimal/Hex/Float/String".
Signed decimal format numbers are handled as 2's complement. Float (real numbers) can be
Data selected only for 32-bit word devices and 2-word (jointed) devices.
Text strings can be selected only when multiple word devices are linked. Numerical values also
can be entered.

Linking devices
13 This feature is handy when using 2-word data or text string data.

1 Select the device No. of the start device, and select the range of devices to be linked with the left mouse
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

button clicked.
Or, select the device No. of the start device, and select the range of devices with the " " key held down.

2 Select "Device(D)" -> "Link(N)" from Menu in that order


To unlink linked devices, select the device Nos. of the linked devices, and select "Device(D)" -> "Unlink(D)" from
Menu in that order.

Point Devices can be linked only when they have been sorted in ascending order.

13-34 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13-7 Simulator

Redisplaying devices

The following procedure shows how to redisplay devices that have been hidden by selecting "Device(D)" -> "Hide(B)"
from Menu in that order.

1 Select the devices above and below the device No. of the hidden device so that the hidden device is included
in the selection.
For example, when DM00001 is hidden, select DM00000 and DM00002. The method to select a device is the same
as the "Connection of Device"

DM00000 select
(DM00001): hidden
DM00002 select

2 Select "Device(D)" -> "Redisplay(B)" from Menu in that order .


This displays the hidden device.

Adding devices

Device(D) -> Add device(A)


Adds devices to the Simulator.

Item Description

13
Device(D) Enter the device.
Device type(M) Select device type from "Bit/Word/32-bit".
Select the data format from "Binary/Octal/ Signed decimal/Unsigned decimal/Hex/Float".
Data (L) Signed decimal format numbers are handled as 2's complement. Floating numbers can be
selected only when the device type is 32-bit. Numerical values also can be entered. COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3
Page(P) Specify the page to add the device to.

Point Devices registered on the Simulator are not reflected in the screen data on the VT3.

Deleting devices

Device(D) -> Delete device(D)


Clears (deletes) devices currently registered to the Simulator.

1 Select the device to delete.

2 Either select "Device(D)" -> "Delete device(D)" from Menu in that order, or click the button.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-35


13-7 Simulator

Option Settings

Tools (T) ->Options (O)

Item Description
When this checkbox is marked, communications is started automatically after Simulator
Automatically connect
has started up.
Display format setup Select the initial display format of the word device.

Exiting from the communication

Communication (C) -> Stop (E)


Exit from the Communication between PC and VT3.

Exiting simulator

File(F) -> Exit Simulator(X)


Exits the Simulator.

13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

13-36 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


13-8 Remote COM Port Tool
When a Remote COM Port Tool is used, a virtual COM port will be created on the VT3 series, and it is possible to
send/receive data between a PC (with ladder support software etc.) and a PLC from various manufacturers.

Point For KV-7000 Series KV-5500/5000/3000 Series or KV Nano Series PLC models, data can be
sent and received without use of Remote COM Port Tool if communications are configured
through KV STUDIO network.

Startup of the COM Port Tool


[Communication(C)] -> [Remote COM Port Tool(P)]

For details, please see Remote COM Port Tool User's Manual.

13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 13-37


13-8 Remote COM Port Tool

MEMO

13
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC & VT3

13-38 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


14
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA
This chapter describes the system memory area and how to manipulate the
system memory area by the PLC.

14-1 About System Memory Area ••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 14-2


14-2 VT Mode ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 14-4
14-3 MT Compatible Mode •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 14-11
14-4 PLC-Based Page Switching•••••••••••••••••••••••••••14-17
14-5 Turning Windows ON/OFF by PLCs ••••••••••••••••14-21
14-6 Displaying Interrupt Windows by PLCs •••••••••••••14-24

14
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 14-1


14-1 About System Memory Area
For the communications between VT3 and PLC (read and control the display state of VT3), some PLC devices are
occupied. This occupied area is called System Memory Area.

System Memory Area


System memory area is in one of two modes, VT mode or MT mode. Word devices on the PLC are occupied for each
of these modes as follows:

VT mode

PLC Data

Read System Memory Area


0 to 8 words
VT3 Series Occupy 0 to 20 words
Write of PLC devices
0 to 12 words (variable).

MT mode

PLC Data

Read System Memory Area


8 words
VT3 Series Occupy 16 words of
Write PLC devices
8 words (constant)

Important When the System Memory Area is used for other purposes than data reading and writing, the
VT3 display may disappear and the page may be changed suddenly. Never should the System
Memory Area be used for other purposes.

14 In addition, to use the functions of VT3, please fully understand the System Memory Area.
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

14-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


14-1 About System Memory Area

Setting System Memory Area


Set the leading No. of the system memory area in the system memory area setting screen.
he system memory area setting screen can be displayed by one of the following methods.
• By selecting "System memory area(M)" from the "VT system settings(S)" folder on the "System Settings(S)" tab
in the workspace
• By selecting "Resources(R)" -> "VT system settings(S)" -> "System memory area(M)" from Menu in that order.

The System Memory Area Screen


VT mode

Under the VT mode,


the displayed device
No. and number of
words to be used
should be checked.

MT Compatible Mode

14
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 14-3


14-2 VT Mode

VT Mode List

Important When setting up, please only check the necessary items. After being checked, the assigned
device No. is displayed on one side of the checked item. The PLC continuous word devices
corresponding to the number of checked items should be occupied.

Description Bit Remarks


Current page No. - 0 to 8999 (BCD/decimal)
0 Reserved
1 Memory Card access error *6
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Framing error
Error status
5 Parity error
6 Overrun error
7 to 10 Reserved
11 PLC communications error
12 to 15 Reserved
Date/Time (Disp) "year" - Lower two digit of year (BCD)
Date/Time (Disp) "month" - 01 to 12 "month" (BCD)
Date/Time (Disp) "day" - 01 to 31 "day" (BCD)
Date/Time (Disp) "hours/ minutes" - 00 to 23 "hours", 00 to 59 "minutes" (BCD)
0 Backlight OFF*1
1 Reserved
VT->PLC write area

2 Printing*2, 6
3 Reserved
4 Video play/pause*3
5 Memory Card is being accessed. *6
6 Memory Card usable state *6
Status
7 to 9 Reserved
10 Window 1 display state
11 Window 2 display state
12 Window 3 display state
13 Window 1 display specified state
14 Window 2 display specified state

14 15
0
Window 3 display specified state
Device Monitor screen currently displayed
1 Save log data to Memory Card screen currently displayed *6
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

2 PLC data folder currently being executed


3 The Remote COM Port Tool is being used
4 The operation log browsing picture is being displayed *6
Extended status
5 Ladder monitor execution in progress*7
6 "Backup sensor settings" screen is being displayed*7
7 "Restore sensor settings" screen is being displayed*7
8 "Sensor monitor" screen is being displayed*7
9 to 15 Reserved

14-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


14-2 VT Mode

Description Bit Remarks


Set page No. - 0 to 8999 (BCD/decimal)
Display ON/OFF - LCD display OFF when set to FFFF Hex
Date/Time (Set) "year" - Calendar timer rewrite and lower two digits of year (BCD)
Date/Time (Set) "month" - 01 to 12 "month" (BCD)
Date/Time (Set) "day" - 01 to 31 "day" (BCD)
Date/Time (Set) "hours/
- 00 to 23 "hours", 00 to 59 "minutes" (BCD)
minutes"
0 Backlight OFF
1 Buzzer ON *5
2 Start to print *4, 6
VT->PLC write area

3 to 7 Reserved
8 Video display/Hide *3
9 Clear Memory Card access error *6
Control
10 Window 1 display
11 Window 2 display
12 Window 3 display
13 Window 1 specified display
14 Window 2 specified display
15 Window 3 specified display
Reserved -
Interrupt Window - Display interrupt window
Interrupt window No. - Page No.0 to 8999 of interrupt window (BCD/decimal)
Interrupt window position (X-axis) -
On the upper-left hand of the window (binary0)
Interrupt window position (Y-axis) -
*1 Also change to 1 (ON) when the auto-backlight OFF.
*2 Also change to 1 (ON) under the ìMemory Card Saveî mode.
*3 Only for VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8 In the case of other models, this is reserved.
*4 For the ìMemory Card Saveî mode, printing also starts during the OFF(0)->ON(1) rising edge.
Since VT3-Q5M(W)/Q5M(W)A/V7R cannot connect with the printer unit (VT2-P1/ P2) and Ethernet unit
(VT2-E1/E2, VT3-E3), data can only be saved to Memory Card.
*5 For VT3-V7R, the buzzer turns to ON.
*6 VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G(A) is reserved.
*7 It becomes reserved when using VT3-Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).

Point Reserved areas cannot be used by the user.

When the LCD has turned OFF by "Display ON/OFF", and the backlight has turned OFF by "Control"
14
Reference
bit 0, both the LCD and backlight turn OFF in both cases.
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

Details of VT Mode
Set the leading No. of the system memory area in the system memory area setting screen.
"Setting System Memory Area", page 14-3

Important • The PLC area specified in the System Memory Area should not be used for other purposes
than the communication between VT3 and PLC. Otherwise, an error may occur.
VTMode
• Users cannot use the reserved area. Otherwise, an error may occur.
MTInterchange
Mode

Point When setting up, please only check the necessary items. After being checked, the assigned
device No. is displayed on one side of the checked item. The PLC continuous word devices
corresponding to the number of checked items should be occupied.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 14-5


14-2 VT Mode

Current page No. (VT->PLC)


Reads the currently displayed page No. within the following ranges.

Data Format Setting Range


Binary 0 to 8999
BCD 0 to 8999

Set the data format at "Page No. specify mode" in the VT system settings.
"VT System", page 12-12

Error status (VT->PLC)


Reads the VT3 error information.

Bit Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)


0 Reserved
1 Memory Card access error *1 Error occurred during accessing of Memory Card No abnormality
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
Framing error occurred during communications
4 Framing error No abnormality
with PLC.
Parity error occurred during communications
5 Parity error No abnormality
with PLC.
Overrun error occurred during communications
6 Overrun error No abnormality
with PLC.
7 to 10 Reserved
An error occurs to the communication with
11 Communications error PLC. For more information, please see the bits No abnormality
4 to 6.
12 to 15 Reserved

*1 VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G(A) is reserved.

Reference Details on each error and how to remedy the error


"Appendix-1 Error Troubleshooting and Removal" in the VT3 Series Hardware Manual

Point Once being set to ON, the bits (4 to 6, 11) associated with abnormal communications continue
the ON state under the Run mode. To turn them to OFF, you can temporarily turn off the power
of VT3 or change to the system mode and re-enter the Run mode, thus eliminating the error.
To turn the ON state of bit 1 OFF, clear Memory Card access error in "Control" by turning the
OFF bit ON.

14 Date/Time (Disp) (VT->PLC)


Read the current value of the clock on VT3 in the BCD format.
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

Year (expressed in BCD): 1st word

bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Reserved (normally 00) Year (the last two positions of the solar calendar: 00 to 99)

Month (expressed in BCD): 2nd word

bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Reserved (normally 00) Month (01 to 12)

14-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


14-2 VT Mode

Day (expressed in BCD): 3rd word

bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Reserved (normally 00) Day (01 to 31)

Hour/minute (expressed in BCD): 4th word

bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Reserved (normally 00 to 23) Minute(00 to 59)

Status (VT->PLC)
Read the states of VT3

Bit Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)


0 Backlight OFF state*1 Backlight OFF Backlight ON
1 Reserved
2 Printing*2, 4 Printout in progress Printout not in progress
3 Reserved
4 Video play/pause*3 Pause screen Video image
5 Memory Card is being accessed.*4 Memory Card is being accessed. Memory Card is not being accessed.
Memory Card is inserted in Memory Memory Card is not inserted in
6 Memory Card usable state*4 Card slot, and Memory Card slot Memory Card slot, or Memory Card
cover is closed. slot cover is open.
7 to 9 Reserved
10 Window 1 display state Window 1 screen assumed display state. Window 1 screen assumed hidden state.
11 Window 2 display state Window 2 screen assumed display state. Window 2 screen assumed hidden state.
12 Window 3 display state Window 3 screen assumed display state. Window 3 screen assumed hidden state.
13 Window 1 display specified state Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
14 Window 2 display specified state Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
15 Window 3 display specified state Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch

*1 Bit 0 "Backlight OFF state" turns "1" (ON) even when Auto-backlight is OFF.
About Auto-backlight OFF
"VT System", page 12-12
14
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

*2 Also change to 1 (ON) under the "Memory Card Save” mode.


Since VT3-Q5M(W)/Q5M(W)A cannot connect with the printer unit (VT2-P1/ P2) and Ethernet unit (VT2-E1/
E2, VT3-E3), data can only be saved to Memory Card.
*3 Only for VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8 In the case of other models, this is reserved.
*4 VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G(A) is reserved.

Point Bit 4 "Video play/pause" notifies the video display state of channel 1 or RGB.
When both Channel 1 and RGB are available, the video display state of Channel 1 is
displayed.

VT Mode

MTInterchange
Mode

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 14-7


14-2 VT Mode

Extended status (VT->PLC)


Bit Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)
0 Device Monitor screen currently displayed*1 Device Monitor screen currently displayed Device monitor screen not displayed
Save log data to Memory Card Save log data to Memory Card Save record data to Memory Card
1 screen currently displayed*2 screen currently displayed screen not displayed
2 PLC data folder currently being executed PLC data folder currently being executed PLC data folder not being executed
3 The Remote COM Port Tool is being used*3 The Remote COM Port Tool is being used The Remote COM Port Tool is not used
The operation log browsing picture is The operation log browsing picture is The operation log browsing picture is
4 being displayed*2 being displayed not displayed
5 Ladder monitor execution in progress*4 Ladder monitor execution in progress Ladder monitor not in execution
"Backup sensor settings" screen is "Backup sensor settings" screen is "Backup sensor settings" screen
6 being displayed*4 being displayed not displayed
"Restore sensor settings" screen is "Restore sensor settings" screen is "Restore sensor settings" screen
7 being displayed*4 being displayed not displayed
"Sensor monitor" screen is being "Sensor monitor" screen is being "Sensor monitor" screen not
8 displayed*4 displayed displayed
9 to 15 Reserved

*1 When the window is displayed, the device monitor is not opened. Under the system mode, it is opened when the window is displayed.
*2 VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G(A) is reserved.
*3 This is not opened when setting "Maintain the Run State of the Remote COM Port Target Device".
*4 Reserved when using VT3-Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A/Q5H(G)/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).

Switch page No. (PLC -> VT)


Specifies the page No. to be displayed by an instruction from the PLC. Specify the page No. within the following range.

Data Format Setting Range


Binary 0 to 8999
BCD 0 to 8999

Set the data format at "Page No. specify mode" in the VT system settings.
"VT System", page 12-12

Reference The "Page Change Mode" option in the system mode of VT3 can be set to either "PLC and Switch" or
"PLC or Switch". Pages that are created not with VT STUDIO cannot be specified.
"5-2 Option Setup", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"14-4 PLC-Based Page Switching"

Display ON/OFF (PLC->VT)


Turns the LCD and backlight ON and OFF.

LCD and Backlight Setting Range

14
OFF FFFF Hex
ON Value other than above
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

Setting "Display ON/OFF" to "0" by touching the screen during screen display OFF.
After being checked, when the LCD and backlight are turned off through "Screen Display ON/OFF", you can open
LCD and backlight by touching the screen of VT3.

With the Bit 0 of "Controls" being set to 1 (ON), when the backlight is turned OFF, you cannot
Point
turn ON the backlight by touching the screen of VT3. Please set the Bit 0 of "Controls" to 0
(OFF) before turning ON the backlight.

Date/Time (Set) (PLC->VT)


Set up "Year" (the last two positions of the solar calendar) and the change mark of the clock. Year 2000 is set to "00".
Year (expressed in BCD): 1st word
bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Reserved Years (the last two positions of the solar calendar: 00 to 99)

Calendar timer rewrite flag


14-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
14-2 VT Mode

Sets "month", "day" and "hours/minutes".

Month (expressed in BCD): 2nd word

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Reserved Month (01 to 12)

Day (expressed in BCD): 3rd word

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Reserved Day (01 to 31)

Hour/minute (expressed in BCD): 4th word

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Hour (00 to 23) Minute (00 to 59)

Point Rewriting of the calendar timer will not be executed unless correct values are set to year/
month/day/hours: minutes.

Reference • When the clock change mark is ON, the setting value of the clock, if changed, also changes to the
current value.
• Clock Adjustment
"5-2 Option Setup", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

Control (PLC->VT)
Sets the various controls on the VT3.

Bit Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)


0 Backlight OFF Backlight OFF Backlight ON
1 Buzzer ON *3 Buzzer output ON Buzzer output OFF
2 Start to print *1, 4 Printout is executed by bit state changing from OFF to ON.
3 to 7
8
Reserved
Video display/Hide *2 Video image is displayed. Video image is not displayed.
14
Memory Card access error is cleared by bit state changing from OFF to
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

9 Clear Memory Card access error *4


ON.
10 Window 1 display Window 1 screen assumed display state. Window 1 screen assumed hidden state.
11 Window 2 display Window 2 screen assumed display state. Window 2 screen assumed hidden state.
12 Window 3 display Window 3 screen assumed display state. Window 3 screen assumed hidden state.
13 Window 1 specified display Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
14 Window 2 specified display Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
15 Window 3 specified display Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch

*1 For the "Memory Card Save" mode, printing also starts during the OFF(0)->ON(1) rising edge.
Since VT3-Q5M(W)/Q5M(W)A/V7R cannot connect with the printer unit (VT2-P1/P2) and Ethernet unit
VT Mode
(VT2-E1/E2, VT3-E3), data can only be saved to Memory Card.
MTInterchange
*2 Only for VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8 In the case of other models, this is reserved. Mode
Video images are displayed at all times when "Control" is not used.
*3 For VT3-V7R, the buzzer turns to ON.
*4 VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G(A) is reserved.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 14-9


14-2 VT Mode

Point • All four channels are controlled by bit 8 "Video display/hide".


(Not only for the video input, but also for the RGB input)
• Video (moving images) are displayed as video display when bit 8 is set to "1" (ON).
• When VT3 is set to Vertical Picture, a bitmap file, when being opened on the PC, that is
saved to Memory Card through “Start to Print” of Bit 2, is rotated 90 degrees.
"Print", page 8-20
• With VT1, when Interrupt Window is displayed (ON), Bit 12 “Display Window 3” turns to 1
(ON). With VT3, however, it doesnít turn to 1 (ON).

Reference "14-5 Turning Windows ON/OFF by PLCs"

Interrupt window (PLC->VT)


Set up the display control of the window

Bit Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)


0 Display control Display No display
1 to 15 Reserved

Reference "14-6 Displaying Interrupt Windows by PLCs"

Interrupt window No. (PLC->VT)


Specifies the page No. of the interrupt window that is displayed by bit 0 of the interrupt window.

Data Format Setting Range


Binary 0 to 8999
BCD 0 to 8999

Set the data format at "Page No. specify mode" in the VT system settings.
"VT System", page 12-12

Interrupt Window Coordinate (PLC->VT)


Specify the upper-left hand of the interrupt window as the display position of Bit 0 of the interrupt window.

X-axis Setting Range Y-axis Setting Range


Data Format Model
(1st word) (2nd word)
Horizontal
screen 0 to 1023 0 to 767

14 VT3-X15
Vertical
screen 0 to 767 0 to 1023
Horizontal
0 to 799 0 to 599
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

screen
VT3-S12/S10
Vertical
screen 0 to 599 0 to 799
Horizontal
screen 0 to 639 0 to 479
Unsigned decimal VT3-V10/V8/V7/V7R/V6H(G)
Vertical
screen 0 to 479 0 to 639
Horizontal
screen 0 to 319 0 to 239
VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/
Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A Vertical
screen 0 to 239 0 to 319
Horizontal
screen 0 to 319 0 to 127
VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A)
Vertical
screen 0 to 127 0 to 319

Reference • Origin (0,0) is located at the upper-left hand of the picture.


• The specified coordinate value is limited by the window size. Please do not exceed the limit when
setting up. In addition, please set up in the multiple of 16.

14-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


14-3 MT Compatible Mode

MT Compatible Mode List


In the MT mode, 16 continuous word devices on the PLC are occupied.

Device No. Description Bit Remarks


Leading No. +0 Current page No. - 0 to 8999 (BCD/decimal)
0 Printing*1, 5
1 Reserved
2 Backlight OFF state*2
3 Video play/pause*3
4 Memory Card is being accessed.*5
5 Page switching setting state
6 Page switching mode
7 Memory Card usable state*5
Leading No. +1 Display state
8 Window 1 display state
9 Window 2 display state
10 Window 3 display state
11 Window 1 display specified state
12 Window 2 display specified state
13 Window 3 display specified state
14 Reserved
15 Interrupt window display state
0 System memory error
1 Reserved
2 Memory Card access error*5
3 to 7 Reserved
VT->PLC write area

8 Communications error
9 Overrun error
Leading No. +2 Display error state
10 Framing error
11 Parity error
12 PLC communications state error
13 Time-out error
14 Checksum error
15 Reserved
Leading No. 3 Date/Time (Disp) "yy/ mm" - "Year (lower two digit)/month" (BCD)
Leading No. +4 Date/Time (Disp) "dd/ day" - "Day/day of the week" (BCD)
Leading No. +5 Date/Time (Disp) "hh/ mm" - "Hours/minutes" (BCD)
0

1
Device Monitor screen currently displayed
Save log data to Memory Card screen 14
currently displayed*5
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

2 PLC data folder currently being executed


3 The Remote COM Port Tool is being used
The operation log browsing picture is
4 being displayed*5
Leading No. +6 Extended display state 5 Ladder monitor execution in progress*6
"Backup sensor settings" screen is being
6 displayed*7
"Restore sensor settings" screen is being
7 displayed*7
"Sensor monitor" screen is being
8 displayed*7
VT Mode
9 to 15 Reserved
MTInterchange
Leading No. +7 Reserved - Mode

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 14-11


14-3 MT Compatible Mode

Device No. Description Bit Remarks


Leading No. +8 Switch page (specify page No.) - Page No. specification (BCD/ decimal)
Leading No. +9 Specify the Interrupt Window No. - Page No. specification (BCD/ decimal)
0 Execute printing *4, 5
1 Reserved
2 Backlight OFF
Date/Time setting (year/month/day/day of
3 week) changed
4 Date/Time setting (hours/minutes) changed
5 Page switching setting
6 Page switching mode
PLC->VT write area

Leading No. 7 Clear error


Display control
+10
8 Window 1 display
9 Window 2 display
10 Window 3 display
11 Window 1 specified display
12 Window 2 specified display
13 Window 3 specified display
14 Reserved
15 Interrupt window display state
Leading No. +11 Date/Time (Set) "yy/mm" - "Year (lower two digit)/month" (BCD)
Leading No. +12 Date/Time (Set) "dd/day" - "Day/day of the week" (BCD)
Leading No. +13 Date/Time (Set) "hh/mm" - "Hours/minutes" (BCD)
Leading No. +14 Reserved - Not Usable
Leading No. +15 Reserved - Not Usable

*1 Also change to 1 (ON) under the "Memory Card Save" mode.


*2 Also change to 1 (ON) when the auto-backlight OFF.
*3 Only for VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8 In the case of other models, this is reserved.
*4 For the "Memory Card Save" mode, printing also starts during the OFF(0)->ON(1) rising edge.
Since VT3-Q5M(W)/Q5M(W)A/V7R cannot connect with the printer unit (VT2-P1/ P2) and Ethernet unit
(VT2-E1/E2, VT3-E3), data can only be saved to Memory Card.
*5 VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G(A) is reserved.
*6 It becomes reserved when using VT3-Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).

Point • Reserved areas cannot be used by the user.


• For the MT Interchange Mode, the video display/hide (only for VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8)
controls are not available. The normal display state is available.

14 Reference When the backlight has turned OFF by "Display control" bit 2, both the LCD and backlight turn OFF.

Details of MT Compatible Mode


SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

Set the leading No. of the system memory area in the system memory area setting screen.
"Setting System Memory Area", page 14-3

Important • The PLC area specified in the System Memory Area should not be used for other purposes
than the communication between VT3 and PLC. Otherwise, an error may occur.
• Users cannot use the reserved area. Otherwise, an error may occur.

Current page No. (Leading No. + 0: VT->PLC)


Reads the currently displayed page No. within the following ranges.

Data Format Setting Range


Binary 0 to 8999
BCD 0 to 8999

Set the data format at "Page No. specify mode" in the VT system settings.
"VT System", page 12-12

14-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


14-3 MT Compatible Mode

Display state (Leading No. + 1: VT->PLC)


Read the states of VT3

Bit Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)


0 Printing*1, 4 Printout in progress Printout not in progress
1 Reserved
2 Backlight OFF state*2 Backlight OFF Backlight ON
3 Video play/pause*3 Pause screen Video image
4 Memory Card is being accessed. Memory Card is being accessed. Memory Card is not being accessed.
5 Page switching setting state Switch on PLC Switch by touch switch
6 Page switching mode Bit page switching Switch by page switching (leading No. +8)
Memory Card is inserted in Memory Card Memory Card is not inserted in Memory Card
7 Memory Card usable state*4
slot, and Memory Card slot cover is closed. slot, or Memory Card slot cover is open.
8 Window 1 display state Window 1 display Window 1 hide
9 Window 2 display state Window 2 display Window 2 hide
10 Window 3 display state Window 3 display Window 3 hide
11 Window 1 display specified state Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
12 Window 2 display specified state Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
13 Window 3 display specified state Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
14 Reserved
15 Interrupt window display state Display interrupt window Hide interrupt window

*1 Also change to 1 (ON) under the "Memory Card Save" mode.


Since VT3-Q5M(W)/Q5M(W)A/V7R cannot connect with the printer unit (VT2-P1/ P2) and Ethernet unit
(VT2-E1/E2, VT3-E3), data can only be saved to Memory Card.
*2 Bit 2 "Backlight OFF state" turns "1" (ON) even when Auto-backlight is OFF.
About Auto-backlight OFF
"VT System", page 12-12
*3 Only for VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8 In the case of other models, this is reserved.
*4 VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) is reserved.

Point • Bit 3 "Video play/pause" notifies the video display state of channel 1 or RGB. When both
Channel 1 and RGB are available, the video display state of Channel 1 is displayed.
• With VT1, when Interrupt Window is displayed (ON), Bit 12 "Display Window 3" turns to 1
(ON). With VT3, however, it doesnít turn to 1 (ON).

Display error state (Leading No. + 2: VT->PLC)


Reads the VT3 error information.

Bit
0 Reserved
Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)
14
1 Reserved
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

2 Memory Card access error *1 Error occurred during accessing of Memory Card No abnormality
3 to 7 Reserved
One of following communications errors
8 Communications error No abnormality
occurring:
9 Overrun error Overrun error No abnormality
10 Framing error Framing error No abnormality
11 Parity error Parity Error No abnormality
12 PLC communications state error Communications error on PLC No abnormality
13 Time-out error Time-out error No abnormality
14 Checksum error Checksum error No abnormality VT Mode
15 Reserved MTInterchange
*1 VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G(A) is reserved. Mode

Point Once being set to ON, the bits (2, 8 to 14) associated with abnormal communications
continue the ON state under the Run mode. To close the ON state of the bits (2, 8 to 14), you
can set the Clear Error control (the initial number + 10) of the display from OFF to ON.
Alternatively, you can clear an error state by temporarily turning off the power of VT3 or first
entering the system mode and then re-enter the run mode.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 14-13


14-3 MT Compatible Mode

Date/Time (Disp) (Leading No. + 3 to + 5: VT->PLC)


Reads the current value of the VT3's calendar timer in BCD format.

Year/month (expressed in BCD) (leading No. + 3)


bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Year (the last two positions of the solar calendar: 00 to 99) Month (01 to 12)

Day/day of the week (expressed in BCD) (leading No. + 4)


bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Day (01 to 31) Weekday (00: Sunday to 06: Saturday)

Hours/minutes (expressed in BCD) (leading No. + 5)


bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Hour (00 to 23) Minute (00 to 59)

Extended display (Leading No. + 6: VT->PLC)


Bit Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)
Device Monitor screen Device Monitor screen currently
0 Device monitor screen not displayed
currently displayed *1, 3 displayed
Display the Memory Card picture Hide the Memory Card picture
Save log data to Memory
through which the record data is through which the record data is
1 Card screen currently
saved. saved.
displayed *2
Displayed
PLC data folder currently PLC data folder currently being
2 PLC data folder not being executed
being executed executed
The Remote COM Port Tool The Remote COM Port Tool is being The Remote COM Port Tool is not
3
14
is being used *3 used used
The operation log browsing The operation log browsing picture is The operation log browsing picture is
4 picture is being displayed *2 being displayed not displayed
Ladder monitor execution in
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

5 Ladder monitor execution in progress Ladder monitor not in execution


progress*4
"Backup sensor settings" "Backup sensor settings" screen is "Backup sensor settings" screen not
6 screen is being displayed*4 being displayed displayed
"Restore sensor settings" "Restore sensor settings" screen is "Restore sensor settings" screen not
7 screen is being displayed*4 being displayed displayed
"Sensor monitor" screen is "Sensor monitor" screen is being
"Sensor monitor" screen not displayed
8 being displayed*4 displayed
9 to 15 Reserved

*1 Not opened when the device monitor is displayed in the window. Under the system mode, it is opened when
the window is displayed.
*2 VT3-W4T(A)/W4M (A)/W4G(A) is reserved.
*3 This is not opened when setting "Maintain the Run State of the Remote COM Port Target Device".
*4 It becomes reserved when using VT3-Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/Q5M(W)A/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).

14-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


14-3 MT Compatible Mode

Switch page (specify page No.) (Leading No. + 8: VT ->PLC)


Specify the page No. you want to display within the following range.

Data Format Setting Range


Binary 0 to 8999
BCD 0 to 8999

Set the data format at "Page No. specify mode" in the VT system settings.
"VT System", page 12-12

Specify the interrupt window No. (Leading No. + 9: PLC->VT)


Set the data format at "Page No. specify mode" in the VT system settings.

Data Format Setting Range


Binary 0 to 8999
BCD 0 to 8999

Set the data format at "Page No. specify mode" in the VT system settings.
"VT System", page 12-12

Display Control (Leading No. + 10: PLC->VT)


Ensure to set up it when the communication is undertaken between VT3 and PLC.

Bit Description When 1 (ON) When 0 (OFF)


0 Execute printing*1, 3 Printing is executed by bit state changing to ON from OFF.
1 Reserved
2 Backlight OFF Backlight OFF Backlight ON
Date/Time setting (year/month/day/ (year/month/day/day of week) changed by bit state changing to ON from
3 day of week) changed OFF
Date/Time setting (hours/minutes)
4 (hours/minutes) changed by bit state changing to ON from OFF
changed
5 Page switching setting Switch on PLC Switch by touch switch
Switch by page switching (leading
6 Page switching mode Bit page switching*2
No. +8)
Communications error and Memory Card access error bit are cleared by
7 Clear error
the bit state changing from OFF to ON.
8 Window 1 display ON Window 1 display ON Window 1 display OFF
9 Window 2 display ON Window 2 display ON Window 2 display OFF
10 Window 3 display ON Window 3 display ON Window 3 display OFF
11 Window 1 display setting Specify on PLC Specify by touch switch
12
13
Window 2 display setting
Window 3 display setting
Specify on PLC
Specify on PLC
Specify by touch switch
Specify by touch switch
14
14 Reserved
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

15 Execution of interrupt window display Display interrupt window Hide interrupt window

*1 For the "Memory Card Save" mode, printing also starts during the OFF(0)->ON(1) rising edge.
*2 "Other", page 12-31
*3 VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G(A) is reserved.

Point • For the MT Interchange Mode, the video display/hide (only for VT3-X15/S12/S10/V10/V8)
controls are not available. The normal display state is available.
• When VT3 is set to Vertical Picture, a bitmap file, when being opened on the PC, that is
saved to Memory Card through "Start to Print" of Bit 0, is rotated 90 degrees.
VT Mode
"Print", page 8-20
MTInterchange
Mode

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 14-15


14-3 MT Compatible Mode

Date/Time (Set) (Leading No. + 11 to + 13: PLC -> VT)


To use the calendar timer setting value, mark the "Use PLC Date/Time" checkbox.

Year/month (expressed in BCD) (leading No. +11)


bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Year (the last two positions of the solar calendar: 00 to 99) Month (01 to 12)

Day/day of the week (expressed in BCD) (leading No. +12)


bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Day (01 to 31) Weekday (00: Sunday to 06: Saturday)

Hours/minutes (expressed in BCD) (leading No. +13)


bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Hour (00 to 23) Minute (00 to 59)

Reference Clock Adjustment


"5-2 Option Setup", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

14
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

14-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


14-4 PLC-Based Page Switching

How to Switch Pages in the VT Mode


The following describes how to switch pages by the PLC when the system memory area is used set to the VT mode.

Setting System Memory Area

1 Display the system memory area setting screen.


The system memory area setting screen can be displayed by one of the following methods.
• By selecting "Resources(R)" -> "VT system settings(S)" -> "System memory area(M)" from Menu in that order
• By selecting the system memory area at "VT system settings(S)" on the "System Settings(S)" tab in the workspace

2 Mark the "Switch page No." checkbox.


Confirm the device No. to write the page No. to.

Here, as shown in the above picture, we'll take the PLC’s Data Memory DM0000 (for KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700,
Data Memory DM00000; for KZ-A500, Data Register D000000) as the device whose page No. is to be changed.

14
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 14-17


14-4 PLC-Based Page Switching

Making PLC ladder programs


In the PLC ladder program, write the page No. to be switched to the device of the set page No.

[Example] To switch to page 1

The ladder diagram programs used by the KZ and KV (not including


KZ-A500) series.
**** #00001 DM0000
<LDA> <STA>

The adder diagram programs used by KZ-A500 and the MELSEC-A


series made by Mitsubishi Electric.
****
MOV K1 D0

The ladder diagram program in the SYSMAC-C series from OMRON.


****
MOV
# 0001
DM0000
**** are the page change condition relays.
When the page No. of the VT system is specified in the binary format.

"VT System", page 12-12

Contention in page switching by page switching by PLC and page switching by switch
The page No. currently specified by the switch is written to the device of the switching page No. on the PLC when the
switch to which the page switching function is set is selected. From then on, the page No. is written to the device
having the currently displayed page No. in the system memory area after the specified page is switched to.

[Example] To switch to page 10 by page switching switch placed on page 0

Page 0 Page 10

14 Switch Page 10
Specify: page change
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

Specify the page No.: 10

Write
The currently
displayed page No. 0 0 10

Write
Switch to a new
0 10 10
page No.
A

14-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


14-4 PLC-Based Page Switching

When a numerical value is written to the switching page No. by the PLC after A in the example A on the previous
page, the page No. written by the PLC is switched to immediately after the page No. specified by the switch is
displayed. (Page switching by PLC is given priority.)
When performing page switching by PLC, page switching by switches is no longer possible when numerical values
are continuously written to the switching page No.

Page 0 Page 10 Page 0

Page 10

Write Write
The currently
0 10 0
displayed page No.

Write Read
Switch to a new
0 10 0 0 0
page No.

Write (continuous) o from the PLC

To prevent page switching by switches from being disabled, write the numerical values to the switching page No.
when the page switching conditions are satisfied when the page is switched by the PLC.

[Example] To switch to page 2 by the PLC

The ladder diagram programs used by the KZ and KV (not including


KZ-A500) series.

14
**** #00002 DM0000
LDA> STA> SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

The ladder diagram program in KZ-A500


****
MOVP K2 D0

The ladder diagram program in the SYSMAC-C series from OMRON.


****
@MOV
# 0002
DM0000
**** are the page change condition relays.
When the page No. of the VT system is specified in the binary format.

"VT System", page 12-12

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 14-19


14-4 PLC-Based Page Switching

How to prevent contention in page switching by page switching by PLC and page
switching by switch
There are two ways of preventing contention between page switching by PLCs and page switching by switches.

• When performing page switching by touch switches on the VT3, manipulate the internal relays of the PLC with the
switch function as a bit set, and create a ladder program taking this relay as the page switching condition relay.

[Example] KZ, KV (excluding A500) series

Set up the switch


Ladder diagram program

01000 #***** DM0000


<LDA> <STA>

**** Page No. to be changed.

• When performing page switching by touch switches on the VT3, set the page No. (numerical value) for switching to
the device of the switching page No. of the PLC with the switch function as a word set.

[Example] KZ, KV (excluding A500) series

Set up with the switch

Set the page No. to be switched to as the [Setting Data].


Switch to Page 1 from the left screen.
No need to create the ladder diagram program.

14 Point Contention by page switching by PLCs when using function controls by device (page
switching) on basic part devices is the same as contention with page switching by switches.
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

14-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


14-5 Turning Windows ON/OFF by PLCs

How to Turn Windows ON/OFF in the VT Mode


The following describes how to turn the local window display (windows 1/2/3) ON and OFF by the PLC when the
system memory area is used set to the VT mode.

Setting System Memory Area

1 Display the system memory area setting screen.


The system memory area setting screen can be displayed by one of the following methods.
• By selecting "Resources(R)" -> "VT system settings(S)" -> "System memory area(M)" from Menu in that order
• By selecting the system memory area at "VT system settings(S)" on the "System Settings(S)" tab in the workspace

2 Mark the "Control" checkbox.


Confirm the device No. used by control.

The following explanation is for an example when the control device is set to the PLC's data memory DM0000 (in the
case of the KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700, data memory DM00000, or in the case of the A500, data register
D000000) as shown in the above screen.

Making PLC ladder programs


In the PLC ladder program, manipulate the window (1 to 3) display specified bits (13, 14, 15) and the window (1 to 3)
display bits (10, 11, 12) in the device to be controlled.
14
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Control Description Target Window Setting Method


Bit 10 Window 1 When ON/OFF is specified on PLC:
Bit 11 Window display Window 2 0 (OFF) : Display OFF
Window 3 1 (ON) : Display ON
Bit 12
Bit 13 Window 1
0 (OFF) : Specify by switch
Bit 14 Specify window display Window 2
1 (ON) : Specify on PLC
Bit 15 Window 3

For example, to set Window 1 to Display ON from the PLC, set Bit 13 (Window 1 Display Specify) and Bit 10 (Window
1 Display) to 1 (ON). On the contrary, to set Window 1 to Display OFF from the PLC, set Bit 13 (Window 1 Display
Specify) and Bit 10 (Window 1 Display) to 0 (OFF).

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 14-21


14-5 Turning Windows ON/OFF by PLCs

[Example] To turn the display of window 1 ON

The ladder diagram programs used by the KZ and KV (not


including KZ-A500) series.
**** $2400 DM0000
<LDA> <STA>
$,specify a hexadecimal constant

The ladder diagram program in KZ-A500


****
MOV H2400 D0
H, specify a hexadecimal constant

The ladder diagram program in the SYSMAC-C series from OMRON.


****
MOV
# 2400
DM0000

**** is the condition relay to be displayed in the window.

Reference Window display changes as follows when the window display bits (10 to 12) are in the following states
when the window display specified bits (13 to 15) change state to OFF:
When the window display bit is ON: The window display stays ON.
When the window display bit is OFF: The window display turns OFF.

[Example] To turn the display of window 1 OFF

The ladder diagram programs used by the KZ and KV (not including


KZ-A500) series.
**** $2000 DM0000
<LDA> <STA>
$, specify a hexadecimal constant

The ladder diagram program in KZ-A500


****
MOV H2000 D0
H,specify a hexadecimal constant

The ladder diagram program in the SYSMAC-C series from OMRON.


14 ****
MOV
# 2000
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

DM0000

**** is the condition relay to be displayed in the window.

Constants for turning window display ON and OFF

Window Display ON Display OFF


Window 1 2400H 2000H
Window 2 4800H 4000H
Window 3 9000H 8000H

H stands for Hexadecimal.

14-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


14-5 Turning Windows ON/OFF by PLCs

Contention between window ON/OFF by PLCs and window ON/OFF by switches


When the bit (13,14, or 15) to specify the window (1 to 3) display is 1(ON) (turn the window display ON/OFF from the
PLC), the switches that are used to specify the windows to be displayed cannot be used.
Pressing such switches, you will be prompted with "SW-based Window Switching Not Allowed" on VT3.
Switches to which the window display function is set can be operated only when specify window (1 to 3) display bits
(13, 14, 15) are set to "0" (OFF). (At this time, window display ON/OFF cannot be turned ON or OFF by the PLC.)

Contention between window ON/OFF by PLCs and window ON/OFF by switches does not occur as the PLC can
control which of the PLC or switches turns the window display ON or OFF in this way.

14
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 14-23


14-6 Displaying Interrupt Windows by PLCs
Outline of Interrupt Windows
When the Interrupt Window is executed, the display of the Window 3 picture in the page specified with the interrupt window
No. is interrupted. The display of the Window 3 picture in a currently displayed page No. cannot be interrupted.
Though basic parts (function control by devices) must be placed for global windows in all pages in which the basic
parts are to be shown, global windows can be easily displayed in any page by using system memory area.

Auto operation

Alarm Interrupt the display of the Window 3


picture in other pages.

The Base window and Window 1/2/3


pictures in a currently display page No.

Reference • About interrupt windows


"Screen Configuration", page 2-5
• On the VT1, when an interrupt window was executed, the display of the window 3 screen of the
currently displayed page No. is interrupted, and the window 3 screen of the page specified by the
interrupt window No. is displayed as the interrupt window.
• When interrupt window display was canceled, the regular window 3 screen of the currently
displayed No. was displayed while the window 3 screen was displayed. (only when window 3
having the currently displayed page No. is displayed by window setting "Initial display" for the
system memory area, function control by devices, or screen attribute settings)
The regular screen having the currently displayed page No. was displayed for the base and window 1/
2 screens.
• On the VT1, notification of screen switching was executed if it was set in the screen attribute
settings
for the base and windows as page switching occurred when an interrupt window was displayed.

Point When an interrupt window display is turned ON while a global window is displayed, the
following happens if the number of devices, screen data size, number of key entry parts, size
of overlapping data, and other restrictions are exceeded.
• The display of all currently displayed global windows turns OFF, and display of the
interrupt window turns ON.
• The states of local windows (windows 1 to 3) do not change.
• The notify bit device for notifying global window errors turns ON.
It is possible that even all the Global windows are Display OFF, the Interrupt Window can still
14 not be displayed. (at this time, ìGlobal Window Display Errorî is displayed on VT3). In such a
case, Window 3 which is used as the interrupt window display is beyond the restrictions
established for the interrupt window. The restrictions established for the interrupt windows
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

are the same as those established for the Global windows.


"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"
Global window Nofity error
"Other", page 12-31
"12-9 Data Check"

14-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


14-6 Displaying Interrupt Windows by PLCs

How to Display Interrupt Windows in the VT Mode


The following describes how to display interrupt window 3 by PLCs when the system memory area is used set to the
VT mode.

Setting System Memory Area

1 Display the system memory area setting screen.


The system memory area setting screen can be displayed by one of the following methods.
• By selecting "Resources(R)" -> "VT system settings(S)" -> "System memory area(M)" from Menu in that order
• By selecting the system memory area at "VT system settings(S)" on the "System Settings(S)" tab in the
workspace.

2 Mark the "Interrupt window" and "Interrupt window No." checkboxes.


Confirm the device Nos. used at "Interrupt window" and "Interrupt window No.".

Descriptions from here on are given assuming that the interrupt window device is set to data memory PLC DM0000
(in the case of KV-5500/5000/3000/1000/700, to data memory DM00000, and in the case of A500 to data register
D000000) and the interrupt window No. device is set to PLC data memory DM0001 (in the case of KV-5500/5000/
3000/1000/700, to data memory DM00001, and in the case of A500 to data register D000001) as shown in the screen
above.
14
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 14-25


14-6 Displaying Interrupt Windows by PLCs

Making PLC ladder programs


In the PLC ladder program, manipulate the interrupt window execution (bit 0) in the interrupt window.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Interrupt Window Description Setting Method


Execution of interrupt 0 (OFF) : Interrupt window is not displayed
Bit 0
window 1 (ON) : Interrupt window is displayed

Specify the page No. of the window 3 screen to be displayed as the interrupt window by the device of the interrupt
window No.

[Example] To display the window 3 screen on page 10 as an interrupt window

The ladder diagram programs used by the KZ and KV (not including


KZ-A500) series.
**** #00010 DM0001 $0001 DM0000
<LDA> <STA> <LDA> <STA>
$,specify a hexadecimal constant

The ladder diagram program in KZ-A500


****
MOV K10 D1

MOV H0001 D2
H,specify a hexadecimal constant

The ladder diagram program in the SYSMAC-C series from OMRON.


****
MOV
# 000A
DM0001
MOV
# 0001
DM0000

**** is the condition relay to interrupt the window.


When the page No. of the VT system is specified in the binary format.

14
"VT System", page 12-12

To cancel the interrupt window, store numerical value "0" to data memory DM0000 (in the case of KV-5500/5000/
SYSTEM MEMORY AREA

3000/1000/700, data memory D00000, and in the case of A500, data register D000000).

Reference The display position when the interrupt window is displayed can be specified using "Interrupt window
position".
"Interrupt Window Coordinate (PLC->VT)", page 14-10

14-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15
PLC DATA FOLDER
This chapter describes PLC data folder functions and how to operate the PLC
data folder editing tool.

15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function) •••••••••••••••••• 15-2


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder ••••••••••••••••••••••••15-22

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-1


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)
The PLC Data Folder is used to write all the PLC device values edited with VTSTUDIO to the PLC, or read all the
PLC device values to VT STUDIO. Here, the functions and editing tools of the PLC Data Folder (PDF) will be
described.

Structure of PLC Data Folders


With the PDF, all the PLC device values (mechanical parameters etc.) edited with VTSTUDIOare written to the PLC
via VT3.In addition, all the device values saved in the PLC can be read and saved as the CSV files (*.csv).
The following shows the structure of a PLC data folder.

System configuration when using the VT3 internal memory (SRAM)

Data Transmit*1 Write

Data Receive*1 Read

VT STUDIO VT3 Internal PLC from other companies


memory (SRAM)

Start End

Data editing

CSV files
output

CSV files
input

PLC's PDF editing Microsoft Excel and table tools


tools
*1 Settings and data can be sent/received between PC (VT STUDIO) and VT3 via the PC serial port, USB port, or
Ethernet.
"13-1 Preparations for Communication Between PC & VT3"

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

15-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

Configuration when Memory Card is used

Write*2 Write
Install

Read*2 Read

Memory Card*1 VT3 Series The PLC from other manufacturers


VT STUDIO
OP-42254

Start End

Data editing

CSV files
output

CSV files
input

PLC's PDF editing Microsoft Excel and table tools


tools

*1 Data is stored in the memory card (OP-42254) in the VT3-specific file format (VTDVC **.WD3) (“**” denotes
the file No., which is a numerical value 00 to 99).
*2 With the FTP server, data can be read from/written to the memory card via Ethernet. The Ethernet components
are needed (VT2-E1/E2, VT3-E3).
"8-5 FTP Server Function”, VT3 Series Hardware Manual
"6-5 Ethernet Components”, VT3 Series Hardware Manual

Point Memory card can not be used by VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-3


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

Flow Up to Execution of PLC Data Folders


The following shows the flow of operations up to execution of PLC data folders.
In addition, a computer on which VTSTUDIO is installed is called PC hereafter.

Procedure Please refer to

Select the destination folder for the PDF data in the


"Structure of PLC Data Folders", page 15-2
internal memory (SRAM)/memory card.

"About PLC Data Folder Data", page 15-5


Determine the PLC device and its value which
"Size of PLC Data Folder Data", page 15-8
transmits/receives data between VT3 and PLC.

Start the PLC PDF editing tool to create and edit


PDF data. "Editing PLC Data Folder Data", page 15-13
"PLC Data Folder Editing Tool", page 15-14
When the internal memory (SRAM) is used, the PDF
"PLC Data Folder Editing Tool Menu", page 15-15
data is saved as one part of the VTS file. "How to Operate PLC Data Folder Editing Tool",
When the memory card is used, the PDF data is page 15-17
saved as the VTDVC**.WD3 in the VTDVC folder.

Create the screen from which PDF is executed. "15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder", page 15-22

Send the screen data and PDF data from PC to VT3.


When the memory card is used, send the screen
"13-3 PC->VT Send Data"
data from PC to VT3, and plug the memory card into "5-11 Memory Card", VT3 Series
the memory card slot on the VT3 series, then close Hardware Manual
the cover.

Connect VT3 with PLC to transfer data. "VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC

15 Connection Manual"
PLC DATA FOLDER

Connect VT3 with PLC to transfer data.

Reference The PDF data saved on VT3 can be sent to the PC through the VT -> PC data receive.

15-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

About PLC Data Folder Data


Make PLC data folder data using the PLC data folder editing tool.
"PLC Data Folder Editing Tool", page 15-14
The internal memory (SRAM) and memory card (OP-42254) in VT3 can hold 100 PDF data at the most.

The PLC data formats and storage methods vary depending on where they are saved.
Please refer to the following table.
Save Destination Action
Internal memory
Saved as one part of the VTS file (*.vs4,*.vu4).
(SRAM)
Memory Card File is saved to the \VTDVC folder on the Memory Card as PLC data folder data
(OP-42254) (VTDVC**.WD3).(“**” stands for file No. 00 to 99.)

A file can read or write the following number of PLC devices (including VT3’s internal devices and link devices) at the
most:
When it is saved in the memory card : 65,535 max.
When it is saved in the internal memory (SRAM) : 12,779 max.
(A mixture of word devices and bit devices is allowed.)

The data of registered of PLC devices is saved in "record" units.


The following maximum number of records can be saved
When it is saved in the memory card : 65,535 records max.
When it is saved in internal memory (SRAM) : 2739 records max.

The number of files, PLC devices and records that can be saved is restricted by SRAM and Memory Card capacity.
Details of restrictions
"Size of PLC Data Folder Data", page 15-8

Point Memory card can not be used by VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-5


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

The following illustrates how data to be edited is organized in files.


File

File No.00 File No.01 File No.02 ········· File No.99

VTDVC VTDVC VTDVC VTDVC


00.WD3 01.WD3 02.WD3 99.WD3

Records

Record 0 Record 1 Record 2 ········· Record 65534


DM0000 12345 321 789 ········· 2000
DM0001 777 333 555 ········· 111
1000 1 0 1 ········· 1
3000 0 0 1 ········· 0
DM0500 171 360 256 ········· 345
CS000 100 150 70 ········· 88

65535 max
recorded data

Point • A file comment can be set in each file.


• A record comment can be set in each record.
• Since a file is saved as one part of the VTS files (*.vs4,*.vu4) when the internal memory
(SRAM) is used, then the file has no a file name.

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

15-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

With the VT3 series (Run Mode and System Mode) and VTSTUDIO (the PDF editing tool), we can do the following.
Operation Availability
Item VT3 Run mode VT3 Run mode VT STUDIO
(Run mode) (System Mode) *1 (PLC data folder editing tool)
Writing of data to PLC   x
Reading of data from PLC   x
Verification with PLC data x  x
Changing of record data *2 x 
Changing of PLC device x x 
Addition of PLC device x x 
Deletion of PLC device x x 
Changing of record comment *2  
Addition of new records   
Deletion of records x  
Copying of records x  
Making a new file x x 

Deletion of files x 
( Memory Card only)*3

Copying of files x 
( Memory Card only)*4
Changing of file comment x x 
Save as the CSV format and
x x 
read a CSV file

*1 System Mode "PLC"


"5-12 PLC Data Folder", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
*2 An indirect change can be made via PLC -> VT data reading.
*3 The PDF data saved in the internal memory (SRAM) cannot be manipulated.
*4 The PDF data saved in the internal memory (SRAM) or memory card can be saved to the memory card
(cannot be copied to the internal memory (SRAM)).

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-7


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

Size of PLC Data Folder Data


The capacity of the PLC data memory in the internal memory (SRAM) is 150K bytes(75k bytes in the case of VT3-
W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A)). In addition, the capacity of the memory card (OP-42254) is 128M bytes.
The size fluctuates according to the number of files, devices and data items.

Reference On the VT1, the size of internal memory (SRAM) "for storing PLC data folders" was 100 Kbytes.

Restrictions on PLC data folder data size

When internal memory (SRAM) is used


Memory Capacity -4
4DR + 8D + 52R + 196 =<
F

Item Description
D Number of devices
R Number of records
F Number of files
Memory size (internal memory
153,600 bytes (76,928 bytes in the case of VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A))
(SRAM))
When SRAM is used, the number of devices and records that can be saved in a single file decreases when the
number of files increases as the area is divided in advance by the number of files.

[Example] In case of two files of roughly 75 Kbytes per file, and ten files of roughly 15 Kbytes per file
List of number of devices and records in PLC data folder data that can be stored to
internal memory (SRAM)
In case of 1 file (capacity 150K bytes)
Number of Number of
Remarks
devices records
Limit of number of records that can be saved to internal
1 2739
memory (SRAM)
10 1666
25 1000
100 337
363 100
1000 35

15 12779 1
Limit of number of devices that can be saved to internal
memory (SRAM)
PLC DATA FOLDER

In case of 10 files (size about 15 Kbytes)


Number of Number of
Remarks
devices records
1 270
10 163
24 100
100 31
305 10
1259 1

15-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

When the memory card is used


Size of single file = 4DR + 8D + 140R + 204
Item Description
D Number of devices
R Number of records

Point • The PLC data can be saved only when the total storage capacity of the files is not higher
than the storage capacity of the memory card.
• When screen data or image data captured from video is saved on Memory Card, the size of
memory in which PLC data folder data can be saved decreases proportionally.
• When a file is saved with the PDF editing tool, the restriction on its storage capacity is:
Size per file = 16,000,000 bytes (approx. 15.2 Mbytes)
On VT3, a WD3 file which has a storage capacity higher than the above value can be
created by running the PLC. But you cannot edit/save (can be saved as the csv format) this
file although you can open this file with the PLC editing tool.
• When Memory Card is formatted, the usable capacity may differ depending on the OS.
• The above formula can be used to calculate an approx value. When used, a marginal
memory space should be kept.

List of number of devices of PLC data folder data, number of records and number of files available in
a 128MB memory card (OP-42254)
In case all files have the same number of devices and number of records

Number of devices Number of records Number of files Remarks


452 65535 1
1000 30857 1
3158 10000 1 Number of devices and record limit of one file may
10000 3180 1 be saved on the storage card (OP-42254)
31840 1000 1
65535 485 1
65535 100 4
65535 46 10
65535 10 40
1 8843 100
28 5000 100
100 2358 100
282 1000 100 Number of devices and record limit of 100 files may
100 305 100 be saved on the storage card (OP-42254) of
3083 100 100 restricted number of records

15
10000 29 100
26481 10 100
65535 1 100
PLC DATA FOLDER

Point When capacity of a file exceeds about 15.2MB, PLC data folder edit tool cannot be used for
editing. So, please divide into several folders (reduce the storage capacity of one file) to
reduce the capacity of each file.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-9


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

Reference List of number of devices of PLC data folder data, number of records and number of files
available in a 16MB memory card (OP-34936)
In case all files have the same number of devices and number of records

Number of Number of Number of


Remarks
devices records files
25 65535 1
100 29585 1
364 10000 1
1000 3856 1 Number of devices and record limit of one file
3951 1000 1 may be saved on the storage card (OP-34936)
10000 395 1
39109 100 1
65535 58 1
65535 1 20
1 1093 100
4 1000 100
10 842 100
100 297 100 Number of devices and record limit of 100 files may
338 100 100 be saved on the storage card (OP-34936) of
1000 35 100 restricted number of records

3142 10 100
10000 1 100
12608 1 100

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

15-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

PLC Data Folder Precautions


• When the PDF data is saved into (sent to) the internal memory in VT3, the amount of data saved in the Direction
Chart (real time) and XY Chart is reduced.
The storage capacity of the Direction Chart(real time)/XY Chart(real time)
"Memory size", page 10-60

• When a PDF is run, the communication between VT3 and PLC is occupied by it.

• All parts (switches/lamps, basic parts, meters/graphs, etc.) placed on screen do not function when PLC data
folders are executed.
In addition, the video capture trigger of the video components (VT3-VD4/VD1) cannot work.

• When a PLC is run, the following functions cannot be used.


(1) Monitoring of states of alarm detection devices (saving of alarm log)
(2) Capture data (sample) from the Direction Chart (real time), XY Chart (real time)
(3) Updating the system storage area (VT3->PLC writing, PLC -> VT3 writing)
(4) Worksheets
(5) Devices transmission
(6) Data Transfer/receive between the PC (VTSTUDIO) and VT3
Among the above functions, (1) to (5)are automatically restarted after the execution of the PDF is over.

• When a comment is written into a device or a PLC device is specified for a comment, the character string writing
(displaying) and specifying need a longer time. When writing a comment into a device or specifying a device for a
comment, please use an internal word device (MW).

• When the record specify mode is set to comment specification, comments are specified only when the record
comment completely matches the text string data of the comment specified device.
When multiple records having the same record comment are saved to PLC data folder data, it becomes uncertain
which record data will be written or read.

• In case of the following situations, an error may occur. When an error occurs, the error notice device which is set
by running the PLC is ON.
• The specified file number, record number, or comment data is failed to be saved to the internal memory (SRAM)
and memory card.
• When a file storage position is specified in the memory card, the memory card, however, is not installed on the
VT3host.

• To write (write back) PLC data folder data (VTDVC**.WD3) to Memory Card by FTP server functions, also write the 15
multiple files (VTDVCM**.ID3, VTDVID**.ID3) that were also generated at the same time after editing by the PLC
PLC DATA FOLDER

data folder editing tool in addition to PLC data folder data (VTDVC**.WD3).
The files that were also formed at the same time after editing are sometimes not displayed depending on the
settings of your PC as they are hidden files.If they are not displayed, change the display settings of your PC.
Operation is sometimes incorrect if only PLC data folder data (VTDVC**.WD3) is written (written back) to the
Memory Card.

• An attempt is made to set the number of target station on which the PDF is run with the device-based controls over
the Ethernet or thermoregulator (1: N) link.
A PLC cannot be run on more than one different station simultaneously.

• When a VT3 model is changed into a VT2 model, the PDF data stored in the internal memory in the VT3 model,
which is set with the target PLC_B, is deleted.

Reference On the VT1, PLC data folder data execution did not function during VT command serial communications
or Simulator execution.
- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-11
15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

About Compatibility with VT1 Data


The following describes precautions to follow regarding PLC data folder data made on VT1 (VT BUILDER).

When the save destination is internal memory (SRAM)


When the VT files (*.vt3,*.vt4,*.vz4,*.vt5,*.vz5) are read and saved by VT STUDIO, they, together with the image
data, are converted into the VTS files which, therefore, can be used by VT3.

When the save destination is Memory Card


The extensions of the PDF data stored in the memory card for VT1, VT2, and VT3are all ".WD3".
The PDF data used by VT1 can also be used by VT3.
When VT1 uses the PDF data created or edited with VT STUDIO (the PDF editing tool).

About the data compatibility between VT2 and VT3


About the interoperability between the PLC data on VT2 and that on VT3.

When the save destination is internal memory (SRAM)


• When the VT2 files (*.vt3,*.vt4,*.vz4,*.vt5,*.vz5) are read and saved by VT STUDIO, they, together with the image
data, are converted into the VTS files which, therefore, can be used by VT2.
• When a VT2 model is changed into a VT3 model through VT STUDIO, VT3 can continue to use the data.
• When a VT3 model is changed into a VT2 model through VT STUDIO, VT2 can continue to use the data.

When the save destination is Memory Card


The extension of PLC data folder data files saved on Memory Card is ".WD3" on both the VT1, VT2 and VT3 .
The PLC data used by VT2 can also be directly used by VT3.
When VT2 uses the PDF data on VT3, which is created or edited with VT STUDIO (the PDF editing tool), please
observe the following precautions.
• In the case that the VT2 series use the unsupported device PLC data, an error may occur.
• In the case that the PDF data of the devices (when new devices are added) which are not supported by the VT2
series are used, wrong translation of the device number, for example, may occur.

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

15-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

Editing PLC Data Folder Data


Resources(R) -> PLC data folder(P)

Edit PLC data folder data using the PLC data folder editing tool.

1 Either select "Resources(R)" -> "PLC data folder(P)" from Menu in that order, or click "PLC data folder" on the
"System Settings" tab in the workspace.

2 Specify the data save destination and the file No. to be edited in the "PLC Data Folder" window.

Item Description
Save data to Select the save destination of the PLC data folder data from "SRAM/ Memory Card".
Select the drive for the memory card.In the case that there is no the "\VTDVC file folder" in the
Drive
selected drive, create the \VTDVC file folder.
Displays the drive and folder of the Memory Card when "Save data to" is set to "Memory Card".
Folder The folder becomes the \VTDVC folder in the drive.
(for example: When the D disk drive is selected as the drive for the memory card, D:\VTDVC0)
Starts up the PLC data folder editing tool for editing the device and record data of the PLC data
Edit folder data of the specified file No. data can be printed or exported as csv format files or
UNICODE text files. In addition, data can printed or exported as the csv format files.
Cut Cuts the PLC data folder data of the specified file No.
Copy Copies the PLC data folder data of the specified file No.
Paste Pastes the copied PLC data folder data to the specified file No.
Delete Deletes the PLC data folder data of the specified file No.
Paste the PDF data in other VTS files/VT2files (*.vs*,*.vu*,*.vd*,*.vd*u,*.vx*,*.vx*u) and other
Import
memory cards to a specific file. This only applies to the internal memory (SRAM).
No.*1 Displays the file No. of the PLC data folder data.
Comment Displays the file comment of the PLC data folder data.
Size Displays the file size in Kbytes.
Device Displays the number of PLC devices in the PLC data folder data.
Record Displays the number of records in the PLC data folder data.
PLC*2 Displays the number of target PLCs in the PLC data folder data.
Either click to select and click the "Edit" button, or click the "Paste" button to display the "Sets
15
New Files*3*4 PLC data folder file No." window.
PLC DATA FOLDER

Creates new PLC data folder data of the specified file No.
*1 In the case that the storage capacity of one file is exceeded (number of devices, number of records) when the
"Internal Memory (SRAM)" is selected as the destination storage position, “ “ will be displayed in the front of
the file, with the message "*Over-big File Size: Please reduce the number of files or the size of the file" being
displayed. Please reduce the size of the file (number of devices, number of records). Or first delete this file, and
then replace it with a file with the applicable size.
*2 In the case the different PDF data is pasted or entered into the target PLC, “ “ will be displayed in the front
of the file number. Please check or change the device settings with the PLC editing tool, and update the data.
*3 In the case the size (number of devices, number of records) of a file is over big, the file cannot be created when
the "Internal Memory (SRAM)" is selected as the destination storage position. No more files can be added.
*4 When the MultiTalk function is used and the target PLC_A/B is different, the file numbers and target PLCs can
be set from the "Set the PDF PLC File Numbers" window (when the internal memory is selected as the storage
destination). When the memory card is selected as the storage destination, the target PLCs should be set up
with the PDF editing tool.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-13


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

Point The PLC data cannot be directly inputted from the VT1 files.
Please read the VT1 files with VT STUDIO and saved as the VTS files, then input them.

PLC Data Folder Editing Tool


Edit the PLC data folder data using PLC data folder editing tool.
The PLC data folder editing tool is displayed either by clicking the "Edit" button in the "PLC data folder" window, or by
double-clicking the file No. or file comment to be edited.

Title Bar
Menu Bar
Tool Bar

Data Edit Screen

Status Bar

Item Description
Title bar Displays the PLC data folder editing tool and data save destination.
Menu bar Displays the menu of the PLC data folder editing tool.
Displays available tools.
Tool bar
Currently unavailable menu items are displayed in gray.
File No. Displays the file No. of the PLC data folder data currently being edited.
Enters and displays the file comment of the PLC data folder data currently being edited.
SJIS : Up to 63 1-byte or 31 2-byte characters can be set.
Comment
UNICODE : Half and full-width characters with a max size of 31 can be selected.
File comments and record comments are handled in the same text code.
Devices Display the number of the PLC devices in the PLC data.The number is selectable.
Records Displays the number of records in the PLC data folder data.The number is selectable.
Displays the target PLC of the PLC data folder data currently being edited.
When "Save data to" is set to "Memory Card":

15 PLC
Select the PLC manufacturers/models connected with VT3.
When "Save data to" is set to "Internal memory (SRAM)":
Cannot be changed.
VT2 models: same as the target PLC models that are set with VT STUDIO. *1
PLC DATA FOLDER

VT3 models: same as the target PLC models that are set from the "Set the PDF File
Numbers" window.
Displays the numerical value of each record of the currently registered PLC device.
Data edit screen
Numerical values can be edited by clicking this screen.
Status bar Displays button explanations and methods of operation.

*1 "12-3 PLC Model Settings"

15-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

PLC Data Folder Editing Tool Menu


The following table summarizes the menu items provided by the PLC data folder editing tool.
Item Description
Creates a new PLC data folder data (VTDVC**.WD3).
New
This is displayed only when "Save data to" is set to "Memory Card".
Reads data of already created PLC data folders data (VTDVC**.WD3).
Open
This is displayed only when "Save data to" is set to "Memory Card".
Updates (saves) the edited data.
Update (S)/ The display differs according to the "Save data to" setting.
Save(S) Internal memory (SRAM): Update
Memory Card : Save
Save the edited data as the PLC data (VTDVC**.WD3).
File(F) Save as
The file name is VTDVC**.WD3.("**" is the file No. in the range 0 to 99)
Print Prints the edited data
Print preview Displays the print preview.
Print settings Sets the printer to be used.
To read exported ISF in the "Sensor settings batch transfer settings" screen
Read ISF(I)*1
of KV STUDIO.
Clear ISF(C) To delete all ISF read.
To specify the range and path of saving and save the same as CSV or
Export CSV(E)
UNICODE text file.
Import CSV(I) To open CSV or UNICODE file to get saved data.
Exit Exits the PLC data folder editing tool.
Copy Copies the specified data.
Paste Pastes the copied data to the record of the specified PLC device.
Clear(A) To reset the data of selected cell or row to the default value.
Insert device(I) To insert a row of reserved devices on the top of selected cell or row.
Delete device(D) To delete the device of selected cell or row.
Insert record(N) To insert a column of records on the left of selected cell or column.
Edit(E) Delete record(E) To delete the record of selected cell or row.
Reserve(R) To set up the selected row or cell as reserved device.
De-reserve(U) To cancel reserved devices of selected cell or row.
Delete ISF(L) To delete ISF of selected cell or row
Specifies the search target to search for matching PLC device, or records and
Find(F)
numerical values.
Device settings(V) To open the "Device settings" dialog box for the selected cell or row.
To open the "Record No./Record comment settings" dialog box for the
Record settings(O)
selected cell or column.
Unsigned decimal (Y) Displays the record data in unsigned decimal format.
Display the recorded data in the signed binary format.Signs are processed in
Signed decimal (Z)
the format of 2's complement.

15
View(V) BCD Displays the record data in BCD format.
HEX (H) Displays the record data in Hex format.
To display recorded data in single-precision float (real number).(only for using
Single-precision float(F)
PLC DATA FOLDER

import support information)


Display ISF(I) To display/hide ISF, if any.
Sort by device Sorts the data currently being edited in PLC device order.
Sort(S) Sort by record No. Sorts the data currently being edited in record No. order.
Sort by record comment Sorts the data currently being edited in record comment order.
Convert SJIS->UNICODE(U)*2 Sets file comments/record comments to be handled as UNICODE.
(C) UNICODE -> SJIS(S) Sets file comments/record comments to be handled as shift JIS code.
About PLC data folder
Help(H) Displays the version of the PLC data folder editing tool.
editing tool

See next page for description on *1, *2.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-15


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

*1 If ISF exists in the file being edited, the "Assignment of "Input Support Information"" window will be displayed
in which ISF assigned to each device can be modified.

*2 The following precautions should be observed for the SJIS -> UNICODE converting.
Compared with Shift JIS, comment characters that can be processed in the UNICODE format are
comparatively lower. As a sequence, the excessive characters may be deleted.

Comment
"PLC Data Folder Editing Tool", page 15-14

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

15-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

How to Operate PLC Data Folder Editing Tool

How to view the Editing Tool screen

This item describes the items in the Editing Tool screen.

Item Description
Display registered PLC devices, internal devices (MB, MW ), and link devices (LNB, LNW).
Double-clicking this item displays the "Device settings" window. You can change devices in
this window.
Device
The character following the device indicates the type of device: "B" standard for bit device, "W"
for word device, and "2W" for 32-bit (2 words) word device. "S" before "W" stands for signed
decimal display, and "B" following "W" stands for "BCD". "H" stands for Hexadecimal.
Import support To display import support information. This option can be displayed after import support
information information exported from the "Sensor settings batch transfer settings" of KV STUDIO is read.
Displays the record No. and record comment.
Record No./ comment Double-clicking this item displays the "Enter record No./comment" window. You can change
record Nos. and record comments in this window.
Display the numeric values of all the records in an edited PLC device. For the bit devices,
display "ON" or "OFF".
Data display
Click to edit it. When ISF is used, a value can be selected for modification.
"H" appended to numerical values stands for Hex.
New device Double-clicking this item enables addition of new devices.
New record Double-clicking this item enables addition of new records.

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-17


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

Change device

Changes the devices in the PLC data folder data.


To display the "Device settings" window, double-click the device display.

Item Description
Select the data type of the PLC device from "Bit/1-word/2-words".
Data type
When the data type is set to "2-words", two continuous word devices are used.
Device type Sets the type of PLC device.
Device No. Sets the device No. of the PLC device.
Select the data format of the PLC device from "Unsigned decimal/ Signed decimal/
Data format BCD/HEX" when "Data type" is set to "1-word" or "2- words".
Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled in 2's complement format.
Num Sets the number of devices to be created using a continuous number.
Max num Displays the maximum value that can be set to the "Num".
Parameter name To display ISF of this device No.
Display format To display the display format (Signed binary, Unsigned binary, BCD, HEX, Float).
Input Enum. item If this option is checked, the value is displayed as a name.
Support Setting range To display the range of settable values and candidates.
Information Clear "Input
Support To delete import support information of this device No.
Information"
When this checkbox is marked, the device becomes a spare device.
When "Data type" is set to "1-word" or "2-words", the device becomes a reserved
Reserve
(word) device.
When "Data type" is set to "Bit", the device becomes a reserved (bit) device.
*1 Can be displayed only import support information is read.

15 Enter record No./comment


PLC DATA FOLDER

Change the record No. and record comment of the PLC data folder data.
To display the "Enter record No./comment" window, double-click the record No. or comment display.

Item Description
Record No. Sets the record No.
Sets the comment.
Comment SJIS : Up to 31 1-byte characters or 15 2-byte characters can be set.
UNICODE : Half and full-width characters with a max size of 15 can be selected.

15-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

Changing data

Changes the data of each record of the PLC device.


Select the records to be displayed from displayed items. For records that are not displayed, a value can be entered.

Find

Edit(E) -> Find(F)


Specifies the search target to search for matching PLC device, or records and numerical values.

Item Description
Target Select the search target from "Record/Device/Value".
Find range Select search range from "All/selected range".
Find next Finds the next record, device or value that matches the target.
Close Ends the search and closes the "Find" window.

 In case of searching "Bit device" and "Word device"


Set up the type and No. of devices to be searched.

 In case of searching "Reserved device"


No item is setup.

 In case of searching "Record No."


Enter a numeric value as the record No. to be searched.

 In case of searching "Record comments" and "Item name"


Enter search character string.

 When Target is "Data"

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

Item Description
Select the input format of search value from "Bit/Unsigned binary/Signed binary/
Input format
BCD/HEX/Float".
Find data To enter or select the search value.
Find range Select search range from "All/selected range".
Find direction To select whether a row or column has the search priority.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-19


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

Export CSV files

File(F) -> Export CSV(E)


Save an edited PDF as the CSV file or UNICODE text file.

1 Select "File(F)" -> "Export CSV(E)" from Menu in that order.


The "Export CSV file" window is displayed.

Item Description
Data direction Select which of devices and records are to be set to lines and columns.
To set up output range (All, Selected part, Specified range).
Output range When "Specified range" is selected, the start and end of devices and records should to be
specified.
Export after adding
import support When this option is checked, import support information is added and then exported.
information*1

*1 Once import support information is added in the exported CSV file, import will be impossible.

2 Click the "Excute" button.


The "Export CSV file" window is displayed.

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

Specify the destination folder to save the file and file name, and click the " Save (S)"button.

Point Can export UNICODE text files (*.txt).

15-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-1 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function)

Import CSV files

File(F) -> Import CSV(M)


Read the exported CSV or UNICODE PDF data.

Specify the folder (directory) containing the exported file or UNICODE text files and the file name, and click the
"Open" button.

Point • Only import the files that are edited with the PDF editing tool.
• For the CSV files that are edited with the spread sheet applications such as Excel and
exported with the PDF editing tool, please only edit (change) the cells of the values. Once
other cells, lines or columns edited (changed), deleted, or moved and saved in the
spreadsheet software can no longer be imported to the PLC data folder editing tool.

Send/Receive of PLC Data Folder Data


• About the sending sequence of the PDF data that is sent to VT3.
"13-3 PC->VT Send Data"
• About the receiving sequence of the PDF data saved in VT3 which is received by the PC.
"13-5 VT -> PC Receive Data"

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-21


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder
This section describes how to write edited PDF data to PLC and save the data read by PLC into the PDF. Two
methods are available for executing the PDF. One is from the RUN mode of VT3 series, the other is first to switch the
VT3 series to the PDF screen of the system mode and then execute.

Point Execution of PLC data folders is reserved if it is attempted during the following operations.
After operation is completed, PLC data folders are automatically executed.
• Printing
• Video capturing
• During saving to Memory Card and reading from Memory Card (saving of record data to
Memory Card, PLC data folder, etc.)
• Components (including the OFF delay function) that are currently in the ON mode (a
switch, lamp switch, or key is pressed and held on during this time).
• Switches (the instantaneous setting) that cannot execute OFF (communication delay)
• The cross button is continuously pressed during this time.

Executed under the RUN mode of the VT3 Series


Use the "Execute PLC data folder" function control by device.

To write data of a specific record No. to the PLC

Write the data of record No.0 in file No.0 to the PLC.

Example: screen creation

Write the data of Record No.0


in File No.0

Write DF

Switch Device-based Function (DF)


(not displayed on VT3).
15
How the screen in this example operates
PLC DATA FOLDER

Press the "Write" switch.


-> The VT internal bit device (MB01000) is set.
-> The "Execute PLC data folder" function control by device (DF) functions when the state of the trigger bit device
(MB01000) changes from OFF to ON (Up).
-> The data of record No.0 in file No.0 is written to the PLC.

15-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder

Example of how to set a function control by device

The data of record No.0 in file No.0 is written to the PLC when the state of the VT internal bit device (MB01000) of the
trigger bit device changes from OFF to ON (Up).
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
VT internal bit devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

Example: set up with the switch

Touching a touch switch sets the VT internal bit device (MB01000). When MB01000 is executing the PDF, VTVT3 is reset.
"8-2 Setting Switches" 15
VT internal bit devices
PLC DATA FOLDER

"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-23


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder

To write a specific record No. to a PLC

Write the data of file No.0 to the PLC with the record No. specified.

Example: screen creation

Write the data of Record No.23


in File No.0

Record No.
CANCEL ENTER

Numeric 23
value display
Write DF

Switch Device-based Function (DF) (not displayed on VT3).

How the screen in this example operates


Touch the numerical value display (reference word device: MW0110), enter the record No. (in this example, "23") to
write to the PLC on the numerical keypad, and press the Enter key.
-> The record No. is stored to the record No. specified device (MW0110) of the function control by device(DF).
-> Press the "Write" switch.
-> The VT internal bit device (MB01000) is set.
-> The "Execute PLC data folder" function control by device functions when the state of the trigger bit device
(MB01000) changes from OFF to ON (Up).
-> The data of the specified record No. (in this example, 23) of file No.0 is written to the PLC.

Example of how to set a function control by device

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

Of the records in file No.0, the data of the record No. specified at the VT internal word device (MW0110) of the record
No. specified device is written to the PLC when the state of the VT internal bit device (MB01000) of the trigger bit
device changes from OFF to ON (Up).
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
VT internal bit devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

15-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder

Example: set up with the switch

Touching a touch switch sets the VT internal bit device (MB01000). When MB01000 is executing the PDF, VTVT3 is reset.
"8-2 Setting Switches"
VT internal bit devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

Example: set up the numeric value display

15
Display the numeric value of the internal word device (MW0110) of the record number specifying device. Check the
PLC DATA FOLDER

"Key Entry", allowing the numeric small keypad to be used for numeric value entry.
"9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-25


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder

Display record comments

Set as follows when displaying the record comment of the specified record No. on the VT3.

Example: screen creation

Text display

Display the comment of Record


Record comment No.23 (changeable)
VT3-S12

Record No.
CANCEL ENTER

Numeric 23 Ԙ ԙ
value display
Write DF DF

Switch Device-based Function (DF)


(not displayed on VT3).

How the screen in this example operates


Touch the numerical value display (reference word device: MW0110), enter the record No. (in this example, "23") to
write to the PLC on the numerical keypad, and press the Enter key.
-> "23" is stored to the record No. specified device (MW0110) of the function control by device (DF) (2).
->Device-based Function (DF) (2)"PDF Comments Transmission" functions
As the value of the record No. specified device (MW0110) is 23, the comment of record No.23 of file No.0 is written
to the comment specified devices (MW0120 to MW012F).
->Display the comments of Record No.23 in the form of text display (reference word device: MW0120 to MW012F) (in
this case VT3-S12) Öthe following operations are the same as the "To Write a Specified Record Number onto PLC"
-> The record comment is checked, and Press the "Write" switch.
-> The VT internal bit device (MB01000) is set.
-> (1) The "Execute PLC data folder" function control by device (DF) functions when the state of the trigger bit device
(MB01000) changes from OFF to ON (Up).
-> The data of the specified record No. (in this example, 23) of file No.0 is written to the PLC.

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

15-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder

Example of how to set a function control by device

The above setting example is for function control by device (DF) (2).
Example of setting function control by devices (DF) (1)
"To write a specific record No. to a PLC", page 15-24

Of the records in file No.0, the record comment of the record No. specified at VT internal word device (MW0110) of
the record No. specified device is written to comment written devices (MW0120 to MW012F).
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

Example: set up the text display

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

The text string data of the record comment stored to VT internal word devices (MW0120 to MW012F) is displayed.
"9-2 Setting Text Displays"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-27


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder

To write data of a matching record No. after searching for a record comment

Search for a record comment in the data of file No.0 and write the data of matching record Nos. to the PLC.

Example: screen creation

Index the record comments in


Record comment
File No.0 and write the same
Text display VT3-S12 to the PLC.

Write DF

Switch Device-based Function (DF) (not displayed on VT3).

How the screen in this example operates


Enter the record comments (in this case VT3-S12) from the keypad (reference word device: MW0110'81`MW011F),
and press Enter.
-> The data of record No. matching the record comment of comment specified devices (MW0110 to MW011F) in the
function control by device (DF) is searched.
-> Press the "Write" switch.
-> The VT internal bit device (MB01000) is set.
-> The "Execute PLC data folder" function control by device functions when the state of the trigger bit device
(MB01000) changes from OFF to ON (Up).
The specified record comments data (in this case VT3-S12) in File No.0 is written to the PLC.

Example of how to set a function control by device

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

When the internal bit device (MB01000) of the trigger bit device changes from OFF to ON (Up), VT3 searches
character string data stored to the internal word device (MW0110 to MW011F) of the device specified by the comment
and record No. data that matches the record comment and writes it to the PLC.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

15-28 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder

Example: set up with the switch

Touching a touch switch sets the VT internal bit device (MB01000). When MB01000 is executing the PDF, VTVT3 is reset.
"8-2 Setting Switches"
VT internal bit devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

Example: set up the text display

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

The internal word devices (MW0110 to MW011F) hold the character string data of the record comments to be found.
Check the Key Entry, which allows texts to be entered from the keypad.
"9-2 Setting Text Displays"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-29


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder

To save data that is read from the PLC as a new record

Of the data of file No.0, read the PLC data to a free record No.

Example: screen creation

Read data from the empty


Record comment
record numbers in File No.0.
Text display VT3-S12

Read DF

Switch Device-based Function (DF) (not displayed on VT3).

How the screen in this example operates


Enter the record comments (in this case VT3-S12) from the keypad (reference word device: MW0110 to MW011F),
and press Enter.
-> The record comment of comment specified devices (MW0110 to MW011F) of the function control by device (DF) is
entered.
-> Press the "Read" switch.
-> The VT internal bit device (MB01000) is set.
-> The "Execute PLC data folder" function control by device functions when the state of the trigger bit device
(MB01000) changes from OFF to ON (Up).
-> Read the PLC data from the lowest empty record number in File No.0, and save the character string data (in this
case VT3-S12) saved in the comments specifying devices (MW0110 to MW011F) as the record comments.

Example of how to set a function control by device

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

When the internal bit device (MB01000) of the trigger bit device changes from OFF to ON (Up), PLC data is read
from the smallest record No. with an open number of the File No. records. A character string stored as a record
comment to the internal word device (MW0110 to MW011F) of the device specified by the comment. When "Specify
Comment" is not checked, strings are stored without comments.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
Internal Bit Devices/Internal Word Devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

15-30 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder

Example: set up with the switch

Touching a touch switch sets the VT internal bit device (MB01000). When MB01000 is executing the PDF, VTVT3 is reset.
"8-2 Setting Switches"
VT internal bit devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

Example: set up the text display

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

The internal word devices (MW0110 to MW011F) hold the character string data of the record comments to be saved.
Check the Key Entry, which allows texts to be entered from the keypad.
"9-2 Setting Text Displays"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-31


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder

Read PLC data from a specific record No.

Read PLC data to record No.0 of file No.0.

Example: screen creation

Read data from a record


Record comment
number in File No.0
Text display VT3-S12

Read DF

Switch Device-based Function (DF) (not displayed on VT3).

How the screen in this example operates


Enter the record comments (in this case VT3-S12) from the keypad (reference word device: MW0110'81`MW011F),
and press Enter.
-> The record comment of comment specified devices (MW0110 to MW011F) of the function control by device (DF) is
entered.
-> Press the "Read" switch.
-> The VT internal bit device (MB01000) is set.
-> The "Execute PLC data folder" function control by device functions when the state of the trigger bit device
(MB01000) changes from OFF to ON (Up).
-> Read the PLC data from Record No.0 in File No.0, and save the character string data (in this case VT3-S12)
stored in the comments specifying devices (MW0110 to MW011F) as the record comments.

Example of how to set a function control by device

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

When the internal bit device (MB01000) of the trigger bit device changes from OFF to ON (Up), read the PLC data
from Record No.0 in File No.0. Save the character string data stored in he comments specifying devices (MW0110 to
MW011F) as the record comments. When the "Specify Comments" is not checked, they are saved without modifying
the comments.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
Internal Bit Devices/Internal Word Devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

15-32 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder

Example: set up with the switch

Touching a touch switch sets the VT internal bit device (MB01000). When MB01000 is executing the PDF, VTVT3 is reset.
"8-2 Setting Switches"
VT internal bit devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

Example: set up the text display

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

The internal word devices (MW0110 to MW011F) hold the character string data of the record comments to be saved.
Check the Key Entry, which allows texts to be entered from the keypad.
"9-2 Setting Text Displays"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-33


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder

To read PLC data to a specified record No.

Read the PLC data with the record No. specified.

Example: screen creation

Read the PLC data from


Record comment
Record No.23 (changeable)
Text display VT3-S12

Record No.
Numeric 23
value display

Read DF

Switch Device-based Function (DF) (not displayed on VT3).

How the screen in this example operates


Enter the record comments (in this case VT3-S12) from the keypad (reference word device: MW0120 to MW012F),
and press Enter.
-> The record comment is entered to comment specified devices (MW0120 to MW012F) of the function control by
device (DF).
-> Enter the record No. (in this example, "23") to the numerical value display (reference word device: MW0110) on
the numeric keypad, and press the Enter key.
-> The record No. is input to the record No. specified device (MW0110) of the function control by device (DF).
-> Press the "Read" switch.
-> The VT internal bit device (MB01000) is set.
-> The "Execute PLC data folder" function control by device (DF) functions when the state of the trigger bit device
(MB01000) changes from OFF to ON (Up).
-> Read the PLC data from a specified record number (in this case 23) in File No.0, and save the character string
data (in this case VT3-S12) stored in the comments specifying devices (MW0120 to MW012F) as the record
comments.

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

15-34 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder

Example of how to set a function control by device

When the internal bit device (MB01000) of the trigger bit device changes from OFF to ON (Up), read the PLC data
from the record specified with the record number specifying device MW0110 in File No.0. Save the character string
data stored in the internal word devices (MW0120 to MW012F) of the comments specifying devices as the record
comments.When the "Specify Comments" is not checked, they are saved without modifying the comments.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
Internal Bit Devices/Internal Word Devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

Example: set up with the switch

15
Touching a touch switch sets the VT internal bit device (MB01000). When MB01000 is executing the PDF, VTVT3 is reset.
PLC DATA FOLDER

"8-2 Setting Switches"


VT internal bit devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-35


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder

Example: set up the numeric value display

Display the numeric value of the internal word device (MW0110) of the record number specifying device. Check the
"Key Entry", allowing the numeric small keypad to be used for numeric value entry.
"9-1 Setting Numerical Value Displays"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

Example: set up the text display

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

Save the desired character string data of the record comments into the internal word devices (MW0120 to MW012F).
Check the Key Entry, which allows texts to be entered from the keypad.
"9-2 Setting Text Displays"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

15-36 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder

To read PLC data to a matching record No. after searching for a record comment

Search for a record comment in the data of file No.0 and read the PLC data to a matching record No.

Example: screen creation

Read data from a record


Record comment
number in File No.0
Text display VT3-S12

Read DF

Switch Device-based Function (DF) (not displayed on VT3).

How the screen in this example operates


Enter the record comments (in this case VT3-S12) from the keypad (reference word device: MW0110'81`MW011F),
and press Enter.
-> The record comment of comment specified devices (MW0110 to MW011F) of the function control by device (DF) is entered.
-> Press the "Read" switch.
-> The VT internal bit device (MB01000) is set.
-> The "Execute PLC data folder" function control by device functions when the state of the trigger bit device
(MB01000) changes from OFF to ON (Up).
-> Among the records in File No.0, the record number which is consistent with the character string data (in this case
VT3-S12) and record comments is found. The PLC data in this record is read and saved.

Example of how to set a function control by device

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

When the internal bit device (MB01000) of the trigger bit device changes from OFF to ON (Up), the records in File
No.0 on VT3, together with the character string data and record comments data in the internal word devices
(MW0110 to MW011F) of the comments specifying device, are written to PLC.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"
Internal Bit Devices/Internal Word Devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-37


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder

Example: set up with the switch

Touching a touch switch sets the VT internal bit device (MB01000). When MB01000 is executing the PDF, VT3 is reset.
"8-2 Setting Switches"
VT internal bit devices
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

Example: set up the text display

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

Stores character strings of record comments used to search on an internal word device (MW0110 to MW011F). Enter
a check to Key Input to enable the keyboard to be used to input characters.
"9-2 Setting Text Displays"
VT internal word device
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

15-38 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder

Executed Under the System Mode of the VT3 Series


Use system screen callup (PLC data folder) on a switch to transfer in the PLC data folder screen in the System mode.
"5-12 PLC Data Folder", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

Example: set up with the switch

"Call up system screen", page 8-17

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 15-39


15-2 Execute the PLC Data Folder

MEMO

15
PLC DATA FOLDER

15-40 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16
WORKSHEET
This chapter describes how worksheets operate, how to set worksheets, and
worksheet functions.

16-1 About Worksheets ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 16-2


16-2 Setting Worksheets •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 16-6
16-3 Worksheet System Settings•••••••••••••••••••••••••••16-36
16-4 Precautions when Handling Worksheets •••••••••••16-39
16-5 Worksheet Function ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••16-41
16-6 Application Example of Worksheets•••••••••••••••••16-88

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-1


16-1 About Worksheets
The worksheet indicates the function that executes complex calculation with functions in VT3 models. You can
replace some contents of complex calculation that were processed previously by ladder diagram in PLC.

Point The processing time (response time) taken to execute (calculate) worksheets cannot be
guaranteed. For this reason, worksheets cannot be used for processes that require values to
be written back in real time to the PLC or processing of calculations that are related to
control.

Worksheets OverDisplay
Worksheets comprise multiple cells. Constants, PLC devices, calculations and functions are set to each of these cells
in advance.
A total of up to four worksheets can be used, each of which is classified by an ID (0 to 3).

Cell

Worksheet ID(0 to 3)

• The worksheet is executed when a worksheet startup trigger set in the worksheet system settings turns ON.
• Worksheet execution is performed regardless of the currently displayed screen.
• The cell value is reflected(displayed) in parts when the cells are set to target(reference) device of parts (numerical
value display, etc).In addition, when cells are set in write word device of parts (numerical value display), the values
entered in VT3 screen are written into specified cells.
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
• The cell value is written into PLC device. In addition, the value of PLC device can be read into cells.

16
WORKSHEET

16-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-1 About Worksheets

Illustration of worksheet concept

PLC of makers

Enter from
Cell
parts Read
reference
Output

ABCD

1234
Read

Output

KL

About Worksheet Settings


To make a worksheet function, broadly speaking the following two settings must be made.

• Setting Worksheets
Set pre-prepared functions, etc. to each individual sheet called a "worksheet" that comprise multiple cells.

"16-2 Setting Worksheets"

• Worksheet System Settings


Set the trigger, etc. for executing sheets that have been set.
"16-3 Worksheet System Settings"

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-3


16-1 About Worksheets

Worksheet Restrictions
The number of sheets and cells in a worksheet are subject to the following restrictions.
Number of sheets : 4 (ID0 to ID3)
Number of cells : 1000 cells per sheet
20 columns (A to T) x 50 rows (1 to 50) = 1000 cells

Point The number of cells that can be set is dependent on screen data size or worksheet memory.
Refer to the following restrictions.

The following table shows the restrictions that apply to the number of reference data items, PLC devices and
worksheet memory that can be set in worksheets. For details of each item, refer to the descriptions that follow.
Item Worksheet ID (0 to 3) Total
Reference data Max. 2048 devices
PLC devices Max. 768 devices
Worksheet memory 1000 blocks
Screen data 128 Kbytes

Screen data
The size of screen data decreases as worksheet setting data is saved as part of the screen data.
About the size of screen data
"2-2 Restrictions When Making Screens"

Number of reference data items, number of PLC devices, and worksheet memory
Constants, PLC devices, calculations, and functions are counted as follows when they are set to cells.

Data Type of Reference Worksheet memory


Type/Device Condition PLC devices
Result data (blocks)
Comment - - 1 0 1
Bit/word - 1+*1 0 1
Constant/cell/ Constant 1
calculation Text string 1 0 (Character
Cells
length+1)/2*2
Bit - 1 1
1 word 1
Word 1
PLC devices 2 words 1 2*3
Number of set (Character
Text string -
devices length+1)/2*2
Bit/word 1

16 Used to write from


parts
Text string
- 1 0 (Character
length+1)/2*2
WORKSHEET

16-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-1 About Worksheets

Data Type of Reference Worksheet


Type/Device Condition PLC devices
Result data memory
ABS Word - 1+*1 0 1
AVERAGE Word - 1 0 1
Bit/word 1
CHOOSE - 2 0 (Character
Text string
length+1)/2*2
COUNT Word - 1 0 1
Basic 2
COUNTIF Word 0 1
Condition +*4
Basic 1+*1
Bit/word True value +1+*1 0 1
False value +1+*1
IF
Basic 1
(Character
Text string True value +1 0
length+1)/2*2
False value +1
LARGE Word - 2 0 1
LARGEPOS Word - 2 0 1
Basic 2
Word Comparison 0 1
MATCH +*1
data
Text string - 2 0 1
MAX Word - 2 0 1
MIN Word - 2 0 1
SMALL Word - 2 0 1
SMALLPOS Word - 2 0 1
SUM Word - 1 0 1
- 2
SUMIF Word 0 1
Condition +*4
Bit - 1 1 0
1 word 1 1
PLC device Word 0
2 words 1 2*3
Output
Number of set
Text string - 1 0
devices
*1 This item increases by the number of set calculations that use variable A to P.
*2 This item becomes "1" when the number of characters is "0".
*3 This item becomes "1" in the case of 32-bit devices.
*4 This item increases by the number of calculations that use variable A to O.

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-5


16-2 Setting Worksheets
To use worksheet, worksheet setting shall be required. Sets worksheet settings in the Worksheet editing tool.

Starting Up the Worksheet Editing Tool


The following describes how to start up the Worksheet editing tool.

1 Display the worksheet setting screen.


The worksheet setting screen can be displayed by either of the following methods:
• By clicking "Sheet" from "Worksheet" on the "System Settings" tab in the "Workspace"
• By selecting "Resources(R)" -> "Worksheet(W)" -> "Sheet(W)" from Menu in that order.

2 The Worksheet editing tool starts up.

Title bar
Menu bar
Tool bar

Edit screen

Status bar

Item Description
Title bar Displays the Worksheet editing tool.
Menu bar Displays the Worksheet editing tool menu.
Position of cell Displays the currently selected cell.
Formula= When this checkbox is marked, the "Cell" window is displayed.
Displays the constant, calculation formula or function set to the currently selected cell.This item
Formula
is also used for setting constants, calculation formula or function to the currently selected cell.
Data type Displays the data type of the result.
Output to PLC device Displays the setting whether or not to output to PLC device.
Option, Match The settings "Update value only if true" and "Output value only if true" are displayed in the case
of an IF function.These settings can also be made.In the case of a MATCH function, the "Match
condition condition" setting is displayed.These settings can also be made.
Edit Screen A cell can be edited when it is clicked.

16 Sheet
Select the ID (0 to 3) of the worksheet to set.Comments up to 16 1-byte characters can be
entered.Either double-click the worksheet ID, or select "Edit" -> "Sheet comment setting" from
Menu in that order.
The status bar displays the following details:
WORKSHEET

Status bar • Manufacturer and series of target PLC


• Number of blocks in use of the 1000 blocks

16-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-2 Setting Worksheets

Worksheet Editing Tool Menu


The following table summarizes the menu items provided by the Worksheet editing tool.
Item Settings
Save(S) + Overwrites and saves the setting data of the edited worksheet.
Print(P) + Prints the setting data of the edited worksheet.
File(F) Outputs the setting data of the edited worksheet as a CSV file
Export CSV file(C) -
(*.csv) or a UNICODE text file (Excel format, *.txt).
Exit(X) - Exits the Worksheet editing tool.
Undo(U) + Cancels the previous operation and restores the previous state.
Redo(R) + Redoes operations that were undone by "Undo".
Cut(T) + Cuts the setting data from the specified cell.
Copy(C) + Copies the setting data from the specified cell.
Edit(E) Paste(P) + Pastes the copied setting data to the specified cell.
Delete device(D) Deletes the setting data from the specified cell.
Select all(L) +A Selects all cells.
Sets the comment of the currently selected worksheet ID
Sheet comment setting(S) -
using up to 16 1-byte characters.
Tool bar(T) - This switches display/hide of the tool bar.
Status bar(S) - This switches display/hide of the status bar.
View (V) Freezes the lines above the line in the cell currently being
Freeze panes(F) - edited and columns to the left of the column in the cell
currently being edited.
Unfreeze panes(U) - Unfreezes locked window frames.
Checks if the setting data of the worksheet currently being
Data check(C) -
edited exceeds restrictions.
When this checkbox is marked, the error check is executed
Tools(T) Error check during editing(E) -
during editing.
Displays a list of PLC devices currently set to cells. Devices
Device list(D) -
can also be batch-changed.
Reference manual(R) - Starts up Adobe Reader and displays the PDF manual.
Help(H)
Worksheet Info(A) - Displays the version of the Worksheet editing tool.

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-7


16-2 Setting Worksheets

How to Set Cells


To set a cell, either set in the "Cell" window, or directly enter text strings on the keyboard.

Setting cells in the "Cell" window


Display the "Cell" window by either of the following methods:
• By double-clicking the cells.
• By clicking the "Formula=" button.

Item Description
Position of cell Displays the position of the currently selected cell.
Select the item to set to the cell from the following:
Type/function*1 • Not used • Comment • Constant • Cell • PLC device
• Write from parts • calculation • functions(ABS,AVERAGE,CHOOSE,...)

*1 Each of the setting items are described on the following pages.

Point Mistakes made in cell settings are displayed in red.

Reference • Text in cells to which comments are set is displayed in dark green.
• Cells whose result data format is set to bit are displayed in light red.
• Cells whose result data format is set to word are displayed in white.
• Cells whose result data format is set to text string are displayed in light yellow.
• PLC device is displayed below when MultiTalk function is used.

DM00000_A
Device type Device No. _PLC_A/B

Setting cells by direct entry


The characters can be entered by clicking cells and pressing button.Text strings are entered directly from
keyboard. Text can also be entered by .

16 For details on how to enter text strings, refer to "Direct entry format" in the description for each setting item from here on.

Not used
WORKSHEET

This is an unused cell without nothing set to it.

16-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-2 Setting Worksheets

Comment

Enter the comment in the cell.

Point • One block of worksheet memory is consumed.


• Comments are also output when worksheet data is saved on Memory Card.
"9-7 Setting Function Control by Devices"

Item Description
Comment Enter the string for the comment using up to 64 characters.

Direct entry format


'<Text string> [Example] Entry 'ABS => Display 'ABS

2-byte or 1-byte characters can be entered as the “'” (apostrophe).

Constant

Set a constant in the cell.

Bit (constant)
The following describes an instance where Bit is selected as "Data type of result".

16
Item Description
WORKSHEET

Select ON/OFF.
Constant ON : The value of the cell becomes ON when the worksheet is executed.
OFF: The value of the cell becomes OFF when the worksheet is executed.

Direct entry format


<bit state>
ON OFF [Example] Entry ON => Display ON

1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for ON/OFF.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-9


16-2 Setting Worksheets

Word(constant)
The following describes an instance where Word is selected as "Data type of result".

Item Description
Constant Set the numerical value.
Constant Data Select the data format of the constant from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/HEX/Float". Of
Format the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement.

Direct entry format


1 When the data format is appended with a qualifier (u/s/h/f), the data format is a specified format.
1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for u/s/h/f.

Unsigned decimal <Number+u> [Example] Entry 100u => Display 100


Signed decimal <Number+s> [Example] Entry -100s => Display (-100)
HEX display <Number+h> [Example] Entry 100h => Display 0100h
Floating real number <Number+f> [Example] Entry 100f => Display 100.

2 When the data format is not appended with a qualifier (u/s/h/f)


•If a numerical value appended with a decimal point (.) is entered, the number is handled as a float (real number).
•If a numerical value not appended with a decimal point (.) is entered, the number is handled as signed decimal.
Note, however, that when the numerical value exceeds the signed decimal range, the value is handled as
unsigned decimal.

3 Text string of exponent format


“<Mantissa>” E “<exponent>” [Example] Entry 3E2 => Display 300.
[Example] Entry 12E-3 => Display 0.012
1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for E.

String(constant)
The following describes an instance where text string is selected as "Data type of result".

16
WORKSHEET

Item Description
Character length Displays the number of characters entered to text strings.
Constant Sets the text string. (max. 64 characters)

16-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-2 Setting Worksheets

Direct entry format


"<Text string>" [Example] Entry "ABC" => Display "ABC"

The range enclosed by "(double quotation marks) is handled as a text string.

When using " (double quotation marks) in text strings, ""enter the range between two continuous marks.
[Example] Entry "AB""CD""EF" => Display "AB""CD""EF"

Cells

This is used to reference the value of another cell.

Bit(cell)
The following describes an instance where Bit is selected as "Data type of result".

Item Description
Sets the position of the cell to reference. Click the "Select" button to
Cells
select the position to the cell.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Output to PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is
device Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Sets the mode.
A contact: Outputs ON to the target device when the cell value is ON.
Mode Outputs OFF to the target device when the cell value is OFF.
B contact: Outputs OFF to the target device when the cell value is ON.
Outputs ON to the target device when the cell value is OFF.

Direct entry format


<position of cell>.<data format qualifier>
<Cell position>.b [Example] Entry a1.b => Display A1.b
16
WORKSHEET

1-byte alphanumerics are entered for cell position, and uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for
alphabet characters on columns.
1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for b.

When outputting to a PLC device


When <position of cell>.<data format qualifier> => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".

[Example] To output the value of cell "A1" (bit) to relay 1000 as an A


=> Display A1.b=>"01000.b(A)"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17


- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-11
16-2 Setting Worksheets

Word (cell)
The following describes an instance where Word is selected as "Data type of result".

Item Description
Sets the position of the cell to reference. Click the "Select" button to
Cells
select the position to the cell.
Cells
Select the data format of the cell from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Data Format
Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Output to PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button
Device Name
device is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When
Data length
Float is selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/
Data Format Signed decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is
handled as 2's complement.

Direct entry format


<position of cell>.<data format qualifier>
<position of cell>.wu wu :Unsigned decimal
<position of cell>.ws ws :Signed decimal (ws is not displayed.)
<position of cell>.wf wf :Float (real numbers)

[Example] Entry a1.wu => Display A1.wu

1-byte alphanumerics are entered for cell position, and uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for
alphabet characters on columns.

16 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for w/u/s/f.


When the data format qualifier is omitted, the value is handled as signed decimal.
WORKSHEET

When outputting to a PLC device


When <position of cell>.<data format qualifier> => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC
device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".

[Example] To output the value of cell "A1" (word) to DM1000 as 2-wordsigned decimal
=> Display A1=> "DM01000.w2s"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17

16-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-2 Setting Worksheets

String (cell)
The following describes an instance where text string is selected as "Data type of result".

Item Description
Character length Displays the character length of cells to reference
Sets the position of the cell to reference. Click the "Select" button to
Cells
select the position to the cell.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse"
Output to PLC
Device Name button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
device settings" window.
UNICODE strings When this checkbox is marked, text is output as a UNICODE string.
When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper and lower bytes of
Swap upper/lower bytes
the text string to store to the target device is swapped.
Sets the number of devices to write to n number of devices starting
Number of devices
from the target device.

Direct entry format


<position of cell>.<data format qualifier>
<position of cell>.s s: string [Example] Entry a1.s => Display A1.s

1-byte alphanumerics are entered for cell position, and uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for
alphabet characters on columns.
1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for s.

When outputting to a PLC device


When <position of cell>.<data format qualifier> => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC
device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".
16
WORKSHEET

[Example] To output the value of cell "A1" (text string) as four devices starting from DM1000
(UNICODE supported, swapping of upper/lower bytes ON)
=> Display A1.s=>"DM01000 - DM01003.s (UniRev)"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-13


16-2 Setting Worksheets

PLC devices

Set a PLC device to a cell.This is used to read the value of PLC devices to a cell.

Bit (PLC device)


The following describes an instance where Bit is selected as "Data type of result".

Item Description
Sets the target device. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the
Device Name
reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Sets the mode.
A contact: The value of the cell becomes ON when the value of the PLC
Read device device is ON. The value of the cell becomes OFF when the
Mode value of the PLC device is OFF.
B contact: The value of the cell becomes OFF when the value of the
PLC device is ON. The value of the cell becomes ON when
the value of the PLC device is OFF.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Output to PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse"
Device Name button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
device
settings" window.
Sets the mode.
A contact: Outputs ON to the target device when the cell value is ON.
Mode Outputs OFF to the target device when the cell value is OFF.
B contact: Outputs OFF to the target device when the cell value is ON.
Outputs ON to the target device when the cell value is OFF.

Direct entry format

16 PLC devices cannot be entered directly on a keyboard.Set PLC devices in the "Cell" window.
The "Cell" window is displayed by entering.
WORKSHEET

[Example] To read the value of relay 1000 as an A contact


=> Display "01000.b(A)"

To output the value (A contact) of relay 1000 after it is read to relay 1001 as an A contact
=> Display "01000.b(A)" => "01001.b(A)"

16-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-2 Setting Worksheets

Word (PLC device)


The following describes an instance where Word is selected as "Data type of result".

Item Description
Sets the target device. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the
Device Name
reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When
Data length
Read device Float is selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/
Data Format Signed decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is
handled as 2's complement.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Output to PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse"
Device Name button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When
Data length
Float is selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/
Data Format Signed decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is
handled as 2's complement.

Direct entry format


PLC devices cannot be entered directly on a keyboard.Set PLC devices in the"Cell" window.
The "Cell" window is displayed by entering.

[Example] To read the value of DM00000 as 2-word signed decimal


=> Display "DM00000.w2s"

To output the value (2-word signed decimal) of DM00000 after it is read to DM01000 as 2-word 16
signed decimal
WORKSHEET

=> Display "DM00000.w2s" => "DM01000.w2s"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-15


16-2 Setting Worksheets

String (PLC device)


The following describes an instance where text string is selected as "Data type of result".

Item Description
Displays the text string.
Character length When text string is shiftjis : character length=number of device2-1
When text string isUNICODE : character length=number of device-1
Sets the target device. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the
Device Name
reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
UNICODE strings When this checkbox is marked, text is output as a UNICODE string.
Read device When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper and lower bytes of
Swap upper/lower bytes
the text string to store to the target device is swapped.
Sets the number of devices to write to n number of devices starting
Number of devices
from the target device.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse"
Output to PLC
Device Name button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
device settings" window.
UNICODE strings When this checkbox is marked, text is output as a UNICODE string.
When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper and lower bytes of
Swap upper/lower bytes
the text string to store to the target device is swapped.
Sets the number of devices to write to n number of devices starting
Number of devices
from the target device.

Direct entry format


PLC devices cannot be entered directly on a keyboard.Set PLC devices in the"Cell" window.
The "Cell" window is displayed by entering ".
16
[Example] To read four devicesí worth of text strings starting from DM00000
WORKSHEET

(UNICODE supported, swapping of upper/lower bytes ON)


=> Display "DM00000 to DM00003.s(UniRev)"

[Example] To output four devices' worth of text strings (UNICODE supported, swapping of upper/lower
bytes ON) starting from DM00000 after it is read to four devices (UNICODE supported,
swapping of upper/lower bytes ON) starting from DM01000
=> Display "DM00000 to DM00003.s(UniRev)" => "DM01000 to DM01003.s(UniRev)"

16-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-2 Setting Worksheets

About display of PLC devices


PLC devices set to cells are displayed as follows.
In case of bit devices
"<device No.>.<data format qualifier (mode)>"

[Example] "01000.b(A)" Relay 1000 A contact mode


"MB01000.b(B)" VT internal bit device 1000 B contact mode

In case of word devices


"<device No.>.<data format qualifier>"
[Example] "DM01000.wu" Data memory 1-word Unsigned decimal
"DM01000.w2u" Data memory 2-word signed decimal

w(2)u :(2-word) unsigned decimal


w(2)s :(2-word) signed decimal
w(2)b :(2-word) BCD
w(2)f :(2-word) float (real number)

In the case of text string devices


"<device No.>.<data format qualifier (UNICODE supported, swapping of upper/lower bytes ON)>"

[Example] "DM01000 to DM01003.s(UniRev)"


Four devices' worth of text strings starting from DM01000 (UNICODE supported, swapping of
upper/lower bytes ON)

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-17


16-2 Setting Worksheets

Input

Set the cell for writing from parts.This is used to write values to the cell from parts on the VT3 such as numerical value
displays, text displays, and switches.

Bit (input)
The following describes an instance where Bit is selected as "Data type of result".

Item Description
Initial value Select the initial value from "ON/OFF".
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Output to PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse"
Device Name button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
device
settings" window.
Sets the mode.
A contact: Outputs ON to the target device when the cell value is ON.
Mode Outputs OFF to the target device when the cell value is OFF.
B contact: Outputs OFF to the target device when the cell value is ON.
Outputs ON to the target device when the cell value is OFF.

Direct entry format


INPUT(<initial value>).<data format qualifier>
INPUT(ON)
INPUT(OFF) [Example] Entry INPUT(ON) => Display INPUT(ON)

1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for INPUT( ).


1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for ON/OFF.
16
When outputting to a PLC device
WORKSHEET

When INPUT(<initial value>) => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".

[Example] To output the value entered from a part to relay 1000 as an A contact
=> Display INPUT(ON) => "01000.b(A)"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17

16-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-2 Setting Worksheets

Word (input)
The following describes an instance where Word is selected as "Data type of result".

Item Description
Initial value Sets the initial value (numerical value).
Initial value Select the data format of the initial value from "Unsigned decimal/
Data Format Signed decimal/HEX/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is
handled as 2's complement.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Output to PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse"
Device Name button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When
Data length
Float is selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/
Data Format Signed decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is
handled as 2's complement.

Direct entry format


INPUT(<initial value>)
INPUT(<numerical value>)

[Example] Entry INPUT (100u) => Display INPUT (100)


[Example] Entry INPUT (-100s) => Display INPUT ((-100))
[Example] Entry INPUT (100h) => Display INPUT (0100h)
[Example] Entry INPUT (100.) => Display INPUT (100.)

1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for INPUT( ).


Direct entry method at <numerical value> section
16
WORKSHEET

"Word(constant)", page 16-10

When outputting to a PLC device


When INPUT(<initial value>) => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".

[Example] To output a value entered from a part to DM1000 as 2-word signed decimal
=> Display INPUT(0) => "DM01000.w2s"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-19


16-2 Setting Worksheets

String (input)
The following describes an instance where Word is selected as "Data type of result".

Item Description
Character length Sets the maximum value for the number of characters to write from the part.
Initial value Sets the initial value (text string).
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse"
Output to PLC
Device Name button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
device settings" window.
UNICODE strings When this checkbox is marked, text is output as a UNICODE string.
When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper and lower bytes of
Swap upper/lower bytes
the text string to store to the target device is swapped.
Sets the number of devices to write to n number of devices starting
Number of devices
from the target device.

Direct entry format


INPUT(<initial value> (,<character length>))
INPUT(<string> (,<character length>))

[Example] Entry INPUT("ABC",4) => Display INPUT("ABC",4)


[Example] Entry INPUT ("ABC") => Display INPUT ("ABC")

1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for INPUT( ).


Direct entry method at <string> section
"String(constant)", page 16-10

16 At <character length>, set the value of the number of characters to be written to the cell.When this value is omitted,
the number of characters at <string> is usedas the number of characters in the cell.
WORKSHEET

When outputting to a PLC device


When INPUT(<initial value>) => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".

[Example] To output the value entered from a part to four devices from DM1000
=> Display INPUT ("ABC",4) => "DM01000 to DM01003.s(UniRev)"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17

16-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-2 Setting Worksheets

Calculation

Set the calculation in the cell.

Bit (calculation)
The following describes an instance where Bit is selected as "Data type of result".

Item Description
Calculation formula Set calculations by clicking "<Calculation formula>" button. *1
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse"
Output to PLC Device Name button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
device settings" window.
Sets the mode.
A contact: Outputs ON to the target device when the parameter is ON.
Outputs OFF to the target device when the parameter is
Mode
OFF.
B contact: Outputs OFF to the target device when the parameter is ON.
Outputs ON to the target device when the parameter is OFF.

*1 "Calculation formula", page 16-23

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-21


16-2 Setting Worksheets

Word (calculation)
The following describes an instance where Word is selected as "Data type of result".

Item Description
Calculation formula Set calculations by clicking "<Calculation formula>" button. *1
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the
Output to PLC device
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the
Output only if value
target device on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of
changed
the device changes.
Output to PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse"
Device Name button is clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device
device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When
Data length
Float is selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/
Data Format Signed decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is
handled as 2's complement.
*1 "Calculation formula", page 16-23

16
WORKSHEET

16-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-2 Setting Worksheets

Calculation formula
If you click the "<Calculation formula>" button, the "Device settings" window is displayed. Set the calculation formula
in this window.

The method of setting calculations in worksheets is the same as that described in "6-9 Calculation".
Pay attention to the following points.

Point • The maximum number of variables (A to P) that can be set in calculations in worksheets is 16.
• Select the data type of the variable from "Const/Cell".
To use the value of PLC devices in a calculation, for example, set “PLC device” temporarily
to a different cell, and then set so that that cell is referenced by a variable.
"PLC devices", page 16-14
• When "Data type of result" is set to Bit, the variable in the calculation can be selected from
"Bit/Word/String". However, when String is set, only comparison operator "=" can be set.

1 Set "Calculation formula" using variables and operators on the "Key pads".

2 Set each of the variables (A to P) used in "Calculation formula".


16
• When "Data type of result" is set to Bit, the variable in the calculation can be selected from "Bit/Word/String".
WORKSHEET

Click the field for setting "Bit/Word/String" and press the button to select from "Bit/Word/String".
• When "Data type of result" is set to Word, "Word" can be selected as the variable in the calculation.
Next, click the field for setting the device, and press the button. The "Parameter" window is displayed.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-23


16-2 Setting Worksheets

When Bit is selected


Select from "Const/Cell" for the data type.

Select from bit value "ON/OFF". Select Cell.


(ON:1 OFF:0)

When Word is selected


Select from "Const/Cell" for the data type.

Set the numerical value. Select Cell.

When String is selected


Select from "Const/Cell" for the data type.

16
WORKSHEET

Set String. Select Cell.

3 Click the "OK" button.


This completes setting of calculations.

16-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-2 Setting Worksheets

Direct entry format


Enter a constant or cell position and not A to P as the variable.
Enter the text string (AND, OR, ...) or symbol (!, |, &, ...) of the operator in the "Device/data" window as the operator.
1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for text strings or symbols in operators.

[Example] •To set the comparison A(cell "A1")>=B(cell ìB1î) of cell values (value)
A1.wu>=B1.wu (when data format of cells A1 and B1 is unsigned decimal)
•To set the comparison A(cell "A1")=B(cell "B1") of cell values (text string)
A1.s=B1.s
•To set calculation formula A(cell "A1") * B(cell "B1")+C(cell "C1")-D(Const: 100)(A to D: variables)
A1.ws*B1.ws+C1.ws-100u
(when data format of cells A1, B1 and C1 is signed decimal)

Reference • Format when setting constants to cells


"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11

When outputting to a PLC device


When <Calculation formula> => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".

[Example] To output the result of the calculation formula to DM1000 as 2-word signed decimal
=> Display Calculation formula => "DM01000.w2s"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17

Point "Calculation Precision and Data Format Conversion Rules", "Cautions Relating to
Calculations" relating to calculations
"6-9 Calculation"

Functions (ABS, AVERAGE, CHOOSE, ...)

Set worksheet functions in the cell.

About function settings


"16-5 Worksheet Function"

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-25


16-2 Setting Worksheets

About Calculation Precision on Worksheets and Data Format Conversion Rules


When using worksheets, the calculation precision when calculations are processed internally on the VT3 is
determined from the data format of constants set to cells, cells to reference, PLC devices, variables in calculations,
and the parameters of functions.
To correctly display the results calculated in accordance with this calculation precision on parts to which cells are set,
or correctly write the calculated results to PLC devices from cells, the data format of parts must be adjusted to the
calculation precision.

Types of calculation precision


Three types of calculation precision (data format) are selected when calculations are processed internally on the VT3.
(1) 2-word unsigned decimal
(2) 2-word signed decimal
(3) Float

There are other rules in addition to the above for handling bits in calculations.

Range of numerical values that can be handled by calculation precision


Calculation Precision Range
2-word unsigned decimal 0 to 4294967295
2-word signed decimal -2147483648 to 2147483647
Float -3.40282347x1038 to 3.40282347x1038

Data format conversion rules


(1) When "PLC device" is set to cell
"PLC device data format" -> "Cell data format" conversion
PLC Device Data format of Cell
Data Format 2-word unsigned decimal 2-word signed decimal Float
1-word unsigned decimal Use as it is - -
1-word signed decimal - Use as it is -
1-word BCD BCD -> Decimal conversion - -
2-word unsigned decimal Use as it is - -
2-word signed decimal - Use as it is -
2-word BCD BCD -> Decimal conversion - -
Float - - Use as it is

16
WORKSHEET

16-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-2 Setting Worksheets

(2) When "Output to PLC device" is set to cell


"Cell data format" -> "PLC device (output destination) data format" conversion
PLC Device Data format of Cell
Data Format 2-word unsigned decimal 2-word signed decimal Float
Float -> Discard uppermost
1-word unsigned decimal Discard uppermost word Discard uppermost word word after decimal
conversion*1
Float -> Discard uppermost
1-word signed decimal Discard uppermost word Discard uppermost word word after decimal
conversion*1
Decimal -> Discard Decimal -> Discard Float -> Decimal conversion
1-word BCD uppermost word after BCD uppermost word after BCD -> Discard uppermost word
conversion*2 conversion*2, 3 after BCD conversion*1, 2, 3
Float -> Decimal
2-word unsigned decimal Use as it is Use as it is*1
conversion*1
Float -> Decimal
2-word signed decimal Use as it is*1 Use as it is
conversion*1
Decimal -> BCD Decimal -> BCD Float ->Decimal conversion -
2-word BCD
conversion*2 conversion*2, 3 > BCD conversion*1, 2, 3
Float Decimal -> Float Decimal -> Float Use as it is

*1 A worksheet execution error occurs when post-conversion values exceed the allowable data range of the data
format.
*2 Incrementing of digits is ignored when 9999 (99999999 when manipulating two words) is exceeded.
*3 A worksheet execution error occurs when the result of calculation is a minus number.

(3) When "Cell" is set to cell


"Reference destination cell data format" -> "Source cell data format" conversion
Reference destination cell Source cell data format
Data Format 2-word unsigned decimal 2-word signed decimal Float
2-word unsigned decimal Use as it is Use as it is*1 Decimal -> Float
2-word signed decimal Use as it is*1 Use as it is Decimal -> Float
Float -> Decimal Float -> Decimal
Float Use as it is
conversion*1 conversion*1

*1 A worksheet execution error occurs when post-conversion values exceed the allowable data range of the data
format.

(4) When "Input" is set to cell


"Part data format" -> "Cell data format" conversion
Data Format of Cell (input)
Part data format(read)
2-word unsigned decimal 2-word signed decimal Float
1-word unsigned decimal Use as it is Use as it is Decimal -> Float
1-word signed decimal Use as it is*1 Use as it is Decimal -> Float
1-word BCD Use as it is Use as it is Decimal -> Float
2-word unsigned decimal Use as it is Use as it is*1 Decimal -> Float
2-word signed decimal
2-word BCD
Use as it is*1
Use as it is
Use as it is
Use as it is
Decimal -> Float
Decimal -> Float
16
Float -> Decimal Float -> Decimal
WORKSHEET

Float Use as it is
conversion*1 conversion*1

*1 Values are not written to the cell when post-conversion values exceed the allowable data range of the data
format.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-27


16-2 Setting Worksheets

About the Data Check


Tool(T) -> Data check(C)
Checks whether or not the setting data on the worksheet has exceeded restrictions.

1 Select "Tool(T)" -> "Data check(C)" from Menu in that order.


The "Data check" window is displayed.

Item Description
Result Displays the results of the data check.
Displays the number of Referenced data items currently set to the
Reference data
worksheet.
PLC devices Displays the number of PLC devices currently set to the worksheet.
Worksheet memory Displays the worksheet memory currently set to the worksheet.
Detailed Displays the size of the screen data currently used on the worksheet in
Screen data
Descript bytes.
ion Sheet ID0 Displays the check result of sheet ID0.
Sheet ID1 Displays the check result of sheet ID2.
Worksheet Related
Sheet ID2 Displays the check result of sheet ID2.
Sheet ID3 Displays the check result of sheet ID3.
Total Displays the total.

Point Numerical values displayed in red indicate items for which a restriction isexceeded.
Change the settings so that they fall within allowable ranges.
"Worksheet Restrictions", page 16-4

Reference When "Tool(T)" is selected and the "Error check during editing(E)" checkbox is marked, the following
data checks are executing periodically during editing:
• Whether or not a reference destination cell exists
• Whether or not the self cell is being referenced
• Whether or not the data type does not match the reference destination cell

16
WORKSHEET

16-28 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-2 Setting Worksheets

Reference • The following window is displayed when a cell is being referenced cyclically.

• The following window is displayed when a non-existent cell is specified.

• The following window is displayed when the data type of the cell result does not match the data
type of the result of the cell referencing that cell.

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-29


16-2 Setting Worksheets

Displaying List of Used Devices


Tool(T) -> Device list(D)
Displays a list of PLC devices currently set in the worksheet setting data.

Item Description
Sheet ID Select the sheets to display as a list.
Device Displays the currently placed device Nos.
B/W Displays the device type (B: bit device, W: word device).
Cells Displays cells to which PLC devices are currently set.
When this button is clicked, the "Batch change devices" window is displayed
Batch-change device
so that you can batch-change the device Nos. displayed in the list.

16
WORKSHEET

16-30 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-2 Setting Worksheets

Batch-change device
The device Nos. of PLC devices (set to cells) currently displayed in the list can be batch-changed by clicking the
"Batch change devices" in the "Device list" window.

1 Click the "Batch change devices" button.

2 Set the device No and continuous data changed in "Batch change devices" window, and click "OK" button.
If the device range of device No. changed in step 1 is selected, the device No. or continuous data is reflected when
ìBatch change devicesî window is displayed. However, the selected devices must belong to the same device type.

3 The device Nos. to which device range is specified are batch-changed.

Point Devices of all IDs are batch-changed.

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-31


16-2 Setting Worksheets

Handy Functions Provided by the Worksheet Editing Tool

Short-cut key
The following table introduces handy shortcut key commands that are not provided in the Worksheet editing tool
menu.
Short-cut key Description
Sets the selected cell to the Direct entry mode.
+ Turns the setting of the selected cell into a comment.
Fixes the entry and moves one cell down.
+ Fixes the entry and moves one cell up
Fixes the entry and moves one cell to the right
+ Fixes the entry and moves one cell to the left
Cancels direct entry.
+ Displays the "Cell" window for the selected cell.
Moves to the topmost/bottommost/leftmost/rightmost position of the cell where the cursor is
+ / / /
currently located.
+ / Move to the cell at leftmost/rightmost position in the worksheet.

Right mouse click menu


The following table summarizes the menu displayed by clicking the right mouse button.
Item Description
Cut(T) Cuts the selected cell.
Copy(C) Copies the selected cell.
Paste(P) Pastes the copied cell to the specified location.
Delete(D) Deletes the selected cell.
This item can be selected when a line No. (1, 2, 3, ...) is clicked with the right mouse button.
To insert a row, click the line No. immediately below the location where you want to insert the line with
the right mouse button, and select "Insert line(I)".
For example, to insert a line between the 4th and 5th lines, click above line No.5 with the right
Insert line(I) mouse button, and select "Insert line(I)". In other words, the line is inserted immediately above
theline you selected.
To insert multiple lines, select the line Nos. of the same number of lines you want to insert from the
line below the location where you want insert the line and click with the right mouse button, and
select "Insert line(I)".
This item can be selected when a line No. (1, 2, 3, ...) is clicked with the right mouse button.
To delete a line, click on the line No. of the line to delete with the right mouse button, and select
Delete line(L) "Delete line(L)".
To delete multiple lines, select the multiple lines to delete, click with the right mouse button, and
select "Delete line(L)".
This item can be selected when a column No. (A, B, C...) is clicked with the right mouse button.
To insert a column, click the column No. immediately to the right of the location where you want to
insert the column with the right mouse button, and select “Insert column(i)”.
For example, to insert a new column between columns A and B, click column No.B with the right
Insert column(I) mouse button, and select “Insert column(I)”.In other words, the columnis in serted immediately to
the right of the column you selected.

16
To insert multiple columns, select the column Nos. of the same number of columns you want to
insert from the column to the right of the location where you want insert the column and click with
the right mouse button, and select “Insert column(I)”.
This item can be selected when a column No. (A, B, C...) is clicked with the right mouse button.
WORKSHEET

To delete a column, click on the line No. of the column to delete with the right mouse button, and
Delete column(L) select “Delete column(D)”.
To delete multiple columns, select the multiple columns to delete, click with the right mouse button,
and select "Delete line(L)".

16-32 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-2 Setting Worksheets

Auto fill function and $ mark


The black square displayed at the bottom right corner of a
selected area is called the ìfill handle.î If you bring the mouse
pointer over the fill handle, the mouse pointer turns into (a
cross-hair pointer). To copy data in cells to an adjacent cell range,
or make continuous cell locations, drag this fill handle.

Fill handle
The auto fill function can be used by using the fill handle.When a
constant (word) has been set to a cell, continuous numerical
values can be made to an adjacent cell range by dragging the fill
handle with the c key held down. The same operation is possible when a constant is set to the parameter of a
function.

Prefix line Nos. or column Nos. with a 1-byte $ mark if you do not want to change line Nos. or column Nos. even if the
auto fill function is executed, for example, when a cell is set to the parameter of a function.

Other
All cells in a sheet can be selected by clicking the top left corner of the sheet.

All cells in a selected column can be selected by clicking the column No. (A, B, C,...)

All cells in a selected line can be selected by clicking the line No. (1, 2, 3,...)

16
WORKSHEET

If you move the cursor to between a column No. (A, B, C, ...), the cursor changes to the pointer. Dragging the
mouse pointer in this state changes the cell width.If you double-click the mouse pointer in this state, the cell width is
automatically adjusted.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-33


16-2 Setting Worksheets

Importing Worksheets
Copy and paste worksheet settings from other VTS/VT2 files.

1 Click " " button in the workspace, and select "Import" from right-button menu.
The "Import worksheet" window is displayed.

Item Description
File Name Displays the name of the file to be imported as a full path.
When this button is clicked and the settings of the worksheet to import are located in another file,
Select file
the "Open Import File" window is displayed. Select the worksheet file to import in this window.
Worksheet ID Select the ID of the worksheet to import.

Reference "Open import file" window, other than "Import worksheet", is displayed during first import. "Import
worksheet" window is displayed when selecting files and clicking "Open" button.

2 Click the "Select file" button.


The "Open Import File" window is displayed.

16
WORKSHEET

Item Description
File location Select the drive and folder storing the file to be opened.
File Name Select the name of the file to be opened.
File type Select file type. Please select "WD3 file (*.WD3)".
Movement Click "Move" button to move to the specified foler or recently used folder.

16-34 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-2 Setting Worksheets

3 Select the file containing the worksheet to import.


The "Import worksheet" window (file containing the worksheet to import) is displayed.

4 Select the ID of the worksheet to import from the worksheet IDs in the "Import worksheet" window, and click
the "OK" button.

Point When a worksheet is imported, only the settings of the worksheet are imported. Worksheet
system settings are not imported.

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-35


16-3 Worksheet System Settings

Worksheet System Settings


The following system settings are requireed for using a preset worksheet.

1 Display the worksheet system setting screen.


The worksheet system setting screen can be displayed by either of the following
methods.
•Click IDs of various worksheets from "Setting" of "Worksheet" in "System setting"
tab of "Workspace".
•Select "Resources(R)" -> "Worksheet(W)" -> "Settings(S)" from Menu in that order.
from Menu in that order and then clicking the worksheet ID in the "Workspace".

2 Set the Trigger of worksheet start etc. in the worksheet system settings screen.

16
WORKSHEET

16-36 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-3 Worksheet System Settings

Set the worksheet by worksheet ID 0 to 3.

Item Description
Sets the worksheet startup trigger.
VT timer(auto) : A VT3 timer is used to start up the worksheet.
Trigger of worksheet Bit Device : The change in state of bit devices on the PLC from OFF
start to ON is used to start up the worksheet.
Trigger of The trigger bit device is reset after VT3 recognizes the
worksheet trigger.
start When "VT timer (auto)" is selected as the Trigger of worksheet start, select
Process cycle*1 the process cycle from "High (worksheet renewal priority)/Standard/Low
(screen renewal priority)".
Sets the bit device to be used as the trigger when "Bit device" is selected as
Trigger bit device*2
the Trigger of worksheet start.
Worksheet execute Sets whether to always continue processing after worksheet processing, or
Execute permission to process only when the bit device (enabled bit device) is ON.
permission
settings Sets the execution enable bit device for worksheet processing when
Enabled bit device*2
"Specified by bit device" is selected at "Worksheet execute permission".
When this checkbox is marked, the fact that worksheet processing has
Notify end
ended is notified.
Sets the notified bit device. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the
Notify end Notified bit device*2
reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Reset notify bit before When this checkbox is marked, the notified bit device is reset before
execution worksheet processing is clicked.
Notify error When this checkbox is marked, the worksheet processing error is notified.
Notify error Sets the notify bit device. When the "Browse" button is clicked, the reference
Notify bit device*2
bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
*1 For details, see the description on the following page.
*2 "PLC device" selectable
"6-7 Setting of Devices"

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-37


16-3 Worksheet System Settings

Worksheet execution cycle


The following figure illustrates the processing cycle in worksheet execution.

VT3

12345
PLC of various makers
12345

ABCD

Device monitoring
cycle in VT:T

Monitored target

Monitored target A Monitored target B


· Device displayed in page · Worksheet
· Alarm (normal)
· Trend graph(normal)
· System memory area
··· etc

T increases as the number of monitoring tar-gets increases.


Monitored target A is always updated at each T.However, set the update (worksheet execution) frequency of
monitored target B at the processing cycle of worksheet system settings.

Monitored target A Monitored target B


···

Monitored target A
···

Monitored target A Monitored target B


···

Monitored target A

Processing cycle
Processing cycle Description
Priority is given to updating of monitored target A.For this reason, the
Low (screen renewal priority)
update (worksheet execution) cycle of monitored target B becomes longer.

16
Standard

Gives priority to updating of monitored target B.For this reason, the update
High (worksheet renewal priority)
(worksheet execution) cycle of monitored target A becomes shorter.
WORKSHEET

16-38 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-4 Precautions when Handling Worksheets
This section describes the precautions to follow when using worksheets.

Behavior When an Error Occurs during Worksheet Execution


(1) The value of the cell where the error occurred stays at the same value before the error occurred and is not
updated.
If the cell was in error since the beginning, the value of the cell is handled as a zero ("NULL" if the value is a
text string).

(2) If "Output to PLC device" is set, writing to the target device is executed even if an error occurs. The value that
is written when an error occurs is the value before thatwas active before the error occurs.

(3) If an error occurs during "Cell data format", "PLC device data format" conversion during output to the PLC, the
error is notified as a cell error even if the error is not occurring during cell calculation.
This error occurs only when the data type of the result is "Word". Though the value of the cell remains at the
calculation value when an error occurs, "0" (zero) is written to the output destination (target device).

(4) The following message is displayed at the bottom right of the screen when an error occurs during cell
calculation processing.

[Example] "Worksheet calculation error WS1 "A12""


When multiple errors are occurring on the same sheet, the error that occurred first is displayed.
When an error is occurring on multiple sheets, the error of the sheet that was last executed is
displayed.

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-39


16-4 Precautions when Handling Worksheets

Other
• Note that the correct value will not be returned if, in the case of functions (AVERAGE, COUNT, COUNTIF, MAX,
MIN, SUM, SUMIF) in which trends can be set as the parameter, "Overwrite old trend" is selected as processing at
memory over, and the trend storage area becomes full. Attentions shall be paid.

• When a value has been written from a part (switch, numerical value display, text display, etc.) to a cell other than a
cell set with "Input", the written value will be reflected until the worksheet is next executed, however, the value of
the worksheet processing result will be overwritten at execution.

• When the worksheet is set to cycle execution (trigger of worksheet start: VT timer (auto)) and the execute
permission setting is set to "Always", the worksheet will be executed once at initial page display for applying the
worksheet default when the Run mode is moved to. At this time, the message "Calculating worksheet..." will be
displayed at the bottom left of the screen.
This message disappears when worksheet execution is completed. This message is displayed only at initial page
display, and will not be displayed at the second execution onwards.

• While the "Calculating worksheet..." message is displayed, the initial display page screen is displayed, however,
the touch switches do not function.

• The worksheet is not executed during the following periods.


• When moving to the System mode screen (including while the system screen is displayed)
• Execute PLC data folder in progress
• During reception of data between the PC (VT STUDIO) and the VT3
• During use of remote COMtool (in the case of disabling ofVT3)

• During printing, saving on Memory Card, and page/window switching, worksheet execution is continued. However,
it takes longer to process worksheets.

• Set only unique "Output to PLC device" target devices to cells.

• When the triggers for multiple worksheets turn ON simultaneously, which worksheet the trigger was executed from
is not assured.

• When multiple worksheets are used by a trigger of worksheet start: VT timer (auto), set the processing cycle of
each worksheet to the same cycle.

16
WORKSHEET

16-40 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

List of Functions

Function Function See page


Acquires and returns the absolute value of constants, values of cells to reference,
ABS 16-42
and result of calculations.
Acquires and returns the average value of the range of specified cells, or the
AVERAGE 16-44
average value of the specified trend data.
Acquires and returns the value of a cell at a specified position from a range of
CHOOSE 16-46
specified cells.
Acquires and returns the number of data of specified trend ID from the trend data
COUNT 16-52
saved into internal memory.
Acquires and returns the number of cells matching conditions from specified cell
COUNTIF range, or acquires and returns the number of data matching conditions from 16-54
specified trend data.
Sets conditions, and judges whether or not the conditions have been satisfied before
processing is performed.When the condition is True, the value when the result is true
IF 16-57
is acquired and returned.When the condition is False, the value when the result is
False is acquired and returned.
Acquires and returns a numerical value in the specified value counting from the
LARGE 16-66 ABS
largest number from a range of specified cells.
Acquires and returns the position of a numerical value in the specified order counting AVERAGE
LARGEPOS 16-68
from the largest number from a range of specified cells.
CHOOSE
In the case of multiple same values, the top/left cells are at a priority level, as shown
MATCH 16-70
below: COUNT
Acquires and returns maximum value from the range of specified cells or specified
MAX 16-75
trend data. COUNTIF

Acquires and returns minimum value from the range of specified cells or specified
MIN 16-77 IF
trend data.
Acquires and returns a numerical value in the specified value counting from the LARGE
SMALL 16-79
smallest number from a range of specified cells.
LARGEPOS
Acquires and returns the position of a numerical value in the specified order counting
SMALLPOS 16-81
from the smallest number from a range of specified cells. MATCH
Acquires and returns the sum of the range of specified cells or the sum or specified
SUM 16-83 MAX
trend data.
Acquires and returns the total value of cells matching conditions from a range of MIN
SUMIF 16-85
specified cells, or the total value of matching cells from the data of specified trend graph.
SMALL

SMALLPOS

SUM

SUMIF

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-41


16-5 Worksheet Function

ABS Acquires and returns the absolute value of constants, values of cells to
reference, and result of calculations.

Item Description
Select parameter 1 from "Const/Cell/Calc".
Constan : Set the numerical value.
Nume
Cell : Sets the position of the cell to reference.Sets the position of the cell
rical
to reference. The cell position can also be selected by clicking the
Parameter 1 : const
Parameter "Select" button.
Number ant
Calculation : If you click the "<Calculation formula>" button, the "Device settings"
window is displayed.Sets arithmetic formula. *1
Data Select the data format of the parameter from ìSigned decimal/Floatî. Of the data
format formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputt the target device on
Output to PLC device
the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is
Device Name
Output to clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
device Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
complement.

*1 Setting Method
"Calculation formula", page 16-23

16
WORKSHEET

16-42 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

Direct entry format


<absolute value>=ABS(<parameter 1>)
<absolute value>=ABS(<const>)
<absolute value>=ABS(<cell>)
<absolute value>=ABS(<calc>)

[Example] Entry ABS(-100f) => Display =ABS((-100.)) wf : Float


Entry ABS(A1.wf) => Display =ABS(A1.wf) wf: Float
Entry ABS(A1.wf+A2.wf) => Display =ABS(A1.wf+A2.wf) wf: Float

Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for ABS (<parameter 1>).
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• Format when setting account to cells
"Calculation", page 16-21
ABS

When outputting to a PLC device AVERAGE

When ABS(<parameter 1>) => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC device". CHOOSE
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".
COUNT

[Example] To output the result of the ABS function to DM1000 as float (real number) COUNTIF

=> Display ABS (<parameter 1>)=>"DM01000.w2f" IF

LARGE
"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17
LARGEPOS

MATCH
Application example
MAX

MIN

A B SMALL

1 "DM00000.ws" =ABS(A1)
SMALLPOS

SUM
PLC devices ABS function
Value of DM00000:-10=>"A1" Value of SUMIF

When the worksheet is executed, the value (-10) of DM00000 is read to "A1".
The value of "B1" becomes 10.

Point When the data format is signed decimal, a worksheet execution error occurs as the absolute
value of the lower limit value (-2147483648) in 2-word signed decimal exceeds the allowable
range for 2 word signed decimal (-2147483648 to 2147483647).
16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-43


16-5 Worksheet Function

AVERAGE Acquires and returns the average value of the range of specified cells, or
the average value of the specified trend data.

Item Description

Item Description
Select parameter 1 from "Cell/Trend".
Cell : Sets the range of the cell to reference. (Example) A1:A10
Range
Parameter 1: The cell range can also be selected by clicking the “Select” button.
Parameter Trend : Sets the trend ID and trend No.*1
Range
Data Select the data format of parameter 1 from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Format BCD/Float".Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is
Device Name
Output to clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
device Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
complement.
*1 "10-3 Setting Trend images"
"10-4 XY image Settings"

16
WORKSHEET

16-44 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

Direct entry format


<average value>=AVERAGE(<parameter 1>)
<average value> = AVERAGE (<cell range.data format qualifier>)
<average value> = AVERAGE (<trd"trend ID: trend No.".data format qualifier>)

[Example] Entry AVERAGE(A1:A10.wu) => Display =AVERAGE(A1:A10.wu) wu : Unsigned decimal


Entry AVERAGE(trd"0:0".wu) => Display =AVERAGE(trd"0:0".wu) wu : Unsigned decimal

Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for AVERAGE (<parameter 1>).
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• When ìTrendî is selected for parameter 1, the qualifier of the data format is as follows:
trd"trend ID:trend No.".wu wu: Unsigned decimal
trd"trend ID:trend No.".ws ws: Signed decimal (.ws is not displayed.)
trd"trend ID:trend No.".wb wb: BCD

When outputting to a PLC device


When AVERAGE (<parameter 1>) => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC device". ABS

In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".
AVERAGE

CHOOSE
[Example] To output the result of the AVERAGE function to DM1000 as float (real number)
COUNT
=> Display AVERAGE(<parameter 1>)=> "DM01000.w2f"
COUNTIF

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17 IF

LARGE

LARGEPOS
Application example
MATCH

MAX

A B C MIN

1 "DM00001.wu" =AVERAGE(A1:A5.wu) =AVERAGE(trd"0:0".wu) SMALL


2 "DM00002.wu"
SMALLPOS
3 "DM00003.wu"
4 "DM00004.wu" SUM

5 "DM00005.wu"
SUMIF

PLC devices AVERAGE AVERAGE function


DM00001:200=>"A1" function Value of "C1": Average value of
DM00002:300=>"A2"
DM00003:100=>"A3"
DM00004:500=>"A4"
DM00005:400=>"A5"

When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00005 are read to "A1" to "A5".
16
The value of "B1" becomes the average value of "A1" to "A5" (DM00001 to DM00005).
WORKSHEET

The value of "C1" becomes the average value of the data of trend ID0/trend No.0 recorded to VT3 internal memory
(SRAM) before worksheet execution.

Point It takes a long time to process this function when “Trend” is selected for parameter 1, and
there is a lot of recorded data.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-45


16-5 Worksheet Function

CHOOSE Acquires and returns the value of a cell at a specified position from a range of
specified cells.

Item Description
Data Type of Result Select the data type of the result from "Bit/Word/String".

Bit (CHOOSE)
The following describes an instance where Bit is selected as "Data type of result".

Item Description
Sets the range of the cell. (Example) A1:A10
Parameter 1: Range
The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter Sets the K (position) in the range set by parameter 1.
Const : Set the numerical value.
Parameter 2: Position
Cell : Sets the cells to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The
cell position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
PLC
Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is
Output to Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
device Sets the mode.
A contact: Outputs ON to the target device when the parameter is ON.
Mode Outputs OFF to the target device when the parameter is OFF.
B contact: Outputs OFF to the target device when the parameter is ON.
Outputs ON to the target device when the parameter is OFF.

16
WORKSHEET

16-46 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

Direct entry format


<cell value>=CHOOSE(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>)
cell value=CHOOSE(cell range.data format qualifier,position)

[Example] Entry CHOOSE(A1:A10.b,1s) => Display =CHOOSE(A1:A10.b,1) b: Bit


Entry CHOOSE(A1:A10.b,B1.ws) => Display =CHOOSE(A1:A10.b,B1) b: Bit

Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for CHOOSE (<parameter 1>,
<parameter 2>).
• Format when setting constants to cells
• "Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
• "Cells", page 16-11
• The qualifier of the data format for the position of parameter 2 is automatically set as signed decimal,
so either do not set the qualifier or enter s/ws: Signed decimal.

When outputting to a PLC device


ABS
When CHOOSE (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>) = is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC
device". AVERAGE

In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter ì->ì instead of "=>". CHOOSE

COUNT
[Example] To output the result of CHOOSE function to relay 1000 in the A contact mode
COUNTIF
=> Display CHOOSE(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>)=> "01000.b(A)"
IF

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17 LARGE

LARGEPOS

Application example MATCH

MAX

MIN

A B C
SMALL
1 "01000.b(A)" =CHOOSE(A1:A5.b,A6)
SMALLPOS
2 "01001.b(A)"
3 "01002.b(A)" SUM
4 "01003.b(A)"
SUMIF
5 "01004.b(A)"
6 "DM00001.wu"

PLC devices CHOOSE function


Relay 01000: ON => "A1" Value of "B1": ON(1)
Relay 01001: ON => "A2"
Relay 01002: ON => "A3"
Relay 01003: ON
Relay 01004: ON
DM00001: 4
=> "A4"
=> "A5"
=> "A6"
16
WORKSHEET

When the worksheet is executed, ON(1)/OFF(0) of relays 01000 to 01004 is written to "A1" to "A5". The valueof
DM00001 is also read to "A6".
The value of the cell at "A6" (4)th position from among "A1" to "A5" is returned to "B1".

Point A value of 1 or more is valid as the position of parameter 2. If this value is 0 (zero) or the value
is larger than the number of cells in the range set at parameter 1, a worksheet execution error
occurs.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-47


16-5 Worksheet Function

Word (CHOOSE)

The following describes an instance where Word is selected as "Data type of result".

Item Description
Sets the range of the cell. (Example) A1:A10
Range
The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter 1:
Range Select the data format of the cells in the specified range from "Unsigned decimal/
Data
Signed decimal/Float". Of the data formats, ”Signed decimal” is handled as 2's
Format
Parameter complement.
Sets the K (position) in the range set by parameter 1.
Const : Set the numerical value.
Parameter 2: K
Cell : Sets the cells to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The
cell position can also be selected by clicking the “Select” button.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is
Device Name
Output to clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
device Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When “Float” is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, ”Signed decimal” is handled as 2's
complement.

16
WORKSHEET

16-48 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

Direct entry format


<cell value>=CHOOSE(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>)
cell value=CHOOSE(cell range.data format qualifier, position)

[Example] Entry CHOOSE(A1:A10.wu,1s) => Display =CHOOSE(A1:A10.wu,1) wu: Unsigned decimal


Entry CHOOSE(A1:A10.wu,B1.ws) => Display =CHOOSE(A1:A10.wu,B1) wu: Unsigned decimal

Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for CHOOSE (<parameter 1>,
<parameter 2>).
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• The qualifier of the data format for the priority of parameter 2 is automatically set as signed
decimal, so either do not set the qualifier or enter s/ws: Signed decimal.

When outputting to a PLC device


When CHOOSE (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>) => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC ABS

device". AVERAGE
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".
CHOOSE

[Example] To output the result of the CHOOSE function to DM1000 as 2-word signed decimal COUNT

=> Display CHOOSE(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>) = "DM01000,w2u" COUNTIF

IF
"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17
LARGE

LARGEPOS
Application example
MATCH

MAX

MIN
A B C
SMALL
1 "DM00001.wu" =CHOOSE(A1:A5.wu,A6)
2 "DM00002.wu" SMALLPOS
3 "DM00003.wu"
SUM
4 "DM00004.wu"
5 "DM00005.wu" SUMIF

6 "DM00001.wu"

PLC devices CHOOSE function


DM00001:200 =>"A1" Value of "B1":300
DM00002:300 =>"A2"
DM00003:100 =>"A3"
DM00004:500
DM00005:400
DM00100:2
=>"A4"
=>"A5"
=>"A6"
16
WORKSHEET

When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00005 and DM00100 are read to "A1" to "A6".
The value of the cell at "A6" (2)th position from among "A1" to "A5" is returned to "B1".

Point A value of 1 or more is valid as the position of parameter 2. If this value is 0 (zero) or the value
is larger than the number of cells in the range set at parameter 1, a worksheet execution error
occurs.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-49


16-5 Worksheet Function

String (CHOOSE)
The following describes an instance where character is selected as "Data type of result".

Item Description
Displays the maximum number of characters in the text strings in the range
Character length
selected by parameter 1.
Sets the range of the cell. (Example) A1:A10
Parameter 1: Range
The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter Sets the K (position) in the range set by parameter 1.
Const: Set the numerical value.
Parameter 2: Position
Cell: Sets the cells to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The cell
position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is
Device Name
Output to clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
device UNICODE strings When this checkbox is marked, text is output as a UNICODE string.
Swap upper/lower When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper and lower bytes of the text
bytes string to store to the target device is swapped.
Sets the number of devices to write to n number of devices starting from the target
Number of devices
device.

16
WORKSHEET

16-50 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

Direct entry format


<cell value>=CHOOSE(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>)
cell value=CHOOSE(cell range.data format qualifier,position)

[Example] Entry CHOOSE(A1:A10.s,1s) => Display =CHOOSE(A1:A10.s,1) s: String


Entry CHOOSE(A1:A10.s,B1.ws) => Display =CHOOSE(A1:A10.s,B1) s: String

Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for CHOOSE (<parameter 1>,
<parameter 2>).
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• The qualifier of the data format for the priority of parameter 2 is automatically set as signed
decimal, so either do not set the qualifier or enter s/ws: Signed decimal.

When outputting to a PLC device


When CHOOSE (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>) => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC ABS

device". AVERAGE
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".
CHOOSE

[Example] To output the result of the CHOOSE function as four devices starting from DM1000 COUNT
(UNICODE supported, swapping of upper/lower bytes ON)
COUNTIF
=> Display CHOOSE(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>)= "DM01000 to DM01003.s(UniRev)"
IF

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17 LARGE

LARGEPOS

MATCH
Application example MAX

MIN

SMALL
A B C
SMALLPOS
1 "ABCDE" "DM00001.wu" =CHOOSE(A1:A5.s,B1)
2 "FGHIJ" SUM

3 "KLMNO" SUMIF
4 "PQRST"
5 "UVWXY"

Constant PLC device CHOOSE function


DM00100:4=>"B1" Value of "C1":PQRST

Constants (strings) are preset to "A1" to "A5". 16


When the worksheet is executed, the value of DM00100 is read to "B1".The value in the cell at the "B1" (4)th position
WORKSHEET

from among "A1" to "A5" is returned to "C1".

Point A value of 1 or more is valid as the position of parameter 2.If this value is 0 (zero) or the value
is larger than the number of cells in the range set at parameter 1, a worksheet execution error
occurs.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-51


16-5 Worksheet Function

COUNT Acquires and returns the number of data of specified trend ID from the trend
data saved into internal memory.

Item Description
Parameter
Parameter Trend ID*1 Select the trend ID (0 to 3).
1: Range
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
PLC Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is
Device Name
Output to clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
device Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
complement.
*1 "10-3 Setting Trend images"
"10-4 XY image Settings"

Direct entry format


<number>=COUNT(<parameter 1>)
number=COUNT(<trd"trend ID"> )

[Example] Entry COUNT(trd"0") => Display =COUNT(trd"0")

Reference 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for COUNT ( parameter 1).

When outputting to a PLC device


16 When COUNT (<parameter 1>) => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".
WORKSHEET

[Example] To output the result of the COUNT function to DM1000 as 1-word signed decimal
=> Display COUNT(parameter 1)= "DM01000.wu"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17

16-52 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

Application example

A B C
1 =COUNT(trd"1")

COUNT function
Value of "A1":NO. value of record

When the worksheet is executed, the number of data items in trend ID1 recorded to VT3 internal memory(SRAM)
before worksheet execution is returned to "A1".

Point The number of data items currently recorded when worksheet execution is started is
acquired.

ABS

AVERAGE

CHOOSE

COUNT

COUNTIF

IF

LARGE

LARGEPOS

MATCH

MAX

MIN

SMALL

SMALLPOS

SUM

SUMIF

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-53


16-5 Worksheet Function

Acquires and returns the number of cells matching conditions from specified
COUNTIF cell range, or acquires and returns the number of data matching conditions
from specified trend data.

Item Description
Setting range.
Cell : Sets the range of the cell. (Example) A1:A10
Range
Parameter 1: The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Range Trend : Sets trend ID and trend No. *1
Parameter Data Select the data format of parameter 1 from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
format BCD/Float. Of the data formats, ”Signed decimal” is handled as 2's complement.
Conditio
Parameter 2: "Device setting" window is displayed when clicking "Conditional formula" button. Sets
nal
Condition the conditional formula (calculation formula).
formula*2
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
PLC
Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is
Output to Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
device Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from ”Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Data Format
BCD/Float”. Of the data formats, ”Signed decimal” is handled as 2's complement.
*1 "10-3 Setting Trend images"
"10-4 XY image Settings"
*2 The variable X in the conditional formula (calculation formula) in the worksheet refers to the various data in the
range specified by parameter 1.

16 Setting Method
"Calculation formula", page 16-23
WORKSHEET

16-54 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

Direct entry format


<number>=COUNTIF(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>)
<number>=COUNTIF(<cell range.data format qualifier>,<conditional formula>)
<number>=COUNTIF(<trd"trend ID:trend No.".data format qualifier>,<conditional formula>)

[Example] Entry COUNTIF(A1:A10.wu,X>10u) => Display =COUNTIF(A1:A10.wu,X>10)


u, wu : Unsigned decimal
Entry COUNTIF(A1:A10.wu,X>B1.wu) => Display =COUNTIF(A1:A10.wu,X>B1.wu)
wu : Unsigned decimal
Entry COUNTIF(trd"0:0".wu,X>100u) => Display =COUNTIF(trd"0:0".wu,X>100)
u, wu : Unsigned decimal
Entry COUNTIF(trd"0:0".wu,X>B1.wu) => Display =COUNTIF(trd"0:0".wu,X>B1.wu)
wu : Unsigned decimal

Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for COUNTIF (<parameter 1>, <parameter
2>).
• Format when setting constants to cells ABS
"Constant", page 16-9
AVERAGE
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11 CHOOSE

• Format when setting account to cells


COUNT
"Calculation", page 16-21
• When ìTrendî is selected for parameter 1, the qualifier of the data format is as follows: COUNTIF

trd"trend ID:trend No.".wu wu: Unsigned decimal IF


trd"trend ID:trend No.".ws ws: Signed decimal (.ws is not displayed.)
LARGE
trd"trend ID:trend No.".wb wb: BCD
LARGEPOS

When outputting to a PLC device MATCH


When COUNTIF (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>) = is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set ìOutput to PLC
MAX
deviceî.
MIN
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".
SMALL

[Example] To output the result of the COUNTIF function to DM1000 as 1-word signed decimal SMALLPOS
=> Display COUNTIF(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>) = "DM01000.wu"
SUM

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17 SUMIF

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-55


16-5 Worksheet Function

Application example

A B C
1 "DM00001.wu" COUNTIF(A1:A10.wu,40<=X&X<=70)
2 "DM00002.wu"
3 "DM00003.wu"
4 "DM00004.wu"
5 "DM00005.wu"
6 "DM00006.wu"
7 "DM00007.wu"
8 "DM00008.wu"
9 "DM00009.wu"
10 "DM00010.wu"

PLC devices COUNTIF function


DM00001:20=>"A1" Value of "B1":4
DM00002:35=>"A2"
DM00003:67=>"A3"
DM00004:58=>"A4"
DM00005:44=>"A5"
DM00006:23=>"A6"
DM00007:61=>"A7"
DM00008:15=>"A8"
DM00009:75=>"A9"
DM00010:98=>"A10"

When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00010 are read to "A1" to "A10".
The number of cells (in this example, “4”) whose value is 40 or more or 70 or less from among cells "A1" to "A10" is
returned to "B1".

Point It takes a longer time to process this function when ìTrendî is selected in parameter 1, and
there is a lot of data of the recorded trend.

16
WORKSHEET

16-56 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

Sets conditions, and judges whether or not the conditions have been
satisfied before processing is performed.

IF • When the condition is True, the value when the result is true is acquired
and returned.
• When the condition is False, the value when the result is False is acquired
and returned.

Item Description
Data Type of Result Select the data type of the result from "Bit/Word/String".
The following describes an instance where text string is selected as
"Data type of result".
Character length
The larger of the number of characters in parameters 2 and 3 text strings
is displayed.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is updated only
when the result is True. If the result is True, the value of the cell is
Update value only if true
updated regardless of whether or not the cell value has changed state
from the previous state.
Option*1
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target
device on the PLC only when the result is True. If the result is True, the
Output value only if true
value of the cell is output to the target device on the PLC regardless of ABS
whether or not the cell value has changed state from the previous state.
AVERAGE
*1 The option settings can also be made at the checkboxes that are displayed in the worksheet setting tool during
CHOOSE
direct entry.
COUNT
"16-2 Setting Worksheets"
COUNTIF

IF

Bit (IF) LARGE

The following describes an instance where Bit is selected as "Data type of result". LARGEPOS

MATCH

MAX

MIN

SMALL

SMALLPOS

SUM

SUMIF

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-57


16-5 Worksheet Function

Item Description
Sets the conditions.
Select from bit value "ON/OFF".
Cell: Sets the cell to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The cell
Parameter 1: constant
position can also be selected by clicking the ìSelectî button.
Calc: If you click the "<Calculation formula>" button, the "Device settings" window
is displayed.Sets arithmetic formula. *1
Sets the value when the result is True.
Select from bit value "ON/OFF".
Parameter 2: Value if Cell: Sets the cell to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The cell
Parameter
true position can also be selected by clicking the ìSelectî button.
Calc: If you click the "<Calculation formula>" button, the "Device settings" window
is displayed.Sets arithmetic formula. *1
Sets the value when the result is not True.
Select from bit value "ON/OFF".
Parameter 3: Value if Cell: Sets the cells to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The cell
false position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Calc: If you click the "<Calculation formula>" button, the "Device settings" window
is displayed.Sets arithmetic formula. *1
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
PLC
Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is
Output to Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
device Sets the mode.
A contact: Outputs ON to the target device when the parameter is ON.
Mode Outputs OFF to the target device when the parameter is OFF.
B contact: Outputs OFF to the target device when the parameter is ON.
Outputs ON to the target device when the parameter is OFF.
*1 Setting Method
"Calculation formula", page 16-23

16
WORKSHEET

16-58 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

Direct entry format


<result>=IF(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,<parameter 3>)
<result>=IF(<condition>,<value if true>,<value if false>)
<result>=IF(<Const/Cell/Calc>,<Const/Cell/Calc>,<Const/Cell/Calc>)

[Example] Entry IF(A1.b,ON,OFF) => Display =IF(A1.b,ON,OFF)


b: Bit
Entry IF(A1.b,A2.b,A3.b) => Display =IF(A1.b,A2.b,A3.b)
b: Bit
Entry IF(A1.b,B1.b&B2.b,C1.b|C2.b) => Display =IF(A1.b,B1.b&B2.b,C1.b|C2.b)
b: Bit
Entry IF(A1.wu>10u,ON,OFF) => Display =IF(A1.wu>10,ON,OFF)
u, wu: Unsigned decimal
Entry IF(A1.wu=A2.wu,B1.b,B2.b) => Display =IF(A1.wu=A2.wu,B1.b,B2.b)
wu: Unsigned decimal b: Bit,
Entry IF(A1.wu<A2.wu,B1.b&B2.b,C1.b|C2.b) => Display =IF(A1.wu<A2.wu,B1.b&B2.b,C1.b|C2.b)
b: Bit ABS

Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for IF (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>). AVERAGE

• Format when setting constants to cells CHOOSE


"Constant", page 16-9
COUNT
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11 COUNTIF

• Format when setting account to cells IF


"Calculation", page 16-21
LARGE
• When "Update value only if true" is set, directly enter "--" at parameter 3.
[Example] Entry IF(A1.b,ON,- - ) => Display =IF(A1.b,ON,- - ) b: Bit LARGEPOS

• In the case of "Output value only if true", directly enter "--" at parameter 3, and then append ".o" MATCH

following")" followed by => or -> a fterwards, or, continuously. MAX

MIN
When outputting to a PLC device
SMALL
When IF(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,<parameter 3>) => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>". SMALLPOS

SUM
[Example] To output the result of IF function to relay 1000 in the A contact mode
SUMIF
=> Display => IF<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,<parameter 3>=>
To output the result of the IF function to relay 1000 in the A contact mode only when the result
is True
=> Display IF<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,- - ) .o=> "01000.b(A)"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17


16
Application example
WORKSHEET

A B C
1 "DM00000.wu" =IF(100<A1 & A1<200,ON,OFF)=>"01000.b(A)"
2

PLC devices IF Function


Value of DM00000:150=>"A1" Value of "B1":ON

PLCs from other manufacters

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-59


16-5 Worksheet Function

When the worksheet is executed, the value of DM00000 is read to "A1".


As the value of "A1" is 150, conditional formula 100<"A1"<200 becomes True.
Accordingly, the value when the result is True is returned to "B1".
As “Output to PLC device” is set, the value of "B1" is written to relay 01000 in the A contact mode.

Word (IF)
The following describes an instance where Word is selected as "Data type of result".

Item Description
Sets the conditions.
Select from bit value "ON/OFF".
Cell: Sets the cells to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The
Parameter 1: Condition
cell position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Calc: If you click the "<Calculation formula>" button, the "Device settings"
window is displayed. Sets arithmetic formula. *1
Sets the value when the result is True.
Const: Set the numerical value.
Cell: Sets the cells to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The
Value if true
cell position can also be selected by clicking the ìSelectî button.
Parameter 2: Calc: If you click the "<Calculation formula>" button, the "Device settings"
Parameter

Value if true window is displayed. Sets arithmetic formula. *1


Select the data format of parameter 2 from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Data
HEX display/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
Format
complement.
Sets the value when the result is not True.
Const: Set the numerical value.
Value if not Cell: Sets the cells to reference.Specify the position of cells by clicking "Select"
Parameter 3: true button.

16 Value if not
true
Calc: If you click the "<Calculation formula>" button, the "Device settings"
window is displayed. Sets arithmetic formula. *1
Select the data format of parameter 3 from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Data
HEX display/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
WORKSHEET

Format
complement.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to device

changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is
Device Name
PLC

clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
complement.

16-60 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

*1 Setting Method
"Calculation formula", page 16-23

Direct entry format


<result>=IF(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,<parameter 3>)
<result>=IF(<condition>,<value if true>,<value if false>)
ABS
<result>=IF(<Const/Cell/Calc>,<Const/Cell/Calc>,<Const/Cell/Calc>)
AVERAGE
[Example] Entry IF(A1.b,100u,1u) => Display =IF(A1.b,100,1)
CHOOSE
b: Bit, wu: Unsigned decimal
COUNT
Entry IF(A1.b,B1.wu,B2.wu) => Display =IF(A1.b,B1.wu,B2.wu)
COUNTIF
b: Bit, wu: Unsigned decimal
Entry IF(A1.b,B1.wu*B2.wu,C1.wu/C2.wu) => Display =IF(A1.b,B1.wu*B2.wu,C1.wu/C2.wu) IF

b: Bit, wu: Unsigned decimal LARGE

Entry IF(A1.wu>10u,100u,1u) => Display =IF(A1.wu>10,100,1) LARGEPOS

u, wu: Unsigned decimal MATCH


Entry IF(A1.wu=A2.wu,B1.wu,B2.wu) => Display =IF(A1.wu=A2.wu,B1.wu,B2.wu)
MAX
wu: Unsigned decimal
MIN
Entry IF(A1.wu<A2.wu,B1.wu+B2.wu,C1.wu-C2.wu) => Display =IF(A1.wu<A2.wu,B1.wu+B2.wu,C1.wu-C2.wu)
SMALL
wu: Unsigned decimal
SMALLPOS

Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for IF (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>). SUM
• Format when setting constants to cells
SUMIF
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• Format when setting account to cells
"Calculation", page 16-21
• When "Update value only if true" is set, directly enter "--" at parameter 3.
[Example] Entry IF(A1.b,100u,- - ) => Display =IF(A1.b,100,- - )
b: Bit, u: Unsigned decimal 16
• In the case of "Output value only if true", directly enter " - - " at parameter 3, and then append ".o"
WORKSHEET

following")" followed by => or ->.Afterwards, or, continuously

When outputting to a PLC device


When IF(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,<parameter 3>) => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to
PLC device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".

[Example] To output the result of the IF function to DM1000 as 2-word signed decimal
=> Display =>IF(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,<parameter 3>)=>"DM01000.w2u"
To output the result of the IF function to DM1000 as 2-word signed decimal only when the result is True
=> Display IF<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,- - ).o=>"DM01000.w2u"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17


- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-61
16-5 Worksheet Function

Application example

A B C
1 "01000.b(A)" =IF(A1.b|A2.b,4000,0)=>"DM00000.ws"
2 "01001.b(A)"

PLC devices IF Function


Value of relay 01000:ON => "A1" Value of "B1":4000
Value of relay 01001:OFF => "A2"

PLCs from other manufacters

When the worksheet is executed, the value of relay 01000 to 01001 is read to "A1" to "A2".
As the conditional formula is True, the value when the result is True is returned to "B1".
As “Output to PLC device” is set, the value of "B1" is written to DM00000.

Text string (IF)


The following describes an instance where character is selected as "Data type of result".

Item Description
Sets the conditions.
Const:Select from bit value "ON/OFF".

16
Cell: Sets the cell to reference. Sets the position of the cell to reference.
Parameter 1: Condition
The cell position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Calc: If you click the "<Calculation formula>" button, the "Device settings"
window is displayed. Sets arithmetic formula. *1
Parameter
WORKSHEET

Sets the value when the result is True.


Const:Sets the text string. (max. 64 characters)
Parameter 2: Value if true
Cell: Sets the cell to reference. Sets the position of the cell to reference.
The cell position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Sets the value when the result is not True.
Const:Sets the text string. (max. 64 characters)
Parameter 3: Value if false
Cell: Sets the cell to reference. Sets the position of the cell to reference.
The cell position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.

16-62 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

Item Description
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output to PLC device

Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the “Browse” button is
Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
UNICODE strings When this checkbox is marked, text is output as a UNICODE string.
When this checkbox is marked, the data of the upper and lower bytes of the text
Swap upper/lower bytes
string to store to the target device is swapped.
Sets the number of devices to write to n number of devices starting from the target
Number of devices
device.
*1 Setting Method
"Calculation formula", page 16-23

ABS

AVERAGE

CHOOSE

COUNT

COUNTIF

IF

LARGE

LARGEPOS

Direct entry format MATCH

MAX
<result>=IF(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,<parameter 3>)
MIN
<result>=IF(<condition>,<value if true>,<value if false>)
<result>=IF(<Const/Cell/Calc>,<Const/Cell/Calc>,<Const/Cell/Calc>) SMALL

SMALLPOS
[Example] Entry IF(A1.b,"ABC","XYZ") => Display =IF(A1.b,"ABC","XYZ") b: Bit
SUM
Entry IF(A1.b,B1.s,B2.s) => Display =IF(A1.b,B1.wu,B2.wu) b:Bit,s:text string
SUMIF
Entry IF(A1.wu>10u,"ABC","XYZ") => Display =IF(A1.wu>10,"ABC","XYZ")
u,wu: Unsigned decimal
Entry IF(A1.wu=A2.wu,B1.s,B2.s) => Display =IF(A1.wu=A2.wu,B1.s,B2.s)
wu: Unsigned decimal

Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for IF (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>).
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
16
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
WORKSHEET

"Cells", page 16-11


• Format when setting account to cells
"Calculation", page 16-21
• When "Update value only if true" is set, directly enter " - - " at parameter 3.
[Example] Entry IF(A1.b,"ABC",- - ) => Display =IF(A1.b,"ABC",- - ) b: Bit
• In the case of "Output value only if true", directly enter "--" at parameter 3, and then append ".o"
following")" followed by => or ->a fterwards, or, continuously .

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-63


16-5 Worksheet Function

When outputting to a PLC device


When IF(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,<parameter 3>) => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to
PLC device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".

[Example] To output the result of the IF function as four devices starting from DM1000
=> Display
CHOOSE(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,<parameter 3>)="DM01000 to DM01003.s(UniRev)"
To output the result of the IF function as four devices starting from DM1000 only when the
result is true
=> Display
IF<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,- - ).o"DM01000 to DM01003.s(UniRev)"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17

Application example

A B C
1 "DM00001.ws" =IF(A1=A2,"ABC","XYZ")=>"DM01000 to DM01009.s"
2 "DM00002.ws"

PLC devices IF Function


DM00001 value:300 =>"A1" Value of "B1":XYZ
DM00002 value:500 =>"A2"

PLC of various makers

When the worksheet is executed, the value of DM00001 to DM00002 is read to "A1" to "A2".
Since the conditional formula is false, the false value is returned to "B1".
Since "Output PLC device" is set, the value of "B1" is written into DM01000-DM01009 in the form of SJIS code.

16
WORKSHEET

16-64 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

Setting Mode of IF Function


• IF function is available with 8 setting modes.
The so-called IF function means IF function when "Update value only when itís true" and "Output value only when it's
true" are not set.
1. Common IF function, without "Output to PLC device"
2. Common IF function, with "Output to PLC device"
3. Common IF function, with "Output to PLC device" (Output only when value changes).
4. IF function for "Update value only when it's true", without "Output to PLC device"
Update cell value when the condition is true(otherwise, the cell value not updated when the condition is false).
5. IF function for "Update value only when it's true", with "Output to PLC device"
Update cell value when the condition is true(otherwise, the cell value not updated when the condition is false).
The cell value is output to PLC device no matter the condition is true/false.
6. IF function for "Update value only when it's true", with "Output to PLC device" (Output only when value
changes).
Update cell value when the condition is true(otherwise, the cell value not updated when the condition is false).
The value of the cell is output to the PLC only when the condition is True and the value changes. ABS

7. IF function for "Output value only when it's true", with "Output to PLC device"
AVERAGE
Update cell value when the condition is true(otherwise, the cell value not updated when the condition is false).
CHOOSE
The value of the cell is output to the PLC device only when the condition is True.
8. IF function for "Output value only when itís true", with "Output to PLC device" (Output only when value changes). COUNT

Update cell value when the condition is true(otherwise, the cell value not updated when the condition is false). COUNTIF

The value of the cell is output to the PLC only when the condition is True and the value changes.
IF
*6 and 8 perform the same operations.
LARGE

• In IF function set with "Update value only when itís true" and "Output value only when itís true", the cell value is LARGEPOS

maintained as previous value if the condition is not matched (false). MATCH

MAX

MIN

SMALL

SMALLPOS

SUM

SUMIF

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-65


16-5 Worksheet Function

LARGE Acquires and returns a numerical value in the specified value counting from
the largest number from a range of specified cells.

Item Description
Sets the range of the cell to reference. (Example) A1:A10
Range
The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter
1:Range Select data format of parameter 1 from "Unsigned decimal/signed decimal/
Data
Parameter

floating real number". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
Format
complement.
Sets the K (Parameter) in the range set by parameter 1.
Parameter Const: Set the numerical value.
K
2: K Cell: Sets the cell to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The cell
position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to device

changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is
Device Name
PLC

clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, ”Signed decimal” is handled as 2's
complement.

Direct entry format


Priority value=LARGE (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>)
Priority value=LARGE (<Range, Data format qualifier, Priority>)

16 [Example] Entry LARGE(A1:A10.wu,1s) => Display =LARGE(A1:A10.wu,1) wu: Unsigned decimal


Entry LARGE(A1:A10.wu,B1.ws) => Display =LARGE(A1:A10.wu,B1) wu: Unsigned decimal
WORKSHEET

Reference • LARGE(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>) has no difference in terms of half-width characters,


uppercase characters and lowercase characters.
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• The qualifier of the data format for the priority of parameter 2 is automatically set as signed
decimal, so either do not set the qualifier or enter s/ws: Signed decimal.

16-66 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

When outputting to a PLC device


When LARGE (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>) is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC
device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".

[Example] The results of LARGE function are output to DM1000 as 2-word unsigned decimal.
=> Display LARGE <parameter 1>, <parameter 2>=""DM01000.w2u"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17

Application example

A B C
1 "DM00001.wu" =LARGE(A1:A5.wu,2)
ABS
2 "DM00002.wu"
3 "DM00003.wu" AVERAGE

4 "DM00004.wu"
CHOOSE
5 "DM00005.wu"
COUNT

COUNTIF
PLC devices LARGE Function
DM00001:200 =>"A1" Value of "B1":400 IF
DM00002:300 =>"A2"
DM00003:100 =>"A3" LARGE
DM00004:500 =>"A4"
DM00005:400 =>"A5" LARGEPOS

MATCH

When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00005 are read to "A1" to "A5". MAX

The 2nd largest value from among "A1" to "A5" is searched and returned to "B1". MIN

SMALL

Point • A value of 1 or more is valid as the order of parameter 2.If this value is 0 (zero) or the value
SMALLPOS
is larger than the number of cells in the range set at parameter 1, a worksheet execution
error occurs. SUM
• When twom or more of the same value exist, priority is given to the top/left cell. For
SUMIF
example, priorityis as follows:

A Priority A B C D E F G
1 30 (5) 1 30 20 30 50 50 40 60
2 20 (7)
3 30 (6) Priority (5) (7) (6) (2) (3) (4) (1)
4 50
16
(2)
5 50 (3)
6 40 (4)
WORKSHEET

7 60 (1)

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-67


16-5 Worksheet Function

LARGEPOS Acquires and returns the position of a numerical value in the specified order
counting from the largest number from a range of specified cells.

Item Description
Sets the range of the cell to reference. (Example) A1:A10
Range
The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter
1:Range Select the data format of the cells in the specified range from "Unsigned decimal/
Data
Parameter

Signed decimal/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's


Format
complement.
Sets the K (Priority) in the range set by parameter 1.
Const:Set the numerical value.
Parameter 2: K
Cell: Sets the cell to reference. Sets the position of the cell to reference. The cell
position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to device

changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is
Device Name
PLC

clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
complement.

Direct entry format


Priority position=LARGEPOS (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>)
Priority position=LARGEPOS (<Range, Data format qualifier, Priority>)

16 [Example] Entry LARGEPOS(A1:A10.wu,1s) => Display =LARGEPOS(A1:A10.wu,1)


wu: Unsigned decimal
Entry LARGEPOS(A1:A10.wu,B1.ws) => Display =LARGEPOS(A1:A10.wu,B1)
WORKSHEET

wu: Unsigned decimal

Reference • LARGEPOS(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>)has no difference in terms of half-width characters,


uppercase characters and lowercase characters.
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• The qualifier of the data format for the priority of parameter 2 is automatically set as signed decimal, so
either do not set the qualifier or enter s/ws: Signed decimal.

16-68 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

When outputting to a PLC device


When LARGEPOS (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>) is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC
device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".

[Example] The results of LARGEPOS are output to DM1000 as 1-word unsigned decimal.
=> Display LARGEPOS(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>)=>"DM01000.wu"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17

Application example

A B C D
1
2
ABS
3 "A" "DM00001.wu" =LARGEPOS(B3:B7.wu,1) =CHOOSE(A3:A7.s,C3)
4 "B" "DM00002.wu" AVERAGE

5 "C" "DM00003.wu" CHOOSE


6 "D" "DM00004.wu"
COUNT
7 "E" "DM00005.wu"
8 COUNTIF

IF

Constant PLC devices LARGEPOS CHOOSE function LARGE


DM00001:200 =>"B3" Function Value of "D3"
DM00002:300 =>"B4" LARGEPOS
DM00003:100 =>"B5"
DM00004:500 =>"B6" MATCH
DM00005:400 =>"B7"
MAX

MIN

When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00005 are read to "B3" to "B7". SMALL

The cell of the largest value from among "B3" to "B7" is searched and its position returned to "C3".
SMALLPOS
The value of the cell at "C3" (4)th position from among "A3" to "A7" is returned to "D3".
SUM
"CHOOSE", page 16-46
SUMIF

Point • A value of 1 or more is valid as the order of parameter 2. If this value is 0 (zero) or the value
is larger than the number of cells in the range set at parameter 1, a worksheet execution
error occurs.
• When twom or more of the same value exist, priority is given to the top/left cell. For
example, priorityis as follows:

1
A
30
Priority
(5) 1
A
30
B
20
C
30
D
50
E
50
F
40
G
60 16
2 20 (7)
WORKSHEET

3 30 (6) Priority (5) (7) (6) (2) (3) (4) (1)


4 50 (2)
5 50 (3)
6 40 (4)
7 60 (1)

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-69


16-5 Worksheet Function

MATCH In the case of multiple same values, the top/left cells are at a priority level,
as shown below:

Item Description
Data type of compared value Select the data type of compared value from "Word/text string".
Select reference conditions from "Matching/below/above"
Matching: returns the position of cells matching the compared value from the range of
specified cells.Returns "0" in the absence of matching cells.
Below: returns the position of cells of values (below the compared value) closest to the
reference conditions *1,2 compared value from the range of specified cells. Returns "0" if no cells
matching the reference conditions are found.
Above: returns the position of cells of values (above the compared value) closest to the
compared value from the range of specified cells. Returns "0" if no cells
matching the reference conditions are found.
*1 When entered directly, the reference conditions can be set through the check box displayed in worksheet
setting tool screen.
"16-2 Setting Worksheets"
*2 The "above" and "below" in the text string are coded according to characters.

Word (MATCH)
This describes the situation when "Data type of compared value" is word.

Item Description
Sets the range of the cell. (Example) A1:A10
Range
Parameter The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
1:Range Data Select data format of parameter 1 from "Unsigned decimal/signed decimal/floating

16 Format real number".Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement.
Parameter

Sets the compared value


Const: Set the numerical value.
Parameter
Lookup Cell: Sets the cell to reference.Sets the position of the cell to reference. The cell
WORKSHEET

2: Lookup
value position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
value
Calc: "Device setting" window is displayed by clicking "Arithmetic formula"
button. Sets arithmetic formula. *1
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to PLC

changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
device

Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is
Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Data Format
BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement.

16-70 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

*1 Setting Method
"Calculation formula", page 16-23

Direct entry format


<position>=MATCH(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,<match condition>) ABS

"Position" = MATCH("Range", "Compared value", <match condition>) AVERAGE

"Position" = MATCH("Cell", "Constant/cell/calculation", <match condition>) CHOOSE

COUNT
[Example] Entry MATCH(A1:A10.wu,100u,0) => Display =MATCH(A1:A10.wu,100,0)
wu: Unsigned decimal COUNTIF

Entry MATCH(A1:A10.wu,B1.wu,0) => Display =MATCH(A1:A10.wu,B1.wu,0) IF

wu: Unsigned decimal


LARGE
Entry MATCH(A1:A10.wu,B1.wu*B2.wu,0) => Display =MATCH(A1:A10.wu,B1.wu*B2.wu,0)
LARGEPOS
wu: Unsigned decimal
MATCH

Reference • If MATCH(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>, <match condition>)is half-width character, it has no MAX

difference in terms of uppercase characters and lowercase characters.


MIN
• Reference conditions are entered by: above: 1; matching; 0; below: -1.
• Format when setting constants to cells SMALL

"Constant", page 16-9 SMALLPOS


• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
SUM
"Cells", page 16-11
• Format when setting account to cells SUMIF

"Calculation", page 16-21

When outputting to a PLC device


When MATCH (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>, <match condition>) is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set
"Output to PLC device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".
16
[Example] The results of MATCH function are output to DM1000 by 1-word unsigned decimal.
WORKSHEET

=> Display MATCH(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>, <match condition>)=>"DM01000.wu"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-71


16-5 Worksheet Function

Application example

A B C
1 100 INPUT (100) =MATCH(A1:A5.wu,B1.wu,0)
2 200
3 300
4 400
5 500

Constant Input MATCH function(matching)


(numerical value) Value of "B1":default 100=> 300 Value of "C1":3

Write 300 into "B1" from parts (numerical value display, etc).
When the worksheet is next executed, the position of the cell matching "300" from "A1" to "A5" is returned to "C1".

A B C
1 100 INPUT (100) =MATCH(A1:A5.wu,B1.wu,-1)
2 200
3 300
4 400
5 500

Constant Input MATCH function(below)


(numerical value) Value of "B1":default 100=> 250 Value of "C1":2

Write 250 into "B1" from parts (numerical value display, etc).
When the worksheet is next executed, the position of the cell ("A2") of value "250 or less" closest to "250" from "A1"
to "A5" is returned to "C1".

16
WORKSHEET

16-72 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

String (MATCH)
This section describes the situation when "Data type of compared value" is text string.

ABS

AVERAGE
Item Description
CHOOSE
Parameter Sets the range of the cell. (Example) A1:A10
Range
1:Range The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter

COUNT
Sets the compared value
Parameter COUNTIF
Lookup Const: Sets the numerical value.
2: Lookup
value Cell: Sets the cell to reference.Specify the position of cells by clicking "Select"
value IF
button.
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device LARGE
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
LARGEPOS
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Output to PLC

MATCH
Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is
device

Device Name MAX


clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is MIN
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed SMALL

Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
SMALLPOS
complement.
SUM

Direct entry format SUMIF

<position>=MATCH(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>,<match condition>)


"Position" = MATCH(<Range>, <Compared value>, <match condition>)
"Position" = MATCH(<Unit>, <Constant/cell>, <match condition>)

[Example] Entry MATCH(A1:A10.s,"ABC",0) => Display =MATCH(A1:A10.s,"ABC",0) s: String


Entry MATCH(A1:A10.s,B1.s,0) => Display =MATCH(A1:A10.s,B1.s,0) s: String 16
WORKSHEET

Reference • If MATCH(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>, <match condition>)is half-width character, it has no
difference in terms of uppercase characters and lowercase characters.
• Reference conditions are entered by: above: 1; matching; 0; below: -1.
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-73


16-5 Worksheet Function

When outputting to a PLC device


When MATCH (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>, <match condition>) is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set
"Output to PLC device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".

[Example] The results of MATCH function are output to DM1000 by 1-word unsigned decimal.
=> Display MATCH(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>, <match condition>)=>"DM01000.wu"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17

Application example

A B C
1 "ABC" INPUT ("ABC") =MATCH(A1:A5.s,B1.s,0)
2 "DEF"
3 "LMN"
4 "PQR"
5 "XYZ"

Constant Input MATCH function((matching)


(string) Value of "B1":default ABC=> XYZ Value of "C1":5

Write XYZ to "B1" from parts (text display, etc).


When the worksheet is next executed, the position of the cell matching "XYZ" from "A1" to "A5" is returned to "C1".

16
WORKSHEET

16-74 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

MAX Acquires and returns maximum value from the range of specified cells or
specified trend data.

ABS

Item Description
AVERAGE
Select parameter 1 from "Cell/Trend".
Cell: Sets the cell to reference. (Example) A1:A10 CHOOSE
Range
Parameter

The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter Trend: Sets the trend ID and trend No. *1 COUNT
1:Range
Select the data format of cells in specified range from "Unsigned decimal/signed
Data COUNTIF
decimal/BCD/floating real number".Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is
Format
handled as 2's complement. IF
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device
Output to PLC device LARGE
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device LARGEPOS
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Output to PLC

MATCH
Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is
device

Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
MAX
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words. MIN

Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
SMALL
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
complement. SMALLPOS

*1 "10-3 Setting Trend images" SUM


"10-4 XY image Settings"
SUMIF

Direct entry format


<maximum value>=MAX(<parameter 1>)
Maximum value= MAX (<Range of cells,data format qualifier>)
<Maximum value>= MAX(<trd "Trend ID: Trend NO.". data format qualifier>)

[Example] Entry MAX(A1:A10.wu) => Display =MAX(A1:A10.wu) wu: Unsigned decimal 16


Entry MAX(trd"0:0".wu) => Display =MAX(trd"0:0".wu) wu: Unsigned decimal
WORKSHEET

Reference • If MAX(<parameter 1>)is half-width character, it has no difference in terms of uppercase characters
and lowercase characters.
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• When ìTrendî is selected for parameter 1, the qualifier of the data format is as follows:
trd"trend ID:trend No.".wu wu: Unsigned decimal
trd"trend ID:trend No.".ws ws: Signed decimal (.ws is not displayed.)
trd"trend ID:trend No.".wb wb: BCD

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-75


16-5 Worksheet Function

When outputting to a PLC device


When MAX (<parameter 1>) is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC device".
In the case of ìOutput only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".

[Example] MAX function is output to DM1000 as 2-word unsigned decimal.


=> Display MAX (<parameter 1>) =>"DM01000.w2u"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17

Application example

A B C
1 "DM00001.wu" =MAX(A1:A5.wu)
2 "DM00002.wu"
3 "DM00003.wu"
4 "DM00004.wu"
5 "DM00005.wu"

PLC devices MAX Function


DM00001:200 =>"A1" Value of "B1":500
DM00002:300 =>"A2"
DM00003:100 =>"A3"
DM00004:500 =>"A4"
DM00005:400 =>"A5"

When the worksheet is executed, the value of DM00001-DM00005 is read to "A1" - "A5".
The maximum value is searched in "A1" - "A5", and returned to "B1".

Point • It takes a longer time to process this function when “Trend” is selected in parameter 1, and
there is a lot of data of the recorded trend.
• When “Trend” is selected in parameter 1 and there isn’t data of target trend, it’s returned to
"0".

16
WORKSHEET

16-76 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

MIN Acquires and returns minimum value from the range of specified cells or
specified trend data.

ABS

Item Description AVERAGE

Select parameter 1 from "Cell/Trend".


CHOOSE
Cell: Sets the cell to reference. (Example) A1:A10
Parameter

Range
Parameter The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button. COUNT
1:Range Trend: Sets the trend ID and trend No. *1
Data Select the data format of parameter 1 from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/ COUNTIF

Format BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement.
IF
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution. LARGE

Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
LARGEPOS
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Output to PLC

Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is MATCH
device

Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
MAX
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words. MIN
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's SMALL
complement.
SMALLPOS
*1 "10-3 Setting Trend images"
SUM
"10-4 XY image Settings"
SUMIF

Direct entry format


<minimum value>=MIN(<parameter 1>)
"Minimum value"= MIN (<Range of cells,data format qualifier>)
"Minimum value"= MIN (<trd "Trend ID: Trend NO.". data format qualifier>)

[Example] Entry MIN(A1:A10.wu) => Display =MIN(A1:A10.wu) wu: Unsigned decimal 16


Entry MIN(trd"0:0".wu) => Display =MIN(trd"0:0".wu) wu: Unsigned decimal
WORKSHEET

Reference • If MIN (<parameter 1>) is half-width character, it has no difference in terms of uppercase characters
and lowercase characters.
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• When "Trend" is selected for parameter 1, the qualifier of the data format is as follows:
trd"trend ID:trend No.".wu wu: Unsigned decimal
trd"trend ID:trend No.".ws ws: Signed decimal (.ws is not displayed.)
trd"trend ID:trend No.".wb wb: BCD

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-77


16-5 Worksheet Function

When outputting to a PLC device


When MIN (<parameter 1>) is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".

[Example] The results of MIN function are output to DM1000 as 2-word unsigned decimal.
=> Display MIN (<parameter 1>)=>"DM01000.w2u"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17

Application example

A B C
1 "DM00001.wu" =MIN(A1:A5.wu)
2 "DM00002.wu"
3 "DM00003.wu"
4 "DM00004.wu"
5 "DM00005.wu"

PLC devices MIN Function


DM00001:200 =>"A1" Value of "B1":100
DM00002:300 =>"A2"
DM00003:100 =>"A3"
DM00004:500 =>"A4"
DM00005:400 =>"A5"

When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00005 are read to "A1" to "A5".
The maximum value from among "A1" to "A5" is searched and returned to "B1".

Point • It takes a longer time to process this function when "Trend" is selected in parameter 1, and
there is a lot of data of the recorded trend.
• When "Trend" is selected in parameter 1 and there isn't data of target trend, it's returned to
"0".

16
WORKSHEET

16-78 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

SMALL Acquires and returns a numerical value in the specified value counting from
the smallest number from a range of specified cells.

ABS

Item Description AVERAGE

Sets the range of the cell to reference. (Example) A1:A10


Range CHOOSE
The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter
1:Range Select data format of parameter 1 from "Unsigned decimal/signed decimal/ COUNT
Data
Parameter

floating real number". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
Format COUNTIF
complement.
Sets the K (Parameter) in the range set by parameter 1. IF
Parameter Const: Set the numerical value.
K
2:K Cell: Sets the cell to reference. Sets the position of the cell to reference. The LARGE
cell position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
LARGEPOS
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution. MATCH
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes. MAX
Output to PLC

Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is
device

Device Name MIN


clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When “Float” is SMALL
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words.
SMALLPOS
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's SUM
complement.
SUMIF

Direct entry format


<Priority value>= SMALL (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>)
<Priority value>= SMALL (<Range, Data format qualifier, Priority>)

[Example] Entry SMALL(A1:A10.wu,1s) => Display =SMALL(A1:A10.wu,1)


wu: Unsigned decimal 16
Entry SMALL(A1:A10.wu,B1.ws) => Display =SMALL(A1:A10.wu,B1)
WORKSHEET

wu: Unsigned decimal

Reference • If SMALL (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>) is half-width character, it has no difference in terms of
uppercase characters and lowercase characters.
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• The qualifier of the data format for the priority of parameter 2 is automatically set as signed
decimal, so either do not set the qualifier or enter s/ws: Signed decimal.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-79


16-5 Worksheet Function

When outputting to a PLC device


When SMALL (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>) is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC device"
is set.
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".

[Example] The results of SMALL function are output to DM1000 as 2-word unsigned decimal.
=> Display SMALL(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>)=>"DM01000. w2u"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17

Application example

A B C
1 "DM00001.wu" =SMALL(A1:A5.wu,2)
2 "DM00002.wu"
3 "DM00003.wu"
4 "DM00004.wu"
5 "DM00005.wu"

PLC devices SMALL Function


DM00001:200 =>"A1" Value of "B1":200
DM00002:300 =>"A2"
DM00003:100 =>"A3"
DM00004:500 =>"A4"
DM00005:400 =>"A5"

When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00005 are read to "A1" to "A5".
The value smaller than the 2nd one is searched from "A1"-"A5" and returned to "B1".

Point • A value of 1 or more is valid as the order of parameter 2. If this value is 0 (zero) or the value
is larger than the number of cells in the range set at parameter 1, a worksheet execution
error occurs.
• When twom or more of the same value exist, priority is given to the top/left cell. For
example, priorityis as follows:

A Priority A B C D E F G
1 30 (2) 1 30 20 30 50 50 40 60
2 20 (1)
3 30 (3) Priority (2) (1) (3) (5) (6) (4) (7)
4 50 (5)
5 50 (6)
16 6
7
40
60
(4)
(7)
WORKSHEET

16-80 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

SMALLPOS Acquires and returns the position of a numerical value in the specified order
counting from the smallest number from a range of specified cells.

ABS

AVERAGE
Item Description
Sets the range of the cell. (Example) A1:A10 CHOOSE
Range
The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter COUNT
1:Range Select the data format of the cells in the specified range from "Unsigned decimal/
Data
Parameter

Signed decimal/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's


Format COUNTIF
complement.
Sets the K (Priority) in the range set by parameter 1. IF
Const: Set the numerical value.
Parameter 2: K LARGE
Cell: Sets the cell to reference. Sets the position of the cell to reference. The
cell position can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button. LARGEPOS
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is outputto the target device
Output to PLC device
on the PLC at worksheet execution. MATCH

Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device MAX
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Output to PLC

Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is MIN
device

Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
SMALL
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words. SMALLPOS
Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's SUM

complement.
SUMIF

Direct entry format


<Priority position>=SMALLPOS (<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>)
<Priority position>=SMALLPOS(<cell range.data format qualifier>,<Priority>)

[Example] Entry SMALLPOS(A1:A10.wu,1s) => Display =SMALLPOS(A1:A10.wu,1)


wu: Unsigned decimal
16
Entry SMALLPOS(A1:A10.wu,B1.ws) => Display =SMALLPOS(A1:A10.wu,B1)
WORKSHEET

wu: Unsigned decimal

Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for SMALLPOS (<parameter 1>,
<parameter 2>).
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• The qualifier of the data format for the priority of parameter 2 is automatically set as signed decimal, so
either do not set the qualifier or enter s/ws: Signed decimal.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-81


16-5 Worksheet Function

When outputting to a PLC device


When SMALLPOS(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>) => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC
device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".

[Example] To output the result of the SMALLPOS function to DM1000 as 1-word signed decimal
=> Display SMALLPOS(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>)=>"DM01000.wu"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17

Application example

A B C D
1
2
3 "A" "DM00001.wu" =SMALLPOS(B3:B7.wu,1) =CHOOSE(A3:A7.s,C3)
4 "B" "DM00002.wu"
5 "C" "DM00003.wu"
6 "D" "DM00004.wu"
7 "E" "DM00005.wu"
8

Constant PLC devices SMALLPOS Function CHOOSE function


(string) DM00001:200 =>"B3" Value of "C3":3 Value of "D3":C
DM00002:300 =>"B4"
DM00003:100 =>"B5"
DM00004:500 =>"B6"
DM00005:400 =>"B7"

When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00005 are read to "B3" to "B7".
The cell of the largest value from below "B3" to "B7" is searched and its position returned to "C3".
The value of the cell at "C3" (3)th position from among "A3" to "A7" is returned to "D3".
"CHOOSE", page 16-46

Point • A value of 1 or more is valid as the order of parameter 2. If this value is 0 (zero) or the value
is larger than the number of cells in the range set at parameter 1, a worksheet execution
error occurs.
• When twom or more of the same value exist, priority is given to the top/left cell. For
example, priorityis as follows:

16 1
A
30
Priority
(2) 1
A
30
B
20
C
30
D
50
E
50
F
40
G
60
2 20 (1)
WORKSHEET

3 30 (3) Priority (2) (1) (3) (5) (6) (4) (7)


4 50 (5)
5 50 (6)
6 40 (4)
7 60 (7)

16-82 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

SUM Acquires and returns the sum of the range of specified cells or the sum or
specified trend data.

ABS

AVERAGE
Item Description
Select parameter 1 from "Cell/Trend". CHOOSE
Cell: Sets the cell to reference. (Example) A1:A10
Parameter

Range
Parameter The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button. COUNT

1:Range Trend: Sets the trend ID and trend No. *1


COUNTIF
Data Select the data format of parameter 1 from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Format BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement. IF

When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to PLC device LARGE
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device LARGEPOS
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Output to PLC

MATCH
Sets the target device to output cell values from.When the "Browse" button is
device

Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window. MAX
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words. MIN

Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed SMALL
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's
complement. SMALLPOS

*1 "10-3 Setting Trend images" SUM


"10-4 XY image Settings"
SUMIF

Direct entry format


<Sum>=(<parameter 1>)
<Sum>= SUM (<Range of cells,data format qualifier>)
<Sum>= SUM (<trd "Trend ID": "Trend NO." . data format qualifier>)

[Example] Entry SUM(A1:A10.wu) => Display =SUM(A1:A10.wu) wu: Unsigned decimal 16


Entry SUM(trd"0:0".wu) => Display =SUM(trd"0:0".wu) wu: Unsigned decimal
WORKSHEET

Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for SUM (<parameter 1<).
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• When "Trend" is selected for parameter 1, the qualifier of the data format is as follows:
trd"trend ID:trend No.".wu wu: Unsigned decimal
trd"trend ID:trend No.".ws ws: Signed decimal (.ws is not displayed.)
trd"trend ID:trend No.".wb wb: BCD

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-83


16-5 Worksheet Function

When outputting to a PLC device


When SUM(<parameter 1>) => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".

[Example] To output the result of the SUM function to DM1000 as 2-word signed decimal
=> Display => SUM(<parameter 1>)=>"DM01000..w2u"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17

Application example

A B C
1 "DM00001.wu" =SUM(A1:A5.wu)=>"DM00100.wu"
2 "DM00002.wu"
3 "DM00003.wu"
4 "DM00004.wu"
5 "DM00005.wu"

PLC devices SUM Function


DM00001:200 =>"A1" Value of "B1":1500
DM00002:300 =>"A2"
DM00003:100 =>"A3"
DM00004:500 =>"A4"
DM00005:400 =>"A5" PLC of various makers

When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00005 are read to "A1" to "A5".
Calculate the sum of "A1"-"A5", and return to "B1".
As "Output to PLC device" is set, the value of "B1" is written to DM00100.

Point • The worksheet is executed falsely when the sum exceeds the representable range of data
format of the cells.
• Even if the representable range of data format of the cells is exceeded during calculation,
no error of worksheet execution will occur when the calculated results are controlled in the
range.
• It takes a long time to process this function when “Trend” is selected for parameter 1, and
there is a lot of recorded data.

16
WORKSHEET

16-84 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

Acquires and returns the total value of cells matching conditions from a
SUMIF range of specified cells, or the total value of matching cells from the data of
specified trend graph.

ABS

AVERAGE

CHOOSE

COUNT
Item Description
Select parameter 1 from "Cell/Trend". COUNTIF
Cell: Sets the cell to reference. (Example) A1:A10
Range IF
Parameter The cell range can also be selected by clicking the "Select" button.
Parameter

1:Range Trend: Sets the trend ID and trend No. *1


LARGE
Data Select the data format of parameter 1 from "Unsigned decimal/Signed decimal/
Format BCD/Float". Of the data formats, "Signed decimal" is handled as 2's complement. LARGEPOS

Parameter
Conditiona "Device setting" window is displayed by clicking "<Conditional formula>" button. MATCH
2:
l formula*2 Set the conditional formula (calculation formula) in this window.
Condition MAX
When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device
Output to PLC device MIN
on the PLC at worksheet execution.
Output only if value When this checkbox is marked, the value of the cell is output to the target device SMALL
changed on the PLC at worksheet execution only when the state of the device changes.
Output to PLC

Sets the target device to output cell values from. When the "Browse" button is SMALLPOS
device

Device Name
clicked, the reference bit device can be set in the "Device settings" window.
SUM
Select the data length of the target device from "1-word/2-words". When Float is
Data length
selected at Data format, the data length is fixed to 2-words. SUMIF

Select the data format of the target device from "Unsigned decimal/Signed
Data Format decimal/BCD/Float". Of the data formats, “Signed decimal” is handled as 2's
complement.
*1 "10-3 Setting Trend images"
"10-4 XY image Settings"

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-85


16-5 Worksheet Function

*2 The variable X in the conditional formula (calculation formula) in the worksheet refers to the various data in the
range specified by parameter 1.
Setting Method
"Calculation formula", page 16-23

Direct entry format


<sum value>=SUMIF(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>)
<SUM>=SUMIF(<cell range.data format qualifier>,<conditional formula>)
<SUM>=SUMIF(<trd"trend ID:trend No.".data format qualifier>,<conditional formula>)

[Example] Entry SUMIF(A1:A10.wu,X>10u) => Display =SUMIF(A1:A10.wu,X>10)


u,wu: Unsigned decimal
Entry SUMIF(A1:A10.wu,X>B1.wu) => Display =SUMIF(A1:A10.wu,X>B1.wu)
wu: Unsigned decimal
Entry SUMIF(trd"0:0".wu,X)>100u => Display =SUMIF(trd"0:0".wu,X)>100
u,wu: Unsigned decimal
Entry SUMIF(trd"0:0".wu,X>B1.wu) => Display =SUMIF(trd"0:0".wu,X>B1.wu)
wu: Unsigned decimal

Reference • 1-byte uppercase or lowercase characters may be entered for SUMIF (<parameter 1>, <parameter
2>).
• Format when setting constants to cells
"Constant", page 16-9
• Format when setting cells for referencing other cells
"Cells", page 16-11
• Format when setting account to cells
"Calculation", page 16-21
• When ìTrendî is selected for parameter 1, the qualifier of the data format is as follows:

16 trd"trend ID:trend No.".wu


trd"trend ID:trend No.".ws
wu: Unsigned decimal
ws: Signed decimal (.ws is not displayed.)
trd"trend ID:trend No.".wb wb: BCD
WORKSHEET

When outputting to a PLC device


When SUMIF(<parameter 1>,<parameter 2>) => is entered, the "Cell" window is displayed. Set "Output to PLC
device".
In the case of "Output only if value changed", enter "->" instead of "=>".

[Example] To output the result of the SUMIF function to DM1000 as 2-word signed decimal
=> Display SUMIF(<parameter 1>, <parameter 2>)= "DM01000.w2u"

"About display of PLC devices", page 16-17

16-86 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-5 Worksheet Function

Application example

A B C
1 "DM00001.wu" SUMIF(A1:A10.wu,40<=X&X>=70)
2 "DM00002.wu"
3 "DM00003.wu"
4 "DM00004.wu"
5 "DM00005.wu"
6 "DM00006.wu"
7 "DM00007.wu"
8 "DM00008.wu"
9 "DM00009.wu"
10 "DM00010.wu"

PLC devices SUMIF Function


DM00001:20 =>"A1" Value of "B1":230
DM00002:35 =>"A2"
DM00003:67 =>"A3" ABS

DM00004:58 =>"A4"
AVERAGE
DM00005:44 =>"A5"
DM00006:23 =>"A6" CHOOSE
DM00007:61 =>"A7"
DM00008:15 =>"A8" COUNT
DM00009:75 =>"A9"
DM00010:98 =>"A10" COUNTIF

IF

When the worksheet is executed, the values of DM00001 to DM00010 are read to "A1" to "A10".
LARGE
The SUM of cells whose value is 40 or more or 70 or less from among cells "A1" to "A10" is returned to "B1".
LARGEPOS

MATCH
Point • The worksheet is executed falsely when the sum exceeds the representable range of data
format of the cells. MAX
• Even if the representable range of data format of the cells is exceeded during calculation,
no error of worksheet execution will occur when the calculated results are controlled in the MIN

range. SMALL
• It takes a long time to process this function when “Trend” is selected for parameter 1, and
there is a lot of recorded data. SMALLPOS

SUM

SUMIF

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-87


16-6 Application Example of Worksheets
This section describes the application examples of worksheets.

Example 1: display in parallel the superintendents and production capacity


according to the production sequence.
The production quantity of 3 operators is recorded separately to PLC device. Their names and production quantity
are sorted and displayed in VT3according to the production sequence.

Today's ranking and production quantity


Superintendent Production quantity
1st place Suzuki 132
2nd place Sato 115
3rd place Tanaka 109

Text display Numerical value display


Set cells from reference word device of Set cells from reference word device of
various text display. Start from top various numerical value display. Start from top
[D2] [E2]
[D3] [E3]
[D4] [E4]

16 In the system setting of worksheets, set the worksheet startup trigger to internal timer (auto).
Sorting and display is performed according to the change of superintendents and production capacity.
WORKSHEET

16-88 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-6 Application Example of Worksheets

Setting Worksheets
A B C D E
Superint
1 Production quantity N-th Position N-th superintendent N-th production quantity
endents
2 "Tanaka" "DM00001.wu" =LARGEPOS(B2:B4.wu,1) =CHOOSE(A2:A4.s,C2) =CHOOSE(B2:B4.wu,C2)
3 "Suzuki" "DM00101.wu" =LARGEPOS(B2:B4.wu,2) =CHOOSE(A2:A4.s,C3) =CHOOSE(B2:B4.wu,C3)
4 "Sato" "DM00102.wu" =LARGEPOS(B2:B4.wu,3) =CHOOSE(A2:A4.s,C4) =CHOOSE(B2:B4.wu,C4)
5

• Set the comment in the 1st line.


• "A2"-"A4" sets the name of superintendents by constant (text string).
• "B2"-"B4" sets PLC device recording the production quantity of superintendents.
• "C2" is set as the position for searching the cell of maximum value in "B2"-"B4".
• "C3" "C4" is also set as the position of 2nd and 3rd cells.
• "D2" is set as the value of cells at the "C2-th" position that's searched in the range of "A2"-"A4".
• "E2" is set as the value of cells at the "C2-th" position that's searched in the range of "B2"-"B4".

Value of cells after


execution

Value of cells after execution


A B C D E
Superint
1 Production quantity N-th Position N-th superintendent N-th production quantity
endents
2 "Tanaka" 109 2 Suzuki 132
3 "Suzuki" 132 3 Sato 115
4 "Sato" 115 1 Tanaka 109
5

the value of "C2" is 2 in the above-specified examples,


• The value of 2nd cell "A3" counting from "A2" becomes the value of "D2". In "D2"-"D4", the name of
superintendents are sorted according to the sequence of maximum production quantity.
• The value of 2nd cell "B3" counting from "B2" becomes the value of "E2". In "E2"-"E4", the production quantity is
sorted according to the sequence of maximum production quantity.

16
WORKSHEET

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-89


16-6 Application Example of Worksheets

Application example 2: display the bar graph.


For the measured value recorded in trend graph (real-time), the variability of set value is displayed by bar graph.

Distribution chart

100

50

0
-40 -20 0 20 40 Execution

Trend graph Switch (for worksheet execution trigger)


Type of graph: worksheet Switching mode: set as setting.
Graph format: set as bar graph.

16
WORKSHEET

To record the measured value, the trend graph (real-time) shall be set.
"10-3 Setting Trend images"

In the system settings of worksheets, the worksheet startup trigger is set to bit device.
Set the device of trigger bit device the same as the target device of "Execute" switch.
Set the measured value as the value recorded in trend ID0 and trend No.0.

16-90 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-6 Application Example of Worksheets

Setting Worksheets

A B C
1 Variability (degree) Set value
2 '(Set value-measured value)<-40 =COUNTIF(trd"0:0",<-C2<(-40)) "DM00100.ws"
3 '-40<=(Set value-measured value)<-20 =COUNTIF(trd"0:0",(-40)<=X-C2&X-C2<(-20))
4 '-20<=(Set value-measured value)<0 =COUNTIF(trd"0:0",(-20)<=X-C2&X-C2<0)
5 '0<=(Set value-measured value)<20 =COUNTIF(trd"0:0",0<=X-C2&X-C2<20)
6 '20<=(Set value-measured value)<40 =COUNTIF(trd"0:0",20<=X-C2&X-C2<40)
7 '40<=(Set value-measured value) =COUNTIF(trd"0:0",40<=X-C2)

• Set comment in "A2"-"A7", "B1", "C1".


• Set "B2"-"B7" as the number of data matching conditional formula thatís searched from the data recorded in trend
ID0 and trend IDNO0.
• Set PLC device recording set value in "C2".

Value of cells after execution

Value of cells after execution


A B C
1 Variability (degree) Set value
2 '(Set value-measured value)<-40 10 100
3 '-40<=(Set value-measured value)<-20 30
4 '-20<=(Set value-measured value)<0 70
5 '0<=(Set value-measured value)<20 80
6 '20<=(Set value-measured value)<40 50
7 '40<=(Set value-measured value) 10

• When the worksheet is executed, the value of "B2"-"B7" becomes the number of data matching the conditions.
• In the trend graph parts (work), the values of cells are displayed by bar graph since "B2"-"B7" are set in reference
cells.

Application example 3: set relay as ON at PM5:00(17:00)of every Friday.


Set relay 1000 of PLC as ON at PM5:00(17:00)on every Friday.

VT3 PLC of various makers


16
WORKSHEET

Friday 17:00 Relay 1000 ON

Setting Worksheets
A B
1 Week "MW0013.wu"
2 Hours "MW0018.wu"
3 'Minute "MW0019.wu"
4 'Condition B1.wu=5&B2.wu=17&(0<=B3.wu & B3.wu<1)
5 'Setting =IF(B4.b,ON,OFF)->"01000.b(A)"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-91


16-6 Application Example of Worksheets

• In the system setting of worksheets, set the worksheet startup trigger to internal timer (auto).
• Set comment in "A1"-"A5"
• Set internal special device of VT3in "B1" "B2" "B3".
MW0013:Week (number, 0: Sunday-6: Saturday)
MW0018:Hour(unsigned decimal,0 to 23)
MW0019: Minute(signed decimal,0 to 59)
"6-6 About Devices"
• Set ìB4î as parameter 1 (conditional formula) of IF function of "B5" in the calculation.
Sets such that the value of cell is turned ON at 17:00 on Friday, or turned OFF at 17:01.
• ìB5î is set as relay 01000 is turned ON when the conditions of "B4" are matched, or is turned OFF otherwise. In
addition, set as output (output only when the value changes) to PLC device (relay 01000).

Value of cells after execution(Week 17:00)

Value of cells after execution


A B
1 Week 5
2 Hours 17
3 'Minute 0
4 'Condition 1
5 'Setting ON(1)

PLCs from other manufacters


In above-specified examples,
• When the worksheet is executed around 17:00, relay
01000 is turned ON. When the worksheet is executed around 17:01, relay-1000 is turned OFF.

Point When the worksheet is executed by internal timer(auto), the execution time of worksheet is
uncertain.
In the above-specified examples, the conditions of "B4" are set to comprise second/hour.
Within the time of JUST (e.g. 17:00:00), the worksheet isn’t executed sometimes, and the
relay isnít turned ON.
Particular attentions shall be paid to process the time in the worksheet.

16
WORKSHEET

16-92 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


16-6 Application Example of Worksheets

Application example 4: output from KL according to the value of barcode.


Compare the barcodes read by barcode reader with previously logged barcodes, and output the matching barcodes
from KL.

Barcode reader

49123456

Text display
Set cells in reference word device KL
and write worksheet word device of (16-dot output cell)
text display

For example, the output targets consistent with logged barcode data are correlated below.
Assumed that the connected KL is a 16-output unit and assigned with LNW0000 (LNB00000 to LNB0000F).
When the value read from barcode reader is 49000003, bit 2 of LNW0000 becomes ON.

Logged barcode data Consistent output targets


49000001
49000002
Bit 0 of LNW0000 becomes(LNB00000)ON
Bit 1 of LNW0000 becomes(LNB00001)ON
16
49000003 Bit 2 of LNW0000 becomes(LNB00002)ON
WORKSHEET

49000004 Bit 3 of LNW0000 becomes(LNB00003)ON


49000005 Bit 4 of LNW0000 becomes(LNB00004)ON
49000006 Bit 5 of LNW0000 becomes(LNB00005)ON
49000007 Bit 6 of LNW0000 becomes(LNB00006)ON
49000008 Bit 7 of LNW0000 becomes(LNB00007)ON

• About KL link
"Chapter 7 KL Link", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• Barcode Reader
"6-3 Barcode Reader", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

In the system setting of worksheets, set the worksheet startup trigger to internal timer (auto).

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 16-93


16-6 Application Example of Worksheets

Setting Worksheets
A B C
Output
1 ‘Range Input value from barcode(compared value)
value
2 0 INPUT("Input",8)
3 1 "49000001"
4 2 "49000002" Position of consistent cells
5 4 "49000003" =MATCH(B3:B10.s,C2.s,0)
6 8 "49000004" =IF(C5=0,1,C5.wu+1)
7 16 "49000005"
8 32 "49000006" Search for the output value of LNW0000
9 64 "49000007" =CHOOSE(A2:A10.wu,C6)=>"LNW0000.wu"
10 128 "49000008"

• Set comment in "A1"-"C1", "C4", "C8".


• Set constant (word) in "A2"-"A10"
• Set constant (text string) in "B3"-"B10".
• "C2" is set to write parts (input values of text display parts placed on VT3 screen becomes the cell values).
• "C5" is set as the position of cells from which the same value of "C2" is searched from "B3"-"B10".
• "C6" is set as 1 when the value of "C5" is 0, or set as the value of "C5"+1 in other cases.MATCH function is
returned to 0 if no consistent cell is searched. In such case, set as no output to KL.
• Bit0 (LNB00000) of LNW0000 (C9) is in the range of (A2) to (A10). Find the value of the cell at (C6) poisition and
output this value to link equipment (KL).

Execution worksheet (Entry value of barcode: 49000003)

Value of cells after execution


A B C
Output
1 ‘Range Input value from barcode(compared value)
value
2 0 49000003
3 1 "49000001"
4 2 "49000002" Position of consistent cells
5 4 "49000003" 3
6 8 "49000004" 4
7 16 "49000005"
8 32 "49000006" Search for the output value of LNW0000
9 64 "49000007" 4
10 128 "49000008"
KL

16
WORKSHEET

16-94 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


17
ETHERNET CONNECTION
This chapter describes Ethernet connection and setups.

17-1 About Ethernet Connection •••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 17-2


17-2 How to Setup Ethernet •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 17-3
17-3 Set Up an Ethernet Connection Using the Edit Screen ••• 17-5

17
ETHERNET CONNECTION

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 17-1


17-1 About Ethernet Connection

Overview
"Ethernet connection" refers to communications between the VT3 and PLC viaEthernet.
If the Ethernet connection is used, up to 16 PLCs can be connected to a single VT3.
You can build a network(1: N) where the PLC connected to the VT3 is assigned PLC No. 0 to 15.
Communication between VT3 and PLC is based on the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet which operates at 10Mbps
to 100Mbps, thus enabling high-speed communications.

VT3

(VT3-E3/VT2-E1/E2)
Ethernet

PLC PLC PLC PLC


Station 0 Station 1 Station 14 Station 15

Up to 16 stations

Point VT3-V7R/Q5M(W)/Q5M(W)A/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) is not applicable to Ethernet Connection.

17
ETHERNET CONNECTION

17-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


17-2 How to Setup Ethernet

PLC Model Settings


Create a new file. From the Menu, select “Resource(R)” -> “PLC Model Settings(P)”. And then from the displayed
window, select a PLC model that supports Ethernet connection.

For PLCs manufactured by other vendors that can be connected to Ethernet, see VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series
PLC Connection Manual.

PLC Communication Setup


To use Ethernet, PLC communication conditions should be set up.

1 Display the PLC Communication Setup Window.


Following the below steps to display the PLC Communication Setup Window.
• From the “System Setup” tab in the “Workpiece Space”, click the VT System Parameters (S), and click the “PLC
Communication Conditions (C)”.
• Select “Resources(R)” -> “VT system parameters(S)” -> “PLC communications conditions(C)” from menu in that
order.

Point NOTE When an Ethernet-enabled target PLC is selected not using the PLC Model Settings
window, the window in Setp 2 is not displayed. Display the Common PLC Communication
Setup Window.

17
ETHERNET CONNECTION

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 17-3


17-2 How to Setup Ethernet

2 Setup Items of the PLC Communication Condition

Item Description
PLC No. Selects the PLC No. (0 to 15) to be used.
IP address*1 Sets the IP address of the connection destination PLC (marked PLC No.).
Sets the port No. (1024 to 65535) of the connectiondestination PLC (marked PLC
Terget PLC Port No.*2
No.).
Selects the connection destination from the connection destination list file, or adds
Connect to*3
connection destinations.
VT port No.
(for PLC Sets the port No. (for PLC communications) (1024 to65535) of the VT3.
communications)
ETHERNET
Setting Timeout Set up timeout (1 to 9999 seconds).
Send Wait Set up the send wait time (0 to 9999ms).
Number of retries Set up retry times (1 to 99 times).
Device for
connection Target word Used to set up a device that troubleshoot Ethernet connections.
confirmation is device*4 Normally no need to be set up
specified
*1 Be sure to set only unique IP addresses to each device within the LAN.
IP addresses are expressed as XXX.XXX.XXXX.XXX (XXX is a number within the range 0 to 255).
*2 When changing the port No., do not use numbers 0 to 1023 as the new port No. Also, take care not to use
another port No. that is already in use.
*3 Click the "List of Connected PLCs" button to display the "List of Connected PLCs" window.
Lists of PLCs connected with VT3 can be created through the List of Connected PLCs "window". you can
distinguish connection destination PLC by appending them with any name, connections with the PLC can be
made easier by simply selecting the desired PLC from the list file.
*4 Selectable from "PLC device"
"6-7 Setting of Devices"
*5 Configure this setting only when required for a target PLC, as described in VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series

17 PLC Connections Manual.

Reference For details about "Connection target list" window, please see "List of Connection Destinations",
ETHERNET CONNECTION

page 13-5. Although the operation modes are different, VT3 list file for PC (VT STUDIO)
communication is described here. So, PC (VT STUDIO) here indicates VT3 and VT3 indicates PLC.

3 Click the "Back to edit screen" button.

Reference • References Inform the internal devices "MW00D0 to MW00D8" of Ethernet connection problems.
• Ethernet connections can be set up in the internal devices "MW00D0 to MW00D8".
"VT Internal Device", page 6-29

17-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


17-3 Set Up an Ethernet Connection Using the Edit Screen

Describe how to set up an Ethernet connection.


For the Ethernet connection, the components are configured in the same way as the 1:1 connection. With the
Ethernet connection, however, one VT3 can be connected with up to 16 PLCs. To differentiate the target PLCs, a
PLC station number is also included in the setup of the device.

The Ethernet [Device Setup] window is shown as follows.

To set up the devices for the Ethernet connection.


The setup of a device also includes the station number of the target PLC.
A device is set up as follows.

normal With an Ethernet connection

<Device Type> <Device No.> <Station Number <PLC_A/B>


(00 to 15)> 17
_<_<PLC_A/B>>, displayed when the MultiTalk function is used.
ETHERNET CONNECTION

[Example]

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 17-5


17-3 Set Up an Ethernet Connection Using the Edit Screen

Run Ethernet PLC Data Folders


To use the "Run PLC Data Folders" function in the Ethernet connection, the PLC to which VT3transfers data should
be selected, which is based on control setup of the device.

VT3
Based on the control setup of the device,
the number of the station that runs the PLC
data folder is set to "1"
Run the PLC data folder
with the PLC Station 1.
(VT3-E3/VT2-E1/E2)
Ethernet

PLC PLC PLC PLC


Station 0 Station 1 Station 14 Station 15

Based on the control setup of the device, the number of the station that runs the PLC data folder is set to "1".
_<PLC_/B>, displayed when the MultiTalk function is used.

Item Description Default


PLC No. Selects the PLC No. (0 to 15) to be used. 0

For other setups, please see the "Execute PLC data folder", page 9-117

17
ETHERNET CONNECTION

17-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


18
LADDER MONITOR
This chapter describes ladder monitor and the setting method

18-1 Ladder Monitor ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 18-2

18
LADDER MONITOR

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 18-1


18-1 Ladder Monitor

Overview of Ladder Monitor


The ladder program of PLC connected with VT3 can be monitored.

PLC

Internal memory(ROM) Memory card

or
OP-42254

Output ladder monitor data

VT STUDIO
KV STUDIO

Point • Ladder monitor function isn't supported by VT3-Q5H(G)/Q5T(W)/Q5S(W)/Q5M(W)/Q5T(W)A/


Q5M(W)A/W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).
• VT STUDIO of Ver3.5 or higher is required for creating ladder monitor data. In adddition, KV
STUDIO of Ver5.56 or higher is required when the connected PLC is KV-5500/5000/3000/
L2*V and KV STUDIO of Ver7 or higher is also required when the connected PLC is KV
Nano Series.
• Ladder monitor can't be used in PLC_B.
• Only the ladder program of PLC with station No. of 0 can be monitored.

Ladder monitor function enables to:


• Select the module/program to be monitored
• Display in ladder format
• Display/hide device comment
• Display/hide comment rows
• Display/hide device value
18 • BCD/HEX display of device value
• Search/Jump
LADDER MONITOR

• Change device value


"5-10 Monitoring", VT3 Series Hardware Manual

18-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


18-1 Ladder Monitor

Supported PLC
For additional information about how to connect VT3 and PLC or communications settings, see VT5 Series/VT3
Series/DT Series PLC Connection Manual.
KEYENCE CORPORATION
Series
CPU Connection method Object PLC
name
Direct link with PLC port
KV-5500/5000/3000/L2*V
KV-L20V/L21V KV-5500/5000/3000/L2*V<XYM>
(KV BUILDER/KV STUDIO mode
KV-3000 KV-5500/5000/3000 (Ethernet)
KV-LE20V/LE21V/EP21V
KV-5500/5000/3000 (Ethernet)<XYM>
KV-5500/5000/3000(KV-LM2*V)
KV-LM20V/L21V
KV-5500/5000/3000(KV-LM2*V)<XYM>
KV-L20V/L21V KV-5500/5000/3000/L2*V
(KV BUILDER/KV STUDIO mode) KV-5500/5000/3000/L2*V<XYM>
KV Direct link with Ethernet port KV-5500/5000/3000 (Ethernet)
KV-5500/5000
KV-LM20V/L21V/EP21V KV-5500/5000/3000 (Ethernet)<XYM>
KV-5500/5000/3000(KV-LM2*V)
KV-LM20V/L21V
KV-5500/5000/3000(KV-LM2*V)<XYM>
KV Nano Series [KV-N*]
Direct link with PLC port
KV Nano Series [KV-N*]
Additional cassette KV-N10L/N11L
<XYM>
KV Nano Series
KV Nano Series [KV-N*] (Ethernet)
KV-NC1EP KV Nano Series [KV-N*] (Ethernet)
<XYM>

Point • Ladder monitor function isn't supported by VT2 multi-link slave station.
• Ladder monitor function can't be used for through communication connection of DR
router.

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation


Series name CPU Connection method Object PLC
Q02CPU
Q02HCPU
Q series (Q mode)
Q06HCPU Direct link with programmable port
CPU direc link
Q12HCPU
Q25HCPU
Q00UJCPU
Q00UCPU
MELSEC-Q Q01UCPU
Q02UCPU
Q03UDCPU
Direct link with programmable port QnU series CPU direct link
Q04UDHCPU
Q06UDHCPU
Q10UDHCPU
Q13UDHCPU
Q26UDHCPU

Point • Ladder monitor function isn't supported by VT2 multi-link slave station.
• Ladder monitor function can't be used for through communication connection of DR
router.

18
LADDER MONITOR

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - 18-3


18-1 Ladder Monitor

Display method of ladder monitor


Ladder monitor can be displayed by the following way.
• To display via the monitor function in VT3 system mode.
"5-10 Monitoring", VT3 Series Hardware Manual
• With the switch configured in operation screen
"8-2 Setting Switches"

Procedures before Starting Ladder Monitor


The procedures before executing PLC data folder are as follow

Procedure item Corresponding page in manual

Create ladder monitor data. "12-13 Ladder Monitor Data"

Set up necessary switch on the corresponding


"8-2 Setting Switches"
operation screen

Transfer screen data. "13-3 PC->VT Send Data"

Install memory card on VT when the save destination "6-1 Memory Card", VT3 Series Hardware
of ladder monitor data is memory card. Manual

Connect VT and PLC.


"VT5 Series/VT3 Series/DT Series PLC
Connection Manual"

Display ladder monitor through the switch in screen


"5-10 Monitoring", VT3 Series Hardware
or system mode.
Manual

18
LADDER MONITOR

18-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


APPENDICES
Read the error message lists in these appendices to learn the details of errors
that mag occur when creating screens and how to remedg these errors.

1 Error Message Lists •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••A-2


2 List of Shortcut Key Commands •••••••••••••••••••••• A-18
3 About Unusable Characters•••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-20
4 Adding and Modifying Options •••••••••••••••••••••••• A-23
5 Index•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-34

APPENDICES

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-1


1 Error Message Lists
This section deseribes the error messages that are displayed during operations and how to remedy these errors.

When starting UP/Shutting Down VT STUDIO and Opening/Closing Files

Display Cause Remedy


Attribute of computer image has been Please use it after setting to High Color
Use display mode over 32768 colors.
set to below 256 color. (16-bit), or True Color (24-bit).
No PLC message file at all, or part is Please update PLC message file or
Cannot find PLC information file.
missing. reinstall VT STUDIO.
VTS file
(*.vs*,*vu*) to be opened does not exist. Specify the correct file name and folder
Cannot read file.
Or data of VTS file (*.vs*,*vu*) to be name, and execute again.
opened is incorrect.
Either there is not enough free space
on the drive (disk), or the file is write
Please confirm (disk) free space of hard
protected. Or attribute of the file that
Cannot save file. disk, write protected state, file attribute,
has the same name as the file to be
and execute again.
saved by overwriting has been set to
read-only.
File can not be saved in VT STUDIO
Ver.3 format. Display version check Screen data added by VT STUDIO Check the version, delete functions
results? Ver.3 is saved in VT STUDIO Ver.2 added by VT STUDIO Ver.3 and save in
Press "No", and "Save file" dialog format. VT STUDIO Ver.3 format.
box appears again.
For current VT model, file can not be VT2 screen data is saved in VT Save in VT STUDIO VER.3 format or
saved in VT STUDIO Ver.2 format. STUDIO Ver.2 format. edit with VT2 BUILDER.
<File Name> (for memory card) VT file with the same When not to save by overwriting, select
This file always exists. Replace name as the file to be saved or written "No", please designate other file name
existing file? into memory card already exists. or folder for saving.
<<file name>> is updated. When close or exist from VT STUDIO,
Save? VTS file has been edited •updated.
Save as required.
In setting state of system setting image,
Save <file name>?
close VTS file or exit VT STUDIO.
Check free disk space on the
Cannot create backup file. Cannot save backup file.
installation destination drive.
Read VT1 file. As read data will be
Converted data cannot be used under
converted to VT3 format, use VT Read VT1 file, want to convert into VT3
VT1. When use under VT1, please use
BUILDER (for VT1) to send to VT1. series of data.
VT BUILDER.
Execute reading of VT1 file?
Selected folder does not exist. Either
Folder designated by means of “write to Please designate other folder or create
specify existing folder, or create a
memory card (W)” does not exist. a new folder, then execute again.
new folder.
When edited file last time, failed to When edited file last time, since exited When read content of file previously
exit VT STUDIO normally. Read editor abnormally, therefore, it is edited, please click “Yes” button; when
backup file? required to read backup file. not read, click “No” button.
Free space of hard disk (disk)
Check the free space on the drive
Cannot write file. designated by means of “write to
(disk), and execute again.
memory card (W)” is insufficient.
Hard disk (disk) designated by means
of “write to memory card (W)” is in write
Please confirm write-protected state of
protected state, or attribute of the file
Could not create file. hard disk (disk), file attribute, then
with the same name as the file to be
execute again.
saved by overwriting has been set to
read-only.
Data of VT file
Specify the correct file name and folder
Data format abnormal. (*.ms*,*.md*)for memory card read from
name, and execute again.
memory card is incorrect.
APPENDICES

A-2 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


Display Cause Remedy
Select “also copy system program” via
“write to memory card (W)”. But there is
Please reinstall VT STUDIO, then
System program is not installed. no system program file in System
execute again.
catalog of VT STUDIO installation
destination.
VT BUILDER is not installed, or
Could not start VT BUILDER. computer memory is insufficient, which Please install VT BUILDER.
leads to failure of VT builderstart.
This file is produced with UNICODE
standard when it is read by MBCS, text • Please use UNICODE version to
strings other than Japanese/English The file to be read is created via edit.
way be damaged. (Not only will messy UNICODE version. • In case character string data destroy
codes be displayed, but also text is not considered, please read.
strings will be damaged) Read file?
Failed to read data.
PLC model is not supported by the Please update the VT STUDIO to the
PLC model is not supported by the
current VT STUDIO. latest version.
current VT STUDIO.

Multiple Program Startups

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


Different versions of VT STUDIO VT STUDIO of different versions has Please exit started VT STUDIO first,
cannot be started up at the same time. been started. then execute again.
To open in save-prohibited state,
<<File name>> is already open. Open file via already started VT
please click “Yes” button; when not
Open as read only? STUDIO.
open, please click "No" button.
3 or more VT STUDIOs cannot be Please exit started VT STUDIO first,
Has already started 2 VT STUDIO.
started up at the same time. then execute again.

When changing target VT

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


The specified VT type doesn't
support the PLC type that is in use. Cannot use PLC type via designated Please modify VT type after modifying
Change the VT type after changing VT type. PLC type.
PLC type.
When changing to VT3-W4T*(VT3-
W4M*/W4G*) series, some
components will move, and the
property of unusable components -
will be initialized.
Save the file being edited before
changing VT model?
When changing to VT3-W4T*(VT3-
W4M*/W4G*) series, some
components will move, and the
property of unusable components -
will be initialized.
Save the file being edited before Execute if necessary.
changing VT model?
When changing to VT3-W4T*(VT3-
W4M*/W4G*) series, some
components will move, and the
property of unusable components
will be initialized.
In addition, form screen will be -
deleted because form screen can't
be set with VT3-W4T* (VT3-W4M*/
W4G*) .
Save the file being edited before
changing VT model?
Size of PLC data file exceeds the
upper limit. When using specified VT model, the Please reduce the size of PLC data file
APPENDICES

Please reduce the number of files or size of PLC data file exceeds the upper or save PLC data file to memory card.
the size of each file to 75KB or less limit. "Chapter 15 PLC DATA FOLDER"
before changing VT model.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-3


DISPLAY Cause Remedy
The max number of image that VT2 Images usable for VT3 type are more
can be used has been exceeded. than images usable for VT2 type, Please firstly reduce the part using
Delete the parts that use the image, therefore, it exceeds VT2 limit when images, then modify VT type.
change VT type? changing from VT3 type into VT2 type.

When Changing Target PLC

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


Covert to similar model.
Device settings may not match
Prepare to change type into the PLC
those of changed model. After
compatible with destination PLC set in
changing PLC model, check the
the file.
settings of each device. Change PLC
model? Execute as required.
Convert to dissimilar model. Device
settings may not match those of Prepare to change type into the PLC
changed model. After changing PLC incompatible with destination PLC set
model, check the settings of each in the file.
device. Change PLC model?
Failed to batch change some Check the data settings. "unset
Failed to convert some devices,
devices. Check devices after device", confirm via data detection.
changed into “unset”.
conversion. "12-9 Data Check"
Please start worksheet edit tool, reset
Unknown object. Worksheet data is damaged.
data.

During Communications with VT and When Performing the Data Check

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


Currently edited PLC data defaults
will be discarded at reception. Are -
you sure?
Execute as required.
The version of the VT STUDIO system
Version of VT STUDIO system
program file is newer than the system
program is new. Send to VT3?
program.
Version of VT STUDIO system The PLC data folder data on the PLC
Receive the PLC data folder data first
program is new. Receive the PLC unit will be discarded when the system
as necessary, then send all data.
data folder data, then send all data. program is sent.
An attempt has been made to receive
No screen data on VT3. screen data with no screen data on the Send screen data to the VT3 unit.
VT3 unit.
An attempt has been made to send
No screen data on VT3. Send all
PLC data folder data with no screen Please send all data to host.
data.
data on the VT3 unit.
The target PLC differs from the An attempt has been made to send PLC
Match the target PLC of the PLC data
screen data on the VT3. Match the data folder data whose target PLC differs
folder data with the VT3 unit.
target PLC. from the screen data on the VT3 unit.
An attempt has been made to receive
Send the PLC data folder data to the
No PLC data folder data on VT3. PLC data folder data with no PLC data
VT3 unit.
folder data on the VT3 unit.
An attempt has been made to send
No PLC data folder data on VT3.
PLC data folder data with no PLC data Please send all data to host.
Send all data.
folder data on the VT3 unit.
PLC data folder will be overwritten if
PLC data folder data on VT3 will be
sent with PLC data folder data already Execute as required.
discarded. Send the data?
on the VT3 unit.
The system program of the connected
Receive the record data (alarm log, Save record data into memory card
model is too old or non-VT3 version.
trend chart, operation record) with when receiving it with Ver.2 system
Please check the connected model
Ver.2 or lower system program. program.
and send the latest system program.
Please set VT3 to operation mode and
Failed to receive data.
Failed to transfer with Ver.2 or lower data transfer standby status before
Please check VT operation mode
system program. receiving record data (alarm log, trend
APPENDICES

before operating it again.


chart, operation record) again.

A-4 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


DISPLAY Cause Remedy
Communications port open error. The set communications port does not Set the correct communications and
Make sure that other applications exist on the PC. The communications execute again.
are not in use. port is occupied by other software. "13-2 Communications Settings"
Make sure that the PC connector
Error occurred during
A communications error occurred cables are correctly connected, and
communications. Communications
during communications with the VT3. execute again after setting the VT3 to
were aborted.
the data transmission standby state.
Communications with the VT3 was
Communications was interrupted. Execute again if necessary.
interrupted.
Failed to receive data.
Receive and send data for VT3 from Please wait a moment before receiving
Please wait a moment before
other paths. data once again.
receiving data once again.
Data is being sent to a model that is
Data cannot be sent as screen size Set the target VT3 and execute again.
different from the currently set target
does not match VT3. "12-2 VT Model Setting"
VT3.
If memory can be added on, mount add on
memory (OP-42253) on the VT3, correctly
Data cannot be sent as the upper limit
set the target VT, and execute again.
Data cannot be sent as there is not of the file currently being edited
"12-2 VT Model Setting"
enough memory on the VT3. exceeds the upper limit for the screen
If add on memory cannot be mounted,
data size on the target VT3.
reduce the size of the screen data, and
execute again.
Check the version of the data stored
on the VT3. Data sometimes cannot The version of the data on the VT3 unit
Update the VT STUDIO version.
be correctly read on this version of is newer than that of the VT STUDIO.
VT STUDIO.
A target device that is not set exists in
Error****Non-setup devices exist. the VT system settings or in the screen Set the target device again.
currently displayed.
The number of reference data items
Error****Number of compared data Reduce the number of objects placed
has exceeded the upper limit in the
exceeded on the screens, and execute again.
currently displayed screen.
The number of PLC devices exceeds Reduce the number of PLC devices
Error****Number of PLC devices
the upper limit in the currently placed on the screens, and execute
exceeded.
displayed screen. again.
The number of control objects exceeds Reduce the number of control objects
Error****Number of control objects
the upper limit in the currently placed on the screens, and execute
exceeded.
displayed screen. again.
The number of key entry parts exceeds Reduce the number of key entry parts
Error****Number of key entry parts
the upper limit in the currently placed on the screens, and execute
exceeded.
displayed screen. again.
The size of the screen data exceeds
Error****Screen data size exceeded. the upper limit in the currently
displayed screen. Reduce the number of objects placed
The number of objects exceeds the on the screens, and execute again.
Error****Number of objects
upper limit (32768 objects) in the
exceeded the limit.
currently displayed screen.
Error****Overlapping data size
exceeded the limit. Overlapping of objects exceeds the
Reduce overlapping of objects placed
upper limit in the currently displayed
Error****Overlapping data size on the screens, and execute again.
screen.
exceeded the limit. (number of objects)
Error****Screen contains abnormal The currently displayed screen is
Re-edit the screen, and execute again.
objects. damaged.
The number of indirect reference Reduce the number of indirect
Error****Number of indirect
devices exceeds the upper limit in the reference devices placed on the
referenced devices exceeded
currently displayed screen. screens, and execute again.
Specified cell WS#[**] does not
Specified cell WS#[**] does not exist. Select the correct cell.
exist.
Data type for referencing cell The data format for referencing cell Correctly set the data format for
WS#[**] is illegal. WS#[**] is illegal. referencing the cell.
Items displayed in red in the currently
Displays detailed information in the Re-edit the screen, and execute again.
displayed screen exceed the upper
[Data Check] window. "12-9 Data Check"
limit.
If memory can be added on, mount add
Data cannot be sent as the upper limit
on memory (OP-42253) on the VT3,
of the file currently being edited
All memory capacity overflows correctly set the target VT, and execute
exceeds the upper limit for the screen
again.
APPENDICES

data size on the target VT3.


"12-2 VT Model Setting"

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-5


DISPLAY Cause Remedy
Exit VT STUDIO, re-connect the USB
USB communications is unstable.
Communications with the USB port is cable and try communications again.
Disconnect and reconnect USB
unstable. If this error occurs frequently, re-install
cable, and retry communications.
the USB driver.
Cannot open USB. Check the Check that the USB driver is installed correctly
connection for problems, or make sure Could not open the USB port. by Device Manager in the control panel.
that other applications are not in use. If it is installed, re-install the USB driver.
Failed to read the object size table file.
Failed to read the image for Device Part of the system file does not exist. Please reinstall VT STUDIO.
Monitor.
Failed to read the INF data.
Failed to read the PTR data. The PLC information file does not exist. Update the PLC information file.
Failed to read INF time stamp.
Failed to read the dictionary for kanji The dictionary file for Kanji conversion
Please reinstall VT STUDIO.
conversion. does not exist.
Cannot ensure memory of computer
Not enough memory. Quit other software that is running.
used by VT STUDIO.
Failed to load the communication DLL. Part of the system file does not exist. Please reinstall VT STUDIO.
Set the VT3 to the Run mode, or to a
Failed to change mode. VT3 is not in a transfer enabled state. screen data transfer standby state, and
then try transferring again.
Screen differences cannot be sent as the
Cannot send new change
screen data currently stored on the VT3 Send all data.
information. Send all data.
differs from the file currently being edited.
Because the screen data saved in the
host is created by the VT STUDIO with
The screen data saved in the host is
version higher than the current one, Please update to the latest version for
created by the VT STUDIO with version
differential transfer is impossible. VT STUDIO.
higher than the current one.
Please update to the latest version
for VT STUDIO.
Screen data could not be received as Read-protected screen data cannot be
Read-protected.
the data was read-protected. received.
An incorrect read protect password Enter the correct password, and retry
Wrong password.
was entered. execution.
Prepare to send data to VT series other Please confirm VT type first, then send
Different target VT series.
than the VT series whose data are editing. data again.
The data with in VT is mode with VT • Please receive via UNICODE version.
STUDIO UNICODE. Then received, Data to be received are created via • If character string data destroy etc
text string data other then Japanese/ UNICODE version. causes are not considered, please
English way be damaged. execute receiving.
The screen selected with the initial page
Set nonexistent image to initial display Please correct setting initial display
No. doesn't exist. Please confirm the
page No.. page No..
initial page No. setup by the VT system.
When connect to Ethernet, in PLC
PLC communication setup No. ** is communication condition setting, in
Please modify setting.
used without setup. case there is no check station number
**, set device of station number **.

When Sending the System Program

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


Is about to transmit the system
program with older version. The version of the system program of
Continue? VT STUDIO is the same as or lower It is not necessary to send.
Is about to transmit the system than that of the system program on the Please upgrade VT STUDIO.
program with the same version. main unit.
Continue?
APPENDICES

A-6 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


DISPLAY Cause Remedy
The system program on the main unit is
No need to update the system
same as that in the VT STUDIO, and Please upgrade VT STUDIO.
program. Transmission stopped.
needs not to be changed.
The system program file does not exist
Save the system program file to the
No system program file. in the System directory at the VT
System directory, and execute again.
STUDIO installation destination.
Cannot allocate enough memory for Memory on the PC that is used for sending
Quit other software that is running.
sending system program. the system program could not be secured.
The system program file in the System
Failed to load the system program Save the system program file to the
directory where VT STUDIO is installed
file. System directory, and execute again.
cannot be read correctly.

When Editing Screens

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


The screen that is about to be newly
Screen already exists. Specify another screen.
created already exists.
The upper limit (1024) for the number of New pages exceeding 1024 pages
Number of pages exceeded 1024.
pages that can be created is exceeded. cannot be created.
The upper limit (1000 pages) for the
Number of pages in global window Global windows exceeding 1000 pages
number of global windows that can be
exceeded 1000. cannot be created.
created is exceeded.
The upper limit (1024) for the number
New screens exceeding 1024 screens
Number of screens exceeded 1024. of screens that can be created is
cannot be created.
exceeded.
The upper limit (16 screens) for the
Number of pages in printer form Printer forms exceeded 16 screens
number of printer forms that can be
exceeded 16. cannot be created.
created is exceeded.
Correctly set the device type and
Illegal device No.. The device settings are incorrect.
device No..
Illegal cell range. The cell range setting is incorrect. Set the correct cell range.
The calculation formula and variable
Illegal expression. Set the calculation formula and variable.
settings are incorrect.
Set the decimal point position again so
The decimal point position set on
Position of decimal point is that the condition "number of display
numerical value display parts is
incorrect. digits" -> "decimal point position" is
incorrect.
satisfied.
The size relationship between the
Correctly set the upper limit value and
Illegal size relationship. upper limit value and lower limit value
lower limit value.
is not set correctly.
Text is not set. Text selection is not set to "string" when Please input string with more than 1
Please input more than one character. displaying text entered by keys. character in text selection.
Half- and full-width characters can't
Half- and full-width characters are
be mixed. All are half-width characters only or full-
mixed in text selection when displaying
Only half- or full-width characters width characters only.
text entered by keys.
can be input.
The upper limit of the number of Limit the number of characters to within
characters (64) that can be entered by 64. When text is wrapped at the end of
Text string exceeded 64 characters.
bitmap text or on nameplates is the line, the line feed code is counted
exceeded. as a single 1-byte character.
Limit the number of characters to within
The upper limit of the number of
256. When text is wrapped at the end
Text string exceeded 256 characters. characters (256) that can be entered by
of the line, the line feed code is
outline text and memo is exceeded.
counted as a single 1-byte character.
Enter text string. Text stings are not entered in memo. Enter text string.
The bitmap file cannot be opened by Specify Windows bitmap file and JPEG
Cannot load image data.
images. file.
The total number of display digits for
Total number of display digits Reduce the number of display digits in
each display item in an alarm display
exceeded 100. each display item.
part exceeds the upper limit (100 lines).
Numerical values and text are not
APPENDICES

Text is not set. Enter 1- byte correctly set when the key entry Set one 1-byte character or 2-byte
character or 2-byte character. destination is a numerical value display character number/character.
or a text display in key entry.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-7


DISPLAY Cause Remedy
In selection of a freestyle image, an
Contain unset image. Select the image in its entire state.
image remains in an unset state.
Either reduce the font size or pitch
The size of the outline text (logo) is
Image is too large. Cannot place. between characters, or reduce the text
larger than the screen.
string.
There is no texture list file, or the
Texture list file error.
content of the file is damaged.
There is no texture file, file content is
Texture file error.
destroyed.
Please reinstall VT STUDIO.
There is no effect list file, file content is
Effect list file error.
destroyed.
There is no effect file, file content is
Effect file error.
destroyed.
Either the number of copies (X-axis
Too many copies in the X/Y direction x Y-axis direction: 256 copies) in
Reduce the number of copies in the X-/
direction. Cannot make multiple multiple copy exceeds the upper limit, or
Y-axis directions.
copies. multiple copy is not possible as the resulting
copies protrude from the edit window.
Cannot confirm memory of computer
Not enough memory. Quit other software that is running.
used by VT STUDIO.
• Format of file to be input is abnormal.
Importing text string list failed. • After output, input is impossible due Please set character string manually.
to execution of image data editing.
The maximum number of Windows Please modify font setting in parts
Fonts has been reached. 64 Windows fonts has been logged on. again, so that logon number of
Cannot add Windows fonts any more. Windows font does not exceed 64.

Active Edit

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


• Base image to be designated does not exist.
The selected base screen cannot be • Since Base image is not displayed
-
determined. on edit image, so cannot define
Base image to be displayed.
Cannot seach the selected window. The window to be designated does not exist. -
At present, since there are no overlap
Cannot close a currently displayed
displayed images except editing -
window.
window, so cannot close.

When Setting Options

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


Selected folder does not exist. Specify
existing folder. (VTS file save folder) The currently set folder does not exist
Selected folder does not exist. Specify in the VT file save folder or the VTS file Select an existing folder again.
existing folder. save folder for the Memory Card.
(VT file save folder for memory card)

When Loading DXF Format Files

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


Specify the DXF file in the AutoCAD
Cannot load DXF file. Loading of the DXF file failed.
R12 format, and execute again.
Cannot load DLL. Part of the system file does not exist. Please reinstall VT STUDIO.
Specify the DXF file in the AutoCAD
Cannot open DXF file. Could not open the DXF file.
APPENDICES

R12 format, and execute again.


The DXF file that is about to be opened Correctly specify the file name and
Cannot find DXF file.
does not exist in the specified folder. folder name, and execute again.

A-8 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


DISPLAY Cause Remedy
The content of the HEADER section in
Data error in HEADER section.
the DXF file is incorrect.
The content of the TABLES section in
Data error in TABLES section.
the DXF file is incorrect.
The content of the BLOCKS section in
Data error in BLOCKS section.
the DXF file is incorrect.
The content of the ENTITIES section in
Data error in ENTITIES section.
the DXF file is incorrect.
No EOF line. The DXF file does not contain the EOF line.
The DXF file does not contain the $LIMMIN
No $LIMMIN variable. Specify the DXF file in the AutoCAD
variable.
R12 format, and execute again.
The DXF file does not contain the $LIMMAX
No $LIMMAX variable.
variable.
The DXF file does not contain the $EXTMIN
No $EXTMIN variable.
variable.
The DXF file does not contain the
No $EXTMAX variable.
$EXTMAX variable.
The DXF file does not contain the HEADER
No HEADER section.
section.
The DXF file does not contain the
No ENTITIES section.
ENTITIES section.
Could not allocate memory on the PC
Memory exception occurs. Quit other software that is running.
used for loading DXF files.

Operation Log

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


Select CSV file and text file
Please change all the CSV file (.csv) Please select only CSV file or text file,
simultaneously, prepare to capture
into text file (.txt) then execute again.
operation log.
The recorded operation log screen Image data recording operation log are
data and edit screen data are different from the image data opened -
inconsistent. Read? via VT SUTDIO.
The number of files that can be Prepare to capture more than 10 files Please reduce the number of files
selected together is 10 simultaneously. captured simultaneously.
When prepare to capture several
operation log files simultaneously, Please confirm operation log file, then
Inconsistent file heads, Cannot load.
including operation log file containing execute again.
different image data.
To capture operation log file, failed to
File parsing failed. parse file. Operation log file might be -
destroyed.
Since the version of the screen that
Since version of image recording
records the operation log is higher
operation log is newer than VT Please upgrade VT STUDIO.
than that of VT STUDIO, Cannot be
STUDIO version, so cannot capture.
loaded.

System Setting

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


Changes will be cancelled. Are you An attempt was made to cancel changes
Execute as required.
sure? to the system settings by [Undo].
KL address setting software cannot There is no KL address setting software Please reinstall VT STUDIO, then
be started. in installation destination folder. execute again.
In the trend graph system settings, the
total number of trends for each ID
Set the number of devices for each ID
Number of devices exceeded upper exceeds the upper limit. Or, in the
APPENDICES

again so that the upper limit is not


limit. alarm system settings, the total number
exceeded.
of alarm detection devices for each ID
exceeds the upper limit.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-9


DISPLAY Cause Remedy
The settings must be applied when the
Apply the settings. Are you sure? Execute as required.
alarm and message data is imported.
The file that you tried to open during Specify the correct file name and folder
Cannot read file. importing of alarms or messages could name, and execute again. Check the
not be read. content of the CSV and TXT files.
The number of digits in the alarm
Number of Alarm message digits
message exceeds 100 in the file that
exceeded 100. (line***) Excessive parts cannot be imported.
you tried to import.
Check the content of the imported
The number of lines in the alarm messages alarm messages.
Number of alarm lines exceeded the
exceeds the number of lines that can be set
maximum settable number.
in the file that you tried to import.
The number of digits in the message
Number of message digits exceeded
exceeds 100 in the file that you tried to
100. (line***) Excessive parts cannot be imported.
import.
Check the content of the imported
The number of digits in the message messages.
Number of message lines exceeded
exceeds 100 in the file that you tried to
256.
import.
A probable cause is that duplicated blocks
Two or more block No.*** blocks Messages of the same block No. exist
have not been imported correctly. Check
exist. in the file that you tried to import.
the content of the imported messages.
Although set to read-protection (with
Reading protection code is not
password) via “VT host system setting” - Please set password.
setup.
“VT system”, but password is still not set.
Unusable character is set in file name
Prohibited characters are used. character string via ìVT host system Please delete prohibited characters.
settingì - “memory card”.

When Connecting Over Ethernet

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


Station No.**: IP address 0.0.0.0 is "0.0.0.0" is set to the IP address of the Set the IP address to an address other
invalid. target PLC. than "0.0.0.0".
None of PLC Nos. 0 to 15 are not
Mark at least one of PLC Nos. 0 to 15
No target PLCs are set. marked in the PLC communications
in the PLC communications conditions.
conditions.
No.** and IP address of No.** are the The IP addresses of the target PLCs
Set unique IP addresses.
same. Set different IP address. are not unique.
Ethernet communications cannot be Destination VT type is the type
Please reset destination VT type.
used by ***-***. unavailable for Ethernet connection.

Changing Display Text Strings

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


Display text string change function When display text information for ID1
The checkbox of the display text string
turned OFF. In OFF state, ID1 to 7 below is required, mark the checkbox
switching function has become
text string info is not saved to VT of the display text string switching
"unmarked".
file. function.

Workspace

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


The page cannot be changed as the
APPENDICES

Screen already exists. Select a non-existent page.


screen already exists.

A-10 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


DISPLAY Cause Remedy
Screens in trash cannot be edited.To
An attempt was made to edit a screen
Screens in trash cannot be edited. edit the screen, copy the screen in
in trash.
trash, and paste it to a valid screen.
Failed to import the screen.
Cannot ensure memory of computer
Quit other software that is running, and
Cannot import the screen. used by VT STUDIO. A probable cause
execute again.
is that the screen data that you
attempted to import is damaged.
Failed to import worksheet data.
Cannot ensure memory of computer
Quit other software that is running, and
Worksheet data cannot be imported. used by STUDIO. A probable cause is
execute again.
that the screen data that you attempted
to import is damaged.

Page Configuration Management

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


If you exit page configuration The screen in Trash was deleted when If Trash contains a screen you require,
management, the contents of Trash page configuration management was paste the screen to the edit screen
will be deleted. Exit page ended. At this time, screen in Trash in before ending page configuration
configuration management? the workspace also are deleted. management.
Cannot execute that comment on The selected range is outside of the Select the range, and try executing
selected range. executable range for the command. again.
In page movement, the final page No.
End page No. after move exceeds Set the leading page No. after the
after page movement is set to exceed
limit. move, and try executing again.
the page No. upper limit.
In page movement, the leading page Set the leading page No. or final page
Illegal size relationship. No. that is set is greater than the final No. before the move, and try executing
page No.. again.
Some screens were not pasted as the Select the screens to paste again
Number of screens exceeds 1024.
total number of screens exceeds the taking care to keep the total number of
Cannot paste some screens.
limit of 1024 screens. screens within 1024 screens.
Make sure that the screen to paste
does not contain alarm display parts. If
Number of alarm display parts
Some screens were not pasted as the it does, edit the screen so that the
exceeds maximum. Cannot paste
number of alarm display parts exceeds number of alarm display parts at the
some screens that contain alarm
the maximum number limit. paste destination does not exceed the
display parts.
maximum number of alarm display
parts.

Part Catalog

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


Check free disk space on the
installation destination drive.
Could not save part catalog file. Could not save part catalog file.
Check the access rights of the Catalog
folder.
Part Catalog file with the same name The file name could not be changed as
Specify another file name.
already exists. a file of same file name exists.
Check free disk space on the
installation destination drive.
Failed to make part catalog file. The part catalog file could not be made.
Check the access rights of the Catalog
folder.
The part catalog file could not be read.
Cannot read file. Probable causes are that there is not Re-install.
part catalog file or the data is damaged.
When use STYLE CHANGER function
Part unsuitable for modification
APPENDICES

to modify part setting, upper limit of part -


exist.
size is exceeded.

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-11


During Printing or Printing of RTF Files

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


Make sure that the currently connected
model of printer matches the selected
Either the printer driver or printer
printer driver; that the printer cables are
Printing ended in error. cables are incorrectly set or connected,
correctly connected; and that the
or the printer ran out of paper.
printer has not run out of paper. Then,
execute again.
Only Letter and A4 (V) is supported Paper other than A4 portrait is set in Set the paper setting for the printer to
as printer settinged. the printer settings. A4 portrait, and execute again.
The default printer is not installed.
Select [Settings] - [Printers] from the
The default printer is not installed. Install the printer, and execute again.
[Start] menu, and double-click [Add
printer] to install the default printer.
Number of entered characters Change the length of the text string to
Text strings of each item in cover are
exceeded permissible upper limit. 1-byte ** characters, ** lines
too long.
Set to **. (varies according to each item).
Check the free space on the drive
Failed to output the RTF file for the
Failed to create a RTF file. (disk) and write-protection state, and
printed image.
execute again.
Please confirm output destination
When output image data BMP file, folder. Check the free space on the
Failed to create a image.
BMP file output failed. drive (disk) and write-protection state,
and execute again.

Device Comments

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


• Please confirm whether to open item
When capture device comments, parse via KV STUDIO.
Device comment loading failed.
failed. • Please modify comments file, then
reinstall execute.
• Please start KV STUDIO, open item,
then execute again.
Currently there is no KV STUDIO
that is being started.
KV STUDIO is not started. • Please designate KV STUDIO item
or external file first, then execute
again.
Since the version of KV STUDIO is
not a latest one, or cannot be
connected. Device comments • Note: Use KV STUDIO Ver.3.03 or
cannot be loaded collectively. Probably KV STUDIO version is old, or later.
KV STUDIO is in operating state. • Please confirm state of KV STUDIO
Device comment loading failed. KV connecting destination.
STUDIO version is old or cannot be
connected.

In the Simulator

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


The Simulator execution program does
Please reinstall VT STUDIO. Quit other
Cannot start up Simulator. not exist in the installation destination
software that is running.
folder. Could not secure memory on PC.
Resume communications with
Communications path is used by
Editor is currently communicating. Simulator after communications with
other application.
Editor have ended.
Make sure that PC cable connections
Disconnected due to unstable VT3 switched to Run mode as
are correct, and try communications
APPENDICES

communications. communications is unstable.


again.
Failed to load the communication
Part of the system file does not exist. Please reinstall VT STUDIO.
DLL.

A-12 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


DISPLAY Cause Remedy
Cannot ensure computer memory used Quit other software that is running, and
Not enough memory.
by simulator. start up Simulator again.
Set the VT3 to the Run mode, or to a
VT3 cannot communicate with
Failed to change mode. screen data transfer standby state, and
Simulator.
then try transferring again.
Exit VT STUDIO, re-connect the USB
USB communications is unstable.
Communications with the USB port is cable and try communications again. If
Disconnect and reconnect USB
unstable. this error occurs frequently, re-install
cable, and retry communications.
the USB driver.
Either make sure that the PC
connection cables are correctly set,
Communications port open error.
and start communications again, or
Make sure that other applications Could not open communications port.
make sure that other programs are not
are not in use.
using the same port, and resume
communications.
A communications error occurred Make sure that PC cable connections
A communications error occurred
during communications with the are correct, and try communications
during communications with the VT3.
VT3. again.
Set the communications port correctly
The set communications port does not
Illegal port number. at "communications port setting" and
exist on the PC.
execute again.
Failed to read vtcmd.dll. Part of the system file does not exist.
Vtcmd.dll version is incorrect. <nnn Please reinstall VT STUDIO.
The correct system file is not installed.
: mmm>
Please confirm whether CSV file name
CSV file (*.csv) is not open or other is correct, in addition, if any other
Failed to read file.
application is editing. application is editing, please close file
for the time being, then read file again.
Designated a file other than CSV Please confirm whether CSV file name
Different file format.
(*.csv) or data format of file is wrong. is correct, then read file again.
Check the free space on the drive
Failed to add file. No free space in magnetic disk.
(disk), and execute again.

PLC Data Folder Editing Tool Related

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


Memory on the PC used by the PLC
Quit other software that is running, and
Not enough memory. Data Folder Editing Tool could not be
execute again.
secured.
The \VTDVC folder does not exist in Execute as required. PLC data folder
Folder ***** (folder name) does not
the specified drive when the data save data can be saved only to the \VTDVC
exist. Create new folder?
destination is set to "Memory Card". folder.
Data having the same file No. as the
File No.** already exists. Replace To cancel the save, select "No", and
PLC data folder data that is about to be
existing file? save the file under a different file No..
opened already exists.
The file cannot be saved as its size
File size error file size exceeds exceeds the memory capacity when Reduce the number of files and file size
maximum file size. Reduce the data. the data save destination is set to (number of devices and records).
"SRAM".
Please designate VTS file (*.vs1,*.vu1)
VTS file (*.vs1,*.vu1) or VT2 file
or VT2 file
PLC data folder data does not exist (*.vd1,vd1,2,2u,3,3u,*.vx1,2,2u,3,3u) to
(*.vd1,2,2u,3,3u,*.vx1,2,2u,3,3u)
in file. File: ***** be input has no PLC data folder data.
containing PLC data folder data, and
execute again.
VTS file (*.vs1,*.vu1) or VT2 file
(*.vd1,2,2u,3,3u,*.vx1,2,2u,3,3u) to be Specify the correct file name and folder
Cannot read file. File: *****
input has no PLC data folder data. name, and execute again.

The PLC data folder data exceeds the


* File size exceeded: Reduce Reduce the number of files and file size
memory capacity when the data save
number of files or file size". (number of devices and records).
destination is set to "SRAM".
APPENDICES

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-13


DISPLAY Cause Remedy
Files cannot be added as the file size
When adding files, reduce the file size
exceeds the file size limit if a file is
* No more files can be added. (number of devices and records) of the
added when the data save destination
existing file.
is set to "SRAM".
Either there is not enough free space Check the free space on the Memory
Failed to create a new file ***** (file
on the Memory Card (drive), or the Card (drive) and write-protection state,
name).
Memory Card is write-protected. and execute again.
The temporary file used by the PLC
Check free disk space on the
Failed to make temporarily file. Data Folder Editing Tool could not be
installation destination drive.
created.
PLC data folder data (*.wd3) about to
[*****] (file name) Cannot find this be opened, or device access data Correctly specify the drive name and
file. Check folder and file name. (*.wda) about to be imported does not file name, and execute again.
exist in the specified folder.
Failed to start program PLC data
The PLC data folder editing tool is not
folder editing tool Re-install.
in the installation destination folder.
(*****). Error **: *****
Cannot open file. PLC data folder data (*.wd3) about to
be opened, or device access data Correctly specify the drive name and
Cannot read file. (*.wda) about to be imported is file name, and execute again.
incorrect.
Cannot write file. Either there is not enough free space Check the free space on the Memory
on the Memory Card (drive), or the Card (drive) and write-protection state,
Cannot save file. Memory Card is write-protected. and execute again.
The PLC data folder data (*.wd3) that is Correctly specify the drive name and
PLC data folder data error.
about to be opened is incorrect. file name, and execute again.
Device data will be inherited. Note,
however, that non-matching devices
will become reserved devices if the An attempt was made to change the
device type and the range of device target PLC to a compatible PLC model.
number does not match the new Execute as required.
PLC. Forcibly execute?
All devices will be set as reserve An attempt was made to change the
devices when target PLC is target PLC to an incompatible PLC
changed. Forcibly execute? model.
An attempt was made to save the PLC Create one or more devices and then
Set more than one device.
data folder data with the device not set. save.
An attempt was made to save the PLC
Record No. [*****] (record No.) is Change the duplicated record No. and
data folder data with the record No.
duplicated. then save.
duplicated.
Device [*****] (device No.) is An attempt was made to save PLC data Change the duplicated device and then
duplicated. folder data with devices duplicated. save.
Device changed into reserved Device changed into reserved device
Check the device settings.
device exists. Please confirm. exists.
Some data cannot be pasted to the An attempt was made to paste data
Clipboard. that cannot be pasted.
Copy again.
The data that is about to be pasted is
Clipboard data is too large.
too large.
Since there are too many data devices
Too many device quantity, cannot Please reduce number of devices, or
in PLC data folder, so cannot set “data
designate 2 words. set “data category” to “1 word”.
category” to “2 words”.
The CSV file (*.csv) UNICODE text file
Correctly specify the drive name and
Cannot open CSV file. (*.txt) that is about to be imported does
file name, and execute again.
not exist in the specified folder.
Either there is not enough free space Check the free space on the drive
Cannot export CSV file. on the drive (disk), or the file is write (disk) and write-protection state, and
protected. execute again.
Cannot import CSV file. The data of the CSV file (*.csv)
Correctly specify the drive name and
UNICODE text file (*.txt) that is about to
CSV file data is in error. file name, and execute again.
be imported is incorrect.
Change to free record No. as record An attempt was made to change to an
Check record No. setting.
No. were duplicated. already existing record No.
Convert file comments/record
At attempt was made to convert Check that it is OK to lose comments
comments to UNICODE. Comments
comment character codes from SJIS to exceeding the specified number of
APPENDICES

exceeding the specified character


shift UNICODE. characters before executing.
length will be lost. Are you sure?

A-14 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


DISPLAY Cause Remedy
Convert file comments/ record At attempt was made to convert
comments to UNICODE. Are you comment character codes from Execute as required.
sure? UNICODE to shift JIS.
Failed to read data generated by PLC
Failed to read data. Current PLCID, which is registered in data folder editor of new version VT
PLC model is not supported by the the WD3 data copied/cut from PLCDF STUDIO (a new PLCID is specified).
current VT STUDIO version. data list, is not supported. Please use the same version VT
STUDIO.
Failed to execute the operation since
the WD3 file is not matched with the
Among the memory card data copied/cut
ISF file.
from PLCDF data list, the WD3 is not Please edit memory card data and
Do you want to edit WD3 file to make
matched with ISF (no device is added delete ISF, or read correct ISF.
it match with the ISF?
yet).
Click "No" to only copy WD3 file.
In this case, ISF will not be copied.
Failed to read ISF file. This file is not saved in ISF format. Please select an ISF file.
Destination item assigned is One ISF is assigned to more than one One ISF can only be assigned to one
duplicated device in the "Assign ISF" dialog box. device.
Failed to add unassigned device Assign unassigned ISF to the devices,
because the number of devices is reduce the number of devices to be
The number of devices is over limit.
higher than the maximum value in the added, or reduce the number of
"Assign ISF" dialog box. devices, then read ISF again.
Since the ISF selected is LREAL/ Only the LREAL/STRING leading
For LREAL/STRING, please reassign
STRING type, only the leading device can be reassigned in the
the leading device.
device can be assigned. "Assign ISF" dialog box.
ISF will be deleted since the
selected PLC model does not Try to change to a PLC model that please delete ISF as required and then
support ISF. doesn't support ISF, change PLC model.
Do you want to change PLC model?
Paste is unavailable for certain cells
Certain data may not be pasted since the data format of copy source is Please change the copy source data or
since out-of-range data exists. different from paste destination and no change paste destination.
data transformation can be made.
The size of file to be stored is higher
Delete unnecessary files in the memory
than available capacity of memory card
Failed to save the ISF file. card or close other process. Then
or this file has already been opened by
execute again.
other process.
In the CSV export file, the number of This needs to be opened by a version
In the CSV export file, the number of
rows is higher than 65501 or number higher than Excel 2003. To open it with
rows is higher than 65501 or number of
of columns is over 241. Excel 2003 or lower version, set up the
columns is over 241.
This file cannot be opened by Excel number of rows to be lower than 65500
This file cannot be opened by Excel
2003 or lower version. and the number of columns lower than
2003 or lower version.
Do you want to proceed? 240. Then do it again.
The ISF file is damaged and cannot Please create a new ISF file and do it
ISF file is damaged.
be read. again.
Failed to read data generated by PLC
Failed to read data. data folder editor of new version VT
PLC model is not supported by the The PLCID registered in WD3 data is STUDIO (a new PLCID is specified).
current PLC data folder editor. currently not supported. Please use the same version VT
STUDIO.
Failed to read ISF due to duplicated Please confirm duplicated devices and
Duplicated devices exist in specified
device. delete them. Assigned ISF will be
SRAM data due to device batch
To recover ISF, delete duplicated recovered after deleting duplicated
change. Can not read ISF in this status.
device and restart this tool. device and restarting the tool.
Please create a new ISF file and do it
%d ISF are not correctly defined and
again. If damaged information is not
are skipped.
Part of ISF file is already damaged. required, just leave it (incorrect
Incorrect ISF summary is displayed
information will be removed after
as follows. (Up to %d)
saving).
Failed to read ISF due to too large
To recover assigned ISF, delete
file size. SRAM capacity is running out. Can not
unnecessary files/devices/records and
To recover ISF, reduce file size and read ISF in this status.
ensure correct file size. Then restart.
restart this tool.
Failed to read ISF due to too large Delete unnecessary files/devices/
SRAM capacity is running out. Can not
file size. records and ensure correct file size.
read ISF in this status.
To read ISF, just reduce file size. Then restart.
APPENDICES

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-15


Worksheet Related

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


Could not make the temporary file used Check the free space at the installation
Failed to make temporarily file.
by the worksheet editing tool. destination folder, and execute again.
The worksheet editing tool is not
Failed to start up worksheet editing Please reinstall VT STUDIO, then
located in the installation destination
tool. execute again.
folder.
Device converted to unset exists. Check devices that are "Not set" and
Device converted to unset exists.
Please confirm. set again.
Delete the data. Restart the worksheet
Failed to read file. File may be
Worksheet data is damaged. editing tool, and set the worksheet
broken. Delete all data?
again.
(The above error appears, and
Please, exec the Worksheet setting
continues to be displayed after the data
tool again, and reset up data.
is deleted).
Cell [**] is referencing a non-existent Cell [**] is referencing a non-existent Set the cell at the reference
cell. cell. destination. Select the correct cell.
Cell [**] is referencing a cell of Cell [**] is referencing a cell of different Correctly set the data format for
different data type. data type. referencing the cell.
The cell is referencing cyclically
Cell [**] is referencing cyclically. (directly/indirectly referencing its own
cell). Check the cell to reference.
The cell is directly referencing its own
Cell [**] is referencing own cell.
cell.
Refer to device with unset cell [**]. Refer to device with unset cell. Check the device to reference.
Invalid data. - Check the worksheet settings.
Data is inaccurate. Do you discard
Execute as required. Check the
change to worksheet data and end -
worksheet settings.
editing?
The number of text strings exceeds the
Number of strings is over. Reduce the number of text strings.
upper limit (1024 per sheet).
Number of strings is over. Do you
Execute as required. Reduce the
discard change to worksheet data -
number of text strings.
and end editing?
Check the cells (displayed in red) when
Unsettled cells remain. -
entry has not been applied.
Unsettled cells remain. Unsettled Execute as required. Check the cells
cells are not saved. Do you save - (displayed in red) when entry has not
data? been applied.
Not enough free space on the drive Check the free space on the drive
Failed to save file.
(disk). (disk), and execute again.
Failed to save file. Do you discard Execute as required. Check the free
change to worksheet data and end - space on the drive (disk), and execute
editing? again.
Text string exceeds 64 characters in The length of the text string exceeds
UNICODE conversion. Excess the upper limit (64 characters for Limit the number of characters to 64.
characters will be deleted. UNICODE).
Cell string exceeds 256 characters The length of the text string exceeds
Parts exceeding 256 characters or
in UNICODE conversion. The part the upper limit (256 characters) when
more are deleted.
exceeding 256 characters is deleted. cell entry is incorrect.
The entered calculation formula at
Calculation formula is incorrect. Check the calculation formula.
setting of the calculation is incorrect.
Variable X is not used in the calculation
Variable X is not used. formula although it is required at setting Change so that variable X is used.
of the calculation.
Variable X is used in the calculation
Variable X cannot be used. formula although it is not allowed at Delete variable X.
setting of the calculation.
A symbol other than variables and
Incorrect symbol is used. operators is used in the calculation Check the calculation formula.
APPENDICES

formula at setting of the calculation.


Pairing between brackets is incorrect at
Corresponding bracket is incorrect. Check pairing of brackets.
setting of the calculation.

A-16 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


DISPLAY Cause Remedy
The number of variables exceeds the
Too many variables. upper limit (16) at setting of the Reduce the number of variables.
calculation.
Make sure that the currently connected
model of printer matches the selected
printer driver; that the printer cables are
Failed to print. Failed to print.
correctly connected; and that the
printer has not run out of paper. Then,
execute again.
Not enough free space on the drive Check the free space on the drive
Failed to create the CSV file ***.
(disk). (disk), and execute again.
Could not secure memory on the PC
Failed to secure memory. Quit other software that is running.
used by the worksheet editing tool.
Could not secure memory on the PC
Failed to secure memory. Quit other software that is running.
used by the worksheet editing tool.

Help

DISPLAY Cause Remedy


Reinstall (click Complete), or view on
*** is not installed. The PDF manual is not installed.
the DVD.

APPENDICES

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-17


2 List of Shortcut Key Commands
Functions can be executed easily by keyboard operations as frequently used functions are assigned to short-cut keys.

Function Short-cut key


New Ctrl + N
Open Ctrl + O
File
Print Ctrl + P
Save Ctrl + S
Undo Ctrl + Z
Redo Ctrl + Y
Cut Ctrl + X
Copy Ctrl + C
Paste Ctrl + V
Delete Delete
Select all Ctrl + A
Find Ctrl + F
Multiple copy Ctrl + Shift + C
Group Ctrl + G
Edit
Ungroup Ctrl + U
Regroup Ctrl + Shift + G
Move to front Ctrl + Shift + E
Move to back Ctrl + Shift + B
Move forward Ctrl + E
Move backward Ctrl + B
Move to next component Tab
Move to previous component Shift + Tab
Place/Align Ctrl + H
Screen attribute settings Ctrl + M
Select edit screen: Base Ctrl + F1
Select edit screen: Window 1 Ctrl + F2
Select edit screen: Window 2 Ctrl + F3
Select edit screen: Window 3 Ctrl + F4
Overlap base Shift + F1
Overlap window 1 Shift + F2
Overlap window 2 Shift + F3
Overlap window 3 Shift + F4
Active Edit Ctrl + F6
DISPLAY
Part Catalog F7
Screen Catalog F6
Label F8
DeviceNo. F9
Memo F11
DeviceON/OFF Represent switching F12
Enlarge display Ctrl + +
Reduce display Ctrl + -
Display all F5 or Ctrl + F5
New screen Ctrl + Shift + N
Resource
Worksheet(sheet) Ctrl + W
New screen Ctrl + Shift + N
Create/tool startup *3 Enter
Screen attribute setting *4 Ctrl + Enter
Screen Page comment setting *5 F2
Workspace Copy Ctrl + C
Paste Ctrl + V
Delete Delete
Screen/system Unfold all Shift + Å
setting Fold all Shift + Å
APPENDICES

A-18 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


Function Short-cut key
Move the focus down Enter
Move the focus up Shift + Enter
Move the focus to the right Tab
Move the focus to the left Shift + Tab
Find Ctrl + F
Replace Ctrl + H
Workspace Text string list Find next F3
Find previous Shift + F3
Undo Ctrl + Z
Redo Ctrl + Y
Cut Ctrl + X
Copy Ctrl + C
Paste Ctrl + V
Previous page PageUp
Page switching
Next page PageDown
The setting of components configurated in screen Ctrl + Enter
Select one from many Ctrl + Tab
Cancel selection Esc
Move part up/scroll window up Å
Move part down/scroll window down Å´
Move part/scroll screen*1
Move part left/scroll window left Å
Move part right/scroll window right Å
Decrease part height Shift + Å
Increase part height Shift + Å´
Change part height/width
Decrease part width Shift + Å
Increase part width Shift + Å
Move cursor over property window Esc
Display setting window for selected part Enter /
Return to screen Ctrl + Enter /
Preview*2 Space

"+" in a short-cut key command indicates that the two keys are pressed at the same time.
*1 The screen can be scrolled when a part is not selected.
*2 When display individual ON/OFF, switch over selected ON/OFF of lamp, lamp switch, graph attribute control.
The selected animated cartoon part is regenerated.
*3 Create new screen at cursor position.
Start up PLC data folder edit tool and excel when cursor is in the PLC data folder or excel.
*4 Display screen attribute setting at cursor position.
*5 Display "page comment setting" window when cursor is at page ID position; display "page change" window
when cursor is in global window.
*6 Switch ON/OFF status for the selected indicator, indicator switch and image attribute control when some one
is ON/OFF.
Display is possible when animation component is selected.
APPENDICES

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-19


3 About Unusable Characters

Unusable character in file name saved in memory card


Unusable character code in file name saved in memory card may be divided into ASCII code and Shift JIS code.
However, there are unusable characters. Unusable character are described as follows.

1-byte characters

2-byte characters
NECSpecial characters
APPENDICES

A-20 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


NEC selected IBM expansion character

APPENDICES

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-21


IBM selected IBM expansion character
APPENDICES

A-22 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


4 Adding and Modifying Options
Changing/Adding of VT2 BUILDER Ver.3->VT STUDIO Ver.1

Item Description VT2*1


Loading VT2 Files Add a new rule 
• In VT3 type edit, VT3 format (*.ms1)
Memory Card -
• In VT2 type edit, VT2 format (*.md4)
• Add "Device transmission" and "Windows font" in print
x
setting item
File Print Settings • Modification point in print setting item "Image"
"Display character string ID" displays comments 
"Device ON display" =>"Preview display"
• Add "Black and white gray scale reverse"
Output screen data BMP file • "Display character string ID"displays comments 
• "Device ON display"=>"Preview display"
Find Add a new rule 
• 0 to 7 (0 to 3 under VT2) may be set for "Image ID"
x
at the most when display character string switching is used
Screen attribute settings
Edit • In bill image, add "File name setting" button (effective only

when "Memory card mode" is "VT3 mode")
In other part catalog, add "Select part catalog automatically for
Option Settings 
part configuration"
• May combine with edit image
• Add color system
• "Device ON display" icon delection => add "Individual
device ON/OFF display", "Device ON display", "Device
Part Catalog 
OFF display" icon
• When select part from menu or tool bar, part catalog
displays automatic switching
• Delete icon of closed part catalog
• Tool bar could be integrated to left and right sides of edit

image
• Screen toolbar
Add "Active edit effective/ineffective" "Back" icon
• Display toolbar
"Display character string ID" displays comments
Tool bar 
DISPLAY "Device ON display" icon deletion => add "Individual
ON/OFF display", "All device ON display", "All device
OFF display" icon
• Communication toolbar
• Part toolbar
x
Add "Animated cartoon display", "Cross key" icon
Inspection result schedule Add a new rule 
Text string list Add a new rule 
Active Edit Add a new rule 
Device ON/OFF display Add new ("Device ON display" modification) 
• "Device ON display" icon deletion =>add "Individual device
ON/OFF display", "All device ON display", "All device OFF
View mode 
display" icon
• Display comments via "Display character string ID"
• Support individual device ON/OFF display (excluding flash
Graphic attribute controls 
control and position control)
(VT2)4096 colors • (VT3)32768 colors x
Graphics
Image • After drag and drop file onto edit image, it is configured as

image part.
Decorative frames (VT2)4096 colors • (VT3)32768 colors x
• Maximum expandable to font size 128 (still conventional 72
points under VT2 type) x
Text Outline text
• Extended outline text
(VT2)4096 colors • (VT3)32768 colors
Style (VT2)4096 colors • (VT3)32768 colors x
Switches/
lamps Maximum expandable to font size 128 (still conventional 72 x
Nameplate text
points under VT2 type)
APPENDICES

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-23


Item Description VT2*1
Call up system
• Add "PLC"and "Window display" in "Device monitor"Add
"PLC" in "PLC data folder" X
screen
• Add new "Cell monitor"
Execute printing • Support saving JPEG file to memory card X
• Add "File name setting" button (effective only when ìmodeî
of "Memory card" is "VT3 mode")
Switch • Add "Mode"
Video Image • "Gray scale" X
Switches/ ->In case of VT3 type edit, gray scale disappears
lamps ->In case of VT2 type edit, gray scale exists
• Support saving JPEG file to memory card
Changing display • Change into ID0 to 7 (change into ID0 to 3 in case of VT2) X
text strings • Comment display 
Lamp switch Device individual ON/OFF display 
Lamp Device individual ON/OFF display 
N state parts Device individual ON/OFF display 
Cross Button Add new (usable only in VT3-V7R) X
• Add "Joint word" and îEnd wordî
• Add "Image frame"
• Add "Image font" and "Windows font" X
Numerical value display • Add "Reset before execution of notification bit" on set
modification notice
• Add "Preview" 
• Add "Image frame"
• Add "Windows font"
• Add "To switch pages, only read once"
X
Text display • Add "Bar code pre-input"
• Add "Reset before execution of notification bit" on set
modification notice
• Add "Preview" 

Message display
• Add "Windows font"
X
• Changing display text strings supported

Alarm display
• Add "Windows font"
X
• Changing display text strings supported
• Support external designation of channels
• Support 260,000 colors
(screen: in case of no undersize RGB: irrelevant with size)
Video display
• Support simultaneous display of screen and RGB X
• Support overlap screen display
• In case of VT3 type edit, when screen display part could
only be configured to full size of even number coordinate,
only even number Þeven number size could be set.
Basic Add a new rule
Animated cartoon display X
part
Execute PLC • Add "PLC" X
data folder • Add "File comments" (display-only) 
Transfer comment
of PLC data folder
• Add "File comments" (display-only) 

Video play/ • Screen and RGB may be selected simultaneously via X


pause "Switching channel"
• Screen and RGB may be selected simultaneously via
"Capture destination"
• Add "Mode"
• "Gray scale"
->In case of VT3 type edit, gray scale disappears
Function control by
Video Image ->In case of VT2 type edit, gray scale exists X
devices
• Support saving JPEG file to memory card
• Add "File name setting" button (effective only when "mode"
of "Memory card" is "VT3 mode")
• File No. may set to 0 to 65535 (effective only when "mode"
of "Memory card" is "VT3 mode")
Save memory • Add "File name setting" button (effective only when "mode"
of "Memory card" is "VT3 mode")
data to memory X
• File No. may set to 0 to 65535 (effective only when "mode"
card of "Memory card" is "VT3 mode")
Save worksheet • Add "File name setting" button (effective only when "mode"
of "Memory card" is "VT3 mode")
data to memory X
• File No. may set to 0 to 65535 (effective only when "mode"
card
APPENDICES

of "Memory card" is "VT3 mode")

A-24 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


Item Description VT2*1
• (VT2)4096 colors • (VT3)32768 colors
• Add "Channel designate" setting
Basic • JPEG file correspondence X
BMP file switching • File No. may set to 0 to 65535 (effective only when "mode"
part
of "Memory card" is "VT3 mode")
• Add "BMPTOOL" button 
• Add "Image" in display type X
Bar graph meter
• Add "Preview" 
Pie chart meter Add "Preview" 
Meter/
Graph Fan meter Add "Preview" 
Statistical bar graph meter Add "Preview" 
Statistical pie chart meter Add "Preview" 
• Support saving JPEG file to memory card
Form printing • When printer type is "LIPS IV Raster", printer color mode is X
"Color", print quality may select "Standard/high speed"
• May perform comments setting for each ID 
• Change into ID0 to 7 (change into ID0 to 3 in case of VT2)
• Support designation of display character string ID via PLC device
• Perform according to image hard copy (printer) output,
Changing display text strings image saving in memory card, bill print (printer output,
memory card save), record data saving in memory card X
OTHER (alarm history) designated display character string ID
FUNCTIO output (in VT2, bill print should be performed according to
NS default display character string ID. Alarm display does not
support display character string switching)
Active Edit Add a new rule 
The following parts support "witch" and "lamp".
• Value display (image frame, image font)
Part Designer • Character display (image frame) X
• Animated cartoon display
• Column shape instrument (image instrument)
Overall edit of part attribute setting Add a new rule 
" VT • PLC type setting" => separated into " VT type setting" + "
VT/PLC model settings 
PLC type setting"
Add "Color number" (in case of VT3-Q5M, may set to 2-color
VT type setting X
black and white/32 gray scale )

PLC model settings


• Add " Use multitalk function"
X
• Add " Port details" button
• Setting for moving " Display character string switching function" 
VT System • Add "Alarm", "Grip switch" (for VT3- V7R )
• Model 5 type BLK and flash control (color reverse) speed X
could only be standard
PLC • Support multitalk " PLC_Acommunication condition" , "
communication PLC_Bcommunication condition" X
condition • Add " High level setting"
System Memory • Add "Using Remote COM Port Tool now" (VT mode: expansion
X
Area state/MT interchange mode: expansion display state)
Parts • Add "Refer to Index action indirectly". X
• Change into ID0 to 7 (in case of VT2, change into ID0 to 3)
X
Resource VT system Changing • Support designation of display character string ID via PLC device
parameters display text • Could set comments (in case of * VT2 type, comments are
strings not transmitted to the host. In addition, image data written 
into memory card is also excluded.)
Barcode Add a new rule X
Memory Card Add a new rule X
• Add "Display character string switching function" in alarm
history print setting
Printer • Add "High level setting" X
• When printer type is "LIPS IV Raster", printer color mode is
"Color", print quality may select "Standard/high speed"
Video Add a new rule X
Other • Add "DATA BUILDER communication overtime" X
Alarm Support display character string switching in prompt edit X
APPENDICES

Message Support display character string switching in prompt edit X


Windows font Add a new rule X
Device transmission Add a new rule X

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-25


Item Description VT2*1
PLC data When multitalk is used, new is saved via SRAM, destination
PLC Data Folder folder PLC may be selected via "PLC data folder file No. setting" X
edit tool window
Change into "Control schedule" => "Retrieval result schedule",
Control list 
function enhancement.
Resource Cross-reference Add "PLC" and "Station number" in display destination device. 
• Add "Device transmission" in destination to be modified. X
Batch-change device
• Modify setting method of modification device 
Data check • Limit detection of "Windows font data" etc -
Worksheet Editing Tool • Multitalk correspondence X
• "Communication port setting" =>"Communication setting"

Communications settings modification
Communi • Add setting of "Displayed page after differential sending" X
cation Diffentiate VT3 type and VT2 type automatically. Send system
Sending the system program 
program Ver.4 to VT2 type.
Simulator Multitalk correspondence X
• In case of Ethernet connection,
<Change into ><<device category><device

Setting • display of device number number>@<station number>=>
<device category><device number>_<station number>
• Support multitalk (add new)
X
<device category><device number>_<PLC A/B>
Device Support multitalk EMW00D0 to MW00D3, MW00D8 to
VT internal device X
MW00DB
Maximum expandable to LNW10FF (in VT2, maximum
expandable to LNW00FF)
Link Device • Bar code data storage area X
• Bar code read notification bit
• Bar code data reading length
• Add 4096-color RGB setting in 78-color color palette
Color palette • In case of VT3-Q5M (color number: 32 gray scale), palette X
of 16 gray scale
BMPTOOL Support JPEG file and VT3 mode X
*1 : Fin case of VT2 type edit, add • modification functions are available.
X: Fin case of VT2 type edit, add • modification functions are unavailable.
APPENDICES

A-26 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


Changing/Adding of VT STUDIO (Ver.1->Ver.2)

Item Description VT2*1


Write to Memory • Add "Save as image data that may be downloaded
Card automatically" X
• Improve display content of inspection result
Memory Card Inconsistent image data: display which image is
Verify with
inconsistent X
Memory Card
Inconsistent system setting: display inconsistent setting via
classification unit of work space
File • Improve display content of inspection result
Inconsistent image data: display which image is
Comparing VT Files inconsistent X
Inconsistent system setting: display inconsistent setting via
classification unit of work space
Acquisition of operation log file Add a new rule X
Print Settings • Add "Global function control" X
• Add retrieval via device comments
Find • Add retrieval via unset device 
• Add retrieval via function (switch function etc)
Multiple copy • Add degression of device No. 
Edit Image setting
• Add "Use wall paper" in background setting
• Add "Use Windows font" in window setting X
Screen attribute
settings Advanced
settings
• Add "Update plot for each part" X
• Add "Device comments" label
Option Settings 
• Add "Activate STYLE CHANGER function" in "Other" label
• Add "Catalog" button
Modify selection method of part catalog file
• Add "Close part catalog after part configuration" button
Part Catalog • Add "Select part catalog automatically when configuring 
part" button
• Add "Activate STYLE CHANGER function" button
• Add STYLE CHANGER function
• Add "Display/non-display of button" function (excluding tool
Tool bar 
bar "Position size")
Parts • Add "XY chart" button X
Graphics • Add "Table" button 
• Divide " Work space" button into " Image" button and
"System setting" button 
DISPLAY • Add "Device comments" button
• Add "Operation log" button X
DISPLAY
• Change to select configuration
Control/Edit
• Whole column function from
• Button beside "Configuration 
• Whole column" button
• Change to select "Image" and "System setting" individually
• Move " Retrieval result schedule" and " Character string
schedule" menu to under work space 
Workspace
• Add " Device comments schedule"
• Add " Operation log schedule" X
Guide Add a new rule 

Scale Display
• Change to zoom in • zoom out via Ctrl key + mouse roller
operation 

Label • Add "XY chart" X


• Add "Individual display" button in the window displayed
Retrieval result schedule 
after clicking device overall modification button
Display local
window
• Add "Close the window of configured this part" function X
Switch/ Display global
Switch
window
• Add "Close the window of configured this part" function X
Lamp
Call up • Add "Operation log previewer"
system screen • Add "Operation log" in "Record data memory card save" X
APPENDICES

*1 in case of VT2 type edit, use/do not use add function

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-27


Item Description VT2*1
Numerical value • When image font is used, display "Setting" button beside
Setting X
display "Joint word • end word"
Setting • Add "Enter character via * display" X
Text display Key/Barcode • Add "Activate the following key input part after automatic
entry determination" X

• Add "Image frame" X


Basic Message display
• Add "Preview" 
part
• Add "Image frame" X
Alarm display
• Add "Preview" 
Animated cartoon
display
Display control • Add "Initial frame display when action stops" X

Function control by devices


• Add "Operation log memory card save"
• Add "Operation log eliminate" X

Data • Add "Display range" X


• Change to even any of absolute value/deviation is selected
via "Display format", image may also be selected via
"Display type"
DISPLAY (in Ver.1, only possible when absolute value is selected) X
Bar graph meter • Add "Pointer category"
• Add "Image frame"
• Add image in "Alarm"
Scale • Add "Install to data side" on scale position X
Scale markings • Add "Windows font" X
Data • Add "Display range" X
• Add "Pointer category"
• Support image instrument
DISPLAY • Add "Start angle" X
Pie chart meter • Add "Image frame"
• Add image in "Alarm"
Scale • Add "Scale position" X

Meters/
Scale markings • Add "Windows font" X

Graphs
Data • Add "Display range" X
• Add "Pointer category"
DISPLAY
• Support image instrument
• Add "Image frame" X
Fan meter
• Add image in "Alarm"
Scale • Add "Scale position" X
Scale markings • Add "Windows font" X
Setting • Add "Image frame" X
Statistical graphs
Scale markings • Add "Windows font" X
• Modify maximum value (800 -> 900) to be set via "Display
Data X
data number"
Display range • Add "Display range" X
• Add "Image frame"
Trend Graph Graphs • Add "Alarm lower limit background color", "Alarm upper X
limit background color"
Scale • Add "Windows font" in scale value X
Store date/
• Add "Non-display value" X
Display control
XY chart Add a new rule X
Table Add a new rule 
• Support switch, lamp switch, lamp
Overall edit of part attribute setting 
• Perform overall edit via switch function unit
• Prompt display (image frame)
OTHER • Alarm display (image frame)
• Strip/round statistical chart (image frame)
FUNCTIO
Part Designer • Strip/round/fan shaped instrument (data part/image frame/ X
NS alarm)
• Orientation chart (image frame)
• XY chart (image frame)
Device Comments Add a new rule 
Operation Log Add a new rule X
APPENDICES

*1 in case of VT2 type edit, use/do not use add function

A-28 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


Item Description VT2*1
VT type setting Type • Add "VT3-X15" -
VT System • Add "Input locked" in warning prompt X
PLC
communication • Add "Designate device for connection confirmation" X
condition
• Add "Displaying operation log previewer image" in bit 4 of
System Memory expansion state in VT mode
Area • Add "Displaying operation log previewer image" in bit 4 of X
expansion display state in MT interchange mode
• Add "Value display part"
( "Key input: when determine without input value, return to
display mode"
"Underflow of float decimal point type real number is
Parts treated as 0" ) X
VT system • Add " Prompt display • alarm display part"
parameters ("Scrolling speed")
• Add "PLC data folder"
("When execute PLC data folder, buzzer should not sound")
Operation Log Add a new rule X
• Add "Memory capacity"
Memory Card X
• Add "Operation log" in "Save file name"
• Add "Output destination"
Resource Change into output both to printer and memory card
Printer • Change into, when pictbridge is selected in "Printer type", X
file format for print may be selected via "High level
setting"
• Add "PLC connection setting • connection state"
Other X
• Add "Device transmission"
Device Comments Add a new rule 
• Add "Memory capacity use rate"
Trend Graph Memory size • Change to set in the unit of 1% "Memory capacity overflow X
warning"
• Add "Memory capacity use rate"
Alarm Memory size • Change to set in the unit of 1% "Memory capacity overflow X
warning"
Windows font Overall logon • Add "Halfwidth katakana" X
Global function control Add a new rule X
All data
detection • Add "Device comments data" X

Data check • Modify limit value (1280 -> 1536) of "Number of PLC
device" (Base + total local windows)
• Modify limit value (32768 -> 49152) of "Overlap data X
capacity" (Base + total local windows/total Global window,
interrupt window)
• Improve display content of inspection result
Communi Inconsistent image data: display which image is inconsistent
PC VT Verify data X
cations Inconsistent system setting: display inconsistent setting via
classification unit of work space
• Add new "Docking navigator"
Edit Screen 
• Add new "Automatic conceal function"
*1 To edit VT2 type, use/do not use add function
APPENDICES

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-29


Change/Add VT STUDIO (Ver.2 -> Ver.3)

Item Description
Import screen • Add "Import screen" to file menu
File • To add check function to check ladder data and projects stored in the
Check ladder monitor data
memory card and internal ROM.
• Paste to the corordinate position of copy resource component when pasting
Copy
to the different pages with copy source
• Even if switch or light and numerical value display are included, the
Rotate/reverse
Edit configuration can also be inverted.

Screen attribute setting


• The function that backlight is not OFF automatically is added.
• Backlight color setting for VT3-W4M(A)/W4G(A) is added
Selection of components with cascade configuration • A function that allows to select the cascaded components individually is added
• Change shortcut icons.
• Part catalogue file is added
Part Catalog • Support download of part catalogue file
• Change to that the folder can be specified for saving user-defined part
catalogue file

Display size zoom in/out


• "Display all" is added.
• Changed to: display size can be changed according to 5% scale
Toolbar Communication • "Remote COM Port Tool" is added
Screen • "Unfold all" and "Fold all" is added into the right-clicking menu.
System Setting • "Unfold all" and "Fold all" is added into the right-clicking menu.
Workspace • "Copy", "Paste" and "Find" icons are added
Text string list
• Applicable to "Find/Replace"
• A function that allows to select "Set up text string upon drag-and-dropping"
Device Comments
from the device No. and the device comment is added
Display
• Changed to: even if the guide is set to "Hide" from "Display", it is possible to
Guideline memorize the setting contents
• "Guideline" icon is added into tool bar
• It is extended to switch screens by double-click the screen to be edited.
Cascade display other screens • System numeric auxiliary keyboard is added and some specifications have
been changed.
• "Save image"and "Copy to clipboard" icons are added.
View Mode
• The icon of backlight color switching for VT3-W4M(A)/W4G(A) is added
• A function that allows the page switching (page No. specifying) component to
Base screen
follow the reference destination page when the "Page No." is changed is added
• A function that allows the page switching (page No. specifying) component
Global window to follow the reference destination page when the "Global window ID" is
changed is added
Form screen • Change to: "VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A)" can be in gray status
• Maximum font size is extended from"128" to "512".
Text Outline text • Rotation angle can be extended by changing "Direction" of the character into "rotation"
• "Rotation/reverse" is added into right-clicking menu
Page switching • "Page move (+1)" and "Page move (-1)" are added
Switch
Switch/Lamp Enter by pressing keys • When "Key input destination" is "Text display", "Text selection" is added.
N status lamp • Add the function enabling to copy style/nameplate setting of a status in full status
• Maximum font size is extended from"128" to "512".
Numerical value Setting • Change to: "VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A)" is not applicable to "Stroke font"
display • Add the default setting of character/border/background to option
Enter by pressing keys • "System numerical auxiliary keyboard" is added
• Maximum font size is extended from"128" to "512".
Text display Setting
Basic component • Change to: "VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A)" is not applicable to "Stroke font"
Function control by devices Page switching • "Page move (+1)" and "Page move (-1)" are added

Message display Setting


• Maximum font size is extended from"128" to "512".
• Change to: "VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A)" is not applicable to "Stroke font"

Alarm display Setting


• Maximum font size is extended from"128" to "512".
• Change to: "VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A)" is not applicable to "Stroke font"
• Outline text can be created by dragging
Other functions Device Comments
• Support auto-loading of internal device/link device
• The serial link model with logged device comment in VT STUDIO is
changed to auto-logging of device comment when setting up PLC model
APPENDICES

A-30 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


Item Description
*1 • "Reset screen size according to resolution" is added into "Resolution option".
VT Model Setting
• "VT3-W4T*"º¢"VT3-W4M*/W4G*" is added into "Model"
VT System • Setting items related to "Small model setting" are added
VT system setting
Components • Setting items related to "System numerical auxiliary keyboard" are added

Device transferring
• When "High" speed of "Processing period" of "Device transfer start trigger"
Resourse is changed to "Medium" speed, "High" speed will further be increased
Global function control • "Page move (+1)" and "Page move (-1)" is added
PLC data folder • Data capacity for VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) is added
Ladder monitor data • To add generation function to generate the ladder monitor data.
Data check Version check • The function of checking screen data and system program version is added
PC -> VT Send data • It can be changed to be able to send fonts corresponding to GB2313 required for China.
PC -> VT Send screen data differences • Ease the limit when sending differentials
Receive operation program • The function of receiving "Operation record" data is added
Communications
VT -> PC Receive Receive trend chart • The function of receiving "Trend" data is added
data Receive alarm log • The function of receiving "Alarm log" data is added
Receive screen image • The function of capturing and receiving screen displayed on touch panel is added
• Change to "Double click", and "Screen attribute setting" window can appear
• It can be changed to scroll screens in editing by dragging mouse under the
Edit Screen staus of right-clicking.
• Add the function of "Smooth reset size" to keep the surfaces of components
from damage when zooming in/out components.
• Applicable to Windows Vista(32bit)
Others • Change to that internal device list can be referred when setting up device
• Improve style selection method
*1 When VT model is changed between VT3-W4T (A)/W4M (A)/W4G (A) and VT3/VT2 series other than that, items of
which settings have been changed will exist, and in some cases, change cannot be performed.
The items to be changed when changing from VT3/VT2 series to VT3-W4T (A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A).

Item Description
Stroke fonts • Change stroke fonts on components to bitmap fonts.
Form screen • Form screen will be deleted when form screen is set
VT system setting (buzzer volume) • When volume of the buzzer is set to "High", "Medium" or "Low", it will be changed to "High".
PLC model setting • PLC connection port is disabled
PLC communication conditions • Communication speed will change to 115.2kbps when exceeding the speed of 115.2kbps.
MultiTalk • All devices set to PLC_B with MmltiTalk will become unset devices.
Barcode • The selected status of "Bar code" for "VT system setting" can be removed by selecting it.

When changing from VT3/VT2 series to VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) is impossible.


Item Description
• VT model can not be set to VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) when connecting with PLC as the following paths.
PLC model setting • Ethernet connection
• Other models not applicable to VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A)
PLC data folder • VT model can not be set to VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) when the capacity of PLC data folder exceeds 75k bytes.

VT model can not be set to VT3-W4T(A)/W4M(A)/W4G(A) when the capacity of PLC data folder exceeds 75k bytes.
Item Description
• When the switch area is set below 16 x 16 points, it will be initialized to the default switch area (16 x 16 points).
Switch Area
• Please initialize according to configurated components when changing switch areas.
Backlight color • Initialize backlight color setting.
PLC model setting • Change connection port to Port2 on PLC. (Port4 when using Megalink)
APPENDICES

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-31


Change/Add VT STUDIO (Ver.3 -> Ver.4)

Item Description
• Menu-only import function is expanded to include the import of system
Import settings etc, the name is changed from "Menu Import" -> "Import" (the
File model is only limited to VT3 series)
Set printing • Add global function key as the object
• Add "System Setting"in the "Search Scope"
Search
• Add"Selected Object" in the "Menu"of "Search Scope"
Registered as initial setting
• Add "Registered As Initial Setting of the Part Attribute"
of the Part Attribute
Edit
• Add dimension of the parts in the "Part Attribute"
Option settings
• "Nameplate"in the "Part Attribute" is divided into ON/OFF nameplate
• Add settings on the pattern modifier for switching whether nameplate
character attribute is changed
• Name is changed from "Directory" to "Part Directory"
Part directory • Add button onto the pattern modifier for switching whether nameplate
character attribute is changed
Menu directory • Add "Menu Directory"
View
Toolbar
• Add "Function Key" in the "Switch Indicator Lamp"
• Add "Menu Directory" in the "View"
• Add "Multiple ON""Multiple OFF" in the right-click menu of "Character
Work area
String List"
• Add "VNC Key Switch"" Expanded Command Communication" into switch
function
• Add "Sensor Setup Backup"" Sensor Setup Restore"" sensor monitor" in
Switch indicator lamp "System Menu Call" of the switch function
• Add"VNC Key Switch"" Expanded Command Communication" into the
Part "Key Input" of switch function
• Add"Function Key"
• Add "Expanded Command Communication" into "Device-Based Function
Basic part Control"
• Add "VNC Display" part
Form part • Improve operability of the form part
• Add "PLC time synchronization"
VT system settings
• Add "Upper limit of extended number of images" in the "Other"
Global function switch • Add "Global Function Key"
Resource
• "PLC Data Folder Edit Tool" supports the reading and display of input
PLC data folder auxiliary information
• "PLC Data Folder Edit Tool", so imporve operability
System memory • Add "Displaying Sensor Setup Backup Menu""Displaying Sensor Setup
Expansion state
area Restore Menu""Displaying Sensor Monitor Menu"bit
Safety/PL method
Barbola
measures
• Change the design according to the up-to-date specification
Operating • Add Windows7(32 bit) support
Support OS
environment • Delete Winodws98SE/Me support

Change/Add VT STUDIO (Ver.4 -> Ver.5)

Item Description
VT system • "ESC/P-R Ether" and "ESC/Page Ether" printer types were added (for use
Resources Printer
settings only when the VT3 series and printer are connected via Ethernet)
• Windows 8 support was added
Operating environment
• Windows 2000 support was removed
APPENDICES

A-32 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


MEMO

APPENDICES

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-33


5 Index
An index of definitions used in this manual. They are arranged in the alphabetical sequence.
Application Example of Worksheets ..........................16-88
A
About Calculation Precision on Worksheets B
and Data Format Conversion Rules ...................... 16-26
About Compatibility ....................................................... 1-3 Barcode .....................................................................12-24
About Compatibility with VT1 Data............................ 15-12 Batch Edition of the Part Attributes............................11-36
About Conversion Rules ............................................. 11-6 Batch-change Device ................................................12-52
About Devices ............................................................. 6-25 Behavior When an Error Occurs during Worksheet
About Ethernet Connection ......................................... 17-2 Execution...............................................................16-39
About Fonts ................................................................. 6-23 Bit (CHOOSE) ...........................................................16-46
About Indirect References........................................... 6-43 Bit (IF)........................................................................16-57
About Operations during Changing Display Blink control .................................................................7-13
Text Strings............................................................ 11-31 BLK................................................................................6-3
About PLC Data Folder Data....................................... 15-5
About Scale Layout ................................................... 10-21
C
About scales.............................................................. 10-27
About Setting of VT System ...................................... 12-12 Calculation........................................................6-49, 16-21
About settings of alarm display ................................... 9-54 Calculation Precision and Data Format
About Specifying Text Color by Device ....................... 9-28 Conversion Rules ....................................................6-56
About System Memory Area ....................................... 14-2 Calculation Setting Example........................................6-61
About Text Codes ........................................................ 6-24 Call Up Screen ............................................................11-2
About Text String Data................................................. 9-27 Canceling Selection.......................................................4-7
About the Data Check ............................................... 16-28 Capture the operation Log.........................................11-46
About the data compatibility between VT2 and Cautions for Indirect References .................................6-48
VT3........................................................................ 15-12 Cautions in Calculations ..............................................6-60
About the Shift JIS and UNICODE Versions ................. 1-8 Cells...........................................................................16-11
About Touch Switches ................................................... 6-7 Change device...........................................................15-18
About Trend image Settings...................................... 10-29 Change Key Entry Order .............................................4-21
About UNICODE ......................................................... 6-24 Change/Add VT STUDIO (Ver.2 -> Ver.3) .................. A-30
About Unusable Characters ........................................A-20 Change/Add VT STUDIO (Ver.3 -> Ver.4) .................. A-32
About Various Display Functions................................... 5-2 Changing data ................................................13-34, 15-19
About Worksheet Settings........................................... 16-3 Changing display character strings ...........................12-22
About Worksheets ....................................................... 16-2 Changing Display Text Strings......................... 11-18, A-10
Active Edit ................................................ 5-26, 11-32, A-8 Changing the Switch Area ...........................................4-20
Adding and Modifying Options ............................ 1-2, A-23 Changing/Adding of VT STUDIO (Ver.1->Ver.2)......... A-27
Adding devices .......................................................... 13-35 Changing/Adding of VT2 BUILDER Ver.3->
Adding Switch Functions .................................... 8-33, 8-37 VT STUDIO Ver.1 ................................................... A-23
Advanced settings ....................................................... 12-6 Classification of alarm contents...................................9-56
Alarm ........................................................................... 3-26 Close .............................................................................3-7
Alarm range/base ...................................................... 10-75 Color selection...............................................................6-2
Alarm System Settings ................................................ 9-82 Color Selection and BLK ...............................................6-2
All data ................................................13-12, 13-21, 13-27 Color/image frame ..............................................9-39, 9-70
All Data Check........................................................... 12-46 Comment .....................................................................16-9
Application example .... 16-43, 16-45, 16-47, 16-49, 16-51, Common ......................................................................3-23
16-53, 16-56, 16-59, 16-62, 16-64, 16-67, 16-69, 16-72, Communication Between PC (VT STUDIO) and
16-74, 16-76, 16-78, 16-80, 16-82, 16-84, 16-87 VT3 ..........................................................................13-2
Application example 2:display the bar graph............. 16-90 Communication Condition .........................................12-15
Application example 3:set relay as ON Communications..........................................................5-13
at PM5:00(17:00) of every Friday. ......................... 16-91 Communications port...................................................13-4
APPENDICES

Application example 4:output from KL according to Communications Settings............................................13-4


the value of barcode.............................................. 16-93 Comparing VTS Files ..................................................3-18

A-34 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


Compatibility among Different Versions ........................ 1-7 Edit Window...................................................................2-2
Configuration of Edit Window and Screens................... 2-2 Edit windows 1, 2 and 3...............................................5-25
Connection Test .......................................................... 13-9 Editing Graphics ............................................................4-2
Constant ...................................................................... 16-9 Editing PLC Data Folder Data ...................................15-13
Continuously Selecting Objects..................................... 4-7 Editing the Content of Messages........................9-45, 9-46
Control/Edit ................................................................. 5-11 Effect .............................................................................7-8
Copy .............................................................................. 4-9 Enter record No./comment ........................................15-18
Copy/Paste a Cell ..................................................... 11-12 Entry of register characters .......................................12-37
Cover setting ............................................................... 3-24 Error Message Lists...................................................... A-2
Creating selector switches ........................................ 11-28 Example 1:display in parallel the superintendents and
Cross-reference ........................................................ 12-45 production capacity according to the production
Current Page Check.................................................. 12-48 sequence. ..............................................................16-88
Cut................................................................................. 4-9 Example of a log display..............................................9-94
Example on a numerical value display ........................6-46
Example when displaying in real time .........................9-92
D
Examples of displaying operation method as
Data.......................................................10-2, 10-33, 10-65 messages for each machine....................................9-51
Data Check................................................................ 12-46 Examples of displays when selecting an item in a list to
Delete .......................................................................... 4-10 display the detailed contents ...................................9-52
Deleting devices ........................................................ 13-35 Examples of How to Use Alarm Displays ....................9-92
Describe how to set up an Ethernet connection.......... 17-5 Execute the PLC Data Folder....................................15-22
Details of MT Compatible Mode ................................ 14-12 Executed under the RUN mode of the VT3 Series....15-22
Details of VT Mode...................................................... 14-5 Executed Under the System Mode of
Device comment list .................................................... 5-21 the VT3 Series.......................................................15-39
Device Comments ........................................... 11-38, A-12 Exit...............................................................................3-22
Device comments/Workspace ..................................... 4-28 Exiting from the communication ................................13-36
Device No.................................................................... 5-27 Exiting simulator ........................................................13-36
Device ON/OFF Display .............................................. 5-27 Export CSV files ........................................................15-20
Device Transfer ......................................................... 12-38 Extended alarm ...........................................................9-58
Device transfer ............................................................ 3-28 Extended trends ........................................................10-30
DISPLAY ..................................................................... 4-23
Display (Circle Sector meter) .................................... 10-11 F
Display control.................................................. 7-15, 9-110
Display example when displaying File...............................................................................4-22
how to remedy alarms............................................. 9-96 File Log........................................................................3-22
Display items ............................................................... 9-68 File Manager..................................................................3-2
Display List of Operation Log and the Edit Window.... 11-48 Find............................................................................15-19
Display record comments.......................................... 15-26 Flip horizontal/Flip vertical ...........................................4-16
Display(bar image meter) ............................................ 10-4 Flow Up to Execution of PLC Data Folders .................15-4
Displaying Cross-references ..................................... 12-45 Fonts Available on the VT3 .........................................6-23
Displaying Interrupt Windows by PLCs ..................... 14-24 Form Printing .............................................................11-13
Displaying List of Used Devices ................................ 16-30 Frame ........................................................................9-102
During Communications with VT and Function switch settings ..............................................8-46
When Performing the Data Check ............................A-4 Function Switch Settings (Only for Handy Series).......8-46
During Printing or Printing of RTF Files.......................A-12 Functions (ABS, AVERAGE, CHOOSE, ...)...............16-25

E G
Edit Apex ..................................................................... 4-30 Global Function Control....................................3-28, 12-43
Edit base ..................................................................... 5-25 Global function control check ....................................12-50
APPENDICES

Edit Callup Screen ...................................................... 4-20 Global Function Control Settings...............................12-43


Edit Functions ............................................................... 4-6 Global Function Switch................................................3-26

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-35


Global Function Switch (Only for Handy Series) ....... 12-62
Global function switch settings .................................. 12-62
K
Graphic Attribute Control Restrictions ......................... 7-12
Graphic Attribute Controls ........................................... 7-12 Kanji Conversion Mode ...............................................9-29
Graphics ...................................................................... 5-10 Key entry ....................................... 9-11, 9-41, 9-77, 10-82
Group .......................................................................... 4-14 Key Entry Order...........................................................6-15
Grouping ..................................................................... 4-14 Key Entry Part Modes..................................................6-10
Guide line .................................................................... 5-23 Key Entry Part Modes When the Screen is
Guideline ..................................................................... 5-14 Displayed.................................................................6-11
Key Entry Parts............................................................6-10

H Key entry/cursor ........................................................10-49


Key/Barcode entry .......................................................9-20
Handy Functions Provided by the Worksheet KL ..............................................................................12-23
Editing Tool............................................................ 16-32
Help .............................................................................A-17
L
How This Manual Is Organized ..................................... 1-3
How to Change Display Text Strings ......................... 11-29 Label............................................................................5-26
How to Display Interrupt Windows in Ladder Monitor ............................................................18-2
the VT Mode.......................................................... 14-25 Ladder Monitor Data..................................................12-59
How to Draw and Edit with VT STUDIO ........................ 1-2 Ladder Monitor Data Verification .................................3-20
How to Install............................................................... 1-11 Line attribute control ....................................................7-16
How to Operate PLC Data Folder Editing Tool.......... 15-17 Line Attribute Settings ...................................................6-5
How to Operate Simulator ......................................... 13-32 Line Type Selection .......................................................6-4
How to Set Cells.......................................................... 16-8 Link Device ..................................................................6-36
How to Set Change Display Text Strings................... 11-19 Linking devices ..........................................................13-34
How to Setup Ethernet ................................................ 17-3 List of call screens .....................................................12-59
How to Switch Pages in the VT Mode ....................... 14-17 List of Connection Destinations ...................................13-5
How to Turn Windows ON/OFF in the VT Mode ....... 14-21 List of Device Comments...........................................11-41
How to view the Editing Tool screen.......................... 15-17 List of Functions ........................................................16-41
How to View the Simulator Screen............................ 13-33 List of register character ID .......................................12-34
List of Screen call ......................................................12-58

I List of Shortcut Key Commands ................................. A-18


List of the Operation Log ...........................................11-47
Image Setting ................................................................ 7-5 Load DXF File..............................................................11-5
images............................................................ 10-41, 10-77 Load DXF file...............................................................11-5
Import ............................................................................ 3-9 Loading Device Comments .......................................11-38
Import CSV files ........................................................ 15-21 Loading VT1 Files..........................................................3-6
Importing Worksheets ............................................... 16-34 Loading VT2 Files..........................................................3-5
Importing/exporting messages .................................... 9-48
In the Simulator ...........................................................A-12
M
Indirect Reference ....................................................... 6-43
Indirect Reference Setting Examples .......................... 6-46 Make a Table ...............................................................11-8
Input .......................................................................... 16-18 Memo...........................................................................5-27
Input/display range .................................................... 10-74 Memory Card.............................................................12-25
Install USB Driver in Windows 10/8/7/Vista................. 1-15 Message ......................................................................3-27
Install USB driver in Windows XP ............................... 1-15 Message Display Examples ........................................9-51
Installation of USB Driver ............................................ 1-15 Message List ...............................................................9-45
Installation of VT STUDIO ........................................... 1-10 Models types that can use VT STUDIO
Installing Remote COM Port Tool ................................ 1-14 to draw and edit .........................................................1-2
Installing VT STUDIO .................................................. 1-12 Move..............................................................................4-2
APPENDICES

Internal Annotation of Float (real numbers)................. 9-16 Move backward ...........................................................4-15


Items Selectable in the Device Setting Field ............... 6-37 Move forward...............................................................4-15

A-36 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


Move to back ............................................................... 4-15
Move to front ............................................................... 4-15 P
MT Compatible Mode ................................................ 14-11
Page Configuration......................................................3-29
MT Compatible Mode List ......................................... 14-11
Page Configuration Management.................... 12-53, A-11
Multiple copy ............................................................... 4-12
Part Catalog......................................................... 5-2, A-11
Multiple Program Startups ................................. 11-35, A-3
Parts .................................................................5-10, 12-21
Parts attribute ..............................................................4-24
N Parts Attribute Settings................................................4-19
Password...................................................................12-17
New Screen................................................................. 12-2 Paste ...........................................................................4-10
New(N) .......................................................................... 3-2 PC -> VT Send Screen Data Differences ..................13-19
Normal alarm............................................................... 9-57 PC -> VT Send Data..................................................13-12
Normal Alarm, Extended Alarm................................... 9-57 PC <--> VT Verify Data ..............................................13-27
Normal trends............................................................ 10-30 Place/Align...................................................................4-16
Normal Trends/Extended Trends ................... 10-29, 10-64 Placing Function Control by Devices.........................9-111
Not used ...................................................................... 16-8 Placing Screen Callups ...............................................11-4
Notes ......................................................................... 11-12 Plane attribute control..................................................7-17
Notes about drawing and editing with Plane Attribute Settings .................................................6-6
VT2-speicific files ...................................................... 1-2 PLC Communication Setup .........................................17-3
Notify screen switching ............................................... 12-5 PLC Data Folder (Recipe Function) ............................15-2
PLC data folder data........................... 13-16, 13-22, 13-29
PLC Data Folder Editing Tool ....................................15-14
O
PLC Data Folder Editing Tool Menu ..........................15-15
Object Selection Frame and Selection Handles............ 4-7 PLC Data Folder Editing Tool Related ........................ A-13
Open ............................................................................. 3-4 PLC Data Folder Precautions....................................15-11
Operating Environment ................................................. 1-9 PLC devices ..............................................................16-14
Operating Log File Loading ......................................... 3-19 PLC Model Settings..........................................12-11, 17-3
Operating log list ......................................................... 5-21 PLC time synchronization..........................................12-29
Operation Basics ........................................................... 4-2 PLC-Based Page Switching ......................................14-17
Operation Log ........................................ 11-44, 12-22, A-9 Position control .................................................7-19, 9-105
Operation program receive ....................................... 13-23 Position/Size................................................................5-13
Operations in Page Configuration Precautions about Loading device comments...........11-41
Management ......................................................... 12-53 Precautions for install ..................................................1-10
Option Settings................................................. 4-22, 13-36 Precautions on Communication Between
Order ........................................................................... 4-15 PC (VT STUDIO) and VT3 ......................................13-3
Other .....................................................4-29, 12-31, 16-40 Precautions when Handling Worksheets ...................16-39
Outline of Changing Display Text Strings .................. 11-18 Precautions When Using USB.....................................1-15
Outline of Interrupt Windows ..................................... 14-24 Preparations for Communication Between
Outline of Message Displays....................................... 9-36 PC & VT3 ................................................................13-2
Outline Text Logo Settings ............................................ 7-8 Preparations for Communication Between
Output Screen Data BMP File ..................................... 3-31 PC (VT STUDIO) and VT3 ......................................13-2
Overlap Other Screen ................................................. 5-26 Preparing the Simulator .............................................13-30
Overview ................................... 10-28, 10-62, 11-44, 17-2 Preparion for installation ..............................................1-10
Overview of Alarm Display .......................................... 9-54 Preview......................9-15, 9-26, 9-42, 9-81, 10-21, 10-27
Overview of Device Comment................................... 11-38 Print ....................................................................3-23, 3-31
Overview of Device Transfer ..................................... 12-38 Print Preview ...............................................................3-31
Overview of Global Function Control......................... 12-43 Print Settings ...............................................................3-23
Overview of Ladder Monitor ........................................ 18-2 Printer ........................................................................12-26
Overview of VT Internal Devices and Printing Alarm Logs .....................................................9-98
VT Link Devices ...................................................... 6-27 Procedures before Starting Ladder Monitor.................18-4
APPENDICES

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-37


Selecting Individual Objects ..........................................4-6
R Selecting Key Entry Parts by Switches........................6-16
Selecting Object Groups................................................4-6
Range........................................................................ 10-39
Selecting Objects (graphics)..........................................4-6
Range/Alarm ................................................................. 9-8
Selection of Colors and Line Types ...............................6-2
Read from Memory Card............................................. 3-14
Send/Receive of PLC Data Folder Data ....................15-21
Read PLC data from a specific record No................. 15-32
Sending .......................................................................13-4
Receive alarm log ..................................................... 13-25
Set grid ........................................................................5-22
Receive screen image............................................... 13-26
Set the Operation Log ...............................................11-46
Receive trend chart ................................................... 13-24
Set Up an Ethernet Connection Using
Redisplaying devices ................................................ 13-35
the Edit Screen ........................................................17-5
Redo.............................................................................. 4-9
Setting ....................7-9, 9-2, 9-17, 9-37, 9-60, 9-83, 10-22
Register a Part in a Cell ............................................ 11-11
Setting Alarm Displays .......................................9-54, 9-60
Register character ..................................................... 12-35
Setting Animation Display..........................................9-102
Register part attribute as default settings.................... 4-19
Setting Bitmap Text......................................................7-10
Regroup ...................................................................... 4-14
Setting BMP File Switching .......................................9-140
Remote COM Port Tool ............................................. 13-37
Setting Calculation.......................................................6-51
Restrictions ................................................................. 2-14
Setting Decorative Frame..............................................7-6
Restrictions in the Number of Pages and
Setting Decorative Frames ............................................7-6
Number of Screens ................................................. 2-14
Setting Display Text Strings .......................................11-20
Restrictions on PLC data folder data size ................... 15-8
Setting Extended Functions................................8-35, 8-37
Restrictions When Making Screens ............................ 2-14
Setting Function Control by Devices .........................9-111
Restrictions/Notices for Device Transfer ................... 12-40
Setting Graphic Attribute Controls ...............................7-12
Restrictions/Notices for Global Function Control....... 12-44
Setting Graphics .....................................................7-2, 7-3
Rotate/Flip ................................................................... 4-16
Setting Lamp Switch....................................................8-36
Ruled Line Creation .................................................... 11-7
Setting Lamp Switches ................................................8-36
Run Ethernet PLC Data Folders.................................. 17-6
Setting Lamps..............................................................8-38
Setting Memos.............................................................7-11
S Setting Message Displays ...........................................9-36
Setting message displays............................................9-36
Safety Precautions ........................................................ 1-1
Setting Meters .............................................................10-2
Save .............................................................................. 3-8
Setting Methods...........................................................6-38
Save as/Compress and Save........................................ 3-8
Setting Mode of IF Function ......................................16-65
Scale ....................................... 10-19, 10-25, 10-45, 10-79
Setting N State Parts ...................................................8-41
Scale Display .............................................................. 5-24
Setting Nameplates .......................................................8-2
Scale markings............................................... 10-20, 10-26
Setting Numerical Value Displays..................................9-2
Scaling Graphics ........................................................... 4-3
Setting of Animation Display......................................9-102
Schematic drawing of alarm display............................ 9-54
Setting of cross-key .....................................................8-45
Screen .........................................................3-30, 5-9, 5-15
Setting of Cross-key (only for VT3-V7R) .....................8-45
Screen attribute settings ............................................. 4-18
Setting of Devices........................................................6-37
Screen catalog .............................................................. 5-5
Setting of N State Lamp...............................................8-39
Screen Configuration .................................................... 2-5
Setting of N state lamp ................................................8-39
Screen Configuration Management .......................... 12-53
Setting Outline Text .......................................................7-7
Screen Data ................................................... 13-14, 13-28
Setting Statistical images...........................................10-22
Screen setting (form screen screen) ........................... 12-8
Setting Style...................................................................8-5
Screen settings (screen, global windows) ................... 12-2
Setting Styles and Nameplates......................................8-2
Scroll Edit Window ...................................................... 5-24
Setting Switches ............................................................8-9
Seach result list ........................................................... 5-17
Setting System Memory Area......................................14-3
Search ......................................................................... 4-11
Setting Text Displays ...................................................9-17
Select all...................................................................... 4-10
Setting the communications port ...............................13-32
Select and Edit Screen................................................ 5-24
APPENDICES

Setting the Style and Nameplate of N State Lamps.......8-7


Select one from many ................................................... 4-8
Setting Trend images......................................10-28, 10-32
Select one from the Cascaded Components................. 4-8
Setting Video Displays.................................................9-99
A-38 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -
Setting Worksheets ..................................................... 16-6 To read PLC data to a specified record No................15-34
Settings ....................................................................... 8-41 To save data that is read from the PLC as
Settings of device transfer......................................... 12-38 a new record..........................................................15-30
Simulator ................................................................... 13-30 To set up the devices for the Ethernet connection.......17-5
Simulator Menu ......................................................... 13-31 To write a specific record No. to a PLC .....................15-24
Single-number calculation/Multiple-number To write data of a matching record No.
calculation ............................................................... 6-50 after searching for a record comment....................15-28
Size of PLC Data Folder Data ..................................... 15-8 To write data of a specific record No. to the PLC ......15-22
Software License Agreement ........................................ 1-2 Tool bar..........................................................................5-8
Standard ........................................................................ 5-8 Trend Graph ................................................................3-26
Starting communications ........................................... 13-32 Trend image (real time) System Settings .......10-57, 10-58
Starting Up Simulator ................................................ 13-31 Trend image Precautions...........................................10-56
Starting Up the Worksheet Editing Tool....................... 16-6 Turning Windows ON/OFF by PLCs..........................14-21
Startup of the COM Port Tool .................................... 13-37 Type of alarm display...................................................9-55
State ............................................................................ 8-42 Type of Calculation ......................................................6-49
Status bar .................................................................... 5-14 Types of Graphics and Drawing Graphics .....................7-2
Store date/Display control .............................. 10-55, 10-83 Types of trend images ...............................................10-28
String (CHOOSE) ...................................................... 16-50 Types of XY images...................................................10-62
String (MATCH) ......................................................... 16-73
Structure of PLC Data Folders .................................... 15-2
U
Structure of VT Internal Devices and
VT Link Devices ...................................................... 6-28 Undo ..............................................................................4-9
Switch Area ................................................................. 5-23 Ungroup.......................................................................4-14
Switch grid/Grid ........................................................... 5-22 Unusable character in file name saved in
Switch/Lamp.................................................................. 5-9 memory card .......................................................... A-20
Switching the Key Entry Part Mode Using the operation records ......................................11-45
by PLC Devices....................................................... 6-17
Switching the Key Entry Part Mode
by Touch Switches .................................................. 6-12 V
Symbols ...................................................................... 1-15
Verify with Memory Card .............................................3-17
System Font .............................................................. 13-18
Version Check ...........................................................12-51
System Memory Area....................................... 12-16, 14-2
Video .........................................................................12-27
System Program ....................................................... 13-17
View .............................................................................5-12
System Setting ..............................................................A-9
View Mode ...................................................................5-28
System setting............................................................. 5-17
VNC Display Settings ................................................9-144
System Settings of XY image (real-time) .................. 10-84
VNC Server ...............................................................12-28
VNC server settings...................................................9-145
T VT -> PC Receive Data .............................................13-21
VT Internal Device .......................................................6-29
Table............................................................................ 11-8 VT Mode ......................................................................14-4
Target (reference) Devices .......................................... 6-25 VT Mode List ...............................................................14-4
Terminology ................................................................. 1-15 VT Model Setting .........................................................12-9
Text attribute control .................................................... 7-18 VT System .................................................................12-12
Text Codes Available on the VT3 ................................ 6-24 VT System Parameters .............................................12-12
Text string (IF) ........................................................... 16-62 VT system settings ......................................................3-25
Text string list .............................................................. 5-19 VT Timer ....................................................................12-30
The batch edition of the switch function units............ 11-37 VT/PLC model settings..................................................3-2
The contents recorded in the operation records........ 11-51 VT1/VT2/VTS Files........................................................1-3
The Relation Between the Contents of
the Operation Log and Memory Capacity ............. 11-49
APPENDICES

To read PLC data to a matching record No.


after searching for a record comment ................... 15-37

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-39


W
When Changing Target PLC .........................................A-4
When changing target VT..............................................A-3
When Connecting Over Ethernet ................................A-10
When Editing Screens...................................................A-7
When Loading DXF Format Files ..................................A-8
When Sending the System Program .............................A-6
When Setting Options ...................................................A-8
When starting UP/Shutting Down VT STUDIO and
Opening/Closing Files ...............................................A-2
Windows Font ........................................................... 12-34
Windows font............................................................... 3-27
Windows Font Setting ............................................... 12-34
Word (CHOOSE)....................................................... 16-48
Word (IF) ................................................................... 16-60
Word (MATCH).......................................................... 16-70
Worksheet (settings) ................................................... 3-29
Worksheet Editing Tool Menu...................................... 16-7
Worksheet Function .................................................. 16-41
Worksheet Related......................................................A-16
Worksheet Restrictions ............................................... 16-4
Worksheet System Settings ...................................... 16-36
Worksheets OverDisplay............................................. 16-2
Workspace ........................................................ 5-15, A-10
Write to Memory Card ................................................. 3-15

X
XY image Precautions............................................... 10-84
XY image Settings..................................................... 10-62
XY image settings ..................................................... 10-64
APPENDICES

A-40 - VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) -


MEMO

APPENDICES

- VT STUDIO Ver.7 Reference Manual (VT3 Series) - A-41


Revision History
Printing Date Version Details of Revision

Jan 2009 Initial version


Apr 2009 2nd version
Aug 2009 3rd version
Aug 2010 5th version
Jan 2011 7th version
Nov 2011 9th version
Jan 2013 10th version
Jun 2013 11th version
May 2015 13th version
Nov 2015 14th version
Mar 2016 15th version
Mar 2016 16th version
Jun 2016 17th version
Nov 2016 18th version
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS
(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1)
year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were
used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products
would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to
KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon
examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace
at no charge any Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from
any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair,
unauthorized modification, misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat,
coldness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it
is Buyer's responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use. KEYENCE will not be
responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples ("Products/Samples") supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in
humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications
state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE
assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from
any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS,
LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR
TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS
ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST
BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not
apply.

BUYER'S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:


If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide
such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written
information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.

E 1101-3
Copyright (c) 2008 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 1509E 1116-18 1509E Printed in Japan

Вам также может понравиться